Rewriting Dialectal Arabic Prehistory: The Ancient Egyptian Lexical Evidence 9004472126, 9789004472129, 2021040457, 2021040458, 9789004472136

Citation preview

Rewriting Dialectal Arabic Prehistory

Studies in Semitic Languages and Linguistics Editorial Board Aaron D. Rubin and Ahmad Al-Jallad

volume 105

The titles published in this series are listed at brill.com/ssl

Rewriting Dialectal Arabic Prehistory The Ancient Egyptian Lexical Evidence By

Alexander Borg

LEIDEN | BOSTON

Detail from the Procession of the Aamu, from the north wall of the Tomb of Khnumhotep II (BH 3, 19th century BCE) in Beni Hassan, Egypt. Public domain. The Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data is available online at https://catalog.loc.gov LC record available at https://lccn.loc.gov/2021040457 LC ebook record available at https://lccn.loc.gov/2021040458

Typeface for the Latin, Greek, and Cyrillic scripts: “Brill”. See and download: brill.com/brill-typeface. ISSN 0081-8461 ISBN 978-90-04-47212-9 (hardback) ISBN 978-90-04-47213-6 (e-book) Copyright 2021 by Alexander Borg. Published by Koninklijke Brill NV, Leiden, The Netherlands. Koninklijke Brill NV incorporates the imprints Brill, Brill Nijhoff, Brill Hotei, Brill Sense, Brill Schöningh, Brill Fink, Brill mentis, Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht, Böhlau Verlag and V&R Unipress. Koninklijke Brill NV reserves the right to protect this publication against unauthorized use. Requests for re-use and/or translations must be addressed to Koninklijke Brill NV via brill.com or copyright.com. This book is printed on acid-free paper and produced in a sustainable manner.

Contents Acknowledgments vii Abbreviations and Symbols viii Introduction 1 1 Aim and Scope of the Glossary 1 2 Prehistory of Arabic 11 3 Diachronic Approaches to Arabic 18 4 Ancient Egyptian and Arabic 21 5 Linguistic Archaeology 22 6 From Etymology to History 25 7 Ancient Egypt and Western Arabia 31 8 A Paradigm Shift in Arabic Dialectology 34 9 From Ancient Egyptian to Old Arabic 37 10 Cognitive Approaches to the Lexicon 41 11 Summing Up 44 References 49 Glossary (Ancient Egyptian – Arabic) 75 ʾ 77 B 84 T 99 Θ 103 Ǧ 104 Ḥ 117 X 136 D 154 Đ 162 R 164 Z 175 S 181 Š 200 Ṣ 217 Ḍ 222 Ṭ 224 Ɖ̣  228 ʿ 230

vi

Contents

Ġ  243 F 250 Q 261 K 276 L 290 M 304 N 318 H 337 W 343 Y 363 Index 365

Acknowledgments The conceptual framework at the basis of the present study linking the pre­ history of Arabic to Ancient Egyptian was elaborated in the course of a stint of comparative linguistic research conducted under the auspices of an Alexander von Humboldt fellowship at the University of Leipzig in 2015, whose initial results have been published in WZKM 109. I here renew my thanks to the Humboldt Foundation for its continued generous support of my research into the history of the Arabic language, and to Prof. Ekkehard Schulz at the Oriental Institute of the University of Leipzig for his sponsorship of my research project. I am also indebted to Prof. Hans-Werner Fischer-Elfert at this university’s Institute of Egyptology for his collegial support and for access to the institute library. This work’s specific focus on the internal history of dialectal Arabic rests on recognition of the latter’s pivotal function in the mammoth task of embarking on a prehistory of this ancient and important world language. The present pioneering glossary is a modest initial step towards the attainment of that grand design. My involvement in this research domain has long been animated by the insights and encouragement I experienced in the course of my doctoral studies at the Hebrew University of Jerusalem under the guidance of the late Prof. Haim Blanc. The comparatist engaged in research involving the Arabic vernaculars is dependent on the quality and scope of the ethnolinguistic sources at his disposal. Documentation of the Arabic Sprachraum has been tangibly enriched in the course of the last few decades by the endeavours of field researchers delving into native speech patterns across the Arab world. The present venture owes its inspiration in no small measure to the industry of Dr. Peter Behnstedt, whose original and stimulating documentation of the Yemenite lexicon, in particular, has been frequently and profitably utilized throughout the present research. For inclusion of this volume into the present Brill monograph series I am profoundly indebted to Prof. Aaron Rubin of Penn State University and his coeditor Prof. Ahmad Al-Jallad of Ohio State University. Dr. Beata Sheyhatovitch of Tel-Aviv University earned my profound thanks for her technical assistance in the task of readying the final text. I also express my sincere gratitude to the two anonymous readers of my MS for their encouraging constructive comments and recommendations, and to the Brill linguists Elisa Perotti and Jorik Groen, whose brisk and efficient handling of my monograph facilitated its preparation for publication.

Abbreviations and Symbols act. part. active participle Akkad Akkadian Ar Arabic BD Book of the Dead caus. causative verb form cf. compare coll. collective dim diminutive Dyn. Dynasty Ebers Ebers papyrus f feminine fn footnote Ge Geʿez Gr Hellenistic period Ḥar Ḥarsūsī Heb Hebrew id. same meaning as the preceding (Lat. idem) inf infinitive interj. interjection Jibb Jibbālī LE Late Egyptian Mah Mahrī Mand Mandaean ME Middle Egyptian medical papyrus Med MK Middle Kingdom mult. multiplication n. noun n.u. nomen unitatis (unit noun) NWS North West Semitic OK Old Kingdom own obs. own observation pp perfect participle prep. preposition pron. suff. pronominal suffix pl plural Pyr Pyramid text

Abbreviations and Symbols Sab Sabaean Saf Safaitic Soq Soqoṭrī Sum Sumerian Taym Taymanic Tham Thamudic Ugar Ugaritic Urk. Urkunden vn verbal noun ⟨…⟩ enclose orthographic representations /…/ enclose phonological representations […] enclose phonetic representations derives etymologically from/yields {…} morphophonemic representations ~ cognate/dialectal variant

AA AAE AJSLL AO ARA BDB BO BSL BSOAS CAD CDA CE CO CSD DAF DLE DUL EALL EB EVO GBS

Bibliographical Abbreviations American Anthropologist Arabian Archaeology and Epigraphy American Journal of Semitic Languages and Literatures Aula Orientalis Annual Review of Anthropology A Hebrew and English Lexicon of the Old Testament Bibliotheca Orientalis Bulletin de la Société linguistique de Paris Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies Chicago Akkadian Dictionary Concise Dictionary of Akkadian Chronique d’Égypte Culture and Organization Concise Syriac Dictionary Dictionnaire arabe-français Dictionary of Late Egyptian Dictionary of the Ugaritic Language Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics Economic Botany Egitto e Vicino Oriente Göttinger Beiträge zur Sprachwissenschaft

ix

x JAOS JCSCS JEA JLR JNES JRAS JSAI JSS LDA LA MLR OEAE PICSS PSAS QVO RO SJA SPSAS VT WO WS WZKM ZAL ZÄS ZDMG ZSVG

Abbreviations and Symbols Journal of the American Oriental Society Journal of the Canadian Society for Coptic Studies Journal of Egyptian Archaeology Journal of Language Relationship Journal of Near Eastern Studies Journal of the Royal African Society Jerusalem Studies in Arabic and Islam Journal of Semitic Studies Lexique des dialectes arabes tchado-soudanais Lingua Aegyptia Mediterranean Language Review Oxford Encyclopedia of Ancient Egypt Proceedings of the International Conference on Semitic Studies Proceedings of the Seminar on Arabian Studies Quaderni di vicino oriente Rocznik Orientalistyczny Southwestern Journal of Anthropology Supplement to the Proceedings of the Seminar for Arabian Studies Vetus Testamentum Die Welt des Orients Westasiatische Studien Wiener Zeitschrift für die Kunde des Morgenlandes Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik Zeitschrift für ägyptische Sprache und Altertumskunde Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenländischen Gesellschaft Zeitschrift für Semitistik und verwandte Gebiete

Introduction Plus nous approfondirons la nature du temps, plus nous comprendrons que durée signifie invention, création de formes, élaboration continue de l’absolument nouveau. Henri Bergson, L’évolution créatrice, p. 11

∵ 1

Aim and Scope of the Glossary

The present glossary of Ancient Egyptian and dialectal Arabic is, to my knowledge, the first of its kind to appear in the discipline of comparative Afroasiatic linguistics – its specific vantage point being the innovative diachronic stance proposing a prehistoric Egyptian diaspora in the evolution of the Arabic language – by way of accounting for the impressive hard core of lexical and morpholexical strata shared by these two ancient Near Eastern idioms. The salient mutual link between them proposed in this research is also something of a novelty from an Egyptological standpoint, despite the latter discipline’s well-established dependence on Arabic as a vital source of comparative linguistic data. The field of Egyptological linguistics has long been the pursuit of a rather closed circle of scholars. Writing in the seventies of the preceding century, the Egyptologist Hans J. Polotsky stated: As regards linguistic methodology, it is no secret that Egyptologists are not conspicuous in the forefront of modern movements. (1970: 558) More recently, another scholar, also expressing an insider’s viewpoint, has conceded that over the last decades we have preferred to engage in a dialog among ourselves rather than with the broader audience of comparative and general linguists, and we have developed conceptual and terminological conventions that often appear opaque if not downright incomprehensible to the non-initiated. (Loprieno 1995: xii)

© ALEXANDER BORG, 2021 | doi:10.1163/9789004472136_002

2

Introduction

Nonetheless, a great deal of innovative linguistic research on Ancient Egyptian – comprising groundbreaking comparative and historical work – has been conducted in the course of the last few decades with the result that the discipline faces key challenges and opportunities with the appearance of studies ranging from Loprieno’s own engaging interdisciplinary survey of linguistic research on Egyptian to mainstream paradigmatic studies such as Schenkel (1990), Hoch (1994), Kammerzell (2005), Allen (2013, 2015, 2020) and – significantly, from the perspective of the present glossary – an innovative and diachronically challenging etymological dictionary (Takács 1999, 2001, 2007). From an empirical standpoint, these weighty contributions logically invite complementary probes into the diachronic trajectories enacted by individual idioms within the Afroasiatic phylum that can be shown to have interacted with Ancient Egyptian. Satzinger’s 2002 survey of the history of research on this language suggests that the comparative scope of past work targeting its relationships within Afroasiatic and Semitic has yet to address in systematic fashion its interstitial links over time to individual idioms within this kaleidoscopic linguistic landscape. This glossary’s chief raison d’être is, consequently, to bring into focus lexical strata that Arabic shares with Ancient Egyptian for the specific purpose of throwing new light on the prehistoric stage of the Arabic language as a spoken medium. Secondary comparative material cited throughout this work from other ancient languages is intended to provide a suggestive historical background inviting further comparative perspectives. The diachronic focus of the present glossary on the shared word stock of Ancient Egyptian and Arabic launches an innovative and far-reaching inquiry portraying dynamic aspects of cross-linguistic contact tangential to Arabic visualized as Near Eastern human history – hence evoking implications beyond the realm of language extending to perceptions of Arabic speakers’ ethnocultural prehistory.1 Ancient Egyptian confronts the comparatist with a very broad and highly complex ethnolinguistic canvas. Loprieno (1995: 5) states: Ancient Egyptian shows the closest relations to Beja (Cushitic), Semitic, and Berber, distant ones to the rest of Cushitic and Chadic. With its more than four millennia of productive history (3000 BCE–1300 CE), Egyptian proves an ideal field for diachronic and typological investigation. 1 Human history viewed through the prism of symbiotic aspects of language and culture across an ancient Near Eastern context involving Ancient Egypt appeals to a broad readership. The following commentary has, consequently, been formulated in non-technical language with the general reader in mind.

Introduction

3

The present work’s specific rationale and methodology should be fairly selfevident to a linguistic observer: Ancient Egyptian and Arabic are the two bestdocumented venerable idioms of the Afroasiatic macrofamily yielding the language historian an ample database enriched, in the case of Arabic, with a virtually unlimited corpus drawing on the living speech of some 300 million speakers across the Near East and Africa. The present glossary adduces a corpus of well over 800 shared lexemes drawing on the modern vernaculars to exemplify the etymological links of this Semitic language to Ancient Egyptian clarifying the early prehistory of Arabic as it emerges from its often subtle symbiotic interaction with the Ancient Egyptian word stock at different attested stages of this language, helping to extrapolate tell-tale traces of polygenesis and convergence, rather than merely generating a rigid taxonomic algorithm. Recent maverick research yielding the first comprehensive comparative survey of the Semitic word stock has been conducted in Kogan (2015) within a lexicostatic framework, though again aiming at a genealogical classification of this language family. The broad range of etymological correlates between Ancient Egyptian and spoken Arabic mustered for this glossary in effect renders possible a tentative exposition of the sound correspondences between these two idioms, possibly clarifying internal aspects of Ancient Egyptian historical phonology expounded in previous work, such as Rössler (1971), Osing (1980), Peust (1999), Satzinger (2002), Kammerzell (1998, 2005), and Allen (2020). The theoretical concern here with lexical as opposed to morphological aspects of the phylogenetic relationship between Ancient Egyptian and Arabic finds a close methodological precedent in Vergote (1975: 171): Lorsqu’on compare l’ancien égyptien avec les langues chamitosémitiques, on constate que la morphologie offre, ici aussi, peu d’arguments en faveur de leur parenté. Le fait fut clairement mis en évidence par Thacker (1954). A l’exception du pseudo-participe ou ‘old perfective’ égyptien et du permansif-parfait sémitique, notamment en akkadien, le système verbal égyptien se montre parfaitement indépendant. Au contraire, les enquêtes de F. Calice et de M. Cohen, fondées sur de nombreuses recherches antérieures, en particulier sur celles d’A. Ember, ont nettement établi la parenté entre ces parlers sur la base d’une grande quantité de correspondances lexicales. Implied in this statement forefronting the role of the lexicon is the notion that the structural typology of affiliations among language congeners (especially along a longue durée trajectory) can range from a conspicuous to a remote

4

Introduction

modality – as determined by the evolutionary cybernetics of a specific phylogeny (i.e., contingency on proximate vs. long distance relationships). Given the non-existence at the present time of an Arabic etymological dictionary comparable in scope to the standard lexicographical works addressing other ancient Semitic languages, such as Biblical Hebrew and Aramaic – above all, drawing on the lexical norms of both literary and vernacular Arabic usage – the contemporary researcher lacks a basic tool for serious comparative and historical study of this ancient world language presenting the Arabic word stock in historical perspective. In essence, this pioneering glossary is somewhat akin – mutatis mutandis – to that envisaged for the ancient Hebrew lexicon in Winton Thomas (1939) on the basis of comparative study of Semitic.2 This volume is a sequel to the pioneering exposition presented in Borg (2019a) adducing concrete evidence – oddly overlooked in past comparative and historical research – of a morpholexical and grammatical speciation in Middle Egyptian, quintessentially and uniquely typified in modern Arabic vernaculars, raising inter alia a tangential theoretical issue relative to the nature of symbiotic reciprocity operating between these two prehistorically interactive linguistic systems. The need for this alternative dynamic approach has been objectified in recent research: Even though the genetic relationship of Egyptian and Semitic is solidly established, the specifics of the relationship are very imperfectly understood, and therefore hotly debated. (Rubin 2004: 454) Borg (2019a) advanced the premise of a close symbiotic relationship between Ancient Egyptian and a preclassical Old Arabic phenotype, at the same time, suggestively mirroring the earliest known vestiges of a colloquial variety of this language attested no less than two and a half millennia before the advent of Islam. Expressed in a nutshell, the present study sets out to interpose a hitherto unwritten chapter into the obscure pre-Islamic history of the Arabic language and its speakers by asserting and documenting the contention that Ancient Egypt was a strategic site in the course of the proposed prehistoric scenario. The gist of my preliminary inquiry is summed up in its introductory abstract: This pilot study probing the arcane prehistory of Arabic advances a hypothesis positing a cluster of intriguing, to date unacknowledged, continuities in the realms of lexicon and grammaticalization patterns, 2 Cf. Day (2013) and especially Clines (2015).

Introduction

5

suggesting a symbiotic relationship between Ancient Egyptian and an ancient phenotype that yielded the modern Arabic vernaculars. The main focus of this inquiry is on a diachronic speciation in the speech act domain of interrogativity encoded by: (i) the late ME morpholexical set of composite formatives mi҆ḫ, ri҆ḫ, and ḥri҆ḫ, which are here proposed as respective cognates of the colloquial Arabic protoforms *bāš/h, *lāš/h, and *ʿalāš/h and their virtually pan-dialectal modern reflexes; (ii) the grammatically germane ME lexeme qd ‘form, extent’ (Faulkner 1962: 19, 282) continued in modern colloquial Arabic interrogatives generated on the protoforms *qaddāš/qaddayš or *ʾāšqadd ‘how much?’ The upshot of this study is the diachronically innovative prospect that the elaborate grammatical speciations under study represent the evolutionary outcome of ecological convergence between these two ancient Afroasiatic idioms, plausibly transpiring during the second millennium BC, entailing interaction between Ancient Egyptian and a diaspora phenotype of preclassical Arabic. (Borg 2019a: 39) From an Ancient Egyptian perspective, this case of horizontal cross-linguistic interaction is closely akin to that envisaged in Kammerzell (2005: 166): A special case that has gained some attention in recent years is what may be called split transmission: the non-genetic formation of a mixed language by deriving particular subsystems from one language, while others are supplied from a different source. Taken at face value, the historical reality emerging from my afore-cited exploratory endeavour contrasts strikingly with the conventional narrative of Arab cultural and linguistic development as chronicled in canonical documentary sources with their customary focus on the later period of Near Eastern history. Lewis (1995: 24), for example, states: At the beginning of the Christian era, Arabic, historically the last of the Semitic languages to enter the region, was in the main confined to the central and northern portions of the Arabian peninsula. The more advanced cultures of the southwest, in the present-day Yemen, spoke yet another Semitic language, known as South Arabian, and closely related to Ethiopic, which had been carried by Arabian colonists to the Horn of Africa.

6

Introduction

As will become clear in the course of this introduction, Yemen here turns out to be quite central to the prehistory of spoken Arabic since salient lexical continuities linking the Old Egyptian word stock from the early Dynastic or pre-Dynastic period to modern Yemeni Arabic can be extensively documented (cf. §7).3 The methodological issues entailed in this comparative framework – reconstructing the past from the present – will be addressed below. Analytical focus on the set of pandialectal structural traits adduced above proffers concrete evidence of an organic grammatical nature, beyond merely random lexical correspondences, arguing for the early scenario of close contact between Middle Egyptian and Arabic proposed here. In effect, this evokes a prehistoric encounter logically presupposing the abiding presence of an Arabic-speaking community on Egyptian soil throughout the entire historical period evoked by the lexical correspondences recorded in this glossary, including lemmata mustered on the basis of Old, Middle, and Late Egyptian lexicographic sources. From the vantage point of lexical history, it also yields what is, in effect, the oldest epigraphic evidence predating so-called ‘neo-Arabic’ usage.4 Thus the present study sets out to provide linguistic research with the raw data for revising the canonical narrative of Arabic language history. The formal impact on Ancient Egyptian of the proposed case of linguistic interaction is a separate though closely related topic outside the immediate scope of this research, pertaining to the complex of regional and cultural networks undergirding the lexical strata of Ancient Egyptian – extending from the Arabian Peninsula, across the Levant to Nubia and the Horn of Africa. As will be argued below, the diachronic scenario emerging from the database provided here logically invites further in-depth comparative study of selected shared lexemes, delving beyond the purely etymological and dialectal correlations addressed in the main body of this work. Intended here is the deployment of a cognitive approach to the linguistic archaeology of Arabic venturing upon a species of evolutionary cybernetics ideally fusing linguistic insights with intuitions drawing on anthropology, ethnography, and Near Eastern archaeology with the aim of anchoring the linguistic record within a realistic historical context. As noted in Gray et al. (2011: 1090), Historical inference is at its most powerful when independent lines of evidence can be integrated in a coherent account. 3 The diachronic distinctiveness of Old Egyptian as both a dialect and a historical stage of the language is highlighted in Allen (2015: 1); hence the significance of its overlaps with regionally defined Arabic vernaculars. 4 In this connection, see Larcher (2010).

Introduction

7

This research has been undertaken in the hope that the overlapping resonances evoked by this cross-linguistic lexicographical project will lure specialists from these two pivotal branches of the Afroasiatic phylum to engage in creative interdisciplinary dialogue aimed at unravelling the complex strands of linguistic history bridging the evolutionary links of Old Arabic to Ancient Egyptian. The need for the brand of linguistic discourse exemplified in this comparative glossary is best vindicated by recognition of the fact that Arabic has long confronted diachronically oriented scholarship with the anomaly evoked in the following apothegm: Despite the fact that Arabic is the best known of the classical Semitic languages, and in the present state of things is likely to remain so, there persist nevertheless many problems connected with its long and complicated history that still await solution, and in some cases even recognition. (Hopkins 1984: xxxvii) One of the most glaring diachronic problems relates to its arcane prehistory. The extensive reliance throughout this data-driven study on Arabic lexical strata amassed from the Arabic vernaculars may convey an impression that the Arabic language is here deemed to be the main Semitic idiom to have interacted with Ancient Egyptian. Calice (1931: 36) has attributed the salience of Arabic Sprachgut in comparative studies of Ancient Egyptian to the easy availability of sources for this language: Lexikalisch läßt sich eine nähere Verwandschaft mit einem bestimmten Sprachzweige schwer nachweisen. Daß weitaus die meisten bisher aufgestellten Wortgleichungen das Arabische und in zweiter Linie das Hebräische heranziehen, hat schon seinen äusserlichen Grund in der leichteren Zugänglichkeit des Materials. Calice’s valid contention highlights, if only obliquely, the optimal viability of the comparative linguistic project under study probing the interactive evolutionary dynamics of the two most elaborately documented idioms in the Afroasiatic phylum. The lure of Arabic for the historical linguist lies, to some extent, in the circumstance that it has survived in widely different sociocultural contexts. These range from recently settled nomadic to long-urbanized speech communities whose modern word stocks will here be shown to have retained strata predating the Islamic period and its literary heritage by well over two and a

8

Introduction

half millennia. A notable methodological asset accruing from this approach is that given the expanse of the Arabic dialect continuum, the spatial dimension here itself licenses not merely a reconstruction but, more accurately, a recovery of the past from the present on the robust basis provided by the rich dialectal Arabic database at one’s disposal and its heterogeneity – in effect, ranging from the parlance of nomadic, rural, and urban speakers to past and present isolated and culturally diversified pockets of Arabic speech surviving along the periphery of the Arab world in Spain, Sicily, Malta, Cyprus, Iran, Central Asia and Central Africa whose lexical heritage often yields unique historical insights. (Borg 2019a: 43) Diachronic research on the Arabic language has traditionally been dictated by an essentially philological approach to the literary manifestations of al-ʿarabiyyah “the language in which the texts of pre-Islamic and early Islamic times were handed down, first of all, the Quran and pre-Islamic and early Islamic poetry, but also the historical and legal traditions of the time” (W. Fischer 2006: 397). As noted in Edzard (2013: 163), the philological scope of this tradition can be narrowed down to the study of language in written historical texts, encompassing aspects of history, literary studies, and linguistics. As a result, Western perceptions of Arabic language history have since the 17th century been, to say the least, profoundly monitored by the indigenous cult of this medium as a confessional and supranational cultural icon that “has remained outwardly almost unchanged” (W. Fischer, loc. cit.). Mainstream attempts at reconstructing Arabic language history in the philological literature have traditionally concurred with a narrative espoused, for instance, by the comparative linguist and orientalist Theodor Nöldeke (1836–1930) in his volume Die semitischen Sprachen, Eine Skizze (Leipzig 1887), where he attributed the origin of the vernaculars to a restructuring process occasioned by imperfect learning of the classical language, e.g., entailing loss of word-final markers of case and mood) on the part of speakers outside the Arabian Peninsula: Die Mehrzahl der Araber ausserhalb Arabiens wich damals von diesem Muster schon stark ab und sprach namentlich nicht mehr die zur Kasusund Modusbezeichnung dienenden vokalischen Endungen.

Introduction

9

An overriding objective of the present work is, consequently, to put this historical narrative – still espoused in some circles, especially in the Arab world – finally to rest by highlighting and documenting the antiquity of the vernaculars. The initiative launched in Borg (2019a) is here further braced with an extensive comparative lexical corpus – inviting linguistic scholarship to a genuinely epistemic quest for a new scientific space in phylogenetic research on Arabic: one proffering a dynamic and authentically linguistic narrative based essentially on the spoken language, as opposed to the conventional philological and confessionally monitored approaches to this discipline.5 Contemporary Arabic language research is grappling with the far-reaching implications of the latter stance and its familiar other-worldly rhetorical veneer evoked in Holes (2018: 2) noting that for the average native speaker, the history of Arabic bursts on to the scene, seemingly from nowhere, with the seventhcentury Revelation of God’s word to Muhammad, the Arabian Prophet, vouchsafed by the Angel Gabriel, and recited by him in Arabic, at first to a skeptical audience, and later to a growing band of believers. As medium of divine revelation in the Quran, Arabic acquired a spiritual dimension; in the words of Nöldeke (1887: 48): das Arabische war so auch zur heiligen Sprache geworden. Incidentally, the affinities to the sublime conjured by the popular Muslim perception of classical Arabic as a scriptural code finds a close cultural parallel in Ancient Egypt where, for instance, the god Ptah, creator of the world, is portrayed as having been well pleased after he had created all things and all hieroglyphs. (Assmann 2007: 27) The upshot of the present sally into the arcane prehistory or, more accurately, linguistic archaeology of the Arabic language, is that the task of implementing a genuine probe into the pre-Islamic diachronic stages of this major world language should ideally deploy an alternative methodology to the conventional reliance, primarily on its early literary manifestations. The task of confronting 5 An analogous situation obtained in the early study of the Indo-Germanic languages. Wang (1979: 353) states, in this respect: “Before (William) Jones, discussions on language history were mostly mired in philosophical and theological speculations.”

10

Introduction

the highly diversified dialectal Arabic continuum across much of the Near East and North Africa ideally calls for the conceptualization of dialects as “implicational constellations rather than as entities bounded by isoglossic bundles” (C.-J. Bailey 1980). A salient outcome of the scientifically obsolete thought climate in conventional research on Arabic has, in fact, been a degree of aloofness on the part of Arabic specialists towards the mainstream language sciences, manifested particularly in their marginalization of the structure and historical significance of the spoken language as retained in the modern Arabic vernaculars.6 Typically, a great deal of analytical work undertaken on individual varieties of colloquial Arabic does not envision any purpose beyond description7 – in effect, passively endorsing a historicist vacuum while ignoring the primacy of spoken over written language as an object of linguistic analysis in empirical diachronic research. In the words of the Indo-Europeanists Osthoff & Brugmann (1878: iii–iv), man denke dabei nicht an die Sprache auf dem Papier denn auf dem Papier ist alles möglich. This methodological viewpoint is echoed in Otto Jespersen’s dictum contending that “exclusive pre-occupation with written or printed words … is fundamentally false” (1924: 2). Quite apart from potentially new insights obtainable into the prehistoric stage of Arabic, the lexico-semantic and other parallels with Ancient Egyptian emerging from this comparative glossary are also liable to cast new light on the internal history of the latter idiom itself for, as already noted above, the interaction of Arabic with Ancient Egyptian can often be exemplified by reference to the oldest known lexical strata of this ancient idiom attested, for instance, in the language of the Pyramid Texts (c. 2613–2181 BC). Thus the nature and extent of the sound correspondences between Ancient Egyptian and Arabic reflected in the etymological correlations emerging from a comparative assessment of the dialectal lexicon have yet to be fully recognized in the contemporary critical literature. Note, for example, the shared palatal shifts in lexemic pairs like ṯpḥ.t [*čpḥt] (Pyr) ‘cavern’ (Faulkner 1962: 304) ~ N. Yemen čahif- ‘Höhle’ [< khf ] (Behnstedt 1987: 297).8 6 For an exposition of the traditional narrative, see W. Fischer (1995). In Borg (2019a: §13), I also raise the issue of a possible typological impact of Afroasiatic on modern Egyptian Arabic. 7 The point at issue here is the question as to whether language structure can be adequately described in purely synchronic terms (cf. C.-J. Bailey 1992: 208). 8 For further detail on this shift, see §9 below.

Introduction

2

11

Prehistory of Arabic

Given the fact that Epigraphic South Arabian provides the most ancient documentation of South Semitic, the lexical evidence of Bronze Age linguistic and cultural interaction between ancient Egypt and Arabia adduced in Borg (2019a) and, more extensively, in the present glossary, insinuates the presence of Old Arabic within a realistic perception of the Arabian Peninsula’s prehistoric linguistic landscape evoked in Avanzini (2009: 215): Having proved that South Arabian languages are testimony to history in the longue durée within South Arabia and do not come from a recent colonization (late second–early first) millennium on the part of populations from the north opens a broad historical and linguistic debate. While focusing on the ancient Arabian linguistic and cultural landscape, the breadth of such a debate ideally encompasses a regional dimension, ultimately extending across the Red Sea to Sinai and the Egyptian mainland. In view of the archaeologically established land and sea routes linking Ancient Egypt to western Arabia (cf. Zarins 1989; Sperveslage 2016), the salient Yemenite lexical commonalities with Old and later Egyptian emerging from this research (see data in §7 below) yield concrete new testimony shedding fresh light on the actual horizons of this ancient Near Eastern cultural and geolinguistic continuum.9 An overriding theoretical concern in this work (here evoked by the Bergsonian premise cited at the head of this introduction) has been that of endorsing throughout this pioneering endeavour a dynamic and open-ended evolutionary cycle in relation to the diachrony of Arabic, compatible with the longue durée approach adopted here reaching as far back as Old Egyptian. Linstead & Mullarkey (2003: 3) portray Henri Bergson (1859–1941) as a “philosopher of time” but also as “a philosopher of creativity, invention, or intuition”; hence his theoretically impelling relevance to a study of linguistic evolution conceptualized as a constructive and dynamic cultural process in preference to a reductive Darwinian fortuity: 9 Cognate terms from the Old Egyptian ship-building jargon (cf. §10 below) may pertain to be a maritime lingua franca isogloss, significantly, retained across the Arabic dialect area (see glossary, under d-f-f ). Seidlmayer (2007: 52–59) has shown that from the earliest stages of Ancient Egyptian history, Arabia supplied the dynastic rulers with exports of certain commodities. Serpico & White (2000) address the incense trade during the New Kingdom suggesting links to Arabia.

12

Introduction

Culture arises as much from the shared interaction and practice of bodies as from the shared symbols of minds. Embedded in durée, or experienced duration, it must be constantly in process and change, affected by and in a movement of tension and relaxation with and between individuals, and characterized by the working out of creative evolution, or cultural innovation, within the wider unfolding of time. (op. cit., p. 4) This study of the prehistory of Arabic sets out, accordingly, to address language as lived cultural experience across place and time;10 consequently, in preference to the overly simplistic conventional narrative dictated essentially by the formal split between written and spoken codes of the Arabic language – a factor that has oddly dominated and slanted past analytic and historical discourse (e.g., in Fück 1950) – the principal concern of this research has been to foreground its spoken dialects in place of a temporally ‘immutable’ and idealized literary code (the classical language). Literary Arabic has been designated in Larcher (2010) as a ‘construct’ – in reality, the outcome of a language standardization process generated by the descriptive and prescriptive linguistic endeavours of the medieval Arab grammarians. Wolfdietrich Fischer (2006: 397) states in this regard: In the process of describing Classical Arabic, the Arab grammarians standardized the language, and in this standardized form it became the educated official language of Islamic civilization and later on, the written standard language of the Arabic-speaking world. Incidentally, the artificiality of the parallel divide assumed in the realm of general Arab history has been insightfully exposed in Simonsen (2000: 241), who argues that the idea of dividing the history of the Arabian Peninsula into a preIslamic period to be followed by an Islamic one seriously violates our understanding of the social dynamics shaping both pre-Islamic and postIslamic Arab history. The present work’s preoccupation with diachronic aspects of the Arabic lexicon inevitably highlights the ethnocultural dimension across time and place enacted by its speakers, such that its proposed contact with Ancient Egyptian and the emerging semantic continuum cumulatively documented in the 10

On the theory and practice of portraying lived language histories, see §6 below.

Introduction

13

Arabic dialectal lexicon can be said to map out the historical process of creating meaning and associated behavioral patterns11 under the assumption that, on the one hand, no sociocultural environment exists or has identity independently of the way human beings seize meanings and resources from it, while, on the other hand, every human being’s subjectivity and mental life are altered through the process of seizing meanings and resources from some sociocultural environment and using them. (Shweder 1991: 74) Since human culture is learned rather than genetically predetermined, lexicosemantic approaches to language history can prove to be profoundly meaningful. In practice, this conceptual interaction at word level can be visualized as reflecting a symbolic order whereby individuals orient themselves in relation to their physical and social world. Hence the need for nuanced in-depth study of lexical relations across time and space on a regional scale. Significantly, in this respect, Calice (1936: 10) highlighted the need for elaborate formal and semantic probes into Semitic lexemes identified in Ancient Egyptian sources, concurring with Enno Littmann’s view that eigentlich über jedes zu vergleichende Wort eine Monographie geschrieben werden müsste. (1931: 67) Implicit in Littmann’s proposal is the reasonable assumption that the background to obscure linguistic phylogenetic relationships, for instance with Semitic, can also to some extent be elucidated thereby. A crucial theoretical consequence of the present study’s diachronic stance relates specifically to the etymological method adopted throughout this research, entailing a more organic and cognitively sensitive approach to lexical cognacy (exemplified in Borg 2019a: 57–64) than the reductive practice of conventional comparative linguistics. Ultimately, the Afroasiatic comparative focus, in preference to the conventional Semitic phylogenetic framework, espoused in the present research highlights crucial historiographical aspects tangential to the ethnocultural narrative surrounding the diachrony of the Arabic language – in particular, 11

This cultural stance evokes a humanistic aspect of mankind roughly analogous to that visualized in A. Quételet’s contention: “L’homme que je considère ici est, dans la société l’analogue du centre de gravité dans les corps; il est la moyenne autour de laquelle oscillent les éléments sociaux” (1835: 21).

14

Introduction

the implied Egyptian diaspora actualized by ancient Arabic-speaking speaker communities that has yet to figure in perceptions of Arab prehistory. Renfrew (1987: 110) has noted in relation to the Indo-European phylum: One of the most recent developments in linguistics has been the development of a concept of the linguistic area and the detailed study of the distribution of linguistic forms in space. Linguistic area refers here not to the distribution in space of a single language, but of related features in a larger group of languages. The data adduced in this glossary documenting an analogous regional relationship between Old Arabic and Ancient Egyptian are concrete indications of displacement of language communities predating state formation or imperial expansionism; as such they deserve serious analytical study. The bottom line of this study is that oriental scholarship has yet to fully advert to the conspicuous diachronic interface with Arabic evoked by the Egyptian word stock. Conceptual and lexical overlaps between Ancient Egyptian and Arabic naturally raise the issue as to the sociocultural character of the historical relationship between Arabic-speaking tribal immigrants and their Ancient Egyptian hosts, intimating a melding process and social continuum akin to what Gellner (1998) – addressing a modern nation state – has characterized by the concepts of Gemeinschaft and Gesellschaft which, in linguistic terms, correspond to the divide between sociolect and national language, respectively. In the Egyptian case, the Arabic-speaking community presumably also underwent a concomitant shift from tribal to urban ethnicity in a context of cultural and linguistic heterogeneity.12 It is suggestive here to cite, by way of a modern ecological parallel, the sociocultural typology compactly etched in Cohen (1969: 266–267) for an African regional setting involving a continuum of interregional exchange networks composed of spatially dispersed specialized organizationally cohesive, and socially independent from their host communities while maintaining a high level of economic and social ties with related communities who define themselves in terms of the same general cultural identity.13 12 13

For a modern African parallel of sociocultural immigrant heterogeneity, cf. Mitchell (1974). This reference is cited from Morris (2018: 22) addressing Egyptian imperialism. Cohen’s typology here relates specifically to West Africa including, for instance, Nigeria with its 250 ethnic groups and over 300 languages.

Introduction

15

In modern southern Arabia, this linguistic scenario shows up in the context of a “bedouin/sedentary lifestyle divide” where it is quite normal … for one tribe to have sedentary and bedouin sections living in a symbiotic relationship and for both to use exactly the same dialect (the Omani Durūʿ are an example). (Holes 2018: 21) Lexical evidence evoking a suggestive sociocultural typology for the integration of Arabic-speaking nomadic herders into Ancient Egyptian sedentary society is provided by the following revealing set of shared lexemes harking back to the third millennium BC, if not earlier, encoding the semantics of male social relationships: ḫwi҆, ḫnm, zmꜣ, smr, and ḫbr: (i) ḫw/ḫwi҆ (Pyr) ‘to protect, exclude oneself from quarrels; set aside, prevent; avoid, safeguard’ (Faulkner 1962: 185) ~ Rwala xu ‘protector’; ax ‘the clan’s brother to whom it pays (yaxīh) an annual sum’; xūwa/xwa ‘tax paid by weaker tribes to a stronger one; tax for protection’; xāwi (n) ‘fellow traveller; a comrade who offers protection to a stranger’ (Musil 1928: 600, 280, 136, 59, 30, 440) ~ Baghdad xāwa ‘protection, protection money’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 149) ~ Najd xuwwah ‘brotherhood’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 366) ~ Palest xuwwah ‘Bruderschaft’ (Bauer 1957: 67); (ii) ḫnm (Pyr) ‘to join, unite with’ (Faulkner 1962: 202) ~ Ar xālama ‘mit Einem Freundschaft schließen’ (Wahrmund I 619); (iii) zmꜣ (Pyr) ‘vereinigen, sich gesellen’ (Wb III 453) ~ Egypt zimīl, pl zumala/ zumalāt ‘colleague, comrade’ (Spiro 1895: 256); (iv) smr (Pyr) ‘Freund (besonders des Königs als Titel oder Rangstufe) Bekannter’; ‘friend (of king), a court title’: smr tpy ‘First Friend’; śmr.t (OK) ‘Freundin’; ‘companion’; smꜣ ‘unite’; smꜣy ‘companion, confederate’; smꜣyt ‘royal consort’ (Wb IV 138, 139; Faulkner 1962: 225, 226, 229; DLE II 43) ~ Dem smꜣ ‘vereinigen’ (DG 431) ~ Ar sāmir, pl summār ‘companion in nightly entertainment’ (Lane 1436); mismar, pl masāmir ‘night party’ (Piamenta 1990: 232); (v) ḫbr (LE) ‘contact, business partner, associate’ (DLE I 354) ~ Dem ḫbr/ẖbr ‘Genosse, Freund’ (DG 354, 379) ~ Yemen ⟨xubrah⟩ ‘compagnie, association’ (GD 549).

16

Introduction

Interestingly, the first four lexemes hark back to Old Egyptian being attested in the linguistic usage of the sixth Dynasty (i.e., c. 2352–2107 BC). This semantically and cross-culturally significant lexification pattern encoding social relationships whose Arabic lexemes are commonly associated with male members of agnatic tribal societies, argues suggestively for a prehistoric scenario of close existential contact between Ancient Egyptian speakers and Arabic-speaking pastoral nomads.14 The main body of this glossary records inter alia a lexical muster exceeding three hundred Old Egyptian lexemes with their Arabic counterparts, comprising in all well over a third of the lemmata included in this work. The mutual proximity of Old Arabic and Old Egyptian emerging from this work should lay to rest, once and for all, a perception rife among certain Semitists and Egyptologists categorically writing off Arabic as a primary comparative source in lexical research relating to these idioms. Completely ignoring spoken Arabic, the Egyptologist, W.A. Ward (1928–1996), a fervent exponent of this standpoint, has stated: It is a myth of modern scholarship that Classical Arabic preserves a very old stratum of Semitic so that words found only in this language must have an older history. I cannot accept this. Arabic stands at the end of several thousand years of linguistic development and, while it might preserve some more ancient vocabulary, a large part of the Arabic lexicon consists of derived terms with no counterparts in the earlier dialects. (Ward 1985: 231) Its unfortunate outcome has been a virtual trivialization of Arabic as a potential historical and comparative source, glaringly exemplified in the etymology Ward proposed for Ar ǧanāḥ ‘wing’ (Ward 1985), which he oddly derives from Coptic ϫⲛⲁϩ ‘forearm’ (Crum 1939: 777a). In fact, this Arabic cognate of Old Egyptian ḏnḥ ‘wing, blade of oar’ (Faulkner 1962: 322) happens to represent a pandialectal Arabic lexeme also shared with South Arabian and marginal Arabic vernaculars like S.E. Anatolian Arabic and Maltese. Its morpholexical and semantic integration in both classical and dialectal codes of Arabic leaves no room for any conceivable doubt as to its native character in the basic Arabic word stock. Ward (1960: 323) observed that ‘cognate words in Egypto-Semitic number well over twelve-hundred’; the present glossary comprises over eight hundred lexemes shared with some variety of Arabic, literary and/or dialectal.

14

For further detail on Arab nomadism, see sources surveyed in Kressel (1992).

Introduction

17

However, Ward’s most consequential oversight with respect to Arabic is his failure to appreciate the fact that lexical and other structural parallels with Ancient Egyptian coming to light in comparative study drawing on the living Arabic dialects yield valuable insights into historical speech norms of this dead language. This contention has been illustrated in Borg (2019a) with respect to the Middle Egyptian composite interrogative particles mi҆ḫ, ri҆ḫ, and ḥri҆ḫ (cf. §1 above). The diachronic approach deployed in this study has been, to say the least, rewarding since, given the fact that the Ancient Egyptian material garnered for this comparative and historical study spans a timeline of some two and a half millennia – roughly from the Old Kingdom to the Ptolemaic period15 – the early chronological stratification of a salient stratum of the dialectal Arabic lexicon emerges here with surprisingly singular clarity. The transparency and directness of formal links between specific lexemes here proposed as cognates are a variable factor along an evolutionary incline, inviting further study within a geolinguistic and polygenetic framework. Hence sound correspondences attested in proposed Ancient Egyptian cognates of Arabic lexemes do not invariably enact regular equivalence patterns for the obvious reason that competing changes endemic to a cross-linguistic context entailed here inevitably introduce an element of entropy. In this respect, Satzinger (2002: 234) has reiterated the view that “the Semitic-Egyptian sound correspondences are far more complicated than has been thought before”; thus, as already demonstrated above, detailed systematic comparison of sound correspondences across a representative sampling of Ancient Egyptian and Arabic cognates is liable to throw new light on the sound qualities of individual segments in the former idiom. Observe, for instance, the differential cline of Arabic segmental correlates of the grapheme ⟨ṯ⟩ [*č] ranging over Old Arabic *k, *s, *z, and *ð: ṯnf.t (LE) [< *čnf.t] ‘bag’ (Faulkner 1962: 306; Wb V 308) ~ Najd kinf, pl knifeh ‘Säckchen’ (Hess 1938: 119) || ṯꜣm (BD) [< *črm] ‘veil (v.): veil the face = show indulgence (n to)’ (Faulkner 1962: 303) ~ Aleppo karīm, pl krām ‘généreux’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 714) || kṯm (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘divination, omen’ (Hoch 1994: 339) ~ Yemen magsūm ‘destino’ (Rossi 1939: 204) < qsm || ṯnf ‘tanzen’ (Wb V 380) ~ Bahrain zafan dance’ (Holes 2001: 222) || ṯkr (20th Dyn.) ‘remember (verb in anthroponym)’ (Hoch 1994: 372) ~ Ar ðakara ‘to remember’ (Hava 1982: 229). 15

Power (2011, 2012) has documented the presence of semi-sedentary Arab settlers wandering in Sinai, the Eastern Delta, and the northern reaches of the Eastern Desert from the Bronze Age to the Roman period.

18

Introduction

Whereas most previous work postulating interaction between the two branches of the Afroasiatic phylum under study has focused on the later contact between Coptic and the Egyptian Arabic vernaculars transpiring after the Islamic conquest of Egypt, my inquiry confronts the task of recording the dynamic symbiotic relationship between these two ancient idioms, already apparent from Old Egyptian as reflected, for instance, in the Pyramid Texts (c. 2613–2181 BC), providing the discipline of diachronic research on Arabic with the oldest and most substantial lexical documentation available to date. As already noted above, the historical lexical links between these two venerable idioms often point up dialectal isoglosses in Western Arabia and other parts of the Peninsula. 3

Diachronic Approaches to Arabic

It is rarely noted by scholars engaged in diachronic approaches to Arabic that one of the earliest attempts at systematic study of a spoken vernacular of this language was Mikiel Anton Vassalli’s Mylsen phoenico-punicum sive grammatica melitensis (Rome 1791). The author was a linguist, translator, and language planner animated with the spirit of the French Enlightenment under the influence of the orientalist Silvestre de Sacy (1758–1838) to undertake systematic comparative research on his native language well before the emergence of mainstream historical linguistics. In the elaborate introduction in Italian to his subsequent Lexicon MelitenseLatino-Italum (Rome 1796), Vassalli visualized his linguistic research as an ethnolinguistic project on the ancient historical heritage of the Maltese Islands and an icon of national identity. He stated: La storia della lingua e strettamente ligata alla storia degli uomini che la parlano: perciò converrebbe rimontare a tempi assai rimoti ed oscuri, se ritrovar volessimo l’origine della nostra lingua. (Vassalli 1796: ix) Mainstream diachronic research on dialectal Arabic has been mostly conducted by scholars operating within another linguistic paradigm that originated in Europe as a by-product of 19th century German orientalism, initially spurred on by the pursuit of biblical criticism and the classical languages. It was later motivated by the aim of familiarizing Western readership with the history, cultures, and actual spoken languages of the Near East, including Arabic (Spitta 1880), Aramaic, and Kurdish (Socin 1882, 1898).

Introduction

19

The discipline of Arabic dialectology, however, was destined to remain a marginal pursuit within the broad spectrum of orientalist research which largely tended to promote conventional Arabic philology as language history, despite its coexistence with the empirical theoretical ventures of the Neogrammarian school exemplified in Paul (1880), and the subsequent geolinguistically oriented exponents of the Wellentheorie (Schmidt 1872) speculating on the diachronic linguistic impact of demographic splits within speech communities, thereby paving the way for the emergence of dialect geography, exemplified for Arabic in Gotthelf Bergsträßer’s Sprachatlas of Greater Syria (1915). The latter pioneering project however, was destined to remain an isolated endeavour until Jean Cantineau’s field survey of the Ḥōrān vernaculars (1946), followed much later by landmark dialect atlases for Egypt (Behnstedt & Woidich 1985), Yemen (Behnstedt 1985), and Syria (Behnstedt 1997a). The rich dialectal database for the Arabic Sprachraum currently available to the diachronically oriented researcher of this language facilitates a dynamic time-based approach to this field visualized a century ago in Bergsträßer (1922: 220–221): Der Zweck sprachgeographischer Untersuchungen ist ja gar nicht, das sogenannte „Charakteristische“ einzelner sogenannter „Mundarten“ zu bestimmen und sie danach zu gruppieren, sondern über die sprachlichen Verhältnisse größerer Gebiete eine Übersicht zu gewinnen, eine Vorstellung von Art, Lage und Rangordnung der Dialektgrenzen, von dem Zusammenhang der Dialektgliederung mit den natürlichen und historischen Bedingungen des Gebiets und anderes mehr. An unspoken theoretical assumption underlying these empirical objectives is the thin divide separating a synchronic from a diachronic approach to the Arabic dialect area – a stance reminiscent of a variationist methodology akin to that later and independently elaborated in Bailey (1980). It is gratifying to recognize that Bergsträßer’s elevated aspirations for diachronically oriented research on the Arabic dialects are currently seeing actualization in a number of time-based studies focusing on the Arabic dialect continuum, e.g., Owens (2009, 2013) and Holes (2018). This salient burgeoning trend in the English-speaking world, following on decades of field studies conducted predominantly by French and German scholarship, amounts to a veritable watershed event for Arabic dialectology, breaking new ground in historical approaches to this language. Significantly, in

20

Introduction

this respect, Owens (2013: 451–471) visualizes such research as a timely assertion of this discipline’s importance beyond the conventional sphere of comparative Semitics: Arabic should have a privileged place within historical linguistics. It is one of the few languages in the world for which a wealth of data exists both in the far-flung contemporary Arabic-speaking world and in a rich Classical tradition beginning 1400 years ago. Issues of maintenance and change, central concepts in historical linguistics, can be interpreted against a rich set of data. That they have not resides in the view of this article in the fact that basic concepts of historical linguistics have rarely been applied to the language. Tacitly testifying to the relatively undeveloped state-of-the-art in this domain, Holes (2018) presents his contribution as “a first step down the road of describing the history of Arabic as a spoken language” (p. 1). In point of fact, the vibrant current research on Arabic language history calls for a further innovative thrust forward transporting formal diachronic discourse into the realm of linguistic archaeology. Above all, given the extensive span of its diasporic transmission and dispersion – assumed in the present research to reach back well into its prehistory – the empirical task of harmonizing the trajectories of its internal and external history is both theoretically and methodologically very demanding. The predominant focus on the spoken varieties of the Arabic language adopted here basically reverses standard procedure in comparative study of this language by replacing the top down research agenda enacted in traditional research with a bottom up approach drawing primarily but imaginatively on the rich colloquial database to hand. In Borg (2019a: 43), for instance, I appealed for a fresh, typologically oriented approach to Arabic language history whose literary register – acquired today as a second language through formal instruction by native speakers of the colloquials – typifies, for instance, a VSO language, whereas the latter, our main concern here, exemplify an SVO phenotype. Or again, literary Arabic exhibits a more elaborate morphology with a case system, whereas the vernaculars generally resort entirely to adpositional strategies to encode certain syntactic relations. These structurally interrelated typological traits suggest distinct evolutionary trajectories for literary and spoken varieties of the language.

Introduction

21

Taken to its logical conclusion, this viewpoint assigns to literary and vernacular strands of Arabic virtually distinct phylogenetic trajectories; hence the primary goal of the present glossary is to garner a new comparative database for the paramount but onerous task of reclaiming the ‘missing millennia’ in the prehistory of Arabic – amplifying the canonical record presented in standard works purporting to address, directly or indirectly, diachronic aspects of this pivotal branch of Afroasiatic.16 4

Ancient Egyptian and Arabic

As already noted in §1, the Arabic language has been extensively consulted in research on Ancient Egyptian (cf. Ember 1930, Calice 1936, Hoch 1994, and especially Takács 1999, 2001, 2007), echoing and elaborating on established methodology. The notion of a close phylogenetic link between Ancient Egyptian and Arabic advanced in this study is, in fact, firmly anchored within the ambit of a long-standing and still ongoing research paradigm probing the nature and extent of Semitic strata in the former language. The Semitic links of Ancient Egyptian were recognized in the earliest descriptive accounts of this language. Benfey (1844) and Brugsch (1867) paved the way for Adolf Erman’s classic paper of 1892 assessing the state of the art in this research domain of Egyptology in his time.17 Subsequent study, particularly in the lexicographic sphere, undertaken by Adolf Erman and Hermann Grapow of the Berlin School, and by Ernest Wallis Budge in the United Kingdom, injected renewed interest in this research domain, notably exemplified inter alia in Ember (1930) and Calice (1936), often drawing on earlier comparative work by scholars such as William F. Albright (1891–1971) whose etymological insights drawing specifically on Arabic are often reflected in these reference works and in the present glossary. The Arabic language scholar probing the prehistory of this language is both tantalized by the wealth of comparative data to hand and spurred on by two caveats voiced in Hoch’s authoritative study (1994: 482, 479):

16

17

The hypothesis attributing distinct trajectories to classical and vernacular Arabic has been studiously deliberated in Al-Jallad (2009: 518). The evidence adduced in Borg (2019a) and throughout this glossary should suffice to establish as historical fact the stance that certain strata of dialectal Arabic (such as non-classical interrogative particles) long preceded the emergence of literary Arabic. Erman, A. 1892. Das Verhältnis des Ägyptischen zu den semitischen Sprachen, ZDMG 46: 93–129.

22

Introduction

Lexical isoglosses are fairly difficult to establish given our uneven knowledge of the various languages and dialects. and Only rarely do the Egyptian texts provide information on the specific origin of Semitic words. The general Canaanite features of the bulk of the Semitic words has, of course, long been known. Trying to go beyond the general is, however, a much more difficult task. Hoch’s allusion to isoglosses and diagnostic constellations here turns out to be astonishingly apposite in the present context. As already indicated, dialectal Arabic database crucially enhances the evolutionary narrative inter alia by revealing the lexical link between Ancient Egyptian and the modern word stock of Arabian vernaculars, in particular, Yemeni lexical usage. The import of this concrete breakthrough in the diachrony of Arabic will be resumed in §7. 5

Linguistic Archaeology

Comparative data relating to Arabic cited in this work have been assembled from lexicographic sources and general descriptive studies of a wide variety of vernaculars spoken along a continuum extending from Arabia across Greater Syria and Egypt to North and Central Africa. The lexical corpus cited also draws on peripheral regions outside the Arab world such as Al-Andalus, Malta,18 S.E. Anatolia, and Cyprus. Fortunately for this research, the aforementioned appearance of extensive lexicographic works on the Arabic dialects in the course of the last decades offers new possibilities for comparative lexical study on a more ambitious scale than ever before. Above all, the word stock underpinning this research sets the stage for a simultaneous engagement with etymological, areal, and cultural aspects of linguistic archaeology, thereby providing new insights into the phylogenetic profile of the Arabic language as a whole from an Ancient Egyptian vantage point. As noted in the previous section, a telling factor to emerge from the detailed lexical displays adduced in the course of this introduction is the degree of lexico-semantic convergence obtaining between Old Egyptian and modern 18

In the case of Maltese, I have often resorted to Vassalli (1796) on account of its intrinsic historical interest in relation to lexical and semantic usage.

Introduction

23

Western Arabia (e.g., Yemen) revealing considerable unsuspected lexical strata shared with Dynastic or possibly pre-Dynastic linguistic usage (see §7 below). Some Arabic vernaculars also retain striking vestigial but explicit lexical traces of inherited cultural symbols evoking inter alia notions of Pre-Islamic folk religion intimating the cult of ancient Egyptian deities:19 ḥr ‘Horus (a solar deity depicted with a falcon’s head)’; ḥr-nbw ‘Falcon of Gold’ (Faulkner 1962: 1972, 173, 174) ~ Rwala ḥorr ‘a hunting falcon of the best kind’ (Musil 1928: 292) || šmś.w-Ḥr ‘Horusdiener’ (Wb IV 485) ~ Ar šammāš ‘deacon’ (Hava 1982: 377) || H̱ nmw (OK) ‘the god Khnum’ (Faulkner 1962: 202; cf. Wb III 381) [early Egyptian deity often represented as a man with a ram’s head] ~ Najd ġanam, pl aġnām ‘sheep and goats, small cattle’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 435) || Ḫns ‘the moongod Khons’ (Faulkner 1962: 193) ~ Ar xunnas ‘the five stars: Saturn, Jupiter, Mars, Venus, and Mercury’ (Lane 816) || Mnw (Min) (Faulkner 1962: 108) – an ancient Egyptian god of fertility and male potency ~ Iraq mani ‘sperm’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 446) || ʿryt ‘Götterwohnung’ (Hannig 1995: 905) ~ Ar ʿulliyyah ‘upper room’ (Hava 1982: 497) || zkr ‘Gott in Falkengestalt’ (Calice 1936: 193) ~ Ar ṣaqr ‘kestrel, falcon’ (Hava 1982: 401) || sbj.t ‘Bezeichnung der Uraeusschlange’ (Wb IV 89, 18) (the goddess Wadjet portrayed as a cobra) ~ Ar sabiyyu l-ḥayyah ‘the slough of a serpent’ (Lane 1303) || śrqj ‘als ein Name fur den Sonnengott’ (Wb IV 203) ~ Ar šaraq ‘sun’ (Hava 1982: 362) || gbb ‘earth’; ‘Name des Erdgottes Geb; auch für Erdboden’ (Faulkner 1962: 288; Wb V 164) ~ Yemen ǧabūba ‘Berg, Hügel’; ǧibb/ǧubb ‘Terrasse’ (Behnstedt 1992: 162) || ḥkꜣw ‘a god, the author of spells, incantations’ ~ Ar kalām al-ḥukl [= kalām lā yufham] ‘incomprehensible speech’ (Lisān XI 162) ~ Lebanon ḥəkle ‘rusé’ (Denizeau 1960: 117). Unlike morphological features, which are by nature genetically shared across extensive areas of the Arabic language continuum, lexical traits are systemically less predictable and, for that reason, very useful tracer elements, wherever they occur, for detecting and identifying the source of actual historical contacts. The links between Ancient Egypt and Western Arabia etched in the foregoing remarks serve to underscore the presence of Arabic in this region of the Peninsula a great deal earlier than used to be conventionally supposed in mainstream philology. For instance, Nöldeke (1887: 35) stated:

19

This would seem to suggest that the factor of religious affiliation throughout the ancient period of polytheism may correlated with linguistic boundaries.

24

Introduction

Um 600 sprach man in ganz Jemen, vereinzelte Distrikte vielleicht ausgenommen schon “arabisch” und dieser Assimilationsprozess setzte sich später fort. More recently, the virtual axial character of Yemeni vernaculars for a deep history of Arabic has been insightfully highlighted in Müller (2014: 89) stressing, furthermore, their important diachronic links with Sabaean: Words that have survived from Sabaean belong mainly to the semantic fields of geographical features, agriculture, irrigation, architecture, building materials, culture history, and foodstuffs. The present glossary records numerous lexical parallels linking both Arabian idioms to Ancient Egyptian exemplified in this display: g=ru₂=n (NK) ‘threshing-floor’ (Hoch 1994: 352) ~ Sab grnh ‘id.’ (Biella 1982: 77) || dq.w/dq (Med) ‘flour, powder’ (Faulkner 1962: 316) ~ Sab dqqm ‘flour’ (Biella 1982: 85) ~ Yemen daqq ‘trebbiare il grano’ (Rossi 1939: 293) || drp/dꜣp (Pyr) ‘to feed s.o.’ (Faulkner 1962: 315) ~ Sab rfd ‘support, help’ (Biella 1982: 493) ~ Daθīna rifdah ‘secours, aide’ (GD 1333) || rḫj.t (Pyr) ‘subjects of king, common folk, mankind’; ‘Untertanen, Volk’ (Faulkner 1962: 152; Wb I 447; Brockelmann 1932: 109) ~ Sab rʿt ‘flock, herd’; rʿy ‘shepherd, herdsman’ (Biella 1982: 491) || ʿryt (NK) ‘dwelling, home’ (Faulkner 1962: 45)20 ~ Sab ʿrrtm ‘ummauerte mit Befestigungen’ (Avanzini 1980: 107) ~ Yemen ʿalāli ‘rooms in a house’ (Piamenta 1991: 339). The ancient lexical correspondences with Safaitic are arguably also relevant here since the original homeland of its speakers is assumed to have been in Yemen (Peters 1978; Stein 1940: 95): ḥb (MK) ‘to grieve, mourn’; ‘trauern’ (Ember 1930: 78; Faulkner 1962: 167; Wb III 61; Hannig 1995: 522) || Saf ḥwb/ḥyb ‘to lament’ (Al-Jallad 2015: 323) ~ Yemen ḥawb ‘urging cry’ (Piamenta 1990: 112) || dꜣf ‘eine unbekömmliche Speise’ (Sethe 1962: 182); dꜣf ‘etwas verbrennen, erhitzen, kochen, verbranntes Fleisch’ (Hannig 1999: 994–995) ~ Saf ðfr ‘stench, stink’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 636) || ḫbꜣ ‘destroy, lay waste’ (Faulkner 1962: 187) ~ Saf ḫbl ‘mess up, damage’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 634). 20

Cf. Heb ‫ ֵמ ֲע ִליו ָׂתיו‬mēʿ ălyōtāw ‘from his upper chambers’ (Psalm CIV 13).

Introduction

25

Both literary and colloquial Arabic lexical sources have been routinely consulted throughout this study – with a distinct methodological focus on the latter. Whereas many Arabic lexemes can be shown to occur in literary and spoken usage, the latter source often retains lexical strata, apparently not recorded in written usage, displaying strikingly close cognacy with Ancient Egyptian terms. Thus the register cline between vernacular and literary usage is largely irrelevant to the lexical prehistory of Arabic. Noting a limitation of standard archaeology, Kandler & Crema (2019: 83) state: The archaeological record documents the frequencies of different cultural variants in sparse samples taken from the whole population for a single or multiple time intervals. Conversely, the rich, often dateable, language corpora to hand for ancient and modern offshoots of Afroasiatic render feasible areally extensive, in-depth assessment of formally and culturally significant interstitial clues clarifying cross-linguistic regional dynamics, such as the internal stratification and relative chronology enacted by individual idioms within this highly multifaceted and ethnolinguistically prolific phylum. The interactive profile of Old Arabic with its Near Eastern ecology remains, however, to this day, an obscure chapter of its diasporic prehistory that has yet to be seriously tackled with appropriate research tools calculated to highlight this ancient idiom’s formal, lexical, grammatical, and cognitive overlaps (inevitably interspersed with elements of entropy) specifically with its oldest Afroasiatic congener – Ancient Egyptian. 6

From Etymology to History

The broad exploratory horizon evoked in this innovative genre of comparative lexicon marks a notable departure from the narrowly defined taxonomic endeavours of traditional comparative Semitics deploying essentially mathematically inspired formalist and structuralist analytical approaches to distributional relations (in phonological, morphological, lexical, and syntactic domains) across this phylum, for instance, along lines expounded in Harris (1947, 1951). It invites the scholar to break relatively new ground, following in the steps of a salient trend within Near Eastern archaeology investigating this region’s human and cultural history from a cognitive perspective – “inferring psychology from behavioral traces in the archaeological and fossil record”

26

Introduction

(Coolidge et al., 2015). In a sense, the contents of this lexicon approximate a species of ‘fossil record’ postulating analytical linkage between etymology and sociocultural history, against the complex linguistic continuum afforded by the Afroasiatic phylum “which ranks the broadest and deepest of all language families to common wide acceptance” (Heggarty & Renfrew 2014: 316). Arabic, the focal point of the present work, also happens to be not only its currently best attested, but also its most widely spoken language, rendering it “the most important living Semitic idiom” (Blau 1969: 44). It consequently presents challenging new alleys for original diachronic inquiry highlighting its acknowledged composite character as the outcome of polygenesis, convergence, and entropy (cf. Edzard 1998). Furthermore, given the relatively undeveloped state of this research domain, it also invites experimental agendas entailing interstitial projects in the cultural and archaeological realms. The attainment of these empirical objectives presupposes a realistic appraisal of the semiotic nature of language. As noted in Lemke (1998: 87): Languages, or linguistic semiotic resource systems, are analytical abstractions from embodied social practices: from material speakings and writings and the activities that provide the contexts on which their cultural meanings depend. Speech always co-deploys at least paralinguistic, and normally visual-gestural semiotic resources as well. Underlying the perspective espoused in this research with respect to elements of cultural history ensconced in the lexicon is a kindred conception of meaning articulated in the writings of the philosopher Raymond Williams (1921– 1988). In the words of Barker & Galasinski (2001: 3): Williams insisted that culture be understood through ‘the analysis of all forms of signification … within the actual means and conditions of their production’ (Williams, Culture, 64–65) … The shared meanings of culture are not ‘out there’ waiting for us to grasp them. Rather, they are the product of signifying practices, most notably those of language. Language constitutes material objects and social practices as meaningful and intelligible, it structures which meanings can or cannot be deployed under determinate circumstances by speaking subjects. Braced with this suggestive empirical agenda, the lexical focus of the present research yields the historian an evocative record conjuring discourse functions

Introduction

27

and cultural categories shared by Ancient Egyptian and the Arabic vernaculars, thereby enriching the archaeological linguistic record while endorsing the empirical legitimacy of the bottom up methodological strategy. The diachronist’s basic methodological tool is etymology, which the noted philologist Walter W. Skeat (1912) designated ‘a science.’ Etymology ordinarily entails collation of phonological forms and pertinent meaning patterns shared by genetically related idioms or geographically interrelated languages. Much comparative lexical research commonly confines itself to cognate word sets sharing the most salient formal phonological and semantic traits – in essence, excluding from consideration potential cognates of a lexeme reflecting chronologically more remote evolutionary stages. As noted in Borg (2019a, §§4.1–4.3), the Ancient Egyptian word stock furnishes the Arabist numerous opportunities to elaborate etymological hypotheses and to progress from mere linguistic ‘book-keeping’ to creative analytical insights into dynamic sound shifts affecting cross-linguistic word sets. Given its complex structural links across the Afroasiatic phylum and beyond, the historical phonology of Ancient Egyptian is in many respects still unclear despite numerous analytic studies undertaken in the course of the last century. Hence the utility of etymological research exploring links with Arabic which is known to have retained an archaic phonological typology. Observe, by way of example, the phonological correspondences of the Ancient Egyptian grapheme ⟨ꜣ⟩ in lexical strata shared with Arabic. As can be deduced from the following display, these comprise not only Arabic /r/ and /l/, as is often supposed, but also /y/, instantiated as final segment of a triliteral root morpheme: nḏꜣ ‘parch with thirst’ (Faulkner 1962: 144) ~ Ar naǧara ‘von heftigem Durst ergriffen werden’ (Wahrmund II 986) || ḫbꜣ ‘destroy, lay waste, ravage’ (Faulkner 1962: 187) ~ Ar xabāl ‘ruin’ (Wahrmund I 572; Hava 1982: 157) || Middle Egyptian wḫꜣ ‘empty out, shake out’; ‘ausleeren’ (Faulkner 1962: 67; Wb I 353) ~ Ar xawiya ‘être vide’ (DAF I 651–2). Root-final /y/ in the last lexeme cited here actually also materializes in the surfface phonology of the Coptic cognate ϣⲟⲩⲉⲓⲧ ‘to empty’ (Crum 1939: 602b) continuing Old Egyptian šwꜣ ‘poor’ ~ šw ‘be empty, lacking; needy man’; ‘leer sein, leer machen’ (Ember 1930: 42; Albright 1918: 248; Faulkner 1962: 263; Wb IV 426, 428). At all events, the data adduced here call into question the blanket statement in Takács (2005: 89) to the effect that Egyptian ⟨ꜣ⟩ and Ar /y/ “do not correspond at all.” Middle Egyptian here interestingly retains the diachronically

28

Introduction

older lexeme wḫꜣ (= *xwy) ‘empty out, shake out’; ‘ausleeren’ (Faulkner 1962: 67; Wb I 353), representing the phonologically closer cognate of Arabic xawiya. Incidentally, the semantic range of the Ancient Egyptian lexeme is also strikiingly retained across the Arabic dialect area: Old Egyptian šwꜣ ‘poor’ ~ Rwala ayyām al-xawa‌ʾ ‘years of want’ (Musil 1928: 16) ~ Egypt xawyān ‘hungry’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 270) ~ Algeria xayy ‘faim’ (Lentin 1959: 77) ~ Djidjelli xwa ‘fait d’avoir faim’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 222). Further instances of the historical morphophonemic correspondence ⟨ꜣ⟩ : Ar /y/ show up in the following lexemic pairs: wḏꜣ ‘heil sein’ (Wb I 399) ~ Aleppo wað̣ ð̣a (< wð̣ y < wḍʾ) ‘purifier’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 899) || ḏfꜣ ‘reinigen’ (Wb V 571) ~ Egypt ṣāfi ‘clear, pure’ (Spiro 1895: 341) || ʿḏꜣ ‘Unrecht’ (Wb I 241) ~ Palmyra ʿēṣi ‘qui a mauvais caractère’ (Cantineau 1934 II 9). Of particular diachronic interest, in the present comparative context, is the fact that a great deal of the lexical material assembled for this glossary has been culled from documentation of Bedouin vernaculars spoken in various parts of the Arab world, which interestingly display a significant degree of homogeneity concomitant with their distinctive ethnolinguistic history. The following table citing lexical continuities in contemporary nomadic Arabic with different chronological strata of Ancient Egyptian is suggestive of close linguistic contact throughout its attested evolutionary history: Old Egyptian – drp (Pyr) ‘offer to god’ (Faulkner 1962: 315) ~ Najd rafdeh, pl rufāyid ‘Geschenke an Kleinvieh’ (Hess 1938: 101) || ḏʿ (OK) ‘storm, storm-wind’ (Faulkner 1962: 320) ~ Sinai ʿaǧǧih ‘dustcloud’ (Stewart 1990: 197) || śmn (Pyr) ‘Nile goose’; ‘Art Gans’ (Faulkner 1962: 228) ~ Rwala sammūne ‘a small dark-gray bird’ (Musil 1928: 40) || ḥyt/ḥwyt/ ḥw.t (Pyr) ‘der Regen, Sturm und Regen’ (Wb III 49; Hannig 1995: 515) ~ Rwala ḥaya ‘a copious rain’ (Musil 1928: 542) || ḏd (Pyr) ‘say, speak, recite’ (Faulkner 1962: 325; Wb V 622) ~ Najd ṣida ‘voice, cry’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 404) || thj (Pyr) ‘abweichen vom Wege’ (Wb V 319) ~ Rwala tāh, itīh ‘lose one’s way, to stray’ (Musil 1928: 318) || ḏꜣj (Pyr) ‘sich widersetzen’; ḏꜣyw ‘opponent’ (Wb V 514; Faulkner 1962: 318) ~ Najd ṣāleh ‘Feind’ (Hess 1938: 100) || ḥfn (OK) ‘great quantity’; ‘Hunderttausende (= Unzählige)’ (Ember

Introduction

29

1917: 87; 1930: 53; Faulkner 1962: 192, 168; Wb III 74) ~ Najd ḥāfil, pl ḥiffal ‘flowing copiously, abounding with, overflowing with’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 354) || ʿnḫ.t (OK) ‘Ziege (oder allgemeines Wort fur Kleinvieh)’; ‘goat, small livestock’ (Wb I 205; Faulkner 1962: 44) ~ Marazig ʿanāg, pl ʿanāyeg ‘chèvrette toute jeune’ (Boris 1958: 421) || ḏbn (OK) ‘Art Antilope’ (Wb V 568); ḏbnw ‘Kuh-antilope’ (Hannig 1995: 1005) ~ Rwala beden ‘ibex’ (Musil 1928: 25) [< badan] ~ Ḥesbān badan, pl bdūn ‘ibex’ (Palva 1978: 88); Middle Egyptian – nwy (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘to return to (r) a place’ (Faulkner 1962: 127) ~ Sinai nāwā ‘to return to one’s home (camel)’ (C. Bailey 1991: 454) || mi҆w ‘cat’ (Faulkner 1962: 104) ~ Copt ⲉⲙⲟⲟⲩⲉ ‘cat’ (Crum 1939: 55b) ~ Yemen mawwē/mawwa, ymawwi ‘miagolare’ (Rossi 1939: 219) || swbn ‘overflow’ (Faulkner 1962: 68) ~ Rwala wabel ‘a downpour for several days, inundating whole plains’ (Musil 1928: 11) || ḏdb ‘sting’ (Faulkner 1962: 323) ~ Najd ʿaṭab ‘Einem eine tiefe Wunde schlagen’ (Socin 1901 III 292) || wšd ‘to question s.o.’ (Faulkner 1962: 71) ~ Najd našad ‘fragen’ (Socin 1901 III 314) || tkk/tktk (MK) ‘take by violence; attack, assail’; ‘angreifen’; tkkw ‘attackers’ (Ember 1930: 112; Faulkner 1962: 302; DLE II 221; Wb V 331, 336) ~ Rwala katt ‘to rush upon, assault’ (Musil 1928: 598); Late Egyptian – ṯnf.t [< *čnf.t] ‘bag’ (Faulkner 1962: 306) ~ Najd kinf, pl knifeh ‘Säckchen aus Schafleder um Gewürz aufzubewahren’ (Hess 1938: 119) || ʿrq ‘to bind’ (DLE I 73) ~ Najd ʿagal ‘to tether’ (Sowayan 1992: 285) || bʿj ‘beachten, berücksichtigen’ (Wb I 446) ~ Rwala nabġī waṭanna ‘we long for our country’ (Musil 1928: 219) || wbg ‘to light, shine (of the sun)’; ‘leuchten, scheinen (von der Sonne); erleuchten, hellen’ (Faulkner 1962: 82; Wb I 296; Hannig 1995: 189) ~ Najd nbāǧ ‘to become resplendent, to appear in its lustre, to dawn’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 336) || bš ‘rapid (of water)’; bši҆ ‘spit out’; bšw ‘spittle’ (Faulkner 1962: 84, 85) ~ Najd ⟨bašša⟩ ‘ausströmen lassen (Schweiss)’ (Socin 1901 III 248). The maverick diachronic approach to the Ancient Egyptian word stock adduced in this study based on a vernacular Arabic database serves to highlight striking continuities overlooked in past comparative research, for instance, the retention of several Arabic cognates of Ancient Egyptian lexemes along the dialectal periphery of the Arabic Sprachraum, e.g., the vernacular of the Maltese Islands:

30

Introduction

Old Egyptian – bꜣk (OK) ‘arbeiten (besonders von schwerer körperlicher Arbeit)’ (Wb I 426)’ ⟨ħabrek, iħabrek⟩ ‘essere molto attivo’ (Vassalli 1796: 240) || wnwn (OK) ‘to sway to and fro’ (Faulkner 1962: 61) ~ ⟨venven⟩ ‘to vibrate’ (Aquilina 1990: 1503) || wdf (OK) ‘zögern, langsam sein, trödeln’ (Wb I 388) ~ ⟨deffa⟩ ‘the most difficult part of the task’ (Aquilina 1987: 219) || nmt (Pyr) ‘stride over’ (Faulkner 1962: 133) ~ ⟨lebbet, ilebbet⟩ ‘to run away’ (Aquilina 1987: 734) || grg (OK) ‘falsehood, lie’ (Faulkner 1962: 290) ~ ⟨qerq⟩ ‘inganno, frode’ (Vassalli 1796: 419) || npꜣpꜣ (LE) ‘to flutter’ ~ ⟨perper, iperper⟩ ‘sventolarsi in quá e in lá’ (Vassalli 1796: 559) || Late Egyptian – ḏb (LE) ‘to reply’ (DLE II 65) ~ ⟨wieġeb, iwieġeb⟩ ‘to reply’ || Demotic tryꜣ ‘tremble’ (DG I 388) ~ ⟨terter, iterter⟩ ‘tremare’ (Vassalli 1796: 94). On a more abstract plane, one notes striking cases of shared grammaticalization patterns enacted by individual lexemes, for example, terms deriving from the Semitic roots ḥsb and ṭwl; Demotic ḥsb.t ‘corresponding to’ (Simpson 1996: 224) ~ Damascus ḥasab ṭalabak ‘in accordance with your request’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 33) ~ Palest ḥasab rāyo ‘nach seiner Ansicht’ (Bauer 1957: 213) || ME m-dwn (of motion) ‘straight on’ (Faulkner 1962: 311) ~ Hijaz ʿala-ṭūl ‘straight ahead’ (Omar 1975: 252) ~ Damascus ʿala ṭūl ‘along’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 7). The afore-cited lexico-semantic correspondences between Ancient Egyptian and Bedouin Arabic usage deserve independent study within the ambit of diachronic research entailing a historical and comparative glossary of the nomadic Arabic vernaculars; for instance, highlighting continuities with Ancient Egyptian in the realm of “cultural ecology” by examining “the interaction of cultural processes with the physical environment” in a Near Eastern context (cf. Sanders 1962: 37).21 In Borg (2006), for instance, I indicated that Bedouin Arabic dialects retain traces of interaction with the Mesopotamian language area with which they share Akkadian and Aramaic traits.22 Taken together with the Ancient Egyptian 21 22

In Borg (2014), for instance, I addressed historical and comparative aspects of colour categorization in certain varieties of Semitic. Cf. also Holes (2018: 114f) focusing on the Gulf dialects. Bedouin vernaculars interestingly also retain a striking Akkadian trait in the infinitive verbal scheme faʿāl as in Rwala raṣāṣ ‘inflammation of a camel’s hoof’ (Musil 1928: 369); Negev Arabic sadād ‘implementation

Introduction

31

material presented in this work, these cumulative regional correlations suggest the cultural links of Arabian nomads with the two river valley civilizations of the Near East and, at the same time, define the regional dimensions traversed by the Arabic language in the course of its prehistory. 7

Ancient Egypt and Western Arabia

Reviewing medieval grammatical commentaries addressing Yemeni lexical traits in literary Arabic texts, Rabin (1951) interestingly voiced the following caveat: The continuity of linguistic development and the attention the dialect received from the philologists have also certain disadvantages for us. On the whole it is not possible for us to decide whether any particular piece of information refers to the time of the writer who gives it or to an earlier time. This comment highlights – if only by inference – the glaring need for independent, chronologically dateable sources of lexical and other types of language data, and evaluation of their potential significance by the comparatist engaged in diachronic study of Arabic. Rabin (loc. cit.) further notes that Yemen “is the most clearly defined of all regions of Arabia” adding that we are “from the lexicographical aspect, better informed about Yemenite than about any other dialect”; hence its paramount import in the present comparative context.23 Though it remains to be seen to what extent the narrative relating to the prehistory of Arabic can be attuned to the different periods of Ancient Egyptian, the interest and incentive to pursue the present line of inquiry were initially sparked off by the discovery that certain patterns of lexification and phraseology in the modern parlance of Peninsular (e.g., Yemeni) speakers of Arabic are anticipated in Old Egyptian, the language of the Pyramid Texts and later lexical strata exemplified in this display:

23

of blood vengeance’; kafān ‘hunger’; cf. Akkadian ʾakālu(m) ‘to eat’; barāqu(m) ‘lighten, shine, flash (eyes)’; ḫasāsu(m) ‘be conscious, remember’ (Black et al., 2000: 9, 38, 109). The modern descriptive linguistic literature on this regional dialect complex is particularly impressive, yielding for the present purpose, a rich source of lexical data: Landberg (1910, 1920–40), Goitein (1934), Rossi (1939), Behnstedt (1984, 1985, 1987, 1993, 2006), Piamenta (1990, 1991).

32

Introduction

mnm.t (Pyr) ‘Bett’ (Wb II 80) ~ N. Yemen manāmah ‘Bett’ (Behnstedt 1987: 308) || dr (Pyr) ‘expel, drive out’ (Faulkner 1962: 114) ~ Daθīna waddar ‘écarter, envoyer’ (GD 2911) || smnw (Pyr) ‘rungs of ladder’ (Faulkner 1962: 228) ~ N. Yemen sillamin ‘Treppe’ (Behnstedt 1987: 264) || isr (Pyr) ‘tamarisk’ (Faulkner 1962: 31) ~ N. Yemen aθlin ‘Tamarix aphylla’ (Behnstedt 1987: 227) || ḏbꜣ (OK) ‘to decorate’ (Faulkner 1962: 321) ~ N. Yemen jamīl ‘schön’ (Behnstedt 1987: 241) || dbn (OK) ‘weight’ (Faulkner 1962: 311) ~ Yemen ð̣ abal ‘schwerer Last’ (Behnstedt 1996: 741) || ḫbd (Pyr) ‘tadeln, verachten, hassen’ (Hannig 1995: 592; Wb III 257) ~ N. Yemen baġāð̣ ‘Abscheu’ (Behnstedt 1987: 233) || ndb (Pyr) ‘verwunden’ (Wb V 367) ~ N. Yemen laṭam ‘schlagen’ (Behnstedt 1987: 298) || i҆bꜣ (Pyr) ‘to dance’ (Faulkner 1962: 15) ~ N. Yemen liʿbin ‘Tanz, Spiel’ (Behnstedt 1987: 299) || ʿnḫt (OK) ‘goat’ (Faulkner 1962: 44) ~ N. Yemen ʿanāg ‘Lamm’ (Behnstedt 1987: 282) || nbḏ (OK) ‘destructive’ (Faulkner 1962: 130) ~ N. Yemen labaǧ ‘stark schlagen’ (Behnstedt 1987: 298) || ṯph.t [*čpht] (Pyr) ‘cave; Höhle’ (Wb V 364) ~ N. Yemen čahif- ‘Höhle’ (Behnstedt 1987: 297) || ʿꜣb.t (Pyr) ‘Krug zum Waschen’ (Wb I 167) ~ N. Yemen ġarbin ‘Wasserschlauch’; ġarb, pl ġurub ‘großer Wassersch­ lauch; Wassersack’ (Behnstedt 1996: 895; 1987: 283) || ṯꜣj (Pyr) ‘Vorwurf, Tadel; Vorwurf erheben gegen jemanden, tadeln, jemanden strafen’ (Wb V 349) ~ Yemen kayya ‘insolence’ (Piamenta 1991: 440) || nḏy (Pyr) ‘schützen’ (Wb II 374) ~ Yemen naǧǧēʾ ‘salvare’ (Rossi 1939: 234) || nśr (Pyr) ‘flame’ (Faulkner 1962: 140) ~ Daθīna rišin ‘être allumé’ (GD 1281) || dšr (OK) ‘(von der Herstellung eines Schiffes); ein Baum’ (Wb V 490, 491; Hannig 1995: 987) ~ N. Yemen šaǧarah ‘Baum, Pflanze’ (Behnstedt 1987: 267) || ḥw (Pyr) ‘food’ (Faulkner 1962: 164) ~ Oman ḥāyāt ‘food supplies’ (Eades 2011: 40) || jwsw (ME) ‘wahrlich’ (Hannig 2006: 147) ~ Yemen sawāʾ-sawēʾ ‘esattamente’; sawēʾ ‘uguale’ (Rossi 1939: 207, 243)|| mḥt ‘flood-waters’ (Faulkner 1964: 229) ~ Yemen bāḥ ‘hinunterfließen (Wasser)’ (Behnstedt 1992: 118) || btꜣ (NK) ‘wrong, crime’ (Faulkner 1962: 85) ~ Yemen buṭūr ‘permissiveness, not abiding by traditional moral standards’ (Piamenta 1990: 33) || śrqj ‘als Name für den Sonnengott’ ~ N. Yemen šargah ‘Sonne’ (Behnstedt 1987: 268) || nbꜣ.t (19th Dyn.) ‘Tragstange für den Kornsack’; nbꜣ ‘carrying-pole’ (Wb II 243; Faulkner 1962: 130) ~ Yemen nibūl ‘Stange’ (Behnstedt 1988: 148) || ṯnf (Gr) ‘tanzen’ (Wb V 380) ~ Yemen zfn ‘d’abord être agité et ensuite danser’ (GD 1843) || ꜣwḥ (LE) ‘Skorpion’ (Wb I 351) ~ N. Yemen waḥarī ‘Agame (Eidechsenart)’ (Behnstedt 1987: 312) ~ Najd wiḥir ‘Dornschwanzeidechse’ (Hess 1938: 84) || ʿḏꜣ (LE) ‘schuldig sein’ (Wb I 241) ~ Yemen ʿāṣī ‘colpevole’ (Rossi 1939: 200) || ḫrpw (Gr) ‘Ländereien’;

Introduction

33

‘district (?), estate (?)’; ḫrp ‘controller, administrator’ (Wb III 329; cf. Faulkner 1962: 196) ~ Yemen mixlāf ‘province, region’ (Müller 2014: 91). Yemen’s regional distinctiveness in the ancient Near East was ensured by its association with the South-Arabian culture, rendering it “the most clearly defined of all regions of Arabia” (Rabin 1951: 25). Visualized from a specifically linguistic angle, Avanzini’s position on Yemen (1980: 2) echoes the basic insight thematized in Rabin’s classic study spotlighting the pre-classical vernacular of Western Arabia characterized as a language which, while closely related to Classical Arabic, has from very early times developed along different lines and against a different background – in fact a different language…. West-Arabian was a nonliterary language. Its speakers have left us no written monuments from which we might attempt to reconstruct their language or culture. Hence the intrinsic historical interest of the Yemeni lexical correspondences noted above. Taking its cue from the lavish records of these two ancient branches of Afroasiatic, the present inquiry into the linguistic archaeology of the Arabic language adduces evidence validating the notion that Ancient Egypt was an early strategic site in its prehistoric development. The circumstance that dialectal Arabic lexical cognates of Ancient Egyptian lexemes coincide with modern dialectal isoglosses raises intriguing queries relating to the internal history of Arabian dialect geography. Recalling the fact that ancient Yemen has yielded a corpus of texts in South Arabian idioms other than Arabic, such as Himyaritic and Sabaean, these cross-linguistic correspondences with Old Egyptian are, in effect, the earliest recorded traces of actual ‘spoken Arabic’. In the scenario under review, the dialectally based approach has facilitated recovery of the past from the present by rendering possible a breakthrough revealing the aforecited striking continuities between Ancient Egyptian and Arabian vernaculars. The wealth and dialectal diversity of the Yemenite lexical heritage has elicited the following viewpoint from one of its most assiduous modern researchers: Ein Wörterbuch der jemenitischen Dialekte wäre gewiß ein will­ kommenes Hilfsmittel, nicht nur für die arabische Dialektologie und Lexikologie, sondern auch fur die Sabäistik und die vergleichende Semitistik. (Behnstedt 1987: 142)

34

Introduction

Confirming Behnstedt’s statement, Müller (2014) has documented Yemenite lexical strata shared with Sabaean. The links between Ancient Egyptian, Sabaean, and Yemenite emerging from the present inquiry represent a striking phylogenetic speciation that has been overlooked in comparative study of the Afroasiatic word stock. Lexico-semantic correspondences with Yemeni, extensively recorded in the main body of this work, serve to underpin the evident utility of dialectal Arabic sources for identifying etymological links of Ancient Egyptian lexemes, thus presenting a valuable alternative to exclusive reliance on literary Arabic (i.e., areally unspecified) sources and, in the present context, endorse the historical inference of the presence of a Arabic speakers in Ancient Egypt contemporaneous with the historical period leading up to and following the emergence of the Dynastic era. The significance of this premise needs to be assessed from an innovative archaeological perspective emerging from research contending that Bronze Age Yemen represented, in Avanzini’s view, ‘an autochthonous culture’ (2009: 207).24 8

A Paradigm Shift in Arabic Dialectology

This probe into the prehistory of Arabic foregrounding the ancient presence of this language in the Afroasiatic convergence area invalidates the historical model mediated by Charles A. Ferguson’s influential (1959) paper on the Arabic koiné, whose central thesis rests on the following stance: It has usually been assumed that the modern Arabic dialects are on the whole lineal descendants of Classical Arabic or of a variety very similar to this. (Ferguson 1959: 616) This viewpoint has had the unfortunate outcome of belittling the intrinsic value of historical approaches to the vernaculars by relegating their origins to relatively late Arabic language strata. A major paradigm shift, in this regard, was ushered in by the appearance of Blanc (1964), exemplifying for the first time in Arabic language research, an epistemic methodology combining an analytical approach to the 24

Note, in particular, the highly suggestive historical and cultural picture emerging from research on the so-called Sabir culture in Vogt & Sedov (1989) relating to coastal Yemen in the 2nd millennium BC, as well as evidence for prehistoric long distance trade contacts along the Red Sea reviewed in (Zarins 1989).

Introduction

35

dialectal Arabic database and its historical and regional dimensions insightfully collated with data provided in the commentaries of the medieval Arab grammarians.25 A salient outcome of Blanc’s pragmatic approach has been the scholarly permutation of a purely descriptive linguistic agenda to a synoptic discipline fusing the analytical dimension with regional Near Eastern history focusing, in this case, on the Mesopotamian and Syrian continuum extending to S.E. Anatolia – in effect, providing an interpretive framework for the descriptive data culled in dialectal fieldwork in this entire region. Blanc’s research showed how linguistic field data can become a vital informative tool in the quest to reconstruct historical and demographic processes underpinning the contemporary geolinguistic landscape stretching from the two rivers across the deep hinterland of the Eastern Mediterranean littoral. As indicated in Borg (1985: 150–159), this linguistic continuum extends to Cyprus.26 A further consequence of Blanc’s research is the realization that the Arab grammarians’ perspective widely encompassed the norms of spoken Arabic usage, ranging from mundane to rhetorical speech registers, entailing, at the same time, recognition of their traditional character associated with regional and/or ethnolinguistic (i.e., tribal) speaker affiliation. Following in Blanc’s footsteps, Levin (1994) has, in detailed fashion, demonstrated that the analytical methodology undergirding Kitāb Sībawayhi (8th c.) is oriented towards explicating the norms of spoken usage and is, accordingly, replete with references to speech patterns illustrating normative or atypical usage observed, for instance, in southern Iraq. Thus, though Sībawayhi’s ultimate objectives were not diachronic, his descriptive analysis – for instance, as displayed in the phonological sphere – insightfully elaborates schemas of cause and effect identifying dynamic processes, such as specific sound shifts which often yield salient historical developments in the Arabic vernaculars of his time and their modern offshoots.27 The synoptic perspective on the Arabic Sprachgebiet attained in Blanc (1964) can be said to have actualized an objective envisioned in a more general context in Bergsträßer’s aforecited seminal statement. Spurred on by the 25 26 27

In fairness to Blanc’s perception of the immediate diachronic origins of dialectal Arabic, one should note his mild disclaimer (1964: 183) as to the scenario of Classical Arabic being the antecedent of the modern vernaculars. On historical aspects of Cypriot Maronite Arabic, see Borg (1985; 2004). The profound impact exerted by Blanc (1964) on oriental scholarship should be evident from the extensive subsequent analytical literature probing the so-called qəltu-dialects of Arabic. A classic example of this analytic insight is exemplified by Sībawayhi’s detailed observations on the Umlaut shift entailing fronting of Old Arabic ā > *ē, commonly referred to as imālah.

36

Introduction

momentum of Blanc’s pioneering research paradigm, the present study draws primarily on a broad lexical base of dialectal Arabic forms to evoke a fresh diachronic perspective on Arabic as seen through the prism of its lineally inherited colloquial word stock. The long-term Braudelian dimension forefronting the impact of the spatio-temporal factor (i.e., le temps géographique combined with la longue durée) here reaches back beyond the conventional focus of literary Arabic to ancient Near Eastern geolinguistics ensconced within an Ancient Egyptian chronology. The focus on dialectal strata of the Arabic lexical heritage for comparative purposes, in preference to the literary code, echoes the viewpoint of the Egyptologist James Hoch who pointed up the theoretical problem for his discipline arising out of dependence on classical sources of Arabic as the sole source of comparative data, despite the obvious drawback that the standard Arabic dictionaries, draw their material mostly from elevated poetic and ritual linguistic usage rather than ordinary spoken norms: A methodological problem that has often surfaced – and not only in the study of Semitic words in Egyptian transcription – is the all too frequent comparison to obscure lexical items especially in the Arabic dictionaries. Arabic is a language with a rich lexical heritage, but it is often subject to abuse. (Hoch 1994: 8) The problematic task of integrating literary usage into an empirically based narrative recounting the history of Arabic as a native spoken language has been succinctly articulated in Rabin (1951: 17): A question sometimes confused with, but really quite distinct from that of the origins of the Classical language is the role it played in the linguistic set-up of pre-Islamic Arabia. Here there is substantial agreement among European scholars that to most or all of those who employed it for writing poetry, Classical Arabic was to some extent a foreign idiom which had to be acquired. The situation among the ancient Bedouin was in this respect just the same as among the Arabs of our own days, who compose their poetry in archaic and extraneous dialects. In point of fact, the Arabic dialect area yields the comparatist a virtually unlimited source of historically crucial lexical data: Familiarity with the diachronic literature on the Ancient Egyptian lexicon reveals that Arabic is, not surprisingly, by far the most frequently cited Semitic language, given its rich literary corpus comprising, ‘inter

Introduction

37

alia,’ extensive lexicographical data from the Middle Ages up to the present time, rendering it by far the best attested and most accessible branch of the Afroasiatic phylum. The evident utility of Arabic for etymological research on Egyptian logically also implies recognition of their close mutual relationship, the extent of which has yet to be determined and accounted for. (Borg 2019a: 2) The parallels between Arabic and Egyptian postulated throughout this study provide an extensive database highlighting a new approach to the comparative study of Arabic addressing its prehistoric stage. Given a situation where virtually unlimited lexical data are available, it becomes desirable and practicable to work with word sets generated along the trajectory defined by a particular lexeme (e.g., along a dialectal continuum) as opposed to an exclusive one-toone pairing of alleged etymological cognates. 9

From Ancient Egyptian to Old Arabic

As noted above, dialectal Arabic lexical and semantic patterns define the focal element in the implementation of this work’s diachronic objectives, since many Arabic roots shared with other Semitic languages can yield lexification patterns apparently shared uniquely with Egyptian, e.g., Semitic nwm ‘(to) sleep’ > Yemeni manāmah ‘bed’ is anticipated by Old Egyptian mnm.t. ‘id.’ Nevertheless, the task of pairing Arabic terms with respective Ancient Egyptian cognates can sometimes be a complex process, since delving into the phylogenetic prehistory of Arabic entails an engagement with a set of unclear systemic variables (e.g., in phonological terms) allowing for different degrees of certitude attainable in the realm of etymological matching; not least of which is the unclarity surrounding the sound values of individual Ancient Egyptian graphemes. Observe, for instance, the Arabic phonological correspondences with Ancient Egyptian ⟨ḏ⟩ which range across the entire Old Arabic emphatic consonant series, but also include reflexes of ǧīm: ḏrʿ ‘to lay low’ (Hoch 1994: 343) ~ Ar ṣarraʿa ‘to fling down’ (Hava 1982: 394) || wḏb ‘Ufer’ (Wb I 409) ~ Ar ḍaffah ‘bank’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 18) || ḏfḏf ‘to drip’ (Faulkner 1962: 322) ~ Ar ṭafṭaf ‘to drip from the side of a container’ (Masliyah 2017: 79) || sḏ ‘to break’ (Faulkner 1962: 257) ~ Ar šað̣ iya ‘to be split (wood)’ (Hava 1982: 366) || ḏšr ‘Schiffsbau, Baum’ < *šḏr ~ Ar šaǧarah ‘tree, shrub’ (Hava 1982: 352).

38

Introduction

The association of the Arabic alveopalatal affricate ǧ with this phonological class can be clarified by reference to Ethiopic, where the corresponding segment [čʾ] displays the articulatory feature of glottalization: Amharic/Argobba/ Tigrinya afənčʾa ‘nose’ (Kane 1990: 1358; 2000: 1550) ~ ME fnḏ ‘nose’ (Faulkner 1962: 98). A systematic comparative inquiry into the phonologies of Ancient Egyptian and Arabic would seem to be long overdue. The immediate goal of the lexical corpus garnered for this glossary is to create a broad groundwork for a review of Arabic prehistory, integrating its vernaculars and loosening the grip of prevailing deterministic attitudes to this research domain. Correspondences with other Semitic languages are obviously crucial in the present lexical context inasmuch as they spotlight and clarify polygenetic aspects of specific formal continuities under discussion. Of particular diachronic interest, in the present lexical context, is the case of Late Egyptian ḏft ‘kind of oil, oil of Alasia (i҆rs)’ attested in Papyrus Anastasi IV 15, 2–4 (cf. Caminos 1954: 608). Its Hebrew cognate ‫ ּגֶ ֶפת‬gepet ‘peat made of olive peels’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 263) supports a Canaanite source for this lexeme and subsequent infiltration of vernacular Arabic usage in the Levant and the Arabian peninsula: Lebanon žeft ‘résidu d’olives’ (M. Feghali 1928: 239, fn 2; Frayha 1973: 38) ~ Palest ǧift ‘Öltreber als Brennmaterial’ (Bauer 1957: 224) ~ Oman ǧift/ yift ‘(pearl) oil used to soften leather diving gloves (xubaṭ) at the beginning of the diving season’ (Holes 2001: 88); ǧaft/yift ‘a mixture concocted from alum and pomegranate peel, crushed into fine powder mixed with sugared water’ (Agius 2005: 148). The vernacular data cited here instantiate in phonological and semantic terms unbroken continuity with an Ancient Egyptian and Semitic lexeme apparently foreign to classical Arabic usage which here shows exclusively the Aramaic loanword zift ‘moût d’olives qui reste dans le sac après le pressage’ (Denizeau 1960: 221). The Arabic dialects retain an extensive lexical range of correspondences for Arabic ǧīm correlating with Ancient Egyptian ⟨ḏ⟩: nḏy ‘to save’ (Faulkner 1962: 143) ~ Aleppo naǧǧa ‘sauver’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 817) || nḏr ‘chips of stone’ (Faulkner 1962: 144) ~ Yemen naǧar ‘scalpellare pietra tenera o legno’ (Rossi 1939: 235) ~ Malta naǧar ‘asciare le pietre apparecchiandole per la fabbrica’ (Vassalli 1796: 530) || wḏnw

Introduction

39

‘flood’ (Faulkner 1962: 76) ~ Ar waǧīl ‘a pool of water’ (Hava 1982: 853) || wnḏw ‘associates’ (Faulkner 1962: 63) ~ Ar walīǧah ‘follower, partisan’ (Hava 1982: 892) || nḏꜣ ‘parch with thirst’ (Faulkner 1962: 144) ~ Ar naǧara ‘von heftigem Durst ergriffen werden’ (Wahrmund II 986) || ḏsr ‘to support, raise’ (Faulkner 1962: 324) ~ Iraq ǧisir, pl ǧsūra ‘beam’ (Clarity et al., 1964: 16) || nbḏ ‘destructive’ (Faulkner 1962: 130) ~ N. Yemen labaǧ ‘stark schlagen’ (Behnstedt 1987: 298) || ḏnḥ ‘wing’ (Faulkner 1962: 222) ~ Oman ǧnāḥ ‘Flügel’ (Reinhardt 1894: 46) || ʿnḏ ‘unguent’ (Faulkner 1962: 45) ~ Mardin ʿəlāǧ ‘Medikament’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 286) || ʿḏʿḏ ‘jubeln’ ~ Palest ǧaʿǧaʿa ‘Geräusch (Schreien)’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 11). The diachronic significance of these comparative data is that they attest to the palatalization of the Semitic voiced velar stop *g already in Ancient Egyptian, yielding a striking unrecognized parallel with Arabic *ǧ, whose internal diachrony in literary and vernacular usage has been addressed in Haim Blanc’s landmark 1965 study on the so-called qāl-gāl split: Arabic is the only Semitic language which has, since early times and in nearly all dialects, exhibited a general fronting of Semitic g to [gy], [dy], [ǧ], [ž] and the like. It is also the only Semitic language to exhibit, at least in many dialects, a general voicing of q to [g]. The two phenomena are not coextensive, but their unique co-occurrence in Arabic has led to two independent attempts to establish a connection between them. (Blanc 1965: 7) The systemic consequences of this sound change and of the further shift of *q > *g > *ǧ in Ancient Egyptian and several Arabic vernaculars spoken in the Arabian Peninsula and beyond warrant further analysis of their precise impact on the linguistic strata affected by these shifts; cf. Ar waraq ‘leaves, foliage’ > *wrǧ ~ ME wꜣḏ ‘papyrus plant, green’; cf. Iraqi ġamīg/ġamīǧ ‘deep’ (Clarity et al.,1964: 51) ~ Ar ġamīq ‘deep’ (Hava 1982: 536). Reviewing fronting phenomena addressed by the Arab grammarians, Rabin (1951: 50) discusses the trait called šinšinnah in Suyūṭī’s Muzhir I 34 referring to the specific shift k > š attributed to certain speakers of Yemeni Arabic. Rabin here insightfully endeavours to contextualize the data furnished by medieval sources within a broad regional continuum extending from southern Arabia to Ethiopia. The gist of the following remarks is that the phonological and grammatical features that Ancient Egyptian can be shown to share with Arabic

40

Introduction

vernaculars (both ancient and modern) may well exemplify salient systemic traits pertaining to a regionally defined typological profile represented to this day across the Arabian Peninsula in the speech patterns of Arabic and in South Arabian. Consequently, the patterns of segmental fronting exemplified in Ancient Egyptian yielding, for instance, the Old Egyptian shift of ḫ > š (Allen 2015: 3),28 invite close comparison with parallels noted in Arabic and modern languages of Southern Arabia. Interestingly, in this regard, Leslau’s descriptive sketch of the consonant system of Soqoṭri (1938: 42) has identified a salient palatalizing trend (mouillure) affecting specifically certain plosives and spirants: Les consonnes suivantes: d t ḏ ṭ; s; k g; l n; ḥ h peuvent être prononcées avec mouillure; cette mouillure résulte de la présence de la voyelle i (e) précédante l’une de ces consonnes. A parallel trend has also been noted for another South Arabian congener, Ḥarsūsi, where the segments č and ǧ in a lexical stratum shared with Arabic continue Semitic *k and *g, respectively: ačil ‘food’ < akl; čīs ‘pouch’ < kīs; čabdin ‘liver’ < kabd; yann ‘madness’ < ǧann; deyāyeh ‘chicken’ < daǧāǧah; yayb ‘pocket’ < ǧayb; yēš ‘army’ < ǧayš; ǧayb; yezīreh ‘island’ < ǧazīrah; fayr ‘dawn’ < faǧr (Johnstone 1977, s.v.). The proclivity to palatalization affecting velar and back velar plosives in certain phonetic environments, e.g., before front vowels, was also addressed by the medieval Arab grammarians in relation to a specific case of morphophonemic fronting of *k occurring in the second person pronominal suffix {-ik} (f). This Arabian dialectal trait was designated by the terms kaškaša and kaskasa referring to the respective shifts of the voiceless velar plosive kāf to š or s (Rabin 1951: 21). There has been a tendency in diachronic work on Arabic to address this trait in relative isolation on account of its grammatical association. The present stance suggests that this phenomenon is ultimately a manifestation of a more general phonotactic trait shared cross-linguistically with Ancient Egyptian. Note, for instance, the palatalization of OA kāf yielding [č] in the N. Arabian vernacular of the Rwala Bedouin:

28

Cf. Cairene labbiš ‘to confuse’ (Spiro 1895: 216) < labbax, conceivably, reflecting Coptic ⲁⲃⲏϣ ‘to mix’ (Crum 1939: 3a).

Introduction

41

Rwala čaff ‘hand’ < kaff; čelwa ‘kidney’ < kilwā (Musil 1928: 115, fn 7) || N. Yemen čahif- ‘Höhle’ (Behnstedt 1987: 191, 297) < kahf. Significantly, the fronting rule affecting the velar stop in Ancient Egyptian commonly occurs in lexemes with Arabic cognates: ṯph.t [*čpht] (Pyr) ‘cavern’ (Faulkner 1962: 304) ~ Ar kahf ‘grotto, cavern’ (Hava 1982: 668) || ṯs [*čs] (OK) ‘der Hals’ (Wb V 400); ṯst [*čst] ‘Wirbelknochen des Nackens, Rückens’ (Wb V 400) ~ Ar kusʾ ‘hinder part’ (Hava 1982: 653) || snṯ [*snč < skn] (MK) ‘to found house’ (Faulkner 1962: 234; Wb IV 178) ~ Ar sakan ‘dwelling’ (Hava 1982: 329) || ṯz [*čz] (Pyr) ‘to tie a knot’; ‘etwas knoten, knüpfen’ (Faulkner 1962: 307; Wb V 396) ~ Ar kazza ‘reunir sur un seul point’ (DAF II 943). These data invite a systematic historical and comparative study of the palatalization trend across the peninsular languages from an Ancient Egyptian perspective. 10

Cognitive Approaches to the Lexicon

As already noted in the opening section of this introduction, linguistic research focusing on the present to clarify the distant past, ideally extends its perspective to sister disciplines such as ethnography, anthropology, and archaeology with the aim of enhancing the cognitive dimension of the raw linguistic data by clarifying the strands of continuity in cultural categorization across space and time conveyed by shared lexical cognates. From an analytical standpoint, what is involved here is a perceptual shift from the synchronicity to the simultaneity of language, whereby the latency confronting the field observer of contemporary Arabic lexical patterns is translated into a concrete historical narrative through a cognitively oriented deployment of the comparative data presented against a sociocultural spectrum. Mapping of shared lexico-semantic strands in Ancient Egyptian and Arabic presented in this study is intended to furnish the basis for a culturally sensitive analytical approach to language history visualized in Bybee (2007: 945): As language is viewed less as a structured, tight-knit system and more as a variable, negotiated set of social and cognitive behaviors, the importance of language change increases.

42

Introduction

This viewpoint is particularly germane with reference to Near Eastern languages whose modern speakers often retain archaic sociocultural traits concomitant with traditional lifestyles entailing conservative patterns of social organization, such as tribal or confessional affiliation and concomitant kinship patterns. The composite cultural scope proffered by the Near Eastern linguistic landscape is, consequently, a fruitful ground for experimental approaches to historical linguistics combined with anthropological perspectives clarifying the nature and range of cultural continuities enacted across this region. In §2.1 above, I presented a set of lexemes shared by Ancient Egyptian and Arabic encoding the semantics of social relationships and intimating the presence of Arabic-speaking nomads on Egyptian soil. The following remarks present three further randomly selected lexical parallels corroborating the prehistoric symbiotic scenario under study. Borg (2014) addressed evolutionary aspects tangential to colour categorization in certain Arabic and Aramaic vernaculars spoken in this region.29 The study focused on habitual thought patterns shared across time and place by speakers of these languages in relation to the dark (i.e., green-blue-black) region of the colour spectrum, suggesting that these idioms are still undergoing a shift from brightness to hue categories. Ancient Egyptian lexified ‘green’ with the word wꜣḏ ‘papyrus plant’ and, as in modern Egyptian Arabic, this colour had a symbolic connotation conveying positive associations: Old Egyptian wꜣḏ ‘frisch, unverdorben; gedeihen; jung, glücklich’; m wꜣḏ ‘successfully’ (Wb I 264–266; Faulkner 1962: 55); cf. Egyptian Ar sana xaḍra ‘a green year’ = ‘a prosperous year’; ʾadamu axḍar ʿalēna ‘his foot is green for us’ = ‘he brings us good luck’ (D. Stewart 1999: 119). Greenness in the sense of ‘freshness’ was ordinarily attributed to bread, milk, cream, flour and salt, and to healthy limbs.30 A further opportunity for lexical engagement with the prehistory of Arabic from an ancient Afroasiatic vantage point is provided by different forms of the Old Egyptian biconsonantal root morpheme dp encoding a set of closely related terms and expressions referring to waterborne vessels, ranging from river-boats of different sizes to sea-going ships: 29 30

This study focused on the treatment of the green and blue colour categories in these languages against the background of ancient Semitic. This metonymic usage in relation to the concept of ‘green’ has also commonly noted in other languages (cf. Conklin 1955).

Introduction

43

dpt (Pyr) ‘Schiff zum Transport (auch grosses Schiff zum Transport einer Obelisken); Fahrschiff im Jenseits’; dpt nṯr ‘sacred bark’; dpt ‘build, construct boats’;31 dpw (Pyr) ‘Steuerruder’; dpy ‘Ruderführer (im Sonnenschiff), Schiff anfertigen’; iry dpt ‘keeper of the boat’ (Faulkner 1962: 312; Wb V 446, 447; Jones 1988: 66; Hannig 1995: 977).32 Whereas the Old Egyptian lexeme ḫwy (Borg 2019b) yielded an ethnographic perspective reflecting shared mental representations of a sociocultural nature in the scenario of cross-linguistic interaction, the Old Egyptian term dpt (Pyr) ‘ship’ and its numerous dialectal Arabic cognates reviewed in Borg (to appear) suggestively evoke a prehistoric maritime relationship between early dynastic Egypt and Arabia. Initially a Sumerian loanword in several branches of Afroasiatic, this lexeme significantly appears to retain its Old Egyptian maritime semantics mainly in Hebrew, Syriac, Cushitic and, very extensively, in the Arabic vernaculars: Sumerian dib ‘board of a door’/dub ‘(day) tablet, document, plate’ (Halloran 2006: 47) ~ Akkadian dappu ‘(wooden) board, (metal) plate; crossbeam, panel, page, leaf, plank’; dibbu ‘board’ (CAD III 106, 134; Parpola 2007: 21) ~ Hebrew dappīn ‘coniferous planks for hull’ (Sperber 1986) ~ Syriac dappē d-elāfe ‘oars’ (CSD 96) ~ Afar/Saho dibánā ‘Ruder’ (Reinisch 1893: 5) ~ Oman daffa ‘rudder’ (Agius 2005: 136) ~ Iraq daffa, pl -āt ‘rudder (of a boat or plane)’ etc. (see glossary under d-f-f ). The emerging picture yields a cohesive and areally suggestive word family plausibly lexifying an isogloss of a maritime lingua franca evoking Ancient Egyptian commercial traffic with ports along the Red Sea down to the Horn of Africa and the adjacent coast of Arabia. The available lexical documentation for this lexeme further endorses the intuition advanced in Borg (2019a, b) that Ancient Egypt was, from the Bronze Age onwards, if not earlier, a strategic site in the diasporic prehistory of the Arabic language. Cultural continuities linking Ancient Egyptian specifically to modern Egyptian Arabic reflect striking unsuspected cognitive parallels in their respective Weltbilder. In Borg (2019: 5), for instance, I suggested that the Old Egyptian term sn for ‘brother’ in the former language is cognate with the homophone sn

31 32

This work (p. 23) postulates the construction of wooden boats (as opposed to papyrus craft) by the end of the Predynastic period. For further detail, see Jones (1988) and Esposito (2018).

44

Introduction

meaning ‘two’ (cf. Heb. ‫ ֵׁשנִ י‬šēnī ~ Ar. θānī). The underlying cognitive stance in this lexification pattern confers on the neonate the status of ‘otherness,’ here implying a sequence whereby the child is perceived as a sibling preceded by its twin, the afterbirth. The background to this ancient popular stance is articulated in Rice (2003: 109–10): For the early Egyptians the placenta was evidently invested with exceptional power. The King’s placenta was carefully retained and protected throughout his lifetime on the evidence of examples in the tombs of lesser figures of the state…. The reason for the placenta’s exceptional status is not difficult to find. Because of its uniquely intimate connection with the living body of the god-king, protecting him from the moment of conception, growing with him in the womb and, in a very real sense, giving him life, it was conceived as another emanation of the King himself. The placenta was thus seen as a form of twin, the witness of the King’s alter ego, which, at his birth, was born into the realm of the gods. As his twin it coexisted eternally with the king and so the King himself was at the instant of his birth, two indivisible entities. The child’s sibling relationship to the afterbirth here proposed for Ancient Egyptian interestingly shows up (albeit reversed) in a modern vernacular spoken in Upper Egypt: il-walad ittāni ‘Nachgeburt’ (Behnstedt 1999: 270). Systematic analytical study of lexico-semantic continuities obtaining across a broad range of cultural categories would seem to furnish the comparatist engaged in longue durée research relating to the early history of the Arabic language a valuable alternative to a purely structural taxonomic approach. 11

Summing Up

This study set out to deploy an innovative approach to the early prehistory of Arabic by presenting a concrete database calculated to throw fresh light on its evolutionary trajectory. The sheer scope and complexity of the research domain awaiting further inquiry precludes its being anything but an initial step forward in what will hopefully become a well-trodden path leading to a epistemic study of the phylogenetics of spoken Arabic. The chief objective of the present glossary has been the task of proposing and documenting the viewpoint that the earlier prehistory of the Arabic language cannot be adequately clarified in isolation from an Afroasiatic context with

Introduction

45

a specific focus on its interaction with successive stages of Ancient Egyptian. From an Egyptological perspective, this study presents concrete evidence of thought-provoking lexical isoglosses difficult to account for in the current state of comparative and historical research on Ancient Egyptian – hence requiring to be probed in detail with due regard to both of these ancient languages scrutinized as embodied cognitive media rather than remote objects of philological discourse. The basis of this stance is the contention that even a routine constituent analysis of the Ancient Egyptian lexicon reveals on an impressive scale the incidence of close lexico-semantic cognates of Arabic terms intimating a case of cultural and linguistic convergence logically entailing the ethnohistoric presence of Arabic-speaking migrants on Ancient Egyptian soil, quite conceivably, as early as the Dynastic or pre-Dynastic period. From an Arabic linguistic standpoint, the present research has attempted to reverse the conventional perception of this idiom’s vernaculars as offshoots of a homogeneous koine evolving allegedly from the classical language in the aftermath of the Islamic conquest in the 7th century AD. The point of departure in this research has been a broad dialectal Arabic database undergirding a bottom up methodological approach here enriched with a deep historical perspective reaching back beyond the third millennium BC. Its guiding scientific axiom has been the stance that “historical study is not the study of the past, but the study of the present traces of the past” (Elton 1969: 20). Recent work probing the formative period of Bronze Age Egypt has highlighted aspects of cultural convergence and symbiosis evoking, for instance, the notions of ‘peer polity interaction’ and ‘core-periphery models’ (van den Brink & Levy 2002), however, without specific regard for internal ‘communal’ splits along an ethnolinguistic dimension within ancient Egyptian society itself suggested by certain well-defined lexical strata of Old Egyptian embedded within its Semitic component. In the last analysis, the prehistory of Arabic is intimately linked to that of its speaker community. In his encyclopedic (ten-volume) survey of the pre-Islamic period of Arab cultural and religious history, the Iraqi scholar Jawad ‘Ali (1907– 87) deplores the neglect shown by historians towards the Arab pagan heritage (al-jāhiliyyah) and proceeds to specify useful sources for its historical interpretation. Predictably, these comprise the corpus of epigraphic inscriptions, the pre-Islamic literary sources and the Arab historians, the Greek and Latin classics, Jewish writings, and the Christian patristic literature. Notwithstanding their undisputed utility, however, these materials are chronologically late

46

Introduction

when compared with the rich linguistic sources proffered by Ancient Egyptian that have yet to be seriously studied, specifically, from an Arabic diachronic perspective. Adopting a longue durée perspective, this study has ventured into virtually untrodden territory of diachronic lexical research on Arabic against the backcloth of a geolinguistic landscape extending across the ancient Near East. Ultimately, as already suggested in Borg (2019a: 88–94), the ethnolinguistic narrative adduced in this research presupposes ancient migratory trends whose likely prime-mover was international trade entailing language contact between Ancient Egyptian and Arabic, conceivably within the context of “a transregional Arabian diaspora comprising brokers or labourers from the resource-rich peninsula” (Borg 2019a: 89). In relation to historical time, the structure of contemporary Egyptian Arabic dialects has led Behnstedt & Woidich (2018: 64) to evoke the following nomadic scenario: The formation of the Egyptian Arabic (EA) dialect area several linguistic layers and the immigration of several Arab tribes over the course of history, but also the forced settlement of bedouin from one province to another. It is tempting to visualize this demographic narrative as a cyclical process with prehistoric roots. Though the presence of nomads in the Old Kingdom is frequently mooted in the technical literature, the early chronology of this interaction evinced by the linguistic facts has, however, yet to be matched in archaeological research. Power (2012: 323) states, in this regard: It is well acknowledged that both a sedentary and a nomadic Arab population has existed in the Sinai and the eastern Delta since at least the Iron Age (1300–600 BC), when the ethnonym Arab is first attested in the Akkadian records (Ammar 1941; Eph’al 1982: 93–100; Redford 1992: 348– 351; Figueras 2000: 64–91; Lloyd 2000; Hoyland 2001). Significantly, this demographic pattern evokes the modern case of close-knit groups of Bedouin and sedentaries noted in Holes (2018: 21) in relation to Oman, and in the afore-cited Egyptian case addressed in Behnstedt & Woidich (2018: 94). These scholars state (loc. cit.) that there is no dialect area in Egypt where bedouin tribes were not present in some form, and still are, and they

Introduction

47

have contributed to each area’s linguistic evolution and character through coexistence and mixing with the autochthonous population.3 M More recently, the topic of intercultural contacts between Egypt and the Arabian Peninsula in the Iron Age has been addressed in Sperveslage (2016): At present, the artefacts from the Arabian Peninsula provide insights into the intercultural contacts between Egypt and Arabia. The inhabitants of the oasis settlements dominated the trading networks as active parties. Forming their own identities within the framework of these networks, they developed a taste for prestigious objects of the nearby high cultures, integrating foreign elements into new contexts. In this respect, Egyptian influence seems to have been a prevalent factor – among the elites, and probably also among people of lower social classes. (p. 330) A salient socio-linguistic issue evoked by the Arabic data cited in this research relates to the containment of Arabic speech communities in Ancient Egypt. As already noted, it is an uncontested fact that both the character and content of literary texts in Ancient Egypt were essentially and exclusively the creation and cultural currency of a small social coterie whose literary concern was conformity to an elite ideal of refined speech; as noted in Goody (1986: 3), it was ultimately a case of “writing concentrated in priestly hands.” Wilkinson (2001: 303) states in this regard: From the beginning of Egyptian history, authority and literacy were inextricably linked. The general designation “scribe” simply indicated an official, since the ability to read and write secured access to the administration and hence a degree of political influence. For most of Egyptian history, the proportion of the population who could read and write is unlikely to have exceeded 5 percent, effectively restraining the reins of power to a tiny minority. Thus the historical significance for both Arabic specialists and Egyptologists of the documentation provided throughout the present glossary relates to the circumstance that it evokes the presence and integration into the social fabric 33

If this continuity of nomadic presence in Egypt can be certified, the incidence of Ancient Egyptian typological features in modern Egyptian Arabic etched in Borg (2019a: 84–86) may turn out to be genuinely ancient substratal traits.

48

Introduction

of the state bureaucracy members of an Arabic-speaking diaspora of settled nomadic migrants conceivably originating in the Sinai peninsula, presumably also empowered with a degree of socio-religious status.34 It may therefore be revealing to analyze the cultural content of Ancient Egyptian terms with Arabic cognates for semantic traces of a nomadic Weltbild exemplified in Borg (2019b). Shared cultural categories in these two languages are highly suggestive in the light of the inference advanced in Power (2012: 323) to the effect that Arabs, whether sedentary or nomadic are unlikely to have been mere “guests” in the desert regions of Ancient Egypt. 34

The reference to shared Ancient Egyptian and Arabic concepts in the realm of folk religion in §5 above invites a broad ethnolinguistic and archaeological inquiry.

References Abu-Haidar, Farida. 1991. Christian Arabic of Baghdad. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Agius, Dionisius A. 2005. The Life of the Red Sea Dhow: A Cultural History of Seaborne Exploration in the Islamic World. London: I.B. Tauris. Agius, Dionisius A. 2008. Classic Ships of Islam from Mesopotamia and the Indian Ocean. Leiden: Brill. AHW – von Soden, Wolfram. 1965–1981. Akkadisches Handwörterbuch, 3 vols. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Al-Asadī, M. Khayr al-Dīn. 1988. Mawsūʿat ḥalab al-muqāranah, 7 vols., ed. Muḥammad Kamāl. Aleppo: University of Aleppo Press. Al-Bakrī, Hazim. 1972. Dirāsāt fī l-alfāð̣ al-ʿammiyyah al-mawṣiliyyah. Baghdad: Maṭbaʿat Asʿad. ʿAli, Jawad. 1976. Al-mufaṣṣal fī ta‌ʾrīx al-ʿarab qabl al-islām. Beirut. Al-Jallad, Ahmad. 2009. The polygenesis of the Neo-Arabic dialects. JSS LIV/2: 515–536. Al-Jallad, Ahmad. 2012. Ancient Levantine Arabic. A reconstruction based on the earliest sources and the modern dialects. PhD. Thesis: Harvard University. Al-Jallad, Ahmad. 2015. An Outline of the Grammar of the Safaitic Inscriptions. Leiden: Brill. Albright, William Foxwell. 1918. Notes on Egypto-Semitic etymology. JAOS 34, vol. 2: 81–98; vol. 4: 215–255. Albright, William Foxwell. 1927. Notes on Egypto-Semitic etymology. JAOS 47: 198–237. Allen, James P. 1994. Colloquial Middle Egyptian. Some observations on the language of HEQA-NAKAT. LA IV: 1–12. Allen, James P. 2013. The Ancient Egyptian Language. An Historical Study. Cambridge: CUP. Allen, James P. 2015. Old Egyptian. UCLA Encyclopedia of Egyptology: 1–12. Allen, James P. 2020. Ancient Egyptian Phonology. Cambridge: CUP. Al-Selwi, I. 1987. Jemenitische Wörter in den Werken von Al-Hamdani und Našwān und ihre Parallelen in den semitischen Sprachen. (Marburger Studien zur Afrika- und Asienkunde. Serie B: Asien, 10). Berlin: Reimer. Altenmüller, Brigitte. 1975. Synkretismus in den Sargtexten. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Ambros, Arne. 2004. A Concise Dictionary of Koranic Arabic. Wiesbaden: Reichert Verlag. Ammar, A. 1941. Racial elements in the north-eastern province of Egypt: A study of ethnic stocks in Sharqiya: Part 2, Arab influence. JRAS 40, 161: 347–361. Aquilina, Joseph. 1987–1990. Maltese-English Dictionary, 2 vols. Malta: Midsea books. Arnold, Werner. 1998. Die arabischen Dialekte Antiochiens. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.

50

References

Arnold, Werner & Peter Behnstedt. 1993. Arabisch-Aramäische Sprachbeziehungen im Qalamûn (Syrien): eine dialekt-geographische Untersuchung. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Arnold, Werner, Michel Jursa, Walter W. Müller, & Stephan Procházka (eds.). 2009. Philologisches und Historisches zwischen Anatolien und Sokotra: Analecta Semitica in Memoriam Alexander Sima. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Assmann, Jan. 1969. Liturgische Lieder an den Sonnengott. Berlin: B. Hessling. Assmann, Jan. 2007. Creation Through Hieroglyphs: The Cosmic Grammatology Of Ancient Egypt. In: La Porta, S. & D. Shulman, The Poetics of Grammar and the Metaphysics of Sound and Sign. Leiden: Brill: 15–34. Avanzini, Alessandra. 1980. Glossaire des inscriptions de l’Arabie du Sud 1950–1973, II. Istituto di linguistica e di lingue orientali. Università di Firenze. Avanzini, Alessandra. 2009. Origin and classification of the South Arabian languages. JSS LIV/1: 205–220. Avishur, Yitzhak. 2008–10. A Dictionary of the New Judeo-Arabic Written and Spoken in Iraq (1600–2000), 3 vols. Tel Aviv – Jaffa. Archeological Center Publication. Badawi, El-Said & Martin Hinds. 1986. A Dictionary of Egyptian Arabic, Arabic–English. Beirut: Librairie du Liban. Bailey, Charles-James N. 1980. Conceptualizing dialects as implicational constellations rather than as entities bounded by isoglossic bundles. In: Göschel et al.: 234–272. Bailey, Charles-James N. 1992. Variation in the Data: Can linguistics ever become a science? Hawai: Orchid Land Publications. Bailey, Clinton. 1982. Bedouin war poems from the Negev. JSAI III: 131–164. Bailey, Clinton. 1991. Bedouin Poetry from Sinai and the Negev. Clarendon Press. Oxford. Bailey, Clinton & Avinoam Danin. 1981. Bedouin plant utilization in Sinai and the Negev. Economic Botany 35(2): 145–162. Bard, Kathryn A. & Rodolfo Fattovich†. 2018. Seafaring Expeditions to Punt in the Middle Kingdom. Leiden: Brill. Barker, Chris & Dariusz Galasinski. 2001. Cultural Studies and Cultural Analysis. A dialogue on language and identity. London: Sage Publications. Barnett, R.D. 1958. Early shipping in the Near East. Antiquity 32: 220–230. Barns, John W.B. 1956. Five Ramasseum Papyri. Oxford: OUP. Barr, James. 1987. Comparative Philology and the Text of the Old Testament. Winona Lake: Eisenbrauns. Barth, Fredrik (ed.). 1978. Scale and Social Organization. Universitetsforlaget: OsloBergen-Tromsø. Barth, Jakob. 1893. Etymologische Studien. Berlin: H. Itzkowski. Barth, Jakob. 1913. Die Pronominalbildung in den semitischen Sprachen. Leipzig: J.C. Hinrichs.

References

51

Barthélemy, Adrien. 1935–69. Dictionnaire arabe-français (dialectes de Syrie: Alep, Damas, Liban, Jérusalem). Paris: Paul Geuthner. Bauer, Leonhard. 1913. Das palästinische Arabisch. Leipzig: J.C. Hinrichs. Bauer, Leonhard. 1933. Wörterbuch des palästinischen Arabisch. Leipzig: Ballmann. Bauer, Leonhard. 1957. Deutsch-arabisches Wörterbuch der Umgangssprache in Palästina und im Libanon, [zweite Auflage unter Mitwirkung von Anton Spitaler, 1957]. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. BBAW – Altägyptisches Wörterbuch. Berlin-Brandenburgische Akademie der Wissenschaften. BDB – Brown, Francis, Samuel R. Driver & Charles A. Briggs. 1975. A Hebrew and English Lexicon of the Old Testament. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Beaussier, Marcelin. 1871. Dictionnaire pratique arabe-français. Alger: Bouyer. Beekes, Robert. 2010. Etymological Dictionary of Greek. Leiden: Brill. Beeston, A.F.L., M.A. Ghul, W.W. Müller & J. Ryckmans. 1982. Sabaic Dictionary (English, French, Arabic). Louvaine-la-Neuve: Peeters. Behnstedt, Peter. 1981. Weitere koptische Lehnwörter im Ägyptisch-Arabischen. WO 12: 81–98. Behnstedt, Peter. 1984. Elements for a dialect atlas of North Yemen. Al-Abḥāth XXXI: 5–44. Behnstedt, Peter. 1985. Die nordjemenitischen Dialekte. Teil 1. Atlas. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Behnstedt, Peter. 1987. Der Dialekt der Gegend von Ṣaʿdah (Nord-Jemen). Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Behnstedt, Peter. 1992. Die nordjemenitischen Dialekte, Teil 1: Alif-Dāl. Wiesbaden: Ludwig Reichert. Behnstedt, Peter. 1993. Glossar der jemenitischen Dialektwörter in Eduard Glasers Tagebüchern. Wien: Verlag der Österreichischen Akademie. Behnstedt, Peter. 1994. Der arabische Dialekt von Soukhne (Syrien). Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Behnstedt, Peter. 1996. Die nordjemenitischen Dialekte, Teil 2: Glossar, ðāl – ġayn. Wiesbaden: Dr. Ludwig Reichert Verlag. Behnstedt, Peter. 1997a. Sprachatlas von Syrien, (Beiheft). Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Behnstedt, Peter. 1997b. Koptisch oder Arabisch? WZKM 87: 31–39. Behnstedt, Peter. 2006. Die nordjemenitischen Dialekte: Glossar, Teil 2: Fāʾ–Yāʾ. Wiesbaden: Ludwig Reichert. Behnstedt, Peter. 2007. Coptic loanwords. EALL: 501–505. Behnstedt, Peter. 2013. Anmerkungen zum Arabischen von Darfur/Sudan. Nicht nur mit Engelszungen. Beiträge zur Dialektologie: Festschrift für Werner Arnold zum 60 Geburtstag. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz: 19–24.

52

References

Behnstedt, Peter & Manfred Woidich. 1985. Die ägyptisch-arabischen Dialekte, Bd 2. Dialektatlas von Ägypten. Wiesbaden: Dr. Ludwig Reichert. Behnstedt, Peter & Manfred Woidich. 1987. Die ägyptisch-arabischen Dialekte, Bd 3. Wiesbaden: Dr. Ludwig Reichert. Behnstedt, Peter & Manfred Woidich. 1994. Die ägyptisch-arabischen Dialekte, Bd 4. Glossar: Arabisch–Deutsch. Wiesbaden: Dr. Ludwig Reichert. Behnstedt, Peter & Manfred Woidich. 1994. Der arabische Dialekt von Soukhne (Syrien). Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Behnstedt, Peter & Manfred Woidich. 2005. Arabische Dialektgeographie: Eine Ein­ führung. Leiden: Brill. Behnstedt, Peter & Manfred Woidich. 2010. Wortatlas der arabischen Dialekte, Band I: Mensch, Natur, Fauna und Flora. Leiden: Brill. Behnstedt, Peter & Manfred Woidich. 2011. Wortatlas der arabischen Dialekte, Band II: Materielle Kultur. Leiden: Brill. Behnstedt, Peter & Manfred Woidich. 2018. The formation of the Egyptian Arabic dialect area. In: Holes: 64–95. Belfioretti, Luca & Tom Vosmer. 2010. Al-Balīd ship timber: preliminary overview and comparisons. PSAS 40: 111–118. Benfey, Theodor. 1844. Über das Verhältnis der ägyptischen Sprache zum semitischen Sprachstamm. Leipzig: F.A. Brockhaus. Benmamoun, Elabbas & Reem Bassiouney (eds.). 2017. The Routledge Handbook of Arabic Linguistics. London: Routledge Taylor and Francis Group: London. Benmimoun, Veronika. 2011. Texte im arabischen Beduinendialekt der Region Douz (Sudtunesien). Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Ben Sedira, Belkassem. 1910. Dictionnaire français-arabe de la langue parlée en Algérie. Alger: A. Jourdan. Bergman, Elizabeth M. 2002. Spoken Sudanese Arabic. Dunwoody Press: Springfield, VA. Bergson, Henri. 1907. L’évolution créatrice. Paris: Felix Alcan. Bergsträßer, Gotthelf. 1915. Sprachatlas von Syrien und Palästina. Leipzig: J.C. Hinrichs. Bergsträßer, Gotthelf. 1922. In Sachen meines „Sprachatlas.“ ZSVG, Band I Heft 2: 218–226. Bergsträßer, Gotthelf. 1924. Zum arabischen Dialekt von Damaskus. Leipzig: J.C. Hinrichs. Berlejung, Angelika & Michael Streck. 2013. Aramaeans, Chaldeans and Arabs in Babylonia and Palestine in the First Millennium BC. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Bettini, Lidia. 2013. Traditions et textes des Ṭayy de la Haute Jézireh syrienne. In: Kuty, Renaud, Ulrich Seeger & Shabo Talay, Nicht nur mit Engelszungen. Beiträge zur semitischen Dialektologie: Festschrift für Werner Arnold zum 60. Geburtstag. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz: 25–36.

References

53

Beyer, Klaus. 1998. Die aramäischen Inschriften aus Assur, Hatra und dem übrigen Ostmesopotamien. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht. Bezold, Carl. 1926. Babylonisch-Akkadisches Glossar. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. Biella, Joan C. 1982. Dictionary of Old South Arabic. Harvard Semitic Studies: Scholars Press. Birkeland, Harris. 1952. Growth and Structure of the Egyptian Arabic Dialect. Oslo: Jacob Dybwad. Blanc, Haim. 1964. Communal Dialects in Baghdad. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. Blanc, Haim. 1965. The fronting of Semitic G and the Qāl-Gāl split. PICSS. Jerusalem. Israel Academy of Sciences and Humanities: 7–37. Blanc, Haim. 1970. The Arabic Dialect of the Negev Bedouins. Proceedings of the Academy of the Israel Academy of Sciences and Humanities IV/7: 112–150. Blau, Joshua. 1955. Etymologische Untersuchungen auf Grund des palestinischen Arabisch. VT V: 337–343. Blau, Joshua. 1966–7. A Grammar of Christian Arabic, 3 vols. Louvain: Secrétariat du Corpus SCO. Blau, Joshua. 1969. Some problems of the formation of the Old Semitic languages in the light of Arabic dialects. PICSS. Jerusalem: The Israel Academy of Sciences and Humanities: 38–44. Bloch, Ariel. 1989. Plurals of multiplication, plurals of division. JSAI 12: 118–134. Bocthor, Ellious. 1864. Dictionnaire français-arabe (revu et augmenté par Caussin de Perceval), 3rd edn. Paris. Boivin, Nicole, R. Blench & D. Fuller. 2009. Archaeological, linguistic and historical sources on ancient seafaring: a multidisciplinary approach to the study of early maritime contact and exchange in the Arabian peninsula. In: Petraglia, M. & J.I. Rose (eds.), The Evolution of Human Populations in Arabia. Netherlands: Springer Academic Publishers. Bordreuil, Pierre & Dennis Pardee. 2009. A Manual of Ugaritic. Winona Lake: Eisenbrauns. Borg, Alexander. 1985. Cypriot Arabic. Stuttgart: Franz Steiner. Borg, Alexander. 1999. Linguistic and ethnographic observations on the color categories of the Negev Bedouin. In: Borg, A. (ed.), The Language of Color in the Mediterranean. Stockholm: Almqvist & Wiksell International: 121–147. Borg, Alexander. 2004. A Comparative Glossary of Cypriot Maronite Arabic. Leiden: Brill. Borg, Alexander. 2006. Lexical Aramaisms in nomadic Arabic vernaculars. In: Procházka, Stephan & Veronika Ritt-Benmimoun, Between the Atlantic and Indian Oceans: Studies in Contemporary Arabic Dialects. Proceedings of the 7th AIDA Conference, held in Vienna from 5–9 September 2006. LIT: 89–112.

54

References

Borg, Alexander. 2014. Towards a historical and cultural atlas of colour terms in the Near East. In: Anderson, Wendy, Carole P. Biggam, Carole Hough & Christian Kay (eds.), Colour Studies. A Broad Spectrum. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Borg, Alexander. 2019a. At the edge of Arabic language history: The vernaculars and the Middle Egyptian connection. WZKM 109. Band: 39–111. Borg, Alexander. 2019b. From etymology to diachrony: The semantics of ḫwy ‘to protect’ in Old Egyptian and Bedouin Arabic. LA 27: 1–16. Borg, Alexander & Sasson Bar-Zvi (forthcoming). A Concise Glossary of Negev Arabic. Borghouts, J.F. 1978. Ancient Egyptian Magical Texts. Leiden: Brill. Boris, Gilbert. 1958. Lexique du parler arabe des Marazig. Paris: Klincksieck. Bravmann, Max. 1977. Studies in Semitic Philology. Leiden: Brill. Breasted, Henry James. 1909. Burckhardt’s Altkanaanäischen Fremdworte. AJSLL XXV/4: 319. Breasted, Henry James. 1918. The Development of Religion and Thought in Ancient Egypt. New York: Harper. Breasted, Henry James. 1930. The Edwin Smith Surgical Papyrus, vol. I. Chicago: University Press. Brockelmann, Carl. 1928. Lexicon Syriacum, editio secunda et emendata. Halle: Max Niemeyer. Brockelmann, Carl. 1932. Ägyptisch-semitische Etymologien. ZSVG VIII: 97–117. Brockett, A.A. 1985. The Spoken Arabic of Khābūra on the Bāṭina of Oman. Manchester: Journal of Semitic Studies Monograph. Brose, Marc. 2014. Grammatik der dokumentarischen Texte des Mittleren Reiches. Lingua Aegyptia Studia Monographica 13. Hamburg: Widmaier Verlag. Brugsch, Heinrich Karl. 1867. Hieroglyphisch-demotisches Wörterbuch. Leipzig: Bruhl. Brugsch, Heinrich Karl. 1877. Geschichte Ägyptens. Leipzig: J.C. Hinrichs. Budge, Wallis Ernest Alfred. 1920. An Egyptian Hieroglyphic Dictionary, 2 vols. London: John Murray. Bybee, Joan. 2007. Diachronic Linguistics. In: Geeraerts, Dirk & Hubert Cuyckens, Cognitive Linguistics. Oxford: OUP: 945–987. CAD – 1958–2010. Chicago Akkadian Dictionary. Chicago. Oriental Institute. Glückstadt: J.J. Augustin. Calice, Franz. 1931. Über semitisch-ägyptische Sprachvergleichung. ZDMG 85: 25–37. Calice, Franz. 1936. Grundlagen der ägyptisch-semitischen Wortvergleichung. Eine kritische Diskussion des bisherigen Vergleichsmaterials, herausgegeben von Heinrich Balcz. Wien: Beihefte zur „Wiener Zeitschrift für die Kunde des Morgenlandes.“ Caminos, Ricardo A. 1954. Late Egyptian Miscellanies. London: OUP. Cantineau, Jean. 1934. Le dialecte arabe de Palmyre. Vocabulaire et textes (tome II): Beyrouth: Memoires de l’Institut Français de Damas.

References

55

Cantineau, Jean. 1946. Le parlers arabes du Ḥōrān. Paris: C. Klincksieck. Cantineau, Jean. 1951. Analyse phonologique du parler d’el-Ḥāmma de Gabès. BSL 47: 64–105. Cantineau, Jean. 1960. Études de linguistique arabe: Mémorial Jean Cantineau. Paris: Klincksieck. Cantineau, Jean & Youssef Helbaoui. 1953. Manuel élémentaire d’arabe oriental (parler de Damas). Paris: Klincksieck. Casson, Lionel. 1971. Ships and Seamanship in the Ancient World. Princeton: University Press. CDA – Black, Jeremy A., A.R. George & J.N. Postgate. 2000. A Concise Dictionary of Akkadian. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Černý, Jaroslav. 1976. Coptic Etymological Dictionary. Cambridge: CUP. Cesàro, Antonio. 1939. L’arabo parlato a Tripoli. Roma: Mondadori. Charles, Henri S.J. & Abd al-Majyd, Solayman. 1972. Le parler arabe de la voile et la vie maritime dans l’île d’Arwâd et sur la côte syro-libanaise‬. Beirut: Imprimerie Catholique. Charvát, Petr. 2002. Mesopotamia before History. London: Routledge. Clarity, B.E., K. Stowasser & R.G. Wolfe. 1964. A Dictionary of Iraqi Arabic: English– Arabic. Washington: Georgetown University Press. Cleuziou, S. & M. Tosi. 1994. Black boats of Magan. Some thoughts on Bronze Age water transport in Oman and beyond from the impressed bitumen slabs of Ras al Junayz. In: Parpola, Asko & Petteri Koskikallio (eds.), South Asian Archaeology. Helsinki: C. Hagelstam Antikvariat: 745–761. Clines, David J.A. 2015. The recovery of the ancient Hebrew language: The astonishing wealth of the unrecognized vocabulary. In: Bons, E., J. Joosten & R. Hunziker Rodewald, Biblical Lexicology: Hebrew and Greek Semantics. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter: 71–82. Cohen, Abner. 1969. Custom and Politics in Urban Africa: A Study of Hausa Migrants in Yoruba Towns. Los Angeles: University of California Press. Cohen, David. 1963. Le dialecte arabe ḥassāniyya de Mauritanie. Paris: Klincksieck. Cohen, David. 1964. Le parler arabe des juifs de Tunis, vol. I (Textes et documents linguistiques et ethnographiques). Paris: Mouton. Cohen, David. 1970. Dictionnaire des racines sémitiques, fasc. 1. La Haye: Mouton. Cohen, David. 1975. Le parler arabe des juifs de Tunis, vol. 2 (Étude linguistique). Paris: Mouton. Cohen, David. 1996. Dictionnaire des racines sémitiques, fasc. 6. Leuven: Peeters. Cohen, Mark E. 2011. An English to Akkadian Companion to the Akkadian Dictionaries. Potomac, MD: CDL Press. Conklin, Harold C. 1955. Hanunóo color categories. SJA II: 339–344.

56

References

Coolidge, F.L., Th. Wynn, K.A. Overmann & J.M. Hicks. 2015. Cognitive archaeology and the cognitive sciences. In: Bruner, E. (ed.), Human Paleoneurology, vol. 3: 177–208. Berlin: Springer. Corriente, Federico. 1988. El léxico árabo andalusí según P. de Alcalá. Madrid: Universidad Complutense. Corriente, Federico. 1989. El léxico árabo Andalusí según el “Vocabulista in Arabico.” Madrid: Universidad Complutense. Corriente, Federico. 1993. Léxico estándar y andalusí del Diwan de Ibn Quzman. Zaragoza: Universidad de Zaragoza. Corriente, Federico. 1997. A Dictionary of Andalusi Arabic. Leiden: Brill. Corriente, Federico, Christophe Pereira, Ángeles Vicente. 2017. Dictionnaire du faisceau dialectal arabe andalou. Berlin: De Gruyter. Cowell, Mark W. 1964. A Reference Grammar of Syrian Arabic. Washington, D.C.: Georgetown University Press. Crum, William Ewing. 1939. A Coptic Dictionary. Oxford: Clarendon Press. CSD – Payne-Smith, Jessica. 1903. A Compendious Syriac Dictionary founded upon the Thesaurus Syriacus of R. Payne-Smith, D.D. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Czapkiewicz, Andrzej. 1973. Ancient Egyptian and Coptic Elements in the Toponymy of Contemporary Egypt. Cracow: Jagellonian University. DAF – Kazimirski de Biberstein, Albert. 1860. Dictionnaire arabe – français. Paris: Maisonneuve. Dallet, J.M. 1985. Dictionnaire Kabyle–Français. Paris: SELAF. Dalman, Gustaf. 1928–39. Arbeit und Sitte in Palästina, 7 vols. [reprint., 1964] Hildesheim: Georg Olms. Dalman, Gustaf. 1938. Aramäisches-Neuhebräisches Handwörterbuch zu Targum, Talmud und Midrasch [reprint 1967]. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht. D’Alverny, André. 1964. Petite introduction au parler libanais. Second Fascicule: Vocabulaire. Beyrouth: Imprimerie Catholique. Day, John. 2013. The Recovery of the Ancient Hebrew Language: The Lexicographical Writings of D. Winton Thomas. Sheffield: Phoenix Press. Deines, Hildegard von & Wolfhart Westendorf. 1961. Wörterbuch der medizinischen Texte. Berlin: Akademie–Verlag. de Jong, Rudolf Erik. 2011. A Grammar of the Bedouin Dialects of Central and Southern Sinai. Leiden: Brill. Denizeau, Claude. 1960. Dictionnaire des parlers arabes de Syrie, Liban, et Palestine. Paris: G.-P. Maisonneuve. Depuydt, Leo. 2009. Review of Takács 2008. JAOS 129/4: 679–682. Destaing, Edmond. 1920. Vocabulaire français-berbère. Paris: E. Leroux. DG – Erichsen, Wolja. 1954. Demotisches Glossar. Copenhagen: Ejnar Munksgaard.

References

57

Dickson, H.R.P. 1949. The Arab of the Desert. London: George Allen & Unwin. Dieterici, Friedrich. 1894. Arabisch-deutsches Handwörterbuch zum Koran und Thier und Mensch vor dem König der Genien. Leipzig: J.C. Hinrichs. DLE – Lesko, L.H. & B. Switalski-Lesko. 2002–04. A Dictionary of Late Egyptian. 2 vols. B.C. Scribe Publications. Doughty, Charles Montagu. 1888. Travels in Arabia Deserta, 2 vols. Cambridge: CUP. Dozy, Reinhardt. 1881. Supplément aux dictionnaires arabes, 2 vols. Leiden: Brill. Driver, Godfrey R. 1925. A Grammar of the Colloquial Arabic of Syria and Palestine. London: Probsthain & Co. Drower, Ethel Stefana & Rudolf Macuch. 1963. A Mandaic Dictionary. Oxford: OUP. DUL – del Olmo Lete, Gregorio & Joaquin Sanmartín. 2015. A Dictionary of the Ugaritic Language in the Alphabetic Tradition, 2 vols., 3rd revised edition (translated and edited by Wilfred G.E. Watson). Leiden: Brill. Eades, Domenyk. 2011. A transitional Arabic dialect of the northern Omani interior. ZAL 54: 27–41. Ebers (papyrus) – Joachim, Heinrich. 1890. Das älteste Buch über Heilkunde. Berlin: Georg Reimer. Edel, Elmar. 1955/1964. Altägyptische Grammatik, 2 vols., Analecta Orientalia 34/39. Rome: Pontificio Istituto Biblico. Edzard, Lutz. 1998. Polygenesis, Convergence and Entropy. An alternative model of linguistic evolution applied to Semitic linguistics. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Edzard, Lutz. 1999. Comparable problems in the reconstruction of “Proto-language” and the reconstruction of “Urtexts.” In: Edzard, L. & M. Nekroumi (eds.), Tradition and Innovation: Norm and Deviation in Arabic and Semitic Linguistics. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz: 177–192. Edzard, Lutz. 2013. The philological approach to grammar. In: Owens, Jonathan (ed.), Oxford Handbook of Arabic Linguistics. Oxford: OUP: 165–184. Ehret, Christopher. 2001. The African sources of Egyptian culture and language. In: Cervelló Autuori, J. (ed.), África Antigua. El Antiguo Egipto, una Civilización Africana. Actas de la IX Semana de Estudios Africanos del Centre d’Estudis Africans de Barcelona, 18–22 de Marzo de 1996. Aula Aegyptiaca Studia 1: 121–8. Ehret, Christopher. 2011. History and the Testimony of Language. Berkeley: University of California Press. El-Hajjé, Hasan. 1954. Le parler arabe de Tripoli (Liban). Paris: Klincksieck. Elias, E.A. & Ed. E. Elias. 1974. Elias’ Modern Dictionary: English-Arabic, 19th ed. Cairo. Elton, Geoffrey R. 1969. The Practice of History. London: Fontana Press. Ember, Aaron. 1911. Kindred Semito-Egyptian words. ZÄS 49/1–2: 87–92. Ember, Aaron. 1912. Notes on the relation of Egyptian and Semitic. ZÄS 50: 86–90. Ember, Aaron. 1913. Kindred Semito-Egyptian words (New Series). ZÄS 51: 110–121.

58

References

Ember, Aaron. 1914. Mehri parallels to Egyptian stems with prefixed ḥ. ZÄS 51: 138–39. Ember, Aaron. 1917. Kindred Semito-Egyptian words (New Series). ZÄS 53: 83–90. Ember, Aaron. 1926. Partial assimilation in Old Egyptian. Oriental Studies Published in Commemoration of the Fortieth Anniversary (1883–1923) of Paul Haupt as the Director of the Oriental Seminary of the Johns Hopkins University. Baltimore; Hopkins University Press: 300–312. Ember, Aaron. 1930. Egypto-Semitic Studies (ed. Frida Behnk). Leipzig: Alexander Kohut Memorial Foundation. Englund, Gertie. 1995. Middle Egyptian, An Introduction. Uppsala: Uppsala University. Eph’al, Israel. 1982. The Ancient Arabs, Nomads on the Borders of the Fertile Crescent: 9th–5th centuries BC. Jerusalem: Magnes Press. Erman, Adolf. 1885. Ägypten und ägyptisches Leben im Altertum. Tübingen: H. Lauppschen. Erman, Adolf. 1892. Das Verhältnis des Ä gyptischen zu den semitischen Sprachen. ZDMG 46: 93–129. Erman, Adolf. 1904. Aegyptisches Glossar: Die häufigeren Worte der ägyptischen Sprache. Berlin: Reuther & Reichard. Erman, Adolf. 1933. Neuägyptische Grammatik. Leipzig: Lokay. Esposito, Serena. 2019. Riverboats and seagoing ships: Lexicographical analysis of nautical terms from the sources of the Old Kingdom. In: Manzo et al.: 30–52. Ess, van John. 1918. The Spoken Arabic of Iraq. London: OUP. Fagnan, Edmond. 1923. Additions aux dictionnaires arabes. Beirut. Libraire du Liban. Fassberg, Steven. 2009. The Jewish Neo-Aramaic Dialect of Challa. Leiden: Brill. Faulkner, Raymond O. 1958. An Egyptian Book of Hours. Oxford: Griffith Institute. Faulkner, Raymond O. 1962. A Concise Dictionary of Middle Egyptian. Oxford: OUP. Faulkner, Raymond O. 1969. The Ancient Egyptian Pyramid Texts. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Feghali, Michel. 1919. Le parler de Kfarʿabīda (Liban-Syrie). Paris: Imprimerie nationale. Feghali, Michel. 1928. Syntaxe des parlers arabes actuels du Liban. Paris: Imprimerie nationale. Feghali, Michel. 1933. Textes libanais. Paris: Maisonneuve. Feghali, Michel. 1935. Contes, légendes, coutumes populaires du Liban et de Syrie. Paris: Maisonneuve. Feghali, Michel. 1938. Proverbes et dictons syro-libanais. Paris: Institut d’Ethnologie. Ferguson, Charles Albert. 1959. The Arabic koine. Language 35/4: 616–630. Figueras, Pau. 2000. From Gaza to Pelusium: Materials for the Historical Geography of North Sinai and South-West Palestine, 332 BC–640 CE. Beer Sheva: Ben-Gurion University. Fink, Andreas. 2017. Der arabische Dialekt von Hasankeyf am Tigris (Osttürkei). Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.

References

59

Fischer, August. 1905. Arab. Aysh. ZDMG 59: 807–818. Fischer, Wolfdietrich. 1959. Die demonstrativen Bildungen der neu-arabischen Dialekte. ’s-Gravenhage: Mouton. Fischer, Wolfdietrich. 2006. Classical Arabic. EALL 397–405. Fitzmyer, Joseph A. & Daniel J. Harrington. 1978. A Manual of Palestinian Aramaic Texts. Rome: Biblical Pontifical Institute. Fix, Alan G. 1979. Anthropological genetics of small populations. ARA 8: 207–230. Frayha, Anis. 1973. A Dictionary of Non-classical Vocables in the Spoken Arabic of Lebanon. Beirut: Librairie du Liban. Freytag, Georg Wilhelm. 1837. Lexicon arabico-latinum. Halle: C.H. Schwetschke. Fück, Johann. 1950. Arabiya: Untersuchungen zur arabischen Sprach- und Stilgeschichte. Berlin: Akademie-Verlag. Garbini, Giovanni. 2004. The Origin of South Arabians. In: Alexander V. Sedov, (ed.), Scripta Yemenica. Studies in Honor of M.B. Piotrovkij, Moscow: 203–209. Gardiner, Alan. 1957. Egyptian Grammar, 3rd edition. Oxford: Griffith Institute. GD – Landberg, Carlo de. 1920–1942. Glossaire Daṯinois, 3 vols. Leiden: Brill. Geeraerts, Dirk & Hubert Cuyckens. 2010. The Oxford Handbook of Cognitive Linguistics. Oxford: OUP. GEL – Liddell, H.G., R. Scott & H.S. Jones. 1996. Greek–English Lexicon. Oxford: OUP. Gellner, Ernest. 1998. Language and Solitude. Cambridge: CUP. Goedicke, Hans. 1967. Königliche Dokumente aus dem alten Reich. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Goedicke, Hans. 1971. Near Eastern Studies: In Honor of William Foxwell Albright. Baltimore: John Hopkins University Press. Goitein, S.D.F. 1934. Jemenica: Sprichwörter und Redensarten aus Zentral-Jemen. Leipzig: Harrassowitz. Goldwasser, Orly. 1995. From Icon to Metaphor: Studies in the Semiotics of the Hieroglyphs. Fribourg: University Press/Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht. Goldwasser, Orly. 2002. Prophets, Lovers and Giraffes: Wor(l)d Classification in Ancient Egypt, Göttinger Orientforschungen IV. Reihe Ägypten 38, Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Goody, Jack. 1986. The Logic of Writing and the Organization of Society. Cambridge: CUP. Göschel, J., I. Ivić & K. Kehr (eds.). 1980. Dialekt und Dialektologie; Ergebnisse des internationalen Symposiums “Zur Theorie des Dialekts,” Marburg/Lahn. Wiesbaden: Steiner. Gralla, Sabine. 2006. Der arabische Dialekt von Nabk (Syrien). Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Grand’Henry, Jacques. 1972. Le dialecte arabe de Cherchell (Algérie). Louvain: Peeters. Grand’Henry, Jacques. 1976. Les parlers arabes de la région du Mzåb (sahara algérien). Leiden: Brill. Granqvist, Hilma. 1935. Marriage Conditions in a Palestinian Village, vol. 2. Helsingfors: Societas Scientiarum Fennica.

60

References

Gray, Russell, Quentin D. Atkinson & Simon J. Greenhill. 2011. Language evolution and human history: What a difference a date makes. In: Whiten, A., R.A. Hinde, C.B. Stringer & K.N. Laland. Culture Evolves. Oxford: OUP: 1090–1100. Griffini, Eugenio. 1913. L’arabo parlato della Libia. Milano: Ulrico Hoepli. Grigore, George. 2007. L’arabe parlé à Mardin. Bucarest: The University. Grotzfeld, Heinz. 1964. Syrisch-arabische Grammatik: (Dialekt von Damaskus). Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Gzella, Holger. 2014. Peoples and languages in the Levant during the Bronze and Iron Ages. In: Steiner, M.L. & A.E. Killebrew (eds.), The Oxford Handbook of the Archaeology of the Levant c.8000–332 BC. Oxford: OUP: 24–34. Halloran, James Alan. 2006. Sumerian Lexicon. Los Angeles: Logogram Publ. Hannig, Rainer. 1995. Ägyptisches Wörterbuch. Mainz am Rhein: Philipp von Zabern. Hannig, Rainer. 2003. Ägyptisches Wörterbuch I. (altes Reich und erste Zwischenzeit). Mainz am Rhein: Philipp von Zabern. Hannig, Rainer. 2006. Ägyptisches Wörterbuch II (mittleres Reich und zweite Zwischenzeit). Mainz am Rhein: Philipp von Zabern. Hannig, Rainer & Petra Vomberg. 1999. Kulturhandbuch Ägyptens. Wortschatz der Pharaonen in Sachgruppen. Mainz am Rhein: Philipp von Zabern. Harfouche, Joseph. 1923. Le dragoman arabe. Guide pratique de l’arabe parlé pour la Syrie, la Palestine et l’Egypte. Beyrouth. Harrell, Richard Slade. 1966. A Dictionary of Moroccan Arabic: Moroccan-English (edited by R.S. Harrell; compiled by Thomas Fox et al.). Washington, D.C.: Georgetown University. Harris, Zellig S. 1947. Structural Linguistics. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. Harris, Zellig S. 1951. Methods in Structural Linguistics. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. Hava, J.G. 1982. Al-Faraid – Arabic-English Dictionary. Beirut. Dar el-Machreq. Heath, Jeffrey. 2002. Jewish and Muslim Dialects of Moroccan Arabic. London: RoutledgeCurzon. Heath, Jeffrey. 2004. Hassaniya Arabic (Mali)–English–French Dictionary. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Heggarty, Paul & Colin Renfrew. 2014. Afro-Asiatic. Cambridge World Prehistory, vol. I: 315–320. Helck, Wolfgang. 1962. Die Beziehungen Ägyptens zu Vorderasien im 3. und 2. Jahrtausend v. Chr. Ägyptologische Abhandlungen (ÄA). Band 5; 1971 (verbesserte Auflage). Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Henkin, Roni. 2010. Negev Arabic: Dialectal, Sociolinguistic, and Stylistic Variation. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Herbin, François René. 1994. Le livre de parcourir l’éternité. Leuven: Peeters.

References

61

Hess, Johann Jakob. 1938. Von den Beduinen des inneren Arabiens. Zurich: Max Niehaus. Hillelson, Sigmar. 1935. Sudan Arabic Texts with Translation and Glossary. Cambridge: CUP. Hinds, Martin & El-Said Badawi. 1986. A Dictionary of Egyptian Arabic, Arabic–English. Beirut: Librairie du Liban. Hoch, James E. 1994. Semitic Words in Egyptian Texts of the New Kingdom and Third Intermediate Period. Princeton: University Press. Hodge, Carleton T. 1981. Comparative evidence for Egyptian phonology. In: Young, Dwight W., Studies Presented to Hans Jakob Polotsky. Beacon Hill, East Gloucester, MA: Pirtle & Polson: 401–413. Hodge, Carleton T. 2004. Afroasiatic Linguistics, Semitics, and Egyptology: Selected Writings of Carleton T. Hodge (ed. S. Noegel & A.S. Kaye). CDL Press. Holes, Clive. 2001. Dialect, Culture, and Society in Eastern Arabia, vol. I: Glossary. Leiden: Brill. Holes, Clive. 2018. Arabic Historical Dialectology. Oxford: OUP. Hommel, Fritz. 1879. Die Namen der Säugetiere bei den südsemitischen Völkern. Leipzig: Hinrichs. Hommel, Fritz. 1901. Geographie und politische Geschichte des klassischen Altertums: mit einer Einleitung über die Geographie und Geschichte des Orients bis zu den Perserkriegen. Munich: C.H. Beck. Hopkins, Simon. 1984. Studies in the Grammar of Early Arabic (based upon papyri datable to before A.H. 300/A.D. 912). Oxford: OUP. Hoyland, Robert. 2001. Arabia and the Arabs. From the Bronze Age to the Coming of Islam. London: Routledge. Ingham, Bruce. 1982. North East Arabian Dialects. London: Kegan Paul International. Ingham, Bruce. 1994. Najdi Arabic: Central Arabian. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Jamme, Albert. 1962. Sabaean Inscriptions from Mahram Bilqis (Marib). Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press. Jansen-Winkeln, K. 1996. Spätmittelägyptische Grammatik der Texte der 3. Zwischenzeit in alten Ägypten. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Janssen, J.J. 1975. Commodity Prices from the Ramessid Period. Leiden: Brill. Jastrow, Marcus. 1886. Dictionary of the Targumim, The Talmud Babli and Yerushalmi, and the Midrashic Literature. London: Luzac [reprint., 1903, Philadelphia]. Jastrow, Otto. 1973. Daragözü (eine arabische Mundart der Kozluk-Sason-Gruppe; Süd-westanatolien). Nürnberg: Verlag Hans Carl. Jastrow, Otto. 1981. Die mesopotamisch-arabischen Qəltu-Dialekte, 2. Band. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Jastrow, Otto. 1985. Lehrbuch der Ṭuroyo-Sprache. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Jastrow, Otto. 1986. Alles über Qat: Ein Text im arabischen Dialekt von Jiblih (Nordjemen). ZDMG 136: 22–55.

62

References

Jastrow, Otto. 1990. Der arabische Dialekt der Juden von ‘Aqra und Arbîl. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Jastrow, Otto. 2005. Glossar zu Kinderib. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Jayakar, A.S.G. 1889. The O’mánee Dialect of Arabic. JRAS 21/3: 649–687. Jespersen, Otto. 1924. The Philosophy of Grammar. London: George Allen & Unwin. Jiha, Michel. 1964. Der arabische Dialekt von Bišmizzīn. Wiesbaden: Franz Steiner. Johnstone, Paul. 1980. The Seacraft of Prehistory. London: Routledge. Johnstone, T. Muir. 1963. The affrication of kāf and gāf in the Arabic dialects of the Arabian peninsula. JSS 8: 210–226. Johnstone, T. Muir. 1967. Eastern Arabian Dialect Studies. London: OUP. Johnstone, T. Muir. 1977. Ḥarsūsi Lexicon. London: OUP. Johnstone, T. Muir. 1987. Mehri Lexicon. London: SOAS. Jones, Dilwyn. 1988. Glossary of Ancient Nautical Titles and Terms. London: Kegan Paul. Kammerzell, Frank. 1998. The sounds of a dead language: Reconstructing Egyptian phonology. In: GBS, Heft 121–41. Kammerzell, Frank. 2005. Old Egyptian and Pre-Old Egyptian: Tracing linguistic diversity in archaic Egypt and the creation of the Egyptian language. In: Seidlmayer, S.J. (ed.), Texte und Denkmäler des ägyptischen alten Reiches, Berlin: Achet, Dr. Norbert Dürring: 165–247. Kampffmeyer, Georg. 1936. Glossar zu den 5000 arabischen Sprichwörtern aus Palästina. Berlin: Reichsdruckerei. Kandler, Anne & Enrico R. Crema. 2019. Analysing cultural frequency data: Neutral theory and beyond. In: Prentiss, Anna (ed.), Handbook of Evolutionary Research in Archaeology: 83–108. Kane, Thomas Leiper. 1990. Amharic–English Dictionary, 2 vols. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Kane, Thomas Leiper. 2000. Tigrinya–English Dictionary. Hyattsville, Maryland: Dunwoody Press. Keimer, Ludwig. 1924. Die Gartenpflanzen im alten Ägypten, 1. Bd. Hamburg: Hoffmann & Campe. Kessler, Dieter. 2001. Eastern Desert and Red Sea. OEAE, vol. I: 418–422. Khan, Geoffrey. 2008. The Neo-Aramaic Dialect of Barwar, vol. 1. Leiden: Brill. Kitchen, Kenneth. 1971. The land of Punt and how to get there. Orientalia NS 40: 184–207. Kitchen, Kenneth. 1999. Poetry of Ancient Egypt. Jonsered: Paul Aströms forlag. Klinkott, H., S. Kubisch & R. Wollermann (eds.). 2007. Geschenke und Steuern, Zölle und Tribute. Antike Abgabeformen in Anspruch und Wirklichkeit. Leiden: Brill. Kloekhorst, Alwin. 2008. Etymological Dictionary of the Hittite Inherited Lexicon. Leiden: University Centre.

References

63

Kogan, Leonid. 2015. Genealogical Classification of Semitic: The Lexical Isoglosses. Berlin: de Gruyter. Köhler, Ines. 2016. Rage like an Egyptian. Hamburg: Helmut Buske. Kosack, Wolfgang. 2013. Koptisches Handlexikon des Bohairischen. Basel: Christoph Brunner. Krahmalkov, Charles Richard. 2000. Phoenician-Punic Dictionary. Leiden: Brill. Kressel, G.M. 1992. Descent Through Males. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Kurpershoek, P. Marcel. 1994–2005. Oral Poetry and Narratives from Central Arabia, 5 vols. Leiden: Brill. Lacau, P. 1970. Êtudes d’égyptologie I, Phonétique égyptienne ancienne. Le Caire, IFAO. Lambert, Roger. 1925. Lexique hiéroglyphique. Paris: Paul Geuthner. Landberg, Carlo de. 1901. Études sur les dialectes arabes de l’Arabie méridionale (Ḥaḍramoût). Leiden: Brill. Landberg, Carlo de. 1905–13. Études sur les dialectes arabes de l’Arabie méridionale (Daṯîna). Leiden: Brill. Landberg, Carlo de. 1940. Glossaire de la langue des Bédouins ʿAnazeh (publié par K.V. Zettersteen). Harrassowitz: Leipzig. Landgráfová, Renata. 2011. It is my good name that you should remember. Prague: Charles University. Landström, Björn. 1970. Ships of the Pharaohs. London: Allen & Unwin. Lane, Edward William. 1863–74. An Arabic-English Dictionary, vols. 1–8. London Williams & Norgate. Larcher, Pierre. 2010. In search of a Standard: dialect variation and New Arabic features in the oldest Arabic written documents. In: Macdonald, M.C.A. (ed.), The Development of Arabic as a Written Language. Oxford: Archaeopress: 103–112. LDA – Roth-Laly, Arlette. 1969–70. Lexique des dialectes arabes tchado-soudanais. Paris: CNRS. Leitz, Christian. 2002. Lexikon der ägyptischen Götter und Götterbezeichnungen. Louvain: Orientalia Lovaniensa Analecta: Peeters. Lemke, Jay L. 1998. Multiplying meaning: Visual and verbal semiotics in scientific text. In: Martin, J.R. & R. Veel (eds.), Reading Science. London: Routledge: 87–113. Lentin, Albert. 1959. Supplément au dictionnaire pratique arabe-français de Marcellin Beaussier. Alger: La Maison des Livres. Lepper, Verena M. 2008. Untersuchungen zu pWestcar. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Leslau, Wolf. 1938. Lexique Soqotri (sudarabique moderne). Paris: Klincksieck. Leslau, Wolf. 1962. A prefix ḥ in Egyptian, Modern South Arabian, and Hausa. Africa 32: 65–68. Leslau, Wolf. 1969. Hebrew Cognates in Amharic. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Leslau, Wolf. 1987. Comparative Dictionary of Ge‘ez (Classical Ethiopic). Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.

64

References

Leslau, Wolf. 1997. Argobba Grammar and Dictionary. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Lethem, Gordon James. 1920. Colloquial Arabic. Shuwa dialect of Bornu, Nigeria and of the region of Lake Chad. Grammar and vocabulary with some proverbs and songs. London. Levin, Aryeh. 1994. Sībawayhi’s attitude to the spoken language. JSAI 17: 204–214. Levin, Aryeh. 1998. Arabic Linguistic Thought and Dialectology. Jerusalem: Hebrew University. Levy, Jacob. 1924. Wörterbuch über die Talmudim und Midraschim, 4 vols. Berlin: Benjamin Harz Verlag. Lewin, Bernhard. 1966. Arabische Texte im Dialekt von Hama mit Einleitung und Glossar. Beirut/Wiesbaden: Franz Steiner. Lewis, Bernard E. 1995. The Middle East. A Brief History of the Last 2000 Years. New York: Scribner. Linstead, Stephen & John Mullarkey. 2003. Time, creativity and culture: Introducing Bergson. In: CO 9/1: 3–13. Lisān = Ibn Manð̣ ūr Jamāl al-Dīn Muḥammad b. Makram. 13th c. [1953 ed.]. Lisān al-ʿarab. Beirut. Littmann, Enno. 1931. Bemerkungen zur aegyptisch-semitischen Sprachvergleichung. ZÄS 67: 63–68. Lloyd, Alan B. 2000. “The Late Period,” in I. Shaw (ed.), The Oxford History of Ancient Egypt, Oxford Illustrated Histories, Oxford: OUP: 364–387. Löhr, Max. 1905. Der vulgärarabische Dialekt von Jerusalem. Gießen: Alfred Töpelmann. Loprieno, Antonio. 1995. Ancient Egyptian. A Linguistic Introduction. Cambridge: CUP. Loubignac, Victor. 1924. Étude sur le dialecte berbère des Zaïan et Aït Sgougou. Paris: Leroux. Macdonald, Michael C.A. 2000. Reflections on the linguistic map of pre-Islamic Arabia. AAE 11: 28–79. Macdonald, Michael C.A. 2010. Ancient Arabia and the written word. The development of Arabic as a written language. SPSAS 40: 5–27. Maclean, Arthur John. 1895. A Dictionary of the Dialects of Vernacular Syriac as Spoken by the Eastern Christians of Kurdistan, North-West Persia, and the Plain of Mosul. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Madouni-Lapeyre, Jihane. 2003. Dictionnaire arabe algérien–français. Paris: Langues et Mondes–L’Asiathèque. Manzo, Andrea, Chiara Zazzaro & Diana Joyce de Falco (eds.). 2019. Stories of Global­ isation: the Red Sea and the Persian Gulf from Late Prehistory to Early Modernity: Selected Papers of Red Sea Project VII. Leiden: Brill. Marçais, Philippe. 1956. Le parler arabe de Djidjelli. Paris: Maisonneuve. Marçais, William. 1908. Le dialecte arabe des Ūlād Brāhīm de Saïda (département d’Oran). Paris: Champion.

References

65

Marçais, William. 1911. Textes arabes de Tanger. Paris: Leroux. Martinet, André. 1975 (1959). La palatalisation ‘spontanée’ de g en arabe. In: Martinet, André, É volution des langues et reconstruction. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France: 233–247. Masliyah, Sadok. 2017. The Formation of Quadrilateral Verbs in Iraqi Arabic Dialects. Oxford: OUP. Mazzini, G. 2009. The ancient South Arabian root s2yṭ: Lexical and comparative remarks. EVO 32: 157–194. Meeks, Dimitri. 2003. Locating Punt. In: O’Connor, David B. & Stephen G.J. Quirke (eds.), Mysterious Lands: Encounters with Ancient Egypt. London: Institute of Archaeology, University College: 53–80. Meeks, Dimitri. 2010. Dictionnaire Égyptien Ancien – Français, fasc I. Université Paul Valéry: Montpellier. Meeks, Dimitri. 2015. Entre théorisation à priori et contribution à l’étude de la culture égyptienne. CE 90/179: 40–67. Meißner, Bruno. 1903. Neuarabische Geschichten aus dem Iraq. WS V: 137–174; VI: 57–125; VII: 266–276. Meltzer, Edmund S. 2001. Egyptology. OEAE, vol. I: 448–458. Mitchell, J.C. 1974. Perceptions of ethnicity and ethnic behaviour: An empirical exploration. In: Cohen, Abner, Urban Ethnicity. London: Tavistock Publications: 1–35. Morris, Ellen. 2018. Ancient Egyptian Imperialism. Oxford: Wiley Blackwell. Mourigh, Khaled. 2016. A Grammar of Ghomara Berber. Leiden: LUCL. Muḥīṭ – Al-Bustānī, Buṭrus (1867–69). Muḥīṭ al-Muḥīṭ [reprint 1983] Beirut: Maktabat Lubnān. Müller, Walter W. 2014. Sabaic lexical survivals in the Arabic language and dialects of Yemen. SPSAS 44: 89–100. Musil, Alois. 1908. Arabia Petraea, vol. 2. Kaiserliche Akademie der Wissenschaft: Wien: A. Hölder. Musil, Alois. 1928. The Manners and Customs of the Rwala Bedouins. New York: American Geographical Society. Nasr, Raja. 1966. English Colloquial Arabic Dictionary. Beirut. Nevin, Bruce E. 2002. The Legacy of Zellig Harris. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Nöldeke, Theodor. 1887. Die semitischen Sprachen: Eine Skizze. Leipzig: Weigel. Noonan, Benjamin J. 2016. Egyptian loanwords as evidence for the authenticity of the exodus and wilderness traditions. In: Hoffmeier, James K., Alan R. Millard & Gary A. Rendsburg (eds.), “Did I Not Bring Israel Out of Egypt?”. Winona Lake: Eisenbrauns: 49–67. Obermann, Julian. 1955. Early Islam. In: Dentan, Robert C., The Idea of History in the Ancient Near East. New Haven: Yale University Press: 237–310.

66

References

Omar, Margaret K. 1975. Saudi Arabic, Urban Hijazi Dialect. Washington, D.C.: Office of Education. Osing, Jürgen. 1976. Die Nominalbildung des Ägyptischen, 2 vols. Mainz: Philipp von Zabern Verlag. Osing, Jürgen. 1980. Lautsystem. In: Lexikon der Ägyptologie, Band III (W. Helck & W. Westendorf eds.) Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Osing, Jürgen. 2001. Review of Takács (1999). BO 58: 565–581. Osthoff, Hermann & Karl Brugmann. 1878. Morphologische Untersuchungen auf dem Gebiete der indogermanischen Sprachen, I. Leipzig: S. Hirzel. Owens, Jonathan. 1985. A Grammar of Harar Oromo (N.E. Ethiopia). Hamburg: Helmut Buske. Owens, Jonathan. 2003. Arabic dialect history and historical linguistic mythology. JAOS CXXIII: 715–740. Owens, Jonathan. 2009. A Linguistic History of Arabic. Oxford: OUP. Owens, Jonathan. 2013. History. In: Oxford Handbook of Arabic Linguistics. Oxford. OUP: 451–471. Owens, Jonathan. 2018. Dialects (speech communities), the apparent past, and grammaticalization. In: Holes: 206–256. Pairman Brown, John. 1995. Israel and Hellas. Berlin: de Gruyter. Palva, Heikki. 1965. Lower Galilean Arabic. Helsinki: Finnish Oriental Society. Palva, Heikki. 1978. Narratives and poems from Ḥesbān: Arabic texts recorded among semi-nomadic al-Aǧārma tribe (Al-Balqāʾ district, Jordan). Göteborg: Acta Univer­ sitatis Gothoburgensis. Palva, Heikki. 1992. Artistic Colloquial Arabic. Helsinki: Finnish Oriental Society. Parpola, Simo. 2007. Akkadian–English–Akkadian Dictionary. Helsinki: The NeoAkkadian Text Corpus Project. Parthey, Gustav. 1844. Vocabularium coptico-latinum et latino-copticum. Berlin: F. Nicolai. Patai, Raphael. 1999. Children of Noah. Princeton: University Press. Paul, Hermann. 1880. Prinzipien der Sprachgeschichte. Tübingen: Niemeyer. Peust, Carsten. 1999. Egyptian Phonology. An Introduction to the Phonology of a Dead Language. Göttingen: Peust & Gutschmidt Verlag Gbr. Piamenta, Moshe. 1990–91. Dictionary of Post-classical Yemenite Arabic, 2 vols. Leiden: Brill. Piamenta, Moshe. 2000. Jewish life in Arabic and Jerusalem Arabic in Communal Perspective. Leiden: Brill. Plas, Dirk van der & Borghouts, J.F. 1998. Coffin Texts Word Index, Publications Inter­ universitaires de Recherches Égyptologiques Informatisées, Vol. VI. Paris. Pokorny, Julius. 1959. Indogermanisches etymologisches Wörterbuch, 2 vols. Berne: A. Francke.

References

67

Polotsky, Hans J. 1970. Coptic. In: Sebeok, T.A. (ed.), Current Trends in Linguistics 6. Berlin: De Gruyter Mouton: 558–569. Pommerol, Patrice Jullien de. 1999. Dictionnaire arabe tchadien–français. Paris: Karthala. Porten, Bezalel & Ada Yardeni. 1999. Textbook of Aramaic Documents from Ancient Egypt. vol. 4, Ostraca and assorted inscriptions newly copied, edited and translated into Hebrew and English. Jerusalem: Magnes Press. Potts, D.T. & S. Blau. 1998. Identities in the East Arabian region, Mediterranean Archaeology, vol. 11: Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean in Antiquity: Proceedings of a conference held at the Humanities Research Centre in Canberra 10–12 November 1997: 27–38. Power, Timothy. 2011. The material culture and economic rationale of Saracen settlement in the eastern desert of Egypt. JEA 88: 187–225. Power, Timothy. 2012. ‘You shall not see the tribes of the Blemmyes or of the Saracens’; On the other ‘barbarians’ of late Roman Eastern Desert of Egypt. In: Barnard, Hans & Kim Duistermaat, The History of the Peoples of the Eastern Desert. Los Angeles: Cotsen Institute of Archaeology Press: 323–339. Prémare, A.-L. de. 1993–99. Dictionnaire Arabe-Français. 12 vols. Paris: Harmattan. Pring, J.T. 2000. The Pocket Oxford Greek Dictionary. Oxford: OUP. Procházka, Stephan. 2002. Die arabischen Dialekte der Çukurova (Südtürkei). Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Qafisheh, A. Hamdi. 2000. Yemenite Arabic-English Dictionary. Lincolnwood, IL: NTC Publishing Company. Quack, Joachim Friedrich. 2005. The Demotic and Greco-Egyptian Literature. Münster: Lit. Quack, Joachim Friedrich. 2012. To clothe or to wipe? On the semantics of the verb nms, in: E. Grossman, St. Polis, J. Winand (eds.), Lexical Semantics in Ancient Egyptian, Lingua Aegyptia Studia Monographica 9. Hamburg: Widmaier Verlag: 379–386. Quételet, Adolphe. 1835. Sur l’homme et le développement de ses facultés, ou essai de physique sociale. Paris: Bachelier. Rabin, Chaim. 1951. Ancient West-Arabian. London: Taylor’s Foreign Press. Rabin, Chaim. 1963. The origin of the subdivisions of Semitic. In: Thomas, Winton, D. and W.D. McHardy (eds.), Hebrew and Semitic Studies Presented to Godfrey Rolles Driver in Celebration of His Seventieth Birthday. Oxford: Clarendon Press: 104–115. Radionov, Mikhail A. 2007. The Western Hað̣ ramawt: Ethnographic Field Research, 1983–91. Halle: Orientwissenschaftliches Zentrum. Ranke, Hermann. 1935. Die ägyptischen Personennamen, Bd. 1: Verzeichnis der Namen. Glückstadt: J.J. Augustin. Redford, D.B. 1992. Egypt, Canaan and Israel in Ancient Times. Princeton: University Press.

68

References

Reichmuth, Stefan. 1983. Der arabische Dialekt der Šukriyya im Ostsudan. Hildesheim: Georg Olms. Reinhardt, Carl. 1894. Ein arabischer Dialekt, gesprochen in Oman und Zanzibar. Stuttgart: W. Spemann. Reinisch, Leo. 1893. Die Beḍauye-Sprache in Nordost-Afrika II. Wien: F. Tempsky. Renfrew, Colin. 1987. Archaeology and Language: The Puzzle of Indo-European Origins. Cambridge: CUP. Retsö, Jan. 2003. The Arabs in Antiquity. London: RoutledgeCurzon. Rhodokanakis, Nikolaus. 1911. Der vulgärarabische Dialekt im Dofar (Zfar). Wien: Alfred Hölder. Richter, Tonio Sebastian. 2017. Whatever in the Coptic language is not Greek, can wholly be considered Ancient Egyptian: Recent approaches toward an integrated view of the Egyptian-Coptic lexicon. JCSCS 9: 9–32. Ritt-Benmimoun, Veronika. 2005. Phonologie und Morphologie des arabischen Dialekts der Marazig (Sudtunesien). Wien (Dissertation). Roset, Caroline. 2018. A Grammar of Darfur Arabic. Amsterdam: LOT. Rossi, Ettore. 1939. L’arabo parlato a Ṣanʿāʾ. Roma: Istituto per l’Oriente. Rössler, Otto. 1971. Das Ägyptische als semitische Sprache. In: Altheim, F. & R. Stiehl (eds.), Christentum am Roten Meer, 1. Band. Berlin: De Gruyter: 263–326. Roth-Laly, Arlette. 1969–70. Lexique des dialectes arabes tchado-soudanais. Paris: CNRS. Rubin, Aaron. 2004. An Outline of comparative Egypto-Semitic morphology. In: Takács, Gábor (ed.), Egyptian and Semito-Hamitic (Afro-Asiatic) Studies in Memo­ riam Werner Vycichl. Leiden: Brill: 454–486. Sabar, Jona. 2002. A Jewish Neo-Aramaic Dictionary. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Sanders, William. 1962. Cultural ecology of nuclear Mesoamerica. AA 64: 34–44. Satzinger, Helmut. 2002. The Egyptian connection: Egyptian and the Semitic languages. IOS 20: 227–264. Satzinger, Helmut. 2015. A lexicon of Egyptian lexical roots (project). QVO IX: 213–224. Scheele-Schweitzer, K. 2014. Die Personennamen des alten Reiches: Altägyptische Onomastik unter lexicographischen und sozio-kulturellen Aspekten. Philippika 28. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Schenkel, Wolfgang. 1990. Einführung in die altägyptische Sprachwissenschaft. Darmstadt: Wissenschaftliche Buchgesellschaft. Schipper, B.U. 2005. Die Erzählung des Wenamun. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht. Schmidt, Hans & Paul Kahle. 1918–1930. Volkserzählungen aus Palästina, gesammelt bei den Bauern von Bir-Zet, 2 vols. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht. Schmidt, Johannes. 1872. Die Verwandtschaftsverhältnisse der indogermanischen Sprachen. Weimar: Böhlau. Schwiderski, Dirk. 2008. Die alt- und reichsaramäischen Inschriften. Berlin: de Gruyter. Segal, J.B. 1983. Aramaic Texts from North Saqqāra. London: Egypt Exploration Society.

References

69

Seidlmayer, S.J. 2007. Gabe und Abgaben im Ägypten des alten Reiches. In: Klinkott et al.: 31–63. Serpico, Margaret & R. White. 2000. The botanical identity and transport of incense during the Egyptian New Kingdom. Antiquity 74: 884–897. Sethe, Kurt. 1962. Übersetzung und Kommentar zu den altägyptischen Pyramidentexten, VI (Index). Hamburg: J.J. Augustin. Shweder, Richard A. 1991. Thinking Through Cultures: Expeditions in Cultural Psychology. Cambridge, MA & London: Harvard University Press. Simonsen, Jørgen Bæk. 2000. Mecca and Medina: Arab city-states or Arab caravancities? In: Hansen, Mogens Herman (ed.), A Comparative Study of Thirty City-state Cultures. Copenhagen: C.A. Reitzels Forlag: 241–249. Simpson, R.S. 1996. Demotic Grammar in the Ptolemaic Sacerdotal Decrees. Oxford: Griffith Institute. Singer, Hans-Rudolf. 1984. Grammatik der arabischen Mundart der Medina von Tunis. Berlin: Walter von Gruyter. Skeat, Walter W. 1912. The Science of Etymology. Oxford: OUP. Sobelman, H. & R.S. Harrell. 1963. A Dictionary of Moroccan Arabic. Washington, D.C.: Georgetown University Press. Socin, Albert. 1882. Die neu-aramäischen Dialekte von Urmia bis Mossul. Tübingen: H. Laupp. Socin, Albert. 1898. Die Sprache der Kurden. Straßburg: Karl J. Trübner. Socin, Albert. 1901. Diwan aus Centralarabien (Teil III) (hrsg. von Hans Stumme). Leipzig: B.G. Teubner. Sokoloff, Michael. 2002. A Dictionary of Jewish Palestinian Aramaic of the Byzantine Period, 2nd ed. Ramat Gan; Bar-Ilan Univ. Press; Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press. Sokoloff, Michael. 2009. Syriac Dictionary. Winona Lake: Eisenbrauns/Gorgias Press. Sowayan, Saad Abdullah. 1985. Nabaṭi Poetry: The Oral Poetry of Arabia. Berkeley: University of California Press. Sowayan, Saad Abdullah. 1992. The Arabian Oral Historical Narrative. An Ethnographic and Linguistic Analysis. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Sperber, Daniel. 1986. Nautica Talmudica. Ramat Gan: Bar Ilan University & Leiden: Brill. Sperveslage, Gunnar. 2016. Intercultural contacts between Egypt and the Arabian Peninsula at the turn of the 2nd to the 1st millennium BC. In: Moreno Garcia, J.C. (ed.), Dynamics of Production in the Ancient Near East 1300–500 BC. Oxford: Oxbow Books: 303–330. Spiegelberg, Wilhelm. 1921. Koptisches Handwörterbuch. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. Spiro, Socrates. 1895. An Arabic–English Dictionary of the Colloquial Arabic of Egypt. Cairo.

70

References

Spitta, Wilhelm. 1880. Grammatik des arabischen Vulgärdialectes von Aegypten. Leipzig: J.C. Hinrichs. Stace, Edward Vincent. 1893. An English–Arabic Vocabulary. London: B. Quaritch. Stein, Peter. 2010. Die altsüdarabischen Minuskelinschriften auf Holzstäbschen aus der Bayerischen Staatsbibliothek in Mūnchen. 1. Die Inschriften der mittel- und spätsabäischen Periode. Verzeichnisse und Tafeln. Epigraphische Forschungen auf der Arabischen Halbinsel, 5. Tübingen: Wasmuth. Steiner, Richard C. 2011. Early Northwest Semitic Serpent Spells in the Pyramid Texts. Winona Lake: Eisenbrauns. Stewart, Devin. 1999. Color terms in Egyptian Arabic. In: Borg, A. (ed.), The Language of Color in the Mediterranean. Stockholm: Almqvist & Wiksell International: 105–120. Stewart, Frank. 1990. Texts in Sinai Bedouin Law. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Stowasser, Karl & Moukhtar Ani. 1964. A Dictionary of Syrian Arabic. Washington, D.C.: Georgetown University Press. Stumme, Hans. 1896. Grammatik des tunisischen Arabisch (Tunis). Leipzig: J.C. Hinrichs. Taine-Cheikh, Catherine. 1990. Dictionnaire Ḥassāniyya-français. Paris: Paul Geuthner. Tait, W.J. 1977. Papyri from Tebtunis in Egyptian and in Greek. London: Egypt Exploration Society. Takács, Gábor. 1999. Etymological Dictionary of Egyptian, vol. 1. A phonological introduction. Leiden: Brill. Takács, Gábor. 2001. Etymological Dictionary of Egyptian, vol. 2. b-, p-, f-. Leiden: Brill. Takács, Gábor. 2005. Recent problems of Semitic-Egyptian and Semito-Cushitic and Chadic consonant correspondences. AO 23/1–2: 207–231. Takács, Gábor. 2005b. Aaron Ember and the establishment of Egypto-Semitic phonological and lexical comparison (Part I). AOV 6/2: 78–101. Takács, Gábor. 2006. Aaron Ember and the establishment of Egypto-Semitic phonological and lexical comparison (Part II). AOV 7/11–22: 145–188. Takács, Gábor. 2007. Etymological Dictionary of Egyptian, vol. 3, m-. Leiden: Brill. Takács, Gábor. 2011a. Semitic-Egyptian relations. In: Weninger, Stefan (ed.), The Semitic Languages: An International Handbook. Berlin/Boston: De Gruyter Mouton: 7–18. Takács, Gábor. 2011b. Lexica Afroasiatica X. RO LXIV/2: 73–86. Takács, Gábor. 2011c. Lexica Afroasiatica XI. JLR VI/1: 141–172. Takács, Gábor. 2015. Questions of Egyptian historical phonology and Afro-Asiatic. BO 72/5–6: 565–585. Takács, Gábor. 2016. Layers of the oldest Egyptian lexicon II. RO 19/1: 59–124. Tal, A. 2000. A Dictionary of Samaritan Aramaic, 2 vols. Leiden: Brill. Talay, Shabo. 1999. Der arabische Dialekt der Khawētna, vol. 1 (Grammatik). Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Talay, Shabo. 2002. Der arabische Dialekt von Hasköy (Dēr Khāṣ) Ostanatolien, Teil II Texte und Glossar. ZAL 41: 46–86.

References

71

Talay, Shabo. 2003. Der arabische Dialekt der Khawētna, vol. 2 (Texte und Glossar). Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Talay, Shabo. 2009. Die neu-aramäischen Dialekte der Khabur-Akkader in Nordostsyrien. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Talmoudi, Fathi. 1980. The Arabic Dialect of Sūsa (Tunisia). Gothenburg: Acta Universitatis Gothoburgensis. Tamis, Rianne & Janet Persson. 2013. A Concise Dictionary (Sudanese Arabic–English/ English–Sudanese Arabic). Dallas: SIL International. Tapiéro, Norbert. 1971. Manuel d’arabe algérien moderne. Paris: Klincksieck. Te Velde, H. 1967. The cat as sacred animal of the goddess Mut. In: Bleeker, C.J., Egyptian Festivals. Leiden: Brill: 127–137. Thacker, T.W. 1954. The Relationship of the Semitic and Egyptian Verbal Systems. Oxford: Geoffrey Cumberlege. ThS – Payne-Smith, R. 1879. Thesaurus Syriacus. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Ullmann, Manfred. 1957–2009. Wörterbuch der klassischen arabischen Sprache. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Uphill, Eric P. 1988. An ancient Egyptian maritime link with Arabia. In: Proceedings of the Twenty-first Seminar for Arabian Studies held at Durham on 28th–30th July, 1987, vol. 18: 163–170. Oxford: Archaeopress: 111–118. Urk. IV – Kurt Sethe & Wolfgang Helck. 1906–1958. Urkunden des aegyptischen Altertums: Abteilung IV: Urkunden der 18. Dynastie. Leipzig/Berlin. van den Brink, E.C.M. & Thomas E. Levy (eds.). 2002. Egypt and the Levant: Interrelations from the 4th through the Early 3rd Millennium B.C.E. London: Leicester University Press. Vanhove, Martine. 1995. Notes on the Arabic dialect of Yāfi (Yemen). PSAR 25. Oxford: Archaeopress: 141–152. Vassalli, Mikiel Anton. 1791. Mylsen phoenico-punicum sive grammatica melitensis. Rome: Antonio Fulgoni. Vassalli, Mikiel Anton. 1796. Lexicon Melitense Latino-Italum. Roma: Antonio Fulgoni. Vergote, J. 1945. Phonétique historique de l’égyptien. Paris: Le Muséon. Vergote, J. 1975. La position intermédiaire de l’ancien égyptien entre l’hébreu et l’arabe. In: Bynon, James & Theodora, Hamito-Semitica. Proceedings of a colloquium held by the Historical Section of the Linguistics Association (Great Britain) at the SOAS, University of London, on the 18th, 19th and 20th of March 1970. Berlin: De Gruyter Mouton: 171–192. Vittmann, Günter. 1991. Zum koptischem Sprachgut im Ägyptisch-Arabischen. WZKM 81: 197–227. Vittmann, Günter. 1996. Semitisches Sprachgut im Demotischen. WZKM 86: 435–447. Vocke, Sybille & Wolfram Waldner. 1982. Der Wortschatz des anatolischen Arabisch. Erlangen: Palm & Enke Verlag.

72

References

Vogt, Burkhard & Alexander Sedov. 1989. The Sabir culture and coastal Yemen during the 2nd millennium BC – in the present state of discussion. PSAS 28: 261–270. Vycichl, Werner. 1983. Dictionnaire étymologique de la langue copte. Leuven: Peeters. Vycichl, Werner. 1989. Die hamitosemitische Bezeichnung der “Zunge.” MLR 4–5: 23–41. Wahrmund, Adolf. 1898. Handwörterbuch der neuarabischen und deutschen Sprache, 2 vols. Giessen: J. Ricker. Wang, William S.-Y. 1979. Language change – A lexical perspective. ARA 8: 353–371. Ward, Cheryl. 2001. Ships and shipbuilding. OEAE III: 281–284. Ward, William A. 1960. Some effects of varying phonetic conditions on Semitic loan words in Egyptian. JAOS 80/4: 322–327. Ward, William A. 1985. Reflections on methodology in Egypto-Semitic lexicography. In: Tubb, Jonathan N. (ed.): Palestine and the Bronze and Iron Ages. Papers in Honour of Olga Tufnell. London: Institute of Archaeology: 232–248. Watson, Janet C.E. 2002. The Phonology and Morphology of Arabic. Oxford: OUP. Wb = Erman, Adolf & Hermann Grapow. 1926–61. Wörterbuch der ägyptischen Sprache. Berlin: Akademie-Verlag. Wehr, Hans. 1979. A Dictionary of Modern Written Arabic. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Weißbach, Franz. 1930. Beiträge zur Kunde des Irak-Arabischen. Leipzig: J.C. Hinrichs. Wengrow, D., M. Dee, S. Foster, A. Stevenson & C.B. Ramsey. 2015. Cultural Convergence in the Neolithic of the Nile Valley: a Prehistoric Perspective on Egypt’s Place in Africa. Cambridge: CUP. Weninger, Stefan. 2009. Der Jemen als lexikalisches Strahlungszentrum in der Antike. In: Arnold, W. et al.: 395–410. Werbeck, Wolfgang. 2001. Laut- und Formenlehre des nordjemenitisch-arabischen Dialekts von Manārk. Münster: Rhema. Wetzstein, Johann Gottfried. 1906. Die Liebenden von Amasia: Ein damascener Schat­ tenspiel. Abhandlungen für die Kunde des Morgenlandes, Band 12/2 (hrsg. G. Jahn). Leipzig: F.A. Brockhaus. Wiener, Norbert. 1961. Cybernetics, 2nd ed. Cambridge, MA: M.I.T. Press. Wilkinson, Toby. 2001. Social stratification. OEAE, vol. 3: 301–305. Williams, Raymond. 1958. Culture and Society: 1780–1950. London: Chatto & Windus. Wilson, C.W. & H.S. Palmer. 1869. Ordnance Survey of the Peninsula of Sinai. London: H.M. Stationery Office. Winnett, Fred V. & A. Lankester Harding. 1978. Inscriptions from Fifty Safaitic Cairns. Toronto: University of Toronto Press. Winnett, Fred V. & W.L. Reed. 1970. Ancient Records from North Arabia. Toronto: University of Toronto Press. Winton Thomas, David. 1939. The Recovery of the Ancient Hebrew Language. Cambridge, CUP.

References

73

Wittrich, Michaela. 2001. Der arabische Dialekt von Āzəx. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Woidich, Manfred. 2006. Das Kairenisch-Arabische. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Woodhead, D.R. & W. Beene. 1967. A Dictionary of Iraqi Arabic. Washington, D.C.: Georgetown University Press. Yahuda, A.S. 1933. The Language of the Pentateuch in its Relation to Egyptian. London: OUP, H. Milford [= Die Sprache des Pentateuch in ihren Beziehungen zum Aegyptischen. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter, 1929]. Yoseph, Jean. 2012. Der arabische Dialekt von Mharde (Zentralsyrien). Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Zadok, Ran. 1979. The Jews in Babylonia during the Chaldean and Achaemenian periods according to the Babylonian sources. Haifa. Zadok, Ran. 1981. Arabians in Mesopotamia during the late-Akkadian, Chaldaean, Achaemenian and Hellenistic periods chiefly according to cuneiform sources. ZDMG 131: 42–84. Zadok, Ran. 2002. The Earliest Diaspora. Tel Aviv: Diaspora Research Institute. Zadok, Ran. 2013. The onomastics of the Chaldean, Aramean, and Arabian tribes in Babylonia during the first millennium. In: Berlejung & Streck: 261–336. Zarins, Juris. 1989. Ancient Egypt and the Red Sea: The case for obsidian in the predynastic and archaic periods. In: Leonard, Albert & Bruce Beyer Williams (eds.), Essays in Ancient Civilization Presented to Helene J. Kantor. Chicago: Oriental Institute of the University of Chicago: 339–368. Zimmern, Heinrich. 1917. Akkadische Fremdwörter als Beweis fur babylonischen Kultur­ einfluss. E., … vermehrte Ausgabe. Leipzig: Edelman.

Glossary (Ancient Egyptian – Arabic)

∵



ʾ

1

ʾ-b-y

ꜣbj (MK) ‘wünschen’; ‘desire, wish for’; ‘désirer, souhaiter’ (Wb I 6; Faulknerَ

‫أ‬

1962: 2; Meeks 2010: 31) ~ Heb ‫ ָא ָבה‬ʾābā ‘to be willing, consent’ (BDB 2) || Ar ‫� ب�ى‬ ʾabā ‘to refuse’ (Hava 1982: 2); ~ Ḥassāniyya ābe, yābe ‘refuser’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 127) ~ Kfarʿabīda tʾabba ‘s’enorgueillir’ (M. Feghali 1919: 16) ~ N. Najd abyah ‘I want it (f)’ (Ingham 1982: 67) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨abī⟩ ‘I refuse’ (Corriente 1997: 3). 2

ʾ-θ-r

wsr (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘strong, powerful; a wealthy man’; ‘mächtig, stark sein, der Mächtige, reich; einflußreich, ranghoch’; wsrw ‘strength, power’ (Faulkner 1962: 68, 69; Calice 1936: 138; Hannig 2003: 381; Hannig & Vomberg 1999: 415)

ْ

~ Dem wsr/wsj/ws ‘stark sein’ (DG 100, 99) || Ar. ‫ إ� ث�را ء‬ʾiθrāʾ ‘das Reichsein, Reichtum’ (Wahrmund I 16); cf. 838. y-s-r; ~ Andalusi Ar ⟨ma‌ʾāθir⟩ ‘glorious deeds’ (Corriente 1997: 4). 3

ʾ-θ-l

i҆sr/i҆zr/i҆sr(t) (Pyr) ‘tamarisk’; ‘Tamariske als Gartenbaum, Tamarisken-gehölz, Tamarix articulata, Tamarix nilotica’ (Faulkner 1962: 31; Wb I 130; Goldwasser

ْ‫أث‬

2002: 46; Keimer 1924 I 155) ~ Heb ‫ ֵא ֶׁשל‬ʾēšel ‘id.’ (BDB 79) || Ar ‫ � �ل‬ʾaθl (coll.) ‘Tamaris (Tamariscus orientalis)’ (DAF I 11); ~ N. Yemen aθlin ‘Tamarix aphylla’ (Behnstedt 1987: 227) ~ Arabia iθla, coll. iθil ‘long tamarisk timber of Arabia’ (Doughty 1888 I 143, 586; II 6, 526) ~ Iraq iθal/aθal ‘eine Tamariskenart (hochgewachsen)’ (Weißbach 1930: 319) ~ Sinai ʾiθil ‘Tamarix aphylla (L.) Karst.’ (Bailey & Danin 1981: 161) ~ Palest aθl/naθal/ niθl ‘Tamariske’ (Bauer 1957: 297; Dalman I/1 260; VII 131). 4

ʾ-ǧ-n

i҆kn (Pyr) [< *lkn] ‘cup, jar’; ‘Schale, Napf; ein Gefäß (aus Syrien)’ (Faulkner 1962: 32; Wb I 140) ~ Akkad agannu ‘a large bowl’ (CAD I/1 142) ~ Aram aggānā

78

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

‫أ‬

‫ّ ة‬

‘basin, kettle’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 13); cf. Gk λεκάνη ~ λακάνη ‘dish, pot, pan’ (GEL

1037) || Ar ���‫ إ� ج��ا ن‬ʾiǧǧānah, pl �‫ � ج��ا ج�ي�� ن‬ʾaǧāǧīn ‘urn, amphora’ (Hava 1982: 12); ~ Yemen laǧan ‘catino’ (Rossi 1939: 154) ~ Palmyra lagen, pl lgūn ‘grand bassin en cuivre’ (Cantineau 1934 II 38) ~ Aleppo laqən, pl lqūn ‘grande cuvette ou bassin de cuivre peu profond pour le pétrissage, le blanchissage et d’autres usages domestiques’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 763) ~ Kəndērīb lagan, pl laganāt ‘Bottich (aus Kupfer)’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 133) ~ Lebanon lakan, pl lkān ‘wash­ basin’ (Frayha 1973; 173) ~ Bišmizzīn lagin, pl lgūni ‘Waschbecken’ (Jiha 1964: 118) ~ Palest lagan, pl lgūne ‘Waschgefäß (oval oder rund tief)’ (Bauer 1957: 354) ~ Egypt laggāna ‘große Teigwanne, Buttertopf’; laggān ‘Eselkorb’; malgōn, pl malagīn ‘topfförmiges Körbchen mit Deckel’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 436). 5

ʾ-x-t

‫أ‬

‫أخ‬

ʾa₂=ḫi=ta (NK) ‘sister [in anthroponym]’ (Hoch 1994: 32) ~ Akkad ʾaḫātu ‘id.’

‫ � � ا ت‬ʾaxawāt ‘sister’ (Hava 1982: 5); (cf. ‫ � خ�� ت‬ʾuxt, pl � (Parpola 2007: 259) || Ar � ‫و‬ x-w-y); ~ Aleppo ʾəxt, pl xawāt ‘sœur’; xayye « petite sœur, sœurette » (Barthélemy 1935–69: 4, 227) ~ Damascus ʾəxt, pl ʾəxwāt banāt ‘sister’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 212) ~ Kəndērīb əxt, pl xəwāt ‘id.’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 7) ~ Palest ʾuxt, pl ʾuxwāt/ xawāt ‘Schwester’ (Bauer 1957: 270). 6

ʾ-d-y

wdi҆ (OK) ‘send forth’; ‘absenden, ausreisen, Sachen absenden; die Reise’; ‘mettre, poser, placer (dans), pousser, jeter, expulser’; wd ‘legen, setzen, geben, darbringen, stoßen, werfen’; wḏyt ‘campaign, expedition’ (Faulkner 1962: 72, 112; Wb I 385, 386, 397–398; Lambert 1925: 99) ~ Dem wty ‘senden, fortschicken’

ّ‫أ‬

(DG 106) || Ar ‫ � د �ى‬ʾaddā ‘he made it, or caused it, reach, arrive, …’ (Lane 38); ~ Aleppo wadda ‘faire parvenir soi-même, porter (qqe), conduire, mener (un enfant, un animal) ʿala ou la- ‘à qqn, à un endroit’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 889) ~ Suxne adda, yiddi ‘führen’ (Behnstedt 1994: 202) ~ Daragözü wadda, īwaddi ‘wegbringen’ (O. Jastrow 1973: 53, 13) ~ Āzəx waddāni ‘er brachte mich’ (Wittrich 2001: 32) ~ Kəndērīb wadda ‘fortbringen, wegbringen, hinbringen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 151) ~ Mardīn wadda, ywaddi ‘emporter’ (Grigore 2007: 124) ~ Mzāb ddēyna ‘nous avons transporté’; nəddi ‘je transporte’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 19, 39).

5. ʾ -x-t – 9. ʾ -s-t

7

79

ʾ-r-y

i҆҆ri҆҆ (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘to create, beget’; ‘machen, anfertigen, herstellen’ (Faulkner 1960: 25; Wb I 108) ~ Copt ⲉⲓⲣⲉ ‘to make, do’ (Crum 1939: 83a) ||

‫أ‬

Ar ‫ � ر �ى‬ʾarā ‘to produce honey (bee)’ (Hava 1982: 7).

8

ʾ-z-r

sꜣr.w/zꜣr.w (Pyr) ‘Fesseln, Bande’ (Wb III 422; Hannig 2003: 1065) ~ Heb ‫ָאזַ ר‬ ʾāzar ‘to gird, encompass’ (BDB 25) ~ Ugar uzr ‘clothed, enrobed’ (DUL 137) ||

‫أ�ز‬

Ar ‫ � ر‬ʾazara ‘envelopper le corps du vêtement ou voile appelé izār’ (DAF I 28); ~ Kfarʿabīda ʾzāṛ ‘voile (de mariée)’ (Feghali 1919: 4) ~ Oman uzār ‘Lendentuch, Lendenschurz’ (Reinhardt 1894: 47, 254) ~ Yemen izre ‘bedsheet’; lizār ‘shoulder shawl’ (Piamenta 1990: 7) ~ E. Arabia wizār, pl wzira ‘sarong worn by men’ (Holes 2001: 557) ~ Najd wizərih ‘his loincloth’ (Ingham 1982: 58) ~ Khābūra wizār ‘a long loincloth’ (Brockett 1985: 218) ~ Tunis iẓāṛ, pl -āt ‘drap de lit’ (D. Cohen 1975: 191) ~ Morocco iẓaṛ, pl iẓuṛ ‘bedding, sheet’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 20, 176) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨izār, pl uzur⟩ ‘loincloth or shawl (used by Christians)’ (Corriente 1997: 12) ~ Malta ⟨liżar, pl lożor⟩ ‘mantello, lenzuolo’ (Vassalli 1796: 442). 9

ʾ-s-t

sd (Pyr) ‘tail’; ‘der Schwanz’; msd.t ‘haunch’; šd ‘vulva’; ‘Vagina, Scheide’; śd ‘Schwanz eines Säugetiers (Rind, Esel, Pferd, Löwe, etc.)’ (Faulkner 1962: 256, 118; Hannig 1995: 844; Wb IV 363); sdt (OK) ‘Schwanzstück (vom Rind)’ (Hannig 2003: 1270) ~ Copt ⲥⲁⲧ ‘tail’ (Crum 1939: 358b) ~ Akkad išdu ‘base’ (Parpola ‫� ����س� ت‬ 2007: 149) ~ Ḥar šīt ~ Mah šēt ‘backside’ (Johnstone 1977: 154; 1987: 484) || Ar � ‫إ‬

‫أ‬

ʾist/‫ � ����ست���ا ه‬ʾastāh ‘buttocks; the podex, or the anus’ (Hava 1982: 309; Lane 56) ~ Aleppo ʾəst ‘anus’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 8) ~ Daθīna est [= ⟨farǧ⟩ ou ⟨kuss⟩, pl ⟨ʾasāt⟩/(Oman) ⟨ʾasyāt⟩]; ‘courant dans tout le sud y compris le Yéman’ (GD 77) ~ N. Yemen ʾistin ‘Hintern’ (Behnstedt 1987: 228); ist ‘organo femminile’ (Rossi 1939: 211) ~ Najd ist/sit ‘auch vulva’ (Socin 1901 III 247) ~ Egypt ʾist ‘behind, posterior’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 18) ~ Cypriot Ar ist ‘male and female genitals’ (own obs.).

80 10

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

ʾ-s-s

ّ ‫أ‬

‫أ‬

s.t (Pyr) ‘seat, throne, place, ground of house’; ‘Sitz, Wohnsitz, Platz; Ort, Stelle’

(Faulkner 1962: 206; Wb IV 1; Calice 1936: 79) || Ar ‫ � ��س‬ʾuss, pl ‫ � ��س�ا ��س‬ʾasās ‘foundation, principle, basis’ (Hava 1982: 8); ~ Damascus ʾasās, pl -āt ‘foundation’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 97) ~ S.E. Anatolia assas ‘gründen, bauen auf’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 9) ~ Palest uss, pl sās ‘fond, base’ (Denizeau 1960: 6) ~ Egypt assis ‘to found, establish’ (Spiro 1895: 11) ~ Tripoli (Libya) sās ‘base, terreno’ (Griffini 1913: 27, 286) ~ Algeria sās ‘fondement’ (Ben Sedira 1910: 236) ~ Ḥassāniyya sās, pl sīsān ‘fondation’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 70) ~ Malta ⟨sies, pl sisien⟩ ‘terre’ (Vassalli 1795: 615). 11

ʾ-f-d

i҆fd (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘flee’; ‘davonrennen (wie Wild), eilen, fliehen’; m i҆fd ‘eilig, eilende’ (Faulkner 1962: 17; Wb I 72; Calice 1936: 50; Hannig 1995: 46) ~ Ḥar ʾafōd

‫أف‬

‘to leap’ (Johnstone 1977: 1) || Ar ‫ � ��د‬ʾafada ‘to hurry’ (Hava 1982: 11). 12

ʾ-f-r

‫أف‬

ꜣfr(y) (Ebers) ‘to boil’; ‘sieden, kochen’ (Faulkner 1962: 3; Wb I 9) || Ar ‫ � �ر‬ʾafara ‘sieden, heiß sein, heftig sieden’ (Brockelmann 1932: 100; Wahrmund I 100); ~ Ḥassāniyya āffāṛ ‘vapeur’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 151) ~ Yemen fār ‘bollire’ (Rossi 1939: 196); fawwar (v/t) ‘boil’ (Piamenta 1990: 381) ~ Aleppo fār ‘bouillonner’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 625) ~ Damascus fār ‘boil, boil with rage’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 25) ~ Kəndērīb fāṛ ‘überlaufen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 108) ~ Najd fār ‘boil over, gush forth’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 440) ~ Rwala fōrt ad-damm ‘seething of the blood’ (Musil 1928: 490) ~ Lebanon fawwer ‘faire bouillir’ (Feghali 1938: 811) ~ Palest fār ‘überkochen’; fōret ed-damm ‘Blutaufwallung’ (Bauer 1957: 63) ~ Egypt fār ‘boil’ (Spiro 1895: 440) ~ Djidjelli tifwīr ‘fait de cuire à la vapeur’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 230) ~ Algeria fawwar ‘évaporer’ (Ben Sedira 1910: 205) ~ Tangier fōwaṛ ‘dégager de la vapeur’ (W. Marçais 1911: 418) ~ Malta ⟨far, ifur⟩ ‘bollire’ (Vassalli 1796: 203).

81

10. ʾ -s-s – 15. ʾ -n-f

13

ʾ-k-f

ꜣṯp (OK) ‘be heavy-laden’; ‘Schiff beladen (jemanden, ein Tier, ein Schiff)’; ꜣṯpw ‘load (n), cargo’ (Faulkner 1962: 6; Wb I 23; Brockelmann 1932: 100) ~ Aram

‫أ ف‬

‫ف‬

ʾukkāp̄ ā ‘saddle’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 25) || Ar �� ‫كا‬ ‫ � ك‬ʾukuf ‘Sattel (Pferd, � �‫ إ‬ʾikāf, pl ���� Esel)’ (Wahrmund I 110); ~ Egypt ḥmār lukāf ‘donkey for burden’ (Spiro 1895: 102); likāf ‘Eselsattel’; lukāf, lukf ‘Lastsattel des Esels’; nukāfa ‘id.’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 437; 1999: 398) ~ Andalusi Ar ⟨ʾikāf, pl ʾakiffah⟩ ‘packsaddle for asses’ (Corriente 1997: 22). 14

ʾ-m-s

mśj.t/msj.t (Pyr) ~ msw.t (MK) ‘supper, evening meal’; ‘Abendbrot, zur Zeit des Abendbrots’ (Faulkner 1962: 17; Wb II 142; Erman 1904: 55; Calice 1936: 100) ~ Akkad mūšu(m)/mušītu(m) ‘Nacht’; mūšiš ‘bei Nacht’ (AHW 687, 683) ~ Ge

ْ َ‫أ‬

masya ‘become evening’ (Leslau 1987: 368) || Ar ‫ � �م��س‬ʾams ‘preceding day; yesterday’ (Ambros 2004: 28); ~ Ḥaḍramawt ams ‘hier dans la journée’ (Landberg 1901: 523) ~ Oman mse ‘Abend’; gāy mumsi ‘ich komme spät’ (Reinhardt 1894: 41, 422) ~ N. Yemen amis/ amsi/amseh ‘gestern’ (Behnstedt 1987: 229) ~ Najd masayyan ‘gegen Abend’ (Socin 1901 III 311) ~ ʿAnazeh māsi ‘le coucher du soleil’ (Landberg 1940: 76) ~ Aleppo ams ‘hier (pendant la journée)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 14) ~ Syria ams ‘gestern’ (Behnstedt 1997a, map 305) ~ S.E. Anatolia ams ‘gestern’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 17) ~ Šukriyya misa ‘Abend’ (Reichmuth 1983: 260). 15

ʾ-n-f

‫أف‬

nfj (LE) ‘ausatmen, hauchen’; nf ‘Hauch des Mundes, Wind’; nft ‘breath, wind’; nfyt ‘fan’; nfꜣ ‘blow’; m ‘(out of) nose’ (Wb II 250; Faulkner 1962: 131) || Ar ����‫� ن‬

‫أ ف‬

ʾanf, pl �� ‫ � ن�ا‬ʾanāf ‘nose’ (Hava 1982: 15); cf. 747. n-f-f;

Some N. African cognates of this lexeme cited below show a long vowel in the singular form, e.g., nīf < (?) *ʾunīf (cf. Marçais 1908: 33).

~ S.E. Anatolia nāfi ‘Nase’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 19) ~ Cherchell nīf ‘nez’ (Grand’Henry 1972: 78) ~ Djidjelli nīf ‘id.’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 255) ~ Mzāb ən-nēf ‘le nez’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 133) ~ Ūlād Brāhīm nēyf ‘nez’ (W. Marçais 1908: 33) ~ Palest naff ‘sich schneuzen’ (Bauer 1957: 263) ~ Sinai naff ‘to sniff, pant, be

82

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

short of breath’ (Stewart 1990: 251) ~ S.E. Anatolia ənf/nāfi ‘Nase’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 19) ~ Damascus ʾənf, pl ʾnūf ‘nose’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 158) ~ Lebanon ʾənf, pl ʾnūf ‘nez’ (Feghali 1928: 11). 16

ʾ-n-y

i҆ni҆/i҆n (ME) ‘verweilen, langsam gehen, zögern etwas zu tun’ (Wb I 92; Brockelmann 1932: 101); si҆n ‘to wait, َwait for’ (Caminos 1954: 579; DLE II 12)

ّ‫أ ن‬

‫أن‬

|| Ar ‫ � �ى‬ʾanā ‘rechtzeitig kommen’; ‫ ت�� �ى‬ta‌ʾannā ‘to act slowly, to procrastinate’ (Wahrmund I 143; Hava 1982: 15); ~ Aleppo tʾanna ‘agir avec lenteur, temporizer, prendre son temps’; stanna ‘attendre’ (qqn ou qqe)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 18) ~ Damascus tʾanna ‘to bide one’s time’; stanna ‘warten auf’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 22, 152) ~ Sinai taná ‘to wait for someone’ (Stewart 1990: 271); tiwanna ‘tarry’ (C. Bailey 1991: 430) ~ Oman teénne ‘sich verspäten’ (Reinhardt 1894: 229) ~ Rwala tawanna/tawāna ‘become tired, slacken’ (Musil 1928: 273) ~ Palest istanna/ittanna ‘warten auf’ (Bauer 1957: 353): battanna fīk ‘ich erwarte dich’ (Schmidt & Kahle 1918 I 270) ~ Egypt itanna/istaanna/istanna ‘to wait, expect’ (Spiro 1895: 22) ~ Khābūra twanna ‘to be late (a bedu word)’ (Brockett 1985: 223) ~ Hijaz astanna ‘to wait for’ (Omar 1975: 253) ~ Sudan assanna/istanna ‘wait for’ (LDA 39) ~ Tunis štənna ‘il a attendu’ (D. Cohen 1975: 132) ~ Algiers stenna ‘attendre’ (Tapiéro 1971: 151) ~ Morocco tsenna ‘to expect’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 67). 17

ʾ-h

ꜣh (MK) ‘misery, trouble, pain, injury, illness’; ‘traurig sein; in elender Zustand sein’; ꜣhw ‘sufferer’; ‘körperliches Leid, Schmerz, Kummer, Traurigkeit’ (Faulkner

‫أ‬

ّ‫أ‬

1962: 3, 4; Wb I 12; Osing 2001: 568) || Ar ‫ � ه‬ʾah ‘Ach!’; ‫ � ه‬ʾahh ‘bekümmert sein’ (Wahrmund I 144); ~ Najd aḥḥayyh ‘a word expressing feelings of being hurt and pain’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 324) ~ Lebanon ʾāh ‘hélas’ (Feghali 1938: 572) ~ Egypt ʾah ‘Ah!’ (Spiro 1895: 23) ~ Malta ⟨aħ⟩ (vox dolentis) ‘Ahi’ (Vassalli 1796: 4). 18

ʾ-h-ā

i҆hj (Pyr) ‘(Klageruf): i҆hj n ‘Wehe über’ (Wb I 118); yhy ‘Oho!’; i҆hhy ‘rejoicing, joy, jubilation’; i҆hy ‘jubilating crowd’ (Faulkner 1962: 28; DLE 42; Caminos 1954: 529)

83

16. ʾ -n-y – 20. ʾ -y-š

~ Copt ⲉϩⲉ/(ⲉ)ϩⲉ/ⲁϩⲉ/ⲁϩⲁ ‘yea’ (answers question affirmatively)’ (Crum 1939: 64) ~ Ḥar ʾahā ‘yes’ (Johnstone 1977: 1) ‫ ~آ‬Ge ʾoho/ʾǝho ‘expression of consent; yes, indeed’ (Leslau 1987: 12, 761) || Ar ‫ � �ه�ا‬ʾāhā ‘Ah!’ (Hava 1982: 16); ~ Oman hī (zur Bejahung)’ (Reinhardt 1894: 111) ~ Khābūra āhā ‘yes’ (Brockett 1985: 209) ~ Aleppo ʾā ‘eh bien?’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 1) ~ Kǝndērīb ēh/ē ‘ja’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 12) ~ Palest ā ~ Lebanon ē ‘id.’ (Bauer 1957: 165) ~ Egypt áha ‘schau!’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 9); ʾéhēh/ʾihīh (exclamation indicating unbelieving astonishment; Badawi & Hinds 1986: 43) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨āha⟩ ‘yes’ (Corriente 1997: 33) ~ Malta ⟨ehe⟩ ‘yes’ (Aquilina 1987: 272) ~ Ḥassāniyya ehēh ‘oui’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 107) ~ Berber (Zaer) ehe/ʿehe/oho/ihi ‘non’; waḫa ‘oui, soit, bien, volontiers, c’est entendu’ (Loubignac 1924: 275, 274). 19

ʾ-w-n

wnwt ‘hour, division of time’ (Faulkner 196.2: 61); nw (Pyr) ‘time’; ‘Zeit, Zeitpunkt’ (Ember 1914: 86; Wb II 219) ~‫ أ‬Dem wnw.t ‘Stunde’ (DG 90) ~ Copt ‫ن‬ ⲟⲩⲛⲟⲩ ‘hour’ (Crum 1939: 484b) || Ar � ‫ � وا‬ʾawān ‘time, moment, season’ (Hava 1982: 17); ~ Iraq ʾawān, pl ʾāwina ‘time’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 20) ~ Najd ðelwān ‘jetzt’ (Socin 1901 III 107) ~ Egypt ʾān ‘to be time’; ʾawān ‘time, season’; ʾel-ān ‘now, at present’ (Spiro 1895: 20) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ʾānā⟩ ‘some time, once’ (Corriente 1997: 33). 20

ʾ-y-š

(i) i҆ḫ (LE) ‘(Fragewort) was? (als Subjekt, Objekt, Predikat)’; ‘what?’ [~ nonenclitic i҆ḫ ‘then, therefore, so that; thus (proclitic particle)’] (Wb I 123; Gardiner 1957: 427, 554–55, 176): i҆ḫ r.k ‘what do you mean?’ (Caminos 1954: 529) ~ Copt

‫أ‬

ⲁϣ ‘who, what?’ (Crum 1939: 22a) || Ar ���‫ � ي� ش‬ʾayš ‘was’; ‘what?’ (A. Fischer 1905; Hava 1982: 18); ~ Iraq ʾēš ‘what?’; ʿal-ēš/ʿala-wēš ‘why? what for?’; l-ēš/lu-wēš/ʾil-wēš ‘what for? why?’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 21) ~ Sine ayš/aš- ‘was’: áš-fe ‘was gibt es?’ (Talay 2015: 285) ~ Ᾱzǝx haza ašnu ‘was ist das?’ (O. Jastrow 1981: 172); šayš ‘warum, wozu’ (Wittrich 2001: 42) ~ Sinai ʾēh ‘what?’ (Stewart 1990: 214) ~ Yemen lēh ‘warum’ (Behnstedt 2006: 1135). (ii) i҆ḫ.t/i҆š.t ‘Habe, Besitz, auch Speise’ (Wb I 134, 135). Edel (1955: 9, 53, 127) posited the allomorphic shift ḫ > š “vor allem mit Possessivsuffixen” (e.g., jḫtjj/jštj snty ‘meine beiden Speisen’; ibid.).

84

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

~ Yemen šīt, pl ʾašyēʾ ‘cosa’ (Rossi 1939: 202) ~ Aleppo šēt/šayyt/šayyet, pl šayyūt ‘chose ou objet appartenant à’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 422) ~ Damascus šīt, pl šyāt ‘of’ (Cowell 1964: 490) ~ N. Syria šīt/šīyit (Genitivexponent, map 249; Behnstedt 1997: 499) ~ Çukurova šayt ‘etwas’ (Procházka 2002: 173). (iii) ri҆ḫ ‘weswegen, wozu?’ (Hannig 1995: 97) || Ar *lāš/h (cf. Borg 2019a: §5); ~ Palest lēš/lēh ‘warum’ (Bauer 1957: 353) ~ Egypt lē ‘warum’ (Woidich 2006: 50) ~ Susa lāh ‘why?’ (Talmoudi 1981: 139) ~ Tripoli (Libya) lwāh ‘warum?’ (Stumme 1898: 273) ~ Takrūna lāh (probablement emprunté aux parlers bédouins) ‘pourquoi’; lwāš ‘pour quelle raison; dans quel but; pour quelle fin’ (W. Marçais and A. Guîga 3584, 3705) ~ Djidjelli liyyeš ‘vers, à quoi’ [ailleurs = liyyah/liyyāš/lāš] (Ph. Marçais 1956: 587) ~ Sidi Bel Abbès liyyah/lāš/lāh ‘pourquoi?’ (Madouni-La Peyre 2003: 465) ~ Cherchell lāš ‘pourquoi’ (Grand’Henry 1972: 162) ~ Tlemcen liyyāh/liyyāš ‘pourquoi?’ (W. Marçais 1902: 174) ~ Tangiers ʿlāš ‘pourquoi, parce que’ (W. Marçais 1911: 389). B 21

b-

m- (OK) (prep.) ‘in, with, by means of’ (Faulkner 1962: 100); mi҆ḫ ‘on what?’: mi҆ḫ/mi҆šś.t as in ʿnḫ.k i҆rf mi҆šś.t ‘on what wilt thou live?’ (Gardiner 1957: 408) || Ar � ِ ‫ ب‬bi- (Hava 1982: 19); ~ Suxne bēš/bʾēš ‘womit?’ (Behnstedt 1994: 207) ~ Sidi Bel Abbès bāš/bāh ‘avec quoi?’ (Madouni-La Peyre 2003: 465) ~ Ḥassāniyya bāš? ‘en quoi, en quelle matière?’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 124) ~ Cherchell bāš tǝxdǝm ‘avec quoi travailles-tu?’ (Grand’Henry 1972: 140) ~ Malta ⟨biex sa tgħix?⟩ ‘what will you live on?’ (own obs.). 22

b-ʾ-r

bjꜣw (OK) ‘Grube, Bergwerk, Steinbruch’; ‘mining region, mine’ (Wb I 438; Faulkner 1962: 80; Ember 1913: 112; Calice 1936: 60) ~ biʾru, pl biʾrōtu (nominal component in toponym) ‘well’ (Hoch 1994: 91) ~ Akkad būru ‘well’ (CAD II 342) ~ Sab bʾr ‘puits’; ‘dig a well, provide with wells’ (Avanzini 1980: 123; Biella 1982:

‫آ‬

35) || Ar ‫ ب�ئ��ر‬biʾr, pl ‫ � ب�ا ر‬ʾābār ‘well’ (Lane 145); ~ Aleppo bīr, pl byāra ‘puits’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 72) ~ Damascus bīr, pl byār ‘well’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 261) ~ Iraq bīr, pl byār ‘id.’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 49) ~ Yemen bīr, pl būr/abyār ‘pozzo’ (Rossi 1939: 228).

85

21. b- – 26. b-ḥ-z-ǧ

23

b-t-k

btk (Gr) ‘(Feinde) niedermachen, schlachten’ (Wb I 485) ~ Heb ‫ ִב ֵתק‬bittēq ‘cut, cut off, cut down’ (BDB 144) ~ Akkad batāqu to cut off, to take away (by cutting off)’ (CAD II 161) || Ar ‫ ب�ت��ك‬bataka ‘to detach violently, to cut off’ (Hava 1982: 20); ~ Aleppo hal-batak bataki māhu batakak ‘ce coup est le mien et non le tien’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 28) ~ Lebanon batak ‘cutting (vn)’ (Frayha 1973: 5). 24

b-ḥ-θ

bḥs (NK) ‘hunt’; ‘jagen (Löwen, Elefanten, Wild)’ (Faulkner 1962: 34; DLE I 138; Wb I 469) ~ Dem wʿ rmt bḥs ‘ein Jägersmann’ (DG 121) ~ Copt ⲡⲁϩⲥ ‘prey’ (Crum ‫ح� ث‬ �‫ ب‬baḥaθa ‘to be in quest of’ (Hava 1982: 21); � 1939: 281a) || Ar � ~ Yemen baḥaθ ‘cercare’ (Rossi 1939: 199) ~ Aleppo baḥat ‘gratter la terre pour y chercher sa nourriture, farfouiller, remuer avec désordre’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 29) ~ Palest baḥaθ ‘untersuchen’ (Bauer 1957: 324) ~ Egypt baḥas ‘to search, look for, examine’ (Spiro 1895: 32) ~ Marazig bḥat ‘enquêter, grater, fouiller le sol’ (Boris 1958: 23) ~ Djidjelli beḥt ‘enquête’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 86) ~ Mzāb bḥat ‘il a cherché’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 100) ~ Morocco bḥat ‘interroger minutieusement qqn’ (Prémare I 142). 25

b-ḥ-r¹

bʿr (Pyr) ‘Wasserfülle, Überschwemmung; Name eines Gewässers in Unter­ ägypten’; ‘sea (in toponym)’ (Calice 1936: 60; Wb I 447; Hoch 1994: 92) ~ Sab bḥr ‘mer, campagne, réservoir’ (Avanzini 1980: 147) || Saf bḥrt ‘pond’ (Winnett �‫ ب‬baḥr ‘sea, great river’ (Lane 156); & Lankester Harding 1978: 630) ~ Ar ‫حر‬ ~ Najd baḥr ‘sea, great river; large quantity of water’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 331) ~ Aleppo baḥar, pl bḥūr/bḥūra ‘mer’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 29) ~ Damascus baḥǝr, pl bḥūra/bḥār ‘sea’: l-baḥǝr rāyeq ǝl-yōm ‘the sea is calm today’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 202) ~ Iraq baḥar, pl ʾabḥur/bḥār/bḥūr ‘id.’; buḥēra ‘lake’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 25; van Ess 1918: 166) ~ Ḥassāniyya bḥaṛ, pl bḥūṛ ‘rivière’ (TaineCheikh 1990: 131) ~ Malta ⟨baħar, pl ibħra⟩ ‘mare’ (Vassalli 1796: 15). 26

b-ḥ-z-ǧ

bḥz (Urk.V) ‘calf’; ‘das Kalb’ (Faulkner 1962: 84; Wb I 469; Albright 1918: 231) �‫ ب‬baḥzaǧ ~ Dem bḥs ‘id.’ (DG 121) ~ Copt ⲃⲁϩⲥⲉ ‘heifer’ (Crum 1939: 48a) || Ar ‫ح�ز ج‬

�

86

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

‘Kalb, Kameel­füllen’ (Wahrmund I 179); ‘vitulus … iuvenis camelus, pullus antilopis aliorumque animalium’ (Freytag 1837 I 80); ‘Kälbchen, Lämmchen, Steinbockjungen’ (Hommel 1879: 284). 27

b-d-r

ꜣbd (OK) ‘month’; ‘mois, mois lunaire’ (Faulkner 1962: 2; Meeks 2010: 42) || Ar ‫ ب��د ر‬badr, pl ‫ ب��د ور‬budūr ‘lune, surtout pleine lune’ (DAF I 95); ~ S. Arabia badr ‘pleine lune’ (Landberg 1909: 527) ~ Najd badir ‘full moon’ (Ingham 1982: 59) ~ Damascus badr, pl bdūr ‘id.’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 152) ~ Lebanon badr ‘pleine lune’ (Feghali 1938: 739) ~ Palest badr, pl bdūr(a) ‘Vollmond’ (Bauer 1957: 345) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨badr, pl budūr⟩ ‘full moon’ (Corriente 1997: 40). 28

b-d-n

ḏbn (OK) ‘Art Antilope’ (Wb V 568); ḏbnw ‘Kuhantilope’ (Hannig 1995: 1005) || ‫ن‬ Ar � ‫ ب��د‬badan ‘le bouquetin des Alpes’ (dans l’Arabie Pétrée)’ (Dozy I 50); ~ Rwala beden ‘ibex’ (Musil 1928: 25) ~ Palest beden ‘Steinbock, Capra nubiana’ (Dalman VI 77) ~ Ḥesbān badan, pl bdūn ‘ibex’ (Palva 1978: 88). 29

b-r-r

bnr (NK) ‘das Außen, außerhalb, draußen’; n bnr ‘nach außen, hinaus’; r-bnr(w) ‘outside; away’ (Wb I 461; Faulkner 1962: 83; DLE I 134) ~ *ballu/balla/bal ‘outside; outdoors, open land’ (Hoch 1994: 119) ~ Dem bl/bnr ‘das Aussen’ (DG 119) ~ Copt ⲃⲟⲗ ‘the outside’ (Crum 1939: 33b) ~ Sab brr ‘terrain decouvert, cam-

ًّ

pagne’ (Avanzini 1980: 181) || Ar ‫ ب�را‬barran ‘outside’ (Lane 176); ~ S. Arabia barr al-ʿrab ‘pays des arabes’ (Landberg 1909: 529) ~ Aleppo barra ‘dehors’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 36) ~ Damascus barra ‘outside’: barrāt ǝl-balad ‘outside the city’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 165) ~ Nabk baṛṛōt ‘außerhalb’ (Gralla 2006: 60) ~ Ᾱzǝx barrāt ǝl-balad ‘außerhalb der Stadt’ (Wittrich 2001: 117) ~ S.E. Anatolia lǝbaṛṛa ‘hinaus, nach draußen’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 33) ~ Bišmizzīn lbarra ‘hinaus’ (Jiha 1964: 169) ~ Sudan berr ‘terre, continent’ (LDA 45) ~ Tunis baṛṛ ‘contrée’ (D. Cohen 1975: 142) ~ Marazig lbaṛṛa ‘nach draußen, hinaus’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2005: 114) ~ Djidjelli baṛṛa ‘campagne’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 252) ~ Mzāb ǝl-baṛṛ ‘dehors’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 101).

27. b-d-r – 32. b-r-k ²

30

87

b-r-q

bꜣq/bqꜣ (Pyr) ‘bright, white, be bright’; ‘hell sein, klar sein’ (Faulkner 1962: 79; DLE I 127, 137, 141; Wb I 424; Hannig 1995: 257) ~ Ugar brq ‘lightning’ (DUL 238) ~ Akkad barāqu ‘lighten, shine, eyes (to flash)’ (CAD II 38) ~ Sab brq ‘send lightning’ (Biella 1982: 58); ‘pluie orageuse, saison des pluies’ (Avanzini 1980: 179) || ‫ق‬ Ar �‫ ب�ر‬baraqa ‘shine, gleam, glisten’ (Lane 190); ~ Aleppo baraq, yǝ́breq ‘faire des éclairs’; barrāqa ‘tout objet étincelant’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 38) ~ Damascus baraq ‘light up’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 138) ~ Palest abraqat: btibriq id-dinya ‘blitzen’ (Bauer 1957: 63) ~ Egypt baraq, yubruq ‘to glitter’; barq ‘lightning’ (Spiro 1895: 41) ~ Tunis bṛoq ‘il est devenu brillant’ (D. Cohen 1975: 51) ~ Malta ⟨berraq, iberraq⟩ ‘lampeggiare’ (Vassalli 1796: 38). 31

b-r-k¹

brk (LE) ‘knien (in Hüldigung)’ (Wb I 466) ~ Ugar brk ‘kneel’ (DUL 237) || Ar ‫ب�رك‬ baraka ‘to kneel (camel)’ (Hava 1982: 30); ~ Rwala mabrak (or manāx) ‘a place where a camel is rested’ (Musil 1928: 357) ~ S. Arabia bārik ‘couché sur les genoux’ (Landberg 1909: 529) ~ Najd bārik, pl brūk ‘a camel lying down’; mabrak ‘a place where camels lie down (Kurpershoek 1995: 326) ~ Sinai barák ‘to kneel’ (Stewart 1990: 206) ~ Aleppo barak ‘s’asseoir’; barrak ‘faire agenouiller (un chameau)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 39) ~ Damascus barrak ‘to make knee’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 135) ~ Egypt barak ‘to knee’ (Spiro 1895: 42) ~ Tripoli (Libya) brak ‘inginocchiarsi’ (Griffini 1913: 151) ~ Mzāb brǝk ‘il s’est accroupi’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 101) ~ Ḥassāniyya brǝk ‘il s’est accroupi (chameau)’ (D. Cohen 1963: 123). 32

b-r-k²

brk/ba=ra=ka (NK) ‘beten zu; schenken; Geschenk, Gabe’; ‘bless in homage’ ~ bá-ra-ka ‘segnen’ (Wb I 466; Helck 1962: 557; Hoch 1994: 102) ~ Akkad karābu ‘bless’ (M. Cohen 2011: 22) ~ Sab brk ‘benir’ (Avanzini 1980: 179); hkrbn ‘dediّ cate, offer’ (Biella 1982: 251) || Ar ‫ ب�رك‬barraka ‘to bless, invoke benediction upon’ (Hava 1982: 30); ~ Najd brikih, pl brikāt ‘blessing’ (Sowayan 1992: 248) ~ Aleppo bārak, ybārek ‘benir’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 39) ~ Damascus bārak ‘gratulieren’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 152) ~ Egypt bārik ‘to bless’ (Spiro 1895: 42) ~ Malta ⟨bierek⟩ ‘dir bene, lodare’ (Vassalli 1796: 48).

88 33

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

b-r-k³

brk.t (LE) ‘Teich’; ‘pond, pool, lake’ (Wb I 466; DLE I 137) ~ Dem brkt/blkt/blgt ‘der Teich, der See’ (DG 119, 120) ~ Copt ⲃⲉⲣϭⲟⲟⲩⲧ (Sa‘idic) (Vittmann 1996: 438) ~ Sab brkt(n) ‘cistern’ (Biella 1982: 58) ~ brʾk ‘canale d’écoulement’ (Avanzini

‫ة‬

1980: 177) ~ Ugar brkt/y ‘pool, swamp’ (DUL 238) || Ar ��� ‫ ب�رك‬birkah, pl ‫ ب�رك‬birak ‘pool, tank, pond, puddle’ (Hava 1982: 30); ~ Aleppo bǝrke, pl bǝrak ‘bassin de mâçonnerie’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 39) ~ Damascus bǝrka, pl bǝrak ‘pool’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 176) ~ S.E. Anatolia bǝrke, pl bǝrak ‘étang’ (Grigore 2007: 195) ~ Bišmizzīn burkat mwayy ‘Wasserbassin’ (Jiha 1964: 163) ~ Oman berke ‘Teich’ (Reinhardt 1894: 42) ~ Iraq burka/birka, pl birak ‘puddle, pool’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 32). 34

b-r-k⁴

bꜣk (OK) ‘to work, carry out a task, enslave, servant; serve, offer, present’; ‘arbeiten (insbesondere von schwerer körperlicher Arbeit); Diener, Unter­ gebener’; brkt/bꜣkt ‘work, task, labour’; ‘Arbeit’; bꜣk (OK) ‘jemanden dienstbar machen, versklaven’ (Faulkner 1962: 78; Caminos 1954: 541; DLE I 137; Wb I 426, 427; Hannig 2003: 411–12; Ember 1930: 16) ~ Dem bk ‘arbeiten, die Arbeit’ (DG 123, 124) || Ar ‫ إ� ب�ت��رك‬ʾibtaraka ‘sich eifrig auf eine Sache verlegen’; ‘he hastened, or sped, and strove, laboured, or exerted himself’ (Wahrmund I 206; Lane 193); ~ Egypt barkik/barbik ‘mit der Hand machen’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 20); barāk ‘den gedroschenen Reis einbringen’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 2012: 387) ~ Marazig bārak ‘écraser qqn à la lutte’ (Boris 1958: 31) ~ Tangier bārak ‘s’occuper sans relâche d’une chose’ (W. Marçais 1911: 230) ~ Malta ⟨ħabrek, iħabrek⟩ ‘essere molto attivo’ (Vassalli 1796: 240) [< *ḥa + brk].

On the Maltese prefix ḥ- (shared with Mahrī and Ancient Egyptian), see Ember (1914: 138–39) and Leslau (1938, 1962).

35

b-z-q

pśg/psg (Pyr) ‘spit (on, at), spittle’; ‘der Speichel’ (Faulkner 1962: 95; Wb I 555) ‫ق‬ || Ar �‫ ب����ص ق‬baṣaqa/� ‫ ب��ز‬bazaqa/�‫ ب���س ق‬basaqa ‘to spit’ (Lane 212); ~ Aleppo bazaq ‘cracher’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 43) ~ Damascus bazaq ‘to spit’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 220) ~ Egypt bazaq ‘id.’ (Spiro 1895: 45) ~ Iraq biṣaq ‘spit’ (Clarity et al., 165) 269) ~ Djidjelli bzeq ‘fait de cracher’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 82) ~ Morocco bzeq ‘saliva’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 188).

89

33. b-r-k ³ – 37. b-ṣ-b-ṣ

36

b-š-š

bš (LE) ‘rapid (of water)’; bsi҆ ‘flow forth (of water)’; bši҆ ‘spit out’; ‘speien; (Gr) vom Nil und von der Überschwemmung’; bšw ‘spittle’ (Faulkner 1962: 84, 85; Wb I 477) ~ Dem bš ‘Speichel’ (DG 123) || Ar ���‫ ب� ش���� ب� ش‬bašbaša ‘suinter (eau)’ (Beaussier 1871: 36); (i) ~ Najd ⟨bašša⟩ ‘ausströmen lassen (Schweiss)’ (Socin 1901 III 248) ~ Aleppo bašbaš ‘pisser’; baššāša/bašbāša ‘nom enfantin de l’organe urinaire’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 44, 45) ~ Iraq bašš ‘to run, blot’; hal-waraq, ybišš bī l-ḥibir ‘ink runs on this paper’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 35) ~ Egypt bašbiš ‘to soak; to sprinkle with water’; yibišbēš ‘anfeuchten’ (Spiro 1895: 46; Badawi & Hinds 1986: 76; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 24) ~ Tripoli (Libya)bešbeš ‘mormorare (ruscello, pioggia)’ (Griffini 1913: 178) ~ Morocco bǝšš ‘pisser’; baššāša ‘qui pisse beaucoup’ (Prémare I 239) ~ Malta ⟨bexx, ibexx⟩ ‘aspergere, spruzzare’; ⟨bexbex⟩ ‘piovigginare, spruzzolare’; ⟨tbexbix⟩ ‘spruzzamento’ (Vassalli 1796: 39, 87).

ّ �

The Arabic lexical variants bxx/bšš enact the Old Egyptian shift of ḫ > š (addressed in §6 of the introduction).

(ii) ~ Jibb baxx ‘to make a spitting sound (chameleon)’ (Johnstone 1981: 31) || Ar ‫ ب�خ‬baxxa (u) ‘Tabak mit Wasser bespritzen (aus dem Munde); fein regnen’

(Wahrmund I 180); ~ Aleppo baxx, ybǝxx ‘asperger avec de l’eau rejetée en pluie fine par la bouche (une étoffe, du fil de soie, du cuir, du tabac: tailleur, tisserand, cordonnier ou tanneur, etc.)’ (Barthélemy 1935–54: 30) ~ Damascus baxx ‘besprühen’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 152) ~ Lebanon maxmax ‘se rincer la bouche’ (Feghali 1919: 61) ~ Palest baxx (u) ‘fein spritzen, zerstäuben’; buxbēxa ‘feiner Regen’ (Bauer 1957: 284, 241); buxbēxa ‘feiner Regen’; baxxāx ‘id.’ (Bauer 1957: 240; Dalman I/1: 126) ~ Egypt baxx, yubuxx ‘to spout forth, squirt’ (Spiro 1895: 33) ~ Sinai ybuxx ‘he spits’ (de Jong 2011: 30) ~ Sudan baxx ‘to spray’ (Roth-Laly 1969: 43, 63) ~ Cypriot Ar paxx, pipuxx ‘to squirt moisture (saliva, water, or wine) over s.th.’ (own obs.) ~ Malta ⟨baħbaħ, ibaħbaħ⟩ ‘sciacquare’ [< *bxx] (Vassalli 1796: 15). 37

b-ṣ-b-ṣ

ّ

nbḏbḏ (Pyr) ‘shine, glitter’ (Ember 1930: 43; Wb II 247) || Ar ‫ ب����ص‬baṣṣa ‘to shine, gleam’; ‫ ب�����ص ب�����ص‬baṣbaṣa ‘strahlen, zurückstrahlen’ (Hava 1982: 35; Wahrmund I 220); ~ Aleppo baṣbūṣet nār ‘petit morceau de braise, charbon ardent’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 46) ~ Damascus bṣīṣ ḍaww ‘a faint gleam’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 103)

90

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

~ Kǝndērīb baṣṣāye, pl baṣṣāyāt/bǝṣēṣi ‘glühende Kohle’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 16) ~ Lebanon baṣbaṣ ‘luire, briller’ (Denizeau 1960: 34) ~ Egypt baṣṣa ‘live coal’ (Spiro 1895: 47); baṣṣāya ‘glühendes Stück Akazienholz’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 25) ~ Oman wbaṣ ‘hell’ (Reinhardt 1894: 64). 38

b-ṣ-l

Dem mḏ(w)l ‘onion’ (DG 195) ~ Copt ⲙϫⲱⲗ/ⲉⲙϫⲱⲗ ‘onion’ (Crum 1939: 213b) ~ Sab bṣl ‘oignon’ (Avanzini 1980: 187) || Ar ‫ ب����ص�ل‬baṣal ‘onions’ (Hava 1982: 36); ~ Aleppo baṣal, n.un. -e ‘oignon’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 47) ~ Egypt buṣal, pl ibṣala ‘Zwiebeln’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 25) ~ Yemen buṣlī/buṣṣālī, coll. baṣal ‘id.’ (Piamenta 1990: 33) ~ Iraq buṣal, pl ʾabṣāl ‘onion(s)’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 36). 39

b-ṭ-x

bddw-kꜣ (MK) ‘watermelon’; ‘eine offizinell verwendete Pflanze oder Frucht’ ّ (Faulkner 1962: 36; Keimer 1924 I 133; Wb I 488) || Ar ‫ ب���ط��ي�� خ‬biṭṭīx ‘courge (en � général); melon’ (DAF I 135); ~ Aleppo baṭṭīx n.coll., pl bṭēṭīx, n.un. baṭṭīxa ‘melon’ (Barthélemy 1935– 69: 48) ~ Damascus baṭṭīxa (ḥamra), coll./pl baṭṭīx (aḥmar) ‘watermelon’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 259). 40

b-ṭ-r

btꜣ (NK) ‘wrong, crime’; ‘Verbrechen, Untat, Sünde’ (Faulkner 1962: 85; Wb I 483; Calice 1936: 62) || Ar ‫ ب���طر‬baṭar ‘insolence, carelessness’ (Hava 1982: 37); ~ Daθīna ⟨ba/iṭir⟩ ‘être insolent, arrogant, éffronté’; ⟨baṭrah⟩ ‘insolence’; ⟨baṭrān⟩‘impétueux (homme)’ (GD 177) ~ Yemen buṭūr ‘permissiveness, not abiding by traditional moral standards’ (Piamenta 1990: 33) ~ Iraq baṭṭār ‘to make restless’; tbaṭṭar ‘to be dissatisfied with one’s lot’; buṭar ‘dissatisfaction’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 37) ~ Palest baṭṭār ‘très gai, insouciant’ (Denizeau 1960: 35) ~ Egypt itbaṭṭar ‘to be discontented’ (Spiro 1895: 49).

91

38. b-ṣ-l – 43. b- ʿ -l

41

b-ʿ-b-ʿ¹

bʿbʿ (Pyr) ‘von etwas trinken (besonders vom Blut des geschlachteten Bösen saufen), überflutet sein’; ‘⟨plonger, baigner (dans)⟩ plutôt que ⟨boire⟩’; bʿbʿ(t) ‘le flot qui baigne (les terres), l’inondation’ (Meeks 1980: 115; Wb I 448) ~ Copt ⲃⲉⲉⲃⲉ ‘pour forth, bring forth (rain), to bubble, well up (of a spring)’ (Crum

ّ

‫ة‬

1939: 28b) || Ar �‫ ب‬baʿʿ ‘to fall from a cloud (rain)’; ‘reichlich ausgießen’; ��‫ب��ع ب���ع‬ ‫ع‬ baʿbaʿah ‘gurgling’; ‫ ب��ع�ا‬baʿāʿ ‘water in a cloud’ (Wahrmund I 229; Hava 1982: 38);

‫ع‬

~ Negev baʿbaʿ, bibaʿbiʿ fil-ṃayyih ‘to play in the water (child)’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi). 42

b-ʿ-b-ʿ²

bʿbʿ ‘to converse, to speak in a contradictory manner’ (Wallis Budge 212) ‫ة‬ ~ Copt ⲃⲁⲁⲃⲉ ‘be foolish (of words)’ (Crum 1939: 28b) || ��‫ ب��ع ب���ع‬baʿbaʿah ‘fluency of speech’; ‘Zungenfertigkeit’ (Hava 1982: 38; Wahrmund I 229); ~ Egypt baʿbaʿ ‘to give vent to one’s feelings; to complain vociferously’; baʿbaʿa ‘grunt of a camel; loud protestation, angry bluster’ (Hinds & Badawi 1986: 85) ~ Palest baʿbaʿ ‘blöken’; maʿʿa ‘meckern’ (Bauer 1958: 63, 202) ~ Djidjelli boʿboʿ ‘bêler’; tboʿbīʿ ‘fait de bêler’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 235) ~ Yemen baʿʿaʿ ‘blöken’ (onomat.); yitbaʿʿa‌ʾ ‘rulpsen (wohl Pausal-form zu yitbaʿʿā)’ (Behnstedt 1992: 92); baʿāʿ ‘ram’ (Piamenta 1990: 34) ~ Morocco baʿbaʿ ‘bêler (en parlant d’un mouton); kā-iʿayyeṭ baʿʿ ‘patent, manifeste, c’est une vérité criante, c’est manifeste aux yeux de tous’ (Prémare I 258) ~ Damascus maʿʿa ‘bleat’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 24) ~ Lebanon baʿʿ ‘bêler, jaser, parler beaucoup’ (Denizeau 1960: 36) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨baʿbar⟩ ‘to growl (dog); to coo (a dove)’ (Corriente 1997: 57). 43

b-ʿ-l

bʿr/b=ʿ=ra (LE) ‘der semitische Gott Baal; Bel’; ‘Lord, Master’ (Wb I 447; Hoch 1994: 93) ~ Heb ‫ ַּב ַעל‬baʿal ‘the god Baal’ (BDB 128) || Ar ‫ ب��ع�ل‬baʿl ‘terres hautes qui

ne reçoivent d’autre arrosement que les eaux du ciel’ (Fagnan 1923: 13); ~ Palest arḍ baʿl ‘die von Baal dem himmlischen Herrn durch Niederschläge befruchtete (weibl.) Erde’; baʿl ‘unbewässerte Gemüse’; (Bauer 1957: 317, 187) ~ Lebanon baʿl ‘terrain arrosé par la pluie et qui n’a pas besoin d’être irrigué artificiellement ou ne peut l’être’ (Denizeau 1960: 39).

92 44

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

b-ġ-ḍ

ḫbd (Pyr) ‘be hateful; be displeased with; displeasure, disfavour, be hated’; ‘tadeln, verachten, hassen’ (Faulkner 1962: 188; DLE I 355; Hannig 1995: 592;

‫أ‬

Wb III 257); Ḫbḏ-rn.f ‘Dessen Name verhaßter ist’ (Leitz 2002: 685) || Ar ����‫� ب� غ�� ض‬

ʾabġaḍa ‘to hate’ (Lane 230); ~ N. Yemen baġāð̣ ‘Abscheu’ (Behnstedt 1987: 233) ~ Palmyra baġaḍ ‘haïr’ (Cantineau 1934 II 9) ~ Damascus baġaḍ ‘to hate’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 112) ~ Lebanon baġaḍ ‘haïr, detester’ (Feghali 1938: 742) ~ Oman baġaḍ ‘hassen’ (Reinhardt 1894: 145) ~ Iraq baġaḍ ‘to hate’ (Clarity et al., 1964: 112) ~ Palest buġḍa ‘Hass’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 6) ~ Tripoli (Libya) bġeḍ ‘odiare’ (Griffini 1913: 192) ~ Algeria bġaḍ ‘haïr’ (Ben Sedira 1910: 279) ~ Ḥassāniyya bǝġd ‘haine’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 79) ~ Malta ⟨bagħad, jobgħod⟩ ‘odiare’ (Vassalli 1796: 205). 45

b-ġ-y

bʿj (LE) ‘beachten, berücksichtigen’ (Wb I 446) ~ Heb ‫ ָב ָעה‬bāʿā ‘to inquire’ (BDB 126) ~ Akkad buʾû ‘to look for, search for’ (CAD II 360) || Saf bġ ‘to wish for’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 631) ~ Ar ‫ ب� غ��ى‬baġā ‘covet, request, desire’ (Hava 1982: 41); ~ Najd ⟨baġā⟩ ‘wollen, los gehen auf etwas’ (Socin 1910: 248); baġāyeh ‘Prostituierte’ (Hess 1938: 136) ~ Yemen yibġā/baġā, yabā/baġā ‘wollen’ (Behnstedt 1992: 97) ~ Rwala nabġī waṭanna ‘we long for our country’; laʿan abu min yerodd ʿan alli baġġeyt ‘Cursed be the father of him who keeps me / From what I desire’ (Musil 1928: 219, 250) ~ Ḥaḍramawt ⟨bayt walli⟩ ‘je veux partir’ (Landberg 1901: 519) ~ Oman abġa ‘ich möchte’; tba tqulli mġilbe ‘willst du mir ein Rätsel sagen?’; mhū bāġi ‘was will er?’ (Reinhardt 1894: 66, 246, 138) ~ Bahrain yibba/yubba/yumba ‘to want’ (Holes 2006: 254) ~ Egypt yanbaġi ʿalēk ‘you ought to’ (Spiro 1895: 53) ~ Khābūra bā, ybā ‘to want, require’ (Brockett 1985: 65) ~ Tripoli (Libya) bbā (per bġā) ‘volere’: nibbi, tibbi, yibbi (Griffini 1913: 308) ~ Takrūna bġē ‘vouloir, désirer, aimer’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 355) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨biġyah⟩ ‘purpose’ (Corriente 1997: 58) ~ Malta ⟨dan x’tambih?⟩ ‘what do you need this for?’ (own obs.). 46

b-q-r

pa₂=ra=ku (NK) ‘cattle (toponym)’ (Hoch 1994: 121) ~ Sab bqrm ‘cattle’ (Biella ‫ة‬ 1982: 53) || Ar �‫ ب���ق��ر‬baqarah ‘cow’ (Hava 1982: 40);

93

44. b-ġ-ḍ – 48. b-k-r ¹

~ Aleppo báqar (coll. et générique) ‘bœuf, espèce bovine’ (Barthélemy 1935– 69: 55) ~ S.E. Anatolia bāqōṛa ‘Kuhherde’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 44) ~ Palest baqara ‘Kuh’ (Bauer 1957: 317) ~ Malta ⟨baqra⟩ ‘vacca’ (Vassalli 1796: 21). 47

b-q-ʿ

48

b-k-r¹

bi=qa=ʿa (NK) ‘ravine, gully’ (DLE I 141; Hoch 1994: 112) || Ar ‫ ب���ق���ا‬biqāʿ ‘Platz, Ort, ‫ع‬ Niedergrund mit Wasser’ (Wahrmund I 239); ~ Daθīna ⟨buqʿah⟩ ‘endroit, place’ (GD 190) ~ Palest buqʿit il-anbya ‘der Ort der Propheten’ (Schmidt & Kahle 1918 I 4) ~ Egypt buqʿa ‘location, spot’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 90) ~ Takrūna buqʿa ‘lieu, endroit, place’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 359).

bkꜣ (MK) ‘be pregnant’; ‘schwanger sein / werden’; bkꜣ.t ‘pregnant woman’; ‘die schwangere’ (Faulkner 1962: 85; Wb I 481); bk ‘pregnant’; bꜣkꜣ ‘breeding cow’ (DLE I 141, 128) ~ Dem bk ‘schwanger, trächtig’ (DG 125) ~ Copt ⲃⲟⲕⲓ ‘conceive’ (Crum 1939: 31a) ~ Sab bkr ‘firstborn’ (Biella 1982: 42) ~ Soq bēkir ‘premier-né, vierge’ (Leslau 1938: 86) || Saf bkrt ‘young female camel’ (Winnett & Lankester

‫أ‬

�‫ � ب� ك‬ʾabkār ‘virgin’; ‘femme ou femelle à son �‫ ب� ك‬bikr, pl ‫��ا ر‬ Harding 1978: 631) ~ Ar ‫�ر‬ premier enfantement’ (Lane 240; DAF I 153); ~ Rwala bikr ‘a virgin’; bakra ‘a she-camel not yet eight years old’ (Musil 1928: 197, 548) ~ Aleppo bǝkr/bukr ‘vierge, pucelle; premierné’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 58) ~ Baghdad bāker ‘virgin’ (Blanc 1964: 25) ~ Oman bekr ‘Jungfrau’; bekra ‘junges Kameel’; bukra ‘Schäfchen’; weibliche kleine Ziege’ (Reinhardt 1894: 41, 56, 42, 59) ~ Kuwait bakara ‘young female camel’ (Dickson 1949: 624) ~ Yemen bakra ‘das weibliche Kameljunge’ (Behnstedt 1993: 33) ~ Damascus bǝnt bǝkr, pl banāt bǝkkar ‘virgin’ (Stowasser & Ani 1957: 256) ~ Palest bint bikr ‘Jungfrau’ (Bauer 1957: 167) ~ Egypt bikr ‘virgin, eldest born’ (Spiro 1895: 54); bikriyya ‘Jungkuh’; bákara ‘Jungkamelin’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 32; 1999: 361) ~ Malta ⟨bikri⟩ ‘primogenito’ (Vassalli 1796: 46) ~ Marazig bekra, pl bekrāt ‘vierge’ (Boris 1958: 44); bakṛa ‘weibl. Kameljunges bis zu vier Jahren’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2005: 241) ~ Ḥassāniyya sabkaṛ ‘déflorer une fille’ (D. Cohen 1963: 132).

94 49

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

b-k-r²

bkꜣ (Pyr) ‘the morrow, morning’; ‘der zweite Tag, das Morgen, der Morgen (neben Tagesmitte und Abend); morgen’ (Faulkner 1962: 85; Ember 1911: 88; Wb �‫ ب� ك‬bakara ‘es war zur Zeit der Morgendämmerung’ I 481; Sethe 1962: 120) || Ar ‫�ر‬ (Wahrmund I 242); ~ Aleppo bǝkra/bukra ‘demain’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 57) ~ Damascus bǝkra ‘morgen, bald’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 153) ~ Palest bukra ‘Morgen (adv.)’ (Bauer 1957: 209) ~ Egypt bukra/bakir ‘tomorrow’ (Spiro 1895: 55) ~ Cyrenaica (Libya) bukra ‘domani’ (Griffini 1913: 93) ~ Djidjelli bākur ‘morgen’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 43) ~ Sudan bākiriyya ‘morning’ (LDA 57) ~ S. Arabia bākir ‘de bonne heure’ (Landberg 1909: 533) ~ Khābūra bēkir ‘tomorrow, tomorrow-morning’ (Brockett 1985: 61) ~ Oman bākur ‘morgen’ (Reinhardt 1894: 43) ~ Ḥassāniyya bakkaṛ ‘partir de bonne heure’ (D. Cohen 1963: 124). 50

b-l-ǧ

brg (LE) ‘leuchten, glänzen (von den Augen)’ (Wb II 466) || Ar ‫ ب��ل��ج‬balaǧa � ‘schimmern, leuchten (Morgenröte)’ (Wahrmund I 248); ~ Marazig blag ‘apparaître (aube, jour)’ (Boris 1958: 31) ~ Najd ablaǧ ‘blitzend (vom Schwert)’ (Socin 1901 III 249) ~ Palest balǧa ‘la nuit de 3 à 4’ (Denizeau 1960: 486) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨balaǧ⟩ ‘to shine’ (Corriente 1997: 61). 51

b-l-d

‫ن‬

bnd/bꜣd.t (Gr) ‘Acker’ (Wb II 464) || Ar ‫ ب��ل�د‬balad, pl � ‫ ب��ل�د ا‬buldān ‘land, village’; ‘Stadt, Provinz, Land’ (Hava 1982: 44; Wahrmund I 250); ~ Lebanon balad ‘lieu, endroit, pays’ (Feghali 1919: 97, 27) ~ Palest balad, pl buldān ‘Dorf’ (Bauer 1957: 77) ~ Kǝndērīb balad ‘id.’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 18) ~ Ḥassāniyya bled ‘lieu’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 91) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨balda⟩ ‘town’ (Corriente 1997: 62). 52

b-l-ġ

mꜣʿ (Gr) ‘richtig, wahr, so wie etwas eigentlich beschaffen sein soll’ (Wb II 12; Calice 1936: 152) || Ar ‫ ب���ل�غ‬balaġa ‘erreichen’ (Wahrmund I 253);

49. b-k-r ² – 55. b-n-n ¹

95

~ Najd al-bilġih ‘anyway; the point is’ (Sowayan 1992: 249) ~ Aleppo balaġ ‘atteindre l’âge de puberté’; ballaġ ‘faire parvenir’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 61) ~ Marazig bǝlaġ ‘atteindre, parvenir, arriver’ (Boris 1958: 46). 53

b-l-l

(i) bꜣj (Med) ‘feucht sein (unter Anderem vom Schweiß)’; bꜣy ‘foot ewer’; bꜣi҆w ‘damp (adj.)’ (Wb I 417; Faulkner 1962: 77) ~ Akkad balālu ‘to blend, mingle, concoct’; ballu ‘mixed (medicinal and aromatic substances)’ (Parpola 2007: 13; ّ CAD II 63) || Ar ‫ ب�ل‬balla ‘to moisten’ (Lane 242); ~ Aleppo ball ‘mouiller complètement en plongeant un court instant dans l’eau’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 62) ~ Damascus nball ‘naß, feucht werden’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 153) ~ Palest ball ‘naß machen’; balle ‘Nässe’ (Bauer 1957: 216; Kampffmeyer 1936: 6) ~ Yemen ball ‘bagnare’ (Rossi 1939: 194) ~ Najd blāl ‘moisture’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 328) ~ Iraq ballal ‘wet, soak’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 43) ~ Awlād ʿAli blīle, pl blāyil ‘Thräne’ (Hartmann 1899: 74) ~ Ḥassāniyya bell ‘humecter’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 81) ~ Morocco mbellel ‘moist’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 126). (ii) brbr (LE) ‘kochen; Art Flüssigkeit in einem Kyphirezept; Getränk oder Speise’ (Wb I 466; Hannig 1995: 256) ~ Copt ⲃⲣⲃⲣ ‘to boil’ (Crum 1939: 42) || < Ar *balbal; ~ Tangier belbūla ‘orge ecrasée, mouillée et cuite à la vapeur’ (W. Marçais 1911: 235) ~ Aleppo balbal rīqo ‘humecter sa langue pour étancher sa soif (: animal)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 58) ~ Egypt balbil ‘moisten’; balbila ‘act of moistening, wetting’ (Spiro 1895: 55). 54

b-n-ḥ

i҆mnḥ (NK) ‘Schlächter’; ‘butcher’ (Wb I 87, II 84; Hannig 1995: 340; Ember 1930: 62) || Ar ��‫ ب‬banaḥa ‘concidit in partes et divisit (carnem)’ ‘zerschneiden, in

‫نح‬

Portionen zerlegen’ (Freytag 1837: 45; Wahrmund I 259). 55

b-n-n¹

bnn (LE) ‘to beget, become erect (of male)’; ‘begatten; erzeugen; Bezeichnung des Phallus’; bnbn ‘als eine sexuelle Betätigung’ (Faulkner 1962: 82; Wb I 459,

96

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

460; Hannig 1995: 254) || Ar. banā ‘cohabiter avec une / sa femme, avoir des fils, des enfants mâles, adopter quelqu’un pour fils, en faire son fils’ (DAF I 168); ~ Daθīna ⟨bannan⟩ ‘élever un enfant’ (GD 210) ~ Syria binn ‘Sohn’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 7) ~ Damascus tbanna ‘to adopt’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 4) ~ Aleppo ʾǝbǝn, pl bnīn ‘fils’ (Barthélemy 1935–54: 65); ǝbǝn ‘Sohn’ (Sabuni 1980: 178) ~ Palest bint mitbannte ‘das jungfräuliche Mädchen’ (Schmidt & Kahle 1918 I 272) ~ Mardin ǝbǝn, pl bnīn ‘Sohn, Junge, Knabe’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 48) ~ Malta ⟨benniena⟩ ‘culla’; ⟨bennen⟩ ‘muovere la culla, indurre sonno ai fanciulli’ (Vassalli 1796: 36). 56

b-n-n²

bnr (OK)‘(be) sweet, pleasant; dates’; ‘süss sein, süss; angenehm)’: bnrt ‘sweetness’; bnr.tw ‘Süßigkeiten’; ‘confection’; bnr ‘die Dattel als Nahrungsmittel’; bnr mrw.t ‘lovable’ (Faulkner 1962: 83; DLE I 135; Wb I 461, 462, 463; Brockelmann 1932: 105) ~ Dem bn ‘süss, angenehm; Süsse’ (DG 117) ~ Akkad bunnu ‘das Gute’ ‫ن‬ ‫ّة‬ (AHW I 138) || Ar. ���‫ ب�ن‬bannah, pl � ‫ ب�ن��ا‬binān ‘sweet or pleasant odour’ (Lane 258); ~ S. Arabia ⟨bannah⟩ ‘odeur, bonne ou mauvaise’ (Landberg 1909: 534) ~ Rwala benne ‘delight’ (Musil 1928: 141) ~ Sudan banna ‘sweet smell’; benīn ‘succulent’ (LDA 62) ~ Takrūna bnīn ‘savoureux, agréable, charmant’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 393) ~ Morocco bǝnnǝn ‘rendre savoureux’; bǝnna ‘saveur’; bnīn ‘suave, délicieux’ (Prémare I 317) ~ Tripoli (Libya) benna ‘gusto (sapore)’ (Griffini 1913: 143) ~ Tunis bnīn ‘savoureux’; bnān ‘il est devenu savoureux’ (D. Cohen 1975: 121) ~ Andalusi Ar ⟨banîn, pl binān⟩ ‘tasty, savoury’ (Corriente 1997: 67) ~ Malta ⟨benna⟩ ‘gusto, sapore’ (Vassalli 1796: 37). 57

b-n-n³

bnn (MK) ‘bead, pellet’; ‘boulette, pilule’; ‘Kügelchen der ‘Myrrhe’ als Medi­ kament; kleine Perle aus Stein’ (Faulkner 1962: 83; Lacau 1972: 339; Wb II 460) ~ Dem bnn.t ‘Kugel’ (DG 118) || Ar. bunn ‘Kaffeebohne’ (Wahrmund I 258); ~ Aleppo bǝnn ‘café vert ou torréfié en grains ou en poudre’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 64) ~ Damascus bǝnn ‘coffee’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 44) ~ Palest binn ‘Kaffeebohnen’ (Bauer 1957: 168) ~ Sudan bunn ‘(coffee) beans’ (LDA 60) ~ Oman bunn ‘Kaffee’ (Reinhardt 1894: 42, 269).

56. b-n-n ² – 61. b-w-ḥ ²

58

97

b-w-b

bꜣbꜣ(w) (Pyr)/bbt (BD) ‘hole, cave’; ‘Loch, Höhlung’ (Ember 1930: 43; Calice 1936: 60; Faulkner 1962: 43, 82; Wb II 419) ~ Akkad bābu ‘door, entrance’ (CAD II 14) ‫أ‬ ‫ن‬ ~ Copt ⲃⲏⲃ ‘cave’ (Crum 1939: 28) || Ar �‫ ب�ا ب‬bāb, pl �‫ � ب�وا ب‬ʾabwāb/� ‫ ب���ي ب��ا‬bībān ‘door, gate, place of entrance’ (Lane 272); ~ Aleppo bāb, pl bwāb ‘porte’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 67) ~ Suxne bāb, pl būb ‘Tür’ (Behnstedt 1994: 217) ~ Nabk bōb ‘id.’ (Gralla 2006: 40) ~ Palest bāb, pl ibwāb ‘id.’ (Bauer 1957: 308) ~ Egypt bāb, pl bwāb ‘door’ (Spiro 26) ~ Malta ⟨bieb, pl bwieb⟩ ‘porta’ (Vassalli 1796: 42). 59

b-w-ǧ

wbg (LE) ‘to light, shine (of the sun)’; ‘leuchten, scheinen (von der Sonne); ّ �‫��ت‬ erleuchten, hellen’ (Faulkner 1962: 82; Wb I 296; Hannig 1995: 189) || Ar ‫بو ج‬ � tabawwaǧa ‘to flash all over the sky (lightning)’ (Hava 1982: 50); ~ Najd nbāǧ ‘to become resplendent, to appear in its lustre, to dawn’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 336). 60

b-w-ḥ¹

bꜣḥ ‘front, phallus’; ‘das männliche Glied, insbesondere die Harnröhre’ (Ember 1930: 44; Wb I 419) ~ Copt ⲃⲁϩ/ⲡⲁϩ ‘penis (?)’ (Crum 1939: 47b) ~ Sab bḥt ‘phallus’ (Avanzini 1980: 149) || Ar ‫ ب�و‬būḥ ‘Wurzel, Ursprung, Geschlechtsteil’ ‫ح‬ (Wahrmund I 271). 61

b-w-ḥ²

mḥyt (Pyr) ‘Flut’: mḥ.t wr ‘die grosse Flut’ (Wb II 122); mḥj ‘be flooded, drown, be drowned’; mḥ ‘overflow (of Nile), inundate, swim’; mḥt ‘flood waters’; smḥy ‘to flood land’ (Ember 1930: 60; Faulkner 1962: 114, 229); cf. i҆bḥ (MK) ‘feucht ‫ة‬ sein’; i҆bḥw ‘Wasser sprengen’ (Wb I 64) || Ar ��‫ ب�ا ح‬bāḥah, pl ‫ ب�و‬būḥ ‘great quan‫ح‬ tity of water’; ‘haute mer’ (Hava 1982: 51; Dozy I 126); ~ Lebanon bāḥa ‘water’; bawwaḥ ‘boire beaucoup d’eau’; bawwaḥ l-ʾarḍ ‘irriguer la terre jusqu’à ce qu’elle soit submergée’ (Denizeau 1960: 52) ~ N. Yemen bāḥ ‘hinunterfließen’ (Wasser); mabāḥ as-sayl ‘Stelle, wo der Sturzbach hinunterstürzt’ (Behnstedt 1992: 118).

98 62

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

b-w-r

bꜣ (OK) ‘hack up the earth, hoe crops’; ‘hacken, aufhacken’ (Wb I 415; Faulkner 1962: 77) ~ br ‘Steingebiet’ (Hannig 2011: 256) ~ Syr būrā ‘uncultivated land’

‫أ ض‬

(Sokoloff 2009: 130) ~ Akkad bāru ‘open country’ (CDA 39) || Ar ‫)� ر��) ب�ور‬ (ʾarḍ) bawr ‘land not sown’ (Lane 274); ~ Palest būr ‘Brachland’ (Dalman II 39), ʾarḍ būr ‘Brachfeld’ (Bauer 1957: 65) ~ Egypt ʾarḍĭ būr ‘wasteland’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 111). 63

b-w-ʿ

bʿḥ (LE) ‘to flood, overflow, supply; flood, inundation, well irrigated land’ (DLE I 132); ~ Lebanon bawwaʿ ‘to absorb a lot of water’; tbawwaʿ ‘be full of water, be submerged under water (terrain)’ (Frayha 1973: 18); cf. 60. b-w-ḥ¹. 64

b-y-t

bt (NK) ‘house, clan, family’ (Hoch 1994: 113–115; DLE I 142) ~ b-i҆-ti҆-i҆ ‘my house’ = ‫ �� ت‬buyūt ‘house, dwelling’ ‫ ��� ت‬bayt, pl � baytī < NWS (Steiner 2011: 36) || Ar � ‫بيو‬ ‫ب �ي‬ (Hava 1982: 52); ~ Aleppo bēt, pl byūt ‘chambre au rez-de-chaussée de la maison; maison sans cour, appartement; maison, demeure’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 72) ~ Syria bēt ‘Zimmer’ (Behnstedt 1997a, map 72) ~ Āzǝx bayt ‘Haus’/bēt ‘Familie’ (Wittrich 2001: 20). 65

b-y-n

wbn (OK) ‘appear, rise, shine’; East, Levant; ‘aufgehen, glänzen; scheinen (von der Sonnen und Gestirne)’: wbnj ‘der Leuchtende als Bezeichnung des Sonnengottes’ (Faulkner 1962: 41; DLE I 97; Wb I 292, 294; Ember 1913: 120); i҆ʿḥ-wbn(.w) (Personennamen) ‘der Mond leuchtet’ (Ranke 1935: 12): mi҆ Rʿ wbn ‘like Re when he shines’ (Davies 1997: 274) ~ Dem i҆w i҆ʿḥ wbn ‘wenn der Mond aufgeht’ (DG 85) ~ Akkad būnu ‘appearance’ (CAD II 320) || Saf bn ‘to be mani‫ن‬ fest’ (Al-Jallad 2015: 309) ~ Ar � ‫ ب�ا‬bāna ‘it became distinct, apparent, … clear, plain’ (Lane 286);

62. b-w-r – 68. t-r-b

99

~ Sudan bayyan ‘rise (of moon)’ (LDA 67) ~ Yemen bān ‘apparire’ (Rossi 1939: 192) ~ Aleppo bān ‘paraître, devenir visible’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 76) ~ Palest bayyan ‘zum Vorschein kommen’ (Bauer 1957: 348) ~ Rwala abyen ‘more visible’ (Musil 1928: 343) ~ Sinai bayyin ‘clear’ (Stewart 1990: 208) ~ Egypt bān ‘become manifest or visible’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 118) ~ Tripoli (Libya) bān ‘apparire’ (Griffini 1913: 15). T 66

t-b-t

tb.t ‘Kasten’; cf. dbꜣt (MK) ‘Sarkophag, Steinsarg; Schrein, Sarg; Götterschrein’ (Wb V 261) ~ Dem tb.t ‘Kasten’; tbj.t ‘Sarg, Schrein, Kasten’ (DG 618, 622) ~ Copt ⲧⲁⲓⲃⲉ ‘chest, coffin, pouch’ (Crum 1939: 397a) ~ Heb ‫ ֵּת ָבה‬tēbā ‘ship, ark, chest’ ‫ ت�ا � ت‬tābūt, pl �‫ ت� ا � ت‬tawābīt ‘coffin, wooden vase’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 1643) || Ar � ‫وب‬ ‫بو‬ (Hava 1 982: 56); ~ Aleppo tābūt, pl twēbīt ‘cercueil public, à couvercle en forme de prisme triangulaire’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 79) ~ Damascus tābūt, pl tawābīt ‘coffin’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 45) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨tābūt/taybūt, pl tawābīt⟩ ‘coffin’ (Corriente 1997: 75) ~ Malta ⟨tebut, pl twiebet⟩ ‘bara’ (Vassalli 1796: 104). 67

t-b-n

68

t-r-b

Copt ⲥⲱⲟⲩⲃⲉⲛ ‘grass’ (Crum 1939: 369a) || Ar �‫ ت�ب�� ن‬tibn ‘straw’ (Hava 1982: 56); ~ Aleppo tǝbǝn, pl tbān ‘paille hachée’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 80) ~ Mharde tǝbǝn ‘Stroh’ (Yoseph 2012: 153) ~ Iraq tibin ‘straw’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 54) ~ S. Arabia ⟨tibl⟩ [= tibn] ‘paille’ (Landberg 1909: 536).

tnm (ME) ‘Schmutz’ (Wb V 312) ~ Copt ⲧⲱⲗⲉⲃ/ⲧⲁⲗⲉϥ/ⲧⲱⲗⲙ ‘be defiled, besmirched’ (Crum 1939: 410) || Ar �‫ ت�ر ب‬tarb/turb/�‫ ت�را ب‬turāb ‘earth, dust’ (Hava 1982: 58); ~ Oman trāb ‘Erde’ (Reinhardt 1894: 44) ~ Aleppo ṭrāb, pl ṭrēyeb ‘de la terre, de la poussière’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 473) ~ Palmyra tṛāḅa ‘argile’ (Cantineau 1934 II 26) ~ Damascus ṭṛāb ‘earth’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 75) ~ Palest turbe ‘Grab’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 8) ~ Nabk tṛōb ‘Staub, Erde’ (Gralla 2006: 16)

100

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

~ Iraq ṭġāb ‘dust’ (Abu-Haidar 1991: 29) ~ Malta ⟨trab⟩ ‘terra, polvere’ (Vassalli 1796: 134). 69

t-r-t-r

70

t-f-ḥ

Dem tryꜣ ‘tremble’ (DG) ~ Copt ⲧⲣⲣⲉ ‘to be afraid’ (Crum 1939: 431b) || Ar ‫ت�رت�ر‬ ‫ت‬ tartara ‘bewegen, schütteln’ (Wahrmund I 312); ‫ ت���رت�ر‬tatartara ‘to be shaken’ (Hava 1982: 570); ~ Palest tartar ‘erstarren vor Kälte, Furcht’ (Bauer 1957: 102) ~ Malta ⟨terter, iterter⟩ ‘patir freddo, tremare’ (Vassalli 1796: 94).

ḏpḥ/tpḥ (NK) ‘der Apfel’ (Wb V 568; Hannig 1999: 1005) ~ Dem ḏmpḥ/ḏpḫ ‫ف‬ ‘Apfel’ (DG 680) ~ Copt ϫ(ⲉ)ⲙⲡⲉϩ ‘apple’ (Crum 1939: 771b) || Ar ‫ ت������ا‬tuffāḥ, pl ‫ح‬ ‫تف ف‬ ����� ‫ ������ا‬tafāfīḥ ‘apples’ (Hava 1982: 60); ‫يح‬ ~ Aleppo tǝffāḥ n.coll., n.un. -a, pl -āt ‘pomme, pommier’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 86) ~ Palest tuffāḥ ‘Äpfel’ (Bauer 1957: 22) ~ Egypt tuffāḥ/tiffāḥ ‘apples’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 130) ~ Malta ⟨tuffieħ⟩ ‘apples’ (Aquilina 1990: 1486). 71

t-f-f

tf (Pyr) ‘der Speichel, ausspeien (besonders mit Bezug auf die Schöpfung der Göttin Tefnut durch Atum); spucken, vomieren’; tpi҆ ‘spew out’ (Wb V 297; ّ‫ف‬ Hannig 1999: 923; DLE II 207) ~ Copt ⲧⲁϥ ‘spittle’ (Crum 1939: 453a) || Ar ����‫ت‬ taffa ‘speien (Blut)’ (Wahrmund I 332); ~ Rwala w-tiffen ʿala d-dunya warāha l-mamāti ‘it is best to spit on a world beyond which is death’ (Musil 1928: 318) ~ Aleppo taff, yteff ‘cracher (du sang); tfū (interjection de degoût, de mépris, de dédain « pouah! fi! »); tfē (interjection de mépris qu’on accompagne d’un simulacre de crachement « fi! pouah! »; tfē ʿala wuččak ‘je crache sur ta face qui me dégoûte’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 87) ~ Lebanon ṭaff ‘tousser, cracher’ (Denizeau 1960: 64) ~ Palest ṭaff, biṭiff ‘spucken’; ṭafṭafa ‘ein Ausspücken’; ntaff ‘bespuckt werden’ (Bauer 1957: 284; Kampffmeyer 1936: 9) ~ Egypt taff ‘to spit’ (Spiro 1895: 87) ~ Morocco tuff ‘onomatopée du bruit de qqn qui crache, recrache’ (Prémare II 61).

101

69. t-r-t-r – 74. t-m-s-ḥ

72

t-k-k

tkk/tktk (MK) ‘take by violence; violate frontier, attack, assail’; ‘angreifen’; tkkw ‘attackers’ (Ember 1930: 112; Faulkner 1962: 302; DLE II 221; Wb V 331, 336); tkk/

ّ

tktk ‘angreifen’ || Ar ‫ ت��ك‬takka ‘zerschneiden, zu boden treten’ (Wahrmund I 340); cf. 580. k-t-t²; ~ Rwala katt ‘to rush upon, assault’ (Musil 1928: 598) ~ Daθīna katt ⟨katt⟩‘démolir, abattre, ruiner’ (GD 2554) ~ Palest takk/katt, tkitt, bikitt ‘läßt herunterfallen, herunterkommen, abfallen’ (Bauer 1957: 331, 336; Kampffmeyer 1936: 63) ~ Lebanon takk, ytikk ‘secouer, faire tomber de’; taktek ‘taper à petits coups (sur un vêtement, un tapis, etc., pour en faire tomber la poussière)’ (Denizeau 1960: 65) ~ Iraq katt ‘throw out’; kattit ‘send off, shoo away’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 734) ~ Ḥesbān katt ‘to dash away’ (Palva 1978: 99) ~ Kǝndērīb katt ‘(Flüssigkeit), eingedickt, reduziert werden’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 121) ~ Sinai takk ‘to empty something out’ (Stewart 1990: 271). 73

t-l-l

ṯnn (NK) ‘Ort wo Kraut wächst’; ‘mounds, heaps’ (Wb V 384; Hoch 1994: 356) ~ Copt ⲧⲁⲗ ‘heap, hillock’ (Crum 1939: 408a) ~ Akkad tilu(m)/tillu/telu ‘(ruin)

ّ

mound; heap of grain’ (CDA 406) || Ar ‫ ت�ل‬tall, pl tilāl ‘Hügel’ (Wahrmund I 343); ~ Aleppo tall, pl tlūl ‘colline’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 91) ~ Palest tall, pl tlūl/ tlāl ‘Hügel’ (Bauer 1957: 161) ~ Egypt tall, pl tilāl/tulūl ‘hill, heap’ (Spiro 1895: 81) ~ Marazig talla/tall ‘le haut Tell’ (Boris 1958: 62). 74

t-m-s-ḥ

msḥ/mzḥ (LE) ‘crocodile’ (Faulkner 1962: 117; DLE I 205): ʿḥʿ.n i҆ṯj n si҆ msḥ ‘Daraufhin ergriff sie ein Krokodil’ (Lepper 2008: 54) ~ Dem msḥ ‘der Krokodil’ ‫ت‬ (DG 179) ~ Copt ⲙⲥⲁϩ ‘id.’ (Crum 1939: 187b) || Ar ‫ �م��س�ا‬timsāḥ ‘Krokodil’ ‫ح‬ (Wahrmund I 250); ~ Aleppo ǧǝld timsāḥ ‘peau de crocodile’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 92) ~ Damascus tǝmsāḥ, pl tamasīḥ ‘crocodile’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 57) ~ Palest mtamsiḥ ‘(Haut) so hart wie eine Krokodilshaut’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 9) ~ Egypt timsāḥ, pl tamasīḥ ‘crocodile’ (Spiro 1895: 84) ~ Morocco timsaḥ ‘crocodile’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 42).

102 75

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

t-m-m

tm (Pyr) ‘be complete’; ‘aufhören, zu Ende sein, vergehen, vernichten; vollständig sein oder machen; (Hilfsverb)’; nb-tm ‘Lord of All’ (Faulkner 1962: 298; Wb V 301; Sethe 1962: 201; Calice 1936: 86) ~ Dem tm ‘aufhören; vollständig sein’ ‫ت‬ (DG 629, 631) || Ar ّ� tamma ‘be complete, accomplished’ (Hava 1982: 62); ‫م‬ ~ Egypt tamm ‘to be completed, finished’; ‘fertig werden (Käse), weiter­ machen’; tamm, yitamm ‘bleiben’ (Spiro 1895: 83; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 52) ~ Marazig tamm ‘être terminé, parfait, fini (objet, travail); prendre fin, s’achever; en avoir fini avec; continuer, ne pas cesser de’ (Boris 1958: 64) ~ Damascus tamām ‘ganz, vollkommen’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 154) ~ S. Arabia ⟨tamm⟩ ‘rester, continuer’ (Landberg 1909: 537) ~ Aleppo tamm ‘s’achever, s’accomplir’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 93) ~ Kǝndērīb tamm ‘bleiben’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 25) ~ Palest tamm ‘bleiben’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 9) ~ Malta ⟨tmiem⟩ ‘perfezione, compimento, fine’ (Vassalli 1796: 130). 76

t-n-r

trr (NK) ‘der Ofen des Bäckers’; ‘oven’; ta=ru₂=ru₂ (Wb V 318; Hoch 1994: 359; DLE II 162) ~ Akkad tinūru ‘oven’ (Parpola 2007: 125) ~ Heb ‫ ַתּנּור‬tannūr ّ ‘portable stove or firepot’ (BDB 1072) || Ar ‫ ��ت ن�ور‬tannūr, pl ‫ ��ت ن��ا ن�ي��ر‬tanānīr ‘Ofen, Backgrube’ (Wahrmund I 355) [< Aram tannūrā]; ~ Ḥaḍramawt tinnār, pl tanānīr ‘portable stove for baking bread’ (Radionov 2007: 102) ~ Oman tennūr ‘Backofen’ (Reinhardt 1895: 48) ~ Palmyra tannūṛ, pl tanēnīr ‘four à pain’ (Cantineau 1934 II 33) ~ Aleppo tannōr, pl tnēnīr ‘four à pain’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 74) ~ S.E. Anatolia ṭannūṛ/ṭannōṛ, pl ṭǝnēnīr ‘Backofen’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 75) ~ Oman tennūr ‘id.’ (Reinhardt 1894: 48). 77

t-w-r

78

t-w-h

i҆trw (Pyr) ‘river’; ‘der Fluss’ (Faulkner 1962: 333; Wb I 146) || Ar ‫ ت�ا ر‬tāra ‘fließen (Wasser)’ (Wahrmund I 360).

thj (Pyr) ‘cross, transgress, err; be forgetful (of heart), disobey’; ‘übertreten, sündigen, falsch handeln, abweichen vom Wege, übertragen vom Herzen, vergesslich sein’: i҆b th ‘the heart is astray’ (Ember 1917: 86; Faulkner 1962: 300; Wb

75. t-m-m – 81. θ-w-r

103

V 319; Hannig 2003: 1434) || Ar ‫ ت�ا ه‬tāha ‘go astray’; ‘am Verstande getrübt sein; zerstreut sein’ (Hava 1982: 265; Wahrmund I 357, 363); ~ Damascus tāh ‘to lose one’s bearings’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 20) ~ Negev tāh, bitūh ‘to be lost’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi) ~ Egypt tāh, yutūh ‘to lose one’s way, go astray’ (Spiro 1895: 67) ~ Sudan tāh ‘go astray’; tāih ‘vain, conceited’ (LDA 82) ~ ʿAnazeh tāwah ‘perdre’ (Landberg 1940: 8) ~ Rwala tāh, itīh ‘lose one’s way, to stray’; tāyih, pl tiyāha ‘wandering around’; lā yetīhen ‘they err not’; tiht ‘I lost my way’ (Musil 1928: 318, 399, 520, 327) ~ Najd ⟨tīhī, pl tayāhā⟩ ‘wildes Kamel’ (Socin 1901 III 251).

Θ

79

θ-d-y

šdi҆ (Pyr) ‘suckle’; ‘säugen; aufziehen’ (Faulkner 1962: 273; Wb IV 564; Hannig 1995: 844) || (?) Ar ‫ ث��د ��ي‬θady ‘breast’ (Lane 333); ~ Yemen θidi/θadi ‘weibliche Brust’ (Behnstedt 1992: 148) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨θady⟩ ‘breast, teat’ (Corriente 1997: 83). 80

θ-n-y

(i) snw (Gr) ‘the number two’; snnw ‘(ordinal number) second’ (Faulkner 1962: ّ 230) || Ar �ٍ‫ ث�ا ن‬θānin ‘second’; ‫ ث� ن�ى‬θannā ‘to repeat, reiterate an action’ (Hava 1982: 73); ~ Palest θāni ‘der Zweite; der andere’ (Bauer 1957: 385, 14) ~ Damascus tāni ‘other’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 164) ~ Kǝndērīb θēni ‘nächster’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 28) ~ Malta ⟨tieni⟩ ‘secondo’ (Vassalli 1796: 114). (ii) sn (Pyr) ‘brother’; ‘Bruder’; snw ‘companion, fellow, equal’ (Faulkner 1962: 230; Wb IV 150); snsn ‘sich vereinen mit, sich gesellen; sich verbrüdern’ (Hannig 2003: 1159; Lepper 2008: 54). 81

θ-w-r

sr (Pyr) ‘sheep, ram’; ‘Schafbock, Widder’ (Faulkner 1962: 235; Wb III 462) ~ Heb ‫ ׁשֹור‬šōr a head of cattle’ (BDB 1004) ~ Amh sawr ‘Taurus (zodiac)’ (Kane ‫ث‬ 1990: 571) || Saf θr ‘bull’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 638) ~ Ar ‫ �ور‬θawr, ‫ن‬ pl � ‫ ث�ي��را‬θīrān ‘bull’ (Hava 1982: 74);

104

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

~ N. Yemen θawrin ‘Stier’ (Behnstedt 1987: 239) ~ Oman θōr, pl θīrān ‘id.’ (Reinhardt 1894: 73) ~ Đ̣ far θōr, pl θīrān ‘id.’ (Rhodokanakis 1911: 7) ~ S.E. Anatolia θawṛ, pl θwāṛ ‘Stier, Ochse’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 81) ~ Āzǝx sawṛ, pl sīrān/swāṛ ‘Stier’ (Wittrich 2001: 114, 105, 21) ~ Sine sawr, pl swēr ‘Ochse’ (Talay 2015: 280, 281) ~ Palest θor, pl θīrān ‘Stier’ (Bauer 1957: 290).

Ǧ

82

ǧ-b-b¹

gbb (Pyr) ‘earth’; ‘Name des Erdgottes Geb; auch für Erdboden’ (Faulkner 1962: 288; ‫ة‬ Wb V 164) || Ar ��‫ ج���بو�ب‬ǧubūbah ‘morceau, motte de terres, de boue’ (DAF I 246). ~ Yemen ǧabūbah ‘Berg, Hugel’; ǧibb/ǧubb ‘Terrasse’ (Behnstedt 1992: 162). 83

ǧ-b-b²

ّ

ꜣgb (Pyr) ‘Wasserfülle, Flut, Überschwemmung’ (Wb I 22) || Ar �‫ ج�� ب‬ǧubb, pl �‫ ج� ب���ا ب‬ǧibāb ‘well, cistern, pit’ (Hava 1982: 75); ~ Egypt žibb ‘unterirdische Wasserleitung’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 55) ~ Rwala ǧubb ‘an artificial well with spring water’; ǧebb ‘a deep rain well or cistern, wider at the bottom than at the top’ (Musil 1928: 678) ~ Aleppo ǧǝbb, pl ǧbāb ‘puits; silo (à la campagne); réservoir (pour conserver l’huile)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 101) ~ Palmyra cubb, pl cbūb ‘puits, fosse’ (Cantineau 1934: 118) ~ Mharde ǧbēb ‘Brunnen’ (Yoseph 2012: 158) ~ Kǝndērīb ǧǝbb, pl ǧbēb ‘Zisterne’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 29) ~ Yemen ǧubb ‘cellar, basement’ (Piamenta 1990: 59). 84

ǧ-b-ǧ-b

gbj (NK) ‘schwach, elend sein, schwach sein (von Personen)’; gbgb (Med) ‘lahm sein’; ‘be lame’ (Wb V 161; Faulkner 1962: 289); Calice 1936: 41) ~ Dem gbj ‘schwach’ (DG 578) ~ Amh žäbbäbä ‘to wobble, totter’ (Kane 1990: 1865) || ّ Ar �‫ ج�� ب‬ǧabba ‘sich fürchten’ (Wahrmund I 402); ~ Iraq tǧabǧab ‘to be unsure, hesitant, timid, shy’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 66) ~ Damascus mžabžab ‘craintif, qui reste à l’écart’ (Denizeau 1960: 73) ~ Aleppo mǧafǧaf ‘qui a honte, qui éprouve de l’embarras, gêné en présence de (qqn)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 114) ~ Lebanon džabžab ‘to distance oneself from

82. ǧ-b-b ¹ – 87. ǧ-b-h

105

society’ (Frayha 1973: 24) ~ Palest innās ǧabǧabat šway ʿan baʿḍha ‘Die Leute hielten sich ein wenig voneinander zurück’ (Schmidt & Kahle II 12, 14). 85

ǧ-b-r

ḏbꜣ (Pyr) ‘ersetzen, vergelten’; ‘restore, replace, repay’ (Wb V 555; Faulkner 1962: 321) || Ar ‫ ج���بر‬ǧabara ‘to be restored to a former state’ (Hava 1982: 76); ~ Egypt gabar ‘repair’ (Spiro 1895: 92) ~ Tangier žbaṛ ‘trouver’ (W. Marçais 1911: 247) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨anjabar⟩ ‘be restored’ (Corriente 1997: 88) ~ S. Arabia ⟨ǧabar⟩ ‘contenter, satisfaire (chez tous les Bédouins d’Arabie)’ (Landberg 1909: 540) ~ N. Yemen ǧabar ‘beistehen, erhalten’ (Behnstedt 1992: 163) ~ Kǝndērīb ǧabaṛ ‘zwingen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 29) ~ Aleppo ǧabar ‘obliger, assister qqn dans le besoin’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 101) ~ Damascus ja žāber ‘o (Gott) der du Gedeihen gibst’ (Bergsträßer 1924: 107) ~ Lebanon jabar ‘faire avoir de bonheur par faire profiter de (fî)’; jabr ‘compensation, bonheur’ (Feghali 1935: 64; 1938: 589) ~ Palest žabar ‘to console’ (Piamenta 2000: 199); ǧabr ‘zufriedenstellen’ (Kampffmeyer 1 936: 10); maǧbūr il-xāṭir ‘höchst zufrieden’ (Schmidt & Kahle 1918 I 273) ~ Ḥassāniyya jbaṛ ‘trouver’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 147) ~ Malta ⟨ġabar⟩ ‘cogliere, raccogliere, risarcire, ristaurare’ (Vassalli 1796: 207). 86

ǧ-b-l

dbn (MK) [< *dbl < *ǧbl] ‘builder’s mortar’; ‘etwas das Maurer und Töpfer gebrauchen’ (Faulkner 1962: 311; Wb V 438); dbn n jqdw ‘Ton des Töpfers; Dung des Maurers (zum Bau des Hauses)’ (Hannig 1995: 975) || Ar ‫ ج� ب���ل‬ǧabala ‘formen, bilden, schaffen’; ‘mix water with clay’ (Wahrmund I 406; Hava 1982: 76); ~ Kǝndērīb ǧǝbbālǝt ṭīn ‘Lehmmörtel’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 29) ~ Aleppo ǧabal ‘délayer avec de l’eau (du plâtre, du mortier); pétrir’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 102) ~ ʿAqra yǝǧbǝl ‘anrühren’ (O. Jastrow 1990: 331) ~ Palest ǧabal ‘Mörtel anmachen, bereiten’; ǧabbāl ‘Mörtelzurichter’; maǧbal ‘Mörtelplatz’ (Bauer 1957: 210; Dalman VII 45). 87

ǧ-b-h

gmḥt (MK) ‘forehead’; ‘Locke oder Flechte des Haares’ (Ember 1930: 80; Wb V ‫ة‬ 171) ~ Jibb gǝbhέt ‘brow’ (Johnstone 1981: 69) || Ar ��‫ ج����ب�ه‬ǧabhah ‘forehead’ (Hava 1982: 77);

106

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

~ Rwala ǧabha ‘forehead’ (Musil 1928: 115, fn 7) ~ Yemen ǧabheh ‘fronte’ (Rossi 1939: 210) ~ Iraq ǧābah ‘to confront, face, encounter’; ǧabha ‘front, front part, forehead, brow’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 67) ~ Aleppo ǧabha ‘le haut du front’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 103) ~ Tripoli (Lebanon) ǧabah ‘se presenter en face’ (El-Hajjé 1954: 87) ~ Palest ǧibha ‘Stirn’ (Bauer 1957: 290) ~ Egypt gibha ‘forehead’ (Spiro 1895: 93) ~ Ḥassāniyya jǝbhe ‘front’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 72). 88

ǧ-θ-θ

ḏt/ḏs (Pyr) ‘body of person, image, bodily form of god’; ‘Leib’ (Faulkner 1962: 317, 251; Wb V 503, 199): jp.n.f ḏt.f ‘er hat, seinen Leib bezahlt’ (Assmann 1969: 113) ّ‫ || ث‬Saf ǧθ ‘body, corpse’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 633) ‫ة‬ ~ Ar �����‫ ج‬ǧuθθah ‘corps, taille et volume du corps (tout de l’homme que des animaux …)’ (DAF I 251); ~ Yemen ǧiθθeh ‘cadavere’ (Rossi 1939: 197) ~ Lebanon žette ‘corps’ (Feghali 1938: 748) ~ Palest ǧiθθe ‘Körper’ (Bauer 1957: 180) ~ Egypt gitta, pl gitat ‘carcass, corpse, body’ (Spiro 1895: 94); ǧitta ‘Körper’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 56) ~ Marazig žetta ‘cadavre d’homme mort depuis quelque temps déjà’ (Boris 1958: 76). 89

ǧ-ḥ-š

gḥś (OK) ‘gazelle’; ‘Gazelle (gazella dorcas)’ (Ember 1930: 91; Wb V 191; Hommel 1879: 348; Faulkner 1962: 291; DLE 193) ~ Dem kḥsꜣt/gḥs.t ‘Gazelle’ (DG 567, 591) ‫�� ش ن‬ ‫ ج�� ش‬ǧaḥš, pl ��‫ح�ا ش‬ � ~ Copt ϭϩⲟⲥ ‘gazelle’ (Crum 1939: 839b) || Ar ���‫ح‬ ‫ج‬ � �‫ ج‬ǧiḥāš/� ‫ح����ا‬ ǧiḥšān ‘young ass, colt, gazelle’ (Hava 1982: 78); ~ Syria ǧaḥš/ǧiḥš/ǧuḥš ‘Esel’ (Behnstedt 1997a: 109) ~ Ḥalbūn čḥēš ‘Esel (pl)’ (Arnold & Behnstedt 1993: 26) ~ Aleppo ǧaḥš/ǧaḥaš, pl čḥēš ‘âne de petite taille, bourriquet; ignorant, sot’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 104) ~ Damascus žaḥš, pl žḥāš ‘donkey (young)’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 70) ~ Kǝndērīb gaḥš, pl gḥēš ‘männliches Eselfüllen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 29) ~ S.E. Anatolia daḥš ‘Füllen (Pferd, Esel)’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 84) ~ Palest ǧaḥš, pl ǧḥāš ‘Eseljunger (Fülle)’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 10) ~ Egypt gaḥš, pl guḥūš/guḥuša ‘young donkey’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 149); ǧaḥš ‘Esel; männliches Eselsfohlen’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 54); ǧaḥš/ǧiḥš/ǧiḥiš ‘Eselhengst’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1985: 101) ~ Marazig žeḥš, pl žḥāš ‘ânon’ (Boris 1958: 76) ~ Tunis žaḥš ‘ânon’; žaḥša ‘femme stupide’ (D. Cohen 1975: 22, 150) ~ Malta ⟨ġaħx⟩ ‘a stupid person’ (own obs.).

88. ǧ-θ-θ – 92. ǧ-r-b

90

107

ǧ-ḥ-m

gmḥ (MK) ‘catch sight of, espy, look at’; ‘sehen, erblicken; weit blicken (vom �� ǧaḥama ‘to open Auge)’ (Faulkner 1962: 289; Wb V 170; Ember 1930: 79) || Ar �‫ح‬ ‫ج م‬ (the eyes)’; ‘die Augen öffnen und auf etwas richten’ (Hava 1982: 78; Wahrmund I 413). 91

ǧ-d-l

mktr/mkdr/mgdr (LE) ‘tower’ (Wb V 631) ~ Copt ⲙⲓⲕⲧⲟⲗ ‘tower’ (Crum 1939: ‫ �جم‬miǧdal, pl ‫��ا د ل‬ ‫ �جم‬maǧādil 214b) ~ Heb ‫ ִמגְ ָּדל‬migdāl ‘tower’ (BDB 153) || Ar ‫��د ل‬ ‘castle’ (Hava 1982: 81); ~ Greater Syria maǧdal, pl maǧādil ‘entre dans la composition d’un grand nombre de noms de villages libanais et syriens avec le sens de ⟨tour⟩’ (Denizeau 1960: 77). 92

ǧ-r-b

gꜣb/gꜣbw (LE) ‘basket’ (Janssen 1975: 357; DLE II 184) ~ Sab grm ‘waterskin, waterbag’ (Biella 1982: 76) || Ar �‫ �ج�را ب‬ǧirāb, pl �‫ �ج�ر ب‬ǧurub/ǧurb ‘Ledersack’ (Wahrmund I 422); cf. 535. q-r-b; ~ Daθīna ⟨ǧarm⟩, pl ⟨ǧirām⟩ ‘pellisse en peau de mouton’ (GD 279) ~ Yemen ǧarm, pl ǧirūm ‘pelliccia dei gabīlī (rozze casacche o mantelli)’ (Rossi 1939: 226) ~ Negev girbih ‘waterskin’ (Henkin 2010: 238) ~ Oman qarbe, pl qrāb ‘Schlauch’ (Reinhardt 1894: 70) ~ Kuwait ǧirāb ‘small gazelle skin bag for carrying coffee on march’ (Dickson 1949: 636) ~ Aleppo ǧrāb ‘sac de cuir’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 106) ~ Iraq girba, pl girab ‘water skin; water bag made of canvas; clay water jug’; grāb ‘sheath, scabbard (for a knife or sword)’; ǧrāb, pl ǧurbān ‘Schlauch mit Griffen für Eßwaren’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 386; Weißbach 1930) ~ Lebanon ǧrāb ‘sac de voyage’ (Feghali 1938: 749) ~ Palest ǧrāb, pl ǧurbān ‘Ledertasche für Mehl; Hirtentasche, der Schafschlauch; Hirtentasche, Brotbeutel’ (Bīr Zēt; Schmidt & Kahle 1918: I 273; Bauer 1957: 191, 302, 158) ~ Tunis gǝrba ‘outre en peau’ (D. Cohen 1975: 28). Cf. Gk κίρβα ‘leather pouch’ (Beekes 2010: 702).

108 93

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

ǧ-r-r

gr (Pyr) ‘be silent, be quiet, still; cease, desist’; ‘schweigen (und nicht reden), verstummen’; grw ‘silent man’; ‘der ‫ أ‬schweigende’ (Faulkner 1962: 290; Wb V ّ � 179, 180; Calice 1936: 85) || Ar ‫ � �ج ر‬ʾaǧarra ‘to prevent s.o. from speaking’ (Hava 1982: 83); ~ Yemen staǧarr ‘ruminare’ (Rossi 1939: 234) ~ Iraq ǧurr nafsak min halqað̣ iyya ‘Get out of that affair!’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 70) ~ Ḥassāniyya žaṛṛ ‘il a ruminé’ (D. Cohen 1963: 25). 94

ǧ-r-n

g=ru₂=n (NK) ‘threshing-floor’ (Hoch 1994: 352) ~ Akkad garunnu ‘heap, mound’ (CAD V 142) ~ Heb ‫ ּג ֶֹרן‬gōren ‘threshing-floor’ (BDB 175) ~ Ugar grn

‫ن‬

‫ن‬

‫أ‬

‘id.’ (DUL 308) ~ Sab grnh ‘id.’ (Biella 1982: 77) || Ar �‫ �ج�ر‬ǧurn, pl � ‫ � �ج�را‬ʾaǧrān ‘Trockenplatz’ (Wahrmund I 428); ~ Yemen ǧirn, pl aǧrān ‘aia per trebbiare il grano’ (Rossi 1939: 191) ~ Palest ǧurn, pl ǧrūn ‘Tenne’ (Dalman III 68) ~ Negev ǧurn ‘threshing-floor’ (C. Bailey 1982: 139) ~ Awlād-ʿAli jurn, pl jrūne ‘ein grosser Getreidehaufen’ (Hartmann 1899: 47) ~ Egypt gurn, pl ʾagrān/girān ‘threshing floor, threshing area’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 157); ǧarn ‘Dreschplatz’; ǧurn ‘Mittelpunkt des Dreschplatzes’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 63). 95

ǧ-r-y

gr/garaya (NK) ‘stream’ (DLE II 191; Hoch 1994: 350) ~ Ḥar gerō ‘to flow’ (Johnstone 1977: 162) || Ar ‫ �ج�ر�ى‬ǧarā ‘fließen’ (Wahrmund I 429); ~ Aleppo ǧara ‘couler (: eau, sang repandu)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 110) ~ Kǝndērīb ǧǝri ‘fließen’: ṃayy ǧāri ‘fließendes Wasser’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 86; Jastrow 2005: 30) ~ Palest ǧiri/ǧara ‘fließen’ (Bauer 1957: 113) ~ Egypt giri ‘to run, flow’ (Spiro 1895: 100) ~ Malta ⟨ilma ġieri⟩ ‘flowing water’ (own obs.). 96

ǧ-s-r¹

ḏsr.w (Pyr) ‘prächtig, erhaben, heilig, Pracht, Herrlichkeit (einer Person, besonders eines Gottes)’; ‘sacred’ (Wb V 610, 615); ḏśr rmn ‘der Starkarmige’ (Altenmüller 1975: 287; DLE II 274) ~ Akkad gašru ‘strong’; gišrūtu ‘supremacy’;

93. ǧ-r-r – 98. ǧ-s-s

109

guššuru ‘superior in strength’ (CAD V 56, 108, 143) || Ar ‫ ج���سر‬ǧasara ‘oser quelque chose, être hardi et courageux’ (DAF I 293); ~ Palest ǧasūr ‘kühn, mutig’; ǧasāra ‘Kühnheit, Mut’; itǧāsar ‘wagen’ (Bauer 1957: 184, 212) ~ S.E. Anatolia ǧāsūr ‘mutig’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 87) ~ Palmyra ssečṛa ‘avoir l’audace de, oser’ (Cantineau 1934 II 9) ~ Aleppo ǧasūr ‘hardi, audacieux, téméraire’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 112) ~ Damascus žasāra ‘boldness’; itžāsar ‘to dare’; žasūr ‘bold, brave’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 25, 60) ~ Iraq ǧasūr ‘hero’ (van Ess 1918: 152); ǧisar ‘to venture, dare’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 72) ~ Oman gesūr ‘mutig’ (Reinhardt 1894: 62) ~ Najd ǧassar ‘to embolden’ (Sowayan 1992: 254) ~ Yemen ǧasāra ‘coraggio’ (Rossi 1939: 201) ~ Sinai ǧassār ‘intrepid’ (C. Bailey 1991: 432) ~ Egypt gasūr ‘daring, courageous, brave’; diyāba ǧāsara ‘angriffslustige Wölfe’ (Spiro 1895: 103; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 64) ~ Morocco ḍṣara ‘impudence’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 104; cf. W. Marçais 1911: 441) ~ Algeria žesāra ‘hardiesse’; beddesāra ‘hardiment’ (Ben Sedira 1910: 280) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨jasar⟩ ‘daring, boldness’ (Corriente 1997: 96) ~ Ḥassāniyya dṣāṛa ‘effronterie’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 58). 97

ǧ-s-r²

ḏsr (Pyr) ‘support, raise, support’; ‘den Weg freimachen, freihalten’ (Ember 1930: 74; Faulkner 1962: 324; Wb V 615) ~ Akkad gišru/gušūru ‘beam, log, planks, timber; bridge’ (M. Cohen 2011: 17, 27) || Ar ‫ ج���سر‬ǧasara ‘construire un pont ou une chaussée’ (DAF I 293); ~ Aleppo ǧǝsǝr, pl ǧsūra/dsūra ‘grand poutre placé en travers des solives d’un plafond pour les soutenir’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 112) ~ Damascus žǝsǝr, pl žsūra ‘beam, bridge’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 19, 60, 28) ~ Palest ǧisr, pl ǧsūr(a) ‘Brücke, Balken’; ǧsūra Böschungen’ (Bauer 1957: 67, 40, 212; Kampffmeyer 1936: 11) ~ Iraq ǧisir, pl ǧsūra ‘beam’ (Clarity et al., 1964: 16) ~ Egypt ǧisr ‘Ufer eines kleinen Kanals’; ǧisir ‘Damm, Feldrain, Feldweg’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 64). 98

ǧ-s-s

gś (NK) ‘salben’; ‘anoint someone’ (Wb V 201; Faulkner 1962: 291; Albright 1918: 251) ~ Heb [‫ ]גשש‬gāšaš ‘to feel with the hand, stroke’ (BDB 178) || Ar ǧassa ‘to feel with the hand’ (Hava 1982: 90); ~ Damascus yžǝss ǝn-nabḍ ‘tâter le pouls’ (Cantineau & Helbaoui 1953: 49) ~ Egypt gass ‘to feel, touch, take soundings’ (Spiro 1895: 102) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nijassas⟩ ‘to feel or touch’ (Corriente 1997: 96)

110 99

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

ǧ-ṣ-ṣ

qḏ (NK) ‘Gips, Stuck’; ‘gypsum, plaster’ (Wb V 82; DLE II 162, 163); qa=ḏa/qi=ḏa ‘gypsum, plaster’ [*gaṣṣ/giṣṣ] (Hoch 1994: 307) ~ Akkad gaṣṣ ‘gypsum’ (CAD ّ ّ ‫ق‬ V 54) ~ Sab qṣm ‘plaster’ (Biella 1982: 464) || Ar ‫ ج����ص‬ǧaṣṣ/‫ ����ص‬qaṣṣ ‘gypsum’ (Hava 1982: 76, 91, 607) [< *gaṣṣ] (Rabin 1951: 125); ~ Yemen guṣṣ ‘gesso, calce’ (Rossi 1939: 211, 158) ~ Kuwait ǧaṣṣ ‘lime, gypsum’ (Dickson 1949: 636) ~ Iraq ǧuṣṣ ‘Gips’; ‘lime, mortar, plaster’ (Weißbach 1930: 337; Woodhead & Beene 1967: 73); taǧṣīṣ ‘plastering’ (van Ess 1918: 197) ~ Damascus ṭabʿo žaṣṣ ‘sein Charakter ist wie Gips’ (Bergsträßer 1924: 108) ~ Lebanon ǧaṣṣ ‘to become hard and dry (soil)’; ǧuṣṣ ‘lime mixed with water for construction’ (Frayha 1973: 27) ~ S.E. Anatolia ǧaṣṣ ‘Gips’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 87). 100

ǧ-f-t

ḏft (LE) ‘kind of oil [oil of Alasia (i҆rs)]’ (Papyrus Anastasi IV 15, 2–4; Caminos 1954: 608; Hannig 1995: 1006) ~ Heb ‫ ּגֶ ֶפת‬gepet ‘peat made of olive peels; waste of honeycombs’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 263; Klein 1987: 107); This lexeme (omitted in Yahuda 1933: 303 and Koch 1994: 541) appears to be an ancient N. West Semitic (Canaanite) lexeme.

~ Lebanon žeft ‘résidu d’olives’; žaffat ‘presser, écraser (les olives, le raisin)’ (M. Feghali 1928: 239, fn 2) ~ Bišmizzīn žifǝt ‘die Rückstände’ (Jiha 1964: 80) ~ Palest ǧift ‘Öltreber als Brennmaterial’ (Bauer 1957: 224); zift ‘moût d’olives qui reste dans le sac après le pressage’ (Denizeau 1960: 221; Dalman IV 17) ~ Oman ǧift/yift ‘(pearl) oil used to soften leather diving gloves (xubaṭ) at the beginning of the diving season’ (Holes 2001: 88); ǧaft/yift ‘a mixture concocted from alum and pomegranate peel, crushed into fine powder mixed with sugared water’ (Agius 2005: 148). 101

ǧ-l-ǧ

ḏꜣḏꜣ (MK) ‘head’; ‘Kopf’ (Faulkner 1962: 319; Wb V 533) ~ Dem ḏꜣḏꜣ ‘Kopf’ (DG 673) || Ar ‫ ج���ل��ج‬ǧalaǧ ‘Schädel’ (Wahrmund I 447).

�

Cf. Palest ǧimǧime ‘Schädel’ (Bauer 1957: 253) ~ Yemen ǧamǧama ‘id.’ (Behnstedt 1987: 241).

99. ǧ-ṣ-ṣ – 104. ǧ-l-l

102

111

ǧ-l-ǧ-l

ḏꜣḏꜣt (MK) ‘lyre’; ‘Harfe’ (Faulkner 1962: 320; Wb V 533; Hannig 1999: 997); ḏnḏn ‘das Klapper des Sistrum’ (Calice 1936: 89) || Ar ‫ ج���ل�� ج��ل‬ǧalǧala ‘erklingen lassen (Tamburin, Castagnetten, Glöckchen)’ (Wahrmund I 447); ~ Oman gilgil ‘Klingel’ (Reinhardt 1894: 54) ~ Iraq ǧanāǧil/ǧnāǧil ‘gold or silver anklets with bells attached’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 77) ~ S.E. Anatolia čančan ‘klingeln’; ǧǝnēǧīl ‘Glöckchen (pl)’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 105, 92) ~ Azex ǧǝnǧǝl, pl ǧanēǧǝl ‘Glocke’ (Wittrich 2001: 103, 104) ~ Egypt gilgil/gingil, pl galāgil ‘small bell, jingle bell’; galgil ‘resound, reverberate’: ʾir-raʿd galgil ‘the thunder rumbled’ (Spiro 1895: 105; Badawi & Hinds 1986: 165) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ǧulǧal⟩ ‘sleigh bell’ (Corriente 1997: 99) ~ Tunis žalžūl ‘grelot’ (D. Cohen 1975: 170) ~ Marazig želžel ‘grelot’ (Boris 1958: 87) ~ Djidjelli čenčūna, pl čnāčen ‘clochette’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 284, 363) ~ Malta ⟨čenčil⟩ ‘il sonare campanelli’; ⟨ġolġol/ġilġel, pl ġnieġol⟩ ‘sonaglio, sonagliuzzo’ (Vassalli 1796: 229, 219). Cf. Yemen ṭanṭan ‘play the lute’ (Piamenta 1991: 309).

103

ǧ-l-d

ḏnd (Pyr) ‘be angry; angry like a baboon (i.e., noisy), or like a bull (i.e., menacing), infuriated, wrath, angry man’; ‘zornig sein, wüten’ (Faulkner 1962: 320; Wb V 471, 577, 579; Calice 1936: 225; DLE II 270; Goldwasser 2002: 17); dnd ‘name of a demon’ (Breasted 1930: 474) ~ Copt ϭⲱⲛⲧ ‘anger, rage, wrath’ (Crum 1939: ‫ت‬ � � � 923b) || Ar ‫ �ج �ا ل�د‬taǧālada ‘gegen einander fechten’ (Wahrmund I 449); cf. ‫ج��د ل‬ ǧadila ‘to be quarrelsome’ (Hava 1982: 81); ~ Kǝndērīb ǧǧālad ‘losstürzen, angreifen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 30) ~ Aleppo ǧalad ‘choc’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 116) ~ Bišmizzīn žādal ‘streiten mit’ (Jiha 1964: 132) ~ Malta ⟨ġlied⟩ ‘lotta, duello’ (Vassalli 1796: 222). Note also the suggestively similar meaning patterns of the Egyptian lexemes ḏnḏn (108) and qnd (536).

104

ǧ-l-l

ḏꜣyt (Pyr) ‘loincloth, robe’; ‘Zeugstoff, Kleid, Binde’ (Faulkner 1962: 319; DLE ّ II 261; Wb V 519); ḏꜣi҆w ‘loincloth’ (Faulkner 1962: 309) || Ar ‫ ج��ل‬ǧall ‘Decke, Schleier’ (Wahrmund I 445); ~ Sinai ǧilāl ‘a rough cloth tied around a camel to protect it from flies; a cloak work by destitute bedouin’ (C. Bailey 1991: 433) ~ Negev ǧilāl ‘a rough cloak’

112

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

(C. Bailey 1982: 152, fn 70) ~ Rwala ǧallalat ‘she wrapped herself in the ǧelāl (blanket on which the horse or ass’s saddle is laid)’ (Musil 1928: 178) ~ Kǝndērīb ǧlēl ‘Kleider’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 30) ~ Aleppo ǧlēl ‘housse, couvre-lit’; ǧallal ‘garnir (un lit) d’un couvre-pied’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 118) ~ Khawētna ǧlēl ‘Sattelzeug’ (Talay 1999: 81) ~ Palest ǧlāl ‘voile de visage (de femme)’ (Denizeau 1960: 86; Dalman V 325) ~ Egypt žlāl ‘mit Stroh gefüllter Sack als Ersatz für einen Sattel; Decke unter dem Tragsattel, aber über dem Polster (Esel)’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 68) ~ Ḥassāniyya žlāl ‘sash worn over one’s shoulder with a ḥawli’ (Mali; Heath 2004: 307) ~ Ḥaḍramawt ⟨ğall⟩ ‘voile’ (Landberg 1901: 543) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨julli⟩ ‘horse-trappings’ (Corriente 1997: 100). 105

ǧ-m-r

qrmt (LE) ‘ashes, cinders, embers; smouldering embers’ (Hoch 1994: 301; DLE II 156) ~ Dem krb ‘Asche’ (DG 565) ~ Copt ⲕⲣⲱⲙ ‘fire’; ⲕⲣⲱⲙ ‘smoke’; ⲕⲉⲣⲙⲉ ‘ash, soot, dust’ (Crum 1939: 115b,116a) ~ Aram mgmr ‘live coals’ (Fitzmyer & ‫ة‬ Harrington 1978: 326) || Ar �‫ ج��مر‬ǧamrah, pl ‫ ج��مر‬ǧamr ‘burning coal’ (Hava 1982: 98); ~ Egypt gamra ‘ember, live coal’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 169) ~ Aleppo ǧamǝr ‘charbon ardent, braise allumée’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 120) ~ Iraq ǧamur (coll.) ‘embers, live coals’; n.un. ǧamra, pl -āt (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 76) ~ Rwala ǧamra ‘red-hot coal’; ǧamrijje ‘bread baked on hot ashes’ (Musil 1928: 6, 92) ~ Djidjelli žmāṛ ‘braise’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 385) ~ Ḥassāniyya meǧmāṛ, pl mǧāmǝṛ ‘réchaud’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 125) ~ Malta ⟨ġamra⟩ ‘bracia’ (Vassalli 1796: 208). 106

ǧ-m-l

ḏbꜣ (OK) ‘restore, recompense, repay, replace, decorate’; ḏbꜣ.w ‘Ersatz, Bezahlung’ (Ember 1930: 47; 1914, 84; Faulkner 1962: 321; Wb V 558) ~ Akkad gamālu ‘to be obliging, to perform a kind act’ (CAD V 21) ~ Sab gml ‘totalité’

ّ

(Avanzini 1962: 257) || Ar ‫ ج��م�ل‬ǧammala ‘to embellish’ (Hava 1982: 98); cf. 85. ǧ-b-r; ~ Marazig žmal ‘réunir, rassembler’ (Boris 1958: 91) ~ Najd ǧimīl/ǧimālih ‘good deed’ (Sowayan 1992: 255) ~ Takrūna žmul ‘réunir, rassembler’; žmīl ‘beau, bon’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 642, 649) ~ Egypt gamīl ‘handsome, pretty’; gamāl ‘beauty’; gimīl ‘favour’; gamal ‘to combine, add together’ (Spiro 1895: 107; Badawi & Hinds 1986: 177); ǧimla ‘Menge’; ǧimlit iflūs ‘eine Geldsumme’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 70) ~ Iraq ǧammal ‘beautify’ (Woodhead & Beene

113

105. ǧ-m-r – 108. ǧ-n-ḥ

1967: 76); ǧamāl ‘beauty’ (Blanc 1964: 39) ~ Damascus ʿal-ǝž-žmāl ‘all in all’; žamāl ‘beauty’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 6, 20) ~ Tripoli (Libya) žmel ‘addizionare’ (Cesàro 1939: 204) ~ Tunis žǝmla ‘ensemble’ (D. Cohen 1975: 22) ~ Morocco jǝmmǝl mǝn ‘compléter, parfaire, porter à son comble’; tjemmel ʿlā ‘rendre un service, accorder un faveur’; jmīl ‘service signalé, service rendu; joli, charmant’ (Prémare II 233–4). 107

ǧ-n-b

ḏnb (MK) ‘deflect’; ‘abbiegen (vom Wege)’ (Faulkner 1962: 322; Breasted 1930: 574; Wb V 576; Calice 1936: 226; Hannig 1995: 1007) ~ Sab gnb ‘be on the side of’ (Biella 1982: 73) ~ Ḥar b-ayámb ḏ- ‘beside’ (Johnstone 1977: 155) || Ar �‫ج���ن� ب‬ ǧanaba ‘se mettre à l’écart, s’éloigner en se plaçant à côté; éviter quelqu’un, le fuir; se tenir à l’écart de quelque chose’ (DAF I 333); ~ Takrūna žannǝb ‘faire s’écarter qq., se déplacer lateralement’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 655) ~ ʿAnazeh ǧannab ʿan ‘eviter’ (Landberg 1940: 10) ~ Sinai ǧanīb ‘left (side, direction)’ (C. Bailey 1991: 433) ~ Najd ǧannab ‘to keep away from’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 346) ~ Ḥama maʿ canab ‘abseits’ (Lewin 1966: 203) ~ Damascus ʿala žanab ‘aside’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 13) ~ Aleppo ǧamb ‘à côté de (qqe ou qqn)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 122) ~ Iraq ǧannab ‘to avert from, ward away from’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 91) ~ Oman gānib ‘Seite’; gembo ‘auf seiner Seite’ (Reinhardt 1894: 43, 404) ~ Yemen ǧanb ‘accanto’ (Rossi 1939: 190, 209) ~ Djidjelli tažnīb ‘s’écarter’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 233) ~ Tangier žumb, pl žnāb ‘côté’ (W. Marçais 1911: 253). 108

ǧ-n-ḥ

ḏnḥ (Pyr) ‘wing, blade of oar’; ‘der Flügel, Blatt des Steuers’ (Ember 1930: 67; Jones 1988: 195; Faulkner 1962: 322; Wb V 577, 578) ~ Dem ḏnḥ ‘Arm, Unterarm’; tnḥ ‘Flügel’ (DG 682, 640) ~ Copt ϫⲛⲁϩ ‘forearm’; ⲧⲛϩ ‘wing of birds, angels’ (Crum 1939: 777a, 421a) ~ Jibb gέnaḥ ‘wing’ ~ Soq ganḥ ‘side’ (Johnstone 1981:

‫ة‬

‫أ‬

‫أ‬

�����‫ � ج� ن‬ʾaǧniḥah/ ����‫ � ج� ن‬ʾaǧnuḥ ‘Flügel, Schwinge, Schulter, 77) || Ar ‫ ج� ن���ا‬ǧanāḥ, pl ��‫ح‬ ‫ح‬ ‫ح‬ Arm, Hand’ (Wahrmund I 459); ~ Ḥassāniyya ǧnāḥ, pl ǧǝnḥa ‘aile, bras’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 22, 33) ~ Rwala al-ǧanāḥ ‘the wing’ (Musil 1928: 533) ~ Yemen ǧanāḥ, pl ǧanāḥāt ‘ala’ (Rossi 1939: 353) ~ Oman gnāḥ/ǧināḥ, pl ǧinḥān ‘Flügel’ (Reinhardt 1894: 46, 353) ~ Aleppo ǧǝnḥ, pl ǧnāḥ ‘aile’ (d’oiseau, d’insecte)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 123) ~ Damascus žnāḥ, pl -āt/ažniḥa ‘wing’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 264) ~ Lebanon

114

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

ǧāneḥ ‘aile’ (Denizeau 1960: 90) ~ Palest ǧanāḥ, pl ǧinḥān ‘Flügel’ (Schmidt & Kahle 1918 I 273) ~ Egypt gināḥ, pl agniḥa ‘wing’/ǧināḥ ‘Flügel (des Hahns)’ (Spiro 1895: 115; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 71) ~ Tunis žǝnḥ, pl žnāḥ/žwānaḥ ‘aile’ (D. Cohen 1975: 200) ~ Marazig žnāḥ, pl žinḥin ‘Flügel’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2005: 245) ~ Djidjelli žǝnḥ, pl žnāḥ ‘id.’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 347, 359) ~ Morocco ženḥ/žneḥ ‘wing’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 223) ~ Malta ⟨ġewnaħ, pl ġwienaħ⟩ ‘ala’ (Vassalli 1796: 215). 109

ǧ-n-n

ḏnḏn ‘be angry’ (Faulkner 1962: 323); ḏnn ‘be tormented, strive, to exert oneself, conspire; wrath’; ‘der Zorn, das Wüten’ (Wb V 470; DLE II 252) ~ Ge gānen ‘demon’ (Leslau 1987: 198) ~ Ḥar genni ‘demon’; yann ‘madness’ (Johnstone 1977: 157, 167) || Saf ngn ‘to go insane’ (Al-Jallad 2015: 315) ~ Ar �ّ‫ ج�� ن‬ǧanna ‘être possédé du démon, être fou’; ‘sich vor Zorn, Freude nicht fassen können’ (DAF I 332; Wahrmund I 459); ~ Takrūna žann ‘devenir fou, perdre l’ésprit, être éperdu, devenir hors de soi’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 651) ~ E. Arabia ǧann/yinn ‘to go mad’ (Holes 2001: 92) ~ Rwala ǧinn ‘earth spirits’ (Musil 1928: 18) ~ Yemen ǧanan ‘impazzire’; ǧinān ‘pazzia’ (Rossi 1939: 214, 226) ~ Oman gnūn ‘Wahnsinn’; ginn ‘Dämonen’ (Reinhardt 1894: 45, 413) ~ Iraq ǧann ‘to be or become insane’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 78) ~ Kǝndērīb ǧann ‘verrückt werden’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 21) ~ Aleppo ǧann ‘devenir fou, … s’affoler (de joie, de colère, de peur, de chagrin)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 125) ~ Palest nǧann ‘wird rasend (wie unsinnig)’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 12); maǧnūn ‘irrsinnig’ (Bauer 1957: 337) ~ Egypt gann ‘to be mad, insane’; lamma ṭilʿet gannūntoh ‘when he became exasperated’ (Spiro 1895: 109) ~ Tunis žǝnn ‘djinn’ (D. Cohen 1975: 141) ~ Tripoli (Libya) žnūn ‘follia’; mažnūn ‘matto (spiritato; invasato dal žinn)’ (Griffini 1913: 122, 169) ~ Marazig ǧann ‘être fou, perdre la raison’ (Boris 1958: 92). 110

ǧ-w-b

ḏb ‘antworten, erwidern’; ‘reply’ (Hannig 1995: 1001; DLE II 265); cf. wšb ‘answer, avenge’: ʿn wšb ‘antworten’ (DLE I 114; Erman 1892: 108); ḫn n wšb ‘a song of responses’ (Kitchen 1999: 422) [~ Ar *wǧb] || Ar �‫ ج��ا و ب‬ǧāwaba ‘to answer (a question)’ (Hava 1982: 103); ~ Aleppo ǧāwab, iǧēweb ‘répondre’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 127) ~ Bišmizzīn žwāb ‘Antwort’ (Jiha 1964: 158) ~ Palest ǧāwab ‘antworten’ (Bauer 1957: 22) ~ Egypt gāwib ‘to answer’; agāb ‘to answer, respond’ (Spiro 1895: 91) ~ Tunis

109. ǧ-n-n – 113. ǧ-w-f

115

žāwǝb ‘il a répondu’ (D. Cohen 1975: 101, 119) ~ Djidjelli wāžǝb ‘répondre’; žwāb ‘réponse, lettre’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 354) ~ Mzāb žāwǝb ‘il répondit’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 97, 22) ~ Algiers žwāb ‘réponse’ (Tapièro 1971: 167) ~ Malta ⟨wieġeb, iwieġeb⟩ ‘to answer, reply’ (Aquilina 1990: 1531). 111

ǧ-w-r

qrj (LE) ‘bei jemandem sein’; ‘to dwell, take up temporary residence’ (Wb V 59; Hoch 1994: 295) ~ Heb ‫ גּור‬gūr ‘to sojourn’ (BDB 157) || Ar ‫ ج��ا ر‬ǧāra ‘in der Nähe sein, Einem in Schutz und Klientel nehmen’ (Wahrmund I 470); ~ Aleppo ǧawār ‘devenir ou être voisin de qqn, avoisiner’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 128) ~ Damascus žāwar ‘to adjoin’; žiwār ‘neighbourhood’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 3, 157) ~ Najd ⟨ǧār⟩ ‘Schutzsuchender’ (Socin 1901 III 255) ~ Yemen ǧawwar ‘proteggere’ (Rossi 1939: 230) ~ Egypt ǧīra ‘Nachbarschaft’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 74) ~ Ḥassāniyya tjāwǝṛ ‘se mettre au voisinage de’ (TaineCheikh 1990: 154) ~ Malta ⟨ġar, pl ġirien⟩ ‘neighbour’ (Aquilina 1987: 378). 112

ǧ-w-l

ḏꜣj (Pyr) ‘ferry someone across water’; ‘kreuzen, besonders, den Fluß beim Überfahren’ (Faulkner 1962: 318; Wb V 511) ~ Sab gyl ‘course, period’ (Biella 1982: 71) || Ar ‫ ج��ا ل‬ǧāla ‘to ramble’ (Hava 1982: 105); ~ Najd ǧāl ‘to migrate’ (Sowayan 1992: 256) ~ Iraq tǧawwal ‘to wander around, roam, rove about’; ǧawla ‘tour, excursion’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 81) ~ Palest yetǧāwal ‘aller à la rencontre l’un de l’autre’; ǧawwāl ‘Wanderer’; ǧāl ‘umhergehen’ (Denizeau 1960: 95; Bauer 1957: 353, 314) ~ Tripoli (Libya) tǧawwol ‘girovagare’ (Cesàro 1939: 230) ~ Tunis žayla ‘bête de somme’ (D. Cohen 1975: 67) ~ Ḥassāniyya jowle, ijowli ‘contourner’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 43). 113

ǧ-w-f

i҆wf (Pyr) [< *ǧwf ] ‘flesh of man, meat’; ‘Fleisch des Menschen, Körper, Leib, Leiche (eines Gottes)’ (Faulkner 1962: 13; Wb I 51) ~ Heb ‫ ּגּוף‬gūp ‘body, corpse’ ‫ف‬ (BDB 157) ~ Ḥar gawf ‘chest’ (Johnstone 1977: 157) || Ar ��‫ ج�و‬ǧawf ‘Bauch, ‫فة‬ Eingeweide’; cf. ������‫ ج�ي‬ǧīfah ‘Leiche, Aas’ (Wahrmund I 472, 475); ~ Kǝndērīb ǧwāf ‘Darm, Pansen, Mägen (der Schlachttiere)’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 31) ~ Egypt gōf, pl gwāf ‘bowels’; gīfa ‘carrion, carcass’ (Spiro 114, 115) ~ Malta ⟨ġuf⟩ ‘ventre, utero’ (Vassalli 1796: 224).

116 114

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

ǧ-w-n

gwn/gꜣwꜣn (LE) ‘Sack’ (Wb V 160; Helck 1971: 524; DLE II 186; Hannig & Vomberg 1999: 544) ~ Copt ϭⲟⲟⲩⲛⲉ ‘hair-cloth, sacking, sack’ (Crum 1939: 836a); ~ Palest ǧūne ‘Korb (gross, flach aus Stroh, meist mit Leder bezogen)’ (Bauer 1957: 180) ~ Oman gūniyye, pl gewāni ‘burlap bag’; ‘Sack’ (Reinhardt 1894: 74) ~ Yemen gūniye, pl gawāni ‘sacco’ (Rossi 1939: 234) ~ Iraq gūniya, pl gwāni ‘burlap bag’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 396) ~ Arbil gūniye ‘Sack (aus Wolle oder Jute)’ (O. Jastrow 1990: 405). 115

*ǧ-r-g

ḏꜣd ‘(Pyr) ‘throat’; ‘abkehlen’ (Wb V 527; Hannig 1995: 996) ~ Ugar grgr ‘throat’ (?) (DUL 307) ~ Heb ‫ ּגַ ְרּגֶ ֶרת‬gargeret ‘throat’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 264) Cf. Gk γαργαρέον ‘uvula’ (GEL 339) ~ Lat gurgulio ‘gullet, throat’ (OLD 778).

~ Syria zardūm ‘Kehle’ (Behnstedt 1997a: 127) ~ Egypt zirdimme ‘Adamsapfel’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 184) ~ Daθīna ⟨qarǧūma⟩ ‘gorge’ (GD 2472) ~ Rwala ǧarǧūr ‘throat’ (Musil 1928: 155, fn 7) ~ Tripoli (Libya) garžūma ‘golo’ (Griffini 1913: 137) ~ Sidi Bel Abbès gerzi, pl grāzi/gerjūma, pl grājem ‘gorge, gosier’ (Madouni-La Peyre 2003: 405) ~ (Berber, Beni Snous) á-geržum ‘gorge’ (Destaing 1920: 143) ~ Sfax garžuma, pl grāžim ‘throat’ (Zwari & Sharfi 1998: 570) ~ Tunis geržūma ‘gorge’ (D. Cohen 1975: 199) ~ Marazig garžūṭa ‘gosier (des mammifères)’ (Boris 1958: 488) ~ Djidjelli geržūma ‘gosier’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 284) ~ Malta ⟨gerżuma, pl grieżem⟩ ‘gola’ (Vassalli 1796: 310) ~ Ḥassāniyya gerjūme, pl grājīm ‘gorge’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 75). Mand gurgma ‘gueule, gosier’ (Macuch & Drower 1963: 523).

116

ǧ-m-ǧ-m

gmgm (LE) ‘Art töricht zu reden’ (Wb V 527; Hannig 1995: 901); ngmgm ‘to conspire’ (Faulkner 1962: 142) ~ Aram gamgēm ‘hesitate, stammer’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 251) || Ar ��‫ ج��م�� ج‬ǧamǧama ‘parler inintelligiblement, baragouiner’; ġamġama ‫م‬ ‘être inintelligible, parler d’une manière obscure’ (DAF I 323; II 507); ~ Damascus klām mġamġam ‘langage incompréhensible’ (Denizeau 1960: 378) ~ Yemen biyġamġimu ‘man will vertuschen’ (Goitein 1934: 2) ~ Egypt gamgam ‘to mutter’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 169) ~ Sudan taqamqam ‘to grumble’ (LDA 75) ~ Tunis gǝmgǝm ‘il a grommelé’ (D. Cohen 1975: 112, 31) ~ Morocco gemgem ‘to grumble’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 92) ~ Ḥassāniyya gemgem

114. ǧ-w-n – 118. ḥ-b-l

117

‘grommeler’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 76) ~ Malta ⟨gemgem, igemgem⟩ ‘parlar tra denti o sotto voce’ (Vassalli 1796: 308).

Ḥ

117

ḥ-b-s

ḥbś (Pyr) ‘clothe, be clothed, don garment; hide, cover up; apparel, clothing, linen, strips of linen, swabs, plugs, tampons of linen’; ‘bekleiden, verhüllen; bedecken’ (Ember 1930: 87; Faulkner 1962: 167; Allen 1994: Breasted 1930: 549; Tait 1977: 115; Wb III 64; DLE I 308); ḥbs ‘Gewand, Kleid, Deckel (für Gefäß)’; ‘linen’; ḥbst ‘Schmuckstück’; ḥbsw ‘clothes’; ḥḏ ḥbs.w ‘white of clothes’ (Hannig 1995: 524; Caminos 1954: 549; Landgráfová 2011: 316) ~ Copt ϩⲱⲃⲥ ‘cover, be covered’ (Crum 1939: 658b) ~ Heb ‫ ָח ַבשׁ‬ḥābaš ‘to bind’ (BDB 289) || Ar ‫ ح� ب���س‬ḥabasa ‘to veil a thing; zurückhalten, abhalten’ (Hava 1982: 109; Wahrmund I 486); ḥabbasa ‘envelopper et serrer une chose dans une autre’ (DAF I 367); ~ Egypt maḥbas ‘clasp’ (Spiro 1898: 121) ~ Palest maḥbas ‘Ehering’ (Bauer 1957: 83) ~ Lebanon maḥbis ‘engagement ring’ (Frayha 1973: 31) ~ E. Arabia ḥabas ‘to tie up, restrain’ (Holes 2001: 100) ~ Iraq maḥbas ‘ring’ (Avishur 2009: 372) ~ Tripoli (Libya) maḥbes ‘vaso’ (Griffini 1913: 297) ~ Tunis maḥbǝš ‘pot (de fleurs)’ (D. Cohen 1975: 201) ~ Marazig maḥbas ‘cuvette’ (Boris 1958: 100) ~ Algiers ḥbes ‘s’arrêter’ (Tapiéro 1971: 151) ~ Cherchell maḥbǝs ‘pot’ (Grand’Henry 1972: 83) ~ Morocco ḥbes ‘coop up’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 40) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨maħbas, pl maħābis⟩ ‘vessel’ (Corriente 1997: 114). 118

ḥ-b-l

ḥnb (NK) ‘Ackerland; vom Vermessen des Landes’; ḥnbt ‘abgemessenes Feld’; ḥnb.t.t ‘Ackeranteil’; ḥnb.ꜣḥt ‘ein Ackerland’ (Wb III 112; Hannig 1995: 539); ḥnbwt ‘confines of district’ (Faulkner 1962: 172); ḥnb.t.t (MK) ‘Acker, Gartenland’ � ~ Ugar ḥbl ‘cord, rope’ (DUL 707) ~ Heb ‫ ֶח ֶבל‬ḥebel ‘territory’ (BDB 286) || Ar ‫ح ب���ل‬ ḥabl ‘langgestreckter Sandhügel’ (Wahrmund I 483); ~ Aleppo ḥabl ‘part qu’un cultivateur a dans la propriété d’un terrain’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 144) ~ Palest ḥabale, pl ḥabalāt/ḥabāyel/aḥbāle ‘terrain en terrasse’ (Denizeau 1960: 98; Dalman II 23) ~ Sinai ḥabl ‘share of a piece of land’ (Stewart 1990: 230; cf. Musil 1928: 293) ~ Kuwait ḥabl ‘sand hills, sand dune country’ (Dickson 1949: 631) ~ Najd ḥabl ‘Sandhügel’ (Socin 1901 III 255) ~ Rwala ḥabl, pl ḥbāl ‘a narrow long sand drift’ (Musil 1928: 679) ~ Al-Andalus

118

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

⟨ḥabl arḍ⟩ ‘a land measure’ (Corriente 1997: 114–15) ~ Morocco ḥbǝl ‘parcelle de terre arable beaucoup plus longue que large’ (Prémare III 15) ~ Malta ⟨ħabel, pl ħbula⟩ ‘a strip; stretch or enclosure of land length of a measuring rope’ (Aquilina 1987: 468). 119

ḥ-t-r

ḥtr (OK) ‘Gespann der Rinder (zum Pflügen)’; ‘yoke of oxen, span of horses’ (Wb III 199; Faulkner 1962: 180; Calice 1936: 74); ḥtri҆ ‘team of horses; ‘yoke’ of oxen or perhaps cows’ (Caminos 1954: 573) ~ Dem ḥtr ‘Pferdegespann’ (DG 342, 343) || Ar ‫ حت��ر‬ḥatara ‘festbinden, befestigen’ (Wahrmund I 485); ~ Yemen ḥutra ‘Nacken’ (Behnstedt 1992: 233); ḥattar ‘to impede’ (Piamenta 1990: 82) ~ S.E. Anatolia yǝḥtǝr ‘schlagen’ (Vocke & Waldner 1983: 109). 120

ḥ-t-f

ḥtp(w) (MK) ‘to set (of sun), rest, alight, be completed, be satisfied, peace, rest, reside’; ‘ruhen, sich niederlassen besonders vom Toten der im Grabe (im Totenreich ruht); Untergehen, Untergang (der Sonne)’; ḥtp m ʿnḫ ‘untergehen, sterben, aus dem Leben scheiden’ (Ember 1930: 112; DLE I 336; Faulkner ‫�ف‬ 1962: 180; Wb III 190; Hannig 1995: 568) || Ar ���‫حت‬ ḥaṭf, pl ḥuṭūf ‘death’ (Hava 1982: 125); ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ḥatfī⟩ ‘my death’ (Corriente 1997: 115) ~ Daθīna ⟨ḥataf⟩ ‘couper, trancher’ (GD 347) ~ Oman ḥataf ‘ausstoßen’ (Reinhardt 1894: 129) ~ Palest ḥātaf ‘accaparer, s’emparer de’ (Denizeau 1960: 99). 121

ḥ-ǧ-ǧ

ّ

ḥꜣg (MK) ‘be glad’; ‘froh sein’ (Faulkner 1962: 163; Wb III 34) ~ Heb ‫ ַָחג‬ḥāg ‘anni-

� ḥaǧǧa ‘to make a pilgrimage’ versary, festival’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 423) || Ar ‫ح‬ �‫ج‬ (Hava 1982: 111); ~ Iraq ḥaǧǧ ‘make the pilgrimage to Mecca’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 91) ~ Palest ḥaǧǧ ‘Pilgern’ (Bauer 1957: 231).

119. ḥ-t-r – 124. ḥ-r-r ¹

122

119

ḥ-d-r

ḥdj (NK) ‘stromab fahren’ (Brockelmann 1932: 112) || Ar ‫ ح�د ر‬ḥadara ‘ganz hinabsteigen’ (Wahrmund I 493); ~ Najd ḥadar ‘to descend, to go, travel in a downward direction’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 351) ~ Palmyra ḥdar, yeḥder ‘faire descendre, faire tomber à terre’ (Cantineau 1934 II 56, 81) ~ Sinai ḥaddar ‘to topple, to cause to fall’ (C. Bailey 1991: 433) ~ Egypt ʾinḥadar ‘to fall down, slide down’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 194) ~ Marazig ḥaddar ‘descendre’ (Boris 1958: 105) ~ Mzāb ḥaddaṛ ‘il descendit’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 106). 123

ḥ-ð-y

ḥsi҆/ḥzi҆ (OK) ‘to turn back’ (r ‘to’ a place), (m) ‘to face aggressively, face an enemy’; ‘sich begeben nach, … gelangen nach …, jemandem entgegen gehen; entgegen, gegenüber (kommen); grimmig, wild (von Auge); wild, ungezähmt sein; jmden wild / wütend anblicken’ (Faulkner 1962: 177; Wb III 159; Brockelmann 1932: 110; Köhler 2016: 353) ~ Ugar ḥðy ‘to see, look, observe’ (DUL 356) ~ Jibb ḥazē ‘to put aside’ (Johnstone 1981: 123) || Ar ‫ ح��ذا‬ḥaðā ‘être en face, vis-à-vis; rivaliser avec quelqu’un, être son émule, son rival dans quelque chose’ (DAF I 399); ~ Najd taḥaðða ‘to follow closely, to go after’; iḥtiða ‘to harass s.o. in defence of’; ḥeðāt ‘neben’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 354; Socin 1901 III 256) ~ E. Arabia ḥiða ‘next to’ (Holes 2001: 105) ~ Palest bi-ḥðāy ‘près de moi’; ḥaðiyye ‘part de butin’ (Denizeau 1960: 102, 103) ~ Kaʿbiye ḥadīt ‘gegenüber von, vor, bei’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 110) ~ Kǝndērīb māli ḥðē ʿayni ‘mein Besitz liegt vor meinen Augen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 35) ~ Marazig ḥaðē ‘être à côté, contigu’ (Boris 1958: 106) ~ Morocco ḥda ‘near’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 128). Cf. Ghomara (Berber) ḥði ‘to keep an eye on’ (Mourigh 2016: 396).

124

ḥ-r-r¹

ḥr (Pyr) ‘das Gesicht; Gesicht des Menschen; Kopf eines Dinges, Gesicht, ‫ ح‬ḥurr al-waǧh ‘cheek, Vordersatz einer Statue’ (Wb III 125, 127) || Ar ‫� ّر ا �لو ج��ه‬ cheek-bone’ (Hava 117).

120 125

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

ḥ-r-r²

ḥr (1st Dyn.) ‘(name of divinity) Horus’: ḥr-nbw ‘Falcon of Gold’ (Faulkner 1962: 173, 174; Wb III 122, 146); ḥr-dšr ‘der rote Horus’ (= Mars)’ (Leitz 2002: 296) ||

‫أ‬ ‫ ح‬ḥurr, pl ‫ � �ج�را ر‬ʾaḥrār ‘frei und edel geboren’ (Wahrmund I 497); (en Ar ‫� ّر‬ �‫ طي��ر �ل‬ṭayr al-ḥurr ‘le faucon’ (Dozy I 262); Barbarie) ‫ح ّر‬ ~ Al-Balqāʾ ḥurr ‘noble falcon, wild hawk’ (Palva 1992: 168) ~ Damascus ḥorr ‘Falke’ (Wetzstein 1906: 28) ~ Palmyra ṭēr ḥorr ‘faucon’ (Cantineau 1934 II 74) ~ Rwala ḥorr ‘a hunting falcon of the best kind’ (Musil 1928: 292, 366) ~ ʿAnazeh ḥurr ‘aigle’ (Landberg 1940: 12). 126

ḥ-r-š

(i) ḫꜣś.t (Pyr) ‘hill-country, foreign, desert, country’; ‘Bergland (im Gegensatz zum Flachland); Fremdland (im Gegensatz zu Ägypten); Wüste (als wasserloses, sandiges u.s.w.) Gebiet’ (Faulkner 1962: 185; DLE I 349–50; Wb III 234, 235; Calice 1936: 75) ~ Dem ḫꜣs.t ‘Wüste’ (DG 347): wbꜣ nꜣ ḫꜣs.w(.t) ‘against many foreign countries’ (Simpson 1996: 226) ~ Heb ‫חֹורׁש‬ ֵ ḥōrēš ‘wood, forest’ (BDB 361) ~ Akkad ḫuršānu ‘mountain (region)’; ḫuršāniš ‘like a mountain’ (CAD 253) ||

‫أ‬

‫ � ح‬ʾaḥrāš/���‫�رو ش‬ ‫ ح‬ḥurš, pl ���‫�را ش‬ ‫ ح‬ḥurūš ‘wood’ (Hava 1982: 119); Ar ���‫�رش‬

~ Aleppo ḥǝrš ‘bois, forêt’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 151) ~ Syria ḥirš ‘Wüste’ (Behnstedt 1997a: 114) ~ Kǝndērīb ḥǝrrayš ‘ein Kraut’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 36) ~ Bišmizzīn ḥuršāyi, pl ḥuršāyāt ‘Wäldchen’ (Jiha 1964: 70, fn 12) ~ Palest ḥirš, pl aḥrāš ‘Wald’ (Bauer 1957: 352) ~ Sfax ḥirš ‘stony terrain’ (Zwari & Sharfi 1998: 182) ~ Morocco ḥǝrš ‘terre depourvue de couche arable’ (Prémare III 67). (ii) Dem ḥrš ‘schwer, schwer sein’; ḥlḫ ‘bedrücken’ (DG 327, 328) ~ Copt

‫أ‬

‫ � ح‬ʾaḥraš ϩⲣⲟϣ ‘be heavy, slow, difficult, make heavy’ (Crum 1939: 706a) || Ar ���‫�رش‬ ‘rough to the skin’ (Hava 1982: 110); ~ Al-Andalus ⟨aḥraš⟩ ‘rough’ (Corriente 1997: 121) ~ Malta ⟨ħarex⟩ ‘fierce, harsh’; ⟨ħarrax⟩ ‘to aggravate’ (Aquilina 1987: 510). 127

ḥ-r-ḍ

‫أ ض‬

ḥḏj (MK) ‘injure, destroy, disobey, annul, upset’; ‘schädigen, zerstören, fehlen’

‫ � ح‬ʾaḥraḍa ‘vernichten, erschöpfen’ (Faulkner 1962: 181; Wb III 212) || Ar ��‫�ر‬ (Brockelmann 1932: 110);

125. ḥ-r-r ² – 129. ḥ-r-m

121

~ N. Yemen muḥāraĉah ‘Aufhetzung’ (Behnstedt 1987: 242) ~ Egypt ḥarraḍ ‘to provoke, incite’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 199) ~ Marazig ḥarrad ‘semer la brouille, pousser à la discorde’ (Boris 1958: 108) ~ Iraq ḥarrað̣ ‘to incite, provoke, rouse, stir up’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 97). 128

ḥ-r-q

rkḥ (Pyr) ‘burn, kindle (verb); light, fire’; ‘Feuer anfachen, anlagen; etwas verbrennen, brennen’; rqḥw ‘flames’; rqḥt ‘heat’; rqḥ ‘light, fire’ (Ember 1913: 89; 1930: 73; Faulkner 1962: 154; Wb II 458) ~ Dem rkḥ ‘brennen’ (DG 256) ~ Copt ‫ق‬ ‫ ح‬ḥaraqa ‘burn (trans.)’ (Hava 1982: 119); ⲣⲱⲕϩ ‘burn’ (Crum 1939: 293a) || Ar �‫�ر‬ ~ Oman ḥroq ‘abgebrannt sein’ (Reinhardt 1894: 135) ~ Yemen ḥirig ‘bruciare’ (Rossi 1939: 196) ~ Aleppo ḥaraq ‘brûler (qqe ou qqn)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 152) ~ Damascus ḥarīq, pl ḥarāyeq ‘blaze’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 23) ~ Iraq ḥirag ‘burn’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 97) ~ Palest ḥaraq ‘verbrennen’ (Bauer 1957: 329) ~ Morocco ḥreq ‘to burn’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 26). 129

ḥ-r-m

(i) ḥꜣm (Pyr) ‘etwas religiös verbotenes’ (Wb III 31) ~ Akkad ḫarāmu ‘to separate, keep apart’ (Parpola 2007: 35) ~ Heb ‫ ֵח ֶרם‬ḥērem ‘ban’ (BDB 356) ~ Sab ḥrm ‘to interdict’ (Jamme 1962: 436) ~ Ḥar ḥerōm ‘what is forbidden’ (Johnstone ‫ ح‬ḥarama ‘éloigner, 1977: 162) ~ Soq ḥrm ‘maudire’ (Leslau 1938: 190) || Ar ‫�ر‬ ‫م‬ repousser quelqu’un et le tenir à distance d’une chose; einen zurückweisen’ (DAF I 413; Wahrmund I 503); Cf. Egyptian ḥꜣm ‘fischen’ (Wb III 31) ~ Heb ‫ ֵח ֶרם‬ḥērem ‘fisherman’s net’ (BDB 357).

~ Oman ḥarām ‘verboten’ (Reinhardt 1894: 45) ~ Najd ḥaram ‘to deprive’ (Sowayan 1992: 258) ~ Iraq aḥram ‘to deprive’ (van Ess 1918: 136) ~ Khābūra ḥaram ‘a house / garden-boundary’ (Brockett 1985: 80) ~ Iraq ḥarram ‘to declare unlawful, forbid’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 98) ~ Palest ḥarram ʿala ‘verbieten’; ḥirim ‘wird (ist) Sünde’ (Bauer 1957: 328; Kampffmeyer 1936: 14) ~ Kǝndērīb ḥǝṛām ‘religiös verboten’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 36) ~ Egypt ḥarram ‘to forbid, prohibit’ (Spiro 1895: 131) ~ Tunis ḥoṛm ‘l’action d’interdire (du point de vue religieux)’ (D. Cohen 1975: 82) ~ Douz ḥiṛam ‘jemandem etwas vor­ enthalten’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2014: 296) ~ Algiers ḥrām ‘illicite’ (Tapiéro 1971: 159) ~ Djidjelli ḥṛām ‘chose defendue, illicite’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 266). (ii) ḫnr (OK) [< *ḫrn < ḫrm] ‘der Harem und seine Insassinnen’; ḫnr (MK) ‘der Gefangene, einsperren’; ḫnrwt ‘women of the harem’ (Wb III 297; Faulkner

122

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

‫أ‬

1962: 193; Brockelmann 1932: 111) ~ Akkad ḫarīmtu ‘prostitute’ (CAD VI 101) ||

‫ ح‬ḥaram, pl ‫�را‬ ‫ � ح‬ʾaḥrām ‘Frauen, Frau, Harem’ (Wahrmund I 503); Ar ‫�ر‬ ‫م‬

‫م‬

~ N. Yemen ḥurma ‘Frau’ (Behnstedt 1987: 244) ~ Damascus ḥarīm ‘harem’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 112) ~ Palest bēt/dār il-ḥarīm ‘Harem’ (Bauer 1957: 149); maḥrame ‘Frauenraum (im Zelt)’ (Dalman VI 13) ~ Egypt ḥarīm ‘ladies’ apartments’ (Spiro 1985: 132) ~ Negev maḥram, pl maḥārim ‘women’s living quarters located in the southern section of the tent separated from the men’s section (šigg) by means of a partition (maʿnad)’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi). 130

ḥ-z-r

ḥzꜣ (Pyr) ‘grimmig, wild (vom Auge)’ (Wb III 161; Brockelmann 1932: 110) || ‫ ح‬ḥazara ‘avoir un air sévère, austère’; ‘ein saures Gesicht machen, die Ar ‫��ز ر‬ Stirne runzeln’ (DAF I 419; Wahrmund I 506); ~ Lebanon ḥōzar ‘se fâcher contre (ʿala)’ (Denizeau 1960: 129) ~ Marazig ḥazzar ‘garder jalousement (ʿala)’; ḥāzer ‘jaloux’; ḥazra ‘jalousie’ (Boris 1958: 111) ~ Tripoli ḥzar ‘esser geloso’ (Cesàro 1939: 197) ~ Daθīna ⟨ḥazar⟩ ‘estimer’ (GD 412) ~ N. Yemen ḥazar ‘schauen’ (Behnstedt 1987: 244) ~ Egypt ḥezāṛa ‘Auge’; maḥzūṛa ‘verbotene Zone’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 84, 113). 131

ḥ-z-q

ḥnsk.t/ḥnzk.t/ḥnkt (MK) ‘braided lock of hair’; ‘Haarflechte’; ḥnskyt ‘she who has braided hair’ (Faulkner 1962: 173; Wb III 116, 120; Takács 2016: 61) ~ Aram ‫ق‬ ‫ ح‬ḥazaqa ‘festbinden (mit ḥăzaq ‘bandaged’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 445) || Ar � ‫��ز‬ Stricken)’ (Wahrmund I 507); ~ Palest ḥazaq ‘Strick zuziehen’ (Bauer 1957: 384) ~ E. Arabia ḥazak ‘tighten (string, rope)’ (Holes 2001: 110) ~ Mosul ḥazaq ‘to tighten; press hard’ (Al-Bakrī 1972: 168) ~ Khābūra ḥizāq ‘a belt’ (Brockett 1985: 81) ~ Kǝndērīb ḥazaq ‘fest­ ziehen, fest anziehen, fest drücken’; ḥazīq ‘fest’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 36) ~ Egypt ḥazzaq ‘to tighten’; ḥaza‌ʾ ‘pressen (bei den Wehen)’ (Spiro 1895: 133; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 84) ~ Marazig ḥazág, yóḥzug ‘serrer, tenir bien’ (Boris 1958: 111) ~ Takrūna ḥzaq ‘serrer un lien’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 788).

123

130. ḥ-z-r – 134. ḥ-s-b

132

ḥ-z-m

mḏḥ (OK) ‘girdle, fillet’; ‘Gürtel’ (Ember 1930: 78; Faulkner 1962: 123; Wb II 189) ~ Dem md̲ h̲ ‘der Gürtel’ (DG 195) ~ Copt ⲙⲟϫϩ ‘girdle of soldier or monk’ (Crum ‫ ح‬ḥazama ‘festbinden (mit Stricken)’ (Wahrmund I 507); 1939: 213b) || Ar ‫��ز‬

‫م‬

~ Ḥaḍramawt ḥizām ‘women’s silver belt’ (Radionov 1994: 100) ~ Yemen ḥizām, pl ʾaḥzameh ‘cintura di pugnale’ (Rossi 1939: 156) ~ Najd ⟨ḥzām⟩ ‘Vordergurt des Kamels’ (Socin 1901 III 257) ~ Iraq ḥzām, pl ḥizim ‘belt, girdle’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 100) ~ Palest ḥazzam ‘gürten’ (Bauer 1957: 144) ~ Daθīna ⟨ḥizām⟩ ‘ceinture en cuir’ (GD 414) ~ Rwala maḥzam ‘a leather or woollen belt worn by men over the towb and the zebūn’ (Musil 1928: 119) ~ Egypt ḥizām, pl ʾiḥzima/ḥizima ‘belt’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 202) ~ Morocco ḥzam, pl ḥzum ‘belt’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 21) ~ Ḥassāniyya ḥazzem ‘mettre une ceinture’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 37). 133

ḥ-z-n

134

ḥ-s-b

‫ن‬

‫ ح‬ḥazina ‘to be grieved’ (Hava ḥḏn (LE) ‘unwillig sein’ (Wb III 189) || Ar � ‫��ز‬ 1982: 122); ~ Damascus ḥizin ‘trauern’ (Bauer 1957: 304) ~ Egypt ḥizin ‘to grieve’ (Spiro 1895: 133) ~ Ḥassāniyya ḥazīn ‘triste’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 146).

(i) ḥśb (Pyr) ‘berechnen, rechnen, zählen; mit jemandem abrechnen’; ‘reckon with’; ḥsb (v) ‘count’; ḥsbw ‘account’ (Wb III 166–167; DLE I 332; Faulkner 1962: 178); Ḥqꜣw-nw-ḥsb ‘Die Herrscher der Berechnung’ (Leitz 2002: 535) ~ Heb ‫ָח ַׁשב‬ � ḥasaba ‘reckon, number’ (Hava ḥāšab ‘to think, account’ (BDB 362) || Ar �‫ح����س� ب‬ 1982: 122); ~ N. Yemen ḥasab ‘berechnen’ (Behnstedt 1987: 244) ~ Aleppo ḥasab ‘compter, calculer’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 156) ~ Damascus ḥasab ‘calculate’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 33) ~ S.E. Anatolia mǝḥāsǝb ‘comptable’ (Grigore 2007: 294) ~ Kǝndērīb ḥasab ‘zählen, aufzählen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 37) ~ Morocco ḥseb ‘to count’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 41). �‫ ب‬bi-ḥasabi � (ii) Dem ḥsb.t ‘corresponding to’ (Simpson 1996: 224) || Ar. �‫ح����س� ب‬ ‘according to.’

124

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

~ Damascus ḥasab ṭalabak ‘in accordance with your request’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 33) ~ Palest ḥasab rājo ‘nach seiner Ansicht’ (Bauer 1957: 213) ~ Egypt da bi-ḥasab ‘this depends’ (Spiro 1895: 135). 135

ḥ-ḍ-r

ḥḏ (Pyr) ‘chapel’; ‘Wohnung eines Gottes, Kapelle’ (Faulkner 1962: 181; Wb III 209; Brockelmann 1932: 110) ~ Heb ‫ ָח ֵצר‬ḥāṣēr ‘court, yard, private property’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 496) ~ Ḥar ḥeḍīreh ‘place apart’ (Johnstone 1977: 56) || ‫ � ة ف‬ḥaḍrat al-firdaws ‘Wohnung im Paradiese, Residenz’ Ar ‫ح� �ض�� ر� ا �ل����رد و��س‬ (Wahrmund I 521); ~ Egypt ḥaḍīr ‘einzelner Raum oben auf dem Dach; Dachterrasse (umgeben von Räumen des zweiten Stock); zweiter Stock des Hauses’; ‘hall, unroofed room’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 87; Spiro 1895: 140) ~ Najd ḥaḍār ‘kleine Hütte aus Palmzweigen’ (Socin 1901 III 257) ~ Daθīna ⟨ḥaḍḍar⟩ ‘enclore pour une haie, faire une ḥaḍīrah’ (GD 432) ~ Khābūra ḥiḍār ‘a fence between houses / gardens; the collection of palm-frond huts on a settlement’s edge’ (Brockett 1985: 82) ~ Yemen ḥað̣ īreh, pl ḥað̣ āʾir ‘giardino’; ‘vineyard’ (Rossi 1939: 211; Piamenta 1990: 97) ~ Palest ḥað̣ īreh, pl ḥað̣ āyir ‘enclos pour les bestiaux’ (Denizeau 1960: 114) ~ Kǝndērīb ḥað̣ ra, pl -āt ‘Scheune, Heuscheuer’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 37) ~ Ūlād Brāhīm ḥoẓīr ‘campement isolé’ (W. Marçais 1908: 50) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ḥaḍīr, pl ḥaḍāyir⟩ ‘fence’ (Corriente 1997: 130). 136

ḥ-ṭ-b

mḏḥ (MK) ‘hew (timber, stone), hewer of stone, build ships’; ‘Holz behauen’; mḏḥ ‘der Zimmermann, der Tischler’; mḏḥ.t ‘behauenes Holz’ (Faulkner 1962: 126; Wb II 190, 191; Calice 1936: 159) ~ Heb ‫ ָח ַצב‬ḥāṣab ‘to hew’ (M. Jastrow 1886: � ḥaṭaba ‘Brennholz hauen’ (Wahrmund I 522); 493) || Ar �‫ح��ط� ب‬ ~ Najd ḥṭuba ‘firewood’ (Ingham 1982: 37) ~ Oman ḥaṭab ‘wood’ (Eades 2011: 31) ~ N. Yemen ḥaṭṭab ‘Brennholz schlagen’ (Behnstedt 1987: 244) ~ Palmyra ḥaṭab ‘bois à bruler’ (Cantineau 1934 II 32) ~ Aleppo ḥaṭṭab ‘abattre du bois dans une forêt et le transporter chez soi’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 163) ~ Kǝndērīb ḥaṭab ‘Brennholz, Holz’: ḥaṭab ṭawīl ‘lange Stangen (beim Bau)’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 38) ~ Damascus ḥaṭab ‘firewood’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 91) ~ Palest ḥaṭṭābe ‘ramasseuse de bois’ (Dalman IV 2) ~ Negev ḥaṭṭab ‘collect brushwood’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi) ~ Egypt ḥaṭab ‘dry stalks of harvested crops, and other vegetable refuse, used for fodder and kindling’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 211) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨naḥṭab, ḥaṭabt⟩ ‘to gather firewood’ (Corriente 1997: 130).

125

135. ḥ-ḍ-r – 140. ḥ-f-l

137

ḥ-ṭ-m

ḥtm (Pyr) ‘perish, be destroyed’; ‘vernichten, vertilgen’ (Faulkner 1962: 180; Wb III 197; Ember 1930: 58; Albright 1918: 237); Ḥtmwt ‘die Vernichtenden’ (Leitz

ّ

� ḥaṭama/ �‫ح��ط‬ � ḥaṭṭama ‘to break s.th.’ (Hava 1982: 130); 2002: 594) || Ar �‫ح��ط‬ ‫م‬ ‫م‬ ~ Najd tiḥaṭṭam ‘to break, to go to pieces, to be broken, smashed, shattered’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 354) ~ Khābūra ḥuṭme ‘paralysis’ (Brockett 1985: 82) ~ Oman tḥāṭmo ‘sich schlagen (mit Waffen)’ (Reinhardt 1894: 171) ~ Iraq ḥaṭṭam ‘wreck, destroy, ruin’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 108) ~ Aleppo ḥaṭam ‘assommer (qqn)’; ḥaṭṭam ‘briser en plusiers morceaux’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 164) ~ Sinai ḥaṭam ‘to bound forward’; ḥāṭim ‘an attacker’ (C. Bailey 1991: 434) ~ Palest ḥaṭṭam ‘zerschellen’ (Bauer 1957: 374); ḥāṭam ‘nachspringen’ (Schmidt & Kahle 1918 I 275) ~ Marazig ḥṭem ‘se dessécher sous l’action du soleil’ (Boris 1958: 119) ~ Morocco ḥeṭṭem ‘to destroy’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 50). 138

ḥ-ð̣ -w

ḥḏ (Pyr) ‘die Keule mit rundem Knauf (als Waffe, als Abzeichen des Königs)’ ‫� �ظ ة‬ (Wb III 206; Calice 1936: 181) || Ar �‫ح��و‬ ḥað̣ wah ‘small rod, arrow’ (Hava 1982: 131). 139

ḥ-f-f

ḫfꜣꜣ.t (Gr) ‘banks of waterway’; ‘Gestade, Ufer eines Gewässers, Gefilde’ (Faulkner 1962: 190; Wb III 271) ~ Heb ‫ חֹוף‬ḥōp ‘shore, coast’; [‫ ] ָח ַפף‬ḥāpap ‘to ‫ � فّ ة‬ḥaffah ‘Rand, Saum’ (Wahrmund I 528); enclose, surround’ (BDB 342) || Ar ������‫ح‬ ~ Aleppo ḥaffe ‘bord (de la mer, d’une rivière, d’une table)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 166) ~ Damascus ḥaffe ‘edge’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 76) ~ Lebanon ḥaffe ‘colline’ (M. Feghali 1933: 2) ~ Palest ḥiffe ‘bord, bordure’ (Denizeau 1960: 114). 140

ḥ-f-l

ḥfn (OK) ‘great quantity’; ‘Hunderttausende (= Unzählige)’ (Ember 1917: 87; ‫ � ف‬ḥafala ‘be copi1930: 53; Faulkner 1962: 192, 168; DLE I 309; Wb III 74) || Ar ‫ح�����ل‬

ْ‫ف‬

� ḥafl ‘Zahlreich, in Fülle, Menge’ (Hava 1982: 132; Wahrmund I 527); ous’); ‫ح�����ل‬

126

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

~ Najd ḥāfil, pl ḥiffal ‘flowing copiously, abounding with, overflowing with’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 354) ~ Rwala ḥafna ‘a large handful’ (Musil 1928: 12) ~ Morocco ḥǝfna d l-ūlād ‘une famille nombreuse’ (Prémare III 164) ~ Takrūna ḥfǝl ‘être rempli de gens, d’animaux’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 865) ~ Malta ⟨ħafna⟩ ‘molto assai’ (Vassalli 1796: 242). 141

ḥ-f-n

ḫnp (Pyr) ‘rauben’; ‘snatch, catch ball, steal’ (Wb III 290; Faulkner 1962: 192) ‫ � ف‬ḥafana ‘eine Handvoll ~ Ugar ḥfn ‘greed, hoarding, rage’ (DUL 366) || Ar �‫ح����� ن‬ nehmen’ (Wahrmund I 528); ~ Damascus ḥantaf ‘convoiter, garder avec soin’ (Denizeau 1960: 126) ~ Palest biḥantif ʿala ḥālu ‘er geizt gegen sich selbst’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 16). 142

ḥ-q-r

ḥqr (Pyr) ‘hungry man’; ‘hungern, fasten’; sḥqr ‘make hungry’ (Faulkner 1962: 179, 239; Wb III 174) ~ Copt ϩⲕⲟⲉⲧ ‘hungry’ (Crum 1939: 663) ~ Heb ‫ ָח ַקר‬ḥāqar � ḥaqīr ‘mean, vile, paltry’ (Hava 1982: 134); ‘despise’ (Barr 1987: 327) || Ar ‫ح��ق��ي��ر‬ ~ Oman ḥaqīr, pl ḥuqara ‘armselig’; ḥaqāre ‘Armseligkeit’ (Reinhardt 1894: 74, 25) ~ Damascus ḥtaqar ‘despise’; taḥqīr ‘contempt’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 65, 52) ~ Negev lā taḥagri nafskiy ‘don’t despise yourself (f)’ (Henkin 2010: 280) ~ S.E. Anatolia ḥaqīr ‘être affligé’ (Grigore 2007: 141) ~ Palest ḥaqīr ‘unansehnlich’ (Bauer 1957: 315) ~ Negev ḥqīr ‘méprisé’ (Feghali 1938: 756) ~ Egypt ḥaqqar/ iḥtaqar ‘id.’; ḥaqīr ‘poor, miserable’ (Spiro 1895: 145) ~ Djidjelli steḥqer ‘regarder avec mépris’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 96) ~ Malta ⟨ħaqar⟩ ‘opprimere, maltrattare’ (Vassalli 1796: 245). 143

ḥ-q-q

ḥqꜣ (Pyr) ‘to rule over, govern’; ‘herrschen, beherrschen’ (Faulkner 1962: 178; Wb ّ� ‫� ق‬ III 170) ~ Heb ‫ חֹק‬ḥōq ‘a statute’ (BDB 349) || Ar �‫ح ق‬ ḥaqq, pl �‫ح��ق��و‬ ḥuqūq ‘justice’ (Hava 1982: 133); ~ Aleppo ḥaqq ‘droit’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 167) ~ Damascus ḥaqq, pl ḥqūq ‘right’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 193) ~ Lebanon ḥaqq ‘responsabilité’ (Feghali 1935: 10) ~ Palest ḥaqq ‘Preis’ (Bîr Z„t; Schmidt & Kahle 1918 I 275) ~ Tunis ḥaqq ‘Recht’ (Stumme 1896: 40) ~ Algiers ḥaqq ‘justice’ (Tapiéro 1971: 160) ~ Malta ⟨ħaqq⟩ ‘tribunale’ (Vassalli 1796: 245).

127

141. ḥ-f-n – 147. ḥ-l-l ¹

144

ḥ-q-l

ḥqr (LE) ‘field, territory’ (Hoch 1994: 235; DLE I 334) ~ Sab ḥql ‘country’ (Jamme � ḥuqūl ‘fertile field’ (Hava 1982: 135); � ḥaql, pl ‫ح��ق��ول‬ 1962: 436) || Ar ‫ح��ق���ل‬ ~ Aleppo ḥaqle ‘champ cultivé’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 167) ~ Lebanon ḥaqle ‘champ’ (Feghali 1938: 756); cf. ḥaql/ḥaqlah ‘champ’ (Dozy I 308) ~ Bišmizzīn hal-ḥa‌ʾlit il-ʾamḥ ‘dieses Weizenfeld’ (Jiha 1964: 127) ~ Egypt ḥaql ‘Feld’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 90). 145

ḥ-k-l

ḥkꜣw (Pyr) ‘der Zauberer’; ḥkꜣ ‘jemanden bezaubern’; ḥkꜣw.t ‘Zauberei’; ḥkꜣy ‘magician’; ḥkꜣw ‘magic, magic spells’ (Wb III 177; Ember 1930: 20; Faulkner 1962: 179; Albright 1918: 237) ~ Dem ḥjq ‘Zauber(spruch)’; ḥq ‘Zauber’; ḥk ‘Zauberei’ (DG 292, 334, 333) ~ Copt ϩⲓⲕ ‘magic (charms, potions, etc.)’ (Crum

�‫ ح ك‬ḥakala ‘be con1939: 661a) ~ Akkad ekēlu ‘to be dark’ (CAD IV 63) || Ar ‫��ل‬

fused, doubtful’; ‘dunkel, zweifelhaft sein’ (Hava 1982: 136; Wahrmund I 534);

‫كلا ا �ل‬ � �‫ح ك‬ � kalām al-ḥukl = �‫كلا لا ي���ف����ه‬ � kalām lā yufham (incomprehensible ‫��ل‬ ‫م‬ ‫م‬ ‫م‬ speech) (Lisān, vol. XI 162). ~ Lebanon ḥǝkle ‘rusé’ (Denizeau 1960: 117). 146

ḥ-l-ḥ-l

ḥꜣḥꜣ (MK) ‘go astray, stumble’; ‘den Boden verlieren (beim unsicheren Gehen)’ ���‫ ح��ل‬ḥalḥala ‘vom Platze wegstoßen’ (Faulkner 1962: 163; Wb III 32) || Ar ‫ح�ل‬ (Wahrmund I 538); ~ Aleppo ḥalḥal ‘se déplacer, se disloquer’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 171) ~ Lebanon šaʿart bǝtḥǝlḥǝl bǝjrēye ‘j’ai senti un relâchement dans les jambes, les jambes m’ont manqué’ (Denizeau 1960: 120) ~ Morocco tḥalḥǝl ‘se déplacer avec lourdeur en se balançant gauchement (en parlant d’une personne forte)’ (Prémare III 191). 147

ḥ-l-l¹

ّ

ḥr (LE) ‘encamp; prepare, make ready’; ‘sich bereiten’ (Ember 1930: 75; Faulkner

1962: 176; Wb III 146) ~ Jibb ḥell ‘to settle’ (Johstone 1981: 108) || Ar ‫ ح�ل‬ḥalla ‘to alight’ (Hava 1982: 137);

128

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

~ Najd ḥall ‘to alight at, to make a place one’s abode’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 355) ~ Morocco ḥall ‘s’établir, s’installer (sens propre et figuratif); avoir lieu, survenir’ (Prémare III 224) ~ Ḥaḍramawt ḥall el-baqīʿ ‘(he) settled in al-baqīʿ ’ (Radionov 1994: 166) ~ ʿAnazeh ḥall ‘s’arrêter’ (Landberg 1940: 13) ~ Yemen ḥall ‘abitare’ (Rossi 1939: 190) ~ Khābūra ḥille ‘a small settlement’ (Brockett 1985: 84) ~ Kǝndērīb mḥalle, pl mḥallāt ‘Stadtviertel’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 40) ~ Damascus maḥall ‘place’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 174) ~ Egypt maḥall ‘place, site’ (Spiro 1895: 148). 148

ḥ-l-l²

wḥꜣ.t (Med) ‘cauldron, cooking pot, kettle’; ‘Kessel zum Kochen von Fleisch, Wasser, Salben und Wohlriechenden’ (Faulkner 1962: 76; Ember 1930: 21; Wb I

‫ّة‬

347) || Ar ��‫ ح�ل‬ḥallah ‘großer Korb oder Kessel’ (Wahrmund I 540); ~ Egypt ḥalla, pl ḥilal ‘metal cooking pot’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 221) ~ Damascus ḥalle ‘flache Schüssel, flacher Kessel’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 155) ~ Lebanon ḥalle ‘large brass cauldron’ (Frayha 1973: 47) ~ Khābūra ḥill ‘a large earthenware pot’ (Brockett 1985: 84) ~ Levantine Ar ḥulle ‘chaudière’ (Denizeau 1960: 118) ~ Aleppo ḥalle ‘grande bassine de cuivre de peu de profondeur’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 173) ~ Palest ḥille, pl ḥilal ‘Kessel zum Waschen’ (Bauer 1957: 172). 149

ḥ-l-l³

‫ّة‬

ḥꜣti҆ (Pyr) ‘cloak’; ḥꜣtyw ‘fine linen’; ‘Art feines Leinen’; wḥꜣ.t ‘garment’ (Faulkner

1962: 163; Ember 1930: 21; Wb III 28) || Ar ��‫ ح�ل‬ḥullah, pl ‫ ح�ل�ل‬ḥulal/‫ ح�لا ل‬ḥilāl ‘set of clothes’ (Hava 1982: 137); ~ Morocco ḥulla mzyāna ‘un beau costume’ (Prémare III 207) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ḥulla, pl ḥulal⟩ ‘purple tunic’ (Corriente 1997: 136) ~ Rwala ḥelle ‘furnishings’ (Musil 1928: 64) ~ Takrūna ḥella, pl ḥellāt ‘atours (vêtements, parures et bijoux d’apparat)’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 901). 150

ḥ-l-m¹

ḫnm.t.t (NK) ‘wet nurse, nurse’; ‘Wärterin, Amme, Dirne’ (Faulkner 1962: 193; ‫ة‬ Wb III 381; Hannig 1995: 604) ~ Copt ⲉⲗⲙⲓ ‘Zitze’ (Kosack 2013: 304) || Ar ��‫ح�ل�م‬ ḥalamah ‘nipple’ (Hava 1982: 139);

148. ḥ-l-l ² – 154. ḥ-m-s

129

~ Kǝndērīb ḥalama ‘Brustwarze’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 40) ~ Palest ḥalmet il-bizz ‘Brustwarze’; ḥalame ‘Zitze’ (Bauer 1957: 68, 377) ~ Egypt ḥalama ‘teat’ (Spiro 1895: 150). 151

ḥ-l-m²

Dem ḥlm ‘Käse’ (?) (Vittmann 1996: 441) ~ Copt ϩⲁⲗⲱⲙ ‘cheese; Käse’ (Crum 1939: 670a; Quack 2005: 318).

Quack (2005: 318–319) states: “Allerdings wäre zu erwägen, ob nicht tatsächlich das arabische Wort aus dem Koptischen übernommen ist, da einerseits eher kopt. ⲱ als arabisches ū erscheinen kann als umgekehrt, andererseits das arabische Wort vornehmlich im ägyptischen Dialekt zu Hause ist.” Cf. also Vittmann (1991: 222, fn 50a).

~ Lebanon ḥallūm ‘sorte de fromage’ (Denizeau 1960: 121) ~ Egypt ḥālūm (17th c.) ‘du fromage salé qu’ils (les Egyptiens) appellent dgibn halum’ (Dozy I 318); gibnet ḥalūm ‘weicher weisser Käse’ (Spitta 1880: 257; X, fn 2); ḥalūm (Coptic) ‘mild white cured cheese, sometimes braided’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 222) ~ Tunis ḥallūma, pl ḥlālǝm ‘petite pâte pour potage’ (D. Cohen 1975: 199). 152

ḥ-m-r¹

153

ḥ-m-r²

154

ḥ-m-s

ḥmr (LE) ‘ass’ (Hoch 1994: 312) ~ Heb ‫ ֲחמֹור‬ḥămōr ‘he-ass’ (BDB 331) || Ar ‫ح�م�ا ر‬ ḥimār, pl ‫ ح�مي��ر‬ḥamīr ‘ass’ (Hava 1982: 142); ~ Aleppo ḥmār, pl ḥamīr ‘âne, de grande taille’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 175) ~ Palest ḥmār, pl ḥamīr ‘Esel’ (Bauer 1957: 104) ~ Egypt ḥumār, pl ḥimīr ‘donkey’ (Spiro 1895: 152).

mrḥ ‘der Asphalt’ (Wb II 111) ~ Copt ⲁⲙⲣⲏϩⲉ ‘asphalte’ (Vycichl 1983 11) || Ar ‫ح�مر‬ ḥumar ‘bitumen’ (Elias 1974: 85); ~ Damascus ḥummar ‘Erdpech’ (Wetzstein 1906: 122) ~ Palest ḥumar ‘id.’ (Bauer 1957: 97).

ḫmṯ (LE) ‘Gewalttat’ (Wb III 285) ~ Heb ‫ ָח ַמס‬ḥāmas ‘to treat violently’ (BDB 329) || Ar ‫ ح�م��س‬ḥamasa ‘höchst tapfer im Kampfe sein’ (Wahrmund I 545);

130

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

~ Al-Andalus ⟨ḥamāsah⟩ ‘fire, enthusiasm’ (Corriente 1997: 138) ~ Aleppo ḥammas ‘irriter, exciter’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 176) ~ Ḥama nḥamset ʿēno mǝn ‘jemanden beneiden’ (Lewin 1966: 204) ~ Palest ḥammas ‘begeistern’ (Bauer 1957: 45) ~ Marazig ḥamāsa ‘attendrissement, attrait, mouvement irrésistible du cœur et des sens’ (Boris 1958: 127). 155

ḥ-m-ḍ

ḥmḏ (LE) ‘Essig’; ‘vinegar’ (Wb III 99; Hoch 1994: 228) ~ Copt ϩⲙϫ ‘vinegar’; ‫ ح� ض‬ḥamaḍa ‘sauer sein’ ϩⲙⲟϫ/ϩⲟⲙϫ ‘be(come) sour’ (Crum 1939: 682b) || Ar ����‫م‬ (Wahrmund I 545); ~ Aleppo ḥāmoḍ, f ḥāmḍa ‘aigre, acide’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 175) ~ Kǝndērīb ḥāmǝð̣ ‘sauer, säuerlich’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 40) ~ Yemen ḥāmuð̣ ‘acido’ (Rossi 1939: 190). 156

ḥ-m-m

šmm/šꜣm/ḫmm (OK) ‘be warm, hot, be feverish, burn’; ‘eigentlich ḫnm (so belegt nur im Kausativ sḫnm); seit MR auch ḫm’; šmmt ‘fever, inflammation’ (Ember 1930: 84; Faulkner 1962: 261, 267; Wb IV 468); šꜣm/šmm ‘heiß sein’ (Hannig 1995: 803) ~ Dem ẖmm ‘heiss, heiss werden, Hitze’; šmm ‘heiss’ (DG 380) ~ Copt ϩⲙⲙⲉ ‘fever’ (Crum 1939: 677a, b) ~ Heb ‫ ָחם‬ḥām ‘warm, hot’ ّ� (M. Jastrow 1886: 475) || Ar. �‫ح‬ ḥamma ‘to heat’ (Hava 1982: 140);

‫م‬

~ Rwala ḥamm as-sheyl ‘heat before the rise of Canopus’ (Musil 1928: 17) ~ Aleppo ḥamm, yḥǝ́mm ‘avoir une forte fièvre’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 178) ~ Lebanon ḥamm ‘avoir chaud’; nḥamm, yenḥamm ‘avoir de la fièvre’ (Denizeau 1960: 122) ~ Palest ḥumma ‘Fieber’ (Bauer 1957: 111) ~ Tripoli (Libya) ḥemma ‘febbre’ (Griffini 1913: 113) ~ Morocco ḥomm ‘forte fièvre’ (Prémare III 236). 157

ḥ-m-w

šꜣm/šm (LE) ‘Bezeichnung für einen angeheirateten Verwandten’ (Wb IV 411; III 303; Hannig 1995: 803) ~ Dem šm ‘Schwiegervater’ (DG 508) ~ Copt ϣⲟⲙ ‘father- (or son-in-law)’ (Crum 1939: 564a) ~ Heb ‫ �ָח ם‬ḥām ‘father-in-law’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 475) || Ar ‫ ح�مو‬ḥamw ‘Schwiegervater’ (Wahrmund I 548);

155. ḥ-m-ḍ – 159. ḥ-n-k ²

131

~ Aleppo ḥamu ‘père du mari par rapport à la femme, père de la femme par rapport au mari’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 178) ~ Palest dār ilḥama ‘Schwiegereltern’ (Bauer 1957: 270) ~ Cypriot Ar xawm ‘father-in-law’ (own obs.) ~ Kǝndērīb ǝlḥamu ‘der Schwiegervater’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 21) ~ Tunis ḥmūya ‘mon beaupère’ (D. Cohen 1975: 73). 158

ḥ-n-k¹

ḥngg/ḥnkk (LE) ‘der Schlund (in dem die Zunge sitzt)’; ḥnk (ME) [Substantiv, verglichen mit der Kehle des weissen Stiers] (Wb III 121, 385; Calice 1936: � ḥanak ‘Gaumen, Unterkinn’ (Wahrmund I 542); ḥalq ‘Kehle, 73) || Ar ‫ح ن���ك‬ Rachenhöhle; Gaumen’ (Wahrmund I 552, 589); ~ Rwala ḥnūk ‘jaws’ (Musil 1928: 115, fn 7) ~ N. Yemen ḥanak ‘Kehle’ (Behnstedt 1987: 246) ~ Kǝndērīb ḥanak ‘Kinn’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 41) ~ Aleppo ḥanak, pl ḥnāk ‘chacune des deux moitiés de la mâchoire inférieure de l’homme’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 181) ~ Damascus ḥanak, pl ḥnāk/ḥnūk ‘jaw’; ḥalq, pl ḥlūq ‘throat’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 128, 241) ~ Palmyra ḥanak, pl ḥŭnūk ‘menton’ (Cantineau 1934 II 1) ~ Palest ḥnāk ‘Kieferknochen’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 16) ~ Egypt ḥanak ‘mouth’ (Spiro 1895: 155) ~ Egypt ḥanak ‘mouth’ (Spiro 1895: 154) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ħanak⟩ ‘palate’ (Corriente 1997: 142) ~ Tunis ḥnǝk ‘mâchoire’ (D. Cohen 1975: 79) ~ Djidjelli ḥenk ‘pommette’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 87) ~ Ūlād Brāhīm ḥank ‘joue’ (W. Marçais 1908: 62) ~ Malta ⟨ħanek⟩ ‘mascella’ (Vassalli 1796: 249). Cf. Ghomara (Berber) lḥinka ‘chin’ (Mourigh 2016: 397).

159

ḥ-n-k²

ḥnk (Pyr) ‘to present s.o. with (m), to offer something; offerings’; ḥnkw ‘diplomatic gifts; donated land’; ‘schenken, beschenken’ (Faulkner 1962: 173; DLE I 319, 320; Wb III 117, 118); mḥnk (OK, MK) ‘Beschenkter’ (Wb II 129); ḥnkt ‘Opfer (mit zwei Wasserkrügen und Tierköpfen von Gans und Rind)’ (Hannig 2003: 848) ~ Dem ḥnk ‘schenken’ (DG 315) ~ Heb ‫ ָחנַ ְך‬ḥānak ‘dedicate; train up’; ‫ֲחנֻ ָּכה‬ ḥănukkāh ‘dedication’ (cf. Nehemiah XI 27); ‫ ָחנִ יְך‬ḥānīk ‘trained, tried, experienced’ (BDB 335) ~ Aram ḥnkh ‘dedication’ (Fitzmyer & Harrington 1978: 320) ~ Ge ḥanaka ‘understand, comprehend, perceive’; ḥanik ‘prudence, wisdom’ � ḥanaka ‘Einen verständig machen’ (Wahrmund (Leslau 1987: 237) || Ar ‫ح ن���ك‬ I 552): ḥanaka al-šayʾa ‘he understood the thing, knew it soundly, thoroughly’ (Lane 659);

132

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

~ Damascus ḥǝnek/mḥannak ‘shrewd’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 210) ~ Palest mḥannak ‘id.’; ḥinke ‘cunning (n)’ (own obs.) ~ Takrūna ḥannek, iḥannek ‘rendre qq. sage, prudent’; tḥannek ‘s’assagir’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 957) ~ Ḥassāniyya ḥannak ‘(mother) give (newborn) its first breast milk’ (Mali; Heath 2004: 95) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨niḥannak⟩ ‘to train or drill’; ⟨yatḥannak⟩ ‘become practised or drilled’ (Corriente 1997: 141). 160

ḥ-n-n

ḥn (LE) ‘grant favour’ (Ember 1930: 45); *Ḥanāni *Ḥanānyā (anthroponyms) (LE) ‘be gracious’ (Hoch 1994: 230) ~ Heb ‫ ָחנָ ן‬ḥānān ‘one of the warriors of � ḥanna ‘long for her child (woman)’ (Hava 1982: 145); David’ (BDB 336) || Ar �ّ‫ح� ن‬ ‫ح ن���� ن‬ � �‫ ي‬ḥanīn ‘zärtliche Liebe’; ḥunayn (Name) (Wahrmund I 553); ~ Ḥassāniyya ḥnāne/ḥanāne ‘pitié’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 114) ~ Palest ḥanūn ‘mitleidig’ (Bauer 1957: 207) ~ Egypt ḥann ‘have compassion’ (Spiro 1895: 154) ~ Oman tḥann ʿalīk ‘sie brüllt nach dir’ (Reinhardt 1894: 407) ~ Malta ⟨ħniena⟩ ‘mercy’ (Aquilina 1987: 548) ~ Rwala ḥann, yḥinn ‘murmur pitiably (a thirsty camel)’ (Musil 1928: 338) ~ Negev ḥinīn ‘sound emitted by the camel’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi) ~ Marazig ḥannan ‘geindre pour appeler sa mère (jeune chamelon)’ (Boris 1958: 129) ~ Baghdad ḥann ‘long, yearn, be anxious’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 121). 161

ḥ-n-y

162

ḥ-w-b

ّ

� ḥannā ‘to bend, hnn (MK) ‘neigen, beugen’ (Wb II 494; Calice 1936: 173) || Ar ‫ح ن���ا‬ ǝ to curve a.th.’ (Hava 1982: 147) ~ Syr ḥ nā ‘to bend a bow’ (CSD 149); ~ Baghdad ḥina ‘bow, bend forward, tilt forward’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 122) ~ Kfarʿabīda nḥana ‘être courbé, se plier’ (Feghali 1919: 180) ~ Palest ḥana ‘Knie beugen’ (Bauer 1957: 58) ~ Egypt ḥana ‘to bend, curve’ (Spiro 1895: 155) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨naḥni, ḥanayt⟩ ‘to bend, turn (intrans.)’ (Corriente 1997: 142).

ḥb (MK) ‘to grieve, mourn’; ‘trauern’ (Ember 1930: 78; Faulkner 1962: 167; Wb III � 61; Hannig 1995: 522) || Saf ḥwb/ḥyb ‘to lament’ (Al-Jallad 2015: 323) ~ Ar �‫حو ب‬ ḥawb ‘tristesse, douleur’ (DAF I 507);

160. ḥ-n-n – 165. ḥ-w-l

133

~ Iraq ḥōba ‘divine retribution, revenge, satisfaction; sin, guilt’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 122; Avishur 2008 II 44) ~ Yemen ḥawb ‘urging cry’; ḥawīb ‘evil, wicked, sinful’ (Piamenta 1990: 112) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ḥūb⟩ ‘sin’ (Corriente 1997: 142). 163

ḥ-w-r¹

ḥwrw (MK) ‘poor, humble man’; ‘der Schwache’; ḥwrw i҆b ‘poor of understanding’ (Faulkner 1962: 166; Wb III 55) || Ar ‫ ح�ا ر‬ḥāra ‘to be perplexed’ (Hava 1982: 148); ‘verblüfft, verwirrt, erstaunt sein’ (Wahrmund I 555); ‘he returned from a good state to a bad; he became confounded, perplexed, and was unable to see the right course’ (Lane 665); ~ Aleppo ḥār ‘être embarassé, perplexe’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 187) ~ Damascus ḥtār ‘be at a loss’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 142) ~ Palest miḥtār fi amro ‘gänzlich unwissend’ (Bauer 1957: 366) ~ Egypt iḥtār/iḥtayyar ‘to be perplexed, bewildered’ (Spiro 1895: 116) ~ Kǝndērīb ḥār ‘nicht mehr weiter wissen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 41) ~ Petra hadāk ð̣ uʿun il-ḥabāyib fi-l-ḥamād iḥtār ‘Da ist ja eine Karawane mit Freunden, die sich in der Wüste verirrten’ (Musil 1908: 220). 164

ḥ-w-r²

ḥr (Pyr) ‘be distant, be far from (r)’ (Faulkner 1962: 175); ḥrj (Pyr) ‘weit sein, sich entfernen’ (Calice 1936: 179) || Ar ‫ ح�ا ر‬ḥāra ‘to return, to go down’ (Hava 1982: 148); ‘seinen Weg verloren haben; zurückkehren, wiederkommen’ (Wahrmund I 555; 562); ~ Daθīna ⟨ḥār⟩ ‘rentrer dans l’aprés-midi ou le soir’ (GD 509) ~ Yemen ḥār ‘to turn’ (Piamenta 1990: 112) ~ Palest ḥār ‘retourner, revenir’ (Denizeau 1960: 128); bitḥūr ‘kehrt zurück’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 16). 165

ḥ-w-l

َ َ

(i) ḥꜣ (Pyr) ‘around’; ‘um … herum’: pḫr ḥꜣ ‘gehen, zirkulieren um, herumgehen

� um’; r-ḥꜣ ‘[präp.] hinter’ (Ember 1930: 78; DLE I 295; Hannig 1995: 502) || Ar ‫حول‬ ḥawla ‘rund herum’ (Wahrmund I 559); ~ Daθīna ⟨ḥāwal⟩ ‘tout autour’ (GD 525) ~ Yemen ḥawl ‘attorno’ (Rossi 1939: 194) ~ Hijaz ḥawāli ‘about, approximately’ (Omar 1975: 253) ~ Iraq ḥawl (prep.)

134

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

‘around, about, in the area of’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 124) ~ Najd maḥālih ‘water wheel’ (Sowayan 1992: 296) ~ Kǝndērīb ḥawl ‘um … herum’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 42) ~ Al-Balqāʾ miḥīl ‘turning away’ (Palva 1992: 168) ~ Palest ḥawal ‘faire cercle’ (Denizeau 1960: 131) ~ Egypt ḥawalēn ‘around, about’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 234). (ii) mḥn (Pyr) ‘coil (n. & v.), (of serpents)’; ‘sich ringeln’ (Faulkner 1962: 114; Calice 1936: 64); ~ Rwala maḥālah, pl maḥāl ‘wooden roller of a water hoist’ (Musil 1928: 339) ~ Najd maḥāla ‘oberes Querholz der Schöpfmaschine’ (Socin 1901 III 259) ~ Palest ḥawl ‘ringsum’ (Bauer 1957: 245); mḥāle ‘rouleau, roulette, poulie’ (Denizeau 1960: 132) ~ Egypt ḥawwil ‘to change, turn from, transfer’ (Spiro 1895: 118) ~ Ḥassāniyya ḥawli, pl ḥwāle ‘turban’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 147). 166

ḥ-w-y¹

ḥw (Pyr) ‘food’; ‘Nahrung, Speise’ (Faulkner 1962: 164; Wb III 44; Calice 1936: ‫� ة‬ 175) || Ar � ‫حي���ا‬ ḥayāh ‘life’; ‫ ح�اي�ا‬ḥāyā ‘to nourish’ (Hava 1982: 152); ~ Oman ḥāyāt ‘food supplies’ (Eades 2011: 40) ~ Damascus ḥayāt ‘life’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 138) ~ Kǝndērīb ḥayāt ‘Leben’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 42) ~ Palest ḥayāto ‘sein Leben’ (Bauer 1957: 190) ~ Egypt ḥayā ‘life’ (Spiro 1895: 157). 167

ḥ-w-y²

� ḥawā ‘to gather’ (Hava sḥwy (caus.) ‘rassembler’ (Meeks 1981: 242) || Ar ‫حو�ى‬ 1982: 151); ~ Najd ḥawa ‘to collect, encompass’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 350) ~ Lebanon ḥewe, yeḥwa ‘contenir, posséder’ (Denizeau 1960: 132) ~ Palest iḥtawa ‘enthalten’ (Bauer 1957: 93) ~ Kǝndērīb ḥawa, yǝḥwi ‘bei sich zu Hause haben’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 42). 168

ḥ-w-y³

wḥy.t (MK) ‘Stamm der Beduinen Syriens’; wḥyt (MK) ‘family, kindred’; ‘Familie’; wḥy (NK) ‘Niederlassung in Fremden Ländern’ (Wb I 346; Faulkner 1962: 66); ḥwt-sr ‘mansion of the prince’ (DLE I 304) ~ Heb ‫ ַחוָ ה‬ḥawāh ‘tent-village’ (BDB � ḥawā ‘sammeln, versammeln’; ḥayy ‘grosse Stammabteilung, 295) || Ar ‫ح َو�ى‬ Nachbarn von gleichem Stamme’ (Wahrmund I 560, 561);

166. ḥ-w-y ¹ – 170. ḥ-y-n

135

~ Rwala ḥayy ‘tribe, kin’: ḥayyeh ‘his people’ (Musil 1928: 165, 359, 578) ~ Sinai ḥayy ‘an encampment’ (C. Bailey 1991: 435) ~ Najd ḥaya ‘green pasture’ (Sowayan 1992: 261) ~ Aleppo ḥayy ‘lieu où campe un tribu arabe; d’où, quartier où l’on habite’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 189) ~ Ḥama ḥayy ‘Stadtviertel’ (Lewin 1966: 205) ~ Damascus ḥayy ‘neighborhood’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 157) ~ Kǝndērīb ḥawa ‘sich halten (Tiere)’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 42) ~ Marazig ḥay (sans pl) ‘gens, groupe de gens (en nomadisation seulement)’ (Boris 1958: 135) ~ Morocco ḥayy ‘campement, quartier d’une ville’ (Prémare III 301) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ḥayy, pl aḥyā⟩ ‘tribal community’ (Corriente 1997: 146). 169

ḥ-y-r

ḥrj.t-š (LE) ‘Gartenanlage bei einem Tempel’ (Wb III 135); ḥrt-i҆b ‘central hall of temple’ (Faulkner 1962: 175) ~ Sab ḥyrt ‘encampment’ (Jamme 1962: 436) ||

َْ

Ar ‫ حي��ر‬ḥayr ‘garden, enclosure’ (Hava 1982: 152); ~ Damascus ḥāra ‘Gasse, Viertel’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 156) ~ Ḥama ḥāra ‘Stadtviertel’ (Lewin 1966: 205) ~ Lebanon ḥāra ‘grande maison’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 187) ~ Palest ḥāra ‘Stadtviertel’ (Bauer 1957: 285) ~ Egypt ḥāra ‘lane, quarter’ (Spiro 1895: 117) ~ Djidjelli ḥāra ‘quartier’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 255) ~ Khābūra ḥāra ‘[the] housing-area of a settlement’ (Brockett 1985: 86) ~ Yemen ḥāreh ‘quartiere di città’ (Rossi 1939: 231) ~ Daθīna ⟨ḥayr⟩, pl ⟨ḥyār⟩ ‘enclos’; ⟨ḥāra⟩ ‘quartier d’une ville’ (GD 534, 535) ~ Najd ḥēr, pl ḥyūr ‘fenced palm garden’ (Sowayan 1992: 261). 170

ḥ-y-n

ḥn.t (MK) ‘space of time, life, lifetime’; ‘Zeitraum, Frist (zumeist im Sinne von lange Zeit)’ (Faulkner 1962: 171; Wb III 106); ḥn ‘eilen, gehen’ (Hannig 1995: 536) || Ar �‫ حي�� ن‬ḥīn ‘time, space of time, opportunity’ (Hava 1982: 153); ~ ʿAnazeh hal-ḥīn ‘maintenant’ (Landberg 1940: 16) ~ Sinai ḥyān ‘sometimes’ (Stewart 1990: 235) ~ Negev halḥīn ‘now’ (Henkin 2010: 242) ~ Khābūra el-ḥīne ‘now, nowadays’ (Brockett 1985: 88) ~ Hijaz al-ḥīn/daḥḥīn ‘now’ (Omar 1975: 252, 256) ~ Yemen mā-ḥīn ‘allorché’ (Rossi 1939: 192) ~ Egypt ḥīn, pl aḥyān ‘time, occasion’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 236) ~ Šukriyya daḥīn ‘nun, also, jetzt’ (Reichmuth 1983: 126) ~ Tripoli (Libya) ḥīnma ‘appena che’ (Griffini 1913: 16) ~ Tunis ḥīna ‘maintenant’ (D. Cohen 1975: 151) ~ Marazig fi-l-ḥīn ‘sofort’ (RittBenmimoun 2005: 121) ~ Algiers ḥīn ‘moment’ (Tapiéro 1971: 163) ~ Morocco ḥīn/ḥēn, pl aḥyān ‘moment (court, instant)’; ḥēnen/ḥēnma ‘dès que, au moment

136

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

où’ (Prémare III 198, 137); fe-l-ḥin ‘on the spot’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 189) ~ Malta ⟨x’ħen hu?⟩ ‘what’s the time?’ (own obs.). 171

ḥ-y-y

ḥyt/ḥwyt/ḥw.t (Pyr) ‘rain (n. & vb.)’; ‘der Regen, Sturm und Regen, Regenwasser, Flut (des Nils)’; ḥy ‘Flut (eines Gewässers)’; ḥwyt ‘rain (vb.)’ (Caminos 1954: 568; Ember 1930: 78; Faulkner 1962: 165; DLE I 303; Wb III 49; Hannig 1995: 515) ~ Dem ḥwj ‘regnen’; ḥw ‘der Regen’ (DG 295) ~ Copt ϩⲱⲟⲩ ‘rain’ (Crum 1939: ً� 732a) || Ar ‫حي���ا‬ ḥayan ‘Regen’ (Wahrmund I 561); ~ Rwala ḥaya ‘a copious rain’ (Musil 1928: 542) ~ Najd ḥaya ‘abundant rains’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 350); ⟨ḥayā⟩ ‘Regen’ (Socin 1901 III 260) ~ Syrian Ar ḥayyet el-mā ‘conduite d’eau’ (Denizeau 1960: 132). X 172

x-b-b

bẖbẖ (MK) ‘Hochmut, Frechheit’; ‘insolent, impudent’ (Wb I 472; Meeks ّ 1981: 128) [< *bḫbḫ < *xbxb] || Ar �‫ خ�� ب‬xabba ‘to be crafty, mischievous’ (Hava 1982: 154). 173

x-b-r

ḫbr (LE) ‘in geschäftlicher Verbindung mit; Geschäftskontakt (Geschäfts)partner, Kompagnon’; ‘contact, business partner, associate’ (Wb III 254; Hannig 1995: 591; DLE I 354) ~ Dem ḫbr/ẖbr ‘Genosse, Freund’ (DG 354, 379) ~ Copt ϣⲃⲏⲣ ‘friend, comrade’ (Crum 1939: 353a) ~ Akkad ibru ‘person of the same status or profession, comrade, fellow, colleague, friend’ (CAD VII 5) ~ Ugar ḥbr ‘companion, associate’ (DUL 353) ~ Syr ḥabrā ‘socius’ (Brockelmann 1928: 212), etḥabbar ‘be intimate, be a companion, ally oneself with’ (CSD 125) ~ Heb ‫ָח ֵבר‬ ḥābēr ‘associate, friend’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 421) ~ Ge ḫabärä ‘to join up with’ ~ Amh abbärä ‘id.’ (Leslau 1969: 21) ~ Tham ḥbr ‘compagnon’ (Winnett & Reed 1970: 197); ~ Yemen ⟨xubrah⟩ ‘compagnie, association’ (GD 549); xabīr, pl xubr ‘comrade, companion’ (Piamenta 1990: 119), xabīrin/xabīr/xubrāh/xubrā ‘Freund’ (Behnstedt 1987: 247); xabāyir ‘friends’ (Watson 2002: 103) ~ Oman mxābra

171. ḥ-y-y – 175. x-t-m

137

‘sich begrüssen’ (Reinhardt 1895: 51) ~ Najd xubra rabʿ ‘one’s own group’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 360) ~ Kfarʿabīda tḥāber ‘il s’est associé avec’ (Feghali 1919: 63) ~ Sinai xibra, pl xabāriy ‘an area inhabited by bedouin’ (C. Bailey 1991: 435). 174

x-b-l

ḫbn (OK) ‘destroy, lay waste’; ‘Verbrechen begehen; mit verbrecherischem Charakter’; ḫbnt ‘das Verbrechen’; ḫbntj ‘der Verbrecher’ (Faulkner 1962: 187; Wb III 254; Calice 1936: 76) ~ Akkad ḫabālu ‘to oppress, wrong, defraud, damage, deform, bereave’ (Parpola 2007: 32; Cohen 2011: 20) ~ Heb ‫ ֶח ֶבל‬ḥebel ‘destruction’ (BDB 287) || Saf ḫbl ‘mess up, damage’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 634) ~ Ar ‫ خ� ب���ل‬xabala ‘Einen von Sinnen bringen; wahnsinnig machen (Traurigkeit, Liebesschmerz); Einem den Kopf verrückt machen’; ‫خ� ب���ا ل‬ xabāl ‘ruin’ (Wahrmund I 572; Hava 1982: 157); ~ Najd axbal, pl xibil ‘stupid, foolish, insane’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 351) ~ Iraq xaḅḅaḷ ‘drive insane’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 129) ~ Palest nxabal ‘avoir le cerveau dérangé’ (Denizeau 1960: 136) ~ Marazig xabbal ‘emmêler’; xtǝbal ‘devenir fou’ (Boris 1958: 139) ~ Egypt xabal/xabbil ‘to confuse, perplex, puzzle’ (Spiro 1895: 162) ~ Morocco xabbǝl ‘emmêler, embrouiller, rendre inextricable’ (Prémare IV 15) ~ Malta ⟨ħabbel, iħabbel⟩ ‘confuse’ (own obs.). 175

x-t-m

ḫtm (OK) ‘seal (vb. & n.), contract’; ‘Vertrag, gesiegelte Rechtsurkunde, das Siegel, siegeln, versiegeln; verschliessen, einschliessen’; ḫtmj ‘Siegler’ (Faulkner 1962: 199; Breasted 1930: 555; Wb III 350–52; Hannig 1995: 625) || Heb [‫] ָח ַתם‬ ‫خت‬ ḥātam ‘to seal’ (BDB 367) || Ar �� xatama ‘to seal, stamp’ (Hava 1982: 157); ‫م‬ ~ Damascus xatam ‘to seal’; xǝtǝm, pl xtūme ‘seal (n)’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 194) ~ Palest xitm/xtūme ‘Siegelabdruck’; xatam ‘siegeln’ (Bauer 1957: 275, 276) ~ Egypt xatam ‘to seal, sign’; xitm, pl axtām ‘seal (n)’ (Spiro 1895: 163). ḫtm.t (LE) ‘Fingerring (aus Gold)’ (Wb III 350) ~ Dem ḫtm ‘Ring’ (DG 372) ‫ت‬ ~ Heb ‫חֹותם‬ ָ ḥōtām ‘seal, signet-ring’ (BDB 368) || Ar � ‫ خ��ا‬xātim ‘signet-ring’ ‫م‬ (Hava 1982: 157); ~ Oman xātum ‘Ring’ (Reinhardt 1894: 43) ~ Aleppo xātǝm, pl xwētǝm ‘cachet enchâssé dans une bague’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 193) ~ Damascus xātem, pl xawātem ‘ring’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 194) ~ Kǝndērīb xātǝm ‘Ring’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 43) ~ Egypt xātim, pl xawātim ‘finger-ring’ (Spiro 1895: 162) ~ Tripoli (Libya) xātem ‘anello’ (Griffini 1913: 13) ~ Djidjelli xāṭǝm ‘anneau,

138

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

bague’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 263) ~ Morocco xatem, pl xwatem ‘ring’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 164). 176

x-ð-m

ẖdb (MK) ‘töten, niedermetzeln im Kampf’ (Wb III 403; Calice 1936: 189) || ‫�ذ‬ Ar ��‫ خ‬xaðama ‘he cut it, he cut it off’ (Lane 714); cf. 426. x-ṭ-b; ‫م‬ ~ Al-Andalus mixðam ‘knife’ (Corriente 1997: 151). 177

x-r-ʾ

ḥ-()r-ja (LE) ‘getrockneter Mist’ ~ ḥri҆t ‘dung’ (Helck 1962: 566; DLE 323) ~ Heb ‫ ָח ֵרי‬ḥārēy ‘excrements’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 501) ~ Dem ḥr.t ‘Kot’ (DG 325) ~ Copt ϩⲟ(ⲉ)ⲓⲣⲉ/ϩⲟⲏⲣⲉ ‘dung (human or animal)’ (Crum 1939: 697b) || Ar ‫ �خ�ر��ئ‬xariʾa ‘den Bauch entleeren’ (Wahrmund I 589); ~ Aleppo xara, n.un. xǝrye ‘excréments’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 200) ~ Damascus xara ‘Scheiße’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 156) ~ Iraq xiryān/xaryān ‘feces’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 133) ~ Qarṭmīn xaṛa ‘Scheiße’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 136) ~ Palest xara ‘Kot’ (Bauer 1957: 181) ~ Sinai xarra ‘defecate’ (Stewart 1990: 283) ~ Egypt xara ‘excrement, dung’ (Spiro 1895: 168) ~ Tunis xṛa ‘il a déféqué’ (D. Cohen 1975: 105). 178

x-r-b¹

ḫrb (LE) ‘desert’ (Hoch 1994: 249) ~ Akkad ḫarābu ‘to lie waste’; ḫarbu/ḫarībtu ‫ة‬ ‘waste land’ (CAD VI 87, 98, 100) || Ar ���‫ �خ�رب‬xirbah, pl �‫ �خ�ر ب‬xirab ‘ruins’ (Hava 1982: 160); ~ N. Yemen xarāba ‘Ruine’ (Behnstedt 1987: 248) ~ Palest xirbe, pl xirab ‘Ruine’; xarābe ‘baufalliges Haus’; xrābih ‘klein verlassener Brunnen’ (Bauer 1957: 248, 67; Kampffmeyer 1936: 18) ~ Kǝndērīb xǝṛbe ‘Ruine’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 43) ~ Najd xarāb ‘ruin’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 360) ~ Tunis xarba ‘bâtiment en ruines’ (D. Cohen 1975: 28) ~ Malta [*xirbä] ⟨ħerba⟩ ‘ruina’ (Vassalli 1796: 283). 179

x-r-b²

Dem ḫrb ‘destroy’ (Hoch 1994: 249) ~ Akkad ḫarābu ‘be deserted, be waste’ (Parpola 2007: 35) ~ Heb ‫ ָח ֵרב‬ḥārēb ‘be waste, desolate’ (BDB 351) || Ar �‫�خ� ّر ب‬ xarraba ‘lay waste, demolish’ (Hava 1982: 160);

176. x-ð-m – 182. x-r-d

139

~ Aleppo xarab ‘détruire, ruiner, dévaster (un pays, une ville, une maison)’ (Barthélemy 195) ~ Damascus xarrab ‘destroy’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 65) ~ Egypt xarab ‘destroy, ruin’ (Spiro 1895: 164) ~ Mzāb xarrab ‘il a détruit’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 109). 180

x-r-r¹

ḫr (Pyr) ‘to fall’; ‘fallen, fällen’ (Faulkner 1962: 195; Caminos 1954: 576; Wb III 319; Calice 1936: 76) || Ar ‫ �خ� ّر‬xarra ‘to fall down, collapse’ (Ambros 2004: 85); ~ Iraq xarr ‘to fall, fall down, drop, dive, swoop down’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 132) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨yanxarru⟩ ‘to fall’ (Corriente 1997: 153) ~ Palest xarr ‘Gurgel vom Eindringen des Wassers’ (Bauer 1957: 144) ~ Egypt xarr ‘to leak, trickle, drop’ (Spiro 1895: 164) ~ E. Arabia xarr ‘to fall, leak’ (Holes 2001: 143) ~ Sinai xurr ‘a channel for water caused by continual dropping’ (Wilson & Palmer 1869: 306) ~ Najd xarr ‘traufen’ (Socin 1901 III 260) ~ Aleppo xǝrr ‘couler (: eau courante), tomber (étoile filante)’ ~ Oman xarr ‘auslaufen’ (Reinhardt 1894: 178) ~ Palest xuṛṛ ‘leak water’ (de Jong 2011: 30). 181

x-r-r²

182

x-r-d

šr.t (Pyr) ‘nose’; ‘die Nase’ (Ember 1930: 96; Wb IV 523) [< *xr.t] || Ar ‫�خ�ر�خ�ر‬ xarxara ‘to snore’ (Hava 1982: 160); ~ Tripoli (Lebanon) xarr ‘siffler, murmurer’ (El-Hajjé 1954: 138) ~ Damascus šaxar ‘snore’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 215) ~ Palest šaxxar/šaxwar ‘schnarchen’ (Bauer 1957: 263).

ẖrdt (OK) ‘Tochter’ (Hannig 2003: 1023); ẖrd (Pyr) ‘child; be, become a child’; ‘das Kind’; ‘rajeunir’; ẖrdw ‘chilhood’; tꜣ ẖrd ‘die Tochter’; ẖrd.w ꜣ ‘drei Kinder’ (Wb III 396, 398; Faulkner 1962: 204; Herbin 1994: 541; Brockelmann 1932: 112; ‫ �خ� د ت‬xuridat ‘she was an untouched virgin’; ‫� �خ� ��د‬ ‫�ص ت‬ Lepper 2008: 51) || Ar � ‫و‬ ‫ر‬ ‫ري‬ ṣawt xarīd ‘a gentle voice, characterized by bashfulness, modesty’ (Lane 721); ~ Najd xwāride ‘hübsch’ (Socin 1901 III 263) ~ Egypt xurdiyya, pl xurdiyyāt ‘maîtresse’ (Spiro 1895: 166) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨xarīda, pl xarāʾid/xurud⟩ ‘maid’ (Corriente 1997: 153). Cf. Al-Balqāʾ xōda ‘sweetheart’ (Palva 1992: 169) ~ Sinai xawda ‘beautiful woman’ (C. Bailey 1991: 436).

140 183

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

x-r-f¹

ẖꜣp.t/šꜣp.t (Pyr) ‘Umwetter’ (Wb III 362, IV 410) ~ Akkad ḫarpu ‘early harvest’ (M. Cohen 2011: 99) ~ Heb ‫ ח ֶֹרף‬ḥōrep ‘harvest-time, autumn’ (BDB 358) ~ Sab ‫ف‬ ḫrf ‘autumn’ (Jamme 1962: 437) || Ar ���‫ �خ�ر�ي‬xarīf ‘autumn’ (Hava 1982: 164); ~ Kuwait xarīf ‘autumn’ (Dickson 1949: 637) ~ Damascus xarīf ‘autumn’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 15) ~ Aleppo xarīf ‘automne’ (Barthé-lemy 1935–69: 200) ~ Lebanon xarīfi ‘automnal’ (El-Hajjé 1954: 140) ~ Egypt xarīf ‘autumn’ (Spiro 169); xaṛṛafit ‘es ist kühl geworden (Herbst)’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 112) ~ Tripoli (Libya) xarīf ‘autunno’ (Griffini 1913: 23) ~ Marazig xarīf ‘automne’ (Boris 1958: 144); xirfāwa ‘Herbst’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2005: 240) ~ Algeria xarraf ‘cueillir des fruits d’automne, surtout des figues’ (Lentin 1959: 71) ~ Djidjelli xrīf ‘automne’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 268) ~ Tunis xarref ‘il a été en automne’ (D. Cohen 1975: 28) ~ Ḥassāniyya xrīv ‘hivernage’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 80) ~ Malta ⟨ħarifa⟩ ‘autumn’ (Aquilina 1987: 508). 184

x-r-f²

185

x-r-m

186

x-z-y

‫ف‬

‫أ فة‬

ḫrp (20th Dyn.) ‘Rinder’ (Wb III 329) || Ar ��‫ �خ�رو‬xarūf, pl ���‫ � �خ�ر‬ʾaxrifah ‘lamb, calf; colt (six months old)’ (Hava 1982: 164); ~ Najd xarūf, pl xirfān ‘das erwachsene männliche Tier (auch allgemeine Bezeichnung für das männliche Geschlecht)’ (Hess 1938: 82) ~ Kǝndērīb xāṛūf, pl xǝwērīf ‘Lamm’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 44) ~ Damascus xarūf, pl xawārīf/xurfān ‘lamb’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 133) ~ Palest xarūf izġīr ‘Lamm’ (Bauer 1957: 187).

ḫꜣm ‘un arbre’ (Meeks 1981: 270) || Ar ‫ �خ�ر‬xarm ‘leaves and branches of a tree’ ‫م‬ (Hava 1982: 165). ~ Palest xǝrma ‘dattes’ (Denizeau 1960: 142) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨xurram⟩ ‘Aster tripolium’ (Corriente 1997: 155).

ẖsy (MK) ‘coward’; ẖs(y) ‘weak, feeble, humble (of rank)’ (Faulkner 1962: 204); ẖsy ‘schwach sein, versagen; gering an Ansehen oder an Tüchtigkeit’; ẖsy.t ‘Schwäche, Feigheit’ (Hannig 2003: 1023; Wb III 398–99; Calice 1936: 78;

183. x-r-f ¹ – 189. x-ṭ- ʾ

141

Faulkner 1962: 204; Albright 1918: 95); pd.f ẖsi ‘his knee is feeble’ (Caminos 1954: � xazā ‘to be despicable, shamed’ (Ambros 2004: 85); 578) || Ar ‫�خ�ز �ى‬ ~ Yemen xazēʾ ‘aver vergogna’; xazawī ‘timido’ (Rossi 1939: 245) ~ Djidjelli xze ‘fait de maudire’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 222) ~ Palest xizi ‘war beschämt, wurde zuschanden’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 18) ~ Egypt xaza ‘to put to shame, disgrace’ (Spiro 1895: 170) ~ Aleppo xaza ‘confondre, couvrir de confusion, causer un échec à (qqn.)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 201) ~ Ḥama xazēt ǝl-ʿēn ʿannak ‘ich wende den bösen Blick von dir ab’ (Lewin 1966: 205) ~ Iraq xazz ‘to disgrace, put to shame’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 134) ~ Tangier xzā ‘être couvert d’opprobre’ (W. Marçais 1911: 279) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨naxzī axzayt⟩ ‘to degrade or dishonour’ (Corriente 1997: 156). 187

x-s-l

ḫśr (Pyr) ‘to dispel, drive away (darkness, evil)’; ‘beseitigen, vertreiben’ (Faulkner 1962: 198; Wb III 338; Albright 1918b: 240) || Ar ‫ خ���س�ل‬xasala ‘jeter loin de soi avec mépris’; ‘to exile’ (DAF 573; Hava 1987: 167); ~ Al-Andalus ⟨naxzal xazl⟩ ‘cut asunder’ (Corriente 1997: 155). 188

x-š-m

ḫnš (Med) [< *xmš < *xšm] ‘stinken’; ‘to stink, rot; to make stink’ (Wb III 301; Ember 1930: 93; Faulkner 1962: 193; DLE 366) ~ Dem ḫnš ‘stinken’ (DG 363) ~ Copt ϣⲛⲟϣ ‘stink’ (Crum 1939: 573b) || Ar ���‫ خ� ش‬xašima ‘to stink’ (Hava ‫م‬ 1982: 169); ~ Aleppo xǝšǝm ‘cartilages du nez’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 204) ~ Palmyra xešem, pl xšūm ‘nez’ (Cantineau 1934 II 1) ~ Iraq xašim, pl xšūm ‘nose’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 135) ~ Rwala xašm, pl xšūm ‘nose or steep spur of a ridge’ (Musil 1928: 679) ~ Najd ⟨xašm⟩ ‘Nase des Kamels’ (Socin 1901 III 261). 189

x-ṭ-ʾ

ḫtj (MK) ‘zurückweichen’; ḫtḫt ‘stray, lose the way; verloren gehen, abhanden kommen’ (Ember 1930: 82; Faulkner 1962: 199; Wb III 342, 348; Hannig 1995: 627) ~ Heb ‫ ָח ָטא‬ḥāṭāʾ ‘miss (a goal or way)’ (BDB 306) ~ Akkad ḫaṭû ‘to sin’ (M. Cohen 2011: 191) || Ar ‫ خ���ط�ئ‬xaṭiʾa ‘to fail, make a mistake’ (Hava 1982: 173);

142

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

~ Oman xṭiyye ‘Sünde’ (Reinhardt 1895: 54) ~ Sinai xaṭá ‘misdeed’; mixṭiy ‘wrongdoer’ (Stewart 1990: 283) ~ E. Arabia xaṭa ‘error, fault, mistake’ (Holes 2001: 152) ~ Iraq xiṭa‌ʾ ‘to make a mistake’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 138) ~ Rwala axṭa ‘to commit an error, to do wrong’ (Musil 1928: 647) ~ Lebanon xṭiyye, pl xṭāya ‘péché’ (Bauer 1957: 109) ~ Damascus ʾaxṭa ‘sündigen’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 27) ~ Palest axṭa ‘fehlschlagen’ (Bauer 1957: 109) ~ Tunis txaṭṭa ‘il a été penalisé’; xṭiyya ‘amende’ (D. Cohen 1975: 128, 160) ~ Djidjelli xṭa ‘erreur’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 258) ~ Tangier xṭā ‘manquer (ne pas atteindre le but)’ (W. Marçais 1911: 282) ~ Ḥassāniyya xaṭye ‘injure’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 84). 190

x-ṭ-r

ḫt (Pyr) ‘wood, timbers’; ‘Holz (als Teil des Baumes), Nutzholz, Baum; Stab, Stock zum Prügeln’ (Faulkner 1962: 198; Wb III 339, 340; Calice 1936: 77; Albright 1918: 240) ~ Akkad ḫaṭṭu(m)/ḫuṭaru/ḫuṭuru ‘Stab, Szepter, Zweig’ (von Soden I 337, 362) ~ Aram ḥuṭrā ‘Stab, Szepter’ (Gesenius & Buhl 1915: 225) ~ Phoen ḥṭr ‘sceptre’ (Krahmalkov 2000: 181) ~ Heb ‫ ח ֶֹטר‬ḥōṭer ‘Zweig, Reis’ (Gesenius & Buhl 1903: 131) ~ Syr ḥuṭrā ‘virga, baculus’ (Brockelmann 1928: 228) || Ar ‫خ���طر‬

‫أ‬

xiṭr, pl ‫ � خ���ط�ا ر‬ʾaxṭār ‘branch of a tree’ (Lane 764); ~ Yemen xiṭarī ‘upright plant like a palm twig, fig’ (Piamenta 1990: 132) ~ Rwala muxṭar ‘iron rod holding holding the wooden roller of a water hoist’ (Musil 1928: 339) ~ Egypt xiṭr, pl axṭār ‘Pfosten des Schöpfbaums’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 117) ~ Djidjelli xṭēṛa (poet.) ‘rameau’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 270) ~ Malta ⟨ħatar, pl oħtra⟩ ‘asta, bastone; bacchetta da perscuotere’ (Vassalli 1796: 269). Neo-Aram: Challa (Jew) xuṭṭa ‘stick, rod’ (Fassberg 2009: 305) ~ Ṭuroyo ḥaṭro, pl ḥaṭróθe ‘Knüppel’ (O. Jastrow 1985: 219) ~ Kurdistan xuṭra ‘stick, staff, rod, sceptre’ (Maclean 1895: 94) ~ N.W. Iraq (Jew) xáṭra ‘rod’ (Sabar 2002: 195) ~ Mand huṭra ‘staff, sceptre, flail’ (Drower & Macuch 1963: 135).

191

x-ṭ-ṭ

ḫti҆ (MK) ‘carve, engrave’; ‘einritzen, einschneiden (Inschriften, Bilder)’; ḫtj ّ‫خ‬ ‘der Graveur’ (Albright 1918: 95; Faulkner 1962: 198; Wb III 348) || Ar ‫ ���ط‬xaṭṭa ‘Linien oder Striche ziehen’ (Wahrmund I 602); ~ Iraq xaṭṭ ‘to draw (a line)’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 139) ~ Kǝndērīb xaṭṭ ‘Linien ziehen, einritzen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 45) ~ Sinai xaṭṭ ‘to draw a line’ (Stewart 1990: 287); maxaṭṭ ‘tatooed’ (C. Bailey 1991: 435) ~ Egypt xaṭṭ ‘to draw

143

190. x-ṭ-r – 194. x-f-r

a line, write’ (Spiro 1895: 174) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨xaṭṭ⟩ ‘to make a furrow’ (Corriente 1997: 160). 192

x-ṭ-m

ḫnt (Pyr) ‘face, brow’; ‘das Gesicht’ (Ember 1930: 71; Faulkner 1962: 194; Wb III 302) ~ Heb ‫ ח ֶֹטם‬ḥōṭem ‘nose’ (BDB 310) ~ Akkad ḫuṭimmu ‘snout’ (Parpola 2007: 261) || Ar �‫ خ���ط‬xaṭm ‘beak (of a bird), muzzle, nose’ (Hava 1982: 176);

‫م‬

~ Najd xṭām ‘noseband, halter’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 363) ~ Lebanon xaṭṭam ‘se couvrir la tête et le visage en ne laissant paraître que les yeux’ (Denizeau 1960: 149) ~ Palest mexṭame/maxṭemiyye ‘chaînette métallique de la muserolle’ (Denizeau 1960: 149; Dalman II 107). 193

x-ṭ-w

ḫtj.w (Pyr) ‘Terrasse mit Treppe’; ‘terraced hillside’ (Wb III 348; Faulkner 1962:

‫ة‬

ً

199) || Ar �‫ خ���طو‬xuṭwah, pl ‫ خ���طى‬xuṭan ‘step’ (Hava 1982: 176);

~ Iraq xiṭa ‘to step’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 138) ~ Sinai xuṭwah ‘pace, step’ (Stewart 1990: 283) ~ Yemen xaṭwah ‘passo’ (Rossi 1939: 226) ~ Rwala xaṭwa zēna ‘light, regular, long step (of riding camel)’ (Musil 1928: 356) ~ Damascus xaṭwe ‘step’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 224) ~ Egypt xaṭwah ‘Meter’; xaṭṭa ‘überschreiten, überspringen’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 119; Spiro 1895: 176) ~ Kǝndērīb xaṭwe ‘Schritt’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 45) ~ Palmyra xaṭwaṭ ‘faire des sillons’ (Cantineau 1934 II 149) ~ Palest xaṭwe ‘Schritt’ (Bauer 1957: 266) ~ Tunis xaṭwa ‘pas’ (D. Cohen 1975: 149) ~ Djidjelli xoṭwa ‘enjambée’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 259) ~ Ūlād Brāhīm stxaṭṭa ‘enjamber’ (W. Marçais 1908: 109).

194

x-f-r

ḫrp (Pyr) ‘govern, control, administer, lead; controller, administrator’; ‘leiten, hinführen, beaufrichtigen, regieren’ (Faulkner 1962: 196; Wb III 326; Brockelmann 1932: 112) ~ Sab hḫfr ‘give protection, aid’; ḫfr ‘(divine) protection’ (Biella 1982: 208) || Ar ‫ خ���ف��ر‬xafara ‘beschützen, Schutz und Hilfe leisten’; ‫خ���ف��ي��ر‬ ‫ف‬ xafīr, pl ‫ خ�����را ء‬xafarāʾ ‘Beschützer, Geleitsmann’ (Wahrmund I 608, 610); ~ Egypt ġafīr/ġafar ‘Feldschutz, Flurwächter’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 338) ~ Aleppo ġafīr, pl ġǝfara ‘sentinelle, un garde, [pour xafīr]’ (Barthélemy

144

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

1935–69: 578) ~ Damascus xafīr/ġafīr, pl xafara ‘watchman’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 259) ~ Lebanon xafar ‘garde, troup de garde’ (Denizeau 1960: 149) ~ Palest xafīr/ġafīr ‘Feldhüter (der Regierung)’ (Bauer 1957: 109) ~ Sinai ġafrah ‘job as a watchman’ (Stewart 1990: 225) ~ Egypt xafīr/ġafīr ‘watchman’ (Spiro 1895: 432) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nixaffar, taxfîr⟩ ‘to protect with guards’ (Corriente 1997: 161). 195

x-f-ʿ

ḫfʿ (Pyr) ‘fist’; ‘der Faust, der Griff’ (Faulkner 1962: 190; Wb III 272; Calice 1936: ‫ف‬ 76) || Ar �����‫ خ‬xafaʿa ‘schlagen’ (Wahrmund I 609).

‫ع‬

196

x-f-y

špy [< *ḫpy] ‘be ashamed’ (Ember 1930: 95); šf ‘jemanden verächtlich machen’ (Wb IV 455) || Ar �����‫ خ‬xafiya ‘to conceal oneself’ (Hava 1982: 178);

‫ف�ي‬

~ Rwala xafiyyāt ‘hidden things’ (Musil 1928: 289) ~ Damascus ḥāwal yǝxfi irtibāko ‘he tried to hide his embarassment’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 116) ~ S.E. Anatolia xtafa ‘verschwinden’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 142) ~ Palest xtafa ‘s’égarer’ (Denizeau 1960: 150) ~ Egypt xtafa ‘to hide oneself’ (Spiro 1895: 177) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨balxafi⟩ ‘secretly’ (Corriente 1997: 161). 197

x-l-b

ḫꜣb (Pyr) ‘bend, be bent, crooked’; ‘gekrümmt, gebückt sein; beugen’; ḫꜣbb ‘crookedness’; ḫꜣbw ‘sickle’ (Faulkner 1962: 184; Ember 1930: 21; Hannig 1995: ‫ م‬maxlab, pl ��‫�خ�ا �ل‬ ‫م‬ � 582) || Ar �‫�خ�ل� ب‬ ‫ � ب‬maxālib ‘claws, clutches, talons, reaping hook’ (Hava 1982: 179); ~ Khābūra xalab ‘to seize with the claws’ (Brockett 1985: 93) ~ Rwala maxāleb ‘claws’ (Musil 1928: 607) ~ Iraq mixlāb, pl maxālib ‘claw, talon’ (1967: 141) ~ Damascus maxlab, pl maxāleb ‘claw’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 42) ~ Palest maxlab, pl maxālib ‘Kralle’ (Bauer 1957: 182) ~ Negev maxālīb ‘clutches of predator birds’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi) ~ Egypt xālib, pl xawālib ‘Klauen’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 119) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨maxlab⟩ ‘claw’ (Corriente 1997: 162).

195. x-f- ʿ – 200. x-l-f ¹

198

145

x-l-x-l

ḫꜣḫꜣ/ḫjḫj (Pyr) ‘winnow’; ‘(Getreide) worfeln, schwingen’ (Faulkner 1962: 185; Breasted 1930: 554; Takács 1999: 65; Wb III 233; Hannig 1995: 583); ḫḫ (LE) ‘to winnow’ (DLE I 373) ~ Syr ḥalḥal ‘to move to and fro, shake violently’ (CSD 142) ~ Copt ϣⲱϣ ‘scatter, spread’ (Crum 1939: 605) || Ar ‫ �مت���� خ���ل�� خ��ل‬mutaxalxil ‘éparpillé (se dit d’une armée)’ (DAF I 396); ~ Aleppo xalxal ‘ébranler, remuer’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 211) ~ Lebanon xalxal ‘to shake or move s.th.’ (Frayha 1973: 43) ~ Palest xalxal ‘to shake s.th.’ (Galilee; own obs.) ~ Djidjelli xalxal ‘heurter’ (Lentin 1959: 75) ~ Takrūna xalxol ‘secouer qq. ch. pour ébranler’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 1149) ~ Negev xilxāl ‘anklet of gold or silver’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi) ~ Tunis xalxal ‘il a secoué’ (D. Cohen 1975: 112) ~ Oman xalxal ‘wackelig machen’ (Reinhardt 1894: 255). 199

x-l-ʿ

ḫꜣʿ (Pyr) ‘throw, cast off (bonds), thrust, eject from, reject’; ‘werfen (auf den Boden, ins Wasser werfen), legen etwas an einer Stelle, fortwerfen’; ḫꜣʿw ‘discharges’ (Faulkner 1962: 183, 184; Ember 1930: 20; DLE I 346; Wb III 227) ~ Dem ḫꜣ(ʿ) ‘werfen, lassen, verlassen, aufgeben’ (DG 345) || Ar ‫ خ���ل‬xalaʿa ‘to pull off’ ‫ع‬ (Hava 1982: 181); ~ Egypt xalaʿ ‘to dislocate, unhinge, depose, strip’; ‘herausnehmen, entfernen’; xallaʿ ‘ausreißen’ (Spiro 1895: 180; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 120) ~ Iraq xalaʿ ‘to dislocate, wrench, remove, dismiss’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 143) ~ Lebanon xalaʿ ‘deboîter (un membre)’; xaleʿ ‘arracher’ (Feghali 1935: 43; 1938: 762) ~ Aleppo xalaʿ ‘arracher, déraciner, ébranler’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 212) ~ Palest mxallaʿ/mxalwaʿ ‘wackelig, aus den Fugen’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 19); xalaʿ ‘to lose one’s wits, to shake’ (Piamenta 2000: 205) ~ Ḥassāniyya xlaʿ ‘faire peur’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 113) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨xalaʿ⟩ ‘he took off his clothes’ (Corriente 1997: 163). 200

x-l-f¹

ḫrpw (Gr) ‘Ländereien’; ‘district (?), estate (?)’; ḫrp ‘controller, administrator’ (Wb III 329; cf. Faulkner 1962: 196) ~ Sab ḫlf ‘region, the vicinity of a town’ ‫� ف‬ ‫ م‬mixlāf, pl �‫�خ�ا ��لي� ف‬ ‫ م‬maxālīf ‘province’ (Hava � (Beeston et al., 1982: 60) || Ar �� ‫�خ�لا‬ 1982: 182); ~ Yemen mixlāf ‘province, region’ (Müller 2014: 91).

146 201

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

x-l-f²

(i) ḫpr (Pyr) ‘come into being, become, change, grow up, come to pass’; ‘werden, entstehen, geboren werden; sein, existieren’; ḫpr.w ‘die Kinder’ (Ember 1930: 75; Wb III 260, 263, 264; Caminos 1954: 574, 575; Calice 1936: 76; Albright 1918: 227); ḫpr mw n.w(=i҆fdw) mḥ 4 ‘das Wasser von vier Ellen entsteht …’ (Lepper 2008: ‫ف‬ 47) || Ar �‫ خ���ل‬xalafa ‘suivre, être derrière, succéder à quelqu’un’ (DAF I 618); ~ Sinai xilf ‘offspring’ (C. Bailey 1991: 436); mxaḷḷafāt ‘offsprings’ (Stewart 1990: 281) ~ Palest xallafat ‘gebären’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 19) ~ Lebanon xǝlf ‘fruits qui mûrissent, ou feuilles qui poussent’ (Denizeau 1960: 152) ~ Najd xalaf ‘to be different, contradictory’; ixtalaf galbih ‘his heart changed’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 364) ~ Negev xilf ‘in addition to’ (Henkin 2010: 274) ~ Kǝndērīb xalf ‘hinter’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 46) ~ Egypt xalaf ‘to change, alter, succeed’; xalf ‘behind’ (Spiro 1895: 180). (ii) ḫpr (Pyr) ‘govern, control, administer’; ‘etwas tun, etwas ausführen (was ‫خ فة‬ ‫ف‬ befohlen war)’ (Faulkner 1862: 196; Wb III 264) || Ar �����‫ ���لي‬xalīfah, pl ‫خ���ل���ا ء‬ xulafāʾ ‘Nachfolger, Stellvertreter, Abgeordneter, Herrscher’ (Wahrmund I 621); ~ Djidjelli xlīfa ‘successeur’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 270) ~ Morocco xlef ‘to succeed’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 197). 202

x-l-q

ẖꜣk (OK) [< *ḫlq] ‘missbilligen, feindlich sein (r gegen)’ (Hannig 2003: 997); ẖꜣkw-i҆b (MK) ‘disaffected person; rebel, perverse of heart, evil doer’; ‘listig, verschlagen sein, feindlich sein gegen; übelgesinnter, verschlagener; Trauer, Ärger’ (Wb III 363, 364; Faulkner 1962: 201; DLE I 380, 349) || Ar �‫ خ���ل ق‬xulq/xuluq, pl

‫أخ ق‬ � ‫ � ��لا‬ʾaxlāq ‘Zorn, Aufwallung, Tapferkeit’ (Wahrmund I 619);

~ Lebanon xelq ‘colère, mauvais caractère’: ṭeleʿ xelqu ‘il s’emporta’; txalleq ‘il se fâcha, il se mit en colère contre quelqu’un’ (M. & J. Feghali 1978: 25, fn 1); ʾexlāq ‘caractère (moral)’ (Feghali 1938: 557) ~ Syria xulqa ‘Gesicht’; mitxallaq ‘verärgert’ (Behnstedt 1997a: 118) ~ Aleppo xǝlq, pl xlāq ‘caractère, naturel, colère’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 214) ~ Palest xulq ‘Gewohnheit, Temperament’; mitxalliq ‘der einen veränderlichen Charakter hat’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 19) ~ E. Arabia axlāq/axlāk ‘morals, manners, customs’ (Holes 2001: 158) ~ Cypriot Ar xork [< *xulq] ‘anger, bad temper, bad humour’ (Borg 2004: 226) ~ Yemen xulug ‘natura, carattere’ (Rossi 1939: 222) ~ Rwala xalqeh ‘his heart, nature, solicitude’ (Musil 1928: 180) ~ Iraq xulug ‘mood, temper, disposition’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 144) ~ Ḥassāniyya xlāg ‘tempérament’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 142).

147

201. x-l-f ² – 205. x-m-r ¹

203

x-l-m

ẖnm ‘sich gesellen zu’; ẖnmw (LE) ‘associates’; ‘to join, unite with’; ẖnm ‘herd’ (Faulkner 1962: 193: 202; DLE I 383; Calice 1936: 189; Wb III 377; Caminos 1954: 578; Gardiner 1957: 585); ḫnms ‘friend’ (Faulkner 1962: 193) ~ Dem ẖnm ‘vereinigen mit, sich vereinigen mit’ (DG 384) || Ar ‫ خ��ا ل‬xālama ‘mit einem Freundschaft

‫م‬ ‫أ‬ schließen’; ‫ خ���ل‬xilm, pl ‫ � خ��لا‬ʾaxlām ‘Freund, Kamerad’ (Wahrmund I 619); ‫م‬

‫م‬

~ Sinai xulḅah ‘group’ (Stewart 1990: 281) ~ Egypt xulba, pl xulab ‘bundle, bunch’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 259). 204

x-l-y

ḫꜣj (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘die Masse eines Gebäudes, eines Gebietes’; ḫꜣ (Gr) ‘office, bureau’ (Wb III 223; Faulkner 1962: 183) ~ Sab ḫlt ‘a funeral cham‫ة‬ ber’ (Beeston et al., 1982: 60) || Ar �‫ خ���لو‬xalwah ‘recess, retired place; Temple (amongst Druzes); solitude’ (Hava 1982: 184); ~ N. Yemen xalwah ‘Zimmer’ (Behnstedt 1987: 250) ~ Aleppo xalwe ‘solitude, retraite religieuse (mslm.); cabine de ḥammān; lieu ou se retirent les Druzes pour leur culte’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 215) ~ Damascus axla ‘to vacate’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 255) ~ Egypt xilwa ‘inner private room’ (Spiro 1895: 183) ~ Palest xilwi ‘bâtiment ne contenant qu’une seule pièce, vide dans laquelle viennent prier les Druzes’ (Denizeau 1960: 153) ~ Tripoli (Lebanon) xǝli ‘se vider’ (El-Hajjé 1954: 66) ~ N. Yemen xalwah ‘Zimmer’ (Behnstedt 1987: 250) ~ Algeria xelwa ‘ermitage’; xāli ‘inhabité’ (Ben Sedira 1910: 195, 309) ~ Ḥassāniyya xle ‘vider (un lieu)’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 153). 205

x-m-r¹

‫أخ‬

Copt ϣⲉⲙⲏⲣ ‘leaven’ (Crum 1939: 567a) [< *ḫmr] ~ Heb ‫ ֲח ִמיר‬ḥămīr ‘leavened

bread’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 477) || Ar ‫ � ��مر‬ʾaxmara ‘to leaven (the dough)’ (Hava 1982: 184); ~ Palest xamīre ‘Sauerteig’ (Bauer 1957: 252) ~ Lebanon xamāyer ‘levure’ (Denizeau 1960: 154) ~ Kǝndērīb xamīre ‘Hefe’; xamīr ‘Sauerteig’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 47) ~ Egypt ximir/ixtamar ‘to leaven, rise (dough)’ (Spiro 1895: 182) ~ Ḥassāniyya xmīre ‘levain’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 90) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨xamīrah⟩ ‘leaven, yeast’ (Corriente 1997: 167).

148 206

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

x-m-r²

mḫr (OK) ‘die Kornspeicher; Vorratskammer’; mẖr (MK) ‘Speicher für Korn’; ‘granary, storehouse, barn’; ‘grenier’ (Wb II 132, 134; Edel 1955/1964: XXXVI; Calice 1936: 157; Ember 1930: 84; Faulkner 1962: 115; Meeks 1981: 171) ~ Akkad ḫamru ‘sacred precinct’ (CAD VI 70) || Saf ḫmr ‘hiding (act. part.)’ (Winnett & ‫خ‬ Lankester 1978: 635) ~ Ar ‫ ��مر‬xamara ‘to conceal, hide’; ‘bedecken, verdecken, verstecken’ (Hava 1982: 184; Wahrmund I 623); xumur ‘veils, scarves’ (Ambros 2004: 91); ~ Palest maxmara ‘Dörrplatz’; xamīr ‘das getrocknete Getreide’ (Dalman III 278) ~ S.E. Anatolia mxammoṛ ‘bedeckt’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 145) ~ Egypt xammaṛ ‘die Saat nach Bewässerung trocknen lassen’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 122). 207

x-m-l¹

‫خ‬

ḫml (MK) ‘be unable, not to do’ (Ember 1930: 58) || Ar ‫ ��م�ل‬xamila ‘ohnmächtig, schwach sein’ (Wahrmund I 625); Cf. Gk χᾰμηλός ‘diminutive, trifling’ (GEL 881).

~ Aleppo xǝmel, f xǝmle ‘mou, lâche, nonchalant; poltron, couard’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 218) ~ Lebanon xǝmel, yexmal ‘se trouver dans une situation difficile, avoir un accident, tomber dans le malheur’ (Denizeau 1960: 155). 208

x-m-l²

ḫm (MK) ‘know not, be ignorant of, ignorance, ignorant man’; i҆ḫmw ‘ignorant ones’; ‘der Unwissende, ungelehrt; Nichtskönner’; ḫmi҆ ‘be unable; not to do’ (Faulkner 1962: 190, 191, 29; Caminos 1954: 575); Wb III 280; Hannig 2003: 947) ~ Dem ḫm ‘nicht kennen’ (DG 359) || Ar ‫ خ��ا �م�ل‬xāmil ‘obscur, qui n’est pas célèbre (homme)’ (DAF 634); ~ Najd xamāl ‘stupidity, inaneness, dullness’ (Kurpershoek: 1999: 365) ~ Ḥaḍramawt/Daθīna xāmil/xāmin ‘personne obscure, sans renom’ (sc. alðikr) (Landberg 1901: 1760; 1920: 649) ~ Yemen xāmul ‘rude (tongue)’ (Piamenta 1990: 138) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨yanxamal, anxamal⟩ ‘to be obscure or unknown’ (Corriente 1997: 167).

206. x-m-r ² – 211. x-n-z-r

209

149

x-m-m¹

ḫnm (MK) ‘smell odours’; ‘riechen, einatmen’; ḫnmw ‘smell’; ‘der Geruch’ (Ember 1930: 82; Faulkner 1962: 192, 193; Wb III 292, 293; Caminos 1954: 575) ~ Dem ḫnm ‘riechen’ (DG 362) ~ Copt ϣⲱⲗⲙ ‘to smell (intr.)’ (Crum 1939: 559b) ّ ‫خ‬ || Ar �‫ ��م� ن‬xaman ‘stink’ (Hava 1982: 186); � �‫ خ‬xamma ‘verdorben sein und stinken ‫م‬ (Fleisch, Wasser, Milch vom Schlauch)’ (Wahrmund I 622); ~ Negev al-mayyih l-wāgfih bitximm ‘stagnant water stinks’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi) ~ Aleppo xamm ‘exhaler une odeur de relent, sentir légèrement mauvais, commencer à se gâter (viande, crue ou cuite, aliment)’; xmām ‘articles de commerce de qualité inférieur, camelote’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 218) ~ Lebanon xamxam ‘être gâté, fétide (mets, eau)’ (Denizeau 1960: 154) ~ Palest xāmme ‘sauerei’ (Bauer 1957: 252); bitximm ‘stinkt’; xamāxīm ‘verdorbene Speisereste’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 20) ~ Palmyra xām ‘étoffe de coton écru’ (Cantineau 1934 II 32) ~ Iraq xamxam ‘to become spoiled, tainted’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 145) ~ Kǝndērīb (ǝl-bǝrġǝl) txǝmm ‘die Weizengrütze gärt, wird sauer’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 47) ~ Marazig xamm ‘se gâter (viande)’ (Boris 1958: 156) ~ Mzāb xamxām, pl xamxāmīn ‘qui mange n’importe quoi’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 110). 210

x-m-m²

ḫmw (Pyr) [< *ḫmm] ‘dirt, dust’; ‘der Staub, der bei der Arbeit, beim Gehen aufwirbelt’ (Ember 1930: 58; Faulkner 1962: 190; Wb III 277; Calice 1936: 103; Albright 1918: 246, fn 2); ḫmy ‘(?) Sandfloh (Phlebotomus papatasii); (?) Sandmücke’ (Hannig 1995: 600); ḫm ‘demolish buildings’ (Faulkner 1962: 191) ّ ~ Akkad ḫummētu ‘sweepings’ (CAD VI 235) || Ar � �‫ خ‬xamma ‘to sweep a house’ ‫م‬ (Hava 1982: 184); ~ Khābūra xmām ‘sweepings’ (Brockett 1985: 94) ~ E. Arabia xamma/xmām ‘(household) sweepings, (farm) rubbish, debris’; xamxam ‘sweep a lot, gobble food up’ (Holes 2001: 160). 211

x-n-z-r

ḫḏr (LE) [*ḫizirta/ḫazirta/ḫuzirta] ‘Wildschwein’; ‘sow, pig, Demon (f); the sow’ (Helck 1971: 505; Hoch 1994: 254; DLE I 378) || Akkad ḫuzīru ‘pig’; ḫuzirtu ‘sow’ (CDA 123) ~ Heb ‫ ֲחזִ יר‬xăzīr ‘swine, boar’ (BDB 306) || Ar ‫ خ���ن�ز ي�ر‬xinzīr, pl ‫خ ن �ز‬ ‫ ����ا ي�ر‬xanāzīr ‘pig’ (Hava 1982: 187);

150

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

~ Aleppo xanzīr, pl xnēzīr ‘sanglier’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 219) ~ Çukurova xanzīr, pl xanēzīr ‘Schwein’ (Procházka 2002: 317) ~ Palest xanzīr, pl xanāzīr ‘Schwein’ (Bauer 1957: 269) ~ Egypt xanzīr, pl xanazīr ‘pig’ (Spiro 1895: 150). 212

x-n-s

ḫnz (Pyr) ‘traverse region’; ‘durchziehen, durchfahren’; Ḫnsw ‘moon-god ّ‫�ن‬ Khons’ (Faulkner 1962: 193; Wb III 299) || Ar ‫ خ����س‬xunnas ‘Planeten (besonders Venus und Merkur)’; ‘the five stars, Saturn, Jupiter, Mars, Venus and Mercury’ (Wahrmund I 628; Lane 816). 213

x-n-f-s

ʿpšꜣy (NK) ‘Käfer; Kakerlake (Blatta orientalis)’; ‘beetle; grasshopper’ (Wb I 181; Hannig 1995: 138; DLE I 65; Hoch 1994: 66) ~ Copt ⲉⲡϣⲉ ‘beetle’ (Černý 1976: ‫خ ف‬ 37) ~ Heb ‫ּפּוׁשית‬ ִ ‫ ִח‬ḥippūšīt ‘beetle’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 459) || Ar ‫ � ن������س�ا ء‬xunfusāʾ, ‫خ� ن �ف‬ pl ‫ ���ا ��س‬xanāfis ‘schwarzer Mistkäfer’ (Wahrmund I 629); ~ E. Arabia xanfūs, pl xanāfis ‘beetle’ (Holes 2001: 163) ~ Yemen xanfsūdeh ‘scarafaggio’ (Rossi 1939: 162) ~ Iraq xunfisān (coll.) ‘beetles’ (Woodhead & Beene 197: 147) ~ Damascus xǝnǝfse, pl xanāfes ‘beetle’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 20) ~ Lebanon xénefse, pl xnāfes ‘scarabée’ (Feghali 1938: 763) ~ Palest xunfse, pl xanāfis ‘Aaskäfer, großer schwarzer Käfer’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 20) ~ Egypt xunfisa ‘black beetle’ (Spiro 1895: 183) ~ Morocco xenfusa, pl xnafes ‘beetle’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 20) ~ Ḥassāniyya xanvūs ‘blatte (coll.)’ (TaineCheikh 1990: 31) ~ Malta ⟨ħanfusa, pl ħniefes⟩ ‘beetle’ (Aquilina 1987: 496). 214

x-w-t

ḫꜣwt (LE) ‘rasend, in Verzüchung sein, der Rasende’ (Wb III 226/9–10) ~ Copt ϣⲟⲉⲓⲧ ‘be possessed, frenzied’; ⲉϣⲟⲉⲓⲧ ‘be inspired, possessed’ (Crum ‫ خ� ث‬xawiθa ‘timbré, fou’ (Dozy I 410); � ‫ خ��ا ت‬xāta ‘närrisch 1939: 590a) || Ar � ‫و‬ werden’ (Wahrmund I 631); ~ Aleppo axwat, f xawta/xōta, pl xōtān ‘idiot, hébété’ (Barthélemy 1935– 54: 221) ~ Lebanon xiwit ‘he went mad, he lost his mind’ (Frayha 1973: 48) ~ Al-Balqāʾ nxawaθ ‘to go out of one’s senses’ (Palva 1992: 169) ~ Palest axwaθ, f xōθa, pl xūθ ‘dumm, töricht’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 20); txawwaθ ‘he pretended to be stupid’ (own obs.) ~ Negev minxiwiθ ‘having become dizzy’ (Blanc 1970:

212. x-n-s – 215. x-w-y ¹

151

139) ~ Egypt xawat ‘to annoy, bother, disturb’ (Spiro 1895: 184) ~ Bišmizzīn xiwit ‘aufgeregt, verrückt machen’ (Jiha 1964: 70, fn 10) ~ Baskinta axwit, f xawta ‘mad’ (Abu-Haidar 1979: 61, 12) ~ Palmyra axwaθ, f xūθīn/xūθēn, f xōθe, pl xōθēt ‘sourd’ (Cantineau 1934 II 5) ~ Suxne axwaθ ‘schwerhörig’ (Behnstedt 1994: 252) ~ Mosul ⟨axwaθ, f xōθa⟩ ‘out of one’s senses’ (Al-Bakrī 1972: 41). 215

x-w-y¹

ḫw/ḫwi (Pyr) ‘to protect, exclude oneself from quarrels; set aside, prevent; avoid, safeguard’; ‘schützen, behüten, regieren’; ḫw.(t) ‘protection’; ḫwt ‘sanctuary’; ‘Schutz, Schützerin’; ḫyt ‘shelter’; ḫwt ‘sanctuary’; ḫjj ‘Kind, Bursche’; ḫw.tjw ‘Schützgötter (besonders des Osiris)’; ẖ.t ‘Körperschaft (der Götterneunheit und ähnlich)’ (Faulkner 1962: 185, 186; Breasted 1930: 554; DLE I 353; Sethe 1962: 164; Wb III 244–246, 271, 357; Hannig 1995: 588); anthroponyms: Ḫwj (schöner Name) (Goedicke 1967: 91); Khu ‘protected’ (BM EA 571); Ḫw( j)wj-Ptḥ ‘möge Ptah mich schützen’; Ḫw( j)-wj-Rʿ.w ‘möge Re mich schützen’ (anthroponyms; Scheele-Schweitzer 2014: 590); Ḫw-Tꜣ-mḥw ‘Der Unterägypten beschützt’ (Leitz 2002: 663) ~ Dem ḫwj ‘schützen’ (DG 352) ~ Akkad aḫu ‘(real) brother; colleague, fellow, associate (as term for a specific social, political, legal, or emotional relationship)’ ~ aḫû (adj.) ‘strange (person), foreigner, outsider, alien (object)’ (CAD I/1: 195, 210) ~ aḫḫūtu (adj.) ‘fraternity’ (Parpola 2007: 193) ~ aḫītu ‘circle of acquaintances’ ~ aḫātūtu ‘adoptee’ (M. Cohen 2011: 2, 3) || Tham ʾx ‘brother’ (Winnett & Reed‫ أ‬1970: 193) ~ Saf twḫy ‘to be considered a brother’ (Al-Jallad 2015: 198) ~ Ar ‫ � خ��ا‬ʾaxā ‘être frère de quelqu’un, se montrer frère’ = vulg. wāxā; xayy ‘brother, friend, companion, match’ (DAF 17; Hava 1982: 5); cf. x-y-y; The semantics of the Semitic lexeme designating ‘brotherhood’ in Old Egyptian is closely reminiscent of Arabic usage among Bedouin speakers. For further detail, see Borg (2019b).

~ Rwala xu ‘protector’: xu quṭne ‘protector of the Qutne’; ax ‘the clan’s brother to whom it pays (yaxīh) an annual sum’; xūwa/xwa ‘tax paid by weaker tribes to a stronger one; tax for protection’; xāwi (n) ‘fellow traveller’; ‘a comrade who offers protection to a stranger’ (Musil 1928: 600, 280, 136, 59, 30, 440) ~ Najd ixu ‘brother’; xāwih ‘a Bedouin institution whereby a weak tribe seeks the protection of a stronger tribe through the payment of a regular tax in the form of camels, sheep, butter etc.’; xawiy ‘comrade, road companion, fellow traveller’ (Sowayan 1992: 245) ~ Aleppo xāwa ‘traîter comme un frère ou une sœur, fraterniser avec (qqn)’ [Arabes nomades]; xuwwe ‘alliance fraternelle, pacte de fraternité conclu à la porte de la Caaba (xuwwe ʿala bāb ǝl-kaʿbe (Mslm);

152

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

xawī ‘allié, coalisé [Arabes nomades]’; xuwwe ‘tribut imposé par les Arabes nomades aux populations sedentaires en échange de la protection accordée par eux à leurs propriétés’; xuwwe ‘tribut imposé par les Arabes nomades aux populations sedentaires en échange de la protection accordée par eux à leurs propriétés’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 4, 223–4) ~ Iraq xuwa ‘to extort money from’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 149); xāwa ‘protection, protection money’; xūya (familiar form of address): pal, buddy, friend’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 7) ~ S.E. Anatolia xwa bǝxwá ‘einander’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 146) ~ Najd xawiyy ‘Verbündeter’ (Socin 1901 III 263); xāwa ‘to accompany s.o. on a journey, a raid’; xuwwah ‘a small group of three to six men who go on a plundering expedition, any small group of travel companions who eat and sleep together; brotherhood, fraternity’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 365) ~ Oman xweyye, pl xweyyāt ‘Schwester’ (Reinhardt 1894: 68) ~ ʿAnazeh txāwa ‘fraterniser’; xawiyya ‘sœur’ (Landberg 1940: 18) ~ Damascus ʾuxuwwe ‘brotherhood’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 30) ~ Palmyra xawīk ‘ton petit frère’ (Cantineau 1934 I 181) ~ Lebanon wāxa ‘traiter quelqu’un comme un frère’ (Denizeau 1960: 550); xawayyāti (pl) ‘égaux’ (Feghali 1933: 56) ~ Palest axawiyye ‘Bruderschaft, Verein’, (abstrakt) xuwwe [uxuwwe]; xāwa ‘Bruderschaft schließen’; txāwa ‘sich verbrüdern’; mxāwā(t) ‘Verbrüderung’ (Bauer 1957: 67, 329); xāwate ‘sie verschwisterte sich mit ihm’ (Schmidt & Kahle 1918 I 269) ~ Egypt xāwa ‘to be intimate with’; ʾitxāwa ‘to have a close relationship with each other’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 270) ~ Marazig xwāya ‘proche parenté (de sang)’ (Boris 1958: 6) ~ Morocco xāwa ‘traiter qqn en frère’; xāwa bīn ‘faire fraterniser deux personnes, les faire vivre en harmonie’ (Prémare 179, 180) ~ Cherchell xu ‘frère’ (Grand’Henry 1972: 87) ~ Ḥassāniyya xūwe ‘fraternité’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 71). 216

x-w-y²

šwꜣ (Pyr) ‘poor’; šw ‘be empty, lacking, devoid; needy man’; ‘leer sein, leer; leer machen, entleeren’; šwt ‘emptiness’; šꜣ.t ‘die Untiefe eines Gewässers; ein innerer Körperteil des Menschen’ (Ember 1930: 42; Albright 1918: 248; Faulkner 1962: 263; Wb IV 426, 428, 401, 402) ~ Dem šw ‘leermachen, leer’ (DG 495) ~ Copt ⲱⲟⲩⲉⲓⲧ ‘to empty’ (Crum 1939: 602b); [< *ḫwy; cf. wḫꜣ ‘throw off earth, etc. from oneself, empty out, shake out’; ‘ausleeren’ (Faulkner 1962: 67; Wb I ‫خ‬ 353)] || Ar ‫ �و��ي‬xawiya ‘être vide, désert, inhabité (se dit d’une maison); avoir le ventre vide et être pressé par la faim (se dit d’une accouchée quand elle n’a pas encore pris de nourriture depuis ses couches; creuser un trou en terre …)’; xawāyah ‘cavité (dans le corps humain)’; xawiyyah ‘aliment qu’on prépare et fait prendre à l’accouchée’; xawāʾ ‘emptiness of the belly, gap, interstice; to bring forth (woman)’ (DAF I 651, 652; Hava 1982: 190); cf. 793. w-x-y²;

216. x-w-y ² – 217. x-y-l

153

~ Rwala ayyām al-xawa‌ʾ ‘years of want’ (Musil 1928: 16) ~ Lebanon xewa ‘être troué, transpercé’ (Denizeau 1960: 158) ~ Mosul xiyyū ‘inner part, intention’ (Al-Bakrī 1972: 203) ~ Daθīna ⟨xāwī⟩/⟨xawyān⟩ ‘qui a le ventre vide)’ (GD 662) ~ Yemen axwa ‘to make desolate’ (Piamenta 1990: 140) ~ Egypt xiwi ‘to become empty’; xawyān ‘hungry’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 270); xāwya, pl xuwyān ‘Höhle’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 127) ~ Tunis xwa/xawwa ‘il a vidé’ (D. Cohen 1975: 105, 117) ~ Algeria xayy ‘faim’ (Lentin 1959: 77) ~ Djidjelli xwa ‘fait d’avoir faim’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 222) ~ Morocco xwa, ixwa ‘devenir vide, se vider’; xwa, ixwi ‘rendre vide, vider’; xwa ‘éspace vide, cavité’; xawya ‘état de vacuité’: X ʿaqlo xāwi ‘X a la cervelle vide’ (Prèmare 177–179); xewya ‘gap’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 81) ~ Ḥassāniyya xwe, yǝxwi ‘vider (une arme)’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 153) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨yaxwā, xawwā⟩ ‘to be empty’ (Corriente 1997: 169). Ghomara (Berber) xwa ‘to be empty’ (Mourigh 2016: 434).

ḫi҆ (Pyr) ‘placenta (?), (be a) child’ (Faulkner 1962: 182; Ember 1930: 81); cf. šw (Pyr) ‘leer sein’ [< *ḫw] (Wb IV 426); ḫt (Pyr) ‘Leib, Bauch, Mutterleib; zur Welt ‫خ‬ kommen’ (Wb III 356) ~ Dem ḫj ‘das Kind’ (DG 349) || Ar ‫ �و��ي‬xawiya ‘avoir le ventre vide et ëtre pressé par la faim (se dit d’une accouchée quand elle n’a pas encore pris de nourriture depuis ses couches; xawwā ‘Geburtshilfe leisten’; xawāyah ‘cavité (dans le corps humain)’; xawāt ‘espace entre le pis et le vagin (chez les animaux)’; xawāʾ ‘leeren Bauch haben, nicht schwanger sein (Frau), oder eben geboren haben’ (DAF I 651, 652; Wahrmund I 634); cf. 793. w-x-y²; ~ Takrūna xwāt ‘placenta, délivre’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 1958) ~ Marazig xawe ‘maigrir, avoir le ventre creux’ (Boris 1958: 160) ~ Morocco xwātāt ‘arrièrefaix’ (membranes et placenta après l’accouchement)’ (Prémare IV 182) ~ Najd xwa ‘a piece of leather which is laid in a hollow that has been dug in the ground and in which water is poured for camels to drink’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 366). 217

x-y-l

śḫꜣ (Pyr) [< *s-ḫl] ‘to remember, call to mind, think about, mention’; śḫꜣw ‘remembrance, memory’; ‘sich erinnern, gedenken’ (Ember 1914: 87; Faulkner 1962: 240; Wb III 232) || Ar ‫ خ��ا ل‬xāla ‘sich vorstellen oder einbilden’ (Wahrmund I 637–8); ~ Damascus xayāl/taxayyol ‘imagination’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 122) ~ Palest quwwet et-taxayyul ‘Einbildungskraft’ (Bauer 1957: 85) ~ Najd xayyal ‘to imagine, think, believe’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 366) ~ Rwala axīleh ‘I judge it’ (Musil 1928: 146) ~ Egypt itxāyil ‘to fancy’ (Spiro 1895: 185) ~ Ḥassāniyya txayyel ‘imaginer’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 82) ~ Malta ⟨stħajjel, jistħajjel⟩ ‘to imagine’ (Aquilina 1990: 1363).

154 218

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

x-y-y

ḫy (ḫw) ‘Kind’ (Hannig & Vomberg 1999: 577); ḫjj (BD) ‘Kind, ḫjj (BD) ‘Kind, Bursche’; ḫ.t ‘kleines Mädchen’ (Wb III 217, 357; Sethe 1962: 164) ~ Dem ḫj ‘das ّ‫خ‬ Kind’ (DG 349) || Ar ‫ ���ي‬xayy ‘brother, friend, companion, match’ (Hava 1982: 5); ~ Sinai axayy ‘little brother’ [term also used for one who is not a brother] (Stewart 1990: 195) ~ Aleppo xayy ‘ami, camarade’; xuwwe ‘alliance fraternelle, pacte de fraternité conclu à la porte de la Caaba – xuwwe ʿala bāb ǝl-kaʿbe (Mslm) – tribut imposé par les Arabes nomades aux populations sedentaires en échange de la protection accordée par eux à leurs propriétés’; xawī ‘allié, coalisé [Arabes nomades]’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 4, 223–4) ~ Lebanon xawayyāti (pl) ‘égaux’ (Feghali 1933: 56) ~ Ḥama xayyo ‘die Anrede an einem Mann einleitend, auch die einer Mutter an ihren Sohn’ (Lewin 1966: 206) ~ Mharde xayy ‘Bruder’: xayye ‘mein Bruder’ (Yoseph 2012: 149) ~ Hatāy xayy ‘Bruder’ (Arnold 1998: 314) ~ Çukurova xayy/xayyt- ‘id.’ (Procházka 2002: 127) ~ Lebanon xayyu ‘son frère’ (Feghali 1938: 677) ~ Egypt xayy ‘Brüderchen’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 2, 127) ~ Morocco xeyy ‘petit frère, frérot’; xōya ‘mon frère (à moi)’ (Prémare 179, 180) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨uxuwwah⟩ ‘brotherhood’ (Corriente 1997: 7). D 219

d-b-b

db(y) (Pyr) ‘hippopotamus’; ‘das Nilpferd’ (Faulkner 1962: 311; DLE II 243, 244; ّ Wb V 433; Goldwasser 2002: 84) ~ Akkad dabû ‘bear’ (CAD III 17) || Ar �‫د ب‬

‫أ‬

‫ّة‬

‫ّة‬

ّ

dubb, pl �‫ � د ب�ا ب‬ʾadbāb/ ���‫ د ب‬dibbah ‘bear’; ���‫ د ا ب‬dābbah, pl �‫ د وا ب‬dawābb ‘beast of burden’ (Hava 1982: 194); ~ Oman dābbe ‘Tier’ (Reinhardt 1895: 44) ~ Damascus dabbe, pl dawābb ‘bêtes de la ferme en général (âne, bœuf, cheval, chèvre, poule)’; dǝbb, pl dǝbab ‘bear’ (Denizeau 1960: 160; Stowasser & Ani 1964: 19) ~ Rwala dābb ‘any kind of long snake’ (Musil 1928: 317) ~ Iraq dābba, pl dawābb ‘beast’; dibba, pl dibaba/ dbāb ‘bear’ (Clarity et al., 1964: 16) ~ Aleppo dǝbb, pl dǝbab ‘ours’; dabbe, pl dawāb ‘bête de somme (: cheval, âne, mulet; monture, bête de selle’; dabbābāt ‘quadrupèdes’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 229) ~ Palmyra dēbbe, pl dawēb ‘animal domestique’ (Cantineau 1934 II 62) ~ Lebanon dibb ‘bear’ (Nasr 1966: 166) ~ Palest dubb/dibb, pl dbāb ‘Bär’ (Bauer 1957: 41) ~ Al-Balqāʾ dabība ‘animal, mount’ (Palva 1992: 169) ~ Egypt dibb/dibba, pl dibab ‘bear’ (Spiro 1895: 190)

218. x-y-y – 222. d-b-l ²

155

~ Djidjelli dābb ‘bête de somme’; dābba ‘ânesse’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 262, 264) ~ Malta ⟨debba⟩ ‘cavalla’ (Vassalli 1796: 154). 220

d-b-r¹

dbꜣ (OK) ‘umfallen (von Personen)’; ‘to die’ (Wb V 435; Ember 1930: 15; DLE II 267; Hannig 1995: 1003) ~ Akkad dibīru ‘pestilence’ (M. Cohen 2011: 154) ~ Heb ‫ ֶּד ֶבר‬deber ‘pestilence’ (BDB 184) || Ar ‫ د ب�ر‬dabara ‘sterben’ (Wahrmund I 645); ~ Palest dabar ‘blessure’ (Denizeau 1960: 161) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨yudbir⟩ ‘to take a turn for the worse’ (Corriente 1997: 173). 221

d-b-l¹

dbn.t (LE) ‘Haarflechte, besonders die des Kindes (Seitenzopf); flechten’; nbd.t ‘Haarflechte, Flechtwerk, Geflochtenes (Korb, Sieb)’ (Wb V 438; II 246) ~ Ge dabala ‘bring together, gather, make braids, plait’ (Leslau 1987: 120) || Ar ‫د ب�ل‬ dabala aš-šayʾa ‘to collect a.th. with the fingers’; ‘zusammenbringen, sammeln’ (Lisān XI 234; Lane 849; Hava 1982: 196; Wahrmund I 646); cf. 622. l-b-d¹. 222

d-b-l²

dbn (Pyr) ‘go round a place’; ‘der Ring, der Kreis; Umkreis von etwas (beim Messen); kreisförmiges Feldstück’; dbnw ‘der Umkreis des Himmels’; dbnt ‘circuit of ocean’; dbnw ‘circumference of sky’ (Faulkner 1962: 311; Wb V 436): Ḥry-i҆b-dbn.f ‘Der inmitten seines Kreises ist’ (Leitz 2002: 355) ~ Amh däbäläl ‫ة‬ ‘round (like a pumpkin)’ (Kane 1990: 1777) || Ar ��‫ د ب��ل‬dablah, pl ‫ د ب�ل‬dabal ‘grosser gerundeter Bissen, Konfekt etc.’ (Wahrmund I 646); ~ E. Arabia dibla ‘(wedding) ring’ (Holes 2001: 169) ~ Palest dible ‘Ring ohne Stein, Ehering’ (Bauer 1957: 245, 83) ~ Baghdad daʿbal ‘he rolled’ (Blanc 1964: 110) ~ Kfarʿabīda daʿbel ‘il arrondit’ (M. Feghali 1919: 22) [< *dbl] ~ Lebanon daʿbūl ‘rond arrondit’; daʿbūle ‘petite pierre ronde’ (Denizeau 1960: 169) ~ Negev ðablih, pl -āt ‘simple thin ring worn by women’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi) ~ Egypt dibla, pl dibal ‘betrothal ring’ (Spiro 1895: 192) ~ Algeria dbūl ‘ruban’ (Lentin 1959: 79) ~ Ḥaḍramawt dubla/dubna ‘boulette d’une chose mangeable’ (Landberg 1901: 1760) ~ Khābūra bedle ‘a nose ring’; deble ‘a plain finger-ring’ (Brockett 1985: 55, 96) ~ Ḥassāniyya bedle ‘boucle d’oreille’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 32).

156 223

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

d-b-l³

dbn (LE) ‘dung’ (DLE II 245) ~ Heb ‫ ּד ֶֹמן‬dōmen ‘dung’ (BDB 199; 2 Kings IX 37) || ‫ن‬ Ar ‫ د ب�ل‬dabala/‫ د �م�ل‬damala ‘to manure’; �‫ د �م� ن‬dimn/� ‫ د �م�ا‬damān ‘manure’ (Hava 1982: 196, 216, 217); ~ Ḥaḍramawt dmn/dml ‘fumer la terre, engraisser’ (Landberg 1901: 1760) ~ N. Yemen daman ‘düngen’; dimin ‘Mist’ (Behnstedt 1992: 389) ~ Najd damman ‘to cover with droppings’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 360) ~ Rwala dimne, pl demān ‘dry camel’s manure’ (Musil 1928: 78, 126) ~ Palest damal ‘couvrir, enfouir sous terre; tas de fumier’; dimna ‘tas de fumier’ (Denizeau 1960: 177, 178) ~ Malta ⟨demel⟩ ‘sterco, concime’ (Vassalli 1796: 158). 224

d-ǧ-ǧ

dgyt (MK) ‘bird, bat’; ‘als Name eines kleinen Vogels’ (Faulkner 1962: 317; Wb V ‫ة‬ 499) ~ Ḥar deyāyeh ‘chicken’ (Johnstone 1977: 157) || Ar ���‫ د ج��ا ج‬daǧāǧah ‘a fowl’ (Hava 1982: 197); ~ Lebanon dǝǧǧ ‘pinson’ (Denizeau 1960: 163) ~ Yemen mdaǧǧ ‘pollaio’ (Rossi 1939: 228) ~ Mosul daǧ ‘chicks’ (Al-Bakrī 1972: 214) ~ Oman dgāge/ digāge, pl degāgāt, coll. dgāg ‘Huhn’ (Reinhardt 1894: 52, 59, 85); dayāy/daǧāy ‘chicken’ (Eades 2011: 31) ~ Iraq diǧāǧ (coll.) ‘chickens’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 66) ~ Egypt gidāda ‘Huhn’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 57). 225

d-ǧ-y

dgj (MK) ‘to hide’; ‘sich verstecken, verborgen sein’ (Faulkner 1962: 316; Wb V 496; Calice 1936: 88) || Ar ‫ د ج��ا‬daǧā ‘bedecken, einhüllen’ (Wahrmund I 649); ~ Najd diǧa ‘darkness, darkness of night’ (Kurpershoek 1994: 258) ~ Palest diǧā ‘darkness’ (Saarisalo 1933: I 7) ~ Daθīna ⟨daǧǧ/daǧǧā⟩ ‘passer la nuit hors de la maison, découcher (courant chez les Bédouins d’el-Ḥoǧarieh, Yeman)’ (GD 703). 226

d-ḥ-m

ḥdb (MK) ‘overthrow’; ‘niederwerfen, unterwerfen; zu Boden geworfen sein, daliegen (von den besiegten Feinden)’ (Faulkner 1962: 181; Wb III 205; Calice � ‫ د‬daḥama ‘heftig stoßen’ (Wahrmund I 651); 1936: 181) || Ar �‫ح‬

‫م‬

223. d-b-l ³ – 229. d- ʿ -s

157

~ Najd daḥam ‘to push, shove, hustle’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 357) ~ Daθīna ⟨daḥmal⟩ ‘faire rouler par terre; démolir’ (GD 713) ~ Damascus zdaḥam ‘to push’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 183) ~ Egypt daḥmas ‘auf der Erde hier und her scheuern’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 130) ~ Marazig daḥam ‘faire des efforts de l’accouchement’ (Boris 1958: 166). 227

d-ḥ-w

ḥdy (LE) ‘umspannen; fliegen; ausbreiten (von Himmel)’ (Wb III 205; Calice 1936: 75) ~ Heb ‫ ָּד ָחה‬dāḥā ‘to push, thrust’ (BDB 190) || Ar ‫ د ح�ا‬daḥā ‘poussant violemment en portant à quelqu’un un coup par derrière’ (DAF I 676); ~ Daθīna ⟨daḥā⟩ ‘étendre’ (GD 715) ~ Aleppo daḥa ‘faire disparaître; dissuader qqn de qqc.’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 232) ~ Marazig dḥe ‘écarter, enlever de sa place pour s’y mettre’ (Boris 1958: 166) ~ Morocco dḥa ‘pousser pour faire entrer, introduire, fourrer, enfoncer’ (Prémare IV 230) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨daḥani⟩ ‘he pushed me’ (Corriente 1997: 174). 228

d-r-ǧ

dgꜣ (NK) ‘walk’; ‘schreiten’ (Wb V 631; Faulkner 1962: 316; Calice 1936: 43) ~ Akkad daraggu ‘path’ (CAD III 108) ~ Heb ‫ ָּד ַרג‬dārag ‘to leap, step’ (M. Jastrow ‫ق‬ 1886: 320) || Ar ‫ د ر ج‬daraǧa ‘schreiten, vorwärtsschreiten, gehen’; �‫ د ر‬daraqa

�

‘eilen’ (Wahrmund I 655, 658); ~ Najd daraǧ ‘to move, go; to walk; to plod, trudge along’ (Musil 1928: 76) ~ Negev al-walad ṣār yudruǧ ‘the child has begun to walk’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi) ~ Damascus daraže daraže ‘step by step’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 224) ~ Marazig darraž ‘ménager (le troupeau), le faire avancer par petites étapes’ (Boris 1958: 168) ~ Egypt dārig ‘current, usual’ (Spiro 1895: 195) ~ Ḥama ddarraž ‘gehen, schreiten’ (Littmann 1924: 24) ~ Aleppo daraǧ, pl drāǧ/drūǧāt ‘escalier’; daraǧ ‘passer dans l’usage (: coutume)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 234, 235) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨daraǧ⟩ ‘to let in’ (Corriente 1997: 176). 229

d-ʿ-s

tḥs (LE) ‘zermalmen, zermalmt sein’; ‘crush, pulverize’ (Wb V 323; Hannig 1995: 938; Hoch 1994: 361) || Ar ‫ د �ع��س‬daʿasa ‘tread upon, press, repel’ (Hava 1982: 206);

158

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

~ Aleppo daʿas ‘fouler aux pieds (qqn, qqe)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 240) ~ E. Arabia diʿas ‘shove, ram’; daḥas ‘fill’ (Holes 2001: 170, 176) ~ Iraq diʿas ‘run over, knock’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 158) ~ Palest daʿas/dās ‘treten’ (Bauer 1957: 305) ~ Egypt daʿas ‘press, cram, cause to be crowded’ (Spiro 1895: 199). 230

d-f-f¹

dp.w (Pyr) ‘Schiff, Steuerruder’; dpy ‘Ruderführer (im Sonnenschiff)’ (Wb V 446, 447; Hannig 1995: 977); dpt ‘ship’; dpt nṯr ‘sacred bark’; dpt ‘build, construct boats’; ‘Schiff anfertigen’; iry dpt ‘keeper of the boat’ (Faulkner 1962: 312; Wb V 44 6; Jones 1988: 66); dpy ‘vessel’ (DLE I 246); [cf. Dem ḏp ‘Schale’ (DG 677) ~ Copt ϫⲟⲡ ‘dish, bowl’ (Crum 1939: 778a)] ~ Sumer dub ‘document, plate’ (Halloran 2006: 47) ~ Ugar db ‘threshold’ (DUL 260) ~ Akkad dappu ‘(wooden) board, (metal) plate’ (CAD III 106) ~ Heb ‫ ַּדף‬dap(p) ‘board, plank’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 317) ~ Aram dappā ‘column, board’ (Sokoloff 2002: 153) ~ Syr dappā ‘wooden board, pole, plank, table, writing tablet, page’ (Sokoloff 2009: 316); dappē d-elāfe ‘oars’ (CSD 96) ~ Ge dafdafa ‘to cover withّ boards, plas‫فة‬ ter’ (Leslau 1987: 124) ~ Soq defeh ‘côté’ (Leslau 1938: 133) || Ar ��� ‫ د‬daffah ‘side, flank, shutter, board, plank, leaf of a door; rudder (Syrian usage)’; ‘Türflügel, Steuerruder’ (Hava 1982: 209; Wahrmund I 671); Afar/Saho dibánā ‘Ruder’ (Reinisch 1893: 5).

~ Oman daffa (= sukkān) ‘rudder’ (Agius 2005: 136; 2019: 235, 245) ~ Iraq daffa, pl -āt ‘rudder (of a boat or plane)’; daffat il-ḥukum ‘the helm of government’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 161) ~ Rwala daffa ‘shoulder-blade’ (Musil 1928: 115, fn 7) ~ Aleppo daffe, pl -āt ‘morceau de planche de sapin; gouvernail’; daffaf ‘couvrir de planches’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 243); daff, pl dfūf ‘hohe Bänke’ (Dalman V 264) ~ Damascus daffe, pl -āt ‘rudder’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 197) ~ Lebanon daffe ‘plank of wood used in construction’; ‘planche’ (Feghali 1938: 766) ~ Kfarʿabīda daffe ‘gouvernail’ (Feghali 1919: 69, fn 2) ~ Palest deffe ‘das schmale Steuerruder’ (Dalman VI 352); dafft el-bāb ‘Torflügel’ (Schmidt & Kahle 1918 I 278; Dalman VII 56) ~ S.E. Anatolia daffe ‘Webkamm’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 156) ~ Egypt daffa, pl -āt/difaf ‘helm, rudder and tiller’; ʿamūd daffa ‘rudder stock’; daffāf ‘Steuermann’ (Hinds & Badawi 1986: 294; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 136) ~ Takrūna daffǝt bāb ‘une porte qui n’est plus qu’un assemblage délabré’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 1289) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨duffah⟩ ‘leaf of a door’ (Corriente 1997: 181). The specific correlation between Old Egyptian and Arabic here rests on the fact that both languages link this lexeme to a maritime semantic context.

230. d-f-f ¹ – 234. d-q-r ²

231

d-f-f²

159

ّ‫ف‬

wdf (OK) ‘zögern, langsam sein, trödeln’ (Wb I 388; Calice 1936: 28) || Ar �� ‫د‬ daffa ‘langsam einherschreiten’ (Wahrmund I 668); ~ Daθīna ⟨diffah⟩ ‘entreprise, tâche’ (GD 807) ~ Malta ⟨deffa⟩ ‘the most difficult part of the work’ (Aquilina 1987: 219). 232

d-f-y

fd (Gr) ‘to sweat’; fd.t ‘sweat’; ‘Schweiß’; ‘sueur’; fd ‘schwitzen’ (Ember 1930: ّ‫ف‬ 54; Faulkner 1962: 99; Herbin 1994: 530; Wb I 582) || Ar ‫ د ��ي‬dafiyy ‘warm’ (Wahrmund I 671); ~ Iraq dafu/difu ‘warmth’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 100) ~ Kǝndērīb dafi ‘wärme’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 50) ~ Damascus daffa ʿala ‘sich wärmen an’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 157) ~ Palest daffa ‘warmen’ (Bauer 1957: 353) ~ Egypt daffa ‘to make warm’; dafa ‘warmth’ (Spiro 1895: 293) ~ Hasankeyf dǝfa ‘Heizung, Erwärmung’ (Fink 2017: 291) ~ Malta ⟨difa⟩ ‘tepidezza’ (Vassalli 1796: 164). 233

d-q-r¹

dqrw (MK) ‘fruit, fruit-trees’; ‘Frucht, als allgemeine Bezeichnung für essbare Früchte; Früchte von Bäumen; Weihrauch (besonders in der Verbindung: Gottesfrucht)’ (Faulkner 1962: 316; Wb V 495; Hannig 1995: 988) ~ Heb ‫ֶּד ֶקל‬ deqel ‘date-palm, palm’ (BDB 200) ~ Aram dīqlā ‘a kind of palm’ (BDB 200) || Ar ‫ د ن���ق��ر‬danqira ‘wohl bewässert sein und und reiche Vegetation haben (Ort)’ ‫ق‬ (Wahrmund I 672); ‫ د �ر‬daqr ‘luxuriant verdant garden’ (Hava 1982: 211); ~ Egypt digrān, pl dagārīn ‘Stütze fur den Fruchtstand der Palme’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 137) ~ Lebanon medqra ‘(terre) dure, difficile à cultiver’; deqqār, pl dqaqīr ‘terrain aride et rocheux orienté vers l’Ouest’ (Feghali 1935: 40, 146). 234

d-q-r²

dqr (Med) ‘press’ (?) r (against)’; ‘angeheftet sein an etwas’; dgꜣ (LE) ‘etwas ankleben (mit m) an etwas’ (Faulkner 1962: 316; Wb V 496, 499) ~ Heb ‫ָּד ַקר‬ ‫ق‬ dāqar ‘pierce through’ (BDB 200) || Ar ‫ د �ر‬daqara ‘to touch’ (Hava 1982: 211);

160

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

~ Egypt daqqar ‘press one thing against another’ (Spiro 1895: 202) ~ Kǝndērīb daqaṛ ‘drücken gegen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 51) ~ Najd digal ‘to hit (with a fist), strike, pound, slam’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 369) ~ Aleppo daqaṛ ‘toucher légèrement (qqn.)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 244) ~ Sinai daggar ‘to bite (a dog)’ (C. Bailey 1991: 436) ~ Damascus lā tǝdqor ʾīdi ‘don’t touch my arm!’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 217) ~ Palest tudqur ‘sie stieß auf’ (Schmidt & Kahle 1918 I 278) ~ Iraq digar ‘to bump, joggle’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 162) ~ Lebanon ndaqar ‘être touché’ (Feghali 1938: 766) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨daqara⟩ ‘faire de sillons en une terre, la labourer et assillonner, couvrir des herbes sous le rayon’ (Dozy I 452). 235

d-q-q

dq.w/dq (Med) ‘Pulver, Mehl; zerkleinern, mahlen’; ‘flour, powder’ (Wb V 494; Hannig & Vomberg 1999: 678; Faulkner 1962: 316) ~ Ugar dqq ‘tiny, fine’ (DUL 277) ~ Akkad duqququ ‘to crush’ (CAD III 190) ~ Sab dqqm ‘flour’ (Biella 1982: ‫قق‬ 85) || Ar � ‫ د ��ا‬duqāq ‘flour’ (Hava 1982: 211); ~ Āzǝx daqēq ‘Mehl’ (O. Jastrow 1981: 64) ~ Egypt diʾīʾ ‘flour’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 296) ~ Yemen dagg ‘trebbiare il grano’ (Rossi 1939: 293) ~ Takrūna dqīq ‘farine de la mouture séparée du son à l’aide du tamis à mailles larges’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 1300). 236

d-l-ʿ

ʾdalga (LE) ‘sweet melon’ (Hoch 1994: 47) ~ Aram ‫ דלע‬dlʿ ّ‘Kürbis; gourd’ (Schwiderski 2008: 211; Porten & Yardeni 1999: xliii) || Ar ‫ د لا‬dullāʿ ‘water‫ع‬ melon’ (Hava 1982: 214); ~ Tunis dellāʿ ‘Wassermelonen’ (Singer 1984: 540) ~ Djidjelli dellāʿa ‘pastèque’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 277) ~ Morocco dellaḥa ‘watermelon’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 29) ~ Malta ⟨dulliegħa, coll. dullieħ⟩ ‘water-melon’ (Aquilina 1987: 266). 237

d-l-l

dꜣ/dꜣdꜣ/di҆di҆ (*dl/*dldl) (LE) ‘copulate’; ‘eine unzüchtige sexuelle Betätigung (neben nk, bnbn und ähnlich); kopulieren, koitieren; lasziv sein; zoten, unzüchtige reden’; ‘to be lascivious, amorous, lustful, make love’ (Faulkner

235. d-q-q – 239. d-n-n

161

1962: 309; Wb V 419; Hannig 1995: 969; DLE II 239; Caminos 1954: 604) || Ar ‫ د لا ل‬dalāl ‘lascive oder durch scheinbares Wiederstreben herausfordernde Coquetterie’; dallah ‘verliebte Coquetterie’ (Wahrmund I 675, 678); ~ Egypt dalāl ‘amorous gesture, coquetry, feigned coyness’ (Spiro 1895: 204) ~ S.E. Anatolia ḍalāl ‘Geliebter’ [< *dll]; dǝlāl ‘sehr nett’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 158, 253) ~ Iraq dallal ‘to spoil, indulge’ (Abu-Haidar 1991: 187) ~ Aleppo dalāl ‘soins tendres, gâteries’; dēllīye ‘coquetterie, familiarité’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 248, 249) ~ Damascus dallal ‘verwöhn-en’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 157) ~ Lebanon dallal ‘caresser’ (Denizeau 1960: 175) ~ Palest mdallal ‘verwöhnt’ (Schmidt & Kahle 1918 I 278) ~ Negev dalāl (name of the beloved in folk poetry); daldala ‘vacillation’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi) ~ Najd ⟨dlīlah⟩ ‘Geliebte (oder Eigenname?)’ (Socin 1901 III 265) ~ Marazig mdallal ‘choyé, gâté’; ḍelāl ‘chose aimée et bienfaisante’ (Boris 1958: 177) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨dallah⟩ ‘coquetry, coddling’ (Corriente 1997: 183). 238

d-m-y

i҆dmj.t ‘Leinenstoff von roter Farbe’ (Wb I 153) ~ Akkad ada(m)mu ‘red (garment)’ (CDA 4) ~ Ge ʾaddāmāwi/ʾadim ‘red (color)’ (Leslau 1987: 729) ~ Amh dämmǝma ‘crimson, bright red’; dama ‘dark red; horse’s coat’ (Kane 1990: 1716, 1719, 1720); adim ‘leather strip tainted red’ (Leslau 1969: 89) ~ Aram ʾĂdām ‘blood’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 17) || Ar ‫ د‬dam ‘blood’ (Hava 1982: 217); ‫م‬ ~ Aleppo damm, pl dmūm et dmūmāt ‘sang’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 250) ~ Damascus damm, pl ʾǝdǝmye ‘blood’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 24) ~ Palest damm ‘Blut’ (Bauer 1957: 63) ~ Malta ⟨demm, pl dmija⟩ ‘blood’; ⟨aħmar demm⟩ ‘blood red’ (own obs.). 239

d-n-n

dni҆t (MK) ‘bowl, basket’; ‘Korb’ (Faulkner 1962: 314; Calice 1936: 222); ḏn-i҆b (OK) ‘ein Gefäß (unter Hausrat angeführt)’ (Wbّ V 575) ~ Akkad dannu ‘vat’ (CAD III ‫ن‬ ‫ن‬ 98) ~ Ugar dn ‘vessel, vat’ (DUL 226) || Ar � ‫ د‬dann, pl � ‫ د ن�ا‬dinān ‘earthenwarre jar with a tapering bottom’ (Hava 1982: 217); ~ N. Yemen dann ‘großes Tongefäß zur Wasserkühlung’ (Behnstedt 1987: 254) ~ Aleppo dǝnn, pl dnān ‘grande jarre à vin’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 252) ~ S.E. Anatolia dann, pl dnēn ‘irdenes Faß’; ‘une grande jarre’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 159; Grigore 2007: 63).

162

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )



Đ

240

ð-b-ḥ

dbḥ.w (OK) ‘der Bedarf an etwas’; dbḥ.w ‘zum Kultus nötige Dinge’; ‘things necessary for an offering’; dbḥt-ḥtp ‘funerary meal, altar’ ~ Heb ‫[ ִמזְ ֵּב ַח‬mizbēaḥ] ‘altar’ (Wb V 440–441; Hodge 1981: 406; Faulkner 1962: 312; BDB 258; Takács 1999: 248) ~ Sab ðbḥ ‘sacrifice an animal ritually; kill, murder’ (Biella 1982: 90) ‫�ذ‬ || Ar �‫ ب‬ðabaḥa ‘to slaughter’ (Hava 1982: 226);

‫ح‬

~ Aleppo dabaḥ ‘égorger (un animal)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 229) ~ Oman ðbīḥa ‘Schlachtvieh’ (Reinhardt 1894: 5) ~ Najd ðibaḥ ‘to slaughter, kill’; ðabbāḥah ‘those who slaughter much, i.e., generous entertainers of guests’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 372–73) ~ Kǝndērīb ðabaḥ ‘schlachten (Tiere); abschlachten, umbringen (Menschen)’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 55) ~ Palest ðabaḥ ‘schlachten’ (Bauer 1957: 258). 241

ð-r-r

sꜣ/zꜣ (Pyr) ‘son (in expression of filiation)’; ‘der Sohn (in genealogischen Angaben); männlicher Nachkomme’ (Faulkner 1962: 207; Wb III 408; Hannig ّ ‫�ذ‬ 1995: 651) ~ Sab ðr ‘to spread, scatter’ (Jamme 1962: 431) || Ar ‫ ر‬ðarra ‘répandre ‫�ذ �ذ‬ du sel’; ‫ ر ر‬ðarðara ‘répandre, semer’ (DAF I 766, 768); ~ Aleppo dǝrriyye ‘postérité, progéniture’; dardar ‘éparpiller, répandre’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 235) ~ Lebanon derriyye ‘postérité’ (Feghali 1938: 766) ~ Palest ðuriyye ‘Nachwelt’ (Bauer 1957: 214) ~ Rwala ðurriyye ‘descendants’ (Musil 1928: 50) ~ Najd ðarr ‘to sprinkle, scatter’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 373) ~ Egypt daṛṛa ‘Euter’; dirriyya ‘Nachkommenschaft’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 131); zurriyya/durriyya ‘offspring, posterity’ (Spiro 1895: 249) ~ Takrūna ðerr ‘enfants, grand nombre d’enfants’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 1378) ~ Douz ðirr ‘Kinder’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2014: 10) ~ Djidjelli dǝrriyya ‘descendance’; drāri ‘enfants’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 362, 341) ~ Morocco derri, pl drari ‘child’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 33). 242

ð-r-y

ḏnw (NK) ‘die Tenne’ (Wb V 575) ~ Dem ḏꜣj.t/ḏrj.t ‘Tenne’ ~ ḏlꜣ ‘sich zerstreuen’ (DG 672, 683, 684) ~ Copt ϫⲏⲣⲉ ‘threshing-floor’; ⲥϫⲱⲱⲣⲉ ‘scatter, disperse’ (Crum 1939: 782a) ~ Akkad zarû ‘to winnow’ (M. Cohen 2011: 232) ~ Ge zarawa ‫�ذ‬ ‘winnow’ (Leslau 1987: 644) || Ar ‫ ر �ى‬ðarā ‘to winnow’ (Hava 1982: 228);

240. ð-b-ḥ – 245. ð-y-b

163

~ S.E. Anatolia ð/zarra ‘worfeln’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 169) ~ Palest ðara/ ðarra ‘worfeln’ (Bauer 1957: 369) ~ Aleppo darra ‘monder, vanner le (blé) en le jetant en l’air avec une fourche sur l’aire à dépiquer’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 238). 243

ð-f-r

dꜣf ‘eine unbekömmliche Speise’ (Sethe 1962: 182); dꜣf ‘etwas verbrennen; erhitzen, kochen; verbranntes Fleisch’ (Hannig 1999: 994–995) ~ ḏfꜣ ‘Nahrung, Speise’ (Wb V 522, 569; DLE II 265) ~ Akkad zapāru ‘become rotten, stink’; zaprūtu ‘bad smell’; zupru ‘decay, putrefaction, rot’; ṣaripu ‘pungent’ (Parpola 2007: 135, 251, 103) ~ Sab ðfr ‘ill-smelling plants’ (Biella 1982: 98) || Saf ðfr ‘stench, stink’ ‫�ذ ف‬ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 636) ~ Ar ‫ �ر‬ðafira ‘be pungent (odour)’; zaffara ‘eat fatty food’ (Hava 1982: 291, 208); dafir ‘stinking’ (Lane 890); dafira ‘to become maggoty (food)’ (Hava 1982: 209); cf. 440. ð̣ -f-r; ~ Damascus tẓaffar ‘schmutzig, fettig werden’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 163) ~ Aleppo ẓaffar ‘graisser, poisser de gras, … faire manger gras (en temps de carême ou pendant les jours maigres)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 502) ~ Palest zafar ‘Fett­ speise’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 29) ~ Cypriot Ar zaffer ‘serve meat-based or fatty food during the Lenten fast)’ (own obs.) ~ Egypt zifir ‘greasy, filthy’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 108). 244

ð-k-r

ṯi₂=ku=ru₂ (20th Dyn.) ‘remember (verb in anthroponym)’ (Hoch 1994: 372) ~ Akkad zakāru ‘to remember’ (< W. Sem.; CAD XXI 22) ~ Sab ðkr ‘mention, ‫�ذ‬ make known, announce’ (Biella 1982: 95) || Ar ‫�ر‬ ‫ ك‬ðakara ‘to remember’ (Hava 1982: 229); ~ Damascus dzakkar ‘to remember’; zākra ‘memory’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 190, 148) ~ Palest ðakkar ‘errinern jemanden an’; tðakkar ‘sich erinnern’ (Bauer 1957: 99) ~ Egypt tazakkar ‘to remember’ (Spiro 1895: 253) ~ Tripoli (Libya) dkar ‘ricordare’ (Cesàro 1939: 198). 245

ð-y-b

s/zꜣb (Pyr) ‘jackal’; ‘der Schackal’ (Faulkner 1962: 209; Wb III 420) ~ Akkad zību ‘jackal’ (Parpola 2007: 211) ~ Ge zǝʾb ‘hyena’ (Leslau 1987: 701) || Saf ðʾb ‘wolf’ ‫�ذ‬ ‫�ذ‬ ‫�ذ‬ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 636) ~ Ar �‫ �ئ� ب‬ðiʾb/�‫ �ي� ب‬ðīb, pl �‫ ي�ا ب‬ðiyāb ‘loup’ (DAF 760);

164

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

~ Damascus dīb, pl dyāb ‘wolf’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 265) ~ Najd ðīb, pl ðyāb ‘id.’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 375) ~ S.E. Anatolia ðǝyb ‘loup’ (Grigore 2007: 193) ~ Aleppo dīb, pl dyāb ‘id.’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 260) ~ Egypt dīb, pl diyāb ‘id.’ (Spiro 1895: 210) ~ Palest ðīb, pl ðyāb ‘Wolf’ (Bauer 1957: 368). R 246

r-ʾ-s

ꜣjs/ꜣs (Med) ‘Gehirn (des Menschen und der Tiere)’; rši҆ ‘der Gipfel eines Berges’ (Wb I 2, II 455; Hannig 1995: 2); i҆ꜣs ‘bald’ (Faulkner 1962: 9) ~ Heb ‫ רֹאׁש‬rōš ‘head’

‫أ‬

(BDB 910) ~ Sab rʾs ‘head’ (Biella 1982: 474) || Ar ‫ ر� ��س‬ra‌ʾs, pl ‫ ر �ؤ و��س‬ruʾūs ‘head; head of cattle, individual’ (Hava 1982: 234); ~ Aleppo rāṣ, pl rūṣ ‘tête’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 264) ~ Palest rās, pl rūs ‘Kopf’ (Bauer 179) ~ Egypt rās, pl rūs ‘head’ (Spiro 1895: 240) ~ Malta ⟨ras, pl rjus⟩ ‘testa’ (Vassalli 1796: 567). 247

r-ʾ-y

i҆rw (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘shape, form, nature’ (Faulkner 1962: 27); cf. (NK) i҆r ‘das Sehen als Personifikation – neben sḏm “das Hören”; mꜣw (MK) ‘aspect, appearance’ (Faulkner 1962: 27; Wb I 108) ~ Amh ra‌ʾǝy ‘vision,’ rǝʾǝy ‘complexion’ (Kane 1990: 388); ~ Damascus rǝʾye ‘visage’ (Denizeau 1960: 188) ~ S.E. Anatolia ṛawwīye (inf of ṛawwa) ‘zeigen’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 172) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨marʾa, pl marāʾī⟩ ‘view, sight’ (Corriente 1997: 197) ~ Cypriot Ar rvie ‘appearance’ (Borg 2004: 242). 248

r-b-l

rnpi҆ (Pyr) ‘be young, fresh, green, flourish, grow, be fresh’; ‘jung werden, sich verjüngen (in der Verbindung: frisches Wasser), sich erneuern’ (Faulkner 1962: ّ 150; Wb II 432; Ember 1930: 51) || Ar ‫ رب�ل‬rabala ‘to multiply’ (Hava 1982: 239); ‫رب�ل‬ rabbala ‘produire sa tige (herbe), pousser des rejetons’; ‫ رب�ل‬rabal ‘herbe odoriferante et huileuse, qui croît sur les montagnes et dont l’odeur est semblable à celle de la menthe’ (Dozy I 505);

246. r- ʾ -s – 251. r-ḥ-m

165

~ N. Yemen rabalah ‘Wade (eigentlich, Fleischmasse am Körper)’; rabīl ‘korpulent, dickfleischig’ (Behnstedt 1987: 257) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨rabal⟩ (unidentified herb); ⟨arbal⟩ ‘fleshier’ (Corriente 1997: 200) ~ Najd ribleh ‘Wegerich, Plantago ovata Forks.’ (Hess 1938: 72) ~ Euphrates Bedouin riblih ‘type of grass’ (Ingham 1982: 69) ~ Palest rible ‘Wegerich, Plantago’ (Dalman VI 151) ~ Egypt rabul ‘Pulicaria undulata, stark duftend, die ausgewachsene Pflanze heisst auch rabul mufattig’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 156). 249

r-t-m

rdmt (MK) ‘a plant’; ‘eine Wüstenpflanze’ (Faulkner 1962: 156; Calice 1936: 102) ~ Heb ‫ ר ֶֹתם‬rōtem ‘a species of broom, growing in deserts’ (M. Jastrow 1886: ‫ت‬ 1503) || Ar �‫ ر‬ratam ‘Genista, broom-plant, Esparto’ (Hava 1982: 240); ‫م‬ ~ Sinai rtēmih (dim. of ratamah) ‘retem’ (Stewart 1990: 259) ~ Palest ratam ‘Ginster’ (Dalman I/1: 74) ~ Tripoli (Libya) rtam ‘ginestra’ (Griffini 1913: 132) ~ Algeria retem ‘genêt’ (Ben Sedira 1910: 259) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ratam abyaḍ⟩ ‘Genista scoparia’ (Corriente 1997: 201). 250

r-ḥ-l

ʿḥꜣ (OK) ‘go to war’; kämpfen, Kampf’; ʿḥꜣ.w ‘Waffen’ (Faulkner 1962: 46; Wb I 215, 216) || Ar ‫ رح�ل‬raḥala ‘mit dem Schwerte schlagen’ (Wahrmund I 744). 251

r-ḥ-m

� raḥima ‘mitleidig, gütig, mrḥ (LE) ‘have compassion’ (DLE I 318) || Ar �‫ح‬ ‫ر م‬ gnädig sein’ (Wahrmund I 744); ~ Najd raḥām ‘mercy, compassion’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 366) ~ Damascus raḥme ‘mercy’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 148) ~ Kǝndērīb b-raḥmǝ́tu ‘mit Gottes Erbarmen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 57) ~ Egypt raḥam ‘have pity, have mercy’ (Spiro 1895: 220) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨raḥam, yarḥam⟩ ‘have compassion’ (Corriente 1997: 204).

166 252

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

r-x-m

ʿẖm (LE) ‘hawk, falcon’; ‘Götterbild: ursprünglich das hockende Falkenbild dann allgemeines Wort für Götterbild’ (Ember 1917: 86; Wb I 225) ~ Dem ʿẖm ‘der Falke, auch als Götterbild’ (DG 70) ~ Copt ⲁϩⲱⲙ ‘eagle’ (Crum 1939: 25a) ~ Har nehēm ‘eagle’ (Johnstone 1977: 95) ~ Jibb nǝhmít ‘vulture’ (Johnstone ‫خة‬ 1981: 185) || Ar ��‫ ر خ‬raxm, (u.n.) ��‫ ر��م‬raxmah/raxamah ‘espèce de vautour qui a ‫م‬ le corps et le cou blancs et les extrémités des ailes noires’ (DAF I 841); ~ Rwala raxama ‘Vultur perenopterus’; raxam, pl rxūm ‘vultures which feed only on dead bodies’ (Musil 1928: 36, 633) ~ Negev ṛaxam ‘vulture’ (Henkin 2010: 288) ~ Palest raxam, pl rxūm(e) ‘Geier, Aasgeier, Schmutzgeier’ (Bauer 1957: 1, 127; Dalman VI 79) ~ Egypt raxame ‘Fischadler’; ruxma ‘ein weißer Geier mit schwarzen Flügelspritzen’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 159) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨raxām⟩ ‘osprey’ (Corriente 1997: 205) ~ Ḥassāniyya raxme ‘charognard’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 38). 253

r-d-d

rdi҆ (MK) ‘give, cause that’; ‘geben, etwas geben, ّ eine Person geben’ (Faulkner 1962: 154; Breasted 1930: 547; Wb II 464) || Ar ‫ رد‬radda ‘rendre; présenter, offrir, donner (un temoignage)’ (DAF I 842); ~ Aleppo radd ‘rendre, restituer (de l’argent …); rendre (réponse)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 275) ~ Palest radd ‘Rückgabe’ (Bauer 1957: 247) ~ Marazig radd ‘restituer, rendre (un prêt)’ (Boris 1958: 207) ~ Algiers radd ‘rendre’ (Tapiéro 1971: 167) ~ Malta ⟨radd⟩ ‘restituire’ (Vassalli 1796: 561). 254

r-d-y¹

rd ‘foot’; ‘der Fuß’; rdw (Pyr) ‘stairway’; ‘Treppe (eigentlich Tritte, Stufen)’; ‘foot, heels’ (Faulkner 1962: 154; Wb II 461, 462; DLE I 281; Albright 1918: 235) ~ Dem rt ‘der Fuß’ (DG 258) ~ Copt ⲣⲁⲧ ‘foot’ (Crum 1939: 302) || Ar ‫ رد �ى‬radā ‘to beat the ً ground (running horse)’, ‫ �مرد �ى‬mardan, pl ‫ �مرا ٍد‬marādin ‘legs of horses, camels, elephants’ (Hava 1982: 248); ‘den Boden mit den Hufen stampfen’ (Wahrmund I 752); ‘fouler le sol de ses sabots (se dit d’un cheval)’ (DAF I 849); ~ Najd rada ‘to beat the ground with the feet’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 368) ~ Egypt ṛada ‘überschüssiger Ackerboden, der in den Viehstall unter die Tiere gelegt wird, um Dünger zu gewinnen’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 162) ~ Marazig ṛadda ‘marcher en sautillant sur trois pattes, un antérieur étant

252. r-x-m – 258. r- ʿ -r- ʿ

167

entravé par l’oʿgāḷ’ (Boris 1958: 209) ~ Morocco rda ‘avancer en sautillant à cloche-pieds; lever les deux pattes antérieures d’un seul mouvement comme pour sauter (en parlant d’un cheval)’ (Prémare V 101) ~ Ḥassāniyya redye ‘sauter par dessus’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 134) ~ Yemen ridi ‘bis zum Knie einsinken’ (Behnstedt 1996: 441). 255

r-d-y²

rd (Pyr) ‘grow, flourish, prosper’; ‘wachsen’ (Faulkner 1962: 154; Wb II 462) || Ar ‫ رد �ى‬radā ‘wachsen, zunehmen, überschreiten’ (Wahrmund I 752). 256

r-ṣ-w

rwḏ (Pyr) ‘hard, firm, strong, enduring, permanent’; ‘fest sein, dauerhaft’ (Faulkner 1962: 148; Wb II 410; Calice 1936: 255) || Ar ‫ ر�ص�ا‬raṣā ‘befestigen’ (Wahrmund I 755); ~ Marazig ṛaṣṣa ‘se fixer’; ṛṣē ‘maintenir sa place, fixer, empêcher de s’éloigner’ (Boris 1958: 214). 257

r-ʿ-š

nʿš (LE) ‘fierce, raging’; ‘laut (vom Geschrei, Gebrüll des Kriegers und des Löwen)’ (Hoch 1994: 183; Wb II 209) ~ Heb ‫ ָר ַעׁש‬rāʿaš ‘quake, shake (of earth by ‫ � ش‬raʿaša ‘zittern, beben’ trampling of warriors)’ (Isaiah IX 4; BDB 950) || Ar ���‫ع‬ ‫ر‬ (Wahrmund I 771); ~ Aleppo raʿaš, yǝrʿeš ‘faire tressaillir de peur’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 285) ~ Palest rʿāš ‘frissons de froid’ (Denizeau 1960: 200) ~ Takrūna rʿaš ‘trembler’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 1524) ~ Egypt raʿaš, yirʿiš ‘to cause to tremble’; irtaʿaš ‘tremble, quake, be frightened’; yitraʿēš ‘zittern’ (Spiro 1895: 229; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 165) ~ Tripoli (Libya) rʿaš ‘tremare’ (Griffini 1913: 290). 258

r-ʿ-r-ʿ

rʿ (Pyr) ‘sun, sun-god Re’; ‘die Sonne als Gestirn und als Gottheit, der Sonnengott Re’; rʿ.t ‘sun-goddess (of queen)’ (Faulkner 1962: 147; Wb II 401) || Ar ‫ ر�عر‬raʿraʿa ‫ع‬ ‘briller’ (DAF 881); ‫ �ل�ع��ل‬laʿlaʿa ‘schimmern’ (Wahrmund II 641);

‫ع‬

168

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

~ Daθīna ⟨laʿlaʿ⟩ ‘luire’ (GD 2634) ~ Lebanon laʿlaʿ ‘briller, étinceler (épée)’ (Denizeau 1960: 476) ~ Aleppo laʿlaʿ ‘retentir, résonner bruyamment’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 758) ~ Egypt laʿlaʿ ‘to shine brightly’/laʿlaṭ ‘to shimmer, gleam’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 444). 259

r-ʿ-f

jʿf/ʿfj (MK) ‘Feuchtes auspressen’; ‘wring out (clothes); squeeze out’ (Wb I 41, ‫ف‬ 138; Faulkner 1962: 11) || Ar ���‫ ر�ع‬raʿifa ‘couler (se dit du sang du nez qui coule)’ (DAF I 882); ~ Aleppo rǝʿef ‘saigner du nez’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 285) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨raʿaf⟩ ‘to have a nose-bleed’ (Corriente 1997: 211) ~ Ḥassāniyya ʿrǝv ‘saigner du nez’; ʿarrev ‘faire saigner du nez’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 133). 260

r-ʿ-y

rḫj.t (Pyr) ‘subjects of king, common folk, mankind’; ‘Untertanen, Volk’ (Faulkner 1962: 152; Wb I 447; Brockelmann 1932: 109) ~ Akkad reʾītu ‘herding’ (CAD XIV 256) ~ Sab rʿt ‘flock, herd’; rʿy ‘shepherd, herdsman’ (Biella 1982: 491) ‫ّة‬ ~ Taym rʿy ‘reign’ (Winnett & Reed 1970: 192) || Ar ����‫ ر�عي‬raʿiyyah ‘tended flock, subjects’ (Hava 1982: 259); ~ Rwala raʿiyye ‘flock; dwellers’; raʿi ‘inhabitant’ (Musil 1928: 302, 290; 298) ~ Aleppo ǝrraʿiyye ‘les paroissiens, les ouailles, le troupeau’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 285) ~ Palest raʿiyye ‘Untertan (eigentlich Herde)’ (Bauer 1957: 324) ~ Yemen raʿwī, pl raʿiyyeh ‘suddito’ (Rossi 1939: 240); rāʿ allah flān ‘Allah behüte NN’ (Goitein 1934: 2) ~ Najd riʿiyya ‘herd of camels, flock of 80–200 sheep’ (Hess 1938: 62) ~ Oman raʿiyye, pl rʿāye ‘Heerde’ (Reinhardt 1894: 74) ~ Egypt riʿiyya ‘subject of a ruler, subject of the local government’ (Spiro 1895: 229) ~ Tunis riʿiyya ‘sujet’ (D. Cohen 1975: 28) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨arraʿiyyah⟩ ‘subjects’ (Corriente 1997: 212). 261

r-ġ-b

ʿꜣb (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘selfish’; ʿꜣbt ‘selfishness’; ʿꜣbt ‘food, provisioning’ (Faulkner 1962: 38); ꜣfʿ ‘be greedy, gluttonous, voracious’ (Ember 1930: 55); ꜣḫf ‘Esslust (?)’; ‘fever of appetite’ (Wb I 19; Faulkner 1962: 5; Rössler 1971: 296) ~ Heb ‫ָר ֵעב‬

169

259. r- ʿ -f – 263. r-f-d

‫�غ‬

rāʿēb ‘be hungry’ (BDB 944) ~ Ge rǝḫba ‘be hungry’ (Leslau 1987: 468) || Ar �‫ر � � ب‬ raġiba ‘vouloir, désirer, rechercher, avoir du penchant, de l’inclination pour …’; ‫�غ‬ ‫�غ ة‬ �‫ ر � ��ي� ب‬raġīb ‘qui désire ardemment quelque chose; très-avide, très-vorace’; ����‫ر � ب‬ raġbah ‘object of desire’ (DAF I 887; Hava 1982: 259); ~ Kǝndērīb yǝrġab ‘begehren’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 58) ~ Palest marġūb ‘wünschenswert’ (Bauer 1957: 370) ~ Egypt raġab ‘wish, desire’; ruġbah ‘desire, wish, eagerness’ (Spiro 1895: 229) ~ Tunis rġab ‘il a supplié’ (D. Cohen 1975: 28) ~ Malta ⟨regħba⟩ ‘avidità grande’ (Vassalli 1796: 571). 262

r-ġ-f

‫أ �غ ف ة‬

ḥrf (Urk. IV) ‘kind of bread’; ‘ein Brot’ (Faulkner 1962: 176; Hannig & Vomberg

‫�غ ف‬

1999: 434) || Ar ���‫ ر � ي‬raġīf, pl ������ � ‫ � ر‬ʾarġifah ‘loaf of bread, round cake’ (Hava 1982: 260);

Commenting on the kinds of bread baked by the Rwala Bedouin, Musil (1928: 92) notes that when the bread designated by the term raġīf “is as thin as paper it is called rahīf.”

~ Constantine ġṛāif (pl/coll.), n.un. qurṣa-ġṛāif ‘sortes de crêpes épaisses généralement mangées au miel’ (W. Marçais 1911: 312) ~ Sūsa ġrayyba ‘cakes made of semolina, sugar and oil’ (Talmoudi 1981: 129) ~ Rwala raġīf sāj ‘bread’ (Musil 1928: 92) ~ Egypt raġīf ‘Backplatte’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1999: 373) ~ N. Yemen raġīf ‘Brotlaib’ (Behnstedt 1987: 258) ~ Oman raġīf, pl ruġfān ‘Semmel’ (Reinhardt 1894: 73). 263

r-f-d

drp/dꜣp (Pyr) ‘offer to a god, feed s.o. ; present dues, make offering’; ‘beschenken (mit Speisen), spenden’; drpw ‘offerings’ (Faulkner 1962: 315; Wb V 476; Brockelmann 1932: 116; Hannig & Vomberg 1999: 426) ~ Sab rfd ‘support, help’ ‫ف‬ (Biella 1982: 493) || Ar ‫ ر��د‬rafada ‘als Geschenk geben, schenken; helfen, unterstützen’ (Wahrmund I 777–78); ~ Najd rafdeh, pl rufāyid ‘Geschenke an Kleinvieh, Geld usw., die man von Verwandten und Freunden nach Kriegsverlust oder Unglück erbittet’ (Hess 1938: 101) ~ Daθīna ⟨rifdah⟩ ‘secours, aide, assistance, soutien’ (GD 1333) ~ Algiers rfed ‘lever’ (Tapiéro 1971: 161) ~ Morocco rfed ‘to accommodate’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 2) ~ Ḥassāniyya reffād ‘porteur’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 116) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨yarfad⟩ ‘to sustain or help’ (Corriente 1997: 213).

170 264

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

r-f-ʿ¹

fꜣj (OK) ‘hochheben, tragen’; fꜣ.t ‘das Auftragen der Speisen’; fꜣj.t (OK) ‘Last (eines Schiffes)’; fri҆ ‘raise, lift up’; fꜣyt ‘portable shrine’ (Wb I 572, 574; Faulkner 1962: 97) ~ Sab yfʿ ‘to raise up’ (Jamme 1962: 438) || Ar �‫ ر ��ف‬rafaʿa ‘to raise, lift’ ‫ع‬ (Hava 1982: 262); ~ Kǝndērīb rafaʿ ‘aufheben, wegbringen, abräumen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 58) ~ Damascus rafaʿ ‘to raise’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 186) ~ Palest rafaʿ ‘aufeben’ (Bauer 1957: 27) ~ Egypt rafaʿ ‘raise, lift up, take off’ (Spiro 1895: 231) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨narfaʿ arfaʿ⟩ ‘raise, pick, preserve’ (Corriente 1997: 213). 265

r-f-ʿ²

‫ة‬

fꜣw (OK) ‘Macht, Ansehen (oder ähnlich) einer Person’ (Wb I 575) || Ar ��‫ر ��ف��ع‬ rafʿah/rifʿah ‘elatio dignitatis, honoris celsitudo’; ‘haut, élevé en rang, illustre’ (Freytag 1837: 232; DAF II 898); ~ Palest rafʿa ‘Anhöhe, Gipfel’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 27). 266

r-f-f

nfnf (LE) ‘schleichendes Gewürm’ (Wb I 252; Brockelmann 1932: 104) ~ Heb ‫ ָר ַפף‬rāpap ‘to be loose, vacillate’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 1491) ~ Amh räfärräfä ‘to ‫ف ف‬ strew plentifully’ (Leslau 1969: 16) || (?) Ar ��‫ ر�ر‬rafrafa ‘to flutter (bird)’ (Hava 1982: 261); ~ Damascus trafraf ‘flap’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 92) ~ Palest rafraf ‘flattern’; raff ‘Vögelschwarm’ (Bauer 1957: 113, 268) ~ Najd rifīf ‘fluttering, flickering, flash, flare’; rafrāf ‘schnelle Bewegung (vom Kamel)’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 379; Socin 1901 III 269) ~ Negev raff ar-rafarīf ‘the flapping of tent-canvas’ (Henkin 2010: 298) ~ Egypt raff ‘to flutter’ (Spiro 1895: 230) ~ Marazig raff ‘avoir un fort mouvement de tremblement (agonisant, doigt)’; rafraf ‘flotter au vent’ (Boris 1958: 218). 267

r-f-h

srf (LE) [< *s+rfh] ‘zur Ruhe bringen’; ‘take one’s ease; rest, relief’ (Wb IV 197; ‫ف‬ Faulkner 1962: 236) || Ar ‫ ر��ه‬rafaha ‘jouir du bien-être, vivre tranquillement et commodément’ (DAF I 902);

171

264. r-f- ʿ¹ – 271. r-k-y ¹

~ Damascus rafāha ‘luxury’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 143) ~ Palest rafahiyya ‘Luxus’ (Bauer 1957: 197) ~ Egypt rafahiyya ‘luxury’ (Spiro 1895: 230) ~ AlAndalus ⟨taraffuh⟩ ‘to enjoy luxury’ (Corriente 1997: 214) ~ E. Arabia raffah ‘rendre la vie plus aisée’ (Denizeau 1980: 203). 268

r-q-b

mnqbj.t (MK) ‘Art Halsschmuck’ (Wb II 91) ~ Akkad gubāru ‘nape’ (M. Cohen ‫ق‬ ‫قة‬ 2011: 117) || Ar ����‫ ر� ب‬raqabah, pl �‫ ر��ا ب‬riqāb ‘nape of the neck’ (Hava 1982: 264); ~ N. Yemen ragabah ‘Hals’ (Behnstedt 1987: 258) ~ Kǝndērīb raqbe ‘Hals’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 59) ~ Lebanon rqābīna ‘nos cous’ (Feghali 1935: 1935: 10) ~ Palest raqabe, pl riqāb ‘Hals’ (Bauer 1958: 147). 269

r-q-y¹

jꜣq (Pyr) ‘emporsteigen zum Himmel; emporklimmen, hinaufsteigen’; mꜣq.t ‫قة‬ ‘Leiter’ (Wb I 33; Hannig 1995: 25) || Ar ‫ ر �ق�ي‬raqiya ‘to ascend gradually’; � ‫�مر��ا‬ marqāt ‘ladder’ (Hava 1982: 266); ~ Al-Andalus ⟨marqā, pl marāqî⟩ ‘ladder, stair’ (Corriente 1997: 216) ~ Najd riga ‘to climb, ascend’; marga ‘ascent, climb’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 380) ~ Rwala ma yarqa‌ʾ ‘he will never rise’ (Musil 1928: 449) ~ Aleppo traqqa ‘monter en grade’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 292) ~ Egypt traqqa ‘be promoted, advanced’ (Spiro 1895: 233) ~ Tripoli (Libya) rgā ‘arrampicarsi’ (Griffini 1913: 18) ~ Marazig rgi ‘monter’ (Boris 1958: 222) ~ Morocco rqa ‘s’élever’ (Prémare V 190). 270

r-q-y²

271

r-k-y¹

ّ‫ق‬

rk (LE) ‘(als Zauberwort)’ (Wb I 458) || Ar ‫ ر �ى‬raqqā to enchant s.o.’ (Hava 1982: ‫قة‬ 266); ����‫ ر�ي‬ruqyah ‘a charm, spell (uttered or written)’ (Lane 1140); ~ Lebanon riqe ‘faire des sortilèges, jeter des sorts’ (M. Feghali 1938: 772) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨narqî raqayt⟩ ‘to charm, to cure with spells’; ⟨raqwah⟩ ‘spell, incantation’ (Corriente 1997: 216).

rk (OK) ‘time (of king, ancients)’; ‘die Zeit jemandes, die Zeit von etwas’ (Faulkner 1962: 153; Wb II 457) || cf. Ar ‫كا‬ � ‫ ر‬rakā ‘to put off’ (Hava 1982: 268).

172 272

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

r-k-y²

ꜣṯ.t (OK) ‘das Bett,ّ auch von der Bahre des Osiris’ (Wb I 23; Hannig & Vomberg

1999: 576) || Ar ‫ ت�ركى‬tarakkā ‘to rely upon’ (Hava 1982: 268); ~ Daθīna riki ‘s’appuyer sur’; ⟨rākā⟩ ‘soutenir’ (GD 1413–14) ~ Palmyra itṛaka, betṛakei ‘être couché, allongé’ (Cantineau 1934 II 6) ~ Najd rika ‘to lean on, push (with the breast and legs)’; ‘anlehnen (eine Lanze)’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 381; Socin 1901 III 270); irtika ‘to lean’ (Sowayan 1992: 271) ~ Rwala irtika ‘to lean against, push’ (Musil 1928: 306) ~ Palest irtaka ‘sich lehnen auf’ (Bauer 1957: 191) ~ Negev marka, pl marāki ‘cushions placed on one side of a reclining guest to lean on; spot where something is placed’; mírtiki ‘leaning’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi) ~ Lebanon rekkāye ‘coussin sur lequel on s’appuie’ (Denizeau 1960: 207). 273

r-m-ḥ

mrḥ (LE) ‘die Lanze’ (Wb II 112) ~ Heb ‫ ר ַֹמח‬rōmaḥ ‘spear, lance’ (BDB 942) ~ Copt ⲙⲉⲣⲉϩ ‘spear, javelin’ (Crum 1939: 184a) || Ar ‫ ر م‬rumḥ, pl ‫ ر�م�ا‬rimāḥ/

‫أ‬ ‫ � ر�م�ا‬ʾarmāḥ ‘spear’ (Hava 1982: 269); ‫ح‬

‫ح‬

‫ح‬

~ Rwala rumeḥ ‘eines lange Lanze’ (Musil 1928: 104) ~ Oman rumḥ ‘Speer’ (Reinhardt 1894: 57) ~ Aleppo rǝmǝḥ, pl rmāḥ ‘lance de bois flexible’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 294) ~ Damascus rǝmḥ, pl rmāḥ/rmūḥ ‘spear’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 219) ~ Palest rumḥ, pl rimāḥ ‘Speer’ (Bauer 1957: 281). 274

r-m-s

mšrw (Pyr) ‘evening, evening meal’; ‘Abend, Abenddämmerung’; ‘vielleicht die der Abend (im Gegensatz zum Morgen)’ (Faulkner 1962: 119; Hannig 1995: 368) ~ Syr rmeš ‘become evening’; rǝmeš/ramšā ‘evening, eventide’ (CSD 544) || cf. 334. s-m-r; ~ Oman remesne ramse ‘wir verbrachten den Abend’; ramīs ‘Abendplauderei’ (Reinhardt 1894: 280, 281, 46) ~ Khābūra ramas ‘spend the night chattering’ (Brockett 1985: 112, 281) ~ Daθīna remesne ramse ilīn nuṣṣ el lēl ‘nous passâmes la soirée jusqu’à minuit’ (GD 1442).

173

272. r-k-y ² – 277. r-n-n

275

r-m-ʿ

rmi҆҆ (Pyr) ‘weep, to flow (tears)’; ‘weinen’; rmw ‘weeping’; rmy.t/rmw.t ‘tears’ (Faulkner 1962: 149; Caminos 1954: 547; Wb II 416) ~ Copt ⲣⲓⲙⲉ ‘weep’ (Crum 1939: 294) || Ar ‫ ر�م‬ramaʿa ‘to issue (tears from the eyes)’ (Hava 1982: 271);

‫ع‬

~ Lebanon rāmūʿ ‘pluie qui succéde au tonnerre; se dit surtout pour la pluie tardive’ (Frayha 1973: 207). 276

r-m-n

i҆njmn (Urk. IV 731) ‘Granatapfel’ (Helck 1971: 505); i҆nhmn (Med) ‘pomegranate (tree and fruit)’; ‘ein Obstbaum und dessen Früchte’ (Faulkner 1962: 24; Wb I 98) ~ Copt ϩ(ⲉ)ⲣⲙⲁⲛ/ⲗⲉϩⲙⲉⲛ/ⲉⲣⲙⲁⲛ ‘pomegranate tree or fruit, Punica granatum’ (Crum 1939: 703a) ~ Ugar lrmn ‘pomegranate’ (DUL 499) ~ Akkad armannu/ ‫ّ ن‬ lurmu/lurimtu/urimtu/nurmû ‘id.’ (Parpola 2007: 238; Cohen 2011: 89) || Ar � ‫ر�م�ا‬ ‫ّ ة‬ rummān, u.n. ���‫ ر�م�ا ن‬rummānah ‘pomegranate (fruit and tree)’ (Hava 1982: 271); ~ Oman rummān ‘Granatäpfel’ (Reinhardt 1894: 48) ~ Aleppo rǝmmān ‘grenades, seins, mamelles d’une femme’; rǝmmāne ‘une grenade; un grenadier’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 295) ~ Damascus rǝmmāne ‘pomegranate’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 176) ~ Palest rummān ‘Granatäpfel’ (Bauer 1957: 141) ~ Iraq ġǝmmān ‘pomegranate’ (Abu-Haidar 1991: 68) ~ Djidjelli rommwān ‘grenades’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 5) ~ Malta ⟨rummien (coll.), sg. -a⟩ ‘pomegranates’ (Aquilina 1987: 1242). 277

r-n-n

rnn ‘rejoice; extol’; ‘jubeln, jemanden preisen (m über)’: rnnwt ‘joy, exultation’; rnnt ‘fortune, destiny’ (Faulkner 1962: 150; Wb II 435; DLE I 274; Brockelmann 1932: 109; Hannig 1995: 472) ~ Heb ‫ ָרנַ ן‬rānan ‘give a ringing cry’ (BDB 143) ~ Jibb

ّ‫ن‬

rinn ‘to reverberate, to ring’ (Johnstone 1981: 214) || Ar �‫ ر‬ranna ‘to resound’ (Hava 1982: 272); ~ Najd rannah ‘din, noise, hubbub’; rannān ‘thundering, reverberating’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 381) ~ Daθīna ⟨rann⟩ ‘produire un son, tinter, cliqueter, résonner’ (GD 1464) ~ Iraq rann ‘to ring, resound’; rannān ‘resounding speech’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 196) ~ Aleppo rann, yrǝnn ‘résonner (cuivre, cristal), avoir du retentissement’: šī birǝ́nn rann ‘une chose … qui restera fameuse’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 296) ~ Damascus birinn min kull žiha ‘er klingt auf allen

174

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

Seiten’ (Bergsträßer 1924: 106) ~ Lebanon rann, yrǝnn ‘gémir, se lamenter; être gai à l’excés’; rnīn ‘bruit’ (Denizeau 1960: 208) ~ Palest rann ‘klingeln (vom Ton)’ (Bauer 1957: 175) ~ Egypt rann, yirinn ‘tinkle, re-echo; copulate’ (Spiro 1895: 238) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nirannan⟩ ‘to hum a tune to s.o.’ (Corriente 1997: 220). 278

r-h-n

rhn (MK) ‘to lean, rely on, trust in; support’; ‘sich stützen auf, gestützt sein (ḥr auf)’ (Faulkner 1962: 151; DLE I 274; Wb II 440; Hannig 1995: 473; Calice 1936: 70) || Ar �‫ ر�ه� ن‬rahana ‘to last, to continue’ (Hava 1982: 275); ~ Najd rhūn ‘pawns, pledges’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 381) ~ Damascus rahǝn, pl rhūne ‘security’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 203) ~ Egypt rahan ‘to pledge’ (Spiro 1895: 238) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨rahan⟩ ‘pawn, security’ (Corriente 1997: 221). 279

r-w-ḥ

śrwḫ (caus.) (NK) ‘cure, bring relief’; ‘Krankheit, Schmerz vertreiben’ (Wb IV 193; Ember 1930: 74) || (?) Ar ‫ ر‬rāḥa ‘Beruhigung empfinden’ (Wahrmund I ‫اح‬ 806); Malta ⟨serraħ, iserraħ⟩ ‘dar riposo’ (Vassalli 1796: 606) [< *srwḥ]. 280

r-w-ḍ

wꜣḏ (MK) ‘papyrus plant; green, pale (of lips), make green, fresh, raw (of food), green stone’; m wꜣḏ ‘successfully’; wꜣḏ.t ‘green linen’; ‘grün, grün sein (von den Pflanzen, und vom Felde); allgemein von Dingen grüner Farbe; frisch, Frisch ‫ض‬ sein’ (Faulkner 1962: 55; Wb I 151) || Ar ��‫ رو‬rawḍ ‘etwas Wasser; Ort wo Wasser steht, daher gras- und krautreich; Wiese, Gemüsegarten’ (Wahrmund II 809); ‫ �ض ��ة‬rawḍah ‘luxuriant garden’ (Hava 1982: 278). �‫رو‬ An alternative etymology for wꜣḏ is proposed under 800. w-r-q below. 281

r-w-q

ra=ga=ta=(t) (LE) ‘compartments or hollow spaces’ (Hoch 1994: 211) ~ Akkad râqu ‘be empty’ (CAD XIV 17) ~ Heb ‫ ֵריק‬reyq ‘empty, vain’ (BDB 938); ~ Oman qahwe rēqa ‘nur Kaffee’ (Reinhardt 1894: 116; cf. Bravmann 1977: 548).

278. r-h-n – 284. z-x-m

282

175

r-w-y

jwj (MK) ‘(das Feld) bewässern, (Flüssigkeit) ausgießen’ (Wb I 49) ~ Heb ‫ָרוָ ה‬ rāwā ‘to be moist, saturated’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 1458) ~ Sab yhrwy(n) ‘provide with irrigation’ (Biella 1982: 482) || Ar ‫ رو��ي‬rawiya ‘draw water’ (Hava 1982: 279); ~ Najd riwi ‘to quench one’s thirst’ (Sowayan 1992: 272) ~ N. Yemen rawī ‘trinken’ (Behnstedt 1987: 259) ~ Āzǝx ṛawa ‘Boden-feuchtigkeit’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 186) ~ Aleppo rawwa ‘arroser suffisamment, abreuver (un terrain, une plante)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 302) ~ Damascus rawa ‘to water (horses)’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 259) ~ Syria rawwāya ‘großer Wasserkrug’ (Behnstedt 1997a: 126) ~ Lebanon rāyye ‘ondine’ (M. Feghali 1938: 774) ~ Palest riwi ‘durst stillen’ (Bauer 1957: 81) ~ Rwala en mā thayye min θamānah trawweyt ‘I did not succeed in drinking my fill from her eight teeth’; rāwiyye, pl rwāy ‘water bag’ (Musil 1928: 168, 70) ~ Najd rāwiyye, pl rawāya ‘Wasserschlauch’ (Socin 1901 III 271) ~ Sudan arwa ‘to irrigate’ (LDA 25) ~ Egypt rawa ‘to quench, water, irrigate’ (Spiro 1895: 239) ~ Djidjelli ṛwa ‘être humide (terre)’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 69) ~ Ḥassāniyya ṛwa ‘s’abreuver’ (D. Cohen 1963: 108).

Z

283

z-x-x

sḫ/zḫ (Pyr) ‘schlagen’; sḫ.t ‘der Schlag’ّ (Calice 1936: 79; Wb III 466); zḫi҆ (Pyr) ‘to ‫�ز‬ hit, smite’ (Faulkner 1962: 239) || Ar ‫ خ‬zaxxa ‘von oben hinabstoßen, hinab� stürzen, hinabwerfen’ (Wahrmund I 826); ~ Iraq zaxx ‘to rain heavily’; zaxxa ‘heavy shower’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 202) ~ Damascus bitzixx zaxx ‘it’s raining cats and dogs’; zaxxa ‘downpour’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 186, 71) ~ Lebanon zaxx ‘faire agenouiller un chameau’ (Feghali 1938: 670) ~ Palest zaxxa ‘Wolkenbruch’; bitzixx fid-dinya ‘es gießt’; zaxxa/zaxxat maṭar ‘Platzregen’ (Bauer 1957: 368, 138, 232) ~ Egypt zaxx ‘to rain heavily, pour’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 367). 284

z-x-m

śẖm/zẖm (MK) ‘schroff vorgehen, losgehen (r gegen/auf); heftiger Bewegung, heftig sein’; ‘to be hasty, impetuous’ (Calice 1936: 79; Wb IV 269; Hannig 1995: ‫�ز‬ 753; Faulkner 1962: 244) || Ar ��‫ خ‬zaxama ‘to thrust back’; ‘heftig zurückstoßen’; ‫م‬ zaxm ‘Gewalttat, Heftigkeit’ (Hava 1982: 286; Wahrmund I 827);

176

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

~ Daθīna ⟨zaxmī⟩ ‘tacéturne, misanthrope, froid, morose’ (GD 1828) ~ Aleppo zaxam ‘montrer à qqn un visage courroucé’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 309) ~ Lebanon zaxm ‘force’ (Feghali 1938: 775); zaxīm ‘strong, tough’; zaxme ‘a rebuke; heavy rain’ (Frayha 1973: 70) ~ Kǝndērīb zaxǝm, f zaxme, pl zxām ‘stark, kräftig, tüchtig’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 62). 285

z-r-b¹

sꜣb/zꜣb (Pyr) ‘drip, gush out’; ‘fließen, rinnen’ (Faulkner 1962: 209; Wb III 420) ‫�ز‬ ~ Aram ‫ּבּובית‬ ִ ‫ זַ ְר‬zarbūbīt ‘Kanal’ (Levy I 552) || Ar �‫ ر ب‬zariba ‘couler (se dit de l’eau)’; ‘fließen (Wasser), auslaufen’ (DAF I 983; Wahrmund I 829); ~ Oman mǝrzāb ‘gutter’ (Eades 2011: 31) ~ Aleppo zarab ‘couler, fuir, perdre son contenu (: vase)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 300) ~ S.E. Anatolia mizrīb ‘gouttière’ (Grigore 2007: 40) ~ Lebanon zarzab ‘dégoutter, dégouliner’ (Denizeau 1960: 217) ~ Palest zarab ‘rinnen’; mizrāb ‘Rinne’ (Bauer 1957: 245) ~ Egypt zarab ‘to flow, to relieve nature’ (Spiro 1895: 247); il-bagara tuzṛub ‘die Kuh trat Durchfall’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 182) ~ Algeria zreb ‘haie’ (Ben Sedira 1910: 278) ~ Morocco zerba ‘hurry (n)’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 103) ~ Tangier zreb ‘se dépêcher’ (W. Marçais 1911: 318). 286

z-r-b²

snb.t/znb.t (Pyr) ‘Mauer, Zinne, Mauerzinne (auch von Gebäude)’ (Brockelmann ‫�ز‬ 1932: 113; Hannig 1995: 717) || Ar �‫ ر ب‬zaraba ‘to pen, to enclose’ (Hava 1982: 286); ~ Iraq zirrība, pl zarāyib ‘pen, corral, stockade, fold’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 207) ~ Aleppo zrābe/zrēbe ‘frais de parcage du bétail’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 309) ~ Damascus zrībe, pl zarāyeb ‘pen’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 171) ~ Lebanon zrībe ‘enclos où l’on parque le bétail’ (Denizeau 1960: 217) ~ Palest zarab ‘einpferchen’ (Bauer 1957: 87) ~ Egypt zarbiyya ‘hedge, fence’ (Spiro 1895: 247); zarb ‘Zaun (Hecke)’; zarība ‘Pferch, Viehstall’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 183) ~ Sétif zarb ‘entourage de meule’ (Lentin 1959: 10) ~ Morocco ẓeṛb ‘hedge’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 193) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨zarîbah, pl zarāʾib⟩ ‘pen, corral’ (Corriente 1997: 227) ~ Ḥassāniyya zerreb ‘entourer d’une clôture’ (TaineCheikh 1990: 62).

177

285. z-r-b ¹ – 289. z- ʿ -q

287

z-r-d

ḏꜣd (Pyr) ‘kill, entangle’; ‘Schlachtopfer abstechen, abkehlen’ (Ember 1930: 15; ‫�ز‬ Wb V 527) || Ar ‫ رد‬zarada ‘to strangle with a rope’; ‫ �م�ز رد‬mazrad ‘throat, gullet’ (Hava 1982: 287); ~ Lebanon zarad ‘serrer le nœud (d’une corde)’ (Denizeau 1960: 217) ~ Egypt zirrāda ‘Nackenschlinge’; zaṛada ‘Schlaufe an der Nacken-schlinge’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 183). 288

z-ʿ-z-ʿ

śʿj (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘zittern, in Angst sein’ (Wb IV 43); sʿ3y ‘tremble’ (Faulkner ‫�ز‬ 1962: 213) ~ Heb ‫ זְ וָ ָעה‬zǝwāʿāh ‘trembling, terror’ (BDB 266) || Ar ‫ �ع�ز‬zaʿzaʿa

‫�ز‬

‫ع‬

‘erschüttern, heftig schütteln’; ‫ �ع�زا‬zaʿzāʿ ‘orkanartig (Wind)’ (Wahrmund I ‫ع‬ 707, 832–33); ~ Ḥaḍramawt zāʿ ‘secouer, agiter’; zawwaʿ ‘faire trembler’ = zaʿzaʿ (Landberg 1901: 1705–06) ~ Iraq zaʿzāʿ ‘to shake violently, rock’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 203) ~ Daθīna tzaʿzeʿū-ši rāsek ‘wackele nicht mit deinem Kopfe’ (GD 1838) ~ Yemen zaʿzaʿ ‘to raise one’s voice loudly’ (Piamenta 1990: 200) ~ Rwala ðaʿðaʿ bel-qowm ‘he has shaken the enemy’ ~ zāʿ ‘leap up, jump up’ (Musil 1928: 536, 157) ~ Aleppo zaʿzaʿ ‘secouer, s’ébranler, remuer violemment’; zaʿzaʿa ‘secousse, ébranlement’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 313) ~ Palest zaʿzaʿ ‘erschüttern’; zaʿzaʿa ‘Erschütterung’ (Bauer 1957: 102) ~ Sinai ðaʿðaʿ ‘to flutter’ (Stewart 1990: 212) ~ Takrūna zaʿʿez ‘faire sursauter qq’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 1673) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨zaʿzaʿ, pl zaʿāziʿ⟩ ‘storm’ (Corriente 1997: 230). Cf. Ghomara (Berber) zeʿzeʿ ‘to tremble’ (Mourigh 2016: 435).

289

z-ʿ-q

ḏʿq (LE) ‘cry out’; ‘schreien, rufen’ (r zum Himmel); ḏʿqt ‘Geschrei’ (Wb V 541; Hannig 1995: 999, 1001) ~ Heb ‫ ָצ ַעק‬ṣāʿaq ‘cry out’ (BDB 858) ~ Soq zaʿáq/saʿáq ‫�ز‬ (Leslau 1938: 155) || Ar �‫ �ع ق‬zaʿaqa ‘shriek, cry out’ (Hava 1982: 289); ~ Sinai zaʿʿag ‘to scream, yell, cry’; ziʿāg ‘screaming, crying’ (Stewart 1990: 285) ~ Kǝndērīb zaʿwaq ‘schreien’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 62) ~ Palest zaʿaq ‘rufen’ (Bauer 1957: 248) ~ Lebanon zʿīq ‘criaillerie’ (Feghali 1935: 41) ~ Egypt zaʿaq/ zaʿʿaq ‘cry out, shout, shriek’ (Spiro 1895: 250).

178 290

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

z-f-f

sp/zp (Pyr) ‘time’; ‘Angelegenheit, Fall von, Mal’; sp 3 sp 4 n hrw ‘three or four times a day’ (Faulkner 1962: 221; Wb IIIّ 435; Calice 1936: 78; Loprieno 1995: 72) || ‫�ز ف‬ ‫�ز فّ ة‬ Ar ��� zaffah ‘one time, one action’; �� zaffa ‘to hasten; to blow gently (wind)’ (Hava 1982: 290); ~ Rwala zafzāf ‘swift’ (Musil 1928: 254) ~ Marazig zaff ‘passer en sifflant’ (Boris 1958: 246) ~ Oman zeffe ‘Brautzug’ (Reinhardt 1894: 41) ~ Egypt zaffa ‘bridal procession’ (Spiro 1895: 251) ~ Morocco tzǝfzīf ‘sifflement du vent’ (Prémare V 343) ~ Malta ⟨żiffa⟩ ‘impeto; vento subitaneo’ (Vassalli 1796: 675). 291

z-f-n

ṯnf (Gr) ‘tanzen’; ‘enjoyment (?)’ (Wb V 380; Faulkner 1962: 306) ~ Dem ḏnf ‘Musikant’ (DG 682) ~ Ge zafana ‘dance’ ~ Argobba zäfän ‘dance, song, chant’ ‫�ز ف‬ (Leslau 1987: 632; 1997: 227) ~ Mah zǝfōn ‘dance’ (Johnstone 1987: 512) || Ar �‫�� ن‬ zafana ‘mit dem Fuße stoßen, tanzen’ (Wahrmund I 837); ~ Al-Andalus ⟨zafna⟩ ‘dance’ (Corriente 1997: 231) ~ Bahrain zafan dance’ (Holes 2001: 222) ~ Malta ⟨żifen, jiżfen⟩ ‘ballare, saltellare’ (Vassalli 1796: 675) ~ Oman zefen ‘Schwerttänze aufführen’ (Reinhardt 1894: 418) ~ zfn ‘d’abord être agité et ensuite danser’ (GD 1843). 292

z-l-m

ḏꜣm(w) (MK) ‘Kollektivum als Nachwuchs, Jugend, Generation); als Vertreter der männlichen Bevölkerung im Gegensatz zu Frauen und Kindern’; ‘youth (collectively), young men, troops’; ḫn ḏꜣmw ‘camp’ (Faulkner 1962: 319; Ember 1930: 14; Wb V 523) ~ Aram ṣalmā, pl ṣalmey/ṣalmānayyā/ṣalmātā ‘idol, form, figure, picture’ (Sokoloff 1990: 966) ~ Syr ṣlem/ṣalmā ‘simulacrum, imago, per-

‫�ز ة‬

ّ‫�ز‬

ّ

sona’ (ThS 3408) || Ar ��‫ لم‬zalamah, pl ‫ لا‬zullām ‘man, foot passenger’; ‫�م�ز ل‬ ‫م‬ ‫م‬ muzallam ‘lively little man’ (Hava 1982: 294); ~ Rwala zalama ‘tribesman’; ṣanam ‘fighters, warriors’ (Musil 1928: 594; 573, 601) ~ Aleppo zalame, pl zlām ‘homme, individu, homme viril, un brave, … usité aussi en Mésopotamie, dans le désert de Syrie et l’Arabie centrale; est emprunté à la langue des Nomades’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 318) ~ Sinai zalama, pl zlām/zilm ‘man’ (Stewart 1990: 286); ‘friend’ (C. Bailey 1991: 440) ~ ʿAnazeh zalama ‘individu’ (Landberg 1940: 26) ~ Palmyra zalame ‘homme’ (Cantineau 1934 II 10) ~ Mosul zalma, pl zilm ‘a stocky youth who

179

290. z-f-f – 294. z-m-l

has outgrown lightheadedness and entered manhood’ (Al-Bakrî 1972: 247) ~ Kǝndērīb zalame, pl zlām ‘Mann’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 63) ~ Najd zilm ‘men’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 385) ~ Damascus zalame, pl zǝlǝm ‘man’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 145) ~ Palmyra zalme, pl zǝlom ‘homme’ (Cantineau 1934 II 89) ~ Tripoli (Lebanon) zǝlm ‘gens’ (El-Hajjé 1954: 13) ~ Palest zalame, pl (a)zlām ‘Mann’ (Bauer 1957: 13). 293

z-m-r

zbꜣ (OK) ‘flute’; ‘die Flöte blasen’ (Ember 1930: 48; Wb III 433) ~ Akkad zammāru ‘flute player’ (Parpola 2007: 192) ~ Heb ‫ זָ ַמר‬zāmar ‘to make music’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 405) ~ Ge zammara ‘play a musical instrument’ (Leslau 1987: 639) ~ Amh zämära ‘singing’ (Kane 1990: 1615) || Saf zmrt ‘flute-playing girl’ (Al-Jallad 2015: ‫�ز‬ 354) ~ Ar ‫ �مر‬zamara ‘Flöte spielen’ (Wahrmund I 845); ~ Arabia mizmār, pl mizāmīr ‘double reed pipe; (its sound as it were of profane levity offends the religious ears of good Muslims)’ (Doughty 1888 II 118) ~ Yemen mizmār, pl mazāmīr ‘flauto’; zammar ‘suonare il piffero’ (Rossi 1939: 209, 227) ~ Oman zemor, pl zmūr ‘Pfeife’ (Reinhardt 1894: 71) [< *zmr] ~ Iraq zammaġ ‘to sound a car horn’ (Abu-Haidar 1991: 200) ~ Aleppo ẓamar, yǝẓmor ‘chanter’; ẓamr, pl ẓmūr(a) ‘flûte double formée de deux roseaux liés ensemble’; ẓammār ‘joueur de cornemuse’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 503) ~ Damascus zammer tlǝtt marrāt ‘blow the horn three times’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 24) ~ Lebanon zammūr, pl zmāmīr ‘flûte en roseau’ (Denizeau 1960: 226) ~ Hasköy zǝmmāṛa ‘Hals, Luftröhre’ (Talay 2002: 85) ~ Palest zammar ‘flöten’; zummāru ‘seine Schalmei’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 30) ~ Egypt zummāṛa ‘Flöte’; zimmāṛ ‘Flötenspieler’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 191) ~ Tunis ẓoṃṃaṛ ‘il a sifflé’ (D. Cohen 1975: 24) ~ Algeria zemmār ‘hautbois’ (Ben Sedira 1910: 281) ~ Malta ⟨żammar, jżammar⟩ ‘suonare il piffero’ (Vassalli 1796: 667). 294

z-m-l

‫�ز ة‬

zmꜣ (Pyr) ‘vereinigen, sich gesellen’ (Wb III 453) || Ar ��‫ �م�ل‬zumlah ‘party, com‫�ز ة‬ ‫�ز‬ panions’; ��‫ �م�ل‬zamalah ‘family, household’; ‫ �مي���ل‬zamīl ‘fellow rider, colleague’ (Hava 1982: 296); ~ Iraq zāmal ‘be a friend, colleague’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 206) ~ Egypt zimīl, pl zumala/zumalāt ‘colleague, comrade’ (Spiro 1895: 256) ~ Marazig zmāla ‘entreprise commune’ (Boris 1958: 252) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨zamîl⟩ ‘companion’ (Corriente 1997: 233).

180 295

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

z-w-r

zꜣ (Pyr) ‘betake oneself’; ‘sich wohin begehen’ (Faulkner 1962: 207; Calice 1936: 78) ~ Ge tazāwwara ‘go back and forth’ (Leslau 1987: 646) ~ Amh zäyyärä ‘to visit, to arrive, come to’ (Kane 1990: 1672) || Ar ‫ �زا ر‬zāra ‘to visit’ (Hava 1982: 300); ~ Khawētna mazāṛ ‘Wallfahrtsort’ (Talay 1999: 86) ~ Aleppo zār ‘visiter’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 322) ~ Damascus zār ‘pay a call’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 33) ~ Palmyra zawwāṛa ‘pèlerins’ (Cantineau 1934 II 82) ~ Lebanon nzār ‘être visité, recevoir des visites’ (Feghali 1938: 360) ~ Palest zār ‘besuchen’; zyāra ‘Besuch’ (Bauer 1957: 56) ~ Sinai zwārah, pl zuwāyir ‘visitation’ (Stewart 1990: 287) ~ Egypt zār ‘to visit’ (Spiro 1895: 243) ~ Morocco ẓāṛ ‘rendre visite à qqn’ (Prémare V 409). 296

z-w-l

sꜣ (Pyr) ‘sich begeben nach (r)’ (Wb III 413); i҆zy (Pyr) ‘go, hasten!’ (imperative) (Faulkner 1962: 29; Calice 1936: 122) ~ Heb ‫ ָאזַ ל‬ʾāzal ‘to go away’ (BDB 23) || Ar ‫ �زا ل‬zāla ‘to retire (from a place)’ (Hava 1982: 301); cf. 348. s-y-r; ~ Aleppo zāl ‘cesser, s’éloigner’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 323) ~ Egypt zāl ‘to disappear, cease, remove’ (Spiro 1895: 244) ~ Morocco zuwwel iddik ‘hands off!’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 94) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨zāl⟩ ‘to disappear, cease, get away’ (Corriente 1997: 237) ~ Malta ⟨żal, iżul⟩ ‘andar via, allontanarsi’ (Vassalli 1796: 680). 297

z-y-t

ḏ.t/ḏtt (ḏyt) (LE) ‘der Ölbaum; die Olive’; ‘olive tree’ (Wb V 618; Goldwasser 2002: 48) ~ s̱̱e-t ‘Öl’ (Helck 1971: 527) ~ Copt (Sa‘idic) ϫⲟⲉⲓⲧ ‘olive tree, olive’ (Crum 1939: 790b) || Saf zt ‘oil’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 638) ‫ �ز � ت‬zuyūt ‘olive oil’ (Hava 1982: 302); ‫ �ز � ت‬zayt, pl � ~ Ar � ‫يو‬ ‫�ي‬ ~ Aleppo zayt/zēt (n.coll.), pl zyūt ‘huile d’olive’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 324) ~ Damascus zēt ‘Olivenöl’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 159) ~ Palest zēt, pl zētātna ‘unser Öl’ (Bauer 1957: 223) ~ Tunis zīt ‘Olivenöl’ (Singer 1984: 116) ~ Malta ⟨żejt, pl żjut⟩ ‘oglio’ (Vassalli 1796: 671).

181

295. z-w-r – 299. s-

298

z-y-n

‫�ز‬

‫أ�ز ن‬

jzn.w ‘etwas Gutes oder Freundliches’ (Wb I 129) || Ar �‫ ي� ن‬zayn, pl � ‫ � ي�ا‬ʾazyān ‘beauty’ (Hava 1982: 203); ~ Baghdad zēn ‘good’ (Blanc 1964: 34) ~ Oman zēn ‘gut, schön’ (Reinhardt 1894: 117, 42) ~ Āzǝx dzayyen ‘sich fein machen’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 195) ~ ʿAnazeh ez-zēn min en-nās ‘les bons gens’ (Landberg 1940: 29) ~ Iraq zēn ‘good’ (Abu-Haidar 1991: 200) ~ Palest zēn ‘beauté’ (Denizeau 1960: 233) ~ Najd bezēn ‘wohl, in gutem Zustand’; azyan ‘schöner, besser’ (Socin 1901 III 274) ~ Tripoli (Libya) zēn ‘bellezza’ (Griffini 1913: 29) ~ Mzāb zēn ‘bien, beau’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 115) ~ Cherchell mǝzyān ‘bien portant, florissant’ (Grand’Henry 1972: 84) ~ Ḥassāniyya zeyn ‘beau’; zyān ‘to become good’ (D. Cohen 1963: 123; Heath 2004: 302). S 299

s-

s- (causative prefix; Gardiner 1950: 211): sdšr ‘redden’ [← dšr ‘red’] (Faulkner 1962: 257) ~ Heb {h-}: ‫ ִה ְק ִּדיׁש‬hiqdīš ‘he consecrated’ (cf. ‫ ָקדֹוׁש‬qādōš ‘holy’) ~ Aram {h-}: hanpeq ‘he brought out’ (cf. nǝpaq ‘he went out’; M. Jastrow 1886: 925–926) ~ Sab {h-}: hšbʿ ‘to satisfy’ (Biella 1982: 510) ~ Soq {š-}: šendér ‘con‫�ذ‬ sacrer’ (Leslau 1938: 258) [< *š + ndr] (cf. Ar ‫ ن� ر‬naðara ‘to make a vow’; Hava 1982: 761); The Ancient Egyptian causative marker {s-} finds the close Semitic phonological equivalent *s¹ and its aforecited reflexes across this language family, e.g., the Akkadian š-stem. (cf. Rubin 2004: 477).

~ Ḥassāniyya saxḍar ‘faire verdir, teindre en vert’; sakḥal ‘noircir’; saqwam ‘mettre droit’; saʿṛab ‘arabiser, annoblir’; sakbaṛ ‘considérer comme grand’ (D. Cohen 1963: 131).

Cohen (loc. cit., 132) notes, in relation to the lexical productivity of this morphological device: “Le thème est donc relativement peu représenté. Il ne s’ensuit pas qu’il ne soit pas productif. Au contraire il semble bien qu’il soit possible de tirer une forme en sa- de tous les noms de couleurs, des termes d’orientation et des noms des tribus dont quelque caractéristique est passé en proverbe.”

182

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

300

s-ʾ-l

‫أ‬

sꜣr/sꜣr.t (MK) ‘Wunsch, Wunsch sagen’; ‘desire’ (Wb IV 18–19; Ember 1930: 7)

~ Akkad šâlu ‘inquire, interrogate, question’ (M. Cohen 2011: 11) || Ar ‫ ��س� ل‬sa‌ʾala ‘to ask’ (Hava 1982: 304); ~ Aleppo sāyal, ysāyel ‘interroger (variante moderne de sāʾala yusāʾilu)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 324) ~ Egypt sayal ‘fragen’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 132) ~ Najd sāl, ysāl ‘to ask’ (Ingham 1994: 179) ~ Oman seʾel ‘fragen’ (Reinhardt 1894: 144) ~ Palest sa‌ʾal/sāyal ‘fragen jemandem nach’ (Bauer 1957: 116) ~ Tripoli (Libya) shel ‘domandare’ (Cesàro 1939: 203) ~ Douz yashal ‘fragen’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2014: 296) ~ Djidjelli sāwǝl/sell ‘demander, questionner’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 97, 161) ~ Mzāb sawwǝl ‘il a interrogé’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 117) ~ Ḥassāniyya sawwal ‘id.’ (D. Cohen 1963: 121). 301

s-b-ḥ

sbḥ (Pyr) ‘cry out, cry’; ‘schreien’ (Faulkner 1962: 220; Calice 1936: 79; Wb IV 551) || Ar ����‫ ����س ب‬sabaḥa ‘louer, exalter Dieu’ (DAF I 1041);

‫ح‬

~ Aleppo sabbaḥ ‘glorifier Dieu’; tasbīḥ ‘glorification de Dieu’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 330) ~ Lebanon tesebḥa ‘cantique’ (Feghali 1938: 632) ~ Kǝndērīb sǝbḥān ‘Preis, gepriesen sei’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 64) ~ Palest sabbaḥ ‘preisen’ (Bauer 1957: 234) ~ Egypt sabbiḥ ‘to praise God’ (Spiro 1895: 267). 302

s-b-l

sbn/zbn (Pyr) ‘glide away’; ‘gleiten, straucheln’ (Faulkner 1962: 220; Wb II 89; ّ Calice 1936: 191) ~ Heb ‫ ְׁש ִביל‬šəḇīl ‘way, path’ (BDB 987) || Ar ‫ ����سب���ل‬sabbala ‘reichlich regen (Himmel)’ (Wahrmund I 874); ~ Damascus sabīl ṃayy ‘fountain’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 97) ~ Palest sibīl ‘Brunnen als Stiftung’ (Bauer 1957: 67) ~ Egypt sibīl ‘fountain’ (Spiro 1895: 268) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨yansabal ansabal⟩ ‘to flow’ (Corriente 1997: 243). 303

s-b-y

sbi҆ (BD) ‘rebel serpent’; sbj.t ‘Bezeichnung der Uraeusschlange’; śꜣb.t (Pyr) ّ ‘bunte Schlange’ (Faulkner 1962: 220; Wb IV 89, 18) || Ar �‫ �� بس‬sabiyy ‘peau ôtée,

‫ّة‬

ّ

‫�ي‬

‫ ��س� ا �ل‬sabiyyu l-ḥayyah ‘the slough of the � dépouille du serpent’ (DAF I 1040); ����‫حي‬ ‫ب�ي‬ serpent’ (Lane 1303).

300. s- ʾ -l – 306. s-ǧ-m

304

183

s-t-r

štꜣ (Pyr) ‘mysterious, secret, hidden, hiding’; ‘geheim, verborgen’ (Faulkner 1962: 272; Wb IV 551; DLE II 138; Calice 1936: 208) ~ Heb ‫ ָס ַתר‬sātar ‘to hide, conceal’ (BDB 711) ~ Sab hstr ‘protection’ (Avanzini 1980: 296) ~ Tham strt ‘shelter’ (Winnett & Reed 1970: 195) || Saf s¹tr ‘shelter’ (Al-Jallad 2015: 343) ~ Ar ‫��ست��ر‬ satara ‘bedecken, verhüllen, verschleiern’ (Wahrmund I 876); ~ N. Yemen sattir ʿalnā ‘Gott schütze uns’ (Behnstedt 1987: 262) ~ Oman stāra ‘Vorhang’ (Reinhardt 1894: 44) ~ Hijaz sitāra ‘curtain’ (Omar 1975: 273) ~ Najd sitir ‘curtain’ (Ingham 1982: 59) ~ Rwala as-sitr w-al-ʿelm ‘protection and good news’ (Musil 1928: 541) ~ Iraq mastūr ‘hidden, concealed’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 213) ~ S.E. Anatolia sǝtāre ‘courtine’ (Grigore 2007: 83) ~ Palmyra sutṛa ‘veste tunique de soldat’ (Cantineau 1934 II 26) ~ Lebanon satter ‘bien cacher’ (Denizeau 1960: 237) ~ Palest satar ‘verhüllen’ (Bauer 1957: 333) ~ Egypt satar, justur ‘conceal, veil’ (Spiro 1895: 279) ~ Morocco stǝr ‘couvrir, recouvrir; préserver, protéger’ (Prémare VI 33) ~ Ḥassāniyya ster ‘voiler’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 154) ~ Malta ⟨satar, jistor⟩ ‘nascondere’ (Vassalli 1796: 585). 305

s-ǧ-r

śd.t (Pyr) [< *sdr < *sǧr] ‘fire, flame, burnt-offering, firewood’; ‘Feuer, Flamme, Feuer anzünden, Feuer anfachen’ (Faulkner 1962: 257; Wb IV 375; Brockelmann ‫ ���جس‬saǧara ‘Feuer anzünden’ (Wahrmund I 877); 1932: 114) || Ar ‫�ر‬ ~ Kǝndērīb saǧaṛ, yǝsǧǝṛ ‘anschüren (den Backofen)’; sǧōṛ ‘Brenn-material für den Backofen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 66) ~ Mosul saǧaġ ‘he lit the fire in the oven or the hearth’ (Al-Bakrī 1972: 262) [< *sǧr] ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nisaǧǧār tasǧīr an-nār⟩ ‘to pile up embers with a fire-shovel’; ⟨siǧār⟩ ‘fire-shovel, heat’ (Corriente 1997: 244). 306

s-ǧ-m

gśm (LE) ‘ein Gewässer (im Delta?) das Wellen schlägt’; ‘tempest, rainstorm’ (Wb V 206; Hoch 1994: 350); gsm ‘stormy lake’ (DLE II 194) ~ Dem gsm ‘Sturm’ (DG 593) ~ Copt ϫⲟⲥⲉⲙ ‘tempest’ (Crum 1939: 832b) ~ Akkad šagāmu ‘to thunder, resound’ (CAD XVII/1 63) ~ Heb ‫ ּגֶ ֶׁשם‬gešem ‘rain, shower’ (BDB 177) ~ Ugar ‫ ��س‬saǧama ‘fließen, strömen, vergosgšm ‘rain, downpour’ (DUL 310) || Ar � � ‫�ج م‬ sen werden (Thränen, Wasser)’ (Wahrmund I 878); saǧam ‘water, tear’ (Hava 1982: 310);

184

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

~ Palest siǧām ud-damʿ min ʿēni ‘le flot des larmes de mes yeux’ (Saarisalo 1932: XIX 1) ~ Najd saǧǧam ‘in sich versunken sein’ (Socin 1901 III 275) ~ Daθīna ⟨saǧam⟩ ‘gronder (tonnerre, eau, torrent, pluie), bruire, murmurer, retentir’ (GD 1903–4). 307

s-ḥ-b

sẖb/sẖp (Med) ‘to swallow’; ‘von Einnehmen eines Heilmittels in Flüssigen oder festen Form; einschlürfen’; shbw ‘a draught of medicine’ (Faulkner 1962: 244; Wb IV 268, 269; Osing 2001: 568, fn 15) ~ Heb ‫‘ ָס ַחב‬to drag’ (BDB 694) || Ar ‫ ��س‬saḥaba ‘schleppen; gierig essen und trinken’ (Wahrmund I 880); � �‫ح� ب‬ ~ Damascus saḥab ‘enlever, retirer’ (Denizeau 1960: 238) ~ Kǝndērīb saḥbe ‘Fließgewässer, Bach’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 66) ~ Palest saḥab ‘ziehen’ (Bauer 1957: 375) ~ Egypt saḥab ‘to drag, pull, draw’ (Spiro 1895: 270) ~ Morocco sḥab ‘former une longue file (gens qui marchent)’ (Prémare VI 41). 308

s-ḥ-q

šḥq (LE) ‘dust cloud, pulverized grain; chaff’; ‘Spreu, Häcksel’ (Hoch 1994: 288; DLE II 133; Hannig 1995: 833; Albright 1918: 246) ~ Copt ϣϩⲓϭ ‘dust’ (Crum 1939: ‫ ��س‬saḥaqa ‘he bruised, brayed, � 612b) ~ Heb ‫ ַש ַחק‬šaḥaq ‘dust’ (BDB 1007) || Ar �‫ح ق‬ pounded’; ‘fricando trivit, et contrivit comminuitve in pulverem’ (Lane 1318; Freytag 1837: 273); ~ Egypt saḥaq ‘crush, reduce to powder, pulverize’ (Spiro 1895: 671; Badawi & Hinds 1986: 402) ~ Tunis sḥaq ‘poussier de charbon’ (D. Cohen 1975: 154) ~ Yemen saḥwaq ‘to crush spice-sauce’ (Piamenta 1990: 217) ~ Palest saḥaq ‘pulverisieren, zerreiben’ (Bauer 1957: 236, 374) ~ Djidjelli sḥāq ‘cendre, débris de charbon’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 266) ~ Morocco sḥaq ‘broyer finement, pulvériser, triturer, concasser’ (Prémare VI 45) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨saḥaqt⟩ ‘crush, pound’ (Corriente 1997: 246). 309

s-x-r

ṯḥr (LE) ‘hold in contempt’; ‘schlechte Handlungsweise gegen jemanden’; ṯrḥ ‘spotten’ (Wb V 395, 388); sxr ‘reproach’ (DLE II 74, 72) || Saf sḫr ‘to be mocked, ‫ ��س‬saxira ‘scoff at’ (Ambros 2004: 130); � fooled’ (Al-Jallad 2015: 341) ~ Ar ‫�خر‬ ~ S.E. Anatolia maṣxaṛa ‘Gespött’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 199) ~ Sinai maṣxarah ‘humiliating, making a fool of s.o.’ (Stewart 1990: 250) ~ Damascus

307. s-ḥ-b – 311. s-r-b

185

ḥāžtak maṣxara baqa ‘don’t be ridiculous!’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 193) ~ Aleppo maṣxara ‘objet de dérision; la risée des gens’ (Barthélemy 1935– 69: 429) ~ Lebanon masxar ‘se moquer de qqn’ (Denizeau 1960: 494) ~ S.E. Anatolia maṣxaṛa ‘Gespött’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 198) ~ Palest masxara, pl masāxir ‘id.’; masxara ‘Hohn’; tmasxar ‘höhnen’; tmasxar ʿala ‘spotten’ (Bauer 1957: 134, 160, 283); masxara ‘mockery’ (Piamenta 2000: 240) ~ Egypt itmasxar ‘mock, ridicule, mimic, make fun of’ (Spiro 1895: 567) ~ Tripoli (Libya) tmasxar ‘burlare’ (Cesàro 1939: 242) ~ Takrūna ṣxaṛ ‘se moquer de, se jouer de’; tmaṣxor ‘plaisanter, faire de l’esprit’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 2194) ~ Cherchell tmesxǝr ‘il s’est moqué’ (Grand’Henry 1972: 47) ~ Djidjelli tmesxīr ‘fait de se moquer, plaisanterie’; tmesxro ‘moquez-vous’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 235, 95) ~ Morocco soxrēya ‘objet de risée’; mǝsxāra ‘moquerie; plaisanterie de mauvais goût’ (Prémare VI 50) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nasxar saxart⟩ ‘to mock or scoff’ (Corriente 1997: 246). 310

s-x-n

sḫn (Med) ‘eine Krankheitserscheinung; Anschwellung’ (Wb IV 254) ~ Akkad šuḫnu ‘heat’ (M. Cohen 2011: 100) ~ Heb ‫ ְׁש ִחין‬šǝḥīn ‘boil, eruption’ (BDB 1006) || ‫ ��س‬saxana ‘be hot, suffer from fever’ (Hava 1982: 313); � Ar �‫�خ� ن‬ ~ Yemen sxūn ‘tepido’ (Rossi 1939: 242) ~ Aleppo saxan ‘devenir chaud’; sxūne ‘fièvre’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 337) ~ Damascus sxūne ‘fever’; saxxan ‘heiß machen’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 88; Grotzfeld 1965: 159) ~ Lebanon saxne ‘une maladie’ (Denizeau 1960: 240) ~ Palest sxūne ‘Fieber’ (Bauer 1957: 111) ~ Egypt saxan ‘to wound, cause pain’; suxūna ‘fever’ (Spiro 1895: 273) ~ Marazig ṣxāna ‘état febrile’ (Boris 1958: 268). 311

s-r-b

sꜣb (MK) ‘cause to tarry’; śꜣb ‘jemanden verweilen lassen’ (Faulkner 1962: 209; Wb IV 17) || Ar �‫ ��سر ب‬saraba ‘von etwas abgeleitet werden’ (Wahrmund I 892); ~ Egypt sarrab ‘cause to go astray’ (Spiro 1895: 275) ~ Sinai saráḅ ‘to mislead’ (Stewart 1990: 262); misrāb, pl masārīb ‘path, track’ (C. Bailey 1991: 441) ~ Najd sarrab ‘to raid on horseback; to lead off in a line’; sirb ‘a line of men’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 378; Ingham 1994: 178) ~ Lebanon masrūb ‘a long and narrow lane’ (Frayha 1973: 81) ~ Marazig sarrab ‘filer tout droit’ (Boris 1958: 270) ~ Rwala surba, pl sirab ‘troop of horse-riders’ (Musil 1928: 515).

186 312

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

s-r-b-ṭ

šbd/ša-b-d (LE) ‘Stock, zum Prügeln’; ‘staff, rod’ (Wb IV 442; Helck 1962: 570; Hoch 1994: 277); šꜣbd ‘stock’ (DLE II 109) ~ Dem šbt ‘Stock’ (DG 499) ~ Copt ϣⲃⲱⲧ, pl ϣⲃⲁⲧⲉ ‘rod, staff’ (Crum 1939: 554a) ~ Mand šibṭa ‘rod, staff (fig.)’ (Drower & Macuch 1963: 459) ~ Barwar šarbǝṭana ‘pliant wooden stick for driving animals’ (Khan 2008a: 1401) ~ Aram ‫רביטא‬ ָ ‫ ַש‬šarbīṭā ‘staff, scepter’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 1628) || Akkad šabbiṭu ‘staff, scepter’ (CAD XVII/1: 10), ‘truncheon’ (Parpola 2007: 276) || Ar ‫ ��سر�ب��ط‬sarbaṭa ‘être long et mince (se dit d’un melon)’ (DAF I 1078); Erman (1892: 119) states: “Das ägyptische Wort kommt im neuen Reich vor, wo es wie ein Lehnwort geschrieben wird.”

~ Arabia sarbūṭ ‘coffee pestle’ (Doughty 1888: 246) ~ Palest sarūṭ, pl sawārīṭ ‘Stab (lang, dick)’ (Bauer 1957: 285) ~ Cypriot Ar šrapít ‘the edible long stem of certain plants; general term for such plants, e.g., artichokes’ (own obs.) ~ Marazig ssarbaṭ ‘aller en file’; sarbūṭ, pl sarābīṭ ‘file (de gens ou de cha­ meaux)’ (Boris 1958: 271) ~ Malta ⟨sarbut, pl srabat⟩ ‘fila di gente o di altri animali’ (Vassalli 1796: 593). 313

s-r-ḥ

sꜣḥ/śꜣḥ (Pyr) ‘Ort erreichen; sich nähern, herankommen an; frei weidend’; ‘reach, arrive at’ (Wb IV 20; Faulkner 1962: 210) || Ar ‫ ��سر‬saraḥa ‘conduire le

‫ح‬

troupeau au pâturage dès le point du jour’ (DAF I 1344); ~ Khābūra saraḥ ‘to graze freely (of sheep and goats)’ (Brockett 1985: 123) ~ Rwala serārīḥ ‘herders’ (Musil 1928: 212) ~ Aleppo saraḥ ‘errer, paître en liberté (: animal), errer dans la campagne’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 340) ~ Najd saraḥ ‘to roam, to pasture at pleasure’; sarrāḥ ‘der Hirte’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 378; Hess 1938: 62) ~ ʿAnazeh sarraḥ ‘faire sortir le matin, mener paître’ (Landberg 1940: 30) ~ Yemen saraḥ ‘andarsene’; ‘morgens gehen’ (Rossi 1939: 192; Behnstedt 1987: 97) ~ Damascus tsarraḥ ‘entlassen werden’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 28) ~ Suxne saraḥ, yisraḥ ‘auf die Weide gehen’ (Behnstedt 1994: 281) ~ Palest saraḥ ‘ausgehen’ (Schmidt & Kahle 1918 I 282) ~ Egypt saraḥ ‘go to pasture, graze (of animals), wander, stray (of the mind)’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 407) ~ Sinai saraḥ ‘to go to, or be at, pasture’ (C. Bailey 1991: 441); sarrāḥ ‘one who is herding’ (Stewart 1990: 262) ~ Mzāb kunt nasraḥ ‘je faisais paître’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 123) ~ Djidjelli saṛḥ ‘fait de paître’; srīḥ ‘paître’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 86, 225) ~ Morocco sraḥ ‘(le bétail) pour le conduire au pâturage; mener paître’ (Prémare VI 67).

187

312. s-r-b-ṭ – 316. s-ṭ-r

314

s-r-f

śrf (Pyr) ‘warm (sein); die Wärme; Hitze; Fieber’; ‘warm, frisch hergestellt (vom Brot und Bier)’ (Wb IV 195, 196; V 522; Sethe 1962: 182); srft ‘fever’; srf ‘warm; fever, inflammation; mood; warmth, temperature, passion’ (Faulkner 1962: 236; DLE 58; Gardiner 1957: 591; cf. Erman 1892: 118): srf-i҆b (divine name or title) ‘Hot-hearted One’; srfrf ‘be very warm’ (van der Plas & Borghouts 1998: 260) ~ Dem srrf ‘Brand’ (DG 443) ~ Copt ⲥⲣⲁϥ ‘wound, sore’; ⲥⲓⲣⲉϥⲉ ‘(same or) scab’ (Crum 1939: 357a) ~ Aram ṣrp ‘refine’ (Segal 1983: 213) || Heb ‫ ָש ַרף‬śārap ‘burn’ (BDB 976) ~ Ugar šrp ‘burn’ (DUL 831) || Akkad ṣarāpu ‘to burn’ (Parpola 2007:

‫ف‬

‫ف‬

‫أ‬

156) || Ar ��‫ ��سر‬sarifa/��‫ � ��سر‬ʾasrafa ‘he acted immoderately’ (Lane 1351); ʾasrafa ʿala nafsihi ‘suivre ses mauvais penchants’ (Dozy I 649); ~ Aleppo tṣarraf fi … ‘avoir un commerce charnel avec (un animal femelle)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 430) ~ Lebanon ṣeref ‘demander le mâle (vache, etc.)’ (Feghali 1938: 789), ṣarfāna ‘in heat (cow)’ (Frayha 1973: 105) ~ Palest ṣārif ‘brünstig’ (Vieh)’ (Bauer 1957: 67) ~ Egypt sārifa ‘id.’ (Stute), ilbagaṛa ṣarafit ‘die Kuh ist rinderig geworden’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 206, 263) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨saraf fī⟩ ‘to overdo’ (Corriente 1997: 249) ~ Cypriot Ar serfe, pl -át ‘in heat (animal)’ (Borg, own obs.). 315

s-r-w

‫ة‬

ṯrt (Pyr) ‘willow’; ‘Weide’ (Faulkner 1962: 306; Wb V 385) || Ar �‫ ��سرو‬sarwah ‘Zypresse’ (Wahrmund I 897); ~ Palest sarwe ‘Zypresse’ (Bauer 1957: 386) ~ Egypt saru ‘cypress-tree’ (Spiro 1895: 277). 316

s-ṭ-r

maś-ta-r [*mašṭira] ‘office, chancellery’; ‘Büro’ (Hoch 1994: 154; Helck 1962: 561) ~ Akkad šaṭāru(m) ‘write (down)’ (CDA 364) ~ Aram ‫ שטר‬šṭr ‘document’ (Fitzmyer & Harrington 1978: 339) ~ Sab sṭr(m,n) ‘inscription, document’ (Biella 1982: 332) || Ar ‫ ��س��طر‬saṭara ‘to write’ (Hava 1982: 320); ~ S. Arabian saṭar ‘scrivere’ ~ Yemen raṣaṭ/raṣaḍ/ṣaḍar ‘scrivere’ (Rossi 1939: 308).

188 317

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

s-ʿ-r

Dem šʿr ‘Preis’ (DG 491) ~ Copt ϣⲁⲁⲣ ‘price’ (Crum 1939: 582b) || Ar ‫ ��س�عر‬siʿr, pl

‫أ‬ ‫ � ��س�ع�ا ر‬ʾasʿār ‘price’ (Hava 1982: 321);

~ Damascus sǝʿǝr, pl ʾasʿār ‘price’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 179) ~ Levantine Ar saʿʿar ‘taxer (une marchandise)’ (Harfouche 1928: 444) ~ Palest siʿr, pl asʿār ‘Preis’ (Bauer 1957: 234) ~ Egypt saʿʿar ‘to fix a price’ (Spiro 1895: 279). 318

s-f-d

spd (Pyr) ‘sharp, acute, sharply defined’; ‘spitz sein, spitz (von Waffen: Speer, Messer)’ (Faulkner 1962: Wb IV 108) ~ Heb ‫ ַׁשּפּוד‬šappūd ‘Spieß’ ّ‫ ف‬223; DLE II 34; ‫� ف ف‬ � � (Levy IV 593) || Ar ‫ �س��ود‬saffūd, pl ‫ �س���ا ي���د‬safāfīd wooden or iron spit’ (Hava 1982: 323); ~ N. Yemen sfūd ‘Achse’ (Behnstedt 1996: 560) ~ Palest saffūd ‘tisonnier de forgeron’ (Denizeau 1960: 247) ~ Kǝndērīb saffūd, pl sǝfēfīd ‘eiserner Spieß’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 67) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨saffūd⟩ ‘skewer’ (Corriente 1997: 253) ~ Djidjelli sǝffūd ‘broche’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 276) ~ Malta ⟨seffud, pl sfiefed⟩ ‘spiedo, schidone’ (Vassalli 1796: 601). This Afroasiatic term has several Indo-European cognates; cf. Hittite išpātar ‘spit, skewer, dagger’ (Kloekhorst 2008: 411) and Gk σποδίζω ‘to roast or bake in ashes’ (GEL 1629) ~ Proto-Germanic spituz > Gothic spiuts > Spieß, Old English spittan, Fr epieu, It spiedo, and more.

319

s-f-r¹

śpr/spr (Pyr) ‘arrive at (r); to reach someone, arrive, approach’; ‘kommen zu, gelangen nach, erreichen; zu einem Lande gelangen, dort ankommen’ (Ember 1930: 49; Faulkner 1962: 223; Wb IV 102; DLE II 265): hrw n spr ‘am Tag des Ankommens’ (Schipper 2005: 43) ~ Akkad šapāru ‘send, dispatch’ (Parpola ‫ف‬ 2007: 111) || Ar ‫ ��س��ر‬safara ‘set out on a journey’ (Hava 1982: 323); ~ Oman ysāfor ‘er reist’ (Reinhardt 1894: 7) ~ Aleppo sāfar ‘partir pour un voyage’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 344) ~ Palest sāfar ‘reisen’ (Bauer 1957: 243) ~ Egypt sāfir ‘go on a journey, depart, travel’ (Spiro 1895: 280) ~ Malta ⟨siefer, isiefer⟩ ‘viaggiare, partire’ (Vassalli 1796: 610).

317. s- ʿ -r – 322. s-k-r

320

189

s-f-r²

śfj (19th Dyn.) ‘ram’; ‘Name des widderköpfigen Gottes von Hierakleopolis’ (Wb IV 457; Ember 1930: 17) ~ Akkad sappāru/šapparu ‘a bovid’ (CAD XV 166) ~ Aram ‫ ְצ ִפ ָירא‬ṣǝpīrā ‘Bock, Ziegenbock’ (Levy IV 214) ~ Heb ‫ ָצ ִפיר‬ṣāpīr ‘a he‫ف ة‬ goat’ (2 Chronicles 29: 21; BDB 862) || Ar �‫ ��س��ر‬sufrah ‘the thing … upon which one eats: … a round piece of skin, etc.’ (Lane 1371b); ~ Daθīna ⟨sufra, pl safar⟩ ‘morceau de peau de mouton ou de chèvre’ (GD 1944) ~ Yemen sifrah ‘Schafsfell’ (Behnstedt 560); sifar/sfār ‘fleece’; ṣufra, pl ṣafar ‘dining table’ (Piamenta 1990: 223, 224) ~ Sinai sufra ‘leather bag for carrying food’ (Stewart 1990: 261) ~ Iraq sufra, pl sufar ‘a woven mat placed on the floor to place food on at meal time’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 219) ~ Al-Balqāʾ sufra ‘leather tray’ (Palva 1992: 171) ~ Negev saffar, isaffir ‘shear (goat’s hair)’ (own obs.) ~ Palest ṣufra, pl ṣufar ‘Tisch’ (Bauer 1957: 301) ~ Egypt sufra, pl sufar ‘dining-table’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 46) ~ Tunis ṣufra ‘Esstafel’ (Stumme 1896: 172, 78).

The Arabic dialect forms here replicate the semantic lexification pattern of Egyptian ḥtp ‘table, natte’ (Lambert 1925: 124) and Heb ‫ ֶש ַלח‬šelaḥ ‘hide, fresh skin’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 1580) > ‫ ֻש ְל ָחן‬šulḥān ‘table’ (< ‘skin or leather mat spread on the ground’; BDB 1020).

321

s-f-k

sfṯ (Pyr) [< *sfč < *sfk] ‘oil’; ‘Name eines der sieben Öle’ (Faulkner 1962: 225; Wb IV 118) ~ Akkad šapāku ‘to pour’ (M. Cohen 2011: 161) ~ Heb ‫ ָׁש ַפְך‬šāpak ‘to pour, ‫ف‬ pour out’ (BDB 1049) || Ar ‫ ��س���ك‬safaka ‘to pour’ (Hava 1982: 324); ~ Al-Andalus ⟨safak⟩ ‘to shed blood’ (Corriente 1997: 253) ~ Yemen skab ‘versare’ (Rossi 1939: 245) ~ Damascus sabak ‘to cast’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 35) ~ Egypt sabak ‘to cast metals’ (Spiro 1895: 268) ~ Palest sabak ‘gießen (von Regen)’; sabak/sakab ‘Metall gießen’ (Bauer 1957: 138). 322

s-k-r

śgr (LE) ‘Kastell’ (Wb IV 324) verschließbarer Kasten (?)’; šgr [s̀i-ka-r] ‘Kastell; Tor mit Verschluss’ (Wb IV 324; Helck 1962: 576) || Akkad sekēru/sakāru ‘shut �‫ ��س ك‬sikr, off, block up’ (CDA 320, 322) ~ Heb ‫‘ ָסגַ ר‬to shut, close’ (BDB 688) || Ar ‫�ر‬ pl ‫�ور‬ ‫ ��س ك‬sukūr ‘dam’ (Hava 1982: 328); ~ Aleppo sakkar ‘fermer une porte’; sǝkkāra, pl skēkīr ‘serrure de bois’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 349) ~ Kǝndērīb sakkar ‘schließen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 67)

190

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

~ Palest sakkar ‘schließen mit Schlüssel’ (Bauer 1957: 260) ~ Malta ⟨sokra⟩ ‘padlock’ (Aquilina 1990: 1340). 323

s-k-k

śkꜣ (Pyr) ‘pflügen, mit Rindern pflügen; Pflugstier; Art Acker; den Acker bestellen; die Ernte; der Pflugstier’; skꜣ.t ‘plough, ploughland; cultivate’ (Wb IV 315–316; Faulkner 1962: 251; DLE II 87; Ember 1912: 89) ~ Dem skꜣ ‘pflügen’ (DG 467) ~ Copt (Sa‘idic) ⲥⲕⲁⲓ ‘plough’; ⲛⲥⲕⲁⲓ ‘to plough with’ (Crum 1939: 328b)

‫ّة‬

�‫ ��س ك‬sikak ~ Akkad šakāku ‘to harrow’ (CAD XVII/2 433) || Ar ��� ‫ ��س �ك‬sikkah, pl ‫��ك‬ ‘ploughshare’ (Hava 1982: 327); ~ Marazig sakk, isekk ‘labourer une terre vierge’ (Boris 1958: 281) ~ S.E. Anatolia skēk ‘Pflugschar; einmaliges durchpflügen’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 204) ~ Aleppo sǝkke, pl sə́kak ‘soc en fer de la charrue; etc.’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 349) ~ Ṣayda sikka ‘charrue (par synecdoche)’ (Landberg 1883: 384) ~ Bišmizzīn sikki, pl sikak ‘Pflugschar’ (Jiha 1964: 154) ~ Egypt sikka ‘Pflugstrecke (einmal das Feld hinauf und einmal hinunter)’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 228) ~ Morocco sǝkkǝk, isǝkkǝk ‘munir d’un soc (une charrue)’ (Prémare VI 141) ~ Djidjelli sekka ‘soc’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 252) ~ Cherchell sekka ‘soc de charrue’ (Grand’Henry 1972: 77). 324

s-k-n

snṯ (MK) [< *snč < *sčn < skn] ‘Fundament, Grundriß’; sntt ‘foundation, plan’ (Wb IV 178; Faulkner 1962: 334) ~ Akkad šakānu ‘to set up’ (M. Cohen 2011: 186)

~ Heb ‫ ִמ ְׁש ָּכן‬miškān ‘dwelling-place’ (BDB 1015) || Ar �‫�� ن‬ ‫ ��س ك‬sakan ‘abode, dwelling’ (Hava 1982: 329); ~ Yemen sukn ‘living, dwelling’ (Piamenta 1990: 277) ~ Aleppo sakan ‘habiter (une maison)’; maskan, pl msēken ‘chambre, pièce d’un logement’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 350) ~ Palest sakan ‘wohnen’; maskan, pl masākin ‘Wohnhaus’ (Bauer 1957: 367) ~ Egypt maskan, pl masākin ‘residence’ (Spiro 1895: 284) ~ Morocco skǝn ‘s’établir à demeure’ (Prémare VI 143). 325

s-l-s-l

šꜣšꜣ.t (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘necklace’; ‘Halskette’ (Faulkner 1962: 261, 262; Wb IV 413) || Akkad šeršerru ‘chain’; šeršerratu ‘chain, fetters, shackles’ (CAD XVII/2:

323. s-k-k – 327. s-l-q

191

320, 321); šeršerrutu ‘chain’ (Parpola 2007: 160) ~ Ge sansala ‘chain’ (Leslau ‫ة‬ 1987: 508) ~ Ḥar senselét ‘chain’ (Johnstone 1977: 157) || Ar ��‫ ��س��ل��س�ل‬silsilah, pl ‫ ��س�لا ��س�ل‬salāsil ‘chaîne’ (Belot 1890: 171); ~ Najd šelāšil ‘ein kettenförmiges Anhängsel an der Lanze’ (Hess 1938: 104) ~ Yemen sals, pl sulūs ‘catena’ (Rossi 1939: 198) ~ Oman sinsle ‘Kette’ (Reinhardt 1894: 10) ~ Rwala šenāšel ‘chain’ (Musil 1928: 167) ~ Iraq silsila, pl salāsil ‘chain’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 222) ~ Damascus sə́nǝsle/sə́lǝsle ‘chain’; sǝlsǝlet ḍahǝr ‘spine’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 38, 221) ~ Palest silsile, pl salāsil ‘Kette’: silsilet eḍ-ḍahr ‘Wirbelsäule’ (Bauer 1957: 197, 365) ~ Egypt sulsula ‘Kette’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 376; 1999: 396) ~ Tunis šǝlšūl ‘colonne vertébrale’ (D. Cohen 1975: 170) ~ Marazig silǝsla ‘Kette’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2005: 87) ~ Djidjelli sǝnsla ‘chaîne’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 80) ~ Morocco snsla/slsul ‘chain, spinal column’ (Heath 2002: 148) ~ Malta ⟨sinsla, pl sniesel⟩ ‘spina del dorso’ (Vassalli 1796: 614). Cf. Ghomara (Berber) asensla ‘spine’ (Mourigh 2016: 421).

326

s-l-f

sf (Pyr) ‘yesterday’; ‘gestern’ (Faulkner 1962: 234; Calice 1936: 196); snf ‘last year’; ‘Vorjahr, vergangenes Jahr; kommendes Jahr’ (Faulkner 1962: 231; Hannig 1995: 719) ~ Dem snf ‘gestern’ (DG 429) ~ Copt ⲥⲗϥ ‘yesterday’; ⲥⲛⲟⲩϥ ‘the previous ‫ف‬ ‫ف‬ year’ (Crum 1939: 378b, 348b) || Ar ���‫ ��س�ا �ل‬sālif, pl �‫ ��س��ل‬salaf ‘preceding, past time’ (Hava 1982: 332); salafa ‘to have already happened’ (Ambros 2004: 137); ~ Najd salaf ‘to precede, antecede’ (Sowayan 1992: 275); és-selef ‘Vorhut’ (Hess 1938: 60) ~ Khawetna sālfe ‘Geschichte’ (Talay 1999: 145) ~ Rwala salaf ‘a troop of warriors riding at the head of a migrating tribe’ (Musil 1928: 255) ~ Damascus qabl ǝb-salaf ‘in advance’; sǝlfe ‘an advance’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 4) ~ Egypt sālif ‘previous, prior’; aslāf ‘ancestors’ (Spiro 1895: 286) ~ Al-Balqāʾ silāf ‘vanguard’ (Palva 1992: 171) ~ Lebanon sālfe, pl sawālif ‘conte, histoire’ (Frayha 1973: 85) ~ Morocco sālāf, pl slāf ‘générations antérieures, ascendants’ (Prémare VI 161) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨yaslaf salaf⟩ ‘to be over or bygone’ (Corriente 1997: 258). 327

s-l-q

śrq (Pyr) ‘das Skorpion’; (Gk) ‘die Feinde schlachten, sie töten’ (Calice 1936: 80; Wb IV 204) || Ar �‫ ��س��ل ق‬salaqa ‘to pierce with a spear’ (Hava 1982: 332).

192 328

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

s-l-k

sꜣq (Pyr) ‘pull together’; sꜣq-i҆b ‘self-possessed’; ‘sich zusammen nehmen, in Acht nehmen; (vom Herzen) sich selbst beherrschend’ (Faulkner 1962: 211; Wb IV 25–26) || Ar ‫ ��س��لوك‬sulūk ‘Marsch, Reise; Benehmen, Verfahren’ (Wahrmund I 922); ~ Lebanon salleka kīfma kānet el-ḥāle ‘accepte cela, quelque ennuyeuse que soit la situation’ (Feghali 1928: 298) ~ Egypt silik ‘get on, behave oneself’ (Spiro 1895: 286) ~ Palest salak ‘sich benehmen’ (Bauer 1957: 51) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nasluk salakt⟩ ‘to a road’ (Corriente 1997: 259). 329

s-l-m¹

śnb (Pyr) ‘healthy, be healthy, well; heal’; ‘die Gesundheit, das Wohlergehen, gesund machen, ein Krankheit heilen’ (Faulkner 1962: 231; DLE II 50; Wb IV 159) ~ Akkad šalāmu ‘health’ (M. Cohen 2011: 100); ~ Aleppo salām ‘salut, état d’une personne saine et sauve, sécurité’ (Bar­ thélemy 1935–69: 354) ~ Palest salām ‘Friede’ (Bauer 1957: 118) ~ Egypt silim, yislam ‘to be safe’ (Spiro 1895: 287) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨salīm⟩ ‘safe’ (Corriente 1997: 260). 330

s-l-m²

snbb (Pyr) ‘exchange greetings’; ‘sich begrüßen mit jemandem (eigentlich nach der Gesundheit fragen), einander treffen, sich unterhalten’ (Faulkner 1962: 231; Wb IV 161; Hannig 1999: 718); śrm ‘(als Segenswunsch um Frieden bitten); jemandem mit dem Friedensgruß nahen; die Waffen niederlegen (als Zeichen

ّ

des Friedens)’ (Wb IV 588) ~ Heb ‫ ָׁשלֹום‬šālōm ‘peace’ (BDB 1022) || Ar ‫��س��ل‬ ‫م‬ sallama ‘to salute’ (Hava 1982: 333); ~ Kǝndērīb sallam ‘den (islamischen) Gruß sprechen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 68) ~ Palest salāmāt ‘Grüße’ (Bauer 1957: 144) ~ Egypt sallim ‘salute’ (Spiro 1895: 287) ~ Malta ⟨sellem, jsellem⟩ ‘salutare’ (Vassalli 1796: 603) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨salām⟩ ‘greeting’ (Corriente 1997: 260). 331

s-l-m³

smnw (Pyr) ‘rungs of ladder’; ‘als Teilen des Leiter’ (Faulkner 1962: 228; Wb IV 135) ~ Akkad simmiltu ‘ladder’ (Parpola 2007: 213) ~ Heb ‫ ֻס ָּלם‬sullām ‘ladder’

193

328. s-l-k – 333. s-m-d

ّ

(BDB 700) || Ar ‫ ��س��ل‬sullam, pl ‫ ��س�لا ل‬salālim/ �‫ ��س�لا �ي�ل‬salālīm ‘Leiter, Stiege, Treppe,

‫م‬

‫م‬

‫م‬

Steigbügel’ (Wahrmund I 921); ~ Egypt sillim ‘stairs’; sillim xašab ‘ladder’; sillima ‘step’ (Spiro 1895: 288); sillāma, pl silalīm ‘Treppenstufe’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 215) ~ N. Yemen sillamin ‘Treppe’ (Behnstedt 1987: 264) ~ Oman sillum ‘Treppe’ (Reinhardt 1894: 48) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨sullūm, pl salālīm⟩ ‘stair’ (Corriente 1997: 260) ~ Baghdad sellam ‘ladder’ (Blanc 1964: 78) ~ Damascus sǝllom, pl salālem ‘ladder’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 133) ~ Aleppo sǝllam, pl slēlem ‘échelle’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 355) ~ Āzǝx sǝllǝm ‘Treppe (aus Holz)’ (Vocke & Waldner 1983: 207) ~ Palest sillam, pl salālim ‘Leiter’ (Bauer 1957: 192) ~ Tunis šǝllūm ‘échelle’ (D. Cohen 1975: 54) ~ Djidjelli sellūm, pl slālem ‘échelle’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 57, 364) ~ Morocco sellum, pl slalem ‘ladder’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 111). 332

s-m-ǧ

msḏi҆ (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘dislike, hate’; ‘jemanden hassen (auch im Sinne von: unzufrieden sein), nicht wollen’; msḏḏt ‘what is hateful (of conduct)’; msḏj.t ‘Hassenwertes, Verabscheuliches’ (Faulkner 1962: 118; Wb II 154) ~ Copt ⲙⲟⲥⲧⲉ ‘hate’ (Crum 1939: 187a); ⲙⲉⲥⲧⲉ, f. ⲙⲉⲥⲧⲏ ‘hated person’ (Černý 1976: 91) || ّ Ar ‫ ��سم��ج‬samuǧa ‘to be ugly, foul’ (Hava 1982: 335); ‫ ��سم��ج‬sammaǧa ‘häßlich

�

�

machen’ (Wahrmund II 924); ~ Rwala masmūǧ ‘despised’ (Musil 1928: 582) ~ Daθīna smug, f sumge ‘nicht zum Loswerden; eine Person die man nicht loswerden kann’ (GD 1975) ~ N. Yemen sāmiǧ ‘unfähig, nutzlos’ (Behnstedt 1996: 578) ~ Palest simiǧ ‘rude, boorish, cheeky’; samāǧa ‘rudeness’ (own obs.) ~ Egypt simig, pl sumaga ‘boorish, churlish, loutish’; samāga ‘boorishness, loathsomeness’; ʾasmag ‘more / most boorish’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 428) ~ Lebanon smāje ‘vilenie’ (Denizeau 1960: 255) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨jasmuǧ⟩ ‘it is unseemly’; ⟨sumūǧa⟩ ‘ugliness’ (Corriente 1997: 260). 333

s-m-d

Copt ⲥⲁⲙⲓⲧ ‘fine flour’ (Crum 1939: 340b) ~ Akkad samīdu ‘a type of groats’ ‫�ذ‬ (CAD XVI 70); samādu ‘grind’ (CDA 314) || Ar ���‫ ��سمي‬samīð/‫ ��سمي���د‬samīd ‘white flour, fine bread, wheat’ (Lane 1424); ~ Aleppo smīd ‘semoule’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 357) ~ Khatūniyya smēd ‘Grieß’ (Talay 2003: 81) ~ Kǝndērīb sǝmd, pl smūde ‘Weizengries’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 68) ~ Palest smīd (urban), smīð (rural) ‘Gries’ (Bauer 1957: 142) ~ Malta ⟨smid⟩ ‘fior di farina’ (Vassalli 1796: 617).

194 334

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

s-m-r

śmr/smr (Pyr) ‘Freund (besonders des Königs als Titel oder Rangstufe) Bekannter’; ‘friend (of king), a court title’: smr tpy ‘First Friend’; śmr.t (OK) ‘Freundin’; ‘companion’; smꜣ ‘unite’; smꜣy ‘companion, confederate’; smꜣyt ‘royal consort’ (Wb IV 138, 139; Faulkner 1962: 225, 226, 229; DLE II 43) ~ Dem smꜣ ّ ‘vereinigen’ (DG 431) || Ar ‫ ��س�ا �مر‬sāmir, pl ‫ ��سما ر‬summār ‘companion in nightly entertainment’ (Lane 1436); ~ Yemen samar ‘den Abend verbringen, sich abends vergnügen’; ‘passare la notte in veglia conversando’; mismar, pl masāmir ‘night party’ (Behnstedt 1996: 580; Rossi 1939: 244; Piamenta 1990: 232); istamar ‘den Abend mit Unterhaltung verbringen’; samrah ‘abendliche Unterhaltung’; masmarin ‘Dorfplatz, wo man sich zur abendlichen Unterhaltung trifft’ (Behnstedt 1987: 264) ~ Aleppo tṣāmar, yǝtṣāmar ‘s’entretenir familièrement le soir ou la nuit’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 444) ~ Ḥama ssāmar ‘id.’ (Denizeau 1960: 256) ~ Sinai sāmir ‘nighttime dances’ (C. Bailey 1991: 441) ~ Najd sāmir ‘staying up at night; taking part in nightly conversation, entertainment’; ‘ein Gesang von zwei Chören’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 393; Hess 1938: 141) ~ Rwala summayr ‘entertainment’ (Musil 1928: 259) ~ Daθīna samr ‘réunion du soir’ (GD 1977) ~ Tangier smer ‘passer la nuit en causant, passer la nuit dans l’insomnie’ (W. Marçais 1911: 337).

Sinai armas ‘to talk late into the night’ (Stewart 1990: 258) ~ Khābūra ramas ‘spend the night chattering’ (Brockett 1985: 112) suggest that Ar smr in this lexeme is related to Aramaic ramšā ‘Abend’ (Levy IV 456).

335

s-m-s-m

šmšm.t ‘eine Pflanze’; ‘hemp (?)’ (Wb IV 488; Faulkner 1962: 267) ~ Akkad šaman-šammi oily plant’ (CDA 351) ~ Mycenaean Gk (Linear B) sa-sa-ma (Pairman Brown 1995 I 336) [< W. Semitic; cf. Ugar] || Ar ‫ ��سم��س‬simsim ‘Sesam, ‫م‬ Koriandersamen’ (Wahrmund I 926); ~ Kǝndērīb šǝmāysme ‘eine Wildpflanze’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 69) ~ Lebanon smēsme ‘bruyère’ (Denizeau 1960: 256) ~ Palest simsim ‘Sesam’ (Bauer 1957: 138) ~ Egypt simsima ‘sesame’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 430). 336

s-m-ʿ

sḏm (Pyr) ‘hear, listen’; ‘hören; etwas verhören’ (Wb IV 384) || Saf smʿ ‘hearing’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 639) ~ Ar ‫ ��س��م‬samiʿa ‘écouter, entendre ‫ع‬ quelque chose’ (DAF I 1139);

334. s-m-r – 339. s-m-n ¹

195

~ Oman smŭʿ ‘hören’ (Reinhardt 1894: 135) ~ Aleppo sǝmeʿ ‘entendre’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 357) ~ Kǝndērīb sǝmǝʿ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 208) ~ Damascus sǝmeʿ ‘to hear’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 114) ~ Palest simiʿ ‘hören’ (Bauer 1957: 160) ~ Egypt simiʿ ‘to hear, listen’ (Spiro 1895: 290). 337

s-m-k

śmkt (LE) ‘Art Balken (aus Cedernholz, von großer Länge)’; ‘beam, girder, rafter’ (Wb IV 144; DLE II 45) ~ Aram ‫ סמך‬smk ‘lay upon’ (Fitzmyer & Harrington 1978: 331) || Ar ‫ ��سم�ك‬samk ‘roof, ceiling’ (Ambros 2004: 139); ~ Ḥama sāmūk ‘Pfahl’ (Lewin 1966: *25*) ~ Aleppo sāmūk, pl swēmīk ‘bâton fourchu soutenant la corde sur laquelle on étend le linge’ (Barthé-lemy 1935–69: 359) ~ Lebanon samak, yesmok ‘échalasser, étayer’; masmūk ‘échalas de vigne’ (Denizeau 1960: 257) ~ Palest mismāk, pl masāmīk ‘Weinstockstutz’ (Dalman IV 315, 9). 338

s-m-m

smw (Pyr) ‘plants, herbage, vegetables’; ‘Kraut’ (Faulkner 1962: 225; Wb III 119) ~ Akkad šammu ‘plant, herb, drug’ (Parpola 2007: 111) || Ar ّ‫ ��س‬samma ‘to poi‫م‬ son’ (Hava 1982: 334); ~ Aleppo samm, pl smūm ‘poison, venin’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 359) ~ Palest samm ‘Gift’ (Bauer 1957: 138) ~ Egypt simm/summ/samm, pl simūm/sumūm ‘poison’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 432). 339

s-m-n¹

śmn (Pyr) ‘goose, Nile goose’; ‘Art Gans’ (Faulkner 1962: 228; Wb IV 136; DLE II 42) ~ Dem smn ‘id.’ (DG 433) ~ Copt ⲥⲙⲟⲩⲛⲉ ‘Nile goose’ (Crum 1939: 339a) || ‫ن‬ Ar ‫ ��سما �ى‬sumānā ‘the quail, tetrao coturnix’ (Lane 1432); ~ Rwala sammūne ‘a small dark-gray bird’ (Musil 1928: 40) ~ Aleppo sǝmman ‘caille’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 259) ~ Iraq ṣummāna ‘caille’ (Weißbach 1930: 334) ~ Palest simmāne/summāne, coll. summān ‘Wachtel’ (Löhr 1905: 139, 38; Bauer 1957: 350) ~ Egypt sammāna, coll. sammān ‘quail’ (Spiro 1895: 291) ~ Djidjelli sǝmmuina ‘(une) caille’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 280) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨summān⟩ ‘quail’ (Corriente 1997: 262) ~ Malta ⟨summiena, coll. summien⟩ ‘quaglia’ (Vassalli 1796: 614).

196 340

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

s-m-n²

smj (Med) ‘cream’; ‘fette Milch; Sahne (die sich bildet wenn Milch längere Zeit gestanden hat)’; ‘curds’ (Ember 1930: 88; Wb IV 130; Faulkner 1962: 227; DLE II 41) ~ Akkad šamnu ‘cream’ (M. Cohen 2011: 50) ~ Heb ‫ ֶׁש ֶמן‬šemen ‘fat, oil’ (BDB ْ 1032) || Ar �‫ ��سم� ن‬samn ‘schmolzene Butter, Schmalz; Sahne, Rahm’ (Wahrmund I 928); ~ Rwala samin ‘clarified butter’ (Musil 1928: 187) ~ Damascus samne ‘id.’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 32) ~ Palest samne ‘ausgelassene, sog. Kochbutter oder Butterschmalz’ (Bauer 1957: 69) ~ Egypt samn ‘melted butter’ (Spiro 1895: 291). 341

s-m-w

sjm ‘cloud’; ‘Nebel’ (Faulkner 1962: 208; Wb IV 14) ~ Akkad samû ‘heaven, sky’ (M. Cohen 2011: 100) ~ Heb ‫ ָׁש ַמיִ ם‬šāmayim ‘heavens, sky’ (BDB 1029) || Saf

‫ة‬

‫أ‬

smw ‘height’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 639) ~ Ar ‫ ��سما ء‬samāʾ, pl ����‫� ��سمي‬ ‫ ��سا ا ت‬samāwāt ‘sky, cloud, rain’ (Hava 1982: 338); ʾasmiyah/� ‫مو‬ ~ Aleppo sama, pl samāwāt ‘ciel’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 359) ~ Āzǝx sama ‘Himmel’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 209) ~ Palest sama, pl samāwāt ‘Himmel’ (Bauer 1957: 156) ~ Egypt sama ‘sky, heaven’ (Spiro 1895: 289) ~ Malta ⟨sema, pl smewwiet⟩ ‘sky’ (Aquilina 1990: 1290). 342

s-n-ḥ

msnḥ (MK) ‘turn away’; ‘sich umwenden, drehen, abwenden (Böses)’; snḥ ‘durcheinandergeraten sein’ (Faulkner 1962: 117; Hannig 1995: 721) || Ar ����‫����سن‬ ‫ح‬ sanaḥa ‘to turn away from’ (Hava 1982: 339); ~ Aleppo sanaḥ ‘abandonner, négliger’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 361) ~ Lebanon sanaḥ ‘faire semblant de ne pas voir, feindre d’ignorer, ne pas se soucier de’ (Denizeau 1960: 258) ~ Egypt sannaḥ ‘to feign not to hear, be indifferent’ (Spiro 1895: 292). 343

s-w-ʾ

sw.t (Pyr) ‘schaden’; sw ‘schädlich, schlecht sein’; ‘be harmful, dangerous (n to)’ (Wb IV 59; Faulkner 1969: 329; Calice 1936: 79); i҆swj (Gk) ‘die Bösen’ (Wb I 129) ~ Heb ‫ׁשֹואה‬ ָ ‘devastation’ (BDB 996) || Ar ‫ ��س�ا ء‬sāʾa ‘to be bad, wicked’ (Hava 1982: 343);

340. s-m-n ² – 345. s-w-r

197

~ Oman saw ‘Schlechtigkeit’ (Reinhardt 1895: 38) ~ Palest niyyet sūʾ ‘Böswilligkeit’; saw ‘Böses’; siyye, pl sawāya ‘une mauvaise action’; blād es-saw ‘un mauvais pays’ (Bauer 1957: 64; Denizeau 1960: 261); ʿaǧūzt saw ‘eine Böse Alte’ (Schmidt & Kahle 1918 I 283) ~ Negev ʿēn saww ‘the evil eye’ (Borg & BarZvi) ~ Egypt saw/sū ‘evil’: sū mafhumiyya ‘misunderstanding’ (Spiro 1895: 261) ~ Marazig sayya, pl sayyāt ‘mauvaise action, péché (contre la loi divine)’ (Boris 1958: 294) ~ Takrūna asē, yāsi ‘se mal comporter, agir mal, maladroitement’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 1920) ~ Tripoli (Libya) saw ‘male’ (Griffini 1913: 165) ~ Djidjelli su ‘mal (moral)’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 55) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨šayx saw⟩ ‘a wicked old man’ (Corriente 1997: 266). 344

s-w-ḥ

sḫ.t (Pyr) ‘country beside ‘town’; marshland, Field’; ‘das Feld, Gefilde, Flur, Land (in Gegensatz zur Stadt)’; ʿꜣd n sḫt ‘fertile soil (?)’ (Faulkner 1962: 239, 38; Wb IV 229; Brockelmann 1932: 113); Ḥqꜣw–sḫt ‘Die Herrscher des Feldes’ (Leitz ‫ ��س�ا ح�ا ت‬sāḥāt ‘courtyard, open space, square’ (Hava 2002: 535) || Ar ‫ ��س�ا‬sāḥa, pl � ‫ح‬ 1982: 342); ~ Oman sēḥ, pl syūḥ ‘Wüste’; sīḥ ‘freies Feld’ (Reinhardt 1894: 72, 42) ~ E. Arabia sēḥa ‘clump of palm trees’ (Holes 2001: 259) ~ Aleppo sāḥa ‘place publique (dans la ville)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 364) ~ Bišmizzīn sāḥ ‘durchs Land streifen’ (Jiha 1964: 140) ~ Palest sāḥa ‘Vorhof; Ver-sammlungshaus’ (Bauer 1957: 232; Schmidt & Kahle 1918 I 283) ~ S.E. Anatolia sāḥa ‘Dorfplatz, unbebaute Fläche’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 211) ~ Damascus sāḥa ‘Platz’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 160) ~ Iraq sāḥa ‘open square, courtyard, open space, field, park’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 229) ~ Tripoli (Libya) sāḥa ‘cortile’ (Griffini 1913: 68) ~ Marazig sāḥa ‘voisinage immédiat’; swāyaḥ el-bēt ‘voisinage, les alentours de la tente’ (Boris 1958: 294) ~ Djidjelli sāḥa ‘emplacement central, parvis’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 256) ~ Algiers sāḥa ‘cour’ (Tapiéro 1971: 154) ~ Ḥassāniyya sāḥa ‘cour’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 45). 345

s-w-r

‫أ‬

śꜣ.t/sꜣ.t (MK) ‘wall’; ‘Mauer, Festungsmauer, Wand’ (Faulkner 1962: 208; Wb

IV 14; Calice 1936: 194) ~ Heb ‫ ׁשּור‬šūr ‘wall’ (BDB 1004) || Ar ‫ ��سور‬sūr, pl ‫� ��سوا ر‬ ‫ن‬ ʾaswār/� ‫ ��سي��را‬sīrān ‘Mauer, Stadtmauer, Wälle’ (Wahrmund I 941); ~ Āzǝx sōṛ ‘Stadtmauer, Wall’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 211) ~ Damascus sūr ‘mur d’enceinte d’une ville’ (Denizeau 1960: 261) ~ Mharde sūr ‘Zaun’ (Yoseph 2012: 150) ~ Lebanon šīr ‘roche’; šwār ‘rebord’ (Feghali 1938: 787) ~ Palest sūr, pl

198

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

aswār ‘Stadtmauer’ (Bauer 1957: 204) ~ Malta ⟨sur, pl swar⟩ ‘rampart’ (Aquilina 1990: 1377). 346

s-w-q

sbq (Pyr) ‘calf of leg’; das Bein’ (Faulkner 1962: 220; Wb IV 93) ~ Heb ‫ ׁשֹוק‬šōq ‫ق‬ ‫ق‬ ‫ن‬ ‘leg’ (BDB 1003) || Ar � ‫ ��س�ا‬sāq, pl �‫ ��سو‬sūq/� ‫ ����سي��ق���ا‬sīqān ‘leg, shank’ (Hava 1982: 345); ~ Najd sāgah ‘Hinterteil’; besāget flān ‘hinter Jemand; vgl. bes. ḥamā sāgat flān einen Abwesenden beschützen; Truppe, Kamelherde’ (Socin 1901 III 278) ~ Damascus sāq, pl sīqān ‘leg’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 136) ~ Palest sāq, pl sīqān ‘Bein’ (Bauer 1957: 48) ~ Ḥassāniyya ṣāg, pl ṣīgān ‘calf (of leg)’ (Mali; Heath 2004: 221) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨sāq, pl sāqayn⟩ ‘leg’ (Corriente 1997: 267) ~ Malta ⟨sieq, pl saqajn⟩ ‘piede’ (Vassalli 1796: 612). 347

s-w-y

(i) i҆św/św (OK) ‘reward (n.)’; ‘Preis, Ersatz, Entgelt’: i҆św nn ‘der Lohn dafür’; mi҆św ‘als Lohn für (mit n oder direktem Genitiv)’ (Faulkner 1962: 30; Erman 1904: 15; Wb I 131; Calice 1936: 122) ~ (NK) šwj.tj ‘der Kaufmann’ (Wb IV 434) ~ Dem i҆sw ‘Quittung (Zahlung)’; i҆swj.(t) ‘Ersatz, Lohn, Preis’; šw ‘geeignet; nützlich, würdig; Wert’; i҆r šw ‘nützen, taugen’ (DG 44, 493); sw n ‘value of’ (Simpson 1996: 82); i҆sw ‘reward, recompense, price’ (DLE I 21, 45) ~ Copt ⲁⲥⲟⲩ ‘price, value’; ⲥⲁⲩ ‘use, value’ (Crum 1939: 18a, 599a, 45) ~ Heb ‫ ָׁשוָ ה‬šāwā ‘to be even, equal, alike’ (M. Jastrow 1913: 1532) || Ar ‫ ��سو�ى‬sawā ‘wert sein, gelten, kosten’ (Wahrmund I 944); ~ Aleppo sə́wa/suwi, yə́swa ‘valoir’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 368) ~ S.E. Anatolia sawa ‘wert sein’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 215) ~ Palest siwi ‘kosten’ (Bauer 1957: 197) ~ Tripoli (Libya) swā ‘vale’ (Griffini 1913: 297) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨yaswà, sawà⟩ ‘be worth’ (Corriente 1997: 268) ~ Ḥassāniyya swe ‘valoir’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 151) ~ Malta ⟨sewa, jiswa⟩ ‘be worth’; ⟨siewi⟩ ‘valuable’; ⟨siwi⟩ ‘value’ (Aquilina 1990: 1300–01). ً (ii) jwsw ‘wahrlich’ (Hannig 2006: 147) || Ar ‫ ��سو�ى‬siwan ‘Gerechtigkeit’ (Wahrmund I 945); ~ Yemen sawāʾ-sawēʾ ‘esattamente’; sawēʾ ‘uguale’ (Rossi 1939: 207, 243) ~ Djidjelli swā-swa ‘exactement’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 588–9) ~ Mzāb m-ǝsswiyya ‘également, pareillement’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 10, 117) ~ Khābūra sawa sawa ‘it’s all the same’ (Brockett 1985: 128) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨sawā⟩ ‘equal, same

346. s-w-q – 349. s-y-f

199

thing’ (Corriente 1997: 269) ~ Malta ⟨sewwa-sewwa⟩ ‘giustamente, a puntino’ (Vassalli 1796: 608). (iii) (MK) i҆wśw ‘Waage, Handwaage’ (Calice 1936: 96); (LE) i҆wsw ‘balance, scale (“beams” or “arms” of a scale)’ (Faulkner 1962: 14; DLE I 21, 45) ~ Ḥar sēw ‘to level’ (Johnstone 1977: 166) || Ar ‫ ��س ّو�ى‬sawwā ‘Eins dem andern gleich machen’ (Wahrmund I 944); ~ Kǝndērīb sēwa ‘auf gleiches Niveau bringen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 71) ~ Najd wāsa ‘to level’ (Sowayan 1992: 303) ~ Egypt sawwa ‘to make equal’ (Spiro 1895: 296). 348

s-y-r

sꜣ (MK) ‘to betake oneself (r to)’; ‘sich begeben’ (Faulkner 1962: 207; Hannig 1995: 654); sr [ein Verb der Bewegung] (Calice 1936: 80); swꜣw ‘passer-by’ (Borghouts 1978: 10, 15) ~ Ḥar mesér ‘journey’ (Johnstone 1977: 165) || Saf s¹rn ‘journey, travel’ (Al-Jallad 2015: 343) ~ Ar ‫ ��س�ا ر‬sāra ‘to go, travel’ (Hava 1982: 346) cf. 296. z-w-l; ~ Najd sēr ‘march, regular pace’; misyār ‘visit’; sār ‘to go, march’ (Kurpershoek 1994: 283; 1995: 383) ~ Oman sēra ‘Gehen’; mesīr ‘Gang’ (Reinhardt 1894: 42, 37) ~ N. Yemen sayyar ‘begleiten’ (Behnstedt 1987: 266) ~ Negev msayyir ‘walking slowly (horse)’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi) ~ Aleppo sāra ‘se promener de long en large’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 370) ~ Damascus ma bisāyer ǝl-waqǝt ‘he’s out of step with the times’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 224) ~ Ḥama msīr ‘Fahrt’ (Littmann 1924: 46) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nisir sirt⟩ ‘to walk, to go’ (Corriente 1997: 269) ~ Ūlād Brāhīm seyyer ‘marcher au pas’ (W. Marçais 1908: 91) ~ Malta ⟨sejjer, f sejra, pl sejrin⟩ ‘going (pp)’ (Aquilina 1990: 1272). 349

s-y-f

sft (LE) ‘knife, sword’ (DLE II 36) ~ Dem sjf ‘Schwert, Messer’ (DG 429) ~ Copt ⲥⲏϥⲉ ‘sword, knife’ (Crum 1939: 379a) || Aram saypā ‘sword’ (M. Jastrow 1886: ‫ف‬ ‫ف‬ 978); cf. Gk ξίφος ‘sword, blade’ (GEL 1191) || Ar ���‫ ����سي‬sayf, pl ��‫ ����س��يو‬suyūf ‘Schwert, Säbel’ (Wahrmund I 948); ~ Najd sēf ‘gekrümtes Schwert’ (Hess 1938: 104) ~ Rwala seyf ‘sabre’ (Musil 1928: 133) ~ Yemen sayf, pl siyūf ‘spada’ (Rossi 1939: 238) ~ Oman sēfak ‘dein Schwert’ (Reinhardt 1894: 22) ~ Damascus sēf ‘Säbel’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 160) ~ Palmyra sēf, pl syūf ‘sabre (du métier à tisser); manche (de la charrue)’ (Cantineau 1934 II 29, 54) ~ S.E. Anatolia sayf, pl syūfe ‘Schwert’ (Vocke &

200

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

Waldner 1982: 218) ~ Palest sēf, pl syūf ‘Schwert’ (Bauer 1957: 271) ~ Egypt sēf, pl suyūf ‘sword’ (Spiro 1895: 297) ~ Mzāb sēf, pl syūf ‘sabre’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 117) ~ Morocco sif, pl syuf ‘sword’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 200) ~ Malta ⟨sejf, pl sjuf⟩ ‘spada’ (Vassalli 1796: 602).

Š

350

š-b-b¹

sbꜣ (Pyr) ‘star’; ‘Stern’ (Faulkner 1962: 219; Wb IV 82; Calice 1936: 93) || ‫ن‬ Ar � ‫ ا لم����ش���بو�ت��ا‬al-mašbūbatān ‘Venus and Mars’ (Hava 1982: 349); ‫ب‬ ~ Najd šabb/šabbab ‘to light, kindle’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 384). 351

š-b-b²

šbb (Med) ‘gullet’; ‘Rohre als Schilfrohr (durch das man Dampf einatmen soll)’ (Faulkner 1962: 264; Wb IV 439); cf. šnb ‘trumpet’ (Wb IV 514) ~ Dem šnb.t ‘Luftröhre, die Kehle’ (DG 515) ~ Copt ϣⲟⲩⲱⲃⲉ ‘throat’ (Crum 1939: 603a) ~ Akkadian šulpu ‘reed’ ~ *slp ~ Gk σαλπίζω ‘sound the trumpet’ (GEL 1582; ‫ة‬ Hoch 1994: 282) || Ar ���‫ ����ش� ب���ا ب‬šabābah ‘flute, fife’ (Hava 1982: 349); For the semantic link between ‘gullet’ and ‘flute’, cf. Hasköy zǝmmāṛa ‘Hals, Luftröhre’ (Talay 2002: 85) ~ Lebanon zammūr, pl zmāmīr ‘flûte en roseau’ (Denizeau 1960: 226).

~ Najd šobbūb ‘Rohrstock’ (Socin 1901 III 278) ~ Yemen šabb ‘blasen’ (Behnstedt II 611) ~ Sinai šabbāba ‘a shepherd’s flute’ (C. Bailey 1991: 443) ~ Aleppo šabbābe ‘flûte champêtre, chalumeau, flûte de berger en roseau’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 374) ~ Āzǝx šabūbe ‘Holzrohr; Flöte’ (Wittrich 2001: 101) ~ Palest šibbābe ‘Flöte (rohrig)’ (Bauer 1957: 114) ~ Djidjelli šǝbbǝb ‘jouer la petite flûte’; šǝbbeyba ‘petite flûte’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 363, 280) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨šabbābah⟩ ‘reed flute’ (Corriente 1997: 271). 352

š-b-ʿ

šb.w (Pyr) ‘sich nähren, die Nahrung’; ‘food-offerings’ (Wb IV 437; Faulkner 1962: 264) ~ Akkad šebû ‘to satisfy, gratify’ (M. Cohen 2011: 183) ~ Heb ‫ ָׂש ַבע‬śābaʿ ‘to be sated, satisfied’ (BDB 959) ~ Sab hšbʿ ‘satisfy, sate (with water for irrigation)’ (Biella 1982: 510) || Ar ��‫ ����ش� ب‬šabiʿa ‘to be satisfied’ (Hava 1982: 349); ‫ع‬ ~ Aleppo šǝbeʿ ‘être rassasié, n’avoir plus faim’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 376) ~ Lebanon šebeʿ ‘se rassasier’ (Feghali 1938: 782) ~ Palest šibiʿ ‘satt werden’

201

350. š-b-b ¹ – 355. š-ǧ-r ¹

(Bauer 1957: 252) ~ Egypt šibiʿ ‘be satisfied’ (Spiro 1895: 302) ~ Ḥassāniyya šabbaʿ ‘to sate’ (Heath 2004: 224). 353

š-b-n

šbn (MK) ‘to consort with, mingle with’; ‘vermischt sein (im Sinne von zusammen mit …, sich gesellen zu)’ (Faulkner 1962: 264; Caminos 1954: 59; DLE II 117; Wb IV 440) ~ Dem šnb ‘verbinden sich’; šbn ‘sich vereinigen mit’ (DG 515) ~ Aram ššbyn ‘groomsman’ (Hillers & Cussini 1996: 418) || Akkad susabinnu ‫ ����ش����ا � ن‬šabāyin ‘godfather’ (Hava ‘best man’ (Parpola 2007: 151) || Ar �‫ ����ش� ب��ي�� ن‬šibīn, pl �‫ي‬ ‫ب‬ 1982: 350); ~ Palest šbīn, pl šabāyin ‘Pate’ (Bauer 1957: 227) ~ Damascus šbīn ‘id.’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 160) ~ Egypt šibīn, pl šabāyin ‘godfather’ (Spiro 1895: 303) ~ Malta ⟨xbin⟩ ‘compare’ (Vassalli 1796: 629). 354

š-t-m

štm (MK) ‘be quarrelsome, (be) insolent’; ‘verleumden’ (Faulkner 1962: 273; Wb ‫ت‬ IV 557) ~ Dem štm ‘(aus)schimpfen’ (Vittmann 1996: 443) || Ar � �‫ � �ش‬šatama ‘to ‫م‬ revile, vilify’ (Hava 1982: 351) ~ E. Arabia šatam ‘to insult’ (Holes 2001: 265) ~ Aleppo šatam, yaštom ‘injurier, insulter (qqn)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 378) ~ Damascus šemet b- ‘to gloat over’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 104) ~ Qarṭmīn šatam, yǝštǝm ‘schimpfen, beschimpfen’; štimāt ‘Klagen’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 220) ~ Kǝndērīb šattam ‘beschimpfen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 73) ~ Palest šatam ‘beleidigen’ (Bauer 1957: 261) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨šamat⟩ [< *štm] ‘insultar’ (Corriente 1989: 170) ~ Tunis šmet ‘il s’est réjoui du mal subi par autrui’ (D. Cohen 1975: 21). 355

š-ǧ-r¹

dšr (OK) (als Ausdruck beim Schiffsbau; von der Herstellung eines Schiffes)’; (LE) ‘ein Baum, dessen Holz zu Tischlerarbeiten verwendet wird’ (Wb V 490, 491; Hannig 1995: 987) ~ Akkad gišru/gušūru ‘beam, log, planks, timber’

‫�ش ة‬

‫أ �ش‬

(M. Cohen 2011: 17, 27) || Ar �‫ ���ج�ر‬šaǧarah, pl ‫ � ���ج��ا ر‬ʾašǧār ‘tree, shrub’ (Hava 1982: 352); ~ Sudan šadar/šaǧar, pl ašǧār ‘tree’; šidēra ‘small tree’ (Tamis & Persson 2013: 400) ~ Ḥassāniyya sǝdṛa/sǝdṛāye, coll. ṣdaṛ ‘arbre’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990:

202

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

24) ~ Negev saǧaṛah ‘tree’ (Henkin 2010: 260) ~ Oman šgār ‘Bäume’ (Reinhardt 1894: 7) ~ Yemen šaggar ‘Holz hacken, spalten’; tšaggar ‘gespalten werden’ (Behnstedt 1996: 660) ~ Iraq šiǧra ‘tree, bush, shrub’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 236) ~ S.E. Anatolia sǝǧaṛa ‘arbre’ (Grigore 2007: 98) ~ Rwala šaǧar ‘woody plants’ (Musil 1928: 17) ~ Palest šaǧar, pl ašǧār, šaǧārāt ‘Baum’ (Bauer 1957: 42) ~ Egypt šagar/sagar ‘tree’ (Spiro 1895: 304); šižara ‘Baum’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 228) ~ Malta ⟨siǧra, pl siǧar⟩ ‘tree, bush’ (Vassalli 1796: 611). 356

š-ǧ-r²

sqr (Pyr) ‘strike down foes’ (Faulkner 1962: 250) || Ar ‫ � �ش� �ا �ج�ر‬šāǧara, ‘to quarrel with s.o.’ (Hava 1982: 352); ~ Palest mušāǧarah ‘Wortstreit’ (Bauer 1957: 293) ~ Egypt itšāgir ‘to quarrel’; mušāgra ‘quarrel, row’ (Spiro 1895: 303). 357

š-ḥ-ṭ

šdḥ (MK) [< *šṭḥ] ‘ein dem Wein verwandtes Getränk; Most’; ‘pomegranate wine’ (Wb IV 568; Calice 1936: 209; Faulkner 1962: 274) ~ Akkad ṣaḫāṭu ‘to press’ (M. Cohen 2011: 162) ~ Heb ‫ ָס ַחט‬sāḥaṭ ‘to press, wring, cause to flow’ ���‫ �ش‬šaḥaṭa ‘mettre de l’eau dans du vin ou dans du (M. Jastrow 1886: 971) || Ar ‫ح��ط‬ lait, le couper, l’atténuer d’eau’ (DAF I 1198); ~ Iraq šaḥḥaṭ ‘to make deficient’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 236) ~ Egypt šaḥaṭ ‘versiegen, knapp werden (Wasser)’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 229) ~ Yemen šiḥiṭ ‘hart und trocken werden’ (Behnstedt 1996: 625). 358

š-d-d¹

šdi҆ (Pyr) ‘nehmen, fortnehmen, herausnehmen’; ‘take away, remove’; šd ‘stehlen; sich auf eine Sache verlegen’ (Wb IV 560; Faulkner 1962: 273; Calice 136: 82); šdd ‘das Gelieferte’ (Hannig 1995: 845) ~ Akkad šadādu ‘to drag’ (M. ّ � � Cohen 2011:167) ~ Heb [ ‫ד‬ ‫ד‬ ַ ‫ׁש‬ ָ ] šadād ‘despoil’ (BDB 994) || Ar ‫�د‬ ‫�ش‬ šadda ‘to attack’ ّ (Hava 1982: 356); ‫ � �ش� �د ا د‬šaddād ‘Gewalttäter, Bedrucker’ (Wahrmund I 967); ~ Marazig šadd ‘saisir’ (Boris 1958: 306) ~ Tripoli (Libya) šedd ‘prender in mano’; šiddētah ‘l’ho preso (é in mio potere)’ (Griffini 1913: 223–4) ~ Morocco šǝdd ‘prendre possession de, prendre pour soi; s’emparer de’ (Prémare VII 49) ~ Egypt šadd ‘to pull, stain, draw, tighten’ (Spiro 1895: 306) ~ Ḥassāniyya

356. š-ǧ-r ² – 362. š-r-b

203

šadd ‘marriage’ (Heath 2004: 225) ~ Damascus šadd ‘to clamp’; šadīd ‘violent’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 42, 256) ~ Aleppo štadd ‘devenir violent’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 378). 359

š-d-d²

šd (Med) ‘Kopfbinde, Umschlag, Wickel’; śšd ‘Binde (zum Einwickeln der Mumie); mit einer Binde schmücken’; ‘poultice’;ّ šdi҆ ‘to pull’ (Wb IV 566, 301, 560; Hannig 1995: 844; Faulkner 1962: 274) || Ar ‫ � �ش� �د‬šadda ‘bind, fasten tightly’ (Hava 1982: 356); ~ E. Arabia šadd ‘to tie up, pack’ (Holes 2001: 267) ~ Damascus šadd ‘tighten’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 242) ~ Hasankeyf šadd ‘befestigen, zusammenbinden’ (Fink 2017: 300) ~ Lebanon šadd ‘tirer, soutenir’ (Feghali 1938: 783); šadd ‘he tightened’ (Nasr 1966: 174) ~ Palest šadd ‘spannen’ (Bauer 1957: 281) ~ Egypt šadd ‘pull, strain, draw, tighten’ (Spiro 1895: 302) ~ Tripoli (Libya) šedd ‘stringere’ (Cesàro 1939: 220) ~ Tunis šǝdd ‘turban’ (D. Cohen 1975: 142). 360

š-d-w

šdj (OK) ‘to read’; ‘lesen, vorlesen, rezitieren; erziehen (Kind)’ (Faulkner 1962: 270; DLE II 139; Wb IV 563; Hannig 2003: 1324; Hannig & Vomberg 1999: 413) || Ar ‫ � �ش� �د ا‬šadā ‘Verse rezitieren’ (Wahrmund I 968); ~ Egypt yišdey ‘singen’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 231) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨yašdu šadā⟩ ‘to chirp or sing’ (Corriente 1997: 277). 361

š-ð-f

šzp (Pyr) ‘catch (fish)’; ‘empfangen, entgegennehmen, ergreifen’ (Faulkner ‫�ذ ف‬ 1962: 271; Wb IV 530) || Ar �� � �‫ � �ش‬šaðafa ‘atteindre, obtenir’ (DAF I 1208); ~ N. Yemen šaððaf ‘zerbrechen, spalten’ (Behnstedt 1987: 267). 362

š-r-b

šꜣb (OK) ‘meal, repast’; ‘Tisch mit Speisen’; šꜣb.w (MK) ‘Mahlzeit’ (Wb IV 410; Ember 1930: 14) || Ar �‫ � �ش� ر ب‬šariba ‘to drink’ (Hava 1982: 358); ~ Aleppo šǝreb ‘boire’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 383) ~ Palest širib ‘trinken’ (Bauer 1957: 306) ~ Egypt širib ‘to drink’ (Spiro 1895: 307) ~ Marazig šreb ‘boire’

204

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

(Boris 1958: 306) ~ Morocco šṛab ‘wine’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 223) ~ Malta ⟨xorob, jixrob⟩ ‘bere’ (Vassalli 1796: 648). 363

š-r-r¹

šrr (Pyr) ‘small, lowly man’; ‘klein sein (von Personen, Dingen)’ (Faulkner ّ 1962: 270; Wb IV 525) || Ar ‫ � �ش� ر‬šarr, pl ‫ � �ش� رور‬šurūr ‘Übel, Schlimmes, Schlechtes, Bosheit, Schaden’ (Wahrmund I 970); ~ E. Arabia šarrāni ‘good for nothing (person)’ (Holes 2001: 268) ~ Palest šarr ‘Böses’ (Bauer 1957: 309) ~ Ḥassāniyya šarīr ‘féroce’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 69). 364

š-r-r²

śšr (Med) ‘etwas trocknen, dörren (Datteln, Fleisch)’; ‘to dry, dry up; to bleach’; wšri҆ ‘dry up, be barren (of women), be despoiled’ (Wb IV 295; Faulkner 1962: ّ 70, 248; Ember 1930: 93) || Ar ‫ � �ش� ر‬šarra ‘to expose to the sun’ (Hava 1982: 358); ~ Palmyra šaṛṛ ‘faire sécher au soleil’ (Cantineau 1934 II 28) ~ Damascus l-ḥarīq sabbabǝto šarāra ‘the fire was started by a spark’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 219) ~ Kǝndērīb šǝrār ǝn-nār ‘die Funken des Feuers’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 74) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨šarārah⟩ ‘spark’ (Cor-riente 1997: 279) ~ Malta ⟨xrara⟩ ‘favilla, scintilla che schizza’; ⟨xrajra⟩ ‘scintilluccia’ (Vassalli 1796: 648). 365

š-r-ṭ

šʿd (Med) ‘cut, cut off’; ‘schneiden, abschneiden; in Stücke schneiden, zerschneiden (auch Feinde im Kampf)’ (Faulkner 1962: 262; Wb IV 422) ~ Heb ‫ ָש ַרט‬śāraṭ ‘incise, scratch’ (BDB 976) ~ Akkad šarāṭu ‘tear, rip’ (M. Cohen 2011: 208) || Ar ‫ � �ش� رط‬šaraṭa ‘in Stücke zerreissen’ (Wahrmund I 794); ~ Aleppo šaraṭ ‘déchirer (qqe) en deux morceaux’; šarmaṭ ‘déchirer en plusiers morceaux’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 386, 389) ~ Daθīna ⟨šarwĭṭa⟩ ‘lambeau d’étoffe’ (GD 2047) ~ S.E. Anatolia šarraṭ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 223) ~ Kǝndērīb šarēṭ, pl šǝrṭēn ‘dicker Strick’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 74) ~ Palest šaraṭ ‘zerreißen’ (Bauer 1957: 374) ~ Malta ⟨ċarrat, iċarrat⟩ ‘to rend’; ⟨ċarruta, pl ċraret⟩ ‘rag’ (Aquilina 1987: 167).

205

363. š-r-r ¹ – 368. š-r- ʿ³

366

š-r-ʿ¹

šꜣʿ (MK) ‘to begin’; ‘anfangen, beginnen etwas zu tun; Beginn, Anfang von’ (Ember 1930: 13; Faulkner 1962: 261; Wb IV 406; Brose 2014: 179) ~ Akkad šurrû ‘to begin’ (CAD XVII/3: 358) || Ar ‫ � �ش� ر‬šaraʿa ‘to start (an affair)’ (Hava 1982: 360);

‫ع‬

~ Palest šaraʿ ( fil-ʿamal) ‘unternehmen’ (Bauer 1957: 322) ~ Egypt šaraʿ ‘begin, undertake’ (Spiro 1895: 310) ~ E. Arabia šaraʿ ‘to go’ (Holes 2001: 270) ~ Takrūna šraʿ ‘entreprendre, commencer’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 2019) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨yašriʿu šarʿun⟩ ‘to start’ (Corriente 1997: 280). 367

š-r-ʿ²

šꜣʿ (Gr) ‘Gewässer im Gau von Hermopolis’ (Wb IV 409) ~ Sab šrʿw ‘provide ‫ � �ش‬mašraʿ ‘way to water’ (Hava water for a settlement’ (Biella 1982: 527) || Ar ‫م�� ر‬ ‫ع‬ 1982: 361); ~ Najd šarraʿ ‘to water animals’; mašraʿ, pl mašāriʿ ‘places with abundant and good water’; širʿ ‘watercourse’ (Kurpershoek 1994: 285; 1999: 397) ~ N. Yemen ŝarraʿ ‘im Brunnen baden’ (Behnstedt 1987: 10) ~ Khābūra mašrūʿ ‘irrigation canal’ (Brockett 1985: 132) ~ Iraq širīʿa, pl -āt ‘an approach to a water hole’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 240) ~ Rwala šāreʿ beθ-θemāni ‘(my darling) drank from my teeth’; mešāreʿ ‘watering the herds; places with abundant good water’ (Musil 1928: 204, 565) ~ Daθīna ⟨šarīʿa, pl šarāyiʿ⟩ ‘flaque’ (GD 2041) ~ Aleppo šarraʿ ‘verser de haut (un liquide) pour le faire mousser’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 387) ~ Palest mišraʿ ‘Wasserfall’ (Dalman I/2 530) ~ Egypt mašrūʿ ‘Bewässerungskanal’; arḍ mašrūʿāt ‘Felder, die durch einen Kanal ganzjährig bewässert werden’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 235); baḥr eš-šarīʿa ‘the river Jordan’ (Spiro 1895: 310). 368

š-r-ʿ³

šꜣʿ ‘container for corn’ (Faulkner 1962: 361) || Ar. *šarāʿ, pl *šarāʾiʿ; ~ Palest šerāʿ ‘petite outre à lait utilisée par les bergers’ (Denizeau 1960: 277; Dalman VII 241); šrāʿ ‘Buttergestell (klein)’ (Bauer 1957: 690) ~ Negev šarāyiʿ ‘churns’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi) ~ Petra iš-šrāʿ ‘ein Schlauch aus eine beim Schwanze offenen Zickleinhaut (die Hirten nehmen ihn für Milch oder Wasser mit und binden ihn am Halse des Leittieres an)’ (Musil 1908: 137).

206 369

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

š-r-q

śrqj ‘als ein Name für den Sonnengott’; śrq.t ‘als ein Gestirn am Nord-himmel’ ‫ق‬ (Wb IV 203) ~ Sab šrq ‘rising of a star, rising sun’ (Biella 1982: 528) ~ Ar �‫� �ش� ر‬ šaraq ‘sun’ (Hava 1982: 362); ~ Oman šrūq ‘aufgehen (Sonne)’ (Reinhardt 1895: 45) ~ E. Arabia šrūg ‘sunrise’ (Holes 2001: 270) ~ Palest šurūq ‘Aufgang (der Sonne)’ (Bauer 1957: 26) ~ Egypt širiq ‘austrocknen (Boden)’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 235) ~ Tripoli (Libya) šarg ‘oriente’ (Griffini 1913: 195) ~ N. Yemen šargah ‘Sonne’ (Behnstedt 1987: 268) ~ Daθīna ⟨šarqah⟩ ‘lever du soleil’ (GD 2004) ~ Oman šrūq ‘aufgehen (Sonne)’ (Reinhardt 1894: 45) ~ Najd šaraq ‘leuchten’ (Socin 1901 III 279) ~ Djidjelli šerq ‘levant’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 246). 370

š-ṭ-f

śtf (Med) ‘to clean, purify’; ‘vom sorgsamen Abgießen einer Flüssigkeit bei der Arzneibereitung; vom Wasser, welches das Land befruchtet; das Wasser auch vom Traubensaft)’ (DLE I 96; Wb IV 342) ~ Dem stf ‘ausgießen, reinigen’ (DG 478) ~ Copt ⲥⲱⲧϥ ‘purify, strain; cause to drip, pour’ (Crum 1939: 366b) ~ Aram šṭf (Blau 1955: 344) ~ Heb ‫ ָׁש ַטף‬šāṭap ‘to overflow, rinse, wash off’ (BDB 1009) || ‫ف‬ Ar ���‫ �ش����ط‬šaṭafa ‘rinse, wash’ (Hava 1982: 365) [< Aram]; ~ Aleppo šaṭaf ‘rincer’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 392) ~ Damascus šaṭṭaf ‘auswischen, ausputzen’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 161) ~ Arbīl šaṭaf, yǝšṭǝf ‘(im klaren Wasser) ausspülen’ (O. Jastrow 1990: 366) ~ Iraq šiṭaf ‘rinse in clean water’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 242) ~ Palest šaṭaf ‘abspülen’ (Bauer 1957: 7). 371

š-ð̣ -y

sḏ (Pyr) ‘break, break into, invade, breach wall’ (Faulkner 1962: 257); ‘zerbrechen, in Stücke brechen’ (Wb IV 373; Calice 1936: 203) || Ar ����‫ �ش‬šað̣ iya ‘to ّ ‫�ظ�ي‬ be split (wood)’; ‫ �ش�� �ظ��ى‬šað̣ ð̣ā ‘to dive, scatter’ (Hava 1982: 366); ~ Kǝndērīb šað̣ ð̣a ‘spalten’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 75) ~ Khābūra šð̣ ð̣ ‘to crack (e.g., cement)’ (Brockett 1985: 133) ~ Ḥassāniyya šað̣ ye ‘fragment’ (TaineCheikh 1990: 71).

369. š-r-q – 375. š-ʿ-š- ʿ

372

207

š-ʿ-r¹

šr.t (MK) ‘ein bestimmtes Getreide wohl Art Gerste (auch zur Bierbereitung)’ (Wb IV 524); šʿr ‘barley field’ (DLE II 14) ~ Sab šʿrm ‘barley’ (Biella 1982: 521) || Ar ‫ � �ش� �عي��ر‬šaʿīr (Hava 1982: 367); ~ N. Yemen šaʿīrin ‘Gerste’ (Behnstedt 1987: 268) ~ Aleppo šʿīr ‘orge’ (Bar­ thélemy 1935–69: 393) ~ Damascus šʿīr ‘barley’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 8) ~ Iraq šiʿīr ‘id.’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 243) ~ Kǝndērīb šʿīr ‘Gerste’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 75). 373

š-ʿ-r²

śʿrt (LE) ‘Wolle’ (Wb IV 49) ~ Dem sʿrt ‘Wolle’: sʿrt n ʿr ‘Haar eines Esels’; qrf.t n sʿlt ‘Beutel aus Wolle’ (DG 411) ~ Copt ⲥⲟⲣⲧ/ⲥⲁⲣⲉⲧ ‘wool of sheep, goat’ (Crum 1939: 356b); ~ Aleppo šaʿr, pl šʿūr ‘cheveux, poils, crins; soies de sanglier’; šaʿr ǝrrāṣ ‘les cheveux’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 393) ~ Kǝndērīb šaʿǝr ‘Haar, Haare; Ziegenhaar’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 75) ~ S.E. Anatolia šaʿru ‘sein Haupthaar’ (O. Jastrow 1981: 32, 20). 374

š-ʿ-r³

sʿr (LE) ‘scrub country’; ‘Wald Gestrüpp, Dorngestrüpp, Dickicht’ (DLE II 14; Wb IV 48; Hannig 1995: 670) ~ Heb ‫ ֵשעיר‬śēʿīr [der “reich bewachsene”] ‘Name des edomitischen Berglandes’ (Hommel 1901: 287, fn 1) || Saf s²ʿr ‘herbage’ (Al-Jallad 2015: 343) ~ Ar ‫ � �ش� �عرا ء‬šaʿrāʾ, pl ‫ � �ش� �عر‬šuʿr ‘covered with plants (earth)’ (Hava 1982: 367); ~ Yemen šaʿra, pl šaʿari ‘untilled lands’ (Piamenta 1990: 257, 393) ~ AlAndalus ⟨šaʿrā, pl šaʿārī⟩ ‘(place full of) cistus’ (Corriente 1997: 283) ~ Malta ⟨Xagħra⟩ (toponym). 375

š-ʿ-š-ʿ

ّ ‫أ‬ ‫ع‬

śšd (NK) ‘flash (vb)’; ‘Gestirn oder Sternbild’ (Faulkner 1962: 249; Wb IV 300)

[< (?) *šḏ] || (?) Ar �‫ � � �ش‬ʾašaʿʿa ‘Strahlen aussenden, strahlen (Sonne)’ (Wahr­

‫ � �ش� � ش‬šaʿšaʿa ‘to shine (stars)’ (Hava 1982: 366); mund I 986); ���‫ع‬ ‫ع‬

208

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

~ Najd šaʿʿat eš-šems ‘das Erscheinen der Sonne’ (Hess 1938: 69) ~ Sinai šaʿʿih ‘rays, illumination’ (Stewart 1990: 266) ~ Aleppo šaʿšaʿ ‘replendir, rayonner’; šʿāʿ ‘rayons de soleil’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 394) ~ Damascus mšaʿšeʿ ‘bright’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 29) ~ Lebanon šaʿʿ ‘briller, luire, resplendir’ (Denizeau 1960: 281) ~ Palest šaʿšaʿ ‘leuchten (Sterne)’ (Bauer 1957: 193) ~ Egypt šaʿšaʿ ‘sparkle’ (Spiro 1895: 315) ~ Djidjelli šʿu ‘rayon de soleil’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 258) ~ Ḥassāniyya šʿāʿ ‘light seen from afar’ (Mali; Heath 2004: 240). 376

š-ʿ-ʿ

šʿ ‘cut off, slaughtering’; ‘schneiden’; šʿt ‘knife’; ‘Verwundung, Gemetzel, ّ Schlacht’ (Faulkner 1962: 262; Wb IV 415, 416; Calice 1936: 204) || Ar �‫ � �ش‬šaʿʿa ‫ع‬ ‘mit verteilten Truppen von verschiedenen Seiten anfallen’; ‘to disperse (people)’ (Wahrmund I 985; Hava 1982: 366). 377

š-ʿ-l

Dem šʿl ‘Docht’ (DG 491) || Ar ‫ � �ش� �ع�ل‬šaʿala ‘light a fire’ (Hava 1982: 368); ~ Aleppo šaʿal ‘allumer (un feu)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 394) ~ Kǝndērīb šaʿal ‘anzünden, anschüren, schüren’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 76) ~ Palest šaʿʿal ‘Feuer machen’ (Bauer 1957: 111) ~ Egypt šaʿal/šaʿlil ‘kindle’ (Spiro 1895: 315) ~ Algiers šʿal ‘illuminer, briller’ (Tapiéro 1971: 159, 152) ~ Morocco šʿal ‘s’allumer, s’enflammer’ (Prémare VII 116) ~ Malta ⟨xegħel, jixgħal⟩ ‘accendere’ (Vassalli 1796: 633). 378

š-ʿ-n-n

šn (Amarna) ‘tree’ (Faulkner 1962: 267; WAS IV 498, 499; Goldwasser 2002: 51); šn ‘tree’ (DLE II 126) ~ Dem šn/šnn ‘Baum’ (DG 513, 516) ~ Copt ϣⲏⲛ ‘tree’ ‫ة‬ (Crum 1939: 568b) || Ar ���‫ � �ش� �ع ن����ي ن‬šaʿnīnah, pl �‫ � �ش� �ع�ا ن�ي�� ن‬šaʿānīn ‘Palms, boughs of trees’ (Hava 1982: 368); ~ Aleppo šaʿnīne, pl šaʿānīn ‘rameaux d’olivier bénits (Chrét.)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 394) ~ Lebanon šaʿnīne, pl šʿānīn ‘le rameau d’olivier ou de palmier garni de bougies, de fruits, etc. que porte chaque enfant à la messe le jour des Rameaux’ (M. & J. Feghali 1977: 172, fn 1; M. Feghali 1938: 785); šaʿnan ‘fêter les Rameaux’ (Denizeau 1960: 282) ~ Egypt iššaʿanīn ‘Palmsonntag’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 239).

209

376. š- ʿ - ʿ – 381. š-f-f

379

š-ġ-l

šnʿ.w (Pyr) ‘Ort wo gearbeitet wird’; (NK) ‘Magazin, Speicher; Arbeitsplatz’ ‫ة‬ (Calice 1936: 207; Wb IV 507); šnʿt ‘storehouse’ (Faulkner 1962: 269) || Ar ��‫� �ش� �غ� �ل‬ šaġlah ‘a heap of wheat’ (Hava 1982: 368). 380

š-f-r

‫ف‬

‫أ ف‬

spꜣ (LE) ‘blade’ (DLE II 32) ~ Ar ‫ � �ش� ��ر‬šufr/šafr, pl ‫ � � �ش� ���ا ر‬ʾašfār ‘breite Klinge, ‫ف ة‬ ‫ف‬ Messer’; �‫ � �ش� ��ر‬šafrah, pl ‫ � �ش� ���ا ر‬šifār ‘edge of a sword’ (Wahrmund I 992); ~ Ḥaḍramawt ⟨šafrah⟩ ‘couteau’ (Landberg 1901: 623) ~ Aleppo šafra, pl -āt ‘tranchant (d’une lame), fil (d’une epée): bord trenchant, arête vive (d’une pierre); lame’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 396) ~ Damascus šafra, pl -āt ‘blade’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 23) ~ Palest šafra, pl -āt ‘Klinge, Messerklinge’ (Bauer 1957: 175, 238) ~ Najd šafra, pl šfār ‘ein Messer in der Form eines Küchenmessers’ (Hess 1938: 121) ~ Marazig šafaṛ, pl ašfāṛ ‘tranchant, fil de lame’ (Boris 1958: 314) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨šifrah, pl šifar⟩ ‘knife’ (Corriente 1997: 285) ~ Malta ⟨xafra, pl xfafar⟩ ‘lama o ferro del coltello’ (Vassalli 1796: 624). 381

š-f-f

śp.t (OK) ‘lip (of mouth, vagina, wound), bank of waterway, shore, beach, edge of horizon’; ‘Lippe; Ufer (Fluß, Meer)’ (Faulkner 1962: 222; DLE II 31; Wb IV 99; Sethe 1962: 179; Hannig 2003: 1101): spty.st wnw ‘her lips are open’ (Kitchen 1999: 384) ~ Dem sp ‘Lippe’; spt ‘Lippen’ (DG 426) ~ Copt ⲥⲡⲟⲧⲟⲩ (Sa‘idic)/ⲥⲫⲟⲧⲟⲩ (Bohairic) ‘lips, shore’ (Crum 1939: 353a) ~ Akkad šaptu ‘lip’ (M. Cohen 2011: 24) ‫ف‬ ‫ � �ش� ف�� ا ت‬šafawāt ‘lip’ (Hava 1982: 370); || Ar ‫ � �ش� ���ه‬šifah, pl � ‫و‬ ~ Damascus šǝffe, pl šǝfaf ‘lip, brim’ (Stowasser 1964: 139, 29) ~ Palmyra šiffe, dual šifftēn, pl šfēf (Cantineau 1934 II 1) ~ Palest šiffe, pl šfāf ‘Lippe’ (Bauer 1957: 195) ~ Egypt šiffa, pl šifaf ‘lip, border, edge’ (Spiro 1895: 317); šiffa ‘Frauenlippe’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1985: 87) ~ Tripoli (Libya) šeffa ‘labbro inferiore’ (Griffini 1913: 156) ~ Tunis šǝffa ‘lèvre’ (D. Cohen 1975: 148) ~ Malta ⟨xoffa, pl xuftejn⟩ ‘lip’ (Aquilina 1990: 1589).

210 382

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

š-q-r

dšr (Pyr) ‘rot, rot sein; rot werden; Röte, Rötung’; dšrw ‘blood’ (Wb V 488, 490; ‫ة‬ Faulkner 1962: 316) [< *gšr < *qšr < šqr] || Ar �‫ � �ش� ق��ر‬šuqrah ‘reddish colour’ (Hava 1982: 372); ~ Sinai ašgar, f šagra, pl šugr ‘tawny (camel), sorrel (horse)’ (C. Bailey 1991: 443) ~ Damascus ašqar, f šaqra, pl šǝqǝr ‘blond’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 24) ~ Aleppo ašqar, f šaqra, pl šuqr ‘blond (: cheveux; personne), alezan (: cheval)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 398) ~ Palest ašqar, f šaqra, pl šuqr ‘blond’ (Bauer 1957: 63) ~ Egypt ašqar, f šaqra, pl šuqr ‘fair-haired’ (Spiro 1895: 318). 383

š-q-q¹

384

š-q-q²

‫ّة‬

śg (LE) ‘marschieren’ (Wb IV 320) || Ar ����‫ � �ش� ق‬šiqqah/šuqqah, pl �‫ � �ش� ق�� ق‬šiqaq/šuqaq ‘lange, schwierige Reise’ (Wahrmund I 997); ~ Aleppo šaqq ʿala wāḥid ‘aller voir (qqn) pour s’informer de sa santé’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 399) ~ Damascus šaqq ʿala ‘besuchen’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 160) ~ Egypt šaqq ‘to visit’; išugg ʿala wāħid ‘jemanden besuchen’ (Spiro 1895: 317; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 244) ~ Palest šaqq ‘Besuch machen’ (Bauer 1957: 56) ~ Marazig šugg ‘geh weg! (bei Vertreiben eines Ziegenbocks)’ (RittBenmimoun 2005: 33) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨šaqqa⟩ ‘to go through or traverse’ (Corriente 1997: 286).

śg ‘wollene Decke’ (Wb IV 320); sa=ga (LE) ‘inferior type of cloth, garment or blanket, probably sackcloth’ (Hoch 1994: 269) ~ Soq śeqah ‘manteau’ ~ Mah ‫ّة‬ śeqqāt ‘tablier long’ (Leslau 1938: 432) || Ar ����‫ � �ش� ق‬šiqqah, pl �‫ � �ش� ق�� ق‬šiqaq ‘piece of cloth’ (Hava 1982: 371); ~ Negev šuggah ‘segment (of cloth)’ (Blanc 1970: 141) ~ Rwala šuqqa, pl šqaq ‘pieces of coarse black cloth from which the Bedouin tent is made’ (Musil 1928: 61) ~ ʿAnazeh šuqqa, pl šiqāq ‘morceau d’étoffe de tente’ (Landberg 1940: 36) ~ Aleppo šǝqqet ḥarīr ‘écheveau de soie’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 399) ~ Palest šuqqa, pl šuqaq ‘pièce d’étoffe; bande de tissue formant le toit de la tente, on en coud plusiers côte à côte’ (Denizeau 1960: 284) ~ Sinai šuggah ‘fishing net’ (de Jong 2011: 29) ~ Egypt šugga ‘schwarzes Umhangtuch der Frauen; langer Schal als Kopfbund benutzt’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 242) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨šaqqa, pl šiqaq⟩ ‘piece of linen’ (Corriente 1997: 286) ~ Malta ⟨xoqqa⟩ ‘panno, tela, pannina, drappo’ (Vassalli 1796: 647).

211

382. š-q-r – 387. š-m-x

385

š-k-w

sk (MK) ‘Beschwerde’ (Wb IV 313) ~ ski҆ ‘accusation’ (Faulkner 1962: 251) || Saf �‫ � �ش� ك‬šakā ‘to complain’ s²tky ‘to petition, complain’ (Al-Jallad 2015: 344) ~ Ar ‫��ا‬ (Hava 1982: 374); ~ Yemen šukāʾ ‘Klage’ (Goitein 1934: 3) ~ Oman šekwe/škiyye ‘Klage’ (Rein­ hardt 1894: 42, 46) ~ S.E. Anatolia štaka ‘se plaindre’ (Grigore 2007: 144) ~ Damascus šakwa, pl šakāwi ‘complaint, lament’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 48, 132) ~ Aleppo šakwe/škēwe ‘plainte’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 403) ~ Hasankeyf štaka ‘sich beschweren’ (Fink 2017: 300) ~ Palest yiški ‘beklagt sich’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 37); šikāwe/šikāye ‘Klage’ (Bauer 1957: 173) ~ Egypt šaka ‘complain, accuse’ (Spiro 1895: 320) ~ Tunis ška ‘il s’est plaint’ (D. Cohen 1975: 105) ~ Djidjelli škāya ‘plainte, litige’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 323) ~ Ḥassāniyya ške ‘se plaindre’ (TaineCheikh 1990: 20). 386

š-l-ḥ

śrḫ (LE) ‘to strip off’ (Hoch 1994: 264) || Ar ��‫ � �ش� ��ل‬šalaḥa ‘undress’ (Hava ‫ح‬ 1982: 375); ~ E. Arabia šilaḥ ‘strip off, take off clothes’ (Holes 2001: 277) ~ Aleppo šǝlǝḥ/šalaḥ ‘retirer, ôter, enlever (ses vêtements, ses chaussures, sa coiffure, sa chemise)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 404) ~ Najd šallaḥ ‘to roll up one’s sleeves’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 399) ~ Palest šalaḥ θiyābo ‘sich entkleiden’ (Bauer 1957: 34) ~ Tangier šellaḥ ‘enlever par éclats ou par lambeaux’; šelḥa ‘un lambeau d’écorce’ (Marçais 1911: 348). 387

š-m-x

‫��ش‬ šmʿw (Pyr) ‘Upper Egypt’; ‘Oberägypten’ (Faulkner 1962: 266) || Ar ‫ � م�� خ‬šamaxa �

‘hoch sein, hoch in die Luft ragen (Berg, Bau), stolz werden’; šamax ‘hoches und fernes Ziel’; šummax, pl von ‫( � �ش� �ا مخ‬Wahrmund I 1006);

�

~ Najd šāmix ‘high, lofty’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 400) ~ Negev zalama šāmix ‘a proud man’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi) ~ ʿAnazeh šāmix ‘fier’ (Landberg 1940: 38) ~ Aleppo šamax ʾǝnfo ‘se montrer fier, dédaigneux’; tšāmax ‘faire le fier’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 407) ~ Lebanon šamax ‘pousser, grandir (plante)’; šǝmx, pl šmūxa ‘arbre haut’ (Denizeau 1960: 290) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨šāmix, pl šawāmix⟩ ‘high, tall, towering’ (Corriente 1997: 290).

212 388

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

š-m-r

Dem šmr ‘Fenchel, Foeniculum capillaceum Gil’ (DG 511; Keimer 1924 I 150) ~ Copt ϣⲁⲙⲁⲣ ‘fennel’ (Crum 1939: 342b) ~ Syr šūmārā ‘Fenchel’ (Brockelmann ‫��ش ة‬ 1928: 787) || Ar. �‫ � �مر‬šamrah ‘Fenchel’ (Wahrmund I 1007); ~ Yemen šamār/šemmār ‘finocchio, Anethum foeniculum’ (Rossi 1939: 164; Behnstedt 1998: 120) ~ Damascus šumar ‘fenouil’ (Denizeau 1960: 290) ~ Lebanon šmarmar ‘id.’ (Feghali 1938: 12) ~ Palest šōmar ‘Fenchel’ (Bauer 1957: 110) ~ Egypt šamar/šammar ‘fennel, Foeniculum capillaeum, Gillb.’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 477). 389

š-m-s

šmś (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘follow, accompany, serve’; ‘folgen, begleiten, dienen; herbeibringen’; šmś.w ‘worship’; ‘Gefolge, Gefolgsmann, Diener’; šmś.w-Ḥr ‘die Horusdiener’; šmś-t ‘Dienerin’; šmsw ‘messenger, henchman’; smsw ‘senior, follower, retainer, servant’ (Faulkner 1962: 267; Wb IV 485–487; DLE II 44, 124, 125) ~ Dem šms Wsir ‘dem Osiris folgen’ (DG 511) ~ Copt ϣⲙϣⲉ ‘serve, worship’ (Crum 1939: 567a) ~ Heb ‫ ַׁש ָּמׁש‬šammāš ‘attendant’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 1602) || ّ Ar ‫ �ش��ما ��س‬šammās ‘deacon’ (Hava 1982: 377);

Cf. Neo-Aramaic: Sarspido/Arbuš/Tall Tammǝṛ šamaša ‘Diakon’ (Talay 2008: 353, 387) ~ Mand šmš ‘serve, minister to’; šam(a)ša ‘servant’ (Drower & Macuch 1963: 470).

~ Aleppo šammās ‘clerc ou laïque au service d’une église d’un rite oriental et qui sert la messe’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 407) ~ Iraq šammāš ‘deacon of a synagogue’ (Avishur 2010: 555), šǝmmās ‘verger’ (Abu-Haidar 1991: 197) ~ Lebanon šemmās (pl šmāmse) ‘diacre’ (M. & J. Feghali 1977: 107, fn 1) ~ Palest šammās, f -e, pl šamāmise ‘Diakon’ (Bauer 1957: 75) ~ Tunis šǝmmāš ‘bedeau de la synagogue’ (D. Cohen 1975: 163). 390

š-n-ṭ

šnḏ (MK) ‘acacia’; ‘Holz der Akazie’; šnḏ.t ‘thorny acacia’ (Faulkner 1962: 270; Wb IV 521; Barns 1956: 18; Hannig 1995: 831; Albright 1918: 250; Goldwasser 2002: 48) ~ Dem šnt.t ‘die Dornakazie’ (DG 516) ~ Copt ϣⲟⲛⲧⲉ ‘Acacia Nilotica, thorn tree’ (Crum 1939: 573a) ~ Akkad samṭu/šamṭu (foreign name of the acacia) (CAD XV 125; XVII/1 339) ~ Heb ‫ ִׁש ָּטה‬šiṭṭāh [< *šinṭāh] ‘acacia tree and wood’ ْ (BDB 1008) || Ar ‫ ����سن����ط‬sanṭ ‘mimosa Nilotica also called acacia Nilotica’ (Lane 1445);

388. š-m-r – 393. š-h-b

213

~ Palest sanṭ/sumṭ ‘Acacia albida’ (Bauer 1957: 9) ~ Egypt sanṭ/sunṭ ‘Acacia nilotica’ (Spiro 1895: 293). 391

š-n-ʿ

šnʿ (OK) ‘ward off, repulse, repel; constable’; ‘abweisen, hindernd in den Weg tretend, wehren, abwehren’; šnʿw ‘policing’; šnʿt ‘detention’; ‘Feind’; šnʿ(y) ‘Patrouille, Streife’ (Faulkner 1962: 269; Hannig 1995: 828; 2003: 1310) ~ Dem šnʿ ‘abweisen, abhalten von …’ (DG 515) ~ Copt ϣⲱⲱⲛⲉ ‘to exclude’ (Crum 1939: 571a) ~ Sab šnʿ ‘enemy’ (Jamme 1962: 448) || Ar ��‫ ����ش�ن‬šanaʿa ‘to disgrace s.o.; to ‫ع‬ charge with foul deeds’; šanuʿa ‘to be ugly’ (Hava 1982: 379); ~ Iraq šinaʿ ‘to expose to disgrace’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 250) ~ Damascus šanīʿ ‘ugly’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 251) ~ Aleppo šannaʿ ‘divulguer les turpitudes de qqn, diffamer qqn’; šanāʿa ‘aspect repoussant; vilenie, turpitude’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 410) ~ Palest šanīʿ ‘hässlich’; šanāʿa ‘Hässlichkeit’ (Bauer 1957: 150) ~ Tripoli (Lebanon) šannaʿ ‘enlaidir’ (El-Hajjé 1954: 76) ~ Tunis šǝnʿa ‘acte adultère’ (D. Cohen 1975: 147) ~ Marazig šneʿ ‘avoir des rapports sexuels illicites (homme ou femme)’ (Boris 1958: 325) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nišannaʿ⟩ ‘to charge with ugly deeds’ (Corriente 1997: 292) ~ Algeria šanīʿ ‘monstrueux’ (Ben Sedira 1910: 391) ~ Ḥassāniyya tǝšnāʿ ‘aggravation’ (TaineCheikh 1990: 21) ~ Malta ⟨xina’⟩ ‘accusare, querelare’ (Vassalli 1796: 644). 392

š-n-k

393

š-h-b

šnṯ (OK) [< *šnč < *šnk] (Pyr) ‘streiten, kämpfen’ (Wb IV 519) || Ar ‫ ����ش�ن���ك‬šanaka ‘to abstain’; ‘ne pas vouloir, refuser’; šunnuk ‘coups reitérés d’armes à feu’ (Hava 1982: 379; Dozy I 792).

šhb (Gr) ‘heißer Wind (als Name des Süd- und Ostwindes)’ (Wb ‫ أ‬IV 529) ~ Copt ‫ش‬ ϣⲱϩⲃ ‘be withered, scorched’ (Crum 1939: 612b) || Ar �‫ � �����ه� ب‬ʾašhub ‘Flamme’ (Wahrmund I 1014); ~ Najd mišhāb, pl mišāhīb ‘a kindling’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 401) ~ Palest mušhāb ‘morceau de bois enflammé, tison’ (Denizeau 1960: 294) ~ Ḥassāniyya šehbān ‘tison’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 142) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨sanatan šahbā⟩ ‘year of drought’ (Corriente 1997: 293).

214 394

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

š-w-b

šbi҆ (Amarna) ‘change, mix, mingle with, confuse message’; ‘verschiedene Substanzen mischen; sich mischen unter Personen’ (Ember 1930: 45; Faulkner 1962: 263; Wb IV 436); šbb (OK) ‘mischen; verschiedene Substanzen mischen; sich mischen unter Personen’ (Ember 1930: 45; Faulkner 1962: 263, 264; Wb IV 436) ~ Dem šb ‘mischen, ändern, verändern’ (DG 497) ~ Copt ϣⲓⲃⲉ ‘to change, be changed’ (Crum 1939: 551a) ~ Sab šwbn ‘mixed’ (Biella 1982: 512) || Ar �‫� �ش� �ا ب‬ šāba ‘mischen, verwirren, trüben’ (Wahrmund I 1018); ~ Najd šōb ‘what is mixed with something else, i.e., gunpowder’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 401) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nušūb šubt⟩ ‘to mix s.th. with’ (Corriente 1997: 295). 395

š-w-r

šꜣ (MK) ‘ordain, order, assign, settle, decide’; ‘schicksalhaft bestimmen (durch den Gott), bestimmen das etwas geschiet’; śꜣ ‘Rat (des Gottes)’ (Faulkner 1962:

‫أ‬

260–261; Wb IV 402–403, 190) || Ar ‫ � � �ش� �ا ر ع��لى‬ʾašāra ʿalā ‘to give advice to s.o.’ (Hava 1982: 381); ~ Oman šōr ‘Rat’ (Reinhardt 1895: 37) ~ Yemen šār ‘dar consiglio’ (Rossi 1939: 201); ištawar ‘to consult’ (Watson 2002: 152); šāwar ‘etwas heimlich sagen’ (Behnstedt 1987: 270) ~ Rwala ašarna ʿalēhon šawran ‘we gave them this advice’ (Musil 1928: 444) ~ Najd šōr ‘decision reached in the majlis, the tribal assembly’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 401) ~ Aleppo šār ‘conseiller à qqn’; ‘conseil, avis qu’on donne à qqn; bonne idée’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 415) ~ Damascus šāwar ‘fragen’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 161) ~ S.E. Anatolia ššāwar ‘se conseiller’ (Grigore 2007: 51) ~ Palest šāwar ‘sich beraten mit jemandem über’; mušāwara ‘Beratung’ (Bauer 1957: 50) ~ Egypt šār ‘advise’ (Spiro 1895: 298) ~ Ḥassāniyya šowṛ ‘direction’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 135). 396

š-w-ṭ¹

šwty (NK) ‘trader’ (Faulkner 1962: 263); šwj.tj (NK) ‘der Kaufmann’ (Wb IV 484); śwtwt ‘sich ergehen, Spaziergang’ (Brockelmann 1932: 113) ~ Copt ϣⲱⲧ ‘trader, merchant’ (Crum 1939: 590a) ~ Heb ‫ �ָשׁ ט‬šāṭ ‘to roam’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 1531) ~ Sab šyṭ ‘handeln’ (Stein 2010: 158) ~ Ar ‫ � �ش� ّوط‬šawwaṭa ‘lange Reise machen’

‫أ‬

(Wahrmund I 1020); ‫ � �ش� وط‬šawṭ, pl ‫ � � �ش� وا ط‬ʾašwāṭ ‘cursus’ (Freytag 1837: 331);

394. š-w-b – 400. š-w-y

215

~ Egypt šawwaṭ ‘einen kurzen Besuch abstatten’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 253); šōṭ, pl ašwāṭ ‘race, ramble’ (Spiro 1895: 327) ~ Marazig šōṭ ‘cour de la Kaaba (au pèlerinage); avantage, succès’; šawāṭ ‘poursuivre sans désemparer’ (Boris 1958: 327) ~ Ḥassāniyya šāṭ ‘surpasser qqn de/en; jeter qqc. vers ou sur qqn’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 139, 87). 397

š-w-ṭ²

šdj (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘Acker’; šdyt ‘plot of land’; šdy ‘ditch’ (Wb IV 567; Faulkner 1962: 274) ~ Copt ϣⲱⲧⲉ ‘well, cistern, pit’ (Crum 1939: 595a); ~ Najd šawṭ ‘Talboden’ (Socin 1901 III 282) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨šawṭ, pl ašwāṭ⟩ ‘thicket, forest’ (Corriente 1997: 295). 398

š-w-ṭ³

śwt (MK) ‘der Hauch des Westwindes’ (Wb IV 77) ~ Akkad šūtu ‘south, southwind’ (M. Cohen 2011: 195); ~ Morocco šōṭa ‘souffle de vent torride, coup de chaleur, coup de sirocco’ (Prémare VII 226). 399

š-w-ð̣

400

š-w-y

‫أ‬ šḏ.t (Pyr) ‘Feuer, Flamme’ (Wb IV 875) || Ar ‫ � �ش� و�ظ‬šawð̣ , pl ‫ � � �ش� وا�ظ‬ʾašwāð̣ ‘smokeless blaze; intenseness of fire’ (Hava 1982: 382).

šw (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘dry, dried’; ‘trocken werden’ (Faulkner 1962: 263; Wb IV 429) || Ar ‫ � �ش� و�ى‬šawā ‘to roast (meat)’ (Hava 1982: 384); ~ Palmyra šawe ‘rôtir, cuire’ (Cantineau 1934 II 33) ~ Tripoli (Syria) šuwi ‘être grillé’ (El-Hajjé 1954: 71) ~ Lebanon šewe ‘rôtir’ (Feghali 1938: 787) ~ Palest šawa ‘to grill’ (Piamenta 2000: 217) ~ Egypt šawa ‘to grill’ (Spiro 1895: 328) ~ Algiers mešwi ‘grillé’ (Tapiéro 1971: 159).

216 401

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

š-y-t

(i) ḫt (Pyr) [< i҆ḫt] ‘thing(s), property, possessions, goods, offerings’; i҆ḫ.t ~ i҆š.t ‘Habe, Besitz, auch Speise’ (Faulkner 1962: 182; Wb I 134, 135; DLE I 343) displaying an allomorphic shift ḫ > š ‘vor allem mit Possessiv-suffixen’: jḫtjj/jštj snty ‘meine beiden Speisen’ (Edel 1955: 9, 53, 127): ḫt.i҆ nbt ‘all my property’; i҆št ‘property, belongings’ (Gardiner 1957: 308) ~ Dem i҆ḫj ‘Sache, Habe, Besitz’ (DG 42); ~ Yemen šīt, pl ʾašyēʾ ‘cosa’ (Rossi 1939: 202) ~ Kǝndērīb šī ‘etwas, (negiert) nichts’: šī sabʿīn sane ‘etwa siebzig Jahre’; šī … šī ‘teils … teils’; šīya ‘etwas, irgendetwas’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 79) ~ Palest iši/ši/šayy ‘Sache, Ding’; šī ‘irgendein’ (Bauer 1957; 249, 164); šēt, pl šayyūt/šūt ‘of’ (Piamenta 1989: 210) ~ Ḥama šīt, pl šīyāt mit Pronominalsuffix: ‘gehörend zu’: hāda šīti ‘dies gehört mir’; šīyān ‘nichts’ (Lewin 1966: 213, 214) ~ Damascus šī ‘any’: maʿak šī maṣāri? ‘Do you have any money with you?’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 9) ~ Egypt šē/šay ‘thing’ (Spiro 1895: 328) ~ Tunis šayy ‘rien, quelque chose’ (D. Cohen 1975: 144, 222) ~ Rwala šīn ‘nothing’ (Musil 1928: 453) ~ Marazig šayy ‘nichts’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2005: 103) ~ Malta ⟨xejn⟩ ‘nothing’ (Aquilina 1990: 1557). 402

š-y-h

sjw ‘Schaf’ (Calice 1936: 195) ~ Copt ⲉⲥⲟⲟⲩ ‘sheep’ (Crum 1939: 61a) ~ Akkad šuātu ‘ewe’ (CAD XVII/3 168) ~ Sab š bn ‘sheep or goat’ (Biella 1982: 511) || Ar ‫ � �ش� �ا ه‬šāh, pl ‫ � �ش� �ا ء‬šāʾ/‫ ����ش�ي���ا ه‬šiyāh ‘ewe, goat’ (Hava 1982: 383); ~ Najd šāh, pl šyāh ‘das weibliche Schaf’ (Hess 1938: 82) ~ Ḥaḍramawt šāt ‘goat (not sheep)’ (Radionov 2007: 92) ~ Negev šāh ‘goat’ (Blanc 1970: 141) ~ Rwala šāt ‘sheep’ (Musil 1928: 129) ~ Oman šā, pl šawhāt ‘Ziege’ (Reinhardt 1894: 59) ~ Yemen šāh, pl šiyāt ‘pecora’ (Rossi 1939: 162); šāt, pl šuwāt ‘Ziege’ (Behnstedt 1987: 270) ~ Palest šāh, pl šyāh ‘chèvre, brebis’; šuwāwi ‘éleveur de petit bétail’ (Denizeau 1960: 297) ~ Ḥassāniyya še, pl šyah ‘caprin’ (TaineCheikh 1990: 38). 403

š-y-y

ḫy (Gr) ‘what’: ḫy ‘hail, Oh! what is …?’ (DLE I 350) ~ ḫy qd.k ‘how are you?’; ‘wie ist dein Befinden?’ (Faulkner 1962: 185; Hannig 1995: 585) ~ ḫy ḏd.t=j ‘Was ist es, was ich sagen soll?’ (Brose 2014: 86) > [*šī]; sy ‘who?, what?’ (Faulkner 1962: 211)

‫أ‬

|| Ar ���‫ � ي� ش‬ʾayš (A. Fischer 1905); cf. 531. q-d-d;

217

401. š-y-t – 406. ṣ-b-ġ

~ Damascus šī ‘some … or other’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 217) ~ Malta ⟨xi trid?⟩ ‘what do you want?’; ⟨xi dwejjaq!⟩ ‘How annoying!’ (own obs.) ~ Ḥassāniyya š/aš ‘quoi?’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 124).

Ṣ

404

ṣ-ʾ-b

sb-t ‘Läuse’ (Erman 1904: 103) ~ Dem sjb ‘Laus’; sb ‘Ungeziefer’ (DG 408, 419) ‫�ئ ن‬ ‫ة‬ ~ Copt ⲥⲓⲃ ‘tick’ (Crum 1939: 318b) || Ar ���‫ �ص�ؤا ب‬ṣuʾābah, pl � ‫ �ص� ب��ا‬ṣiʾbān ‘nit, louse’s egg’ (Hava 1982: 386); ~ Mosul ṣwāb ‘nits, lice eggs’ (Al-Bakrī 1972: 311) ~ Daθīna ⟨ṣīb⟩ ‘progéniture’ (GD 2159); ṣayyab ‘seminare’ (Rossi 1939: 237) ~ Palest ṣībān ‘Lauseeier’ (Bauer 1957: 220) ~ Aleppo ṣībēn ‘lentes, œufs de poux’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 452) ~ Tunis ṣaybān ‘lentes’ (D. Cohen 1975: 38) ~ Algeria ṣayb ‘lentes’ (Lentin 1959: 167) ~ Djidjelli ṣībāna ‘lente de poux’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 287) ~ Ḥassāniyya ṣībān ‘lentes (coll.)’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 90) ~ Malta ⟨subien⟩ ‘nits’ (Aquilina 1990: 1372). 405

ṣ-b-ʿ

ḏbʿ (OK) ‘finger, thumb, toe; point the finger’; ‘Finger, Fingerbreite (als Längenmaß)’ (Faulkner 1962: 321; Wb V 562) ~ Dem tbʿ/tb ‘Finger’ (DG 623, 617)

‫أ‬

~ Akkad neṣbettu ‘finger’ (M. Cohen 2011: 24) || Ar ��‫ إ� ��ص ب‬ʾiṣbaʿ, pl �‫ � �ص�ا ب‬ʾaṣābiʿ ‘finger’ ‫ع‬ ‫ع‬ (Hava 1982: 388); ~ Damascus ʾǝṣbaʿ/ʾǝṣbaʿa, pl ʾaṣābeʿ/ʾaṣābīʿ ‘finger’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 90) ~ Kǝndērīb ṣǝbǝʿ, pl ṣābīʿ ‘Finger’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 80) ~ Palest oṣbaʿ/iṣbaʿ, pl ʾaṣābiʿ/ʾaṣābīʿ ‘id.’ (Bauer 1957: 112) ~ Egypt ṣubāʿ/ṣābiʿ, pl ṣawābiʿ ‘id.’ (Spiro 1895: 332) ~ Oman ṣboʿ ‘Finger’ (Reinhardt 1895: 56) ~ Djidjelli ṣboʿ ‘doigt’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 82) ~ Malta ⟨seba’, pl swaba’⟩ ‘finger’ (Aquilina 1990: 1246). 406

ṣ-b-ġ

ḏbg (NK) ‘eintauchen’; ‘dunking, soaking’ (Wb V 568; Hoch 1994: 383) || Ar ‫��ص ب���غ‬ ṣabaġa ‘soak’ (Hava 1982: 388);

218

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

~ Iraq ṣubaġ ‘paint, dye, stain, tint, color; shine (shoes)’: ṣubġat šaʿarha ʾaṣfar ‘she dyed her hair blond’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 257) ~ Aleppo ṣabaġ ‘teindre, attraper, tromper (qqn)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 331) ~ Palest ṣabaġ ‘färben’ (Bauer 1957: 107) ~ Egypt ṣabaġ ‘to dye, tinge’ (Spiro 1895: 444) ~ Ḥassāniyya sbaġ ‘teindre’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 142). 407

ṣ-b-y

sbꜣ (OK) ‘pupil’; ‘Zögling’ (Faulkner 1962: 219; Wb IV 84) ~ Copt ⲥⲓⲃⲟⲩⲓ ‘disciple,

‫ة‬

‫ن‬

ّ apprentice’ (Crum 1939b: 319b) || Ar �‫ � ب�ص‬ṣabiyy, pl �‫ ��ص��بو‬ṣibwah/� ‫ �ص�ب�ي��ا‬ṣibyān ‫�ي‬ ‘Knabe, angehender Jüngling; Bursche, Diener’ (Wahrmund II 11); ~ Sinai ṣabiy ‘youth, lad’ (Stewart 1990: 264) ~ Najd ṣibiyy ‘youth, lad slave’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 392) ~ E. Arabia ṣbayy, pl ṣbayyān ‘boy, male child’ (Holes 2001: 291) ~ Lebanon ṣeba ‘jeunesse’ (Feghali 1938: 788) ~ Palest ṣabi, pl ṣubyān/ ṣibyān ‘Bube, Knabe, Sohn’; ṣiba ‘Jugend’ (Bauer 1957: 68, 176, 123; Kampffmeyer 1936: 39) ~ Šukriyya ṣabi ‘(Kraftiger) junger Mann’ (Reichmuth 1983: 159) ~ Egypt ṣabi ‘lad youth’ (Spiro 1895: 333) ~ Djidjelli ṣbe, pl ṣobyān ‘jouvenceau,’ f ṣbeyya ‘fillette’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 367, 330) ~ Malta ⟨sabi, pl subien⟩ ‘boy’ (Aquilina 1990: 1248). 408

ṣ-d-f

ḏdf.t (Gr) ‘Wurm’; ‘snake; internal bodily worm’ (Wb V 633; Calice 1936: 227; ‫ف‬ Faulkner 1962: 326) || Ar ��‫ �م���ص�د و‬maṣdūf ‘veiled, concealed, covered, pro‫�ف‬ tected’ (Lane 1666); � ‫ �ص�د‬ṣadaf ‘sorte de coquille’ (Dozy I 824). 409

ṣ-d-y

ḏd (Pyr) ‘say, speak, recite’; ‘sagen, sprechen, mitteilen’ (Ember 1930: 110; Faulkner 1962: 325; Wb V 622) ~ Dem ḏd ‘singen, ‫ أ‬Lied’ (DG 691) ~ Copt ϫⲱ ‘to say’ (Crum 1939: 755b) || Ar ‫ �ص�د ا‬ṣadā, pl ‫ � �ص�د ا ء‬ʾaṣdāʾ ‘echo’ (Hava 1982: 393); ~ Aleppo ṣǝda ‘écho’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 434) ~ Damascus ṣada ‘Echo’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 75) ~ Palest ṣada, pl aṣdā ‘Echo’ (Bauer 1957: 82) ~ Egypt ṣada ‘echo’ (Spiro 1895: 336) ~ Najd ṣida ‘sound that responds to s.o., echo; sound, voice, cry’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 404).

219

407. ṣ-b-y – 412. ṣ-r- ʿ

410

ṣ-r-r¹

ḏrt (Pyr) ‘Klageweib, Trauerweib’: ḏrt nt Wsjr ‘das Klageweib des Osiris’ (Wb V ّ 597; Hannig 1995: 1012) || Ar ‫ �صر‬ṣarra ‘laut schreien’ (Wahrmund II 22); ~ Najd ṣarrah ‘clamour, din, confused cries’; ṣarārah ‘s.o. who has not made the pilgrimage to Mecca before, goes on pilgrimage for the first time’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 404) ~ Damascus aṣarr ‘to insist’; mṣǝrr ‘insistent’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 125) ~ Palest ṣarr, yṣirr ‘rendre un son éclatant, résonner’ (Denizeau 1960: 304); iṣirr ‘gellt (in schrillem Ton)’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 39) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨yuṣirr, aṣarr⟩ ‘to insist’; ⟨ṣarrar⟩ ‘to squeak’ (Corriente 1997: 305). 411

ṣ-r-r²

ḏr (Pyr) ‘bundle of grain stalks’; ‘ganz, gesamt; Körperteil des Rindes: wohl am Bauch’ (Ember 1930: 74; Wb V 589, 600) ~ Akkad ṣarru ‘sheaf’ (Parpola 2007: ّ ‫ّة‬ 104) ~ Heb ‫ ָצ ַרר‬ṣārar ‘to bind’ (BDB 864) || Ar ‫ �صر‬ṣarra ‘to bind’; �‫ �صر‬ṣurrah, pl ‫ �صرر‬ṣurar ‘purse’ (Hava 1982: 393); ~ Najd ṣarr ‘to tie up, put (money into a purse)’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 404) ~ Sinai ṣurr ‘binds for a camel’s teats’ (C. Bailey 1991: 443) ~ Egypt ṣarr ‘tie up, make a bundle’; ṣurra, pl ṣurar ‘bundle’ (Spiro 1895: 336, 337) ~ Palest ṣurra, pl ṣurar ‘Bündel, Paket’; ṣarr ‘zusammenpacken’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 39; Bauer 1957: 226, 382) ~ Aleppo ṣarr ‘envelopper (qqe) dans un linge ou un morceau d’étoffe qu’on noue ensuite’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 429) ~ Lebanon ṣarr ‘joindre (le bout des doigts)’ (Denizeau 1960: 304) ~ Marazig ṣurra ‘Stoffsäckchen’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2005: 237) ~ Takrūna ṣurra ‘petit paquet contenu dans une étoffe nouée’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 2213) ~ Djidjelli ṣaṛṛa ‘pacquet, baluchon’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 332, 247) ~ Morocco ṣoṛṛ ‘nouer, serrer, envelopper (qq ch.), dans une étoffe pour en faire un petit ballot, empaqueter qqch. et faire un nœud par dessus de façon à former un nœud’; ṣorra ‘paquet de linge ou de vêtements’ (Prémare VIII, 50) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨maṣarr⟩ ‘purse’ (Corriente 1997: 305) ~ Ḥassāniyya ṣarr ‘tie (sth) up (e.g., in a piece of cloth)’ (Mali; Heath 2004: 220) ~ Malta ⟨sorra, pl soror⟩ ‘fagotto’ (Vassalli 1796: 619). 412

ṣ-r-ʿ

ḏrʿ (20th Dyn.) ‘(von Besiegten) versprengt sein’; ‘lay low, overthrow’ (Wb V ّ 603; Hoch 1994: 393) || Ar ‫ �صر‬ṣarraʿa ‘fling a.o. down’ (Hava 1982: 394);

‫ع‬

220

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

~ Aleppo tṣaraʿ ‘lutter corps à corps l’un contre l’autre’ (Barthélemy 1935– 69: 430) ~ Palest taṣāraʿ ‘ringen’ (Bauer 1957: 245); jiṣraʿ ‘wirft zu Boden’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 39) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨inṣirāʿ⟩ ‘wrestler’s wrestling’ (Corriente 1997: 305). 413

ṣ-f-ḥ

414

ṣ-f-y

‫ة‬

‫ف ئ‬

‫ف‬

ḏpḥ ‘lumber’ (Janssen 1975: 432) || Ar ���‫ �ص����ي�� خ‬ṣafīḥah, pl ‫ �ص���ا �خ‬ṣafāʾiḥ ‘thin plank, � metallic sheet’ (Hava 1982: 398); ~ Egypt ṣaffaḥ ‘to cover with metal plates’ (Spiro 1895: 340) ~ Tangier ṣuffāḥa ‘rocher large et plat’ (W. Marçais 1911: 356).

ّ‫ف‬

ḏfꜣ (NK) ‘reinigen, abwischen’ (Wb V 571) || Ar ‫ �ص��ى‬ṣaffā ‘to clarify, filter’ (Hava 1982: 400); ~ Aleppo ṣaffa ‘passer, clarifier, filtrer (un liquide)’: mway mṣaffāye ‘de l’eau filtrée’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 439) ~ Egypt ṣaffa ‘strain, drain’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 506) ~ Tunis ṣfa ‘il est devenu pur’ (D. Cohen 1975: 105) ~ Ḥassāniyya ṣaffe ‘purifier, filtrer’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 121, 69) ~ Malta ⟨saffa, isaffi⟩ ‘chiarire, rendere lucido’ (Vassalli 1796: 586). 415

ṣ-q-r

‫أ‬

zkr ‘Gott in Falkengestalt’ (Calice 1936: 193); ‘Seker (falcon god of the Memphite

necropolis)’ || Ar ‫ � قص��ر‬ṣaqr, pl ‫ � � قص��ر‬ʾaṣqur ‘kestrel, small falcon’ (Hava 1982: 401); ~ Al-Balqāʾ ṣagr, pl ṣgūr ‘falcon’ (Palva 1992: 172) ~ Najd ṣagur ‘hawk’ (Ingham 1982: 59) ~ Damascus ṣaqǝr, pl ṣqūr ‘hawk’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 113) ~ Palest ṣaqr, pl ṣuqūr ‘Falke’ (Bauer 1957: 106) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ṣaqr⟩ ‘falcon’ (Corriente 1997: 309) ~ Malta ⟨seqer, pl isqra⟩ ‘uccello di rapina’ (Vassalli 1796: 603). 416

ṣ-m-d

dmḏ (Pyr) ‘addieren, Summe, insgesamt’; ‘total’ (Calice 1936: 88; Faulkner ّ 1962: 313; Wb V 457; Schipper 2005: 80) ~ Dem tmt ‘Summe’ (DG 634) || Ar ‫�صم�د‬

413. ṣ-f-ḥ – 418. ṣ-w-l

221

ṣammada ‘Ersparungen machen, als Reingewinn zurücklegen’ (Wahrmund II 53); cf. 423. ḍ-m-d; ~ Iraq ṣammad ‘to hoard, save (money)’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 269) ~ Damascus ṣammad ‘save (money)’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 200) ~ Lebanon ṣammed ‘économiser’ (Feghali 1938: 790) ~ Palest ṣamad ‘beharren’; ṣammad ‘sparen’ (Bauer 1957: 46, 281) ~ Egypt ṣammid ‘save or put by money’ (Spiro 1895: 646, 343) ~ Ḥaḍramawt ṣumādah ‘fichu pour la tête’ (Landberg 1901: 1542). 417

ṣ-n-ǧ

snḏ (Pyr) ‘fear (v)’; ‘fürchten’; snḏ.t ‘fear (n)’ (Faulkner 1962: 234–5; Wb IV 182; Hannig 2003: 1166) || Ar ‫ ��ص ن����ج‬ṣanaǧa ‘heimjagen, prügeln’ (Wahrmund II 57);

� ‫ن‬ �‫ �ص�ا ج‬ṣāniǧ ‘colique’ (Dozy I 846); �

~ Ḥaḍramawt ⟨aṣnaǧ⟩ ‘sourd’ (Landberg 1901: 635) ~ Yemen ṣiniǧ ‘taub werden’ (Behnstedt 1996: 727) ~ Lebanon ṣannaǧ ‘to contract (muscles)’ (Frayha 1973: 107) ~ Egypt aṣnag ‘deaf’; ṣanag ‘deafness’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 511). 418

ṣ-w-l

ḏꜣj (Pyr) ‘sich feindlich in den Weg stellen; sich widersetzen’; ḏꜣyw ‘opponent’ (Wb V 514; Faulkner 1962: 318) || Ar ‫ �ص�ا ل‬ṣāla ‘einen wütenden Angriff machen’ (Wahrmund II 66); ‫ �ص ّوا ل‬ṣuwwāl ‘furious assault’ (Piamenta 1990: 290); cf. 438. ð̣ -r-r; ~ Najd ṣāleh ‘Feind’ (Hess 1938: 100) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨tiṣūl ṣawlah⟩ ‘to domineer, overcome’ (Corriente 1997: 313) ~ Marazig ṣāl ‘attaquer l’homme (ʿala)’ (chameau); ṣawwāl ‘qui entre facilement en fureur’ (Boris 1958: 356) ~ Rwala ṣāl ‘to move the whole tribe with all its women, children and possessions and engage in another tribe in a major battle to take possession of its territory’ (Musil 1928: 540) ~ Lebanon ṣāl ‘atteindre, atrapper’ (Feghali 1933: 76) ~ Morocco ṣāl ‘se dresser orgueilleusement et triomphateur’; ṣōḷ ‘triomphe insolent / écrasant’ (Prémare VIII 132).

222

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )



Ḍ

419

ḍ-b-b

(i) ḏbꜣ (MK) ‘stop up, block’; dbb ‘verstopfen, schmücken, versehen mit’; ḏbί ‘stop up’ (variant of ḏbt ‘brick, ingot, slab of metal’; ‘Ziegel’) (Faulkner 1962: 321, 311; Wb V 436, 553; Hannig 1995: 1001; Brockelmann 1932: 117) ~ Dem tb ‘Ziegel’ ‫ �ض ّ ة‬ḍabbah ‘baked bricks, doorlatch’ (Lane 1888; Hava 1982: 412); (DG 617) || Ar ����‫�� ب‬ ~ Egypt ḍabb ‘to seize, close, shut’ (Spiro 1895: 349) ~ Aleppo ḍabb ‘renfermer’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 455) ~ Najd ð̣ abb ʿala ‘to surround s.th. tightly and completely’; ð̣ bāb ‘brass rings clasping s.th. tightly and keeping it together’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 413) ~ Lebanon ḍabb lsēno ‘tenir sa langue’ (M. Feghali 1933: 44) ~ Palest dibbiyye ‘große wollene Decke’ (Bauer 1957: 73) [< *ḍbb] ~ N. Yemen ð̣ abbah ‘Türriegel’ (Behnstedt 1987: 273) ~ Aleppo ḍabba ‘serrure de bois’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 455) ~ Egypt ḍabbah ‘wooden lock’ (Spiro 1895: 349); (ii) Copt ⲧⲱⲱⲃⲉ ‘brick’ (Crum 1939: 398a); ~ Palest ṭūb ‘Backstein’ (Bauer 1957: 40) ~ Egypt ṭūb ‘bricks, stones’ (Spiro 1895: 375) ~ Ḥassāniyya tūv ‘brique (d’argile séche)’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 33) ~ Al-Andalus ṭūbah ‘sun-dried brick, adobe’ (Corriente 1997: 336). 420

ḍ-r-ḥ

ḏḥr (MK) ‘leather, hide’; ‘Haut eines Tieres, Leder’ (Faulkner 1962: 315; Wb V 481, 605; Calice 1936: 223) ~ Ugar drḫ ‘chamois’ (DUL 281) ~ Akkad turāḫu ‘ibex’ (Parpola 2007: 205) || Ar ‫ �ض� ر‬ḍarḥ ‘Haut, Leder’ (Wahrmund II 88).

‫ح‬

421

ḍ-r-m

ḏꜣb (MK) ‘Kohle’ (Calice 1936: 89) || Ar ‫ �ض� ر‬ḍarima ‘to burn (fire)’ (Hava ‫م‬ 1982: 417); ~ Najd mið̣ rim ‘burning fiercely, ardent, violent’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 414) ~ Morocco ḍǝṛṛǝm ‘faire flamber, attiser (un feu)’; ḍāṛǝm ‘qui flambe, qui brûle intensément; ardent (feu, flamme)’ (Prémare VIII 190) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ḍarīm⟩ ‘fire’ (Corriente 1997: 318).

223

419. ḍ-b-b – 424. ḍ-w- ʾ

422

ḍ-f-f

‫فّ ة‬

wḏb (MK) ‘Ufer, Uferland’; ‘fold over’ (Wb I 409; Calice 1936: 89) || Ar ���� � ‫ �ض‬ḍiffah ‘side of a valley, side of a river’ (Hava 1982: 419); ~ Damascus ḍaffah, pl ḍfāf ‘bank’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 18) ~ Al-Andalus ḍaffah ‘bank, shore’ (Corriente 1997: 219). 423

ḍ-m-d

ḏmd/dmḏί (Pyr) ‘verbinden; sich geschlechtlich vereinigen (Mann mit Frau)’; ‘unite’ (Ember 1930: 59; Schäfer 1901; Wb V 457; Hannig & Vomberg 1999: 462) ~ Dem tmt (dmd) ‘vereinigen’ (DG 680) ~ Heb ‫ ֶצ ֶמד‬ṣemed ‘yoke’ (BDB 855) ~ Akkad ṣamādu ‘bandage’ (M. Cohen 2011: 16) || Ar ‫ �ض�م�د‬ḍamada ‘to bandage a wound’ (Hava 1982: 420); cf. 416. ṣ-m-d; ~ Yemen ḍamaḍ ‘(die Tiere, 2 Ochsen) anspannen; pflügen’ (Behnstedt 1996: 754) ~ Ras il-Maʿarra ṣimd ‘Pflug’ (Arnold & Behnstedt 1993: 85) ~ Khābūra ḍamīda ‘a small palm-leaf basket’ (Brockett 1985: 148) ~ Damascus ḍaṃṃaḍ ‘to bandage’; ḍṃāḍ ‘bandage’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 18) ~ Lebanon ḍammad, yḍammed ‘panser une plaie’ (Denizeau 1960: 320) ~ Egypt ḍand ‘Jochbaum’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 277) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨niḍammad⟩ ‘to poultice; to yoke’; ⟨maḍmaḍ, pl maḍāmid⟩ ‘yugo’ (Corriente 1997: 319, 320) ~ Malta ⟨madmad⟩ ‘giogo dell’aratro’ (Vassalli 1796: 446). 424

ḍ-w-ʾ

dwꜣ.w (MK) ‘dawn, morning, tomorrow, the morrow’; ‘die Morgenfrühe, der morgige Tag; morgens, am Morgen’; dwꜣ ‘to be early’; ḏwꜣ ‘rise at dawn’ (Faulkner ‫ �ض‬ḍawʾ 1962: 310; DLE II 242; Wb V 422; Erman 1904: 149; Barns 1956: 41) || Ar ‫� ْوء‬ ‘Zwielicht’ (Wahrmund II 108); ~ Bišmizzīn iḍ-ḍaw ‘der Morgen’; ṭiliʿ iḍ-ḍaw ‘der Tag ist angebrochen’ (Jiha 1964: 48, 108, fn 1) ~ Kǝndērīb að̣ ð̣a, yǝð̣ ð̣i ‘hell werden, glänzen’: ǝddǝnya tǝð̣ ð̣i ‘die Morgenröte erscheint; es wird hell’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 116) ~ S.E. Anatolia ḍaww ‘Licht, Lampe’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 254) ~ Najd ⟨awḍā⟩ ‘leuchten, strahlen’; ḍāwa (von den Sternen gesagt) ‘nach Sonnenuntergang aufgehen’ (Socin 1901 III 293; Hess 1938: 71) ~ Damascus ḍawa ‘to flash’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 92) ~ Egypt ḍawa ‘to light’ (Spiro 1895: 354) ~ Tripoli (Lebanon) ḍuwi ‘être éclairé’ (El-Hajjé 1954: 71) ~ Palest ḍaww ‘Licht der Lampe’; ḍawa ‘leuchten’ (Bauer 1957: 192, 193) ~ Djidjelli ḍāwi ‘luisant’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 324) ~ Mzāb

224

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

ḍow/ḍu ‘lumière’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 24, 21) ~ Morocco ḍuw ‘light’ (Heath 2002: 159) ~ Malta ⟨dawl⟩ ‘luce’ (Vassalli 1796: 251). 425

ḍ-y-ʿ

ḏʿ (LE) ‘wüst liegen’ (Wb V 534) || Ar ‫� �ا‬ ‫ �ض‬ḍāʿa ‘to perish, be lost’ (Hava 1982: ‫ع‬ 423); ~ Palmyra ḍāʿ ‘se perdre’; ḍayyaʿ ‘perdre’ (Cantineau 1934 II 6) ~ Aleppo ḍāʿ ‘être perdu, se perdre’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 465) ~ Damascus ḍāʿ ‘be or get lost’; ḍayyaʿ/ḍawwaʿ ‘lose’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 142) ~ S.E. Anatolia ð̣ āʿ ‘verlorengehen’; ð̣ ayyaʿ ‘verlieren’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 254) ~ Yemen ð̣ āʿ ‘perdersi’: ð̣ āʿat ʿalayya sāʿati ‘ho perduto l’orologio’ (Rossi 1939: 226) ~ Palest ḍāʿ ‘verlorengehen’; ḍawwaʿ/ḍayyaʿ ‘verlieren’ (Bauer 1957: 335) ~ Egypt ḍayyaʿ ‘lose, cause to be lost, squander’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 526) ~ Tripoli (Libya) ḍāyaʿ ‘sperduto’ (Cesàro 1939: 65).

Ṭ

426

ṭ-b-x

ẖdb (MK) ‘töten, niedermetzeln im Kampf’ (Wb III 403) ~ Akkad ṭabāḫu ‘to slaughter’ (M. Cohen 2011: 192) ~ Heb ‫ ֶט ַבח‬ṭebaḥ ‘slaughter (animals for food)’ (BDB 370) || Ar ‫ ط ب���� خ‬ṭabaxa ‘to cook’ (Hava 1982: 425); cf. 176. x-ð-m;

�

~ Aleppo ṭabax ‘cuire, faire cuire (la viande, le riz)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 468) ~ Āzǝx ṭabax ‘kochen’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 257) ~ Palest ṭabax ‘kochen (Gemüse)’ (Bauer 1957: 177) ~ Egypt ṭabax ‘cook’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 529). 427

ṭ-b-ṭ-b

dbdb (Med) ‘vom Klopfen des Herzens (als Begleiterscheinung einer Krankheit)’; ‘thump of heart’ (Wb V 442, 263; Faulkner 1962: 312) || Ar �‫ط ب����ط� ب‬ ṭabṭaba ‘murmurer (se dit de l’eau, du torrent qui coule avec bruit)’; ‘klingen, rieseln, brummen’ (DAF II 53; Wahrmund II 120); ~ Daθīna ⟨ṭabṭabah⟩ ‘piétinement’ (GD 2189) ~ Tunis ṭabṭab ‘klappsen’ (Stumme 1896: 37) ~ Iraq ṭabb ‘to tap lightly; slam, dash, bang’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 284); ṭabṭab ‘to pat’ (Abu-Haidar 1991: 198) ~ Kǝndērīb ṭapṭap ‘festklopfen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 86, 49) ~ Lebanon ṭabṭab ‘grommeler, marmonner’ (Denizeau 1960: 323) ~ Syria ṭabṭab ‘klappsen’ (Hartmann 1847: 189): ṭabṭab

225

425. ḍ-y- ʿ – 430. ṭ-r- ʾ

ʿal-kalb ‘he tapped the dog’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 170) ~ Sinai ṭabb al-kaff ‘slap’ (Stewart 1990: 272) ~ Palest ṭabṭab ‘schlagen mehrmals freundlich auf die Schulter’ (Bauer 1957: 259); ṭabṭib ʿala ‘schlage auf, klopfe’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 41) ~ Egypt ṭabṭab ‘zurechtklopfen’; dabdab ‘klopfen, trampeln’; mṭabṭab ‘geklopft’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 128, 279; 1999: 370, 229) ~ Tunis ṭabṭab ‘klappsen’ (Stumme 1896: 37) ~ Djidjelli ṭobṭob ‘toquer à la porte’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 203) ~ Malta ⟨taptap, itaptap⟩ ‘battere sopra una cosa colla mano’ (Vassalli 1796: 80). 428

ṭ-b-ʿ

ḏbʿ.t (OK) ‘das Siegel’; ḏbʿ (NK) ‘siegeln’ (Wb V 566) ~ Dem tbʿ ‘siegeln’ (DG 623) ~ Copt ⲧⲱⲱⲃⲉ ‘seal’ (Crum 1939: 398a) || Ar ��‫ ط ب‬ṭabaʿa ‘to print; to coin money’ ‫ع‬ (Hava 1982: 425); ~ Damascus ṭabaʿ ‘to print’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 180) ~ Palest ṭabaʿ ‘drucken’ (Bauer 1957: 79) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ṭabaʿ⟩ ‘to seal; to hallmark (precious metals)’ (Corriente 1997: 324). 429

ṭ-b-l

‫أ‬

tbn (Gr) ‘Handpauke, Trommel’; ‘tambour’ (Wb V 262; Herbin 1994: 549) || Ar ‫ ط ب���ل‬ṭabl, pl ‫ ط��بول‬ṭubūl/‫ � ط ب���ا ل‬ʾaṭbāl ‘drum’ (Hava 1982: 426);

~ Oman ṭabel ‘trommeln’; ṭabil ‘Trommel’ (Reinhardt 1894: 144, 43) ~ Yemen ṭumbulah, pl ṭanābil ‘tamburo’ (Rossi 1939: 241); yiḍambul ‘he drums’ (Watson 2002: 284) ~ Iraq ṭabul, pl ṭubūl ‘drum’; ṭabbāl ‘drummer’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 287) ~ Damascus ṭabl, pl ṭbūl(e) ‘drum’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 73) ~ Kfarʿabīda ṭabl ‘tambour’ (M. Feghali 1919: 67) ~ Lebanon ṭǝbbayle ‘petit tambour’ (Feghali 1938: 314) ~ Sinai ṭabal ‘to tremble, to shiver’ (Stewart 1990: 272) ~ Palest ṭabǝl, pl ṭbūl ‘Trommel’ (Bauer 1957: 306, 192) ~ Egypt ṭabbil ‘to play the kettle-drum’; ṭabbāl ‘one who plays the kettledrum’ (Spiro 1895: 361) ~ Ḥassāniyya ṭbel/ṭbal ‘tambour’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 141). 430

‫أ‬

ṭ-r-ʾ

tr (Pyr) ‘time, season’; ‘Zeit, bestimmte Zeit’ (Faulkner 1962: 300; Wb V 314) ||

Ar �‫ طر‬ṭara‌ʾa ‘to happen, to fall unexpectedly upon s.o.’ (Hava 1982: 428): ~ Al-Balqāʾ ṭara ‘to come to one’s mind’ (Palva 1992: 173) ~ Negev ṭiri ‘to happen, occur to one’s mind’; ṭiri ʿa bāli að̣ īfak ‘it occurred to me to visit you’

226

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

(Borg & Bar-Zvi) ~ Sinai ṭara, yiṭrā ‘to tell’; ṭiryā ‘a mention’ (C. Bailey 1991: 445) ~ Najd ṭara ‘to mention’; ‘einfallen’ (Ingham 1994: 180); ‘to cross one’s mind’ (Sowayan 1992: 280) ~ Rwala ṭāri l-ḥarāyeb ‘tidings of war’; mā jaṭri ʿalēh ‘it will not occur to him’ (Musil 1928: 513, 516) ~ Tripoli (Libya) ṭrē ‘accadere’ (Cesàro 1939: 232) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ṭarā⟩ ‘to happen unexpectedly’ (Corriente 1997: 326) ~ Ḥassāniyya ṭarra ‘annoncer’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 23). 431

ṭ-f-ṭ-f

ḏfḏf (ME) ‘drip’; ‘träufeln, Tropfen’; dfdf.t ‘drop of liquid’; ‘Tropfen (als Bild der Winzigkeit)’; ḏfḏ ‘Tropfen’ (Faulkner 1962: 322; Wb V 448, 573) ~ tftf-nwn ‘he who lets fall Nun (i.e. rain-water) drop by drop [name of deity]’ (Černý 1976: 44) ~ Copt ⲑⲟϥⲧⲉϥ ‘let fall drop by drop’ (Crum 1939: 69b) ~ Heb ‫ ִט ְפ ֵטף‬ṭipṭēp ّ‫ف‬ ‘drip, drop’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 548) || Ge ṣafsāf ‘drops’ (Leslau 1989: 235) || Ar ���‫ط‬ ṭaff ‘peu, petite quantité’ (DAF I 200); ~ Iraq ṭafṭaf ‘to drip from the side of a container’; ṭafīf ‘small, slight’ (Masliyah 2017: 79; Woodhead & Beene 1967: 290) ~ Najd ṭifṭāf ‘ein kleines tiefes Wasserloch im Felsen’ (Hess 1938: 66) ~ Lebanon ṭafṭaf, iṭafṭef ‘déborder’ (Denizeau 1960: 331) ~ Egypt ṭaff ‘to gush out’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 541) ~ Palmyra ṭaff ‘surnager, flotter, monter à la surface’ (Cantineau 1934 II 40) ~ Marazig taftaf, itaftef ‘glaner de-ci de-là, par petites quantités’ (Boris 1958: 60) ~ Djidjelli tǝftūfa ‘miette, crouton’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 332) ~ Morocco tǝftǝf ‘operer par petits coups; bricoles, babioles, toutes choses menues sans valeur’ (Prémare II 58, 59) ~ Malta ⟨teftef⟩ ‘toccare a poco a poco’; ⟨teftif⟩ ‘cose di poco’ (Vassalli 1796: 90). 432

ṭ-f-l

‫أ‬

tfn (Pyr) ‘child, orphan’; ‘der Waise, Waisenkind, der Vaterlose’ (Ember 1930:

53; Faulkner 1962: 298; Wb V 299; Hannig 1995: 931) || Ar ‫ ط��ف���ل‬ṭifl, pl ‫ � ط��ف���ا ل‬ʾaṭfāl ‘new-born child, infant’ (Lane 1860); ~ Yemen ṭufl, pl aṭfāl ‘bambino’ (Rossi 1939: 195) ~ Oman ṭafil ‘Kind’ (Reinhardt 1894: 46) ~ Kǝndērīb ṭǝfǝl, pl ṭfāl ‘Kind’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 87) ~ Damascus ṭǝfǝl, pl aṭfāl ‘child’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 40) ~ Lebanon ṭefl, pl ṭfāla ‘petit enfant’ (Feghali 1938: 791) ~ Palest ṭifl/ṭafl, pl aṭfāl ‘Säugling’ (Bauer 1957: 252) ~ Mzāb ṭfal ‘enfant’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 121) ~ Djidjelli ṭfol ‘enfant’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 247) ~ Malta ⟨tifel, f tifla⟩ ‘fanciullo, fanciulla’, pl ⟨tfal⟩ (Vassalli 1796: 108).

431. ṭ-f-ṭ-f – 435. ṭ-w-l

433

227

ṭ-h-r

twr (NK) ‘be clean, cleanse, purify’; ‘reinigen; gereinigt, rein sein, den Tempel reinigen’ (Faulkner 1962: 295; DLE 202; Wb V 253) ~ Sab ṭhr(m) ‘(ritual) purity’ (Biella 1982: 216) || Saf ṭhr ‘to cleanse’ (Al-Jallad 2015: 350) ~ Ar ‫ �ط�هر‬ṭahara ‘to purify, circumcize’ (Hava 1982: 440); ~ Yemen ṭāhir ‘puro ritualmente’ (Rossi 1939: 231) ~ Palmyra mṭahher ‘circonciseur’ (Cantineau 1934 I 79) ~ Kǝndērīb ṭahāra ‘Schamteile’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 89) ~ Palest ṭāhir ‘rein (rituell)’; ṭahāra ‘Reinheit (Herz)’ (Bauer 1957: 242) ~ Egypt ṭihir ‘to be clean, pure’ (Spiro 1895: 373); ṭihāra ‘Beschneidung (bei Knaben und Mädchen)’; taṭhīr ‘das Reinigen der Entwässerungsgräben von Schlamm’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 292) ~ Marazig ṭhar ‘se purifier (avant de prier)’; ṭhāṛa ‘circoncision’ (Boris 1958: 381) ~ Ḥassāniyya ṭahhar ‘purifier (au sens religieux)’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 121) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ṭahar⟩ ‘to be pure’ (Corriente 1997: 335). 434

ṭ-w-s

tš (MK) ‘to grind corn, split wood; to mash’; ‘Korn mahlen’; tštš (Ebers) ‘to crush’; ‘zerdrücken, zerquetschen’ (Faulkner 1962: 301; Ember 1930: 114; Wb V 330) || (?) Ar ‫ ط�ا �ص‬ṭāsa ‘to tread underfoot’; ‘niedertreten’ (Hava 1982: 441; Wahrmund II 167); ~ Al-Balqāʾ ṭāš ‘to raid’ (Palva 1978: 96). 435

ṭ-w-l

(i) dwn (Pyr) ‘stretch out (legs, hands), be tense; continually’; ‘ausstrecken, spannen gegen jemanden’ (Faulkner 1962: 311; Breasted 1930: 573; Wb V 431; DLE II 243) ~ Dem twn ‘sich erheben’ (DG 614) ~ Ḥar ṭawl ‘length’ (Johnstone 1977: 166) || Ar ‫ ط�ا ل‬ṭāla ‘it was or became long, extended’ (Lane 1895); ~ Rwala seyf ṭāyel ‘a drawn sword’ (Musil 1928: 60) ~ Syria ṭṭawwal ‘sich hinlegen’ (Behnstedt 1997a: 142) ~ Aleppo ṭuwel ‘s’allonger, devenir grand de taille’ [“doublet en fə́ʿel de ṭāl, yṭūl formé sous l’influence de ṭawīl”] (Barthélemy 1935–69: 493) ~ Lebanon ṭewel ‘être long’ (Feghali 1938: 795) ~ S.E. Anatolia ṭāl ‘emporwachsen, lang werden, größer werden’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 268) ~ Iraq ṭuwal ‘be or become long’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 296) ~ Tunis ṭwāl, yiṭwāl ‘lang sein’ (Stumme 1896: 31); ṭawl ‘longueur’ (D. Cohen 1975: 67) ~ Morocco ṭuwwel ‘to prolong’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 151) ~ Malta ⟨twal, jitwal⟩ ‘farsi o divenir lungo’ (Vassalli 1796: 137).

228

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic ) The following entries exemplify grammaticalization of the Old Egyptian noun dwn paralleled in the Arabic dialects.

(ii) m-dwn (of motion) ‘straight on; (of time) from then on’ (Faulkner 1962: 311); ~ Hijaz ʿala-ṭūl ‘straight ahead’ (Omar 1975: 252, 256) ~ Damascus ʿala ṭūl ‘along, for good’; ṭūl- ‘throughout’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 7, 106, 241) ~ Negev ʿa-ṭūl ‘on the spot’ (Henkin 2010: 286) ~ Egypt ʿala ṭūl ‘straight ahead, straightaway’ (Wehr 1979: 673) ~ S.E. Anatolia ṭūl ʿǝmri ‘toute la vie’ (Grigore 2007: 298) ~ Tripoli (Libya) ṭūl ‘durante’ (Cesàro 1939: 76) ~ Marazig ʿala ṭūl ‘durchgehend, immer’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2005: 121) ~ Malta ⟨matul⟩ ‘during’ [< *maʿ ṭūl] (own obs.). 436

ṭ-w-y

wt/wjt (Med) ‘to bandage, bind’; ‘einwickeln, umwickeln; das Verbinden’ (Faulkner 1962: 70; Wb I 378, 379; Calice 1936: 59) || Ar ‫ طو�ى‬ṭawā ‘to roll up, to fold’ (Hava 1982: 442); ~ Damascus ṭawa ‘to fold’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 93) ~ Aleppo ṭawa ‘plier (une piéce d’étoffe, un vêtement)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 493) ~ Tripoli (Lebanon) ṭuwi ‘être plié’ (el-Hajjé 1954: 71) ~ Egypt ṭawa ‘to fold’ (Spiro 1895: 375) ~ Malta ⟨tewa, jitwi⟩ ‘to fold’ (Aquilina 1990: 1429).

Ɖ̣

437

ð̣ -b-l

dbn (OK) ‘weight of about 91 grammes’; ‘als Gewichtsangabe (der Wage); auch in Form liegender Rinder; als Gewichtsangabe für Dinge aller Art, usw.’ (Faulkner 1962: 311; Wb V 438) ~ Dem tbn ‘Pfund’ (DG 624) ~ Amh dǝbǝll ‘heavy load; heavy, weighty’ (Kane 1990 II 1776); ~ Yemen ð̣ abal ‘schwerer Last’ (Behnstedt 1996: 741).

From a regional linguistic perspective, the continuity with Amharic is suggestive of an ancient lexical isogloss possibly pertaining to a Red Sea lingua franca.

438

ð̣ -r-r

dꜣj.t (MK) ‘Widersetzlichkeit, Übertreibung, Unheil, Böses’; ‘subdue lands’ (Wb V 518; Faulkner 1962: 309) ~ Heb ‫ ָצ ַרר‬ṣārar ‘show hostility toward, vex’ (BDB ‫�ظ‬ 865) || Ar ‫ ّر‬ð̣ arra ‘durch spitze Reden beleidigen, reizen’ (Wahrmund II 178); cf. 418. ṣ-w-l;

436. ṭ-w-y – 441. ð̣ -m- ʾ

229

~ Yemen ð̣ arr ‘danno’ (Rossi 1939: 203) ~ E. Arabia ḍarr/ð̣ arr ‘to harm’ (Holes 2001: 309) ~ Damascus ḍarr ‘to harm s.o.’; nḍarr ‘Schaden haben’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 112; Grotzfeld 1965: 161) ~ Rwala meẓarra ‘evil’ (Musil 1928: 494) ~ Lebanon ḍarr ‘nuire à’ (Feghali 1938: 791) ~ Palest ḍarr ‘schaden jemandem’ (Bauer 1957: 253) ~ S.E. Anatolia ḍarr/ẓarr ‘schaden’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 251) ~ Tunis ḍaṛṛ ‘il a nui à’ (D. Cohen 1975: 100) ~ Morocco ḍḍǝṛṛ ‘to get hurt’ (Harrell 1965: 383) ~ Mzāb ḍǝrr ‘il a fait du mal’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 120) ~ U̅ lād Brāhīm ð̣ aṛṛ ‘faire du mal’ (W. Marçais 1908: 81). 439

ð̣ -r-y

rḏw (Pyr) ‘efflux of body’; ‘Flüssigkeit; gewöhnlich, Ausfluss aus den Körper’ ‫�ظ‬ (Faulkner 1962: 156; Wb II 469; Calice 1936: 172) || Ar ‫ ر�ى‬ð̣ arā ‘to flow (water)’; ð̣ arā baṭnuhu ‘to suffer from diarrhoea’; ‘fluxit aqua, fluxione laboravit venter’ (Hava 1982: 445; Freytag 1837: 387); ~ Yemen tað̣ riyeh ‘laxative’ (Piamenta 1991: 295). 440

ð̣ -f-r

ḏꜣf ‘heat (v), burn’; ‘verbrennen (beim Opfern; Feind); kochen’; ḏꜣfḏꜣf ‘(die Feinde) verbrennen’ (Faulkner 1962: 319; Wb IV 195, 196; V 522; Sethe 1962: 182); ‘erhitzen, kochen; in Brand stecken; verbranntes Fleisch’ (Hannig 1999: 994, 995) || Akkad zarāpu/ṣarāfu ‘burn (intrans.)’; zapāru ‘become rotten, stink’; zaprūtu ‘bad smell,’ zupru ‘decay, putrefaction, rot’; ṣaripu ‘pungent’ (CAD XVI 102; Parpola 2007: 135, 251,103; CDA 444) ~ Heb ‫ ָש ַרף‬śārap ‘to burn’ (BDB 976) ~ E. Mesop Aram srp ‘verbrennen’ (Beyer 1998: 181) ~ Saf ðfr ‘to stink’ (Winnett & Lankester 1978: 636); cf. 243. ð-f-r; Palest ẓaffar ‘cook or lay in a utensil meat, animal fat, or fowl, making it ritually unlawful for holding dairy food or drink’ (Jerusalem; Piamenta 2000: 210) ~ Damascus tẓaffar ‘schmutzig, fettig werden’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 163) ~ Iraq zufar ‘grease, animal fat’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 204). 441

ð̣ -m-ʾ

ḏmʿ (NK) ‘to be thirsty / parched’; ‘dünn (von der Wüste, vom Acker), dürr, ode’ (Hoch 1994: 386; Wb V 574); DLE II 269; Hannig 1995: 1006) ~ Akkad ṣamû ‘be thirsty’ (CAD XVI 95) ~ Heb ‫ ָצ ֵמא‬ṣāmēʾ ‘thirsty’ (BDB 854) ~ Sab ð̣ mʾw ‘become‫أ‬ ‫�ظ‬ thirsty’ (Biella 1982: 227); ṣmʾ ‘drought’ (Jamme 1962: 446) || Ar ‫ � ء‬ð̣ imʾ, pl ‫� �ظ��م�ا ء‬ ‫م‬ ʾað̣ māʾ/‫ �ظ��م�ا ء‬ð̣ amāʾ ‘thirst’ (Ambros 2004: 179);

230

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

~ Rwala ð̣ uma‌ʾ ‘thirst’ (Musil 1928: 156) ~ Yemen ð̣ ama ‘Durst’ (Behnstedt 1996 II 756); ð̣ aṃyān ‘thirsty’ (Piamenta 1991: 313) ~ ʿAnazeh ḍama ‘soif’ (Landberg 1940: 48) ~ Najd ḍuma ‘thirst’; ḍāmi ‘unwatered’ (Ingham 1994: 180); ð̣ imi ‘to get thirsty’ (Sowayan 1992: 282); ð̣ umā ‘Durst’ (Hess 1938: 168) ~ Negev ð̣ ama ‘thirst’ (Henkin 2010: 268) ~ Syria mið̣ mi ‘dürstig’ (Behnstedt 1997a: 142) ~ Egypt ḍama ‘unbebautes Land, Brache; trockener Boden’; sana ḍama ‘ein Jahr, in dem die Nilüberschwemmung mager ausfiel’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 277) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ð̣ aṃān⟩ ‘thirsty’ (Corriente 1997: 341) ~ Marazig ð̣ amā ‘grande soif’ (Boris 1958: 389).

ʿ

442

ʿ-b-b

ʿm (LE) ‘to swallow, absorb’; ‘verschlucken’ (Ember 1930: 61; Faulkner 1962: ّ 42; Wb I 183) || Ar �‫ �ع� ب‬ʿabba ‘humer, boire, aspirer l’eau, sans interruption, boire comme boivent les bestiaux’ (DAF II 148); ‘to gulp, swallow water in one draught’; ġabbah ‘draught, gulp’ (Hava 1982: 449, 515); cf. 484. ġ-b-b. 443

ʿ-b-r

ʿbꜣ (Pyr) ‘der Stab (zum schlagen und als Herrschaftszeichen)’; ‘sceptre’ (Wb I 176; Faulkner 1962: 40) || Ar ‫ ع��بر‬ʿibr/ʿabr/ʿubr ‘sturdy, strong’ (Hava 1982: 450); ~ Palest ʿabr ‘poutre ronde’; ʿabbāra ‘poutre horizontale’; ʿibri ‘sarment coupé’ (Denizeau 1960: 341, 342) ~ Egypt ʿubbāra ‘Rohre von einem Graben zum anderen’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 300) ~ Yemen ʿubar ‘Türrahmen aus Holz’; ʿābir ‘dicker Aufsatz Holz’ (Behnstedt 1996: 798) ~ Daθīna ʿibrāh ‘le support sur lequel pivote le mizān’ (GD 2261). 444

ʿ-b-y

ʿb/ʿbʿ (MK) ‘sich, rühmen’; ‘boast, boasting, exaggeration’; ʿbʿb ‘prahlen, Prahlerei’ ‫ة‬ (Wb I 177, 178; Calice 1936: 25; Faulkner 1962: 41) || Ar ����‫ �ع ب��ي‬ʿibiyyah ‘Hochmut, eitles Prahlen’ (Wahrmund II 202); ~ Aleppo tʿabba ‘monter la tête à qqn’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 510) ~ Palest ʿtaba ‘se faire remarquer’ (Denizeau 1960: 343).

231

442. ʿ -b-b – 447. ʿ -ǧ-l

445

ʿ-ǧ-ǧ

ḏʿ (OK) ‘storm, storm-wind’; ‘Sturm, Sturmwind; der Sturm kommt, ist stark; stürmisch sein (vom Himmel)’ (Faulkner 1962: 320; Wb V 533–34)’ || ‫ �عّ ة‬ʿaǧǧah ‘heftig blasen und Staub aufwirbeln’; ‫��ا‬ ‫ �ع‬ʿaǧāǧ ‘dust, smoke’ Ar ��� ‫�ج‬ �‫�ج ج‬ (Wahrmund II 211; Hava 1982: 454); ~ Sinai ʿaǧǧih ‘dust-cloud’ (Stewart 1990: 197) ~ Palmyra ʿacēc ‘vent de sable, nuage de poussière’ (Cantineau 1934 II 76) ~ Rwala ʿaǧǧa ‘dust’; ʿaǧāǧ ‘storm; a dense cloud of dust; fog in the hot season’ (Musil 1928: 19, 566, 306, 18) ~ ʿAnazeh ʿaǧǧ ‘poussière’ (Landberg 1940: 48) ~ Iraq ʿaǧʿaǧ ‘to shake up dust’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 302) ~ Kuwait ʿaǧāǧ ‘sandstorm, dust’ (Dickson 1949: 620) ~ Lebanon ʿežžāž ‘très agité’ (Feghali 1938; 796) ~ Palest ʿaǧǧe ‘Staub’; ʿaǧāǧe ‘Nebel’; ʿaǧʿaǧat ‘nebeln’ (Bauer 1957: 286, 216) ~ Egypt ʿāǧǧāǧ ‘Staubsturm’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 302) ~ Tunis ʿožʿāž ‘poussière soulevée par le vent’ (D. Cohen 1975: 169) ~ Marazig ʿaǧāǧ (coll.), ʿaǧāǧa (n.u.), pl -āt ‘tourbillon de poussière, de sable’ (Boris 1958: 94) ~ U̅ lād Brāhīm ʿažžāž ‘violent tourbillon’ (W. Marçais 1908: 112). 446

ʿ-ǧ-ʿ-ǧ

ʿḏʿḏ (LE) ‘jauchzen, jubeln, zwitschern, sich laut freuen, jemandem zujubeln’ (Brockelmann 1932: 103; Wb I 241) || Ar ‫���ع��ج‬ ‫ �ع�ج‬ʿaǧʿaǧa ‘laut und wiederholt � schreien’ (Wahrmund II 215); ~ Palest ǧaʿǧaʿa ‘Geräusch (Brummen, Schreien, monotone Geräusche)’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 11) ~ Egypt gaʿgaʿ/gaʿʿar ‘to howl, roar, shout, yell’; gaʿgaʿa ‘howl, roar’ (Spiro 1895: 103) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ǧaʿǧaʿ⟩ ‘to vociferate’ (Corriente 1997: 97). 447

ʿ-ǧ-l

‫ة‬

‫ ��جع‬ʿaǧalah ʿgrt (LE) ‘Karren’ (Wb I 236) ~ Heb ‫ ֲעגָ ָלה‬ʿăgālāh ‘cart’ (BDB 722) || Ar ��‫� �ل‬ ‘cart, wheel, pulley’ (Hava 1982: 456); ~ Damascus ʿažale, pl -āt ‘wheel’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 262) ~ Palest ʿaǧal, pl iʿǧāl/ʿaǧalāt ‘Wagenrad’ (Bauer 1957: 237) ~ Egypt ʿagal ‘wheels, rollers,’ sg ʿagalah (Spiro 1895: 386) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ʿaǧalah⟩ ‘water wheel’ (Corriente 1997: 345).

232 448

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

ʿ-d-s

ʿršn (LE) ‘lentils’; ‘Linsen’ (Wb I 211) ~ Heb ‫ ֲע ָד ָׁשה‬ʿădāšāh ‘lentil’ (BDB 727) || Ar ‫ ع�د ��س‬ʿadas ‘lentils’ (Hava 1982: 457); ~ Aleppo ʿades ‘lentilles’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 516) ~ Kaʿbīye ʿadas ‘Linsen’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 275) ~ Palest ʿadas ‘Linsen’ (Bauer 1957: 194) ~ Egypt ʿads ‘lentils’ (Spiro 1895: 387) ~ Djidjelli ʿdes ‘des lentilles’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 85). 449

ʿ-d-w

‫أ‬

ʿdt (LE) ‘conspiracy’ (DLE I 82; Hoch 1994: 105) ~ Heb ‫ ֲע ָדא‬ʿădāʾ ‘to make spoil’

‫ة‬

(M. Jastrow 1886: 1044) || Ar �‫ ع�د ا و‬ʿadāwah ‘hostility’; ‫ ع�د ّو‬ʿaduww, pl ‫ � ع�د ا ء‬ʾaʿdāʾ ‘foe, enemy’ (Hava 1982: 459); ~ Lebanon ʿdu ‘ennemi’ (Feghali 1938: 797); ʿdāwe ‘inimitié’ (Feghali 1919: 10) ~ Damascus ʿadūw ‘Feind’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 55); ʿedwān ‘aggression’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 5) ~ Rwala maʿādi ‘enemy’ (Musil 1928: 537) ~ Oman ʿado ‘Feind’ (Reinhardt 1894: 72); ʿadūyi ‘mein Feind’ (Reinhardt 1894: 23) ~ Aleppo ʿadu, pl ʿǝde/ʿdā/ǝʿdye ‘ennemi’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 517) ~ Palest ʿaduw(w), pl ʿaduwwīn ‘Feind’ (Bauer 1957: 109) ~ Egypt ʿadū ‘enemy’ (Spiro 1895: 389) ~ Tunis ʿdu ‘ennemi’ (D. Cohen 1975: 161) ~ Marazig ʿaduww, pl iʿādi/ʿedyān/ aʿda ‘ennemi’ (Boris 1958: 397) ~ Tripoli (Libya) ʿadū ‘nemico’ (Griffini 1913: 182) ~ Morocco ʿdu, pl ʿedyan ‘enemy’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 63) ~ Malta ⟨għadu, pl għedewwa⟩ ‘nemico’ (Vassalli 1796: 333). 450

ʿ-ð-r¹

ʿḏꜣw (MK) ‘guilty man, wrongdoer’; ‘unrecht’ (Faulkner 1962: 51; Wb I 240) || ‫�ذ‬ Ar ‫ ع� ر‬ʿaðr/ʿuðr ‘schuld- und schmachbedeckt’ (Wahrmund II 225); ~ Rwala ʿaððar ‘to excuse’ (Musil 1928: 162) ~ N. Yemen iʿtaðar ‘sich entschuldigen’ (Behnstedt 1987: 278) ~ Palest hū maʿðūr ‘er ist entschuldigt’ (Bauer 1957: 95) ~ Ḥassāniyya ʿðer ‘excuser’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 65). 451

ʿ-ð-r²

jdr (OK) ‘herd of cattle’; ‘Herde (vom Vieh und Geflügel)’ (Faulkner 1962: 35; DLE I 54; Wb I 154) ~ Heb ‫ ֵע ֶדר‬ʿēder ‘flock, herd’ (BDB 727) ~ Aram ʿaðrā ‘fold, pen, flock’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 1046);

233

448. ʿ -d-s – 454. ʿ -r-y

~ Rwala maʿðir, pl maʿāðir ‘pastures reserved for horses exclusively’; ʿaðra (n) ‘pastures defiled by excrements of countless herds’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 420; Musil 1928: 309, 676). 452

ʿ-r-b

ʿꜣm (MK) ‘Asiatic’; ‘das asiatische Nachbarvolk der Ägypter’; ʿꜣmt ‘Asiatic woman; Asiatin, Semitin’; cf. ʿpr ‘an Asiatic people’; ‘Art fremdländischen Arbeiter’ (Faulkner 1962: 38, 42; Wb I 168–7, 181) ~ Dem ꜣrbj ‘Arabien’ (DG 6) ~ Copt ⲁⲙⲉ ‘herdsman’ (Crum 1939: 7a) ~ Heb ‫ ֲע ַרב‬ʿărab ‘nomad(s), steppe-dwellers of

‫أ‬

‫ن‬

N. Arabia (BDB 787) || Ar �‫ �عر ب‬ʿurb/ʿarab, pl �‫ � �عر ب‬ʾaʿrub/�‫ �عرو ب‬ʿurūb/� ‫�عرب�ا‬ ʿarbān ‘Arabs of the desert, Bedouins’ (Hava 1982: 462); ~ ʿAnazeh ʿarab ‘Bédouins’ (Landberg 1940: 49) ~ Sinai ʿaráḅ, pl ʿurḅān ‘Bedouin, people, tribe, family, group’ (Stewart 1990: 199) ~ Yemen ʿarab, pl aʿrāb ‘tribú nomadi’ (Rossi 1939: 141) ~ Najd ʿarab/ʿirbin ‘bedouins, tribesmen’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 410) ~ Rwala ʿarab ‘those who dwell in movable tents’; ʿorbān membership of various clans or tribes’ (Musil 1928: 44) ~ Bišmizzīn ʿarab ‘Beduinen’ (Jiha 1964: 119) ~ Palest ʿarab ‘Beduinen’ (Bauer 1957: 22) ~ Egypt ʿarab ‘bedouin’ (Spiro 1895: 390) ~ Tunis ʿṛab ‘bédouins’ (D. Cohen 1975: 81). 453

ʿ-r-ḍ

ʿꜣḏ (MK) ‘bewässertes Land, Boden’ (Wb I 168; Calice 1936: 52); ʿꜣdw ‘Rand (eines ‫ض‬ Feldes)’ (Hannig 1995: 130) || Saf ʿrḍ ‘a valley’ (Al-Jallad 2015: 304) ~ Ar ��‫�عرو‬ ‫ْض‬ ʿarūḍ, pl ��‫ �عر‬ʿurḍ ‘shore, road’ (Hava 1982: 465); ʿurḍ, pl ʿirāḍ ‘versant d’une montagne, vallée dans laquelle il y a des villages, de l’eau et des arbres’ (DAF II 220); ~ Yemen ʿārð̣ ah ‘Regenwassergraben in den Bergen (um Regenwasser auf die Felder zu Leiten), Damm’; ʿarð̣ ah ‘Querdamm’; ʿarīð̣ , pl ʿawārið̣ ‘Wand, Hausmauer’; ʿarað̣ ah ‘Ufer eines (großeren) Flusses’ (Behnstedt 1996: 818) ~ Lebanon ʿurḍ ‘vallée, route au pied d’une montagne’ (Denizeau 1960: 349). 454

ʿ-r-y

ḥꜣj (OK) [~ *ʿry] ‘be naked’; ‘nackt sein, entblößen’: ḥꜣ ‘obdachlos’; ḥꜣwt ‘nakedness’; ḥꜣwy ‘naked man’ (Faulkner 1962: 161; Wb III 14: 1–3) || Ar ‫ �عر��ي‬ʿariya ‘être nu, depouillé de ses vêtements’ (DAF II 238);

234

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

~ Palmyra ʿaryēn ‘nu’ (Cantineau 1934 II 32) ~ Damascus ʿaryān ‘naked’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 155) ~ Palest ʿaryān, mʿarra ‘nackt’ (Bauer 1957: 215) ~ Malta ⟨għarwien⟩ ‘nudo’ (Vassalli 1796: 349). 455

ʿ-š-r

ʿšꜣ (LE) ‘many, numerous’; ‘viel sein; (als Adjektiv), reich an …’; ʿšꜣt ‘multitude of persons; company of guests’; ‘die Menge (immer von Personen)’ (Faulkner 1962: 49; Wb I 228, 229) ~ Copt ⲁϣⲏ ‘multitude’ (Crum 1939: 22b) ~ Akkad ešēru(m) ‘to be / go well; be successful (of crop, harvest, animal breeding; human reproduction, birth)’ (CDA 82) ~ Sab ʿšrt ‘clan, groupe sociale qui a pour fondement une généalogie, opposé à šaʿb qui a pour fondement son territoire’ (Avanzini ‫�ش ة‬ ‫ �م� �ش‬maʿšar ‘company or collective 1980: 111) || Ar �‫ع���ي��ر‬ ʿašīrah ‘a man’s kinsfolk,’ ‫ع�� ر‬ body, community’ (Lane 2053); ~ Damascus ʿašīre, pl ʿašāyer ‘tribe’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 248) ~ Palest ʿišre ‘freundschaftlicher Verkehr’ (Bauer 1957: 372; Kampffmeyer 1936: 47) ~ Egypt ʿišra ‘society, social intercourse, intimacy’; ʿaššar ‘to copulate, cause to be pregnant’ (Spiro 1895: 297) ~ Sinai muʿaššar ‘a pregnant camel mare’ (C. Bailey 1991: 447) ~ Rwala ʿāširak ‘thy beloved’ (Musil 1928: 79) ~ Najd ʿašīr ‘friend’; ʿāšar ‘to befriend’ (Sowayan 1992: 284) ~ Marazig ʿašīr, pl ʿašrāwa ‘étranger installé dans la tribu, dans le pays’ (Boris 1958: 404) ~ Aleppo ʿāšir ‘fréquenter (qqn)’; ʿašret, tǝʿšer ‘devenir grosse (: jument femelle qui porte dix mois)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 529). Cf. Ghomara (Berber) ʿeššer ‘to beget’ (Mourigh 2016: 384).

456

ʿ-ṣ-y

ʿḏꜣ (LE) ‘Unrecht, Unrecht handeln, schuldig sein, Frevler’; ‘guilt(y)’ (Wb I 241; Brockelmann 1932: 102; DLE I 84) ~ Dem ʿḏ ‘Unrecht, Lüge’ (DG 74) ~ Copt ⲟϫⲓ ‘iniquity’ (Crum 1939: 258b) ~ Syr ʿǝṣā ‘to compel, constrain, force’ (CSD 422) ~ Ge ʿaṣawa ‘to close, confine, stop’ (Leslau 1987: 75) || Ar ‫ �ع���صى‬ʿaṣā ‘gegen Einen widerspenstig, rebellisch sein’ (Wahrmund II 266); ~ Sinai ʿāṣiy ‘stubborn, recalcitrant, contumacious, refusing to give what is due’ (Stewart 1990: 200); ʿāṣiy, pl ʿāṣiyyāt ‘a wild animal, game’ (C. Bailey 1991: 447) ~ Yemen ʿāṣī ‘colpevole’ (Rossi 1939: 200) ~ Marazig ʿāṣi ‘dur, pas mûr’ (Boris 1958: 406) ~ Damascus ʿaṣa ‘to disobey’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 68) ~ Najd iʿtiṣa, yiʿtiṣi ‘to twist, to be difficult to control, rebel against, disobey’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 424) ~ Egypt ʿiṣi, yiʿṣa ‘to disobey, rebel, revolt’ (Spiro 1895: 499).

455. ʿ -š-r – 459. ʿ -q-l ²

457

235

ʿ-ṭ-b

ḏdb (NK) ‘sting, incite’; ‘stechen’ (Faulkner 1962: 323; Wb II 384) || Ar �‫�ع��ط� ب‬ ʿaṭaba ‘couper, retrancher en coupant, séparer d’un coup’ (DAF II 277); ~ Rwala ʿaṭb al-aṣāwīb ‘a torment to the wounded, because the wounds caused by his blows were slow in healing’ (Musil 1928: 584) ~ Najd ʿaṭab ‘Einem eine tiefe Wunde schlagen’ (Socin 1901 III 292); maʿāṭīb ‘marksmen who hit the target’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 424) ~ Algeria ʿṭab ‘couper, blesser’ (Lentin 1959: 199) ~ Morocco ʿṭǝb ‘endommager (qqch.), estropier, mutiler’ (Prémare IX 143). 458

ʿ-q-l¹

ʿqꜣ (LE) ‘rope’; ‘Seil, Art Tau, besonders an Schiffen’ (Ember 1930: 18; Calice 1936: 26; Faulkner 1962: 50; Wb I 234); ʿqꜣ.w ‘Stricke, Tau des Re’ (Altenmüller 1975: 346) ~ Heb ‫ ָע ַקל‬ʿāqal ‘to be curved, round, twisted’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 1106) || Ar ‫ �ع��ق���ل‬ʿaqala ‘lier, attacher’ (DAF II 319); ~ E. Arabia ʿagil ‘rope, tie, bind’ (Holes 2001: 356) ~ Khābūra ʿiqāḷ ‘a rope binding a camel’s ankle tightly to its thigh’ (Brockett 1985: 161) ~ Najd ʿagaḷ ‘to tether’ (Sowayan 1992: 285) ~ Sinai ʿgāḷ ‘camel hobble’ (Stewart 1990: 197) ~ Al-Balqāʾ ʿgān ‘head-band’ (Palva 1992: 173) ~ Negev yaʿagiḷ ‘he tethers’ (Blanc 1970: 138) ~ Kuwait ʿagal ‘head cord’; ʿaggal ‘hobbling a camel’ (Dickson 1949: 670) ~ Baghdad ʿgāl ‘rope for headdress’ (Blanc 1964: 79) ~ Palmyra ʿaqal, pl ʿoqle/ʿuqol ‘gros bourrelet de laine noire qu’on place sur la tête pour retenir le châle’ (Cantineau 1934 II 27) ~ Aleppo ʿaqal, pl ʿuqol ‘cordon dont on se ceint la tête pour retenir la coiffe – chez les nomades ʿagēl’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 541) ~ Palest ʿqāl ‘Kopfschnur’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 48) ~ Egypt ʿaqal ‘tie the feet of a camel, etc.’; ʿuqāl ‘foot rope’; ʿigāl ‘Kniefessel’ (Spiro 1895: 405; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 319) ~ Rwala ʿaqqal/yaʿqel ‘fetter a camel’s left foreleg with a short rope above the knee’ (Musil 1928: 337, 367, 425). 459

ʿ-q-l²

ʿrq/ʿqr (MK) ‘know, perceive, be wise, skilled’; ‘klug sein, verständig; erfahren’: ʿkꜣ ‘richtig sein’; ʿqꜣ-i҆b ‘wise, intelligent’ (Faulkner 1962: 45; Wb I 212, 233, 234; Hannig & Vomberg 1999: 82) || Ar ‫ �ع��ق���ل‬ʿaqala ‘to be intelligent’ (Hava 1982: 488); ~ Bišmizzīn ʿāʾil ‘vernünftig’ (Jiha 1964: 158) ~ Aleppo ʿǝqel, yǝʿqal ‘devenir raisonnable, s’assagir’; ʿaqǝl, pl ʿqūl ‘raison, bon sens’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 541) ~ Damascus ʿaqlāt ‘brains’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 27) ~ Kǝndērīb ʿaqǝl ‘Verstand’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 96) ~ Palest ʿaqel ‘id.’ (Bauer 1957: 340) ~ Egypt ʿa‌ʾl,

236

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

pl ʿuʾūl ‘mind, reasoning power, sense’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 590) ~ Tunis ʿqal ‘intelligence’ (D. Cohen 1975: 145) ~ Morocco ʿqel ‘brains’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 24) ~ Ḥassāniyya ʿqal ‘intelligence’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 84). 460

ʿ-q-m

Dem ʿqm ‘traurig’ (DG 73) || Ar �‫ �ع��ق��ي‬ʿaqīm ‘gloomy (day); barren, devastating’

‫م‬

(Hava 1982: 490; Ambros 2004: 192); ~ Yemen ʿaqīm ‘ganz gelähmt’ (Behnstedt 1996: 852) ~ Al-Andalus ʿuqm ‘barrenness’ (Corriente 1997: 360). 461

ʿ-k-b-r

ʿ=k=b=ra (an anthroponym) (LE) ‘mouse’ (Hoch 1994: 81) ~ Akkad akburu ‘id.’ (Parpola 2007: 225) || Heb ‫ ַע ְכ ָּבר‬ʿakbār ‘mouse’ (BDB 747); ~ Yemen ʿakbarī, coll. ʿakbar ‘topo di campagna’ (Rossi 1939: 14) ~ ʿIkbār [anthroponym], ʿakbār, pl ʿakābīr ‘souris, gros rat’ (GD 2315). 462

ʿ-l-ǧ

ʿnḏ (OK) ‘Art Salbe oder Wohlgeruch’ (Ember 1930: 68; Wb I 208); ʿnd (Urk.) ‘an unguent’ (Faulkner 1962: 45) || Ar ‫ ع�لا ج‬ʿilāǧ ‘treatment of a disease; efficacious

�

medicine’; ‘Arznei’ (Hava 1982: 493; Wahrmund II 293); ~ Yemen ʿilāǧ ‘rimedio’ (Rossi 1939: 219) ~ Khābūra ʿlg ‘to treat, make better’: ma tʿelleg ‘[leprosy] is incurable’ (Brockett 1985: 161) ~ Lebanon ʿālež ‘soigner’ (Feghali 1938: 800) ~ S.E. Anatolia ʿǝlāǧ ‘Mittel, Lösung, Arznei, Medikament’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 286) ~ Palest ʿālaǧ ‘behandeln’ (Bauer 1957: 46) ~ Egypt ʿālaǧ ‘pflegen (Pflanze, d.h. dungen und bewässern)’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 320) ~ Tripoli (Libya) ʿalāž ‘cura medica’ (Griffini 1913: 73) ~ Ḥassāniyya ʿilāž ‘traitement’ (D. Cohen 1963: 28) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ʿilāǧ⟩ ‘treatment, care’ (Corriente 1997: 361).

460. ʿ -q-m – 465. ʿ -l-w

463

237

ʿ-l-q

ʿrq (LE) ‘bind’; ‘umbinden’ (DLE I 73; Wb I 211) ~ Akkad ilqu ‘leech’ (M. Cohen 2011: 7) || Ar �‫ ع��ل ق‬ʿalaqa ‘an etwas hängen, angebunden, eingehäkelt sein’ (Wahrmund II 97); ~ ʿAnazeh ʿallaq ‘attacher’ (Landberg 1940: 52) ~ Sinai maʿlūg, pl maʿālīg ‘saddlebags’ (C. Bailey 1991: 447) ~ Damascus ʿǝleq ‘to be or get tied up’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 242) ~ Kǝndērīb ʿalaq ‘anheften, anbinden, annähen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 96) ~ Yemen ʿallag ‘attaccare, appendere’ (Rossi 1939: 192, 194) ~ Najd ʿalaq ‘Anhängsel; was am Kamelsattel hängt’ (Socin 1901 III 293); ʿallag ‘to attach’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 415) ~ Tunis ʿlaq ‘sangsues’ (D. Cohen 1975: 146) ~ U̅ lād Brāhīm ʿalleg ‘suspendre’ (W. Marçais 1908: 89). 464

ʿ-l-m

ʿm (NK) ‘to know, take cognizance’; ‘wissen, erfahren, kennen’ (Ember 1930: 32; Caminos 533: 1954; Wb I 184); ʿm i҆b ‘be discreet’; ʿmm ‘brain’ (Faulkner 1962: 42, 43) ~ Dem ʿm ‘wissen’ (DG 60) ~ Copt ⲉⲓⲙⲉ ‘know, understand’ (Crum 1939: 77b) || Ar ‫ ع��ل‬ʿalima ‘to know’ (Hava 1982: 495);

‫م‬

~ E. Arabia ʿalam ‘to know’ (Holes 2001: 359) ~ Palest ʿilim ‘wissen’ (Bauer 1957: 365) ~ Egypt ʿilim ‘to know’ (Spiro 1895: 409) ~ Kǝndērīb aḷḷa ʿālǝm ‘Weiss Gott!’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 97) ~ Damascus tʿallam ‘to learn’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 135). 465

ʿ-l-w

(i) i҆ʿr/ʿr (MK) ‘mount up, ascend’; ‘aufsteigen’ (Faulkner 1962: 45; Wb I 41, 208; Ember 1930: 75) ~ Dem ʿl ‘hinaufsteigen, aufheben, holen’ (DG 67) ~ Copt ⲁⲗⲉ ‘monter’ (Vycichl 1983: 60) || Saf ʿly ‘to go to upper Arabia’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 629) ~ Ar ‫ ع�لا‬ʿalā ‘hoch sein’ (Wahrmund II 300); ~ Damascus ʿāli ‘high’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 116) ~ Hasankeyf ʿalla ‘heben’ (Fink 2017: 305) ~ Lebanon ʿtala ‘s’élever’ (Denizeau 1960: 362). (ii) ʿi҆rt/ʿr(r)wt/ʿryt (NK) ‘dwelling, home; hall of judgement’; ‘Wachstube, Heim; Götterwohnung; hochgeladenes Gemach, Söller: als Raum im Hause’ ~ ʿrrwt (f) ‘dwelling, home, lintel’; ‘Tor des Hauses, des Palastes, des Tempels’ (Faulkner 1962: 45; Hannig 1995: 905; Wb I 42, 210) ~ ʿa=ra=ta (LE) ‘upper chambers’ (Hoch 1994: 86); ʿrrwt/ʿrryt ‘landing-stage, quay, wharf; commissariat

238

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

attached to a temple or palace’ (Jones 1988: 203) ~ Heb ‫ּיֹותיו‬ ָ ‫ ֵמ ֲע ִל‬mēʿăliyōtāw ‘from his upper chambers’ (Psalm C IV 13) ~ Sab ʿrrtm ‘ummauerte mit Befes­

ّ

ّ

‫ّة‬ tigungen’ (cited in Avanzini 1980: 107) || Ar ���‫ ع��لي‬ʿulliyyah, pl ‫ ع�لا ل�ي‬ʿalāliyy ‘upper room; salle d’apparat, à festins’ (Hava 1982: 497; DAF II 356); ~ Aleppo ʿalliye ‘chambre haute sur la terrasse de la maison’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 550) ~ Palmyra ʿalliyye, pl ʿalēlei ‘chambre supérieure’ (Cantineau 1934 II 21) ~ Āzǝx ʿǝlliyyih, pl ʿǝlēli ‘Obergeschoß, oberes Zimmer’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 289) ~ Damascus bjibni sūr wʿalāli ‘er baut Stadtmauern und Söller’ (Bergsträßer 1924: 107) ~ Lebanon ʿelliye, pl ʿlāle ‘palais’ (Feghali 1938: 801) ~ Palest ʿilliyye, pl ʿalāli ‘Herberge im Oberstock’ (Bauer 1957: 154) ~ Yemen ʿalāli ‘rooms in a house’ (Piamenta 1991: 339) ~ Morocco ʿlāli ‘les sommets, les hauteurs’ (Prémare IX 221). 466

ʿ-l-y

ḥr- [preposition] ‘upon, in, at, from, on account of, concerning’ (Faulkner 1962: 174): ḥri҆ḫ ‘why?’ (Gardiner 1957: 408) ~ Ar *ʿalāš ‘why?’ < *ʿalā + āš; cf. Borg (2019: 66–67); ~ Iraq ʿal-ēš/ʿala-wēš ‘why? what for?’ ~ Palest ʿal-ēš ‘warum?’ (Bauer 1957: 353) ~ Tripoli (Libya) ʿal-āš ‘perchè?’ (Griffini 1913: 208) ~ Djidjelli ʿlíyyeš [= ʿlāš panmaghrébin] ‘pourquoi’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 587) ~ Sidi Bel Abbès ʿlāš/ ʿlāh ‘pourquoi?’ (Madouni-La Peyre 2003: 465) ~ Ḥassāniyya ʿlāš? ‘pourquoi’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 117). 467

ʿ-m-d

ʿa=ma₂=di (LE) ‘chariot parts; supports’ (Hoch 1994: 70) || Ar ‫ �ع�م�د‬ʿamada ‘durch einen Pfeiler, eine Säule stützen’ (Wahrmund II 304); ~ Oman ʿamūd ‘Wagebalken’ (Reinhardt 1894: 45) ~ Palest ʿamūd, pl ʿamawīd/ ʿawamīd ‘Säule’; ʿumde, pl ʿimdān ‘Art Stütze’ (Bauer 1957: 252) ~ Egypt ʿamūd, pl ʿawamīd/ʿamawīd/ʿimdān ‘column, pillar’ (Spiro 1895: 412) ~ Najd ʿamūd, pl ʿimdān/ʿimmād ‘tent pole, stake’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 416).

466. ʿ -l-y – 471. ʿ -n-q ¹

468

239

ʿ-m-q

ʿmq ‘Talgrund, Tiefe Ebene’ (Hannig 1995: 141) ~ Akkad ḫamqu ‘valley’ (CAD V ‫�غ‬ 70) ~ Heb ‫ ֵע ֶמק‬ʿēmeq ‘vale’ (BDB 770) || Ar �‫ �ع�م ق‬ʿumq/�‫ ��م ق‬ġumq ‘depth’ (Hava 1982: 553); ~ Sinai ġamīg ‘deep, profound’ (C. Bailey 1991: 448) ~ Yemen ġumg ‘Tiefe’ (Behnstedt 1996: 727) ~ Iraq ġamīg/ġamīǧ ‘deep’ (Clarity et al., 1964: 51) ~ Aleppo lʿamǝq ‘nom d’une vaste dépression entre Alep et Ntakye’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 553) ~ Kǝndērīb ʿǝmq ‘Tiefe’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 98) ~ Hasankeyf ʿǝmq ‘Tiefe’ (Fink 2017: 305) ~ Palest ġumq/ʿumq ‘Tiefe’ (Bauer 1957: 301) ~ Egypt ġumq ‘depth’ (Spiro 1895: 534) ~ Djidjelli ġmiq ‘profond’; ġmūqa ‘fait d’être profond’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 268, 226) ~ Morocco ʿmiq ‘deep’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 47). 469

ʿ-n-b

ʿnb (LE) ‘Weintraube’; ‘grapes’ (Calice 1936: 129; Helck 1971: 505); ʿ=n=bu ‘grapes (in topon.)’ (Hoch 1994: 72) ~ Sab ʿnb ‘vineyard’ (Jamme 1962: 445) || Ar �‫�ع��ن� ب‬

‫أ‬

ʿinab, pl �‫ � �ع ن���ا ب‬ʾaʿnāb ‘grapes’ (Hava 1982: 503); ~ Damascus ʿǝneb ‘grapes’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 107) ~ Palest ʿinab/ʿinib/ ʿunub ‘Trauben’ (Bauer 1957: 304) ~ Kǝndērīb ʿǝnǝb ‘Wein-trauben’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 98). 470

ʿ-n-f

nf (ME) ‘wrong, wrongdoing’; ‘Böses, Unrechtes’; m nf ‘unrechterweise’ (Faulk­ ‫ف‬ ner 1962: 131; Wb II 252; Brockelmann 1932: 106) || Ar ���‫ �ع ن‬ʿanf ‘roughness, violence’ (Hava 1982: 506); ~ Iraq ʿunf ‘violence’; ʿanīf ‘fierce’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 326) ~ Najd ʿanīf ‘cruel, grievous, severe’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 427) ~ Palest taʿnīf ‘harter Vorwurf’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 50) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ʿanf⟩ ‘violence’ (Corriente 1997: 367). 471

ʿ-n-q¹

ʿnḫ.t (OK) ‘Ziege (oder allgemeines Wort fur Kleinvieh)’; ‘goat, small livestock’ (Wb I 205; Faulkner 1962: 44; Goldwasser 2002: 36*; Albright 1918: 253) ~ Dem

240

‫ق‬

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

ʿnḫ.t ‘die Ziege’ (DG 64) || Ar � ‫ �ع ن���ا‬ʿanāq, pl �‫ �ع ن�� ق‬ʿunuq ‘petite chèvre’ (Hava 1982: 553); ~ N. Yemen ʿanāg ‘weibl. Lamm, Zicklein, sehr junges Zicklein’ (Behnstedt 1987: 282) ~ Najd ʿanāg ‘Kleines weibliches Zicklein bis etwa zu einer Woche’ (Hess 1938: 82) ~ Negev ʿanēgih, pl ʿanigāt ‘young goat’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi) ~ Marazig ʿanāg, pl ʿanāyeg ‘chèvrette toute jeune’ (Boris 1958: 421) ~ Collo ʿannāqa ‘jeune chèvre’ (Lentin 1959: 205) ~ Djidjelli ʿnāqa ‘chèvrette’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 269) ~ U̅ lād Brāhīm ʿanegga ‘petites chèvres’ (W. Marçais 1908: 67) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ʿanāqah, pl ʿināq⟩ ‘she-kid’ (Corriente 1997: 368). 472

ʿ-n-q²

i҆nq ‘embrace’; ‘umfassen; die Arme um etwas schlingen; jemanden umarmen, umschlingen, würgen’ (Faulkner 1962: 24; Wb I 100, 101; Sethe 1962: 96) ~ Heb ‫ ֲענָ ק‬ʿănāq ‘necklace’ (BDB 778) ~ Ge ʿanaqa ‘necklace’ (Leslau 1987: 65) ~ Amh ‫ن‬ angät ‘neck’ (Leslau 1969: 26) || Ar �‫ ع�ا � ق‬ʿānaqa ‘to embrace’ (Hava 1982: 504); ~ Najd ʿānag ‘to embrace, be attached to’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 417) ~ Iraq ʿtinaq ‘to embrace’; ʿunig, pl ʿunūg ‘neck’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 326) ~ Tunis ʿonq, pl ʿnāq ‘cou’; mʿannaq ‘embrassant’; ʿonq ‘cou’ (D. Cohen 1975: 115, 118) ~ Djidjelli ʿonqūq ‘cou (volaille)’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 282) ~ Morocco ʿenq, pl ʿnuq/ʿnaq ‘neck’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 129) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ʿunq, pl aʿnāq⟩ ‘neck’ (Corriente 1997: 368) ~ Malta ⟨għannaq⟩ ‘abbracciare’; ⟨għonq, pl għenuq⟩ ‘collo’ (Vassalli 1796: 347, 362). 473

ʿ-n-n¹

ʿn (MK) ‘turn back, come back, return’; ‘sich umwenden, umkehren’ (Faulkner 1962: 43; Wb I 188; Calice 1936: 43) ~ Dem ʿn ‘umwenden, umkehren; wiederum, wieder, auch, ebenfalls’ (DG 61, 62) ~ Copt ⲟⲛ ‘again, also, still’ (Crum 1939: 255b) || Ar �‫ �ع� نّ� �ع� ن‬ʿanna ʿan ‘to turn aside from’ (Hava 1982: 502); ~ Daθīna ʿanna ‘échapper’ (GD 2332) ~ Marazig ʿnān, pl ʿenna ‘rêne’ (Boris 1958: 420) ~ Morocco X rxa ʿnāno ‘il est devenu voûté, incapable de se redresser (en parlant d’un vieillard ou d’un malade)’ (Prémare IX 265) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ʿanna⟩ ‘it came into sight’ (Corriente 1997: 368).

472. ʿ -n-q ² – 476. ʿ -w-r

474

241

ʿ-n-n²

ʿnʿn (LE) ‘complain, complaint’; ‘sich beschweren’ (Faulkner 1962: 43; Wb I 191) ~ Akkad unninu ‘prayer, supplication’ (CAD XX 162) || ~ Heb ‫ ָענִ ין‬ʿānīn ‘sighing’ (Clines I 353) || Saf ʿnn ‘moan’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 630) ~ Ar �ّ‫�ع� ن‬ ʿanna (for ʾanna) ‘moan, sigh frequently’; ‘das ‫ ء‬wie aussprechen’ (Hava 1982: ‫ع‬ 503; Wahrmund II 315); cf. 831. w-n-n; ~ Aleppo ʿann ‘gémir’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 558) ~ Khatūniyya ʿann, yʿǝnn ‘murren’ (Talay 2003: 360) ~ Iraq ʿann ‘id.’ (Weißbach 1930: 360) ~ Palest ʿann bi ‘sich beschweren’ (Bauer 1957: 54) ~ Oman ēnīn ‘stöhnen’ (Reinhardt 1895: 46) ~ Yemen ʾann ‘lamentarsi’ (Rossi 1939: 216) ~ Damascus ʾann ‘groan, moan’; wanne ‘hum’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 108, 152, 119) ~ Negev wannih ‘lament’ (Henkin 2010: 302). 475

ʿ-n-y

i҆ʿnw (MK) ‘Kummer (oder ähnlich); klagender Ausruf’ (Wb I 41; Calice 1936: 113) || Ar �‫ �ع‬ʿuniya ‘to be anxious about’ (Hava 1982: 505);

‫ن�ي‬

~ Najd ʿanna ‘to burden s.o., make s.o. suffer’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 428) ~ Palest ʿana ‘gêne, besoin’ (Denizeau 1960: 366) ~ Rwala mʿanna ‘suffering, troubled, distressed, grieving’ (Musil 1928: 501) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ʿannaytuh⟩ ‘to cause to toil, to torment, pester’ (Corriente 1997: 368). 476

ʿ-w-r

ʿwꜣ (Pyr) ‘go bad, rot’; ‘verderben, faulen, garen, sauer werden’ (Faulkner 1962: 39; Wb I 172; Hannig 1995: 132); cf. ḥwꜣ.w ‘rot; putrefy; be foul, offensive’ (Wb III 51; Caminos 1954: 533; Takács 1999: 361) || Saf ʿwr ‘obliterate’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 642) ~ Ar ‫ ع�ا ر‬ʿāra ‘verderben, vernichten’; ‫ �ع ّور‬ʿawwara ‘he marred, or spoiled’ (Wahrmund II 323; Lane 2193); ~ Iraq ʿwāra ‘fault, defect’; ʿawwar ‘hurt, injure; bruise’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 328; van Ess 1918: 129) ~ Damascus ʿawwar ‘damage’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 59) ~ Palest ʿawwar ‘verletzen’ (Bauer 1957: 335) ~ Oman ʿawwar ‘verwunden’; tʿawwart f’rāsi ‘ich habe mich am Kopfe verletzt’; ʿawār ‘Wunde’ (Reinhardt 1894: 8, 45) ~ Egypt ʿawwar ‘damage, mutilate’; ‘jemanden verletzen’ (Spiro 1895: 419; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 329) ~ Ḥassāniyya ʿāṛ ‘affront’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 21) ~ Malta ⟨agħar⟩ ‘worse’ (own obs.).

242 477

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

ʿ-w-f

ʿpy (ME) ‘to fly’; ‘fliegen (vom Vogel; von der geflügelten Sonne)’; pʿy ‘fly’ (Faulkner 1962: 41; Wb I 179; Tait 1977: 114) ~ Ge ʿof ‘bird’; ʿofa ‘to fly’ (Leslau ‫ف‬ 1987: 663, 693) || Ar �� ‫ ع�ا‬ʿāfa ‘planer au-dessus de quelque chose (se dit, d’un oiseau qui voltige et décrit des cercles au-dessus de l’eau ou d’un proie, avec l’intention de se précipiter dessus)’ (DAF II 409). 478

ʿ-w-l

ʿwn (MK) ‘be covetous, despoil’; ‘betrügen, ungerecht sein’ (Faulkner 1962: 40; Wb I 172; Calice 1936: 127) || Ar ‫ ع�ا ل‬ʿāla ‘to exceed the bounds of justice (tax gatherer)’ (Hava 1982: 511); ~ Egypt ʿiwāla ‘meanness’; ʿawīl ‘one who lives at the expense of others’ (Spiro 1895: 379) ~ Rwala ʿāl ʿala flān ‘he hurt somebody’; ʿayle ‘an evil deed’ (Musil 1928: 225) ~ Marazig ʿāl ‘se tromper’ (Boris 1958: 425) ~ Najd ʿawīl ‘wailing’ (Sowayan 1992: 285). 479

ʿ-w-n

ʿwn.t (MK) ‘Art Baum und dessen Holz (als Material zu Stöcken)’ (Wb I 173; ‫ة‬ Calice 1936: 127) || Ar ���‫ �عوا ن‬ʿawānah ‘lofty palm tree’ (Hava 1982: 511). 480

ʿ-y-r

ʿꜣ (OK) ‘ass’; ‘Esel’ (Faulkner 1962: 38; Wb I 165) ~ Dem ʿꜣ ‘Esel’ (DG 54) ~ Copt ⲉⲓⲱ ‘ass’ (Crum 1939: 75b) ~ Heb ‫ ַעיִ ר‬ʿayir ‘male ass (young and vigorous)’ (BDB 747) ~ Taym ʿyr ‘ass’ (Winnett & Reed 1970: 192) ~ Ḥar ḥayr ‘donkey’ (Johnstone 1977: 160) || Saf ʿr ‘ass, donkey’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 641) ~ Ar ‫عي��ر‬

‫أ‬

ʿayr, pl ‫ � �عي���ا ر‬ʾaʿyār ‘domestic and wild ass’ (Hava 1982: 512); ~ Sinai ʿayr, pl ʿyārah ‘donkey’ (Stewart 1990: 202) ~ Lebanon ʿiyyār ‘bête forte et résistante qui ne se laisse pas dépasser par une autre’ (Bauer 1957: 237) ~ Al-Balqāʾ ʿāyir ‘thoroughbred camel’ (Palva 1992: 174) ~ Najd ʿayrah ‘edles Kamel’ (Socin 1901 III 295) ~ Marazig ʿīr eʿyerra ‘jeune chameau mâle’ (Boris 1958: 427) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ʿayr, pl aʿyār⟩ ‘a (wild) ass, onager’ (Corriente 1997: 372).

243

477. ʿ -w-f – 484. ġ-b-b ¹

481

ʿ-y-l

‫أ‬

Dem ʿlw ‘das Kind’ (DG 68) ~ Copt ⲁⲗⲟⲩ ‘youth, maiden’ (Crum 1939: 5a) ~ Heb

ّ

‫ة‬

‫ ֲעוִ יל‬ʿăwīl ‘boy’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 1049) || Ar ‫ �عي���ل‬ʿayyil, pl ��‫ � �عي���ل‬ʾaʿīlah ‘wer zur

Familie gehört’ (Wahrmund II 331); ~ Egypt ʿayyil, pl ʿiyāl ‘boy, child’ (Spiro 1895: 378) ~ Najd ʿyāl ‘children, sons, youth’ (Sowayan 1992: 286) ~ Kǝndērīb ʿyāl ‘Kinder, Familienangehörige’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 100) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ʿiyāl⟩ ‘offspring’ (Corriente 1997: 371). 482

ʿ-y-n¹

ʿ(y)n (LE) ‘Quelle’; ‘well, spring’; ʿnj ‘Name von Gewässern’ (Sethe 1962: 105; Hoch 1994: 59; DLE 62, 67; Wb I 189) || Heb ‫ ַעיִ ן‬ʿayin ‘eye, spring’ (Clines VI 355, ‫ن‬ 364) || Ar �‫ عي�� ن‬ʿayn, pl �‫ ا عي�� ن‬aʿyun/�‫ �ع��يو‬ʿuyūn ‘water-spring’ (Hava 1982: 514); ~ Palest ʿēn, pl ʿiyūn/ʿuyūn/ʿayūn ‘Quelle’ (Bauer 1957: 237) ~ Mzāb ʿayn ‘puits’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 23) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ʿayn, pl aʿyān⟩ ‘spring, source’ (Corriente 1997: 372) ~ Malta ⟨għajn, pl għejun⟩ ‘fontana’ (Vassalli 1796: 338). 483

ʿ-y-n²

ʿn ‘the pleasant man’; ‘schön sein, schön handelnd, gütig’ (Faulkner 1962: 43; WAS I 190); ʿjnw ‘respectable persons’ (Ember 1930: 115; Brockelmann 1932: 102)

‫ن‬

‫أ‬

‫ن‬

|| Ar � ‫ ال� �عي���ا‬al-ʾaʿyān ‘die Vornehmen’; �‫ �ع��يو‬ʿuyūn ‘das Beste’ (Wahrmund II 332, 333); ~ Ḥassāniyya ʿayyin, pl aʿyān ‘notable’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 102) ~ Egypt aʿyān ‘notables, distinguished persons’ (Spiro 1895: 422) ~ Damascus ʿala ʿēni ‘gern’ (Bergsträßer 1924: 71) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨muʿayyan⟩ ‘distinguished, important’ (Corriente 1997: 373).

Ġ

484

ġ-b-b¹

ʿm (LE) ‘to swallow, absorb’; ‘verschlucken’ (Ember 1930: 61; Faulkner 1962: 42; ّ ‫�غ‬ Wb I 183) || Ar �‫ � � ب‬ʿabba ‘to gulp, swallow water in one draught’ (Hava 1982: ‫��غ‬ ‫ة‬ ّ 449); ����‫ ب‬ġabbah ‘draught, gulp’ (Hava 1982: 515);

244

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

~ Aleppo ġabb ‘boire en aspirant et en se remplissant la bouche, boire en humant’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 569) ~ Palest ġabb ‘tüchtigen Schluck nehmen’ (Bauer 1957: 261) ~ Egypt ġabb, yġibb ‘to swallow quickly’; ġabb ‘act of swallowing’ (Spiro 1895: 425); ġabb ‘füllen’; ġibūb ‘Wolken’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 333) ~ Najd ġibbe ‘Tiefe, des Wassers u.s.w.’ (Socin 1901 III 295) ~ Yemen ġabb ‘durstig werden’ (Behnstedt 1996: 887) ~ Marazig ġabb ‘ne pas être abreuvé, pendant une période quelconque’; stġabb ‘priver le bétail d’abreuvoir pendant plus de dix jours’ (Boris 1958: 429) ~ Takrūna ġabb ‘rester sans aller à l’abreuvoir (chameaux, moutons); sauter un repas, rester sans le faire’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 2785) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nuʿubb, ʿababt⟩ ‘to gulp or drink in large draughts’ (Corriente 1997: 342). 485

ġ-b-b²

ّ ‫�غ‬

gbj (LE) ‘schwach, elend sein; schlimm, beschwerlich’ (Wb V 161) || Ar �‫� � ب‬ ّ ‫�غ‬ ġabba ‘sentir mauvais, être gâté (se dit des viandes)’; �‫ � ب��� ب‬ġabbaba ‘become corrupt’ (DAF II 429; Lane 2221); ~ Lebanon ġabb ‘s’évanouir, se trouver mal, perdre connaissance’; ġabbe ‘évanouissement’ (Denizeau 1960: 370) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ḥumma ġibb⟩ ‘tertian fever’ (Corriente 1997: 374). 486

ġ-d-r

‫�غ‬ ‫أ‬ ‫�غ ن‬ ‫�غ‬ ‫�غ‬ ‫ �د ر‬ġudur/� ‫ �د را‬ġudrān/‫ � �د ر‬ʾaġdir ‘pool left by the rain; river torrent’ (Hava mḥḏrt (LE) ‘Fischteich’ (Wb II 128) [< *m+ġdrt (see below)] || Ar ‫ �دي�ر‬ġadīr, pl

1982: 518); ~ Aleppo ġadīr mwāy ‘torrents de pluie’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 570) ~ Palest ġadīr, pl ġudrān ‘Teich mit Abfluss’ (Bauer 1957: 299) ~ Sinai ġadīr, pl ġudrān ‘rainpool’ (C. Bailey 1991: 448) ~ Kǝndērīb ġadīr, pl ġǝdrān ‘Pfütze, Lache’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 100) ~ Marazig ġadīr, pl ġǝdrāwa ‘étang, mare, eau stagnante’ (Boris 1958: 433) ~ Takrūna ġdīr, pl ġdūr/ġudrān ‘mare d’eau dans un terrain légèrement encaissé’; maġder, pl mġāder ‘bas-fond où se forment des mares’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 2793) ~ Tangier ġaddar ‘remplir un vase jusqu’au bord (= remplir comme un ġadīr)’ (W. Marçais 1911: 401) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ġadīr, pl aġdur⟩ ‘estanque, remanso de rio’ (Dozy II 202) ~ Malta ⟨għadira, pl għadajjar⟩ ‘lago, stagno’ (Vassalli 1796: 324).

485. ġ-b-b ² – 489. ġ-r-q

487

245

ġ-r-b¹

ʿꜣb (MK) ‘(of things) pleasing, desirable, pleasant; wonderful, strange, extraordinary’; ‘wohlgefällig sein’ (Faulkner 1962: 38; Ember 1917: 85; 1930: 14; Allen ‫�غ‬ 2013: 35; Wb I 167) ~ Heb ‫ ָע ֵרב‬ʿārēb ‘sweet, pleasant’ (BDB 787) || Ar �‫ � ر�ي� ب‬ġarīb ‘seltsam, außergewöhnlich’; ġarāʾib ‘wunderbare Sachen’ (Wahrmund II 343); ~ Tunis ġrība ‘chose étonnante’ (D. Cohen 1975: 160) ~ Morocco ġrīb ‘étrange, extraordinaire; curieux, merveilleux’ (Prémare IX 347) ~ Aleppo ʿaǧāyeb ġarāyeb ‘choses merveilleuses et surprenantes’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 571) ~ Lebanon ġarīb ‘étranger’ (Denizeau 1960: 372) ~ Palest ġarīb ‘außergewöhnlich’ (Bauer 1957: 37) ~ Egypt ġarīb ‘extraordinary’ (Spiro 1895: 427) ~ Djidjelli ġrīb ‘étrange’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 268). 488

ġ-r-b²

ʿꜣb.t (Pyr) ‘Krug zum Waschen’ (Ember 1914: 85; Wb I 167; Calice 1936: 98) || ‫�غ‬ Ar �‫ � ر ب‬ġarb ‘grand sceau ou grande outre à eau’; ‘a vessel of the kind termed qadaḥ’ (DAF II 450; Lane 2242); ~ Ḥaḍramawt ⟨ġarb⟩ ‘grande outre pour l’eau’ (Landberg 1901: 669) ~ Yemen ġarbin ‘Wasserschlauch’; ġarb, pl ġurub ‘grosser Wasserschlauch; Wassersack’ (Behnstedt 1996: 895; 1987: 283) ~ Oman qarbe ‘Schlauch’ (Reinhardt 1894: 70) ~ Najd ġarb, pl ġrūb/ġawārīb ‘large, elongated bucket drawn by the sānyah’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 431); ‘Eimer’ (Socin 1901 III 295) ~ Rwala ġarb ‘a reservoir from which water is distributed’ (Musil 1928: 682). 489

ġ-r-q

ʿgꜣ (LE) ‘drown, capsize’ (DLE I 81) ~ ʿkꜣ ‘kentern (mit dem Schiff), ertrinken’ ‫�غ ق‬ (Wb I 235)’ ~ Jibb ġerq ‘to drown’ (Johnstone 1981: 88) || Ar �‫ � ر‬ġariqa ‘to drown’ (Hava 1982: 539); ~ Rwala layāli-l-ġaraq ‘the nights of flood’ (Musil 1928: 390) ~ S. Arabia ⟨ġaraq⟩ ‘l’état d’un terrain d’être si léger que le pied s’y enfonce’ (Landberg 1909: 670) ~ Yemen ġirig ‘adirarsi, affondare, naufragare’; ġurg ‘profondità’ (Rossi 1939: 191, 230); ġarig ‘untergehen (Mond, Sonne)’ (Behnstedt 1987: 283) ~ Oman ġroq ‘ertrinken’ (Reinhardt 1894: 134) ~ S.E. Anatolia ġǝrǝq ‘se noyer’ (Grigore 2007: 110) ~ Aleppo ġǝreq, yǝġraq ‘être submergé’ (Barthélemy 1935– 69: 573) ~ Lebanon ġereq ‘se noyer’ (Feghali 1938: 805) ~ Palest ġiriq ‘ertrinken’

246

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

(Bauer 1957: 103) ~ Tripoli (Libya) ġreq ‘annegare’ (Cesàro 1939: 207) ~ Tunis ġroq ‘il s’est noyé’; ġorq ‘profondeur’ (D. Cohen 1975: 95, 141) ~ Tripoli (Libya) ġreg ‘annegarsi’ (Griffini 1913: 14) ~ Marazig ġreg, yaġrag ‘s’embourber, se noyer’ (Boris 1958: 436) ~ Djidjelli ġarqān ‘noyé, trempé’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 286) ~ Morocco ġṛeq ‘to drown’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 59). Cf. Ghomara (Berber) leġraq ‘bottom’; ġreq ‘to drown’ (Mourigh 2016: 393).

490

ġ-f-r

ʿfn (MK) ‘cover (v), headcovering’; ‘umhüllen, umhüllen sein (besonders von den verbundenen Augen)’; ʿfn.t (Pyr) ‘royal headcloth’; ‘Kopftuch’ (Ember 1914: 120; Faulkner 1962: 43; Wb I 183; Calice 1936: 91; Hannig 1995: 138) ~ Akkad ‫ف‬ apāru ‘to cover the head’ (M. Cohen 2011: 49) || Ar ‫ � �غم�����ر‬miġfar ‘helmet’ (Hava 1982: 530); ~ Levantine Ar ġafar/xafar ‘garder’ (Denizeau 1960: 149, 375) ~ Aleppo ġaffāra ‘long et grand manteau’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 578) ~ Palest ġafra ‘Schlafdecke’ (Dalman VI 22) ~ Najd xafrāt ‘chaste, veiled women’ (Sowayan 1992: 263) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨maġfir, pl maġāfir⟩ ‘helmet or mail headcover under it’ (Corriente 1997: 380). 491

ġ-l-f

ʿrf (MK) ‘pack, envelop, enclose; contain; bag’; ‘Beutel, Säckchen (für Schminke, Goldstaub); einhüllen, einpacken, umschliessen’ (Gardiner 1957: 308; Faulkner 1962: 45; Breasted 1930: 521; Wb I 210–211; van der Plas & Borghouts 1998: 55) ~ Dem ʿrf ‘einschliessen, einwickeln (besonders von der Mumie); Binde’ (DG 66) ~ Copt ⲱⲣ(ⲉ)ⲃ ‘be enclosed, apart, quiet’ (Crum 1939: 528a) ~ Akkad ullupu ‘a leather garment or cover’ (CAD XX 86) ~ Ugar ġlp ‘husk, lit., sheath; sea snail ‫ف‬ (shell), murex’ (DUL 316) ~ Heb ‫ ָע ַלף‬ʿālap ‘to cover’ (BDB 763) || Ar �‫ ع��ل‬ġalafa ‫�غ ف‬ ‘to envelop’; �� ‫ �لا‬ġilāf ‘scabbard, case, sheath’ (Hava 1982: 533) ~ Iraq ġallaf ‘to put in a cover, envelope or case’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 338) ~ Aleppo ġlāf ‘fourreau (de sabre)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 580) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ġilāf, pl ġuluf⟩ ‘foreskin’ (Corriente 1997: 382) ~ Tunis ġlāf ‘ce qui enveloppe’ (D. Cohen 1975: 154) ~ Marazig ġlāf, pl -āt ‘couche de bourre (līf ) enveloppant la palme non encore ouverte du palmier et d’ou naissent les spathes (ð̣ eleʿ)’ (Boris 1958: 443) ~ Djidjelli ġlāf ‘envelopper’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 266) ~ Malta ⟨għlief⟩ ‘lolla, guscio, veste del grano’ (Vassalli 1796: 325).

247

490. ġ-f-r – 494. ġ-l-l

492

ġ-l-q¹

ʿrq (MK) ‘vollenden (Lebenszeit); aufhören zu (tun); Ende, Grenze (des Lebens)’ (Hannig 1995: 151); ʿrqy (MK) ‘last day of the month’; ‘der letzte Monatstag’; ʿq ‘elapse’ (Wb I 212; Faulkner 1962: 46; DLE I 80) ~ Dem ʿlq ‘aufhören’ (DG 68)

ّ ‫�غ‬

~ Copt ⲁⲗⲕⲉ ‘last day of the month’ (Crum 1939: 5b) || Ar �‫ ��ل ق‬ġallaq ‘achever, clore, terminer’ (Dozy II 224); ~ Aleppo ssāʿa tlāte ġalaq ‘il est trois heures juste’; ġallaq ‘conclure, terminer; compléter’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 581) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨inġilāq θalāθīn sanah⟩ ‘lapse of thirty years’ (Corriente 1997: 382) ~ Malta ⟨għalaq ħamsin sena⟩ ‘he turned fifty’ (own obs.) ~ Tunis ġalaq ‘il a fermé’ (D. Cohen 1975: 97) ~ Morocco ġlaq ‘shutter’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 178). 493

ġ-l-q²

494

ġ-l-l

‫�غ‬

ʿrq/ʿnq ‘basket’ (DLE I 74; Faulkner 1962: 46) || Ar �‫ ��ل ق‬ġalaq ‘basket’ (Hava 1982: 533); ~ Egypt ġalaq, pl ġulqān ‘native small basket, pannier’ (Spiro 1895: 434); ġilāʾ ‘mittelgroßer Korb’; ġalag ‘Tasche, Korb aus Reifengummi (für Erdarbeiten)’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 339).

jꜣrrt ‘grapes’ (Wb I 183) ~ Dem ꜣllj ‘Weintrauben’ (DG 6) ~ Copt ⲉⲗⲟⲟⲗⲉ ‘grape’ (Crum 1939: 54b) ~ Heb [‫* ] ָע ַלל‬ʿālal ‘glean (grapes or olives)’; ‫עֹולֹלת‬ ֵ ʿōlēlōt

ّ ‫أ�غ‬

‘gleanings (of grapes and olives)’ (BDB 759, 760) || Ar ‫ � �ل‬ʾaġalla ‘to yield a good crop’ (Hava 1982: 530); ~ Damascus ġalle, pl ġlāl ‘crop, harvest’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 57, 112) ~ Aleppo ġalle ‘récolte qu’on attend’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 581) ~ Lebanon ġallīl ‘récolte abondante’ (Denizeau 1960: 376) ~ Tunis ġalla ‘fruit(s)’ (D. Cohen 1975: 60) ~ Takrūna ġalla arð̣ iyya ‘cucurbitacées et tomates’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 73) ~ Morocco ġella ‘fruit’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 80) ~ Djidjelli ġolla ‘fruits, récolte’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 252) ~ Malta ⟨għalla, pl għelejjel⟩ ‘prodotto della terra annuale’ (Vassalli 1796: 318).

248

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

495

ġ-m-m¹

496

ġ-m-m²

‫�غ ّ ة‬

ʿmt (Gr) ‘Gewölk’ (Wb I 187) || Ar ��‫ ��م‬ġammah ‘wolkig oder sehr heiß’ (Wahr­ mund II 366); ~ Damascus ġēme, pl ġyūm ‘cloud’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 44); ġmāme, pl ġmām ‘nuage’ (Denizeau 1960: 377) ~ Egypt ġamām ‘clouds’ (Spiro 1895: 434, 438) ~ Tunis ġmām ‘brouillard’ (D. Cohen 1975: 155) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ġamāmah⟩ ‘cloud’ (Corriente 1997: 383).

gmw (MK) ‘grief, mourning’; ‘traurig, Traurigkeit’ (Ember 1930: 107; Faulkner 1962: 289; Wb V 169; Calice 1936: 214) ~ Sab ġmm ‘affliger’ (Avanzini 1980: 271) ~ Soq gamgamah ‫‘ �غ‬chagrin, ennui’ (Leslau 1938: 110) || Saf ġmt ‘sorrow’ (Al-Jallad 2015: 316) ~ Ar ّ � ġamm ‘affliction, distress, anxiety’ (Ambros 2004: 203); ‫م‬ ~ Iraq maġmūm ‘unhappy’ (van Ess 1918: 245) ~ Najd ġamm ‘grief, sorrow, unhappiness, distress, anxiety’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 45) ~ Yemen ġamm, pl ġumūm ‘preoccupazione’ (Rossi 1939: 191) ~ Syria maġmūm ‘verärgert’ (Behnstedt 1997a: 148) ~ Aleppo ġamm ‘chagrin, chagriner (qqn): (proprement) couvrir le cœur; étouffer (le feu) en le recouvrant’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 584) ~ Damascus ġamm, pl ġmūm ‘distress’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 69) ~ Lebanon ġamġam ‘to weigh on the heart’ (Frayha 1973: 125) ~ Palest ġamm ‘bekümmern jemanden; Harm’ (Bauer 1957: 50, 149) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ġumma⟩ ‘worry’ (Corriente 1997: 383) ~ Malta ⟨għomma⟩ ‘dolore o pena interna’ (Vassalli 1796: 327). 497

ġ-m-w

ʿmʿm (Med) ‘smear (vb.)’; ‘(die Füsse) reiben’; ʿmt ‘mud, muddy ground, mud flat’; ʿmj ‘verschmieren (Weinkrüge mit Lehm)’; ʿmʿ ‘(die Füsse) reiben, frot-‫�غ‬ tieren’; ʿmʿ.t ‘Salbe zum [ein-]reiben’ (Faulkner 1962: 42; Wb I 185, 186) || Ar ‫��م�ا‬ ġamā ‘bedecken,‫�غ‬decken (Haus oder Dach mit Lehm und Schindeln)’ (Wahr­ ً mund II 366); ‫ ��مى‬ġiman ‘the roof of a house; the covering of the roof, consisting of earth, etc.’ (Lane 2299).

249

495. ġ-m-m ¹ – 501. ġ-w-r ¹

498

ġ-m-y

gmwt (MK) ‘weakness’; gm.w ‘Schwäche (des Körpers, in den Gliedern), auch‫�غ‬ vom Herzen (das im Schwäche ist)’ (Faulkner 1962: 289; Wb V 169) || Ar ‫��مى‬ ġamā ‘tomber en défaillance, avoir un évanouissement’ (DAF II 508); ~ Aleppo ġǝmi ‘défaillir, avoir une faiblesse, se pâmer’; ġamma ‘causer une défaillance à (qqn)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 585) ~ Palest ġimi ‘ohnmächtig werden’ (Bauer 1957: 223) ~ Egypt ġimi ‘to faint’; iġma ‘fainting fit’ (Spiro 1895: 435). 499

ġ-n-y

ḫny (Pyr) ‘to play music’; ‘tanzen’; ḫny.t/ḫnw (MK) ‘musizierende Tänzerinnen’; ‫�غ‬ ‘musicians’ (Faulkner 1962: 192; Wb III 288; Lepper 2008: 48) || Ar �ّ‫ � � ن‬ġannā ‘to sing’ (Hava 1982: 537); ~ Lebanon ġinniyyi ‘song’ (Nasr 1966: 167) ~ Damascus ġǝne/maġna ‘Gesang’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 55, 61) ~ Palest ġanna ‘singen’ (Bauer 1957: 276) ~ Egypt ġanna ‘sing’ (Spiro 1895: 436) ~ Najd ġināwa ‘Gesang, Gedicht’ (Socin 1901 III 297) ~ Iraq ġannuwwa/ġunnuwwa ‘song’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 340) ~ Djidjelli ġnāya ‘chanson, air’; ġonnāya ‘chanteuse’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 353) ~ Morocco ġenna ‘to sing’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 180) ~ Malta ⟨għanna, jgħanni⟩ ‘dire cantando’ (Vassalli 1796: 320). 500

ġ-n-m

‫�غ ن‬

‫أ �غ‬

H̱ nmw (OK) ‘Khnum’; ‘Chnum (widderköpfiger Gott)’ (Faulkner 1962: 202; Wb III 381; Calice 1936: 189; Loprieno 1995: 35) || Ar � � ġanam, pl ‫ � � ن���ا‬ʾaġnām ‫م‬ ‫م‬ ‘Schaf, Hammel, Kleinvieh’ (Wahrmund II 368); ~ Najd ġanam, pl aġnām ‘sheep and goats, small cattle’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 435) ~ Egypt ġanam, pl aġnām ‘sheep’ (Spiro 1895: 432) ~ Palest ġanam ‘Schafe’ (Bauer 1957: 253) ~ Lebanon ġennām ‘berger (de moutons)’ (Denizeau 1960: 378). 501

ġ-w-r¹

ʿwꜣj (OK) ‘steal goods, rob s.o.’; ‘rauben’; ʿwꜣj ‘robber’; ʿwꜣt ‘robbery’ (Ember 1930: 34; Faulkner 1962: 39; Wb I 171) ~ Dem ʿwj ‘rauben’ (DG 58) ~ Sab ġwr ‘to

250

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

‫�غ‬

plunder’; hġr ‘faire un raid’ (Jamme 1962: 445; Avanzini 1980: 274) || Ar ‫ �ا ر‬ġāra ‘faire une excursion, une expédition contre une tribu, sur le territoire ennemi, et y enlever les troupeaux’ (DAF II 515); ~ Marazig yġūr ‘überfallen, einen Raubzug machen’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2005: 24) ~ Najd aġār ‘to attack’ (Sowayan 1992: 287) ~ Aleppo ġāṛa, pl -āt ‘course au galop contre l’ennemi, incursion’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 58 7) ~ Yemen ġār ‘difendere persona o cosa’ (Rossi 1939: 204) ~ Rwala ġāra ‘an attack’: maġārī ‘raids’ (Musil 1928: 251, 593) ~ ʿAnazeh ġār ‘courir en avant (pour attaquer ou pour aider), se jeter sur’ (Landberg 1940: 57) ~ Sinai ġār ‘to run’ (Stewart 1990: 227); mġīr ‘running fast’ (de Jong 2011: 98) ~ Damascus ġāra ‘raid’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 186); mǝġwār, pl maġawīr ‘Sturmtrupp, Stoßtrupp’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 165) ~ Egypt ġāyra, pl ġawāyir ‘raid, quarrel’ (Spiro 1895: 423) ~ Tripoli (Libya) ġār ‘depredare’ (Griffini 1913: 79) ~ Ḥassāniyya ġāra ‘attaque’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 26). F 502

f-t-t

ptt (LE) ‘broken up (?)’ (DLE I 159) ~ Heb ‫ ָּפ ַתת‬pātat ‘to break, crumble’ (M. ّ‫ف� ت‬ Jastrow 1886: 1256) || Ar � � fatta ‘casser, broyer en petits morceaux, piler’ (DAF II 531); ~ Kǝndērīb fatt ‘zerkrümmen, zerpflücken’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 104) ~ Aleppo fatt, yfə́tt ‘réduire en menus morceaux (du pain, un biscuit); émietter’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 593) ~ Palest fatt ‘hat zerbröckelt’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 53) ~ Egypt fatt/fattit/fatfit ‘cut into small pieces’ (Spiro 1895: 332) ~ Malta ⟨fettet, ifettet⟩ ‘cut (bread, etc.), dunk’ (Aquilina 1987: 329). 503

f-t-q

fdq (MK) ‘sever, divide, part, cut apart, cut off, sunder’; ‘zerteilen, ein Land verwüsten, etwas abreissen’; fdq ‘slice’; fdqw ‘sections’ (Faulkner 1962: 99; DLE I ‫ف‬ 166; Wb I 583) || Ar �‫ �ت�� ق‬fataqa ‘fendre, rompre, défair, découdre’ (DAF II 535); ~ Iraq fitag ‘slit, split open, a seam, undo the stitching; break out, break through (liquids)’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 344) ~ Yemen fitaq ‘Bruch (med.)’ (Behnstedt 2006: 924) ~ Najd ⟨fattaq⟩ ‘öffnen’ (Socin 1901 III 298) ~ Damascus ftāq ‘hernia’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 115) ~ Aleppo fataq ‘découdre’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 593) ~ Palest fataq ‘auftrennen’ (Bauer 1957: 30) ~ Djidjelli fetteq

251

502. f-t-t – 506. f-ǧ-r

‘désunir, séparer’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 180) ~ U̅ lād Brāhīm fdeg ‘découdre’ (W. Marçais 1908: 21) ~ Malta ⟨fetaq⟩ ‘fendere, spaccare, scucire’ (Vassalli 1796: 187). 504

f-t-l

ptr (LE) ‘Schnur’ (Wb I 565) ~ Akkad pitiltu ‘cord, lace, rope, string’ (Parpola ‫ف ة‬ 2007: 84) ~ Heb ‫ ָּפ ִתיל‬pātīl ‘cord, thread (twisted)’ (BDB 836) || Ar ��‫ ���تي���ل‬fatīlah, pl ‫فت ئ‬ ‫ ����ا �ل‬fatāʾil ‘mèche de lampe ou de bougie’ (DAF II 538); ~ Yemen fatlah ‘Faden’ (Behnstedt 2006: 925); ftīleh ‘acciarino’ (Rossi 1939: 190) ~ Aleppo ftīla, pl ftēyel ‘mèche tortue ou tricotée de lampe, de bougie, de chandelle, de veilleuse’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 594) ~ Tunis ftīla ‘mèche’ (D. Cohen 1975: 160) ~ Djidjelli ftīla ‘id.’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 79) ~ Malta ⟨ftila, pl ftejjel⟩ ‘stoppino’ (Vassalli 1796: 185). Cf. Ghomara (Berber) ftel ‘to spin’ (Mourigh 2016: 387).

505

f-ǧ-ǧ

ّ‫ف‬ �

pšš (Pyr) ‘straddle, spread’; psš ‘divide, division’; ‘ausspreizen, teilen’ (Faulkner

1962: 94; Wb I 560, 542) ~ Copt ⲡⲱϣ ‘to divide’ (Crum 1939: 277a)|| Ar � ‫ ج‬faǧǧa

‘to part the legs; he had the knees wide apart’ (Hava 1982: 546; Lane 2339); faǧǧ ‘mountain pass, defile’ (Ambros 2004: 209); fuǧāǧ chemin spacieux entre deux montagnes’ (DAF 543); ~ Lebanon faǧǧ ‘fendre, briser; labourer pour la première fois’ (Denizeau 1960: 381) ~ Najd fiǧǧ (sg. afaǧǧ) ‘dessen Oberschenkel weit auseinanderstehen (vom Kamel)’ (Socin 1901 III 298); faǧǧ, pl fǧūǧ ‘gap, mountain pass, a hollow of some width between two hills, with a road running through it’ (Musil 1928: 678); ‘to cleave, to rip open’ (Sowayan 1992: 287) ~ Negev fuǧūǧ ‘open spaces’ (Bailey 1982: 136, fn 13) ~ Daθīna faǧǧ, pl fuǧūǧ ‘chemin entre deux montagnes, défilé, recoin’ (GD 2398). 506

f-ǧ-r

fgn (Med) ‘sich entleeren, vom Menschen (mit ‫ ف‬Bezug auf Kot und Harn)’; ‘to �‫ �ج‬faǧara ‘donner une issue à l’eau defecate’ (Wb I 580; Faulkner 1962: 99) || Ar ‫�ر‬ et la faire couler’ (DAF II 544);

252

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

~ Lebanon faǧar ‘couler, se répandre’ (Denizeau 1960: 381) ~ Yemen faǧar ‘den Wasserdurchlaß öffnen; Wasser ablassen’ (Behnstedt 2006: 926) ~ Najd faǧǧar ‘to burst, break open’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 436); infaǧar ‘übertreten (vom Fluß)’ (Socin 1901 III 298) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nafjar, fajart⟩ ‘to let flow or pour forth’ (Corriente 1997: 390) ~ Malta ⟨faġar⟩ ‘far uscire il sangue o altro umore’ (Vassalli 1796: 178). 507

f-ḥ-ǧ

�‫ ف‬faḥaǧa ‘marcher � pḥḏ (Med) ‘trennen (eins vom anderen)’ (Wb I 542) || Ar ‫ح��ج‬ �

en écartant les talons et en rapprochant le devant des pieds’; ‘beim Gehen die Zehen gegen einander, die Fersen auswärts kehren; die Füße des Thieres beim Melken auseinander thun’ (DAF II 547; Wahrmund II 388); ~ Najd faḥḥaǧ ‘to spread one’s legs’ (Sowayan 1992: 287) ~ Daθīna faššax ‘écarter les jambes’ (Landberg 1909: 360) ~ Rwala faḥḥaǧ ‘to stand proudly on one’s legs; to part hind legs (camel)’ (Musil 1928: 306, 333) ~ Mosul faḥḥaǧ ‘to part one’s legs’ (Al-Bakrī 1972: 359) ~ Iraq faxxaǧ ‘walk with legs wide apart’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 346) ~ Syria afǧaḥ ‘lahm, hinkend’ (Behnstedt 1997a: 149) ~ Ḥama fašax ‘einen Schritt tun’ (Lewin 1966: 220) ~ Palest faḥaǧ, yefḥaǧ ‘schreiten mit grossen Schritten’ (Bauer 1957: 265); ‘franchir le seuil de la maison sans poser le pied dessus; marcher en faisant de grands pas; exagérer’; mfaḥḥǧe ‘assise les jambes écartées’ (Denizeau 1960: 382, 387); afkaḥ ‘mit krummen Füßen’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 56) ~ Kfarʿabīda faršex, ifaršex/faššex ‘écarter les jambes’ (Feghali 1919: 31) ~ Egypt farǧaḥ ‘die Beine spreizen’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 347); faršaḥ ‘to bestride’; fasxa ‘step, pace, stride’ (Spiro 1895: 456); fašax ‘to spread open (legs), open wide’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 657) ~ Marazig faḥḥaž ‘écarter les jambes, enjamber’ (Boris 1958: 454) ~ Djidjelli feḥḥež ‘enjamber’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 177) ~ Collo faḥǧa ‘écartement des jambes’ (Lentin 1959: 217) ~ Malta ⟨ferċaħ, iferċaħ⟩ ‘spread one’s legs’ (Aquilina 1987: 323). 508

f-x-x

pḥꜣ (LE) ‘die Vogelfalle aus Holz’; grg pḥꜣ ‘die Falle stellen’ (Wb I 543) ~ Dem pḫ ‘die Falle, die Schlinge’ (DG 139) ~ Copt ⲡⲁϣ ‘trap, snare’ (Crum 1939: 277a) ~ Heb ‫ �ַּפ ח‬paḥ(ḥ) ‘bird trap’ (BDB 809) ~ Syr paḥḥā ‘snare, gin’ (CSD 440) || ‫ف‬ Ar ‫ � خ‬faxx ‘Schlinge, Schneuse, Fangnetz’ (Wahrmund II 390);

�

253

507. f-ḥ-ǧ – 510. f-r-x

~ Yemen faxx ‘Falle, Schlinge’ (Behnstedt 2006: 928) ~ Lebanon faxx, pl fxūx ‘piège à oiseaux’ (Denizeau 1960: 383) ~ Palest faxx, pl fxāx ‘Falle, Mausfalle’ (Bauer 1957: 107) ~ Kǝndērīb fǝxxa, pl fǝxax ‘Falle’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 104) ~ Egypt faxx, pl fuxūx/afxāx ‘trap, snare’ (Spiro 1895: 445). Cf. Ghomara (Berber) lfexx ‘trap for birds’ (Mourigh 2016: 389).

509

f-x-ð

ḫpd(w) (Pyr) ‘buttocks’; ‘Hinterteil; als menschlicher Körperteil: Hinterbacke; als tierischer Körperteil (der Kuh)’ (DLE I 358; Faulkner 1962: 190; Wb III

‫ف�خ�ذ‬

‫أ ف�خ �ذ‬

� faxið/faxð/fixð, pl ‫��ا‬ � � ʾafxāð ‘Schenkel’ 271; Brockelmann 1932: 99) || Ar �� (Wahrmund II 390); ~ Najd fixð, pl fxūð ‘thigh’ (Kurpershoek 1994: 317) ~ Yemen faxð̣ ‘coscia’ (Rossi 1939: 202); faxið ‘Oberschenkel’ (Behnstedt 1987: 286) ~ Kǝndērīb faxð̣ , pl fxāð̣ ‘id.’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 104) ~ Damascus faxð, pl fxāð ‘thigh’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 239) ~ Lebanon faxḍ ‘cuisse’ (Feghali 1938: 808) ~ Palest faxð ‘Schenkel’ (Bauer 1957: 256) ~ Egypt faxd/faxda, pl afxād/faxdāt ‘thigh’; faxdet xarūf ‘leg of mutton’ (Spiro 1895: 446) ~ Tripoli (Libya) faxd, pl fxad ‘coscia’ (Griffini 1913: 69) ~ Tunis fxaḍ ‘cuisse’ (D. Cohen 1975: 184) ~ Cherchell fxað ‘id.’ (Grand’Henry 1972: 76) ~ Djidjelli fxod, pl fxad ‘cuisse’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 328) ~ U̅ lād Brāhīm fxað̣ ‘cuisse’ (W. Marçais 1908: 21) ~ Morocco fxed, pl fxaḍ ‘thigh’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 205). 510

f-r-x

prḫ (LE) ‘aufblühen, sich entfalten (von Blüte und Blatt); ausbreiten; die Blüte’; ‘bloom’ (Wb I 532; DLE I 152): kṯ prḫw ‘the safflower blooms’ (Kitchen 1999: 388) ~ Akkad parāḫu ‘to sprout’ (CAD XII 145) ~ Heb ‫ ָּפ ַרח‬pāraḥ ‘to bud, sprout, ‫ف‬ shoot’ (BDB 827) || Ar ‫ � ّر خ‬farraxa ‘to sprout (plant)’ (Hava 1982: 553);

�

~ Lebanon farrex ‘pousser, germer’ (Feghali 1935: 121) ~ Palest farrax ‘sproßen’ (Bauer 1957: 284) ~ N. Yemen faṛx- ‘Küken’ (Behnstedt 1987: 286) ~ Kǝndērīb farrax ‘Junge zur Welt bringen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 104) ~ Tenḥara (Yemen) fuxrī ‘poulet’ (Vanhove 1995: 265) ~ Oman nté farx ‘du bist ein Jüngling’ (Reinhardt 1894: 21) ~ Aleppo farrax ‘hatch ( farraxat al-bayḍah)’ (Al-Asadī VI 39) ~ Egypt farxa ‘hen’ (Bauer 1895: 448) ~ Tunis fǝrx ‘pigeon’ (D. Cohen 1975: 141) ~ Malta ⟨ferħ, pl frieħ⟩ ‘polledro’ (Vassalli 1796: 193). Cf. Ghomara (Berber) afrux ‘small chicken; boy, girl’ (Mourigh 2016: 388).

254 511

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

f-r-r

pꜣ (LE) ‘to fly, fly up’; ‘fliegen, auffliegen, fortfliegen’ (Faulkner 1962: 87; Wb I 494); prpr ‘umherspringen’; npꜣpꜣ ‘to flutter’; ‘fliegen (?) im Sinne von zittern’ (Faulkner 1962: 130; Wb I 532, 248) ~ Copt ϥⲟⲣϥⲉⲣ ‘to fall, rush down’ (Crum ‫ف‬ 1939: 624a) ~ Ḥar fer ‘to fly’ (Johnstone 1977: 162) || Ar ‫ � ّر‬farra ‘fly, escape’ (Hava 1982: 552); ~ Aleppo farr, yfǝrr ‘s’envoler pour fuir (: oiseau)’; rafraf ‘battre des ailes avant de prendre son essor (oiseau)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 599, 286) ~ N. Yemen farr ‘weglaufen’ (Behnstedt 1987: 286) ~ Palest farr ‘fliehen, herumstreichen’; rafraf ‘flattern’ (Bauer 1957: 113, 155); farr ‘fureter pour trouver quelque chose’ (Denizeau 1960: 384); firr ‘Wachtel’ (Dalman I/1: 168) ~ Kǝndērīb farr ‘fliege, wegfliegen’; farfare ‘Schmetterling’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 104, 105) ~ S.E. Anatolia farr ‘fliegen’; farfar ‘fliegen lassen, aufscheuchen’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 309, 312) ~ Rwala farrat qaṭāt ‘the flight of the qaṭa‌ʾ birds’; jifarfer ‘(the falcon) lifts its wings’ (Musil 1928: 362, 33) ~ Yemen farr ‘fuggire’; ‘weglaufen, entfliehen’ (Rossi 1939: 210; Behnstedt 2006: 931) ~ Oman firār ‘entrinnen’ (Reinhardt 1894: 45) ~ Najd farr ‘flee, run, escape’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 436) ~ Kǝndērīb paṛpaṛ, jpaṛpǝṛ ‘flattern (: Vogel)’; fǝrfāre ‘Schmetterling’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 22, 105) ~ Lebanon farfar ‘to try to fly’ (Frayha 1973: 128) ~ Egypt farr, yifirr ‘to escape’; farfar ‘to flutter, flap the wings’; ‘weglaufen, davon fliegen’; faṛṛ, yifuṛṛ ‘flattern’ (Spiro 1895: 446; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 348) ~ Malta ⟨farfar⟩ ‘scuotere, sbattere, scacciare da se’; ⟨perper, jperper⟩ ‘sventolarsi in quá e in lá’ (Vassalli 1796: 182, 559); ⟨ferfer⟩ ‘to flutter’; ⟨parpar, iparpar⟩ ‘to leave in a hurry’ (own obs.); cf. Aram ‫ ַּפ ְר ֵּפר‬parpēr ‘move about’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 1236). 512

f-r-z/d

Dem prḏ ‘trennen’ (DG 137) ~ Copt ⲡϣⲣϫ ‘divide, be divided’ (Crum 1939: 271b) ‫ف‬ ‫ف �ز‬ || Ar ‫ �ر‬faraza ‘to separate, to set apart’; ‫ �رد‬farida ‘to be alone’ (Hava 1982: 554, 553); ~ Palest faraz ‘trennen’ (Bauer 1957: 305) ~ Lebanon faraz ‘défaire les gerbes et les étendre sur l’aire’ (Denizeau 1960: 385) ~ Egypt farad ‘to separate, set aside’; faraz ‘to sort, select’ (Spiro 1895: 448) ~ Ḥassāniyya vṛad ‘séparer l’un de l’autre’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 135) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nafraz, farazt⟩ ‘to separate or set apart, to distinguish’; ⟨fard⟩ ‘unique’ (Corriente 1997: 398, 393) ~ Malta ⟨fired, jifred⟩ ‘separare’ (Vassalli 1796: 199).

255

511. f-r-r – 515. f-s-x

513

f-r-š

prḫ (Gr) ‘die Flügel ausbreiten’ (Wb I 532) ~ Dem prḫ ‘ausbreiten’ (DG 136) ~ Copt ⲡⲱⲣϣ ‘be spread’ (Crum 1939: 269b) ~ Akkad parāsu ‘spread’ ‫ف‬ (M. Cohen 2011: 197) ~ Heb ‫ ָּפ ַרׁש‬pāraš ‘spread out, spread’ (BDB 831) || Ar ���‫�رش‬ faraša ‘to spread (bed, carpet)’ (Hava 1982: 555); ~ Aleppo faraš ‘étendre à terre (une natte, un matelas)’ (Barthélemy 1935– 69: 600) ~ Palest faraš ‘ausbreiten (Teppich)’ (Bauer 1957: 32) ~ N. Yemen faraše ‘Schmetterling, Motte’ (Behnstedt 1987: 230) ~ Egypt faraš ‘to spread out’ (Spiro 1895: 449) ~ Malta ⟨firex, jifrex⟩ ‘distendere’ (Vassalli 1796: 159). 514

f-r-y

prj (MK) ‘ferocious bull; champion, hero; famous’; ‘als Bezeichnung eines Streitlustigen; als Bezeichnung des Kampfstiers’; prj-ʿ ‘gewalttätig sein’; prj-ʿk ‘streng dich an’, adjektivisch: ‘tüchtig (an der Arbeit), tapfer (im Kampf)’; prjʿk-i҆b ‘tapfer, kühn’ (Faulkner 1962: 91; Wb I 526–528; Hannig 1995: 285) ~ Heb ‫ ֶּפ ֶרא‬pereʾ ‘wild ass’ (BDB 825) ~ Aram ‫‘ פריה‬revenge’ (Tal 2000: 707) ~ Mah farʾ

‫فأ‬

‫ف‬

‫أف‬

‘brave’ (Johnstone 1987: 97) || Ar �‫ �ر‬fara‌ʾ/‫ �را ء‬farāʾ, pl ‫ � �را ء‬ʾafrāʾ ‘wilder Esel oder dessen erwachsenes Junges’ (Wahrmund II 394); ~ Palest farā ‘Wildesel’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 54) ~ Egypt muftari ‘ruthless’ (Spiro 1895: 454; Badawi & Hinds 1986: 654) ~ Jihēna, Luxor imfiri ‘verwildert’: albsās imfiriyya ‘die Katzen sind verwildert’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 353) ~ Tunis fra ‘il a transpercé’ (D. Cohen 1975: 28) ~ Najd fara ‘to rip open, to cut wide open’ (Sowayan 1992: 287; Kurpershoek 1994: 318) ~ Yemen fārī ‘savage’ (Jayakar 1889: 268; GD 2416). 515

f-s-x

psḫ (MK) ‘disarray one’s hair; (intrans.) be distraught; be strewn’; ‘vom verwirrt herabhängenden Haar; vom Herzen, das aus Angst in Verwirrung gerät’; psš (Pyr) ‘divide’; psšt ‘sharing out, share, portion’; psšty ‘part, division’ (Faulkner 1962: 94, 95; Wb I 550) ~ Copt ⲡⲱϣ ‘divide, be separate’ (Crum 1939: 227a) ~ Akkad šapāḫu ‘to scatter, disperse; confound, disrupt’ (CAD XVII/1: 3) || ‫ف‬ ‫ف ة‬ Ar ‫ ���س�� خ‬fasaxa ‘disjoindre, séparer, disloquer’ (DAF II 592); ���‫ ���س�� خ‬fasxah ‘por� tion, share, bit’ (Hava 1982: 562);

256

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

~ Lebanon infasax ‘se disloquer’ (M. Feghali 1938: 84) ~ Palest fasax ‘décharger (une bête de somme)’ (Denizeau 1960: 391); tfassax ‘absplittern’ (Bauer 1957: 7) ~ Oman fasax ‘ausziehen’ (Reinhardt 1894: 144) ~ Marazig f ǝsex, yafsax ‘enlever qq.ch.’ (Boris 1958: 464) ~ Morocco fsax ‘disjoindre, défaire; rompre (une association)’; fsīx ‘abolition, abrogation’ (Prémare X 101). 516

f-z-ʿ

pzḫ (MK) ‘verwirrt sein’ (Wb I 550); psḫ ‘be distraught; be dishevelled, disarrayed’ (Ember 1930: 85; Faulkner 1962: 94) || Ar ‫ �ف�ز‬fazaʿa ‘to fear’ (Hava 1982: ‫ع‬ 561); ~ Oman fzŭʿ ‘fürchten’ (Reinhardt 1894: 135) ~ E. Arabia bazzaʿ ‘frighten’ (Holes 2001: 40) ~ Egypt fazaʿ ‘to fear’; yitfazzaʿ ʿala ‘jemanden drohen’ (Spiro 1895: 454; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 353) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨fazaʿ⟩ ‘be scared or frightened’ (Corriente 1997: 398) ~ Malta ⟨beza’, jibza’⟩ ‘aver paura’ (Vassalli 1796: 29). 517

f-ḍ-x

pḥḏ (Med) ‘to cut up, cut open, sever; (intr) burst open (of cist)’; ‘aufschneiden (ein Geschwür, ein Tier)’ (Faulkner 1962: 93; Wb I 542) ~ Heb ‫ ָפ ַצח‬pāṣaḥ ‘cause to break or burst forth’ (BDB 822) ~ Aram pṣaḥ ‘to burst open’ (M. Jastrow 1886: ‫ف‬ 1204) || Ar ‫� �� خ‬ ‫ ����ض‬faḍaxa ‘zerschlagen, zertrümmern; sich öffnen (Geschwür)’;

�

‫ف‬

‘to break (anything hollow)’ (Wahrmund II 417; Hava 1982: 655); ‫�� ��ي�� خ‬ ‫ ����ض‬faḍīx � ‘exprimé par la pression (raisin)’ (DAF II 606); ~ Yemen faðax ‘aufspalten, öffnen’ (Behnstedt 2006: 931) ~ Sinai fað̣ ð̣ax ‘to split open’ (Stewart 1990: 215) ~ Najd mitfaḍḍax ‘ruptured, broken, rent’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 425) ~ Tunis faḍīx ‘l’huile produite par le commencement de la pression’ (Dozy II 273). 518

f-ṭ-s

pḏś (OK) ‘to stamp flat, flatten’; ‘(Gesicht, Nase) breitdrücken (eigentlich zertreten); zerstören, breitschlagen’ (Faulkner 1962: 96; Wb I 566; Hannig 1995: 299; Calice 1931: 37) ~ Heb ‫ ַּפ ִּטיׁש‬paṭṭīš ‘forge-hammer’ (BDB 809) ~ Copt ⲡⲱⲧⲥ ‫ف‬ ‘divide, split, crack’ (Crum 1939: 276b) || Ar ‫ ���ط��س‬faṭisa ‘to be flat-nosed’ (Hava

257

516. f-z- ʿ – 520. f-k-k

1982: 568); faṭasa ‘être aplati, s’élargir (par exemple à force d’être battu avec le ‫ف‬ ‫فّ ة‬ ‫ة‬ marteau)’; ��‫ ���ط��ي��س‬fiṭṭīsah/ ��‫ � ن����ط��ي��س‬finṭīsah ‘groin, et tout le devant de la tête du

‫أف‬

cochon, (par mépris): groin, museau, bouche, lèvre (de l’homme); ‫ � ���ط��س‬ʾafṭas, ‫ف‬ f ‫ ���ط��س�ا ء‬faṭsāʾ ‘qui a le nez plat et écrasé’ (DAF II 612); ~ Aleppo afṭaṣ, f faṭsa, pl fǝṭǝs ‘écrasé, épaté (: nez)’; ʾǝmfo afṭaṣ ‘il est camus’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 614) ~ Suxne ʾafṭaš ‘eine dicke Nase haben’ (Behnstedt 1994: 333) ~ Damascus mǝnxāro afṭaṣ ‘he has a flat nose’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 92) ~ Palest afṭaṣ ‘platt (Nase)’ (Bauer 1957: 232) ~ Egypt faṭas ‘depress, press down’; ʾil-lakma faṭasit manaxīru ‘the blow flattened his nose’; afṭas ‘flat, bashed-in’: manaxīr faṭsa ‘a boxer’s nose’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 662) ~ Marazig fṭaẓ ‘aplatir, écraser (des choses molles); s’irriter’ (Boris 1958: 466) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nifaṭṭas⟩ ‘to make flat-nosed’; ⟨afṭas⟩ ‘flat-nosed’ (Corriente 1997: 401). Cf. Kabyle (Berber) sfunnec ‘aplatir le nez’ (Dallet 1985: 12).

519

f-ʿ-y

‫أ‬

ḥfꜣ.w (Pyr) ‘snake, serpent’; ‘Schlange’; ḥfꜣ.t ‘crawling posture’ (Faulkner 1962:

168; DLE I 309; Wb III 72) ~ Copt ϩⲟϥ ‘serpent’ (Crum 1939: 740b) || Ar ‫ � ��ف��عى‬ʾafʿā,

‫أف‬

pl ٍ ‫ � ��ا‬ʾafāʿin ‘viper’ (Hava 1982: 569); ‫ع‬ ~ Rwala afāʿi ‘short snakes’ (Musil 1928: 191) ~ Oman faʿ(á), pl foʿyān ‘Schlange’ (Reinhardt 1894: 57, 73) ~ Palest afʿā, pl afāʿi ‘Otter’ (Bauer 1957: 225) ~ Tunis lǝfʿa ‘vipère’ (D. Cohen 1975: 185) ~ Djidjelli lǝfʿa ‘id.’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 327) ~ Cypriot Ar ʿafa, pl faʿi ‘snake, viper’ (Borg 2004: 372) ~ Marazig l-lifʿa, pl alfāʿ ‘Viper’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2005: 101) ~ Ḥassāniyya lvāʿ ‘vipère’ (TaineCheikh 1990: 154) ~ Malta ⟨lifgħa⟩ ‘vipera, serpe’ (Vassalli 1796: 439). 520

f-k-k

ّ ‫ف‬

Dem pk ‘trennen’ (DG 141) ~ Ḥar fek ‘to loose’ (Johnstone 1977: 167) || Ar ‫��ك‬ fakka ‘trennen, lösen (Bande)’; ‘dégager, defaire le bouton (pour deboutonner l’habit); séparer, disjoindre deux objets’ (Wahrmund II 427; DAF II 623); ~ Damascus fakk ‘to take apart’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 10) ~ Aleppo fakk ‘délier, dénouer, défaire, disjoindre’; fakfak ‘délier, défaire plusiers choses ou en plusiers fois (une chose)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 618) ~ Lebanon fakk ‘he undid’ (Nasr 1966: 170); fakk ‘dételer (une bête de trait)’; fakkak ‘dévisser, faire dévisser’ (Denizeau 1960: 396) ~ Palest fakk ‘losmachen’ (Bauer 1957: 196) ~ Kǝndērīb fakk ‘id.’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 106) ~ Arabia fukk er-rīj ‘loose the fasting spittle’

258

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

(Doughty 1888 II 595) ~ Hijaz fakk ‘to take apart’ (Omar 1975: 258) ~ Najd mafakk ‘Handgelenk’ (Socin 1901 IIi 300) ~ Yemen fakk ‘liberare’ (Rossi 1939: 216) ~ ʿAnazeh fakk ‘délivrer, sauver’ (Landberg 1940: 59) ~ Iraq fakk ‘to unharness’ (van Ess 1918: 245) ~ Rwala fakkeh ‘he liberated [him]’ (Musil 1928: 448) ~ Sinai fakāk ‘resolution, settlement, of a dispute’ (Stewart 1990: 216) ~ Egypt fakk ‘to untie, unscrew, take to pieces (a machine)’ (Spiro 1895: 462) ~ Tripoli (Libya) fakk ‘difendere, liberare’ (Griffini 1913: 83, 161) ~ Tunis fǝkk ‘il a disjoint, arraché’ (D. Cohen 1975: 99) ~ Djidjelli fekk ‘séparer, s’interposer’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 160) ~ Morocco tfekk ‘come apart’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 36) ~ Malta ⟨fekkek, ifekkek⟩ ‘dislogare, scompaginare’ (Vassalli 1796: 190). Cf. Ghomara (Berber) fekk ‘to rescue’ (Mourigh 2016: 386).

521

f-l-ǧ

plḏ (LE) ‘divide’ (Tait 1977: 114) ~ Dem plg ‘Wunde’; cf. Gk πληγη (DG 137) ~ Heb [‫ ] ָּפ ַלג‬pālag ‘split, divide’ (BDB 811) ~ Syr plag ‘to divide, part in two’ (CSD 446) ~ Akkad palāku ‘to divide off’ (Parpola 2007: 79) ~ Jibb flg ‘to split open’ ‫ف‬ (Johnstone 1981: 57) || Ar ‫ ���ل��ج‬falaǧa ‘fendre en deux, partager en deux, romper’;

�

‘paralysis; hemiplegia or paraplegia’ (DAF II 627; Lane 2437); ~ Najd falag ‘to hit on the head’ (Sowayan 1992: 288) ~ Ḥaḍramawt falaǧ ‘tunneling’ (Radionov 2007: 79) ~ Iraq faliǧ ‘palsy, paralysis’ (van Ess 1918: 192) ~ Palest fāliǧ ‘Lähmung durch Schlaganfall’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 56). 522

f-l-q

pa-l₂-ga ‘teilen’ (Helck 1971: 512) ~ Copt ⲡⲟⲗⲕ (Goodwin 1869: 146) ~ Akkad ‫ف‬ palāqu(m) ‘strike down; divide off’ (CDA 261, 147) || Ar �‫ ���ل ق‬falaqa ‘he split it, clave it, or divided it lengthwise’ (Lane 2441); ~ Yemen fallag ‘schneiden’; ‘spaccare la legna’ (Goitein 1934: 127; Rossi 1939: 238) ~ Aleppo falaq ‘fendre, partager en deux’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 621) ~ Iraq filaq ‘split’ (Clarity et al., 1964: 166) ~ Oman felaq ‘spalten’ (Reinhardt 1894: 144) ~ Lebanon falaq ‘frapper, battre’ (Denizeau 1960: 398) ~ Egypt falaq ‘to split into two parts’ (Spiro 1895: 460). Cf. Ghomara (Berber) felleq ‘to cut up in two pieces’ (Mourigh 2016: 387).

521. f-l-ǧ – 525. f-n-d

523

259

f-l-y

py/pi҆i ҆ (Med) ‘flea’; ‘der Floh’ (Faulkner 1962: 88; Ember 1930: 30; Wb I 502) ‫ف ة‬ ~ Copt ⲡⲏⲓ ‘leaper, flea’ (Crum 1939: 260b) || Ar ���‫ ��لاي‬filāyah ‘delousing of the head’ (Hava 1982: 575); ~ Aleppo falla ‘épouiller’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 620) ~ Palest falla ‘lausen’ (Bauer 1957: 42) ~ Egypt falla, yfalli ‘pick out vermin (from the head, dress, bed, etc.)’ (Spiro 1895: 465). 524

f-n-š

fnḏ (Pyr) ‘nose’; ‘Nase (als Ganzes von Mensch und Tier), Nase des Nilpferds, der mit der Nase d.h. mit einem langen Schnabel (“Nase”)’; fnḏy ‘Beaky (epithet of Thoth); fnḏ nb ‘jede Nase (= alle Leute)’ (Faulkner 1962: 98; Wb I 577–78; Hannig 2006: 966, 306; cf. DLE I 164) ~ Dem fnt ‘die Nase’ (DG 145) ~ Amh ‫ف‬ ‫ف‬ ‫ة‬ afǝnčʾa ‘nose’ (Kane 1990: 1358) || cf. Ar ��‫ � ن����ط��ي��س‬finṭīsah, pl ‫ � ن���ا ط��ي��س‬fanāṭīs ‘dog’s or wolf’s muzzle, pig’s snout’ (Hava 1982: 577); ~ Egypt manaxīr mifanniša ‘wide, flaring nostrils’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 111) ~ Morocco fneš ‘flat-nosed’ (Harrell 1966: 37) ~ Marazig feneš ‘mauvais mulet’ (Boris 1958: 472) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨finnīš, pl fanānīš⟩ ‘mule’ [cf. Kabyle afǝnniš ‘flat-nosed’] (Corriente 1997: 407) ~ Tunis fenneš ‘den Mund aufsperren’ (Stumme 1896: 176) ~ E. Arabia fansīn ‘flat-nosed’ (Qafisheh 1979: 249) ~ Najd fannūs/afnas ‘mit eingedrückter Nase’ (Socin 1901 III 300) ~ Iraq fansa ‘eine mit eingedrückter Nase’ (Meissner 1903, §26) ~ Mosul afnaṣ ‘a person with a thick nose’ (Al-Bakrī 1972: 50) ~ Djidjelli netfenzer ‘je saignerai du nez’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 89). 525

f-n-d

fnḏ (22nd Dyn.) ‘be angry with’; ‘verachten, mißachten, zürnen (eigentlich ‘schnauben’)’ (Wb I 577–78; IV: 115; Hannig 2006: 966, 306; cf. DLE I 164) || cf. ‫ف‬ Ar ‫ � ن���د‬fanida ‘donner un démenti à quelqu’un, le déclarer menteur’ (DAF II 637); ّ‫ف‬ ‫ � ن���د‬fannada ‘to contradict; to point out the faults of’; ‘to consider or to declare s.o. a doting foolish babbler’ (Hava 1982: 576; Ambros 2004: 216); ~ Oman fened ‘be unjustly partial towards’: fened ʿAli ʿanni ane ‘he unjustly preferred Ali to me’ (Brockett 1985: 173) ~ Egypt fannid ‘criticize’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 466) ~ Lebanon fandal ‘mettre dans la perplexité, dans l’embarras’ (Denizeau 1960: 400) ~ Ḥaḍramawt fannad ‘distinguer, spécifier’ (Landberg 1901: 678).

260 526

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

f-n-y

fn (MK) ‘be weak, infirm, faint’; ‘schwach sein’ (Ember 1930: 53; Faulkner 1962: ‫ف‬ ‫ف‬ 98; Wb I 576) || Ar ‫ � ن�ى‬fanā ‘to be worn out, to pine, to fade away’; �� faniya ‫ن�ي‬ ‘schwinden, verschwinden’ (Hava 1982: 577; Wahrmund II 436); ~ Yemen fānī ‘Greisin, alte Frau’ (Behnstedt 1987: 287) ~ Najd fāni ‘vast and empty; ceasing to exist’ (Kurpershoek 1994: 320) ~ Aleppo fǝni ‘périr’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 623) ~ Lebanon fene ‘s’épuiser’ (Feghali 1938: 448) ~ Palest tfāna ‘se dévouer, se consacrer à qqn, quelque chose’ (Denizeau 1960: 400) ~ Egypt infana ‘perish, cease to exist’ (Spiro 1895: 467) ~ Tunis fna ‘état de ce qui est passager’ (D. Cohen 1975: 156) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨fanā⟩ ‘perish’ (Corriente 1997: 407) ~ Ḥassāniyya vne ‘périr’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 112) ~ Malta ⟨fena, jifni⟩ ‘to wear out, weaken, waste’ (Aquilina 1987: 320). 527

f-h-d

mꜣfd.t (OK) ‘ein Katzenartiges Tier mit scharfen Krallen (Art Gepard?), eine Göttin; Pantherkatze’; ‘Mafdet, a cat-(?)goddess’ (Wb II 29; Brockelmann ‫ف‬ ‫ف‬ 1932: 105; Faulkner 1962: 103) || Ar ‫ ����ه�د‬fahd, pl ‫ ����هود‬fuhūd ‘Jagdpanther, Gepard’ (Wahrmund II 436); ~ Rwala fahad ‘panther’ (Musil 1928: 20, 549) ~ Damascus fahǝd, pl fhūd(e) ‘cheetah’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 40) ~ Palest fahid, pl fhūde ‘Pantherkatze, Leopard’ (Bauer 1957: 226, 193) ~ Egypt fahd, pl fhūd ‘panther’ (Spiro 1895: 467) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨fah(a)d, pl fuhūd⟩ ‘cheetah, panther’ (Corriente 1997: 407). 528

f-w-l

pr/pu-l (NK) ‘die Bohne’ (Wb I 531); pu₂=-r (n/pl) ‘beans’, pwr/pri҆҆ ‘bean’ (Hoch 1994: 118; DLE 1 48, 151) ~ Copt ⲫⲉⲗ ‘beans’ (Crum 1939: 514a) ~ Akkad pūlu ‘legumes’ (M. Cohen 2011: 123) ~ Heb ‫ פּוֹל‬pōl ‘bean’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 1141) || ‫ف‬ Ar ‫ �ول‬fūl ‘broad beans’ (Hava 1982: 580); ~ Aleppo fūl ‘des fèves, fève (en général)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 627) ~ Damascus fūl ‘broad bean’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 19) ~ Egypt fūl ‘id.’ (Spiro 1895: 468) ~ Douz fōla ‘eine Saubohne’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2014: 23) ~ Djidjelli fūla ‘fève’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 256) ~ Morocco ful, u.n. -a ‘beans’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 20) ~ Ḥassāniyya vūl ‘fève (coll.)’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 69).

261

526. f-n-y – 531. q-d-d

Q 529

q-b-r

qmꜣ (Pyr) ‘mourn’; ‘jemanden beklagen’; gmꜣ ‘mourning’ (Faulkner 1962: 278, 289; Wb V 37; Hannig 1995: 856) ~ Akkad qebēru ‘to bury’ (M. Cohen 2011: 29) ‫ق‬ ~ Heb ‫ ָק ַבר‬qābar ‘to bury’ (BDB 868) || Ar ‫ ���بر‬qabara ‘enterrer, ensevelir’ (DAF II 658); ~ Baghdad gabur ‘grave’ (Blanc 1964: 37) ~ Aleppo qabar ‘mettre au tombeau, enterrer’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 632, 243) ~ Damascus qabar ‘bury’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 31) ~ Lebanon qabber ‘enterrer’ (Feghali 1935: 765) ~ Qarṭmīn qabaṛ ‘begraben’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 324) ~ Egypt qabar ‘bury the dead’ (Spiro 1895: 434). 530

q-ḥ-ḥ

kḥkḥt (LE) ‘hacking of cough’; kḥkḥ ‘become old’; ‘altern; Altershusten’ (Faulkner 1962: 287; Wb V 138; Hannig 1995: 888) ~ Akkad gaḫḫa ‘fit of coughing and retching’ (CAD V 11) ~ Ge qāḥqǝḥa ‘murmur, whisper’ (Leslau 1987: 425) ‫�ق‬ � ~ Ḥar nekōḥ ‘to cough’ (Johnstone 1977: 158) || Ar ����‫ح��ق‬ qaḥqaḥa ‘to burst into

‫ح‬

laughter’; ‘produire avec le gosier un bruit que ressemble un rire violent’ (Hava 1982: 588; DAF II 680); ~ Iraq qaḥqaḥ ‘to cough repeatedly’ (Masliyah 2017: 76); gaḥḥa ‘Husten’ (Weißbach 1930: 339) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨niqaħqaħ⟩ ‘laugh boisterously’ (Corriente 1997: 415) ~ ʿAnazeh qaḥḥ ‘tousser’ (Landberg 1940: 63) ~ Palmyra qaḥḥ ‘id.’ (Cantineau 1934 II 3) ~ Aleppo qaḥḥ ‘faire entendre un bruit tel que qḥḥ en toussant; tousser’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 648) ~ Palest qaḥḥ ‘husten’ (Bauer 1957: 162) ~ Yemen kaḥḥ ‘tossire’ (Rossi 1939: 242) ~ Tripoli (Libya) kaḥḥāḥa ‘tosse’ (Griffini 1913: 289) ~ Tunis kaḥkaḥ ‘il a toussoté’ (D. Cohen 1975: 112) ~ U̅ lād Brāhīm kaḥḥ ‘tousser’ (W. Marçais 1908: 21) ~ Tangier kaḥkaḥ ‘rire aux éclats’ (W. Marçais 1911: 446) ~ Ḥassāniyya kaḥḥ ‘tousser’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 144) ~ Malta ⟨qaħqaħ, iqaħqaħ⟩ ‘tossire a secco’ (Vassalli 1796: 397). 531

q-d-d

(i) qd (Pyr) ‘Wesen, Art, Gestalt, Figur; nach Art von …, wie; in Ausdrücken für ganz, durchaus’; ‘form, nature, reputation, character, disposition, extent’; qd.t

262

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

‘Gewicht’ (Calice 1936: 211); mnḫ qd ‘vorzüg-lichen Charakters’ (Wb V 75–77; Faulkner 1962: 282; Hannig 1995: 340); ḥr-qd ‘ganz und gar, durchaus’; ‘completely, entirely, altogether, utterly’ [> Ar *ʿlqdd; see (ii) below] (Hannig 2006: 2536; Gardiner 1957: 596; Faulkner 1962: 282); qd mrr ‘a beloved character’ (Landgráfová 2011: 315, 317); Ḥry i҆b tꜣ-mi҆-qd.f ‘Der inmitten der ganzen Erde ist’ (Leitz 2002: 353) ~ Dem qdy ‘Wesen, Art, Gestalt’ (DG 554): m-qdy, ّ ‫ ق‬n qdy ‘like’‫ق‬ (Tait 1977: 114823) ~ Amh qǝdd ‘cut, style’ (Kane 1990: 823) || Ar ‫ ��د‬qadd, pl ‫��د ا د‬

‫ق‬

ّ ‫أق‬

‫أق ّ ة‬

qidād/‫ ��د ود‬qudūd/‫ � ��د‬ʾaqudd/� ‫ � ��د‬ʾaqiddah ‘Wuchs, Statur’ (Wahrmund II ‫ق‬ 462) ~ ‫ ��د ر‬qadr ‘valeur intrinsèque (d’une chose, d’un homme), pouvoir, moyen’ (DAF II 686); ~ Damascus qadd ‘Ausmass’; qaddi ‘von meinem Alter’; lā tkūn hal-qadd šakūk ‘don’t be so skeptical’; mū … qadd ‘not so … as’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 150; Stowasser & Ani 1964: 213, 216) ~ Kǝndērīb b-qadd ‘so groß wie’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 111) ~ Palest (ʿa)qadd-ma biqdar ‘soviel er vermag’ (Bauer 1957: 280) ~ Lebanon qaddu zġīr ‘petit de taille’ (Feghali 1938: 95) ~ E. Arabia gadd ‘amount, size’ (Holes 2001: 415) ~ Egypt qadd ‘size, form, quantity’ (Spiro 1895: 477) ~ Tunis qadd ‘taille’; qad-qad ‘quel est le plus grand?’ (D. Cohen 1975: 142, 240) ~ Marazig gadd gadd ‘genau’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2005: 129) ~ Djidjelli ʿla qedd … ʿla qedd ‘autant … autant’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 584) ~ Mzāb gadd ‘mesure, dimension’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 28) ~ Morocco qadd ‘enough’; ma-qedduš ‘they weren’t enough’; qedd-qedd ‘equal’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 64) ~ Malta qadd ‘statura’ (Vassalli 1796: 395). (ii) ḫy qd.k ‘how are you?’; ‘wie ist dein Befinden?’ (Faulkner 1962: 185; Hannig 1995: 585) > *šy qd.k > Ar *ašqadd/qaddayš; ~ Iraq šqad ‘how much?’ (Abu-Haidar 1991: 197) ~ S.E. Anatolia ašqad/ ašqade/ašqadd/ašqa ‘wie sehr, wie lange, viewiel, wie groß auch; soviel wie, sooft …’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 328) ~ Palmyra šqad ʿomṛok ‘quel âge as-tu?’ (Cantineau 1934 II 10) ~ Palest qaddēš ‘wieviel?’ (Bauer 1957: 363) ~ Tripoli (Libya) geddāš ‘quanto?’ (Griffini 1913: 232) ~ Tunis qaddāš ‘wie viel?’ (Stumme 1896: 140). 532

q-d-r

qd (Pyr) [< *qdr] ‘pot; use the potter’s wheel’; ‘Töpfe formen, bauen; der Topf’ (Faulkner 1962: 281; Wb V 72) ~ Copt ⲕϣⲧⲉ ‘turn, go round’ (Crum 1939: 124a) ~ Akkad qadurtu ‘small pot’ (Parpola 2007: 239) ~ Soq žaðér ‘pot’ (Leslau 1938: ‫ق‬ ‫ق‬ 26) || Ar ‫ ��د ر‬qidr, pl ‫ ��د ور‬qudūr ‘earthen pot, urn’; ‘chaudron, marmite en cuivre’ (Hava 1982: 591; DAF II 686);

532. q-d-r – 535. q-r-b

263

~ Sinai gidr ‘large cooking-pot’ (Stewart 1990: 219) ~ Rwala židr ‘large kettle’ (Musil 1928: 70) [< *gdr < *qdr] ~ Oman qador ‘irdener Kochtopf’ (Reinhardt 1894: 43) ~ Iraq jidr ‘kettle’ (van Ess 1918: 166) ~ Yemen gidir, pl gudūr ‘marmitta’ (Rossi 1939: 155) ~ E. Arabia ǧidir ‘pot’ (Johnstone 1967: 34) ~ Kǝndērīb qǝdre ‘Tontopf’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 111) ~ Tangier qodra, pl qudūr ‘marmite’ (W. Marçais 1911: 422) ~ Ḥassāniyya gǝdra, pl gdūr ‘large round earthenware water jar’ (Mali; Heath 2004: 65). 533

q-d-s

qdš (NK) ‘syrische Göttin’ (Wb V 82) ~ Akkad quddušu ‘to consecrate’ (CAD XIII ‫ق‬ 46) ~ Heb ‫ ָקדֹוׁש‬qādōš ‘sacred, holy’ (BDB 872) || Ar ‫ ��د ��س‬quds/qudus ‘holiness’ (Hava 1982: 591); ~ Aleppo qaddīs ‘saint’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 642) ~ Palest qadāse ‘Heiligkeit’ (Bauer 151) ~ Egypt quds ‘holiness’ (Spiro 1895: 478) ~ Malta ⟨qdusija⟩ ‘santità, beatitudine’ (Vassalli 1796: 417). 534

q-d-m

qdm (MK) ‘das Ostland’ (Wb V 82) ~ Heb ‫ ִק ְד ָמה‬qidmāh ‘eastwards’ (BDB 870) || ‫ق‬ Ar ‫ ��د‬qudm ‘le devant, la première ligne’ (DAF II 690); ‫م‬ ~ Aleppo qǝddām ‘en avant, devant’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 643) ~ Kǝndērīb qǝddām ‘vor (örtlich)’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 112) ~ Palest quddām ‘in front of’ (Spiro 1895: 479). 535

q-r-b

gꜣb ‘basket’ (Janssen 1975: 357) ~ Ge gǝrāb ‘leather bag’ (Leslau 1987: 660) || ‫ق ة‬ Ar ��‫ �ر�ب‬qirbah ‘grande outre’ (DAF II 704); cf. 92. ǧ-r-b; ~ Ḥaḍramawt qirbah ‘waterskin’ (Radionov 2007: 103) ~ Palest qirbe, pl qirab ‘Schlauch (mittelgross für Wasser)’ (Bauer 1957: 258) ~ Negev ǧṛāb ‘goatskin’ (Henkin 2010: 264) ~ Iraq girba, pl girab ‘water skin; water bag made of canvas; clay water jug’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 386) ~ qerrāba ‘flask’ (Blanc 1964: 20) ~ Rwala ǵirbah, pl grab ‘goatskin (holding 50 litres)’ (Musil 1928: 71) ~ Petra ǧerāb ‘ein Schlauch für Butterschmalz oder Mehl’ (Musil 1908: 138) ~ Sinai girbih, pl ágṛab ‘waterskin’ (de Jong 2011: 29, 53) ~ Oman qarbe, pl qrāb ‘Schlauch’ (Reinhardt 1894: 70) ~ Yemen girbeh, pl girab ‘otro di pelle; ghirba’

264

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

(Rossi 1939: 224, 211); ġarbin ‘Wasserschlauch’ (Behnstedt 1996: 895) ~ Tunis gerba ‘id.’ (Stumme 1896: 45) ~ Sidi Bel Abbès gerba, pl greb ‘outre (peau de bouc ou de chèvre)’ (Madouni-La Peyre 2003: 404) ~ Algiers gǝrba ‘outre’ (M. Cohen 1912: 166) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨qi/arbah, pl qirab⟩ ‘waterskin’ (Corriente 1997: 419). 536

q-r-d

qnd (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘baboon; be angry, furious; angry man’; ‘wütend werden, in Zorn geraten, zürnen (vom Pavian gebraucht)’ (Ember 1930: 97; Faulkner ‫ق‬ ‫ق‬ 1962: 280; Wb V 579; Allen 2013: 49) || Ar ‫ � ْرد‬qird, pl ‫ �رود‬qurūd ‘baboon, ape; the devil’ (Hava 1982: 597); ~ Sinai gird, pl grūd ‘monkey’ (Stewart 1990: 222) ~ Aleppo qird, pl eqrūd ‘homme ou enfant actif, dégourdi, malin, demon souterrain, diable, mauvais génie’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 646) ~ Damascus qǝrǝd, pl qrūd(e) ‘ape’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 10) ~ Iraq girid ‘Affe’ (Weißbach 1930: 331) ~ Lebanon qird yāxdek ‘que le diable t’emporte!’; qām el-qird ‘il s’est mis dans une violente colère’ (Denizeau 1960: 411) ~ Palest qird, pl eqrūd ‘Affe’ (Bauer 1957: 10) ~ Egypt qird, pl qurūd ‘monkey’ (Spiro 1895: 482) ~ Tunis qaṛḍ ‘singe’ (D. Cohen 1975: 141) ~ Marazig girǝd ‘Affe’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2005: 63) ~ Djidjelli qerd ‘singe’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 246) ~ Morocco qeṛd, pl qṛuda ‘ape’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 11) ~ Al-Andalus qard ‘monkey (as metaphor of ill luck)’ (Corriente 1997: 421). 537

q-r-r

qrr (LE) ‘frog’; ‘der Frosch’ (Ember 1930: 97; Wb V 61; Hannig 1995: 863) ~ Dem qrr/qll ‘der Frosch’ (DG 544, 546) ~ Copt ⲕⲣⲟⲩⲣ ‘frog’ (Crum 1939: 117a) || Ugar qr ‘noise, murmur’ (DUL 707) || Aram ‫‘ �ַק�ְר�ַק ר‬cackle, quack; cry out’ (M. Jastrow ‫ق‬ 1886: 1427) || Ar ‫ � ّر‬qirr ‘Laubfrosch’; ‘grenouille’ (Wahrmund II 470; DAF II 699); ‫قق‬ ‫ �ر�ر‬qarqara ‘coo, grumble’ (Hava 1982: 595); ~ Oman qorra, pl qrīr ‘Frosch’ (Reinhardt 1894: 74) ~ S.E. Anatolia qaṛṛ ‘Geräuschlaut’; qaṛqōra ‘Rassel’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 331) ~ Baghdad ʿaqrōqa ‘frog’ (Blanc 1964: 86) ~ Khawētna gargar ‘schwatzen’ (Talay 1999: 144) ~ Lebanon qerr ‘grenouille’; qarr ‘coasser’ (Feghali 1938: 814) ~ Egypt yiqarqar ‘quacken (Frosch)’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 374); ǧaṛōṛa ‘Frosch’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1987: 60) ~ Mzāb gǝrr ‘il a roucoulé (pigeon)’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 128) ~ Sudan karkār ‘growl of camel’ (LDA 414) ~ Tunis gaṛgaṛ ‘grogner’ (D. Cohen 1975: 31) ~ Djidjelli qerqer ‘faire du bruit en roulant’ (Ph. Marçais

265

536. q-r-d – 539. q-r-ṣ

1956: 283) ~ Morocco qerqer ‘croak’ (Harrell 1966: 116) ~ Malta ⟨gerger, igerger⟩ ‘far romore confuso’ (Vassalli 1796: 309). 538

q-r-š

539

q-r-ṣ

‫ق‬

Dem qrš ‘zerbrechen’ (DG 545) || Ar ���‫ �رش‬qaraša ‘knirschen (mit den Zähnen) knabbern, zerkauen; abschneiden, benagen’ (Wahrmund II 475); (cf. q-r-m-š); ~ Aleppo qaraš ‘croquer (une laitue, une gimblette)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 648) ~ Palest qaraš/qarqaš ‘knirschen beim Essen von Trockenem, Hartem’; qarraš, iqarreš ‘faire croquer, faire broyer (avec les dents)’ (Bauer 1957: 176, 51; Denizeau 1960: 411).

kršt (LE) ‘sorte de pain’; ‘Art Gebäck’ (Lambert 1925: 132; Wb V 82) ~ Akkad karāṣu ‘pinch off, break off, nip’ (Parpola 2007: 47) ~ Copt ⲕⲱⲣϫ ‘cut off, break off’; ⲕⲣⲟⲩϫ ‘a baked or fried cake’ (Crum 1939: 119a, b) ~ Heb ‫ �ָק�ַר ץ‬qāraṣ ‘cut dough’ (BDB 902) ~ Amh qwärräsä ‘tear off a piece of ǝnǧara-bread to eat’ ‫ق‬ (Kane 1990:‫ أ‬722) ~ Mah qǝrūṣ ‘to nip’ (Johnstone 1987: 236) || Ar ‫ �ر�ص‬qurṣ, n.un. ‫ق‬ ‫ق‬ ‫ق‬ ‫ة‬ -a, pl ‫ � �را �ص‬ʾaqrāṣ/��‫ �ر�ص‬qiraṣah/‫ �را �ص‬qirāṣ ‘round cake of bread’ (Hava 1982: 598; cf. Dozy II 336); ~ Najd girṣ ‘flat loaf of unleavened bread made of flour, water and salt’; ‘das ungesauerte Brot in Fladen’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 429; Hess 1938: 113) ~ Yemen gurṣ ‘pane in generale’ (Rossi 1939: 139); gurṣoh ‘sein Laib Brot’ (Goitein 1934: 109) ~ Sinai gurṣ ‘a small round of bread baked under the embers of a fire; a type of bread’ (Stewart 1990: 17, 222) ~ Aleppo qǝrṣ, pl qrāṣ ‘petite galette’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 648) ~ Çukurova qirṣ, pl qrūṣ ‘Teigklumpen, den man dann zu Fladen ausrollt’ (Procházka 2002: 177) ~ Lebanon qǝrṣ (pl qrāṣ) bayḍ ‘petit pain dont la farine est pétrie avec un œuf, et qui est tout rond’ (M. & J. Feghali 1978: 52, fn 1) ~ Palest qurṣ, pl (a)qrāṣ ‘Brotfladen vom ṣāj- und mälleBrot; Scheibe’; qurṣa, pl qrāṣ ‘Klößchen’ (Bauer 1957: 67, 255, 175, 160), qur(u)ṣ, pl iqrāṣ ‘Aschenbrot’ (Bīr Zēt; Schmidt & Kahle 1918 I 294), ‘gesäurte oder ungesäuerte Kuchen’ (Dalman VI 61) ~ Tunis qoṛṣa ‘pain rond’ (D. Cohen 1975: 147) ~ Mosul qōṣa, pl qǝraṣ ‘runder Brotlaib’ (O. Jastrow 1979: 72) ~ Iraq gurṣa, pl guraṣ ‘flat loaf (of bread)’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 386) ~ ʿAqra qōṣa, pl qǝwaṣ ‘kleinerer, dickerer Fladen’ (O. Jastrow 1990: 396) [< qrṣ].

266 540

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

q-r-ʿ

‫ق‬

qrʿ (19th Dyn.) ‘der Schild’ (Wb V 59) || Ar ‫ �ر‬qaraʿa to strike’ (Hava 1982: 599); ‫ع‬ ~ Lebanon maqrēʿa ‘fouet’ (M. Feghali 1933: 1) ~ Najd garaʿ ‘bespringen’ (Hess 1938: 83) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨naqraʿ, qaraʿt⟩ ‘to hit, to knock at the door’ (Corriente 1997: 423). 541

q-r-f¹

krp (Amarna) ‘scrape out (inscription); efface’; ‘eine Inschrift zu tilgen’ (Faulkner 1962: 288; DLE II 175; Wb V 135) ~ Dem qrp ‘enthüllen’ (DG 543) ~ Heb ‫ ָק ַלף‬qālap ‘scrape, peel, pare’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 1381) ~ Ge qarafa ‘peel off’ (Leslau 1987: ‫ق ف‬ 441) || Ar ��‫ �ر‬qarafa ‘entrinden, abhäuten, bloslegen (Geschwür)’; ‘enlever l’écaille, la croûte, par exemple, de la plaie’; ‘peel off (fruit)’ (Wahrmund II 479; DAF II 720; Hava 1982: 600); ~ Aleppo qaraf ‘rompre le bout de (qqe)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 651) ~ Diyarbakır qaṛaf ‘brechen, abbrechen’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 335) ~ Malta ⟨giref, jigref⟩ ‘to scratch’ (Aquilina 1987: 437). 542

q-r-f²

qrf.t/qrff (Med) ‘chest, bag’; ‘Beutel (aus Leinen) für Medikamente und für Gold, Silber, etc.’ (Faulkner 1962: 280; DLE II 156; Wb V 60) ~ Dem qrft ‘Beutel’ (DG 411, 544) ~ Akkad karpu ‘pot, earthenware container’ (CAD VIII 221) ~ Sab ‫ق ف‬ krf ‘basin, cistern’ (Beeston et al., 1982: 79) || Ar ��‫ �ر‬qarf ‘larder for meat’ (Hava 1982: 600); ~ Najd garf, pl grūf ‘Schlauch aus Kamelleder’ (Hess 1938: 119) ~ Daθīna qārūfa ‘seau en métal pour traire’ (GD 2483) ~ Oman qfīr, pl qfor ‘Korb’ (Reinhardt 1894: 71) ~ Rwala qarf, pl qarāf ‘small leather cannister for coffee beans’ ~ Kǝndērīb qaffōra ‘Korb’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 116) ~ Palest qafīr, pl qufrān ‘Korb (groß, aus Bast, konisch)’ (Bauer 1957: 180) ~ Marazig garfa, pl grāf ‘sac en peau de chameau ou de mouflon’ (Boris 1958: 491). 543

q-r-q

grg/gng (OK) ‘falsehood, lie’; ‘Lügen, Unwahrheit, Unrecht’; grg ‘snare wildfowl’; grgy ‘liar’; ‘Lügner’; grg.t ‘Lügnerin, Frevlerin’; mgrg ‘der Lügner (als Bezeichnung des Seth)’ (Ember 1930: 74; Hannig 2003: 1372; Faulkner 1962:

540. q-r- ʿ – 546. q-r-m

‫قق‬

267

290, 291; Wb V 189, 177; II 164; Schipper 2005: 99) || Ar �‫ �ر‬qaraqa ‘tromper quelqu’un’ (DAF II 722); ~ Malta ⟨qerq⟩ ‘inganno, frode’ (Vassalli 1796: 419) ~ Lebanon qarraq ‘taquiner, se moquer de, railler, plaisanter’ (Denizeau 1960: 414) ~ Egypt qarraq ‘say witty vulgar things with play on words’ (Spiro 1895: 484). 544

q-r-q-r¹

qꜣqꜣw (OK) ‘Art Schiff’; ‘bateau’ (Calice 1936: 104; Vycichl 1972: 218); qr (LE) ‘Art Lastschiffe für Korn’ (Wb V 21) ~ qrr ‘ship’; qwrw ‘ships’ (DLE II 157, 377); qꜣqꜣ (pWestcar) ‘Flussschiff’ (Lepper 2008: 44) ~ Dem qrj ‘Art Schiff’ (DG 543) || ‫قق‬ ‫ق ق‬ Ar ‫ �ر�ور‬qurqūr, pl ‫ �را �ي��ر‬qarāqīr ‘vaisseau long et grand’ (DAF II 723); ~ Al-Andalus ⟨qurqūrah, pl qarāqir⟩ ‘sorte de vaisseau marchand qui parfois etait d’une grandeur enorme’ (Dozy II 335). 545

q-r-q-r²

gꜣgꜣ (LE) ‘cackle’; ‘schnattern (der Gans)’ (Faulkner 1962: 288; DLE II 185; Wb V 157; Caminos 1954: 596; Hannig 1995: 895); cf. Ancient Gk κροκκάω ‘cluck (of birds)’ (GEL 997) ~ Aram ‫‘ ַק ְר ַקר‬cackle, quack; cry out’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 1427) ‫قق‬ || Ar ‫ �ر�ر‬qarqara ‘gémir, roucouler (se dit des pigeons); grogner’ (DAF II 722); ~ N. Yemen gurrārah ‘Frosch’ (Behnstedt 1987: 289) ~ Aleppo qarqar ‘faire entendre un gargouillement; gargouiller (ventre)’; qarqūr, pl qaraqīr ‘vieux coq; agneau’; qruqqa ‘poule qui glousse’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 653, 652) ~ Iraq karkar ‘burst into loud laughter’ (Masliyah 2017: 72) ~ Lebanon qarqar, yqarqar ‘se plaindre, grommeler, murmurer’ (Denizeau 1960: 414) ~ Egypt yikirkēr ‘kollern (Truthahn)’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1999: 396) ~ Morocco qerqer ‘croak’ (Harrell 1966: 116) ~ Djidjelli qeṛqāṛa ‘qui glousse, qui fait du bruit en roulant’; afqaṛqāṛ ‘crapaud’; agṛo ‘grenouille’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 31, 313) ~ Malta ⟨gerger, igerger⟩ ‘grugnire, far romore confuso’; ⟨qarqar, jqarqar⟩ ‘sonum cum murmure edit venter’ (Vassalli 1796: 309). 546

q-r-m

ka=ma=-r (LE) [*garma] ‘tusks, ivory’ (Hoch 1994: 321) ~ Heb ‫ גֶ ֶרם‬gerem ‘bone’ ~ Aram gǝram ‘bone, stripped bare (skeleton, bone)’ (BDB 175; M. Jastrow 1886: ‫ق‬ 270) || Ar ‫ �ر‬qarama ‘to gnaw’ (Hava 1982: 601);

‫م‬

268

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

~ Aleppo qaram ‘couper avec les dents’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 643) ~ Iraq garmaṭ ‘nibble, munch, chew’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 388) ~ Lebanon gargam ‘dépouiller un os de sa viande’ (Denizeau 1960: 78) ~ Egypt ǧarǧam ‘be mean, stingy’ (Spiro 1895: 484) ~ Malta ⟨gerrem, igerrem⟩ ‘to gnaw’ (Aquilina 1987: 432). 547

q-r-m-š

548

q-s-m

‫ق‬

‫ � � ش‬qarmaša ṯꜣmś (LE) [< *črmš < *krmš] ‘essen, verzehren’ (Wb V 355) || Ar ���‫م‬ ‫ر‬ ‘to eat anything dry’ (Hava 1982: 601); ~ Aleppo qarmaš, yqarmeš ‘manger qqe de dur, de croquant’ (Barthélemy 1935–54: 653) ~ Egypt qaraš/qarmiš ‘eat (crisp or dry bread, etc.)’ (Spiro 1895: 482) ~ Sfax garmiš ‘id.’ (Zwari & Sharfi 1998: 576) ~ Malta ⟨qarmeċ, iqarmeċ⟩ ‘scrosciare il cibo’ (Vassalli 1796: 408).

kṯm (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘Prahlereien’; ‘divination, omen’ (Wb V 148; Hoch 1994: ‫ق ة‬ 339) ~ Heb ‫ ֶק ֶסם‬qesem ‘divination’ (BDB 890) || Ar ��‫ ���س���م‬qismah ‘Portion, Loos, Geschick’ (Wahrmund II 489); ~ Damascus qisme ‘fate’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 87) ~ Palest qisme ‘Fatum’ (Bauer 1957: 108); qasam ‘conjuration’ (Denizeau 1960: 418) ~ Egypt qisma ‘fate’ (Spiro 1895: 486) ~ Najd magsūm, pl magāsīm ‘fated’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 445) ~ Yemen magsūm ‘destino’ (Rossi 1939: 204). 549

q-š-š

gꜣš (LE) ‘Schilfrohr (als Pflanze die im Wasser wächst; als Material zu Körben, auch beim Bauen verwendet)’ (Erman 1904: 139; Wb V 156) ~ Dem gš ‘Rohr, Schilf’ (DG 68) ~ Copt ⲕⲁϣ ‘reed, stalk, pen’; ‘Schilfrohr, Schreibrohr, Pfahl’ (Crum 1939: 130a; Kosack 2013: 111)] ~ Heb ‫ ַקׁש‬qaš(š) ‘stubble, chaff’ (BDB 905) ّ ‫ق‬ || Ar ���‫ � ش‬qašš ‘stubble, straw, rush’ (Hava 1982: 606); ~ Lebanon qǝšš ‘kind of rush for weaving mats, wicker chairs and tables’ (Wehr 1979: 894) ~ Palest qašš samār ‘joncs’ (Denizeau 1960: 418; cf. Dalman VI 164) ~ Najd gašših ‘straw’ (Sowayan 1992: 290) ~ Aleppo qašš ‘brins de paille’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 658) ~ Damascus qašš ‘straw’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 227) ~ Egypt gašš ‘Stroh’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1985: 117).

269

547. q-r-m-š – 552. q-ṭ-f

550

q-ṣ-ṣ

i҆qś ‘abschneiden’ (Wb I 138; Calice 1936: 24); cf. Heb [‫* ] ָק ַצץ‬qāṣaṣ ‘cut off’ (BDB 893) || Akkad kaṣāṣu ‘cut short, trim’ (Parpola 2007: 48); gaṣṣu ‘cut, hewn’ ّ ‫ق‬ (M. Cohen 2011: 53) || Ar ‫ ����ص‬qaṣṣa ‘cut off, clip’ (Hava 1982: 607); ~ Aleppo qaṣṣ ‘couper avec des ciseaux’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 660) ~ Palest qaṣṣ ‘abschneiden mit der Schere’ (Bauer 1957: 7) ~ Tunis qaṣṣ ‘il a coupé’ (D. Cohen 1975: 51). 551

q-ṭ-ʿ

‫ق‬

qa=ḏa=ḥa (LE) ‘cut off, break’ (Hoch 1994: 312) || Ar ‫ �����ط‬qaṭaʿa ‘cut; intercept; ‫ع‬ cross (river), etc.’ (Hava 1982: 614); ~ Aleppo qaṭaʿ ‘couper, en deux seulement; trancher; faire cesser; traverser’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 667) ~ S.E. Anatolia qaṭaʿ ‘schneiden, abschneiden, durchschneiden’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 340) ~ Egypt qaṭaʿ ‘cut’ (Spiro 1895: 493). 552

q-ṭ-f

qḏf (MK) ‘gather flowers, sayings’; ‘abpflücken: bildlich vom Sammeln von Sprüchen; abreißen (Pflanzen); Nachlese’ (Faulkner 1962: 282; Wb V 81; Hannig 1995: 869) ~ Copt ⲕⲱⲧϥ ‘gather (corn, fruit, wood)’ (Crum 1939: 129b) ~ Akkad qatāpu ‘pluck, pick’ (CAD XIII 164) ~ Heb ‫ ָק ַטף‬qāṭap ‘to pluck off’ (BDB 882) ~ Amh qäṭṭäfä ‘pick (flowers, leaves, fruit)’ (Kane 1990: 841) ~ Ge qaṭafa ‘pick, ‫ق ف‬ pluck’ (Leslau 1987: 453) || Ar ���‫ ���ط‬qaṭafa ‘gather (grapes); pluck (fruit)’; ‘cuellir, enlever le raisin sur un cep de vigne; déchirer quelque chose avec les ongles’ (Hava 1982: 616; DAF II 772); ~ Aleppo qaṭaf ‘ceuillir (des fleurs, des fruits)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 670) ~ Damascus qaṭaf ‘pick (fruit)’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 172) ~ Arbǝl qaṭaf ‘pflücken’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 341) ~ Palest qaṭaf ‘id.’ (Bauer 1957: 230) ~ Egypt qaṭaf ‘pluck (flowers or fruits)’ (Spiro 1895: 494) ~ Malta ⟨qartaf, jqartaf⟩ ‘tagliar le cime, sfiorare’ (Vassalli 1796: 406).

270 553

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

q-ṭ-n

Dem gtn/gdn ‘ein Gewand’ (DG 594) ~ Akkad kitinnû ‘linen’ (CAD VIII 465) ْ‫ق‬ ~ Heb ‫ ְכתֹנֶ ת‬kǝtōnet ‘coat’ (BDB 509) || Ar �‫ ���ط� ن‬quṭn ‘coton, vêtement en étoffe de coton’ (DAF II 774); ~ Aleppo qǝṭǝn ‘coton’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 670) ~ Kǝndērīb qǝṭǝn ‘Baumvolle’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 116) ~ Palest quṭun ‘id.’ (Bauer 1957: 42) ~ Egypt quṭn ‘cotton’ (Spiro 1895: 495) ~ Djidjelli qṭan ‘coton’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 85). 554

q-f-z

ḏpq (LE) ‘Tänzer’ (Wb V 568; Hoch 1994: 385) ~ Heb ‫ ָק ַפץ‬qāpaṣ ‘(Pi.) hop, spring’ ‫ق‬ (BDB 891) || Ar ‫ �����ف�ز‬qafaza ‘to spring (gazelle)’; qafiṣa ‘be lively, nimble’ (Hava 1982: 620); ~ Aleppo qafaz ʿala ‘couvrir, saillir (une femelle: chien, chat)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 672) ~ Damascus qafaz ‘spring’; qamze/qavze ‘leap (n)’ (Stowasser & Ani 221: 135) ~ Khawētna gēmaz ‘springen’ (Talay 1999: 31) ~ Kǝndērīb qafaz ‘springen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 116) ~ Oman gemez ‘überspringen’ (Reinhardt 1894: 144) ~ Palest qafaz ʿan ‘springen über’ (Bauer 1957: 284) ~ Egypt qafaz ʿala ‘jump, spring, skip’; itqammiz ‘skip about’ (Spiro 1895: 495; 501) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨naqfaz, qafazt⟩ ‘to jump or hop’ (Corriente 1997: 435) ~ Malta ⟨qabbież⟩ ‘ballerino’ (Vassalli 1796: 390). 555

q-l-b

qnb (OK) ‘bend, bow itself; subjugate’ (Faulkner 1962: 280); qꜣb (Med) ‘zusammenfalten; verdoppeln (neben verdreifachen, vervierfachen; auch in dem Ausdruck: zehnfältig); Windung, Krümmung’; ‘fold over, double over’ (Erman 1904: 132; Wb V 8; Rössler 1971: 304; Faulkner 1962: 275, 280; van der Plas & Borghouts 1998: 287): qꜣb–n.f-rʿ ‘möge Re ihm (die Lebenszeit?) verdoppeln!’ ‫ق‬ (Ranke 1935: 45) ~ Copt ⲕⲱⲃ ‘be doubled’ (Crum 1939: 98b) || Ar �‫ ��ل� ب‬qalaba ‘tourner, retourner (un objet dans un sens ou dans un autre, ou dans tous les sens)’ (DAF II 796); ~ Sinai tigāḷabaw ‘each tried to throw the other to the ground’ (Stewart 1990: 220) ~ Iraq qilab ‘change’; giḷab ‘turn, turn over’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 376, 393) ~ Aleppo qalab ‘tourner dans l’autre sens; se renverser (: voiture); chavirer (: barque)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 674) ~ Palest qalab ‘umwenden’ (Bauer 1957:

271

553. q-ṭ-n – 558. q-l- ʿ¹

315) ~ Egypt qalab ‘to turn over, upset, overturn’ (Spiro 1895: 497) ~ Tunis aqlǝb ‘retourne!’ (D. Cohen 1975: 98).

The following entries exemplify grammaticalization of Old Egyptian noun qꜣb and of its Arabic cognates.

m-qꜣb ‘in the midst of’; ‘im Inneren von …; innerhalb von …’ (Faulkner 1962: 275; Wb V 10); m-qb ‘midst’ (DLE II 147); m-qꜣb ‘à l’intérieur de; parmi’ (Herbin 1994: 531) ~ Akkad qerbuْ‘middle’ (M. Cohen 2011: 134) ~ Heb ‫‘ ֶק ֶרב‬inward part, ‫ق‬ ‫ق‬ midst’ (BDB 899) || Ar �‫ ���ل� ب‬qalb, pl �‫ ���لو ب‬qulūb ‘heart’ (Hava 1982: 323); ~ Egypt fi qalb bētoh ‘inside his house’ (Spiro 1895: 498) ~ Mharde b-qalb ‘in der Mitte von, innerhalb von’ (Yoseph 2012: 62) ~ Lebanon bel-qelb ‘à l’envers’ (Feghali 1938: 409) ~ Bišmizzīn mʿabba b-ʾalb hal-kyās ‘die in die Tuchen gefüllt wird’ (Jiha 1964: 80) ~ Malta ⟨qalb⟩ ‘tra, fra, infra’ (Vassalli 1796: 399); ⟨bilmaqlub⟩ ‘upside down’ (own obs.). 556

q-l-x

ّ‫ق‬ 1939: 106b) || Ar ‫ ���ل�� خ‬qallaxa ‘to lash with a whip’; ‘heftig peitschen’ (Hava 1982:

Dem qlẖ ‘schlagen, klopfen’ (DG 547) ~ Copt ⲕⲱⲗϩ ‘to strike, knock’ (Crum

�

623; Wahrmund II 518); ~ Lebanon qalḥan ‘couper les branches d’un arbre’ (Denizeau 1960: 429). 557

q-l-s

qi҆s/qi҆ś/qꜣś (Med) ‘to vomit’; ‘sich erbrechen, das Erbrechen’ (Faulkner 1962: ‫ق‬ 276; Wb V 17; Ember 1930: 18) || Ar ‫ ���ل��س‬qalasa ‘cracher ou vomir, jeter quelque

ْ‫ق‬

chose hors de la bouche en une seule fois’; ‫ ���ل��س‬qals ‘vomitus’ (DAF II 800; Wahrmund II 520); ~ Lebanon qalas ‘to remove the crust of a wound’ (Frayha 1973: 143) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨alqalasu⟩ ‘vomit’ (Corriente 1997: 438). 558

ّ ‫ع‬

q-l-ʿ¹

qꜣʿ (MK) ‘vomit’; ‘ausspeien, sich erbrechen’ (Faulkner 1962: 275; Wb V 7) ||

‫ق‬ Ar ‫ ���ل‬qallaʿa ‘arracher une chose de sa place’ (DAF II 802);

~ Malta ⟨qalla’, iqalla’⟩ ‘cause to vomit’ (Aquilina 1987: 648) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨qallaʿ⟩ ‘dégoûter, soulever le cœur’ (Dozy II 396).

272 559

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

q-l-ʿ²

qa=ra=ʿa (LE) ‘shield’ [*qilʿa] (Hoch 1994: 298) ~ Heb ‫ ֶק ַלע‬qelaʿ ‘curtain’ (BDB ‫ق ة‬ 887) || Ar ��‫ ���ل�ع‬qalʿah ‘sail of a ship’ (Hava 1982: 625); ~ Palest qalaʿ, pl qulūʿ ‘Segel’ (Bauer 1957: 271) ~ Egypt qalaʿ, pl qulūʿ ‘sail’ (Spiro 1895: 499); gilʿa ‘Segel’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 392). 560

q-l-q-s

Copt ⲕⲟⲣⲕⲁⲥⲓ ‘colocasia, arum aegyptiacum’ (Parthey 1844: 69) || Gk κολοκάσιον/ κολοκασία ‘the root of κύαµος Αἰγύπτιος, the Egyptian bean, Nelumbium specio‫ق‬ sum’ (GEL 1003) || Ar ‫ ���قل���ا ��س‬qulqās ‘colocasia’ (Hava 1982: 625); ~ Cypriot Ar korkás, pl krekís ‘kind of potato; taro, colocasia esculenta’ (Borg 2004: 394) ~ Egypt qulqās ‘taro’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 715) ~ Aleppo qǝlqāz ‘colocasia (plante médicinale) [en Syrie moyenne qǝlqās, d’ou qǝlqās ǝfranji ‘pomme de terre’]’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 678) ~ Lebanon qelqās (coll.) ‘pommes de terre’ (M. Feghali 1938: 818). 561

q-l-l¹

qꜣj ‘tall, high, be high’ (Faulkner 1962: 275); qꜣj.tّ ‘hochgelegenes Land, Hügel’ ‫ق‬ (Wb V 6); qꜣ ‘être élevé’ (Herbin 1994: 547) || Ar ‫ ��ل‬qalla ‘to lift, raise’ (Hava 1982: ّ‫�قن‬ ‫ق‬ ‫ة‬ ‫ن‬ 622); ���� qunnah, pl �‫ ��� ن‬qunan ‘Bergspitze’ (Wahrmund II 532); ~ Ḥaḍramawt qall/qann ‘monter’ (Landberg 1901: 1763) ~ N. Yemen Gullit Masʿūd ‘Name eines Berges’ (Behnstedt 1987: 292) ~ Najd igtall ‘to rise up’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 448) ~ Rwala qenna ‘an isolated conical hill on top of which a beacon is lit whenever the enemy means to attack herds grazing far from the camp’ (Musil 1928: 680) ~ Ḥassāniyya gǝnniyye, pl gnāni ‘sommet’ (TaineCheikh 1990: 137) ~ Aleppo qǝlla, pl qǝlal ‘tour fortifiée’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 678) ~ Egypt gall ‘hochheben’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 393) ~ Marazig gaḷḷ ‘soulever, emporter’ (Boris 1958: 505). 562

q-l-l²

gꜣw (Pyr) ‘be narrow, constricted; lack, be lacking, deprive’; ‘eng sein, beengt sein; Mangel, Not’; gꜣj (LE) ‘jemanden schmähen; schmähende Rede’; n gꜣw

273

559. q-l- ʿ² – 564. q-m-ḥ

‘through lack of’; gꜣwt ‘lack, want’ (Faulkner 1962: 287, ّ ‫ ق‬288; Wb V 151, 152 149) ~ Heb [‫ ] ָק ַלל‬qālal ‘be slight, trifling’ (BDB 886) || Ar ‫ ��ل‬qalla ‘wenig, in geringer Menge oder Zahl sein; sich vermindern’ (Wahrmund II 516); qallala ‘to lessen, diminish’; qilla ‘paucity, smallness, rarity’ (Hava 1982: 622); ~ Palest qallal ‘schmälern’; qalīl il-ʿarḍ ‘schmal’ (Bauer 1957: 261); qilla ‘Knappheit’ (Bauer 1957: 176) ~ Sinai gaḷḷ mugdārna ‘he slighted us’; gillit N ‘lack of N’ (Stewart 1990: 221) ~ Najd gall ‘to be little, scarce’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 433) ~ Baghdad gella ‘dearth’; qalīl ‘a little’ (Blanc 1964: 39) ~ Yemen gilleh ‘scarsità’ (Rossi 1939: 235) ~ Egypt qilla ‘scarcity, want, paucity’ (Spiro 1895: 497) ~ Marazig gella ‘absence totale, manqué absolu’ (Boris 1958: 505) ~ Ḥassāniyya glīl ‘rare’ (D. Cohen 1963: 34) ~ Djidjelli qellīla ‘indigente’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 279). 563

q-l-l³

‫قّ ة‬

‫ق‬

gꜣw (LE) [< *gll] ‘Napf, Schale aus Ton’ (Wb V 150) || Ar ��‫ ��ل‬qullah, pl ‫ ��لا ل‬qilāl ‘irdener Wasserkrug, besonders großer’ (Wahrmund II 522); ~ Marazig goḷḷa, pl gḷāḷ ‘cruche, gargoulette’ (Boris 1958: 505) ~ Egypt qulla ‘native water-bottle’; ‘Wasserkrug’ (Spiro 1895: 500; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 393) ~ Tripoli (Libya) gulla ‘boccia (d’argilla, per acqua)’ (Griffini 1913: 32) ~ Tunis qolla, pl qlǝl ‘cruche’ (D. Cohen 1975: 304, 194) ~ Marazig guḷḷa ‘Tonkrug’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2005: 35) ~ El-Ḥāmma de Gabès guḷḷah ‘amphore’ (Cantineau 1960: 221) ~ Djidjelli qella ‘cruche’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 252) ~ Malta ⟨qolla⟩ ‘broccone, vaso grande di terra’ (Vassalli 1796: 423). 564

q-m-ḥ

qmḥ (Pyr) ‘Art Brot’; ‘loaf, wheat bread’ (Wb V 40; Faulkner 1962: 279) ~ Akkad qêmu ‫‘ ق‬flour’ (M. Cohen 2011: 85) ~ Heb ‫ ֶק ַמח‬qemaḥ ‘flour, meal’ (BDB 887) || Ar ��‫ ��م‬qamḥ ‘wheat’ (Hava 1982: 626); ‫ح‬ ~ Aleppo qamǝḥ ‘blé’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 680, 177) ~ Damascus qamǝḥ ‘wheat’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 262), pl of mult. qamḥāt (Bloch 1989: 128) ~ Nabk ʾumiḥ ‘Weizen’ (Gralla 2006: 168) ~ Tunis qamḥ ‘blé’ (D. Cohen 1975: 81) ~ Malta ⟨qamħ, pl qmuħ⟩ ‘grano’ (Vassalli 1796: 402).

274 565

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

q-m-r

qmꜣ (OK) ‘to throw’; ‘etwas zu Boden werfen; worfeln (als Tätigkeit beim‫ق‬ Getreidebau); das Wurfholz werfen’ (Faulkner 1962: 278; Wb V 33) || Ar ‫��مر‬ qamara ‘mit Einem Würfel oder ein Hasardspiel spielen’ (Wahrmund II 626); ~ Kǝndērīb tqāmaṛ ‘ein Glückspiel spielen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 118) ~ Aleppo qmār ‘jeu de hasard’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 681) ~ Damascus qāmar ‘to gamble’; ‘jouer de l’argent’; qmārji ‘joueur’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 100; Denizeau 1960: 432) ~ Palest luʿb il-qimār ‘Hasardspiel’ (Bauer 1957: 149). 566

q-n-ʾ

‫قأ‬

qnj.t (NK) ‘gelbe Farbe’; qni҆t (BD) ‘a yellow pigment’ (Wb V 52; Faulkner 1962:

280; Albright 1918: 230) ~ Assyr uqnâtu ‘blue’ (M. Cohen 2011: 23) || Ar ���‫ � ن‬qana‌ʾa ‫ق‬ ‘sehr rot sein, rotgefärbt sein (Haar, Hand)’; ‫ �� ن�ء‬qanʾ ‘den Bart schwarz färben’ (Wahrmund II 529); cf. Gk κυάνεος ‘dark’ (GEL 454). 567

q-h-r

khꜣ (MK) ‘raise the voice, utter a bellow; rage furiously’; ‘Geschrei, Gebrüll ausstoßen; stark wehen (vom Sturm); rasen (vom Feuer)’ (Faulkner 1962: 286; Wb ‫ق‬ V 138) || Ar ‫ ����هر‬qahr ‘überwältingender Zorn’ (Wahrmund II 534); ~ Oman gahar ‘laut widersprechen’ (Reinhardt 1894: 164) ~ Yemen gahr ‘anger, grief’; gahra ‘insult’ (Piamenta 1991: 415) ~ Palest qahr ‘Ärger’ (Bauer 1957: 23); byiqhar ‘er ärgert’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 61) ~ Najd gahar ‘repel, ward off’ (Sowayan 1992: 292) ~ ʿAnazeh gahar ‘saisir, empoigner’ (Landberg 1940: 66) ~ Aleppo qahar ‘chagriner, peiner’: māt mǝn qahro ‘il est mort de chagrin …’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 686) ~ Damascus sabab qāhar ‘force majeure’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 95) ~ Lebanon qāhar ‘se disputer, se quereller’ (Denizeau 1960: 435) ~ Palest qahaṛ ‘compulsion’ (Palva 1965: 30) ~ Egypt qahar ‘to offend, to grieve’; ‘faire enrager qqn’; qahr ‘grief, sorrow’; ‘chagrin’ (Spiro 1895: 503; Dozy II 423) ~ Ḥassāniyya qahṛ ‘obligation’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 105). Cf. Mand qahr ‘anger, wrath, trouble’ (Drower & Macuch 1963: 399).

565. q-m-r – 570. q-w-q

568

275

q-w-r

qrr.t (MK) ‘cavern’; ‘Höhlung, Loch, Höhle’; ‘cavern, miner’ (Wb V 62; Faulkner ‫ق‬ 1962: 281; DLE II 147) ~ Sab qwr ‘to engrave’ (Biella 1982: 451) || Ar ‫ � ّور‬qawwara ‘einen runden Ausschnitt, ein rundes Loch hinein schneiden’ (Wahrmund II 537); ~ Egypt qawwar ‘to hollow’ (Spiro 1895: 503) ~ Palest qaʿar ‘lochen’ (Bauer 1957: 195) ~ Algeria qawwar ‘arrondir’ (Lentin 1959: 251) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨niqaʿʿar⟩ ‘to hollow out, excavate’; ⟨niqawwar⟩ ‘to dig, excavate’ (Corriente 1997: 435, 447). 569

q-w-s

gwš (LE) ‘become askew, bent, twisted; turn away’ (Breasted 1930: 568; Faulkner 1962: 288; DLE II 186); ga-wa-ša ‘krumm sein, schief sein’; ‘be crooked, turn away; crookedness’ (Wb V 160; Hoch 1994: 347–48) ~ Akkad qaštu/qassu ‘bow’ ‫ق‬ (CAD XIII 147; Parpola 2007: 87) ~ Heb ‫ ֶּק ֶׁשת‬qešet ‘bow’ (BDB 905) || Ar ‫��ا ��س‬ qāsa ‘courber, cambrer comme un arc; être vouté, cambré’ (DAF II 833); ~ Damascus qōṣ, pl qwāṣ ‘bow’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 27) ~ Aleppo qōṣ, pl qwāṣ ‘arc, instrument de tir’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 688) ~ Khawētna gās ‘treffen (beim Schießen)’ (Talay 1999: 30) ~ Lebanon qaws ‘arc’ (Feghali 1938: 818) ~ Yemen gows, pl ʾagwās ‘arco’ (Rossi 1939: 193) ~ Tunis qūṣ ‘Bogen’ (Singer 1984: 176); qawš ‘voûte, arc’ (D. Cohen 1975: 67) ~ Djidjelli qōṣ, pl qwāṣ ‘arc, arcade’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 67) ~ Cherchell qūs ‘arc’ (Grand’Henry 1972: 98) ~ Morocco qewṣ, pl qwaṣ ‘arch’; teqwiṣa ‘stoop (n)’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 12, 194) ~ Ḥassāniyya qaws ‘arche’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 25). 570

q-w-q

gwg (NK) ‘shout (?)’; ‘einer redet mit (? nach?) dem anderen’ (Faulkner 1962: ‫قق‬ 288; Wb V 161) || cf. Ar � ‫ ��ا‬qāqa ‘glousser (se dit des poules)’ (DAF II 836); ~ Yemen gāgah ‘Gackern’; mitgōgig ‘gackernd’ (Behnstedt 1987: 293) ~ Najd ⟨qawqā⟩ ‘pfeifen (vom Sperling)’ (Socin 1901 III 305) ~ Aleppo qawqa/qōqa, iqōqi ‘cacqueter, crételer, codater (poule qui va pondre)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 690) ~ Palest qāqa ‘gackern’ (Bauer 1957: 121) ~ Egypt qawwaq/gawwag ‘to cackle’; ‘krächzen’ (Spiro 1895: 504; Behnstedt & Woidich 194: 400) ~ Malta ⟨qaqa, iqaqi⟩ ‘schiamazzare, gracchiare’ (Vassalli 1796: 399).

276

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

571

q-w-y

gwꜣ/gw (NK) ‘von Schädigen eines Schwachen zu gunsten (mit Dativ) eines ّ ‫ق‬ Starken’ (Wb V 160); gwꜣwꜣ ‘stranglehold’ (Faulkner 1962: 288) || Ar ‫ �و��ي‬qawiyy,

‫أق‬

‫ق‬

pl ‫ � �و�يا ء‬ʾaqwiyāʾ ‘strong’ (Hava 1982: 636); ‫ �و�ى‬qawā ‘l’emporter sur quelqu’un pour le forcer; être de force à lutter contre quelqu’un’ (DAF 842); ~ Egypt qiwi ‘be strong, powerful’ (Spiro 1895: 504) ~ Najd gawa ‘to be able to’; giwiyy ‘strong, powerful’ (Sowayan 1992: 292) ~ Damascus qawi, pl qawāya ‘strong’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 228) ~ Kǝndērīb qawi ‘stark’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 120) ~ Djidjelli qūyān ‘fait d’être fort, force’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 227). K 572

k-ʾ-b

i҆ꜣkb (BD) ‘mourning, wailings’; ‘Trauer, Klageschrei; trauern, klagen’; i҆ꜣkby ‘mourners’; i҆ꜣkb.t ‘mourning woman; das Klageweib’ (Faulkner 1962: 9; Wb I 34;

‫�ئ‬

Hannig 1995: 26, 248) || Ar �‫�� ب‬ �‫ �ك‬ka‌ʾiba ‘sehr niedergedrückt, traurig sein’; ‘he was in an evil state and broken in spirit’ (Wahrmund II 547; Lane 2582); ~ Aleppo ka‌ʾīb ‘affreux’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 697) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ka‌ʾīb⟩ ‘sad’ (Corriente 1997: 452) ~ Malta ⟨kiebi⟩ ‘mesto, oppresso di tristezza’ (Vassalli 1796: 378). 573

k-ʾ-s

‫أ‬

kṯ (LE) ‘Krug aus Metall (unter Anderen zum Trinken)’ (Wb V 148) ~ Akkad

kāsu ‘goblet, cup, beaker’ (Parpola 2007: 48) ~ Heb ‫ ּכֹוס‬kōs (BDB 468) || Ar ‫ك� ��س‬ ka‌ʾs ‘cup’ (Hava 1982: 639); ~ Aleppo kās ‘verre à boire, coupe’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 697) ~ Damascus kāset ṃayy ‘a glass of water’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 103) ~ Iraq kāsa ‘bowl’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 397) ~ Palest kās ‘Kelch’ (Bauer 1957: 172) ~ Egypt kās ‘cup, glass’ (Spiro 1895: 507) ~ Djidjelli kās ‘verre’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 253).

571. q-w-y – 576. k-b-r-t

574

277

k-b-b

qb (Pyr) ‘pour out (water); pour a libation’; ‘eine Libation darbringen’ (Faulkner ّ �‫ �ك‬kabba ‘overturn; pour liq1962: 115, 277; Wb V 24; Hannig 2003: 1329) || Ar �‫� ب‬ uid’ (Hava 1982: 639); ~ S. Arabia ⟨kabb⟩ ‘verser, répandre, verser à boire’ (Landberg 1901: 699) ~ Najd kabb ‘to overturn, throw away’ (Ingham 1994: 183) ~ Oman kebub ‘ausgießen’ (Reinhardt 1894: 43) ~ Aleppo kabb ‘jeter (de l’eau sale, des ordures …)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 698) ~ Damascus kabb ‘spill’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 220) ~ Palest kabb ‘ausschütten’ (Bauer 1957: 267). 575

k-b-r

ṯmꜣ (OK) [< *čmr < *kbr] ‘mit kräftigem Arm; mächtig sein’ (Wb V 367; Calice 1936: 220); Ḥr-ṯmꜣ ‘Der starke Horus’ (Leitz 2002: 294) ~ Akkad kabāru ‘to be strong’ (M. Cohen 2011: 203) ~ Heb ‫ ַּכ ִּביר‬kabbīr ‘great, mighty’ (BDB 460) || Ar

ْ ‫ ك‬kabura ‘to grow big, become famous’ (Hava 1982: 640); ‫�ب��ر‬ ‫ ك‬kibr ‘Größe, ‫���بر‬

Macht’ (Wahrmund II 552); ~ Palest kbīr/čbīr ‘groß’ (Bauer 1957: 142); kubra ‘Stolz, das sich Emporheben’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 63) ~ Aleppo kə́bǝrya ‘orgueil’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 700) ~ Egypt kibir ‘to be large, great; to grow, age’ (Spiro 1895: 508) ~ Malta ⟨kiber, jikber⟩ ‘crescere, ingrandirsi’ (Vassalli 1796: 377). 576

k-b-r-t

kbrt (LE) ‘sulphur, brimstone’ (DLE II 172) ~ Akkad kibrītu ‘sulphur’ (CAD VIII ‫��� � ت‬ 333) || Ar � ‫ ك بر�ي‬kibrīt ‘sulphur, brimstone’ (Hava 1982: 641);

~ Iraq kibrīt ‘sulphur’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 198) ~ Aleppo kabrīt/kǝbrīt ‘allumettes’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 700) ~ Mharde kabrīt ‘Streichholz’ (Yoseph 2012: 163) ~ Kǝndērīb kabrīt ‘Zündhölzer, Streichhölzer’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 121) ~ Bišmizzīn kabrīt ‘Zündhölzer’ (Jiha 1964: 160) ~ Palest kibrīt ‘Schwefel’; kibrīte ‘Zündholz’ (Bauer 1957: 269, 380) ~ Ḥassāniyya kǝbrīt ‘soufre’ (D. Cohen 1963: 31).

278 577

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

k-b-k-b

ṯbṯb [*čbčb < *kbkb] ‘baumeln’ (Calice 1931: 37) || Ar �‫�� ب‬ ‫�� ك‬ ‫ �كب‬kabkaba ‘to upset, to turn upside down’ (Hava 1982: 640); ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nikabkab kabkabt⟩ ‘to hurl or fling down’ (Corriente 1997: 454). 578

k-b-w

kꜣp (Pyr) ‘räuchern’; ‘burn incense, cense gods, fumigate patient’ (Wb V 103; Calice 1936: 212; Faulkner 1962: 284) ~ Akkad kabû ‘dung (of animals)’ (CAD III 28) || Ar ‫كا‬ ��‫ ب‬kabā ‘to smoulder in the ashes’ (Hava 1982: 642); ~ Yemen kabba ‘to collect dung for fuel’ (Piamenta 1991: 425); kibyah, pl kibā ‘getrocknete Dungfladen (Brennmaterial)’ (Behnstedt 2006: 1053); ⟨kibāʾ⟩ ‘espèce d’encens’ (GD 2554). 579

k-b-y

qby (MK)/qb (NK) ‘jar for beer’; ‘Krug aus Ton oder Metall für Flüssigkeiten’ (Faulkner 1962: 277; Wb V 25) ~ Copt ⲕⲏⲃⲓ ‘jar, pitcher’ (Crum 1939: 113b) ~ Akkad kappu ‘drinking bowl’ (Parpola 2007: 46) ~ Heb ‫ ַקב‬qab(b) ‘dry mea-

ّ ‫قأ‬

‫ّة‬

sure’ (BDB 866) || cf. Ar �‫ �و� ب‬qawʾabiyy ‘large vessel’; ���‫كاي‬ ��‫ ب‬kubbāyah ‘drinking‫�ي‬ glass, tumbler’ (Hava 1982: 642); ~ Egypt qubbāye ‘glass, tumbler’ (Spiro 1895: 508) ~ Damascus kǝbbāye ‘glass’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 103) ~ Palest kubbāye ‘Trinkglas’ (Bauer 1957: 306) ~ Daθīna ⟨kubbāyah⟩ ‘verre à boire’ (GD 2554). 580

k-t-t¹

ktt/kt (MK) ‘small, trifling, a trifle, pettiness’; ‘der Kleine, der Geringe, ein kurzer Tag’; ‘be small, few’; ktkt ‘mit kleinen, kurzen Schritten ein-hergehen’ (Ember ّ‫� ت‬ 1930: 100; Faulkner 1962: 287; Wb V 147) || Ar � �‫ �ك‬katta ‘mit kleinen Schritten eilen’ (Wahrmund II 554); ~ Palest kata/kettet z-zarʿa ‘petit tas de céréales’ (Dalman III 54) Kǝndērīb katt, ikǝtt ‘(Flüssigkeit:) abnehmen, eingedickt, reduziert werden’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 121) ~ Lebanon katt, ykitt ‘s’user, s’effilocher’ (corde)’; ktīt ‘paille finement hachée’ (Feghali 1938: 23).

279

577. k-b-k-b – 583. k-r-š ¹

581

k-t-t²

ktw.t/ktj.t (Pyr) ‘cauldrons’; ‘Kochtopf, Feuerstelle (wo man Speise kocht, wo die Bösen verbrannt werden)’ (Faulkner 1962: 287; Wb V 145; Calice 1936: 213) ||

ّ

‫�ت‬ Ar � �‫ �ك‬katta ‘to boil (cooking pot)’; ‘sieden (Topf)’ (Hava 1982: 642; Wahrmund II 554); ~ Aleppo katt, ykitt ‘verser (un liquide ou des grains d’un vase dans un autre)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 703) ~ Iraq katt ‘(liquid) to pour, gush forth’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 399). 582

k-r-r

nṯṯ (OK) [< *rčč < *rkk < *krr] ‘die Fessel, fesseln’ (Wb II 367); nṯr (Gr) ‘Mumi­ ّ enbinde; einwickeln’; nṯrj ‘Faden, Schnur’ (Wb II 365) || Ar ‫�ر‬ ‫ ك‬karra ‘sich ‫ة‬ abwickeln, ablaufen (aufgewickelter Faden)’; ‘rouler, faire rouler’; ���‫�ر ا �ل��ط�ا ب‬ ‫ك‬

ّ

‘dérouler un peloton’ (Wahrmund II 566; Dozy II 459); ‫�ر‬ ‫ ك‬karr, pl ‫�رور‬ ‫ ك‬kurūr ‘rope used as a ladder’ (Hava 1982: 648); ~ Damascus karrār ‘reel’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 188) ~ Egypt karr ‘undoing a reel of cotton’ (Spiro 1895: 514) ~ Palest karr ‘aufziehen (Strumpf)’ (Bauer 1957: 31). 583

k-r-š¹

kns.t (Med) ‘Körperteil der Bauchgegend’ (Wb V 134; Calice 1936: 105) ~ Akkad karšu ‘stomach, belly, womb’ (CAD VIII 223) ~ Heb [‫ ] ָּכ ֵרש‬kārēš ‘belly’ (BDB 503) || Ar ���‫�رش‬ ‫ ك‬kirš/kariš, pl ���‫�رو ش‬ ‫ ك‬kurūš ‘stomach of ruminants; paunch’ (Hava 1982: 650); ~ Iraq kariš, pl krūš ‘pot belly’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 402) ~ Palmyra kerše ‘estomac, panse’ (Cantineau 1934 II 2) ~ Lebanon kirš, pl krūš ‘stomach’ (Frayha 1973: 150) ~ Bišmizzīn kirš ‘Bauch (des Menschen)’; kirši/kiršāyi, pl krūš ‘Innereien’ (Jiha 1964: 74, fn 12) ~ Palest mikriš ‘bauchig’; karš, pl -āt ‘Tiermagen’ (Bauer 1957: 42, 198) ~ Egypt kirš/kirša/karš/kurša ‘Bauch, Gekröse’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1985: 119) ~ Cherchell kerš ‘ventre’ (Grand’Henry 1972: 28) ~ Morocco kerš, pl kruš ‘stomach’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 193) ~ Ḥassāniyya kerš ‘ventre’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 152) ~ Malta ⟨kirxa⟩ ‘stomaco’ (Vassalli 1796: 381).

280 584

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

k-r-š²

krś (LE) ‘to frisk, leap’; ‘springen (von Ziegen)’ (Hoch 1994: 332; Wb V 136); ka-ra-šú ‘springen’ (Helck 1962: 573); krs ‘dance, skip’ (DLE II 176) ~ Akkad garāšu/qarāšu ‘darauf gehen, koitieren’; ‘copulate’ (AHW I 282; Parpola 2007: �‫ إ� ن� ك‬ʾinkaraša ‘tomber sur quelque chose de manière à se coucher 168) || Ar ���‫�رش‬ dessus avec sa poitrine’ (DAF 884); ~ Yemen karaš ‘coire, hinauswerfen; rausschmeißen’; ‘have sexual intercourse’; karšah ‘coitus’ (Behnstedt 2006: 1064; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 412; Piamenta 1991: 428) ~ Marazig kaṛṛaš, ikarreš ‘agripper (qqn, qq. ch. pour le retenir), se cramponner à (pour ne pas tomber)’ (Boris 1958: 527) ~ Cairo karaš ‘drive away, hurry’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 743) ~ Aleppo ���‫�رش‬ ‫ ك‬karaš ‘chasser devant soi’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 711) ~ Malta ⟨gerrex, igerrex⟩ ‘cacciare uno con improprietà’ (Vassalli 1796: 309). For the semantic pattern in the Yemenite form, cf. Neo-Aram ṭāḥ, yṭīḥ ‘springen, bespringen, beschlafen’ (Arnold & Behnstedt 1993: 81) < Aram ṭwḥ (Dalman 1938: 167; M. Jastrow 1886: 522) and Egyptian nhp ‘jump up; copulate’ (DLE I 240; Faulkner 1962: 135).

585

k-r-m¹

ṯꜣm (BD) [< *črm] ‘veil (v.): veil the face = show indulgence (n to)’; ‘nachsichtig sein gegen jemanden’ (Faulkner 1962: 303; Wb V 354; Calice 1936: 219) || Saf (h)

krm (impv.) ‘to be generous’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 649) ~ Ar �‫�ري‬ ‫ك‬ ‫م‬ karīm ‘noble, generous’ (Hava 1982: 652); ~ Kǝndērīb kaṛam ‘Ehre’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 122) ~ Damascus karīm, pl krām ‘noble’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 158) ~ Aleppo karīm, pl krām ‘généreux, libéral, large’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 714) ~ Palest karim en-nifs ‘großmütig’ (Bauer 1957: 143) ~ Egypt akram, yikrim ‘to honour, respect’ (Spiro 1895: 516) ~ Djidjelli krīm ‘généreux’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 268). 586

k-r-m²

kꜣmw (NK) ‘vineyard, orchard’; ‘der Garten, die Weinernte’ (Faulkner 1962: 284; Wb V 106) ~ Dem kꜣm ‘Garten’ (DG 557) ~ Copt ϭⲱⲙ ‘garden, vineyard, propeerty’ (Crum 1939: 817b) ~ Heb ‫ �ֶּכ�ֶר ם‬kerem ‘vineyard’ (BDB 501) ~ Aram karmā ‘vineyard’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 671) || Ar ‫�ر‬ ‫ ك‬karm, pl ‫�رو‬ ‫ ك‬kurūm ‘vineyard’ (Hava ‫م‬ ‫م‬ 1982: 652);

584. k-r-š ² – 589. k-z-z ³

281

~ Kəndērīb kaṛme, pl kaṛmāt ‘Weinstock’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 122) ~ Aleppo karm, pl krūm ‘plantation d’arbres fruitiers qui n’ont pas besoin d’irrigation, terre plantée en vignes, en pistachiers, ou figuiers’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 713) ~ Damascus karəm, pl krūm(e) ‘vineyard’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 256) ~ Bišmizzīn karm ‘Weinfeld’ (Jiha 1964: 119, fn 1) ~ Palest karm, pl krūm ‘Weinberg’ (Bauer 1957: 357). 587

k-z-z¹

ṯz (Pyr) [< *čzz < *kzz] ‘to tie knot, cord; tie on fillet; join, rejoin’; ‘knoten, ver­ ّ knüpfen; etwas zusammenknoten’ (Faulkner 1962: 307; Wb V 396) || Ar ‫��ز‬ ‫ك‬ kazza ‘zusammenpressen, verengen, festmachen’ (Ullmann 1970: 165); cf. 615. k-w-z; ~ Lebanon kazz/kazkaz ‘serrer, presser quelque chose’ (Denizeau 1960: 452) ~ Sinai kazz ‘to stop, repulse; to spur on’ (Stewart 1990: 245; Bailey 1991: 451) ~ Rwala kazz ‘to fold’ (Musil 1928: 180) ~ Marazig kazz ‘cesser d’être généreux, devenir regardant’ (Boris 1958: 530) ~ Ḥassāniyya kazz ‘il a serré’; nkazz ‘être bien serré’ (D. Cohen 1963: 96). 588

k-z-z²

‫أ‬

ṯs/ṯs.t (MK) [< *čs < *kzz] ‘der Zahn’; ‘tooth’ (Wb V 401, 409; Faulkner 1962: 307)

ّ

|| Ar ‫��ز ع��لى � ����سن���ا ن��ه‬ ‫ ك‬kazza ʿalā ʾasnānihi ‘to gnash the teeth’ (Hava 1982: 653); ‫��ك����س��س‬ kasasa ‘kleine kurze Zähne haben’ (Wahrmund II 575); ~ Lebanon tkazkaz ‘grincer des dents’ (Denizeau 1960: 452). 589

k-z-z³

ṯz (OK) [< *čzz < *kzz] ‘trockene Stelle’; m ṯz ‘in drought’ (Wb V 401; Faulkner ّ 1962: 307) || Ar ‫��ز‬ ‫ ك‬kazza ‘être sec, desseché, et se contracter’ (DAF II 893); ~ Lebanon kazz/kazkaz ‘sécher, se recroqueviller’ (Denizeau 1960: 452) ~ Takrūna kazz ‘durcir en se desséchant (terre, pâte, fruit); devenir, se montrer dur à la desserre; devenir pénible, dur (état, situation)’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 3410) ~ Yemen kazz ‘verbrennen, blenden’ (Behnstedt 2006: 1067) ~ Marazig kazz ‘cesser d’être généreux, devenir regardant’; kzūz ‘qui ne donne pas du lait qu’avec une forte pression du pis; mauvaise laitière (chèvre); qui ne

282

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

donne qu’avec parcimonie’ (Boris 1958: 530) ~ Ūlād Brāhīm kēyzez ‘être chiche de’ (W. Marçais 1908: 107). 590

k-s-ʾ

ṯs (OK) [< *čs < *ks] ‘der Hals’; ṯst ‘Wirbelknochen, Wirbelknochen des Nackens,

Rückens’; ‘neck’ (Wb V 400; Faulkner 1962: 307) || Ar ‫ ��ك��سء‬kusʾ/‫ ��ك��سوء‬kusūʾ, pl

‫أ‬ ‫ ���ك��س�ا ء‬ʾaksāʾ ‘hinder part’ (Hava 1982: 653). 591

k-s-b

ṯsm/ṯzm (MK) [< *čsm/čzm < *ksb] ‘hound’; ‘Windhund, Hund, als Jagdhund, als Wächterhund, als Begleithund’ (Faulkner 1962: 308; Calice 1936: 221; Wb V

ّ

409) || Ar �‫ ��ك��س�ا ب‬kasāb ‘wolf, hunting-bitch’ (Hava 1982: 654); �‫ ��ك��س�ا ب‬kassābun (als Name eines Jagdhundes)’ (Ullmann 1970: 172). 592

k-s-ḥ

ḥsq (Pyr) ‘abschneiden’; ‘cut off (head)’; ḥsqt ‘chopper’ (Wb III 169; Faulkner

1962: 178) || Ar ��‫ ��ك��س‬kasiḥa ‘Bäume ausputzen’ (Wahrmund II 575);

‫ح‬

~ Lebanon kasaḥ ‘to cut the branches of a tree; to strike s.o.’; ‘frapper qqn’ (Frayha 1973: 103; Feghali 1918: 26) ~ Aleppo kaseḥ ‘émonder (un arbre)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 716). 593

k-s-s

ّ

ks (Pyr) ‘the female organ’ (Breasted 1930: 568) || Ar ‫ ��ك��س‬kuss ‘les parties honteuses de la femme’ (DAF 894) [~ Gk κυσός ‘die weibliche Scham’ (Ullmann I 167)]; ~ Palmyra kuss ‘vulve’ (Cantineau 1934 II 2) ~ Aleppo kəss, pl ksūs ‘vulve, vagin’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 718) ~ Palest kuss ‘Vulva’ (Bauer 1957: 255) ~ Sinai kuss, pl aksās ‘pudenda’ (C. Bailey 1991: 451) ~ Egypt kuss, pl aksās ‘sexual organ in the female’ (Spiro 1895: 518).

590. k-s- ʾ – 596. k- ʿ -k

594

283

k-s-w

kṯt (LE) ‘Decke’; ‘garment, covering’ (Wb V 148; Hoch 1994: 341) ~ Akkad kusītu ‘robe’ (CDA 170) ~ Ugar kst ‘a type of robe or cloak’ (2003: 466) ~ Heb ‫ ְּכסּות‬kəsūt ‘covering, clothing’ (BDB 492) ~ Sab kśwy ‘clothes, garments’ (Biella 1982: 254) ||

‫ة‬

Ar �‫ ��ك��سو‬kiswah ‘set of clothes’ (Hava 1982: 655); ~ Oman kiswe ‘Anzug’ (Reinhardt 1894: 42) ~ Aleppo kasa, yəksi ‘habiller (qqn) à ses frais’; kəswe, pl kasāwi ‘habillement, vêtement’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 718) ~ Damascus kasa ‘to clothe’; vn kəswe (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 44) ~ Palest kasa ‘bekleiden’ (Bauer 1957: 49) ~ Kuwait kiswah/čiswah ‘gift of clothing’ (Dickson 1949: 638) ~ Tripoli (Libya) kiswa ‘corredo (vestito)’ (Griffini 1913: 67) ~ Oman kiswe ‘Anzug’ (Reinhardt 1894: 42) ~ Tunis kəšwa ‘costume’ (D. Cohen 1975: 149) ~ Algiers keswa ‘costume’ (Tapiéro 1971: 154) ~ Morocco keswa ‘suit’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 198) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨kaswa⟩ ‘dress’ (Corriente 1997: 461). 595

k-ʿ-b

kꜣbt (MK) ‘breast’; ‘die Brust (als ganzes)’ (Faulkner 1962: 276; Wb V 11) ~ Copt

ⲉⲕⲓⲃⲉ ‘breast’ (Crum 1939: 54a) || Ar �‫��ع� ب‬ ‫ ك‬kaʿaba ‘schwellende Brüste haben (Mädchen)’ (Wahrmund II 581); ~ Al-Andalus ⟨kāʿib, pl kawāʿib⟩ ‘buxom’ (Corriente 1997: 463). 596

k-ʿ-k

ʿkk (LE) ‘Art Brot’ (Wb I 235) ~ Dem kʿkʿ ‘id.’ (DG 561) ~ Copt ⲕⲁⲕⲉ ‘baked loaf,

cake’ (Crum 1939: 843b) || Ar ‫��ع�ك‬ ‫ ك‬kaʿk ‘cake, biscuit’ (Hava 1982: 658); ~ Yemen kaʿke ‘dolce di zucchero, uova, farina e burro’ (Rossi 1939: 160) ~ Aleppo kaʿk ‘gimblette, craquelin’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 721) ~ Kəndērīb kaʿk ‘Feingebäck, Plätzchen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 123) ~ Iraq kaʿak ‘type of pretzellike pastry’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 407) ~ Bišmizzīn kaʿki ‘Gebäckart’ (Jiha 1964: 151) ~ Palest kaʿk bsimsim ‘Sesamkringel’ (Dalman I/2: 607) ~ Egypt kaḥk ‘Bretzel’ (Spitta 1880: 24); kaḥkī ‘Kuchenbäcker’ (Littmann 1950: 120) ~ Sudan kaʿk ‘cake’ (LDA 421) ~ Tunis kaʿk ‘petits gâteaux en forme de couronne’ (D. Cohen 1975: 150) ~ Yemen kaʿkeh, coll. kaʿk ‘dolce di zucchero, uova, farina e burro’ (Rossi 1939: 160) ~ Djidjelli koʿk ‘gâteau’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 86) ~ Malta ⟨kagħka, pl kagħak⟩ ‘ciambella; cibo di farina intrisa fatto a foggia d’anello’ (Vassalli 1796: 368).

284 597

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

k-f-r

kꜣp (NK) ‘to cover, roof over, hide oneself’; ‘Dach eines Gebäudes, sich verstecken’; kꜣpw ‘roof’; kꜣpwt ‘covers’; kꜣpꜣp ‘to cover’; ‘bedecken’ (Faulkner 1962: 284; Wb V 104, 106; Takács 1999: 218) ~ Heb ‫ ִּכ ֵּפר‬kippēr ‘cover over, pacify, make

‫ف‬

propitiation’ (BDB 497) || Ar ‫�����ر‬ ‫ ك‬kafara ‘bedecken, zudecken, verbergen, verstecken’ (Wahrmund II 585); ~ Negev kuffāṛa ‘lid (of cooking pot)’; kafáṛ ‘to turn an empty cup upside down’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi). 598

k-f-f¹

kp (LE) ‘hand’ (Ember 1930: 49; Calice 1936: 105) ~ Dem kp ‘fassen, ergreifen’ (DG 578, 562) ~ Akkad kappu(m) ‘hand, palm of hand’ (CDA 147) ~ Heb ‫ַּכף‬

ّ‫ف‬

kap(p) ‘hollow or flat of the hand, palm, sole of foot, pan’ (BDB 496) || Ar ���� ‫ك‬

‫ف ف‬

‫ ك‬kufūf ‘palm of the hand, hand (to the wrist)’ (Hava 1982: 658); kaff, pl ��‫�����و‬ ~ Rwala čaff ‘palm’ (Musil 1928: 115, fn 7) ~ Oman keff ‘Hand’ (Reinhardt 1894: 417) ~ Aleppo kaff, pl kfūf ‘paume, creux de la main’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 722) ~ Kəndērīb kaff ‘Handfläche, Handschuh; ballen (Faust), zusammenklappen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 123) ~ Palest kaff, pl kfūf ‘Handfläche’; čaff ‘Hand’ (Schmidt & Kahle 1918 I 285) ~ Malta ⟨ċapċap, iċapċap⟩ [< *kpp] ‘to clap’ (Aquilina 1987: 164). 599

k-f-f²

ّ‫ف‬

kfj (Pyr) ‘entblössen, enthüllen, ein Kleid ausziehen, Kopftuch abnehmen’; kf

‘zurückweisen’ (Wb V 119; Calice 1936: 84) || Ar ���� ‫ ك‬kaffa ‘éloigner, repousser quelqu’un; se contenir et s’abstenir de quelque chose’ (DAF II 909); ~ Najd kaff ‘to desist from, stop doing something, renounce, check, hinder’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 452) ~ Daθīna inkaff ‘s’abstenir de’ (Landberg 1942: 2577) ~ Iraq kuff ʿanni ‘Get off my back!’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 407) ~ Aleppo kaff ‘détourner (un malheur)’; kəff ʿanni ‘laisse-moi tranquille’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 722) ~ Egypt kaff ‘to cease’ (Spiro 1895: 521) ~ Marazig kaff ‘cesser de faire qq.ch. (mən ou ʿala)’ (Boris 1958: 534) ~ Takrūna kaff ‘repousser qq. ou qq.ch.’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 3441) ~ Morocco kaff ‘repousser (de la paume de la main) pour replier/rabattre/recouvrir; pour écarter/éviter/détourner’

285

597. k-f-r – 602. k-l-ḥ

(Prémare X 607) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨kaff⟩ ‘keep off, stay away, cease’ (Corriente 1997: 464). 600

k-f-l

‫أف‬

kfꜣ (Med) ‘hinder parts of bird; bottom of jar’; ‘Hinterteil (eines Vogels)’ (Faulkner

‫ف‬

1962: 285; DLE II 173; Wb V 120; Ember 1930: 17) || Ar ‫������ل‬ ‫ ك‬kafal, pl ‫������ا ل‬ ‫ � ك‬ʾakfāl ‘Hinterteil; Croupe des Pferdes (Sitz des Hintermannes)’ (Wahrmund II 586); ~ Aleppo kafal ‘croupe d’un cheval’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 722) ~ Egypt kafal/ kafan ‘hind quarters of a horse or donkey’ (Spiro 1895: 522) ~ Najd kafal, pl kfūl ‘rump; the heavy laptails of Najdi sheep’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 452) ~ Sudan kafal ‘croupe (horse), buttocks’ (LDA 422) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨kafal, pl akfāl⟩ ‘rump’ (Corriente 1997: 464). 601

k-l-b

knm-t/klm-t ‘dog’; ‘ein Tier im Kampf mit Pavianen’ (Ember 1914: 111; Hoch 1994: 328; Wb V 132) ~ Copt ⲕⲁⲗⲱⲡⲟⲩ ‘small dog, lapdog’; ⲕⲗⲃⲁⲩⲗⲉ ‘petit chien’ (Crum 1939: 105b; Vycichl 1983: 76) ~ Akkad kalbu ‘dog’ (CAD VIII 68) ~ Soq ‫ ك�ل� ت‬kalb, kalb ‘chien, loup’ ~ Mah kŏb/koub/kalb ‘chien’ (Leslau 1937: 218) || Ar � pl �‫كلا ب‬ � kilāb ‘dog’ (Hava 1982: 662); ~ Aleppo kalb, pl klēb ‘chien’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 723) ~ Egypt kalb, pl kilāb ‘dog’ (Spiro 1895: 523) ~ Djidjelli kəbb ‘chien’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 383) ~ Malta ⟨kelb, pl klieb⟩ ‘cane’ (Vassalli 1796: 374). 602

k-l-ḥ

ّ

ṯḥn (Pyr) [< *čḥl < klḥ] ‘sparkle, flash, gleam’; ‘erhellen, erheitern’ (Faulkner

�‫ ت� ك‬takallaḥa ‘to flash repeatedly 1962: 306; Wb V 393; Ember 1930: 104) || Ar ��‫���ل‬ ‫ح‬ (lightning)’ (Hava 1982: 663); ~ Aleppo kalaḥ ‘se ternir, perdre un peu de sa couleur (étoffe)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 724) ~ Palest kalaḥ ‘zu verblassen (Farbe)’ (Bauer 1957: 328) ~ Egypt kalaḥ ‘to fade (colour)’ (Spiro 1895: 524) ~ kiliḥ ‘Feuer verlieren, erblassen (Diamant); Farbe verlieren’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 419) ~ Marazig əkləḥ ‘se dessécher complètement (sol, bouche)’ (Boris 1958: 536) ~ kiliḥ ‘Feuer verlieren, erblassen (Diamant); Farbe verlieren’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 419).

286 603

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

k-l-w

gar=yu (LE) ‘kidneys’ (Hoch 1994: 352) ~ Heb ‫ ִּכ ְליָ ה‬kilyāh ‘kidney’ (BDB 480) ‫ة‬ ‫ة‬ ~ Amh kulalit ‘kidney(s)’ (Kane 1990: 1368) || Ar ���‫ ك��لي‬kulyah/ �‫ك�لو‬ � kulwah, pl ‫ك�ل ا ت‬ kulwāt ‘kidney’ (Hava 1982: 664); � � ‫و‬ ~ Kəndērīb kəlwe, pl kəlaw ‘Niere’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 125) ~ Damascus kəlwe/ kəlye, pl kalāwi ‘kidney’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 131) ~ Palest kalwe ‘Niere’: kīlāhā ‘ihre Nieren’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 64) ~ Egypt kilwa ‘kidney’ (Spiro 1895: 525) ~ Yemen kilweh, pl kilaw ‘rene’ (Rossi 1939: 232) ~ Oman kilwe ‘Leber’ (Reinhardt 1894: 42) ~ Tunis klāwi ‘reins’ (D. Cohen 1975: 63) ~ Malta ⟨kilwa, pl kliewi⟩ ‘kidney’ (Aquilina 1990: 652). 604

k-m-ḥ

mkḥꜣ (MK) ‘back of the head; turn the back to, ignore’; ‘den Hinterkopf; den Hinterkopf zuwenden; vernachlässigen, sich nicht kümmern um …’; mqḥꜣ (LE)

�‫ك‬ ‘vernachlässigen’ (Faulkner 1962: 119; Wb II 163, 159; Calice 1936: 158) || Ar ��‫�م‬ ‫ح‬

kamaḥa ‘tirer à soi avec la bride la tête du cheval au point qu’il redresse la tête’; ‘to pull in, to check a horse with the bridle’ (DAF II 928; Lane 2360; Hava 1982: 664, 665). 605

k-m-d

qmd (NK) ‘mourn’; ‘beklagen’ (Faulkner 1962: 279; Wb V 40) || Saf kmd ‘to be

�‫ ك‬kamada ‘être sad, heart-sick’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 644) ~ Ar ‫�م�د‬ triste, affligé et malade’ (DAF II 928); ~ Egypt inkamad ‘be sad, gloomy’; kamad ‘sorrow, grief, gloominess’ (Spiro 1895: 526) ~ Lebanon kamed ‘ennui’ (Denizeau 1960: 460) ~ Sudan kammad ‘to foment’ (LDA 428) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nkamad⟩ ‘devenir triste’ (Dozy II 488). 606

k-m-r¹

ṯꜣm (MK) [< *črm < *kmr] ‘foreskin; to veil’; ‘sich verhüllen (besonders vom Gesicht)’; ṯꜣm.t (mit Bezug auf Min)’ (Faulkner 1962: 303; Wb V 354, 355): n fḫ.t=f m ṯꜣm ‘alors qu’il n’avait pas (encore) été défait par son prépuce’ (Meeks 2015: ‫ ك‬kamara ‘verdecken, umhüllen; einen an Größe der Eichel des 50) || Ar ‫��مر‬ Penis übertreffen’ (Wahrmund II 595).

287

603. k-l-w – 609. k-m-n See under m-n-w below.

~ Al-Andalus ⟨kamarah⟩ ‘glans (anatomy)’ (Corriente 1997: 467) ~ Aleppo kamar, yəkmor ‘couvrir’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 727). 607

k-m-r²

‫ََ ن‬

ṯꜣm (MK) [< *črm < *kmr] ‘Binde’ (Wb V 354, 355) ~ Aram ‫ ָקמוֹר‬qāmōr/‫ַק ְמ ָרא‬

‫ ك‬kamarān ‘Gürtel’ (Ullmann 1970: qamrā ‘belt’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 1384) || Ar � ‫��مَرا‬ 355); ~ Aleppo kamar ‘ceinture à poches’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 727) ~ Egypt kamar ‘belt’ (Spiro 1895: 562) ~ Lebanon kamar ‘men’s belt’ (Frayha 1972: 155). 608

k-m-l

‫أ‬

km (NK) ‘vollständig machen, vollenden’; ‘total up to, amount to, complete’;

kmt ‘completion’ (Wb V 128; Faulkner 1962: 286; Ember 1930: 33) || Ar ‫ك�ل‬ ‫ � م‬ʾakmala

‘rendre complet et parfait, achever, compléter, additionner’ (DAF II 930); ~ Aleppo kammal ‘compléter’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 728) ~ Damascus kammal ‘continue’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 52) ~ Kəndērīb kammal ‘vollenden, beenden, fertigmachen’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 372) ~ Palest kammal ‘vollenden’ (Bauer 1957: 345) ~ Egypt kimil/stakmil ‘be complete, perfect’ (Spiro 1895: 526). 609

k-m-n

kꜣmn (MK) ‘blind sein, der Blinde, jemanden blenden; dunkel sein’ (WAS V 107); knmt ‘darkness’; knmtyw ‘they who dwell in darkness’ (Faulkner 1962: �‫ ك‬kamana ‘avoir 286) || Saf kmn ‘to go into hiding’ (Al-Jallad 2015: 324) ~ Ar �‫�م� ن‬ les yeux voilés comme d’un brouillard et rouges’ (DAF II 931); ‘sich verbergen, �‫ ك‬kumina ‘von Augenschwäche befallen werden’ (Wahrmund II verstecken’; �‫�م� ن‬ ‫ة‬ ‫ن‬ � 596); ����‫ ك�م‬kumnah ‘Augenkrankheit’ (Ullmann 1971: 364); ~ Najd ćiman ‘to be hidden, concealed’ (Kurpershoek 1994: 331); ačman ‘to lie in ambush’ (Sowayan 1992: 294) ~ Egypt kaman/kimin ‘to hide’ (Spiro 1895: 526) ~ Negev kamīn ‘hidden’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨makman⟩ ‘hiding place’ (Corriente 1997: 468).

288 610

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

k-n-f

ṯnf.t (LE) [< *čnf.t] ‘bag’; ṯnfyt ‘Beutel, auch grösserer Sack (für Metallgeräte)’ (Faulkner 1962: 306; Wb V 308) ~ Dem ḏnf ‘Korb’ (DG 682) ~ Copt ϫⲛⲟϥ ‘bas-

‫نف‬

‫أن ف‬

‫ �ك‬kinf, pl �� ‫كا‬ ket, crate’ (Crum 1939: 777a) || Ar ��� �� � ʾaknāf ‘shepherd’s bag’; ‘Beutel für Utensilien’ (Hava 1982: 667; Wahrmund II 600); ~ Najd kinf, pl knifeh ‘Säckchen aus Schafleder um Gewürz aufzubewahren’ (Hess 1938: 119) ~ Yemen kinfeh ‘Schutz’ (Behnstedt 2006: 1087) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨kanfun⟩ ‘toolbox’ (Corriente 1997: 469); ⟨kanafa⟩ ‘porter’ (Dozy II 502). 611

k-n-n

612

k-h-m

ṯnnt [< *čnnt < *knnt] ‘sanctuary at Memphis’ (Faulkner 1962: 306) || Ar �ّ‫� ن‬ �‫ ك‬kinn ‘Asyl, Zuflucht; das Innere des Hauses’ (Wahrmund II 597); ~ Ḥaḍramawt kĕnān ‘abri’ (Landberg 1901: 1603) ~ Aleppo kankan ‘se cloîtrer dans sa maison en hiver’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 730) ~ Egypt kann/istakann ‘to rest, repose, conceal oneself’ (Spiro 1895: 567); kinn ‘Entenstall, eine Schutzhütte auf dem Feld (unter Einbeziehung eines Baumes als Windschutz, für Feuer und Wärme)’; kunn ‘Hasen-, Hühnerstall’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 422) ~ Takrūna kann ‘se mettre à l’abri’; kenn ‘abri (au sens matériel et moral); protection’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 3499) ~ Malta ⟨stkenn⟩ ‘mettersi al coperto’ (Vassalli 1796: 598).

khb (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘harm s.o., be violent, roar, howl’; ‘gewalttätig sein’ (Faulkner 1962: 287; Wb V 137) || Ar �‫ ��ك�ه‬kahama ‘einen niederdrücken, klein‫م‬ mütig machen’; ‘to crush’ (Wahrmund II 601; Hava 1982: 668); ~ Morocco khāb, ikhāb ‘devenir vilain’; khāba ‘état de ce qui est vilain / mauvais’ (Prémare X 646). 613

k-h-f

ṯpḥ.t (Pyr) [< *čhf < *khf ] ‘cavern’; ‘Loch im Boden, Höhle; Loch von Schlangen’ (Faulkner 1962: 304; Wb V 364; Albright 1918: 254) ~ Dem tpḥ ‘Höhle, Loch’ (DG

‫ف‬

‫ف‬

628) ~ Taym khf ‘grave’ (Winnett & Reed 1970: 192) || Ar ���‫ ��ك�ه‬kahf, pl ��‫��ك�هو‬ kuhūf ‘grotto, cavern, shelter’ (Hava 1982: 668);

289

610. k-n-f – 617. k-w-y

~ N. Yemen čahif- ‘Höhle’ (Behnstedt 1987: 297) ~ Damascus kahəf, pl khūf ‘cave’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 37) ~ Iraq kahaf, pl khūf ‘id.’ (Clarity et al., 1964: 32) ~ Oman kef ‘Höhle’ [< kahf] (Reinhardt 1894: 11) ~ Marazig kāf, pl kīfān ‘grotte très large’ [kahaf est considéré comme savant] (Boris 1958: 541). 614

k-w-b

‫أ‬

ṯbt ‘vase’ [< *čbt < *kbt]; ṯb ‘crate’ ṯꜣb/ṯb ‘ein Gefäß’ (Faulkner 1962: 304; Wb V

354) || Ar �‫�و ب‬ ‫ � ك‬ʾakwāb ‘großer Becher ohne Henkel’ (Wahrmund ‫ ك‬kūb, pl �‫�وا ب‬

II 602) ~ Aram kūbā ‘(wine-)cup, tumbler; wine cask’ (Ullmann 1971: 420; M. Jastrow 1886: 616); ~ Al-Andalus ⟨kūb, pl akwāb⟩ ‘bucket’ (Corriente 1997: 470) ~ N. Yemen kōb ‘Glas’ (Behnstedt 1987: 297) ~ Lebanon kūb, pl kwāb ‘tasse, verre’ (Denizeau 1960: 462). 615

k-w-z

ṯz (Pyr) [< *čz < *kz] ‘to tie knot’; ‘etwas knoten, knüpfen’ (Faulkner 1962: 307; ‫ � �ز‬kāza ‘ramasser, reunir sur un seul point’ (DAF II 943); cf. Wb V 396) || Ar ‫كا‬ 587. k-z-z; ~ Lebanon kwēze ‘petite boulette de lait caillé seché ou de viande hachée’ (Denizeau 1960: 463). 616

k-w-ʿ

qʿḥ (MK) ‘elbow, arm, shoulder’; ‘Ellenbogen’ (Ember 1930: 34; Faulkner 1962:

‫�ك ن‬ 276; Wb V 19) || Ar ‫�و‬ ‫ ك‬kūʿ, pl � ‫�ي��ع�ا‬ kīʿān ‘elbow’ (Hava 1982: 663); ‫ع‬

~ Rwala kūʿ ‘elbow’ (Musil 1928: 115, fn 7) ~ Oman kōʿ ‘Ellenbogen’ (Reinhardt 1895: 56) ~ Aleppo kūʿ ‘coude’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 732) ~ Damascus kūʿ, pl kwāʿ ‘elbow’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 77) ~ Palest kūʿ, pl (a)kwāʿ ‘Ellbogen’ (Bauer 1957: 91) ~ Egypt kūʿ, pl kīʿān ‘elbow’ (Spiro 1895: 529). 617

k-w-y

ṯꜣj (Pyr) [< *čwy] ‘Vorwurf, Tadel, Vorwurf erheben gegen jemanden, tadeln, jemanden strafen’ (Wb V 349) || Ar ‫�وا ء‬ ‫ ك‬kawāʾ ‘Schmähung’ (Wahrmund II 602);

290

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

~ Yemen kayya ‘insolence’ (Piamenta 1991: 440) ~ Takrūna kwē ‘infliger à qq. une peine cruelle’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 3529) ~ Egypt kawa ‘cause to suffer’ (Spiro 1895: 530). L 618

l-b-b

i҆b (Pyr) ‘heart’; i҆b.t ‘Krume des Brotes’; i҆wb.t ‘Teil des Brotes (ob weiche Krume?)’ (Faulkner 1962: 14; Wb I 59–61) ~ Akkad libbu ‘heart’ (M. Cohen 2011: 24) ~ Heb ّ ‫ ֵל ָבב‬lēbāb ‘mind, heart’ (BDB 523) ~ Soq ʾílbib ‘cœur’ (Leslau 1938: 61) || Ar �‫�ل� ب‬ lubb, pl �‫ ��ل�بو ب‬lubūb ‘heart, core; crumb of bread’; ‘Inneres, Mark, Korn (von Pflanzen, Früchten, von Getreide usw.)’ (Hava 1982: 674; Wb II/1 82); ~ Iraq libb ‘nucleus’ (Van Ess 1918: 186) ~ Aleppo ləbb ‘mie (du pain)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 744) ~ Lebanon lebb ‘cœur (de fruit)’ (Feghali 1938: 825) ~ Egypt libb ‘pith, pulp’ (Spiro 1895: 534) ~ Sinai libbih ‘a small round of bread’ (Stewart 1990: 245) ~ Tunis lbāba ‘Brotkrume’ (Singer 1984: 526) ~ Malta ⟨lbieba⟩ ‘the inside soft part of a loaf’ (Aquilina 1987: 734). 619

l-b-ǧ

nbḏ (OK) ‘destructive’; ‘böse, schädlich’; nbd (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘beschlagen sein mit (m) Kupfer und ähnlich’ (Faulkner 1962: 130; Wb II 347) || Ar ‫ �ل ب����ج‬labaǧa � ‘to strike with a stick’ (Hava 1982: 675); ~ N. Yemen labaǧ ‘stark schlagen’ (Behnstedt 1987: 298) ~ Tenḥara (Yemen) tilbug ‘elle frappe’ (Vanhove 1995: 263) ~ Damascus labaj ‘jeter qqn à terre’ (Denizeau 1960: 468). 620

l-b-x¹

ꜣbḫ (Pyr) ‘mix’; ‘vermischen’; ꜣbḫ.t (Ebers) ‘mix (m ‘into’) (of compounding drugs)’; ‘offizinell verwendete Flüssigkeit’ (Faulkner 1962: 2; Wb I 8) ~ Copt ⲁⲃⲏϣ ‘to mix’ (Crum 1939: 3a) ~ Akkad lubbuku ‘to moisten with oil’; lubku ّ ‘salve, lubricant’ (CAD IX 8, 232) || Ar ‫ �ل ب���� خ‬labbaxa ‘to apply a poultice’ (Hava � 1982: 675); cf. 626. l-b-k; ~ Yemen labak ‘mischen’ (Behnstedt 1996: 1103, 464) ~ Sfax labbax ‘besmear’ (Zwari & Sharfi 1998: 642) ~ Tunis labxa ‘Breiumschlag’ (Stumme 1896: 45);

291

618. l-b-b – 622. l-b-d ¹

ləbxa ‘cataplasme’ (D. Cohen 1975: 147) ~ Egypt labbax, ilabbix ‘schmieren’; ‘apply a poultice’; labxa, pl libax ‘poultice’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 427; Badawi & Hinds 1986: 777); rabak ‘to confuse, perplex’; labbiš ‘confuse’ (Spiro 216, 534; cf. Copt.) ~ Aleppo labbax ‘amollir ou faire fondre sur le feu (les herbes qui doivent composer un cataplasme)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 744) ~ Lebanon labxa, pl ləbax ‘cataplasme, compresse’ (Denizeau 1960: 468) ~ Palest labbax ‘Kataplasma auflegen’ (Bauer 1957: 28) ~ Morocco lbixa, pl lbayex ‘plaster cast’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 145). 621

l-b-x²

ṯꜣw ꜣbḫw jwf=sn ‘le soufflé imprègne leur chairs’ (Meeks 2010: 40) ~ Akkad lub-

ّ buku ‘to macerate (in a liquid)’ (CAD IX 7) || Ar ‫ �ل ب���� خ‬labaxa ‘to beat, strike’; ‫ت��ل ب���� خ‬ �

�

talabbaxa ‘to be bruised with blows’ (Hava 1982: 675); ~ Lebanon labbax ‘rouer qqn de coups’; labbax jismo ‘son corps est con­ tusionné, meurtri de coups’ (Denizeau 1960: 468). 622

l-b-d¹

nbd.t (Pyr) (BD) ‘tress of hair, lock of’; ‘sich frisieren, Flechtwerk, die Haarflechte’; ‘plaiting, braiding’ (Faulkner 1962: 130, 311; Wb II 246) ~ Copt ⲛⲏⲃⲧⲉ ‘plait, tress’ (Crum 1939: 222b) ~ Nubian nebíd/nibíd ‘flechten, geflecht’ (Reinisch 1893: 14) ‫ة‬ ّ || Ar � ‫ ��لب��د‬libdah ‘Mähne (des Löwens)’; ‫ ��لب��د‬labbada ‘to mat hair’; ‫ ��لب��د‬labid ‘matted hair’; ‘laine ou poil, ou crins mouillés et collés au point d’être aplatis et ْ foulés’; ‫ ��لب��د‬libd ‘hair or wool commingled and compacted together, or coherent’ (Ullmann 1983 II/1: 115; Hava 1982: 675; DAF II 958; Lane 2645); ‫ �م��لب��د‬mulbid ‘qui a une crinière (épithète du lion)’ (Dozy II 519); ~ Palest libde ‘Mähne des Löwen’ (Bauer 1957: 198) ~ Al-Andalus labad ‘wool’ (Corriente 1997: 474) ~ Damascus ləbbād ‘felt’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 88) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨libda⟩ ‘felt cap’ (Corriente 1997: 474) ~ Kəndērīb ləbbād ‘Filz, Füllung für den Sattel’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 130) ~ Egypt labbād ‘felt’; labbāda ‘horse-cloth’; libda ‘felt cap’; ‘Filzkappe’ (Spiro 1895: 534; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 427) ~ Najd libbādeh ‘Filzfutterung’ (Hess 1938: 128) ~ Tunis ləbda ‘molleton’ (D. Cohen 1975: 59, 147) ~ Algeria lebd ‘feutre’ (Ben Sedira 1910: 224).

292 623

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

l-b-d²

ndb/nbd (MK) ‘band door(s) with metal’; ‘beschlagen sein mit (m) Kupfer und ähnlich; von Türflügeln und Flaggenstangen’; ndbw.t (MK) ‘area, extent’; ‘die Fundamente eines Bauwerks und besonders der Erde (die auf ihnen ruht)’; ‘Fundamente, Fläche, Areal’; tꜣ ḥr ndb.f ‘die ganze Erde’ (Faulkner 1962: 130, 143; Wb II 247, 368; Takács 2011b: 76; Hannig 1995: 446) ~ Heb ‫ ר ֶֹבד‬rōbed ‘mosaic pavement’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 1455) ~ Ge madab ‘base, projection, wall, elevated

‫أ‬

place’ (Leslau 1987: 329) || Ar ‫ ��لب��د‬labada ‘to stick to the ground’; �‫ � ن��د ب‬ʾandaba ‘imprimer une trace sur quelque chose, laisser une empreinte, marquer’ (Hava 1982: 675; DAF 1225); ~ Yemen mandab, pl manādib ‘furrow, a little raised above field level’; ‘läng­ liches Feld’; ‘construct, work on’ (Behnstedt 1993: 202; 2006: 1201) ~ Lebanon labbad ‘trépigner’ (Denizeau 1960: 468) ~ Egypt libid ‘to stick to one’s place’ (Spiro 1895: 534) ~ Aleppo ləbed ‘être comme collé et pressé’ (Barthélemy 1935– 69: 744). 624

l-b-s

rbš (Pyr) ‘die (ledernen) Panzer’ (Wb II 414) ~ la-ba-ša-ja ‘Panzer’ (Helck 1962: 564) ~ ru₂=bi=ša ‘wear a cuirass’ (Hoch 1994: 203); i҆bś (Gr) ‘Kopftuch’; ‘headdress of king’ (Wb I 64; Faulkner 1962: 16) ~ Dem lbš ‘bewaffnen, bekleiden (‫ ;)לבׁש‬auch Rüstung, Panzer’; lbš ‘Rüstung, Panzer’ (DG 262) ~ Akkad labāšu ‘to wear’ (M. Cohen 2011: 230) || Ar ‫ �ل�ب���س‬labisa ‘to clothe oneself’ (Hava 1982: 675); ~ Damascus ləbəs ‘to dress’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 72) ~ S.E. Anatolia ləbəs ‘anlegen, anziehen (Kleidungsstück)’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 388) ~ Djidjelli bbes, yəbbés ‘vêtir’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 114) ~ Iraq lbēs ‘pants’ (Abu-Haidar 1991: 191) ~ Aleppo ləbes ‘vêtir, mettre, se vêtir d’(un vêtement)’ (Barthélemy 1935– 69: 745) ~ Ḥama lbāse ‘Unterhose’ (Lewin 1966: 224). 625

l-b-ṭ

nmt (Pyr) ‘to stride over, traverse’; ‘das Schreiten, der Ging, der Schritt’ (Faulkner 1962: 133; Wb II 271) || Ar ‫ ��لب���ط‬labaṭa ‘laufen indem die beiden Vorderfüße zugleich niedergesetzt werden (Pferd)’ (Wahrmund II 618); ~ Palest labīṭ ‘Fußtritt, das Ausschlagen’; yulbuṭ ‘er schlägt aus; gibt Fußtritte’; labbāṭ ‘Schläger (vom Esel)’; labaṭ ‘mit den Hinterbeinen ausschlagen (Esel)’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 66; Bauer 1957: 36) ~ Malta ⟨lebbet, ilebbet⟩ ‘to run very

623. l-b-d ² – 628. l-b-w

293

fast’ (Aquilina 1987: 734) ~ Aleppo labaṭ ‘donner une ruade à qqn’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 746) ~ Lebanon labaṭ ‘he kicked’ (Nasr 1966: 170); labbāṭ ‘qui rue, qui donne des coups de pied’ (Feghali 1938: 645). 626

l-b-k

r=bi=ka (LE) ‘a fine bread or pastry’; ‘Art Gebäck (Lehnwort); Speise’ < *rabīka (Hoch 1994: 204; DLE 2004: 270; Wb II 414; Hannig 1995: 464) ~ Akkad rabāku ‘einrühren, mengen (spez. von Heimkräutern u.s.w.)’ (Zimmern 1917: 49) || Ar ‫���ة‬ ‫ رب�ي� �ك‬rabīkah َ ‘dates with clarified butter and [the preparation of dried curd

‫أ‬

called] ‫( � قِ���ط‬ʾaqiṭ) kneaded together and then eaten; … sometimes water is poured upon it, and it is drunk …’ (Lane 1022); cf. 620. l-b-x¹; ~ Egypt labak ‘kneten’; yitaṛabak ‘sich beunruhigen’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 428); rabak/labak ‘confuse, perplex’ (Spiro 1895: 216, 535) ~ Yemen labak ‘mischen’; rammak, yirammik ‘im Schlamm stecken bleiben’; rabak ‘einen in eine Pfitze werfen’ (Behnstedt 1996: 1103, 464) ~ Ḥaḍramawt rbk/lbk ‘mêler, embarrasser’ (Landberg 1901: 1769) ~ Lebanon tlabbak ‘s’embrouiller dans une affaire, être empêtré’; rabbeq ‘asperger d’eau (l’aire du ciment) pour l’amollir avant de le tasser’ (Feghali 1933: 37). 627

l-b-n

i҆nb (Pyr) ‘wall; to wall off a place’; ‘Mauer (aus Haussteinen oder Ziegeln)’; i҆nbt ‘fence, stockade’; ‘Festung, Sperre’ (Faulkner 1962: 23; Wb I 94, 95) ~ Akkad libittu ‘brick, mud brick’ (CAD IX 176) ~ Heb ‫ ְל ֵבנָ ה‬ləbēnāh ‘brick’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 690) || Ar �‫ �لب�� ن‬libn ‘Backstein’ (Wahrmund II 618); ~ Ḥaḍramawt libn ‘adobe bricks’ (Radionov 2007: 120) ~ Aleppo ləbne, pl ləban ‘moellon taillé grossièrement, petite pierre à batir’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 747). 628

l-b-w

ꜣbw (OK) ‘Elefant’; ꜣbj (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘panther’; ‘der Leopard’; ‘léopard, guépard’; ꜣby.t ‘das weibliche Tier’ (Wb I 7; Faulkner 1962: 2; Meeks 2010; 46) ~ Dem lꜣbj ‘der Bär’; lbj ‘Bär, Löwe’ (DG 260, 262) ~ Copt ⲗⲁⲃⲟⲓ ‘a lioness’ (Crum 1939: 136b) ~ Akkad labbu ‘lion,’ labbatu ‘lioness’; labābu ‘to rage’ (CAD IX 24) || ‫ة‬ Ar �‫ ��ل�بو‬labwah/libwah ‘Löwin’ (Wahrmund II 619);

294

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

~ Damascus labwe ‘lionne’ (Denizeau 1960: 470) ~ Negev labʿih [< *labwih] ‘lioness’ (Henkin 2010: 290) ~ Egypt labwa ‘lioness’ (Spiro 1895: 535) ~ Ḥassāniyya ḷabbe ‘lionne’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 91) ~ Algeria lebba ‘id.’ (Ben Sedira 1910: 353) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨labwah/lawwah⟩ ‘lioness’ (Corriente 1997: 474). 629

l-b-y

‫ّأ‬

‫��ل�� ت‬ ꜣby.t (MK) ‘servante appartenant à la maisonnée’ (Meeks 2010: 33) || Ar � ‫ب‬ ّْ

labba‌ʾtu ‘sich Jemandens Befehlen rasch fügen’; ‫ �ل ب��ي���ك‬labbayka ‘hier bin ich zu deinem Diensten’ (Wahrmund II 619); ~ Negev labba ‘he acceded, granted’: labbayt ṭalabak ‘I granted your request’ (inform) ~ Mosul ⟨labbay⟩ ‘yes’ (Al-Bakrī 1972: 439) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨labbayk⟩ ‘at your service’ (Corriente 1997: 476). 630

l-ḥ-f

ḥꜣp (MK) ‘verhüllen (mit einem Stoff), bedecken’; ‘to hide’ (Wb III 30; Faulkner ‫�ف‬ ‫ �ل‬laḥafa 1962: 163) ~ Jibb elḥéf ‘bury, cover over’ (Johnstone 1981: 162) || Ar ���‫ح‬ ‘wrap in a garment’; liḥāf, pl luḥuf ‘sheet wrapper, cloth; blanket’ (Hava 1982: 680); ~ Tunis lḥāf ‘vêtement formé d’une pièce d’étoffe dans laquelle on s’enveloppe’ (D. Cohen 1975: 154) ~ Oman lḥāf, pl lŭḥf ‘Decke’ (Reinhardt 1894: 71) ~ Iraq lḥēf ‘quilt’ (Abu-Haidar 1991: 191) ~ Aleppo lḥēf, pl ləḥf ‘couverture de lit piquée, en laine ou en coton, sur l’envers de laquelle est cousu un drap blanc malḥafe’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 748) ~ Palmyra lḥēf ‘drap supérieur’ (Cantineau 1934 II 24) ~ Kəndērīb lḥēf, pl lḥēfāt ‘Steppdecke, Deckbett’: lḥēfātu ‘sein Bettzeug’; ləffāḥa, pl -āt ‘Kopftuch’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 131) ~ Palest liḥāf, pl luḥuf/ liḥfe ‘Steppdecke’ (Bauer 1957: 289; Dalman VII 179) ~ Egypt laḥāf, pl alḥifa/ liḥafāt ‘bed quilt, cotton blanket’ (Spiro 1895: 536) ~ Djidjelli lḥāf ‘voile’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 265) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨liḥāf, pl alḥuf⟩ ‘bedcover’ (Corriente 1997: 477) ~ Rwala yelḥafūnaha ‘they surround them completely’ (Musil 1928: 654). 631

l-ḥ-q

ḥꜣq (MK) ‘to take as booty, plunder goods, capture towns, carry off captives’; ‘erbeuten, gefangen nehmen; Städte und Ländern erobern’; ḥꜣqt ‘plunder (n)’; ḥꜣqw ‘plunderer’ (Ember 1930: 97; Faulkner 1962: 163; Wb III 32; Ember 1930:

629. l-b-y – 634. l-ḥ-y

295

‫ �ل‬laḥiqa � 18); (LE) ma=ra=qi=ḥa=ta ‘flee, flight, retreat’ (Hoch 1994: 142) || Ar �‫ح ق‬ ‘erreichen, erholen; erwischen, verfolgen’ (Wahrmund I 626); ~ Egypt laḥaq ‘to reach, overtake’ (Spiro 1895: 537) ~ Marazig lḥeg ‘rattraper, suivre pour rattraper; s’imposer à qqn, dominer par la force, la violence’ (Boris 1958: 553) ~ Najd liḥiǵ, yalḥag ‘catch up, reach, overtake, come to the rescue of’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 440) ~ Aleppo ləḥeq ‘atteindre, rejoindre, rattraper (qqn) en courant ou en marchant, arriver à temps à un endroit’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 749); ḥəgəl, yəḥgal ‘bekommen, erwischen’ (Sabuni 1980: 208) ~ S.E. Anatolia ləḥeq ‘anholen, erwischen’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 389) ~ Oman lḥoq ‘treffen’ (Reinhardt 1894: 29). 632

l-ḥ-m¹

nḥb (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘harness, yoke’; ‘Joch für Pferde und Rinder; Pferde anschirren’; nḥbw ‘yoke-oxen’ (Faulkner 1962: 136; Wb II 293) ~ Copt ⲛⲟⲩϩⲃ ‘to ‫ �ل‬laḥama ‘verbinden’ � yoke (beasts) to the water wheel’ (Crum 1939: 243a) || Ar �‫ح‬ ‫م‬ (Wahrmund II 627); mulāḥim ‘bien tordu et fort (cordon, corde)’ (DAF II 978). 633

l-ḥ-m²

Dem mlẖ/mrẖ ‘Streit, Kampf’; mẖl ‘Kampf, Kämpfer’ (DG 170, 169, 177) ~ Copt ⲙⲗⲁϩ ‘battle, quarrel’ (Crum 1939: 165b) ~ Heb [‫ ] ָל ַחם‬lāḥam ‘to fight, do battle’ (BDB 535); ~ Lebanon malḥame ‘combat sanglant où il y a des morts et des blessés’ (Denizeau 1960: 472) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨malḥama, pl malāḥim⟩ ‘battle’ (Corriente 1997: 478). 634

l-ḥ-y

nẖ (Pyr) ‘jaw’ (Ember 1930: 84) ~ Heb ‫ ֶל ִחי‬leḥī ‘jaw, cheek’ (BDB 534) ~ Ḥar ‫ �ل‬laḥy ‘chin’ (Hava 1982: 682); meleḥáw ‘side of jaw’ (Johnstone 1977: 83) || Ar � ‫ح�ي‬ ~ Najd liḥiyy, pl luwāḥi ‘cheeks, jaws’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 455) ~ Damascus ləḥye, pl ləḥa ‘beard’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 20) ~ Aleppo ləḥye, pl ləḥa ‘barbe’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 750) ~ Palest liḥya, pl liḥa ‘Bart’ (Bauer 1957: 41) ~ Egypt liḥya ‘beard’ (Spiro 1895: 537) ~ Morocco leḥya, pl lḥi ‘id.’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 20) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨laḥya⟩ ‘id.’ (Corriente 1997: 478).

296

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

635

l-s-b

nsb (Pyr) ‘to bite (snake, scorpion), lap up, lick’; ‘lecken, belecken (auch Kuh das Kalb), auflecken; verschlingen, lecken’ (Ember 1914: 111; Faulkner 1962: 139; Hannig 2003: 661; Wb II 334) || Ar �‫ �ل����س� ب‬lasaba ‘to sting’; lasiba ‘to lick’ (Hava 1982: 685). 636

l-s-ʿ

nsq ‘stechen’ (Calice 1936: 67) || Ar ‫ �ل��س‬lasaʿa ‘stechen (Skorpion), beißen ‫ع‬ (Schlange)’ (Wahrmund II 635); ~ Lebanon laswaʿ ‘sting (mosquito)’ (Frayha 1973: 160) ~ Lebanon laswaʿ ‘piquer’ (Denizeau 1960: 474) ~ Palest lasaʿ ‘stechen (Schlange, Biene)’ (Bauer 1957: 287) ~ Egypt laswaʿ ‘to urge, hurry, strike (with a lash)’; lasaʿ ‘sting’ (Spiro 1895: 539). 637

l-s-n

ns (Pyr) ‘tongue’; ‘die Zunge, Flamme’ (Ember 1930: 86; Wb II 320; Faulkner 1962: 139; Hannig & Vomberg 1999: 220); nṯ Nebenform zu nś ‘Zunge’ (Sethe 1962: 145) ~ Dem rs/ls ‘Zunge’; ls=k ‘deine Zunge’ (DG 253, 263) ~ Copt ⲗⲁⲥ ‘tongue’ (Crum 1939: 144b; Vycichl 1989: 26) ~ Heb ‫ ָלׁשֹון‬lāšōn ‘tongue’ (BDB 546)

‫ن‬

‫ة‬

‫أ‬

|| Ar � ‫ �ل��س�ا‬lisān, pl ����‫ � �ل����سن‬ʾalsinah ‘language, tongue’ (Hava 1982: 685); ~ Aleppo lsēn, pl -āt/ləsən ‘langue d’animal; langue d’homme; langue qui se parle, idiome’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 752) ~ Palmyra lsēn, pl lesne ‘langue’ (Cantineau 1934 II 1) ~ Palest lsān, pl -āt/alsine/alsun/ilsin/lisne ‘Zunge, Sprache eines Volkes’ (Bauer 1957: 380, 283) ~ Egypt lisān, pl alsina ‘tongue, language’ (Spiro 1895: 539) ~ Malta ⟨ilsien, pl ilsna⟩ ‘lingua, loquela’ (Vassalli 1796: 442). Cf. Ghomara (Berber) iles ‘tongue’ (Murigh 2016: 404).

638

l-š-l-š

nš (LE) ‘erschauern, erzittern’; nšni҆ ‘rage, storm, foul weather’ (Calice 1936: 67; ‫ � ش‬lašlāš ‘flur‫ل���� ش‬ ‫ � ش‬lašlaša ‘to be flurried by fear’; ��‫ل����لا ش‬ Faulkner 1962: 140) || Ar ���‫�ل‬ � ried, restless’ (Hava 1982: 685).

297

635. l-s-b – 642. l- ʿ -b

639

l-š-y

nš (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘to expel’; ‘vertreiben, verdrängen’; nšnš ‘to tear up documents’ (Faulkner 1962: 140, 141; Wb II 337) || Ar ���‫ لا ش‬lāšā ‘to destroy, annihilate’ (Hava 1982: 685); ~ Palest lāša ‘vernichten’; mulāšāt- ‘Vernichtung’ (Bauer 1957: 336) ~ Damascus tlāša ‘to die away’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 66) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nilašši⟩ ‘annihilate’ (Corriente 1997: 481) ~ Lebanon tlāša ‘perdre ses forces, décliner, être prés de la mort (malade)’ (Denizeau 1960: 474) ~ Morocco tlāša ‘tomber de vétusté, se délabrer’ (Prémare XI 48). 640

l-ṭ-ʾ

‫أ‬

ndj (Pyr) ‘niederschlagen’ (Wb V 367) || Ar �‫ �ل��ط‬laṭa‌ʾa ‘to beat s.o. on the back’ (Hava 1982: 686); ~ Aleppo laṭa laḥáda ‘s’embusquer sur le passage de qqn’ (Barthélemy 1935– 69: 756). 641

l-ṭ-m

ndb (Pyr) ‘verwunden (mit den Hörnern)’ (Wb V 367) || Ar �‫ �ل��ط‬laṭama ‘to slap, ‫م‬ knock’ (Hava 1982: 687); ~ N. Yemen laṭam ‘schlagen’ (Behnstedt 1987: 298) ~ Aleppo laṭam ‘heurter (qqn)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 756) ~ Egypt laṭam ‘to strike the face with the hands’ (Spiro 1895: 541) ~ Palest tlaṭṭam ‘se frapper’ (Denizeau 1960: 475) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨laṭmah, pl liṭam⟩ ‘slap’ (Corriente 1997: 481). 642

l-ʿ-b

ْ

i҆bꜣ (Pyr) ‘to dance’; ‘tanzen, Tänzer’ (Faulkner 1962: 15; Calice 1936: 24; Wb I 62)

|| Ar �‫ �ل�ع� ب‬laʿb/liʿb/laʿib ‘Scherz, Unterhaltung, Sport’ (Wahrmund II 640); ~ N. Yemen liʿbin ‘Tanz, Spiel’ (Behnstedt 1987: 299) ~ Najd liʿb, liʿbah ‘song, playful, dancing movements’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 441); laʿʿābeh ‘spielende Mädchen’ (Hess 1938: 142) ~ Ḥassāniyya lʿab ‘jouer au tambour’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 87) ~ Palest laʿʿāb hal-ḥabl ‘danseur de corde’ (Denizeau 1960: 475; Schmidt & Kahle I 90).

298 643

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

l-ġ-y

ꜣʿʿ (LE) ‘Dolmetscher, eine fremde Sprache sprechen’ (Wb I 3) ~ Ge lāʿləʿa ‘stammer, stutter’ (Leslau 1987: 304) ~ Ḥar leġwe ‘nonsense’ (Johnstone 1977: 83) || Ar ‫ � �غل��ا‬laġā/ ��‫ �ل‬laġiya ‘to utter nonsense’ (Hava 1982: 690);

‫غ�ي‬

~ Oman laġwe ‘Sprache’; tloġġīṭ ‘sprechen’; yloġyu bedwiyye ‘[sie] sprechen Beduinensprache’ (Reinhardt 1894: 38, 51, 29) ~ Najd el-laġā/luġweh ‘die Sprache dieses oder jenes Stammes’ (Hess 1938: 57) ~ Daθīna ⟨luġah samǧah⟩ ‘langue étrangère’ (GD 1975) ~ Shammar luġweih ~ Đ̣ afīr laġa ‘language’ (Ingham 1982: 69) ~ Sinai laġa ʿalēh θilmih ‘he accused him of a serious moral fault’ (Stewart 1990: 246) ~ Egypt laġwa wa‌ʾfa ‘schwerer Dialekt’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1999: 270). 644

l-f-f

nfnfn (Pyr) ‘roll’ (Breasted ّ‫ ف‬1930: 541; Wb II 252) ~ Akkad lapāpu ‘twist’ (M. Cohen 2011: 218) || Ar ���‫ �ل‬laffa ‘to roll up; to wrap s.th.’; laflafa ‘to wrap, to cover’ (Hava 1982: 690, 691); cf. 266. r-f-f; ~ Egypt laflif ‘to wrap up’ (Spiro 1895: 542) ~ Sinai laff ‘to turn around’; laflaf ‘going around, wandering around’ (Stewart 1990: 245) ~ Lebanon laff ‘se plier, s’enrouler, s’assembler autour’ (Feghali 1935: 176); laflaf ‘to repeat’ (Frayha 1973: 162) ~ S.E. Anatolia laflaf ‘s’enrouler’ (Grigore 2007: 95) ~ Kəndērīb laff ‘wickeln’; laflaf, jlafləf ‘umeinanderwickeln’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 131) ~ Aleppo laff ‘enrouler, envelopper, entortiller, empaqueter’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 760) ~ Palest laff ‘wickeln’; laffafāt ‘Wickelgamaschen’ (Bauer 1957: 362). 645

l-q-y

rqw (MK) ‘opponent, enemy’; ‘Widerracher, Feind, Gegner; abwehren’ (Ember 1911: 93, 1930: 75; Wb II 456; Erman 1904: 75; Faulkner 1962: 153; Hannig 1995: ‫ق‬ 479) || Ar ‫ لا �ى‬lāqā ‘encounter face to face’ (Hava 1982: 694); ~ Rwala talāga ‘to meet in battle’; to clash’; mlāga ‘encounter, armed clash, battle, duel’ (Musil 1928: 528, 553; Kurpershoek 1995: 442) ~ Damascus lāqa ‘meet’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 148) ~ S.E. Anatolia laqqa ‘angehen’; ltaqa ‘treffen, sich streiten’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 392) ~ Iraq lāga ‘encounter, meet’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 426) ~ Palest lāqa ‘finden’ (Bauer 1957: 112; Schmidt & Kahle 1918 I 81*) ~ Marazig ṭalagga ‘saisir au vol, happer’ (Boris 1958: 561) ~ Morocco tlaqa ‘to meet, bump into’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 123, 26).

299

643. l-ġ-y – 648. l-m-m

646

l-k-k

nṯṯ (OK) [< *lčč] ‘bonds’; ‘die Fessel, fesseln, gefesselt sein; etwas binden an etwas anderes (mit m); die Banden mit denen der Mund der ّToten verschlossen ist’ (Faulkner 1962: 143; Wb II 367; Calice 1936: 167) || Ar ‫ �ل�ك‬lakka ‘to cuff’ �‫ �ل ك‬likāk ‘a (Hava 1982: 694); ‘compressus, angustus fuit’ (Freytag 1837: 564); ‫��اك‬ pressing or crowding’; ‘Gedränge, Engigkeit’; lakīk ‘fest, kompakt, stark’ (Lane 3013; Ullmann 1991: 1244); ~ Iraq lakk ‘to seal, fasten securely’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 426) ~ E. Arabia lakkak ‘to seal tightly’ (Holes 2001: 482) ~ Lebanon lakk ‘plier sous la charge (bête de somme)’ (Denizeau 1960: 180) ~ Najd lakk b- ‘to harm, damage, hurt’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 457) ~ Tripoli (Lebanon) lakk ‘chanceler, vaciller’ (El-Hajjé 1954: 26) ~ Morocco lekkek ‘to seal’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 171); ləkkək ‘sceller à la cire, cacheter’ (Prémare XI 79). 647

l-k-ḥ

Dem lkḥ ‘lecken’ (DG 264) ~ Copt ⲗⲱϫϩ ‘lick’ (Crum 1939: 151a) ~ Akkad lêku ‘id.’ (CAD IX 116) ~ Ugar lḥk ‘id.’ (DUL 491) ~ Heb ‫ ָל ַחְך‬lāḥak ‘to lick, lap’

(M. Jastrow 1886: 703) || Ar ��� ‫ �ل ك‬lakaḥa ‘lecken’ (Wahrmund II 651);

‫ح‬

~ Kfarʿabīda laʿwek ‘il mâcha’; lakeḥ/lakkeḥ ‘il lécha’ (Feghali 1919: 24); lakaḥ, yelkaḥ ‘lécher’ (Denizeau 1960: 480). 648

l-m-m

ꜣmm (ME) ‘seize, grasp’; ‘mit der Faust ergreifen’; ꜣmm.t ‘der Griff, der Faust’ ّ (Faulkner 1962: 3; Wb I 10, 11) || Ar ‫ ل‬lamma ‘rassembler, réunir en ramassant ‫م‬ des tous côtés ce qui était dispersé’ (DAF II 1022); ~ Ḥaḍramawt lamlam ‘un intensif de lamm (réunir, ramasser)’ (Landberg 1901: 1726) ~ Sinai ramram ‘to gather bits and pieces together’ (Stewart 1990: 258) ~ Najd lamm ‘to assemble’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 442) ~ Aleppo lamm ‘rassembler, réunir, quêter’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 766) ~ Lebanon lamlam/lamlem ‘zusammensammeln’; ‘ramasser çà et là’ (Jiha 1964: 40; Denizeau 1960: 482) ~ Kəndērīb lamm ‘sammeln, zusammennehmen’; lamlam ‘aufsammeln’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 133) ~ Palest lamm ‘sammeln’ (Bauer 1957: 251) ~ Sudan lamlam ‘collect’ (LDA 447) ~ Egypt lamm ‘gather, collect’ (Spiro 1895: 547) ~ Tunis ləmm ‘il a amassé’ (D. Cohen 1975: 99).

300 649

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

l-h-b

rhb (ME) ‘Glut des Feuers’ (Wb II 440) ~ Heb ‫ ַל ַהב‬lahab ‘flame, blade’ (BDB 529) ~ Copt ⲗϩⲱⲃ ‘steam, vapour’ (Crum 1939: 149b) || Ar �‫ ��ل�ه� ب‬lahiba ‘to blaze fiercely’ (Hava 1982: 697); ~ Najd lahūb, pl lahāyib ‘Flamme’; lāhūb, pl lawāhīb ‘Glut, Glamme’ (Socin 1901 III 309) ~ Yemen lahab ‘far fiamma’ (Rossi 1939: 208) ~ Rwala lahīb ‘flame, blaze’ (Musil 1928: 582) ~ Daθīna lahabeh ‘flamme’ (GD 2648) ~ Palmyra lahīb ‘flammes’ (Cantineau 1934 II 33) ~ Lebanon lahlab ‘allumer du feu, flamber fort’ (Denizeau 1960: 482); lahhāb ‘qui brûle tout’ (Feghali 1938: 827) ~ Kəndērīb lahbe ‘Flamme’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 133) ~ Diyarbakır lahbīye ‘Flamme, Glut’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 394) ~ Ḥama lahlab bnār ‘in Feuer geraten’ (Lewin 1966: 225) ~ Palest lahabe/lahībe ‘Flamme (lodernd)’; lahhab ‘flammend’ (Bauer 1957: 113; Kampffmeyer 1936: 68) ~ Tripoli (Libya) lehīb ‘fiamma’ (Griffini 1913: 83: 116) ~ Tunis lāləb ‘Il a brulé’ (D. Cohen 1975: 120) ~ Takrūna lheb ‘s’enflammer; commencer à flamber (feu, combustible)’; lahheb ‘allumer un feu flambant’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 3683). 650

l-h-f¹

‫أ ف‬

nhp (Ebers) ‘pulsate, jump up; copulate’; ‘springen’; ‘s’élancer, bondir’ (DLE I

240; Faulkner 1962: 135; Calice 1936: 164; Herbin 1994: 534) || Ar ���‫ � ��ل�ه‬ʾalhafa

‘être avide de …, désirer ardemment quelque chose’ (DAF 1033); ~ Negev lahaf maʿha ‘he had sex with her’; ana malhūf ʿalēha ‘I have a strong desire for her’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi) ~ Daθīna ⟨malhūf⟩ ‘famélique, avide’ (GD 2648) ~ Aleppo lahaf ‘désirer avidemment (qqe)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 769) ~ Lebanon lahaf ‘avaler précipitamment’ (Denizeau 1960: 482) ~ Egypt lahaf ‘snatch, swipe’; ‘anstoßen, anschlagen an etwas’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 802; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 439). 651

l-h-f²

nhp (MK) ‘care, grieve, care for (ḥr)’; ‘sorgen für, beschützen, behüten’ (Faulkner nhp ‘trauern’ 1962: 135, 1969: 329; DLE I 9; Wb II 283, 284; Calice 1936: 66) ~ Dem ‫� ّف‬ (DG 221) ~ Copt ⲛⲉϩⲡⲉ ‘to mourn’ (Crum 1939: 245a) || Ar ���‫ �ل�ه‬lahhafa ‘to grieve for s.o.’ (Hava 1982: 698); ~ Aleppo malhūf ʿala ‘qui regrette vivement qqn’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 769).

649. l-h-b – 654. l-w-š

652

301

l-w-b

i҆bi҆ (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘be thirsty; thirst after’; ‘dürsten, dürstig sein’ (Ember 1930: 30; Faulkner 1962: 15; Barns 1956: 36; Wb I 61) ~ Dem ꜣbj ‘dürsten, Durst’ (DG 3) ~ Copt ⲉⲓⲃⲉ ‘to thirst’ (Crum 1939: 76 a, b) || Ar �‫ لا ب‬lāba ‘être altéré de soif et tourner autour de l’eau, de l’abreuvoir, sans pouvoir en approcher’ (DAF 1086); �‫ �لوا ب‬luwāb ‘Durst; Speichel’ (Wahrmund II 659); ~ Aleppo tlawwab ‘être tourmenté de la soif’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 768) ~ Yemen lāb, yilūb ‘nach etwas dürsten oder verlangen, aber nicht erreichen können’ (Behnstedt 2006: 1130) ~ Egypt lōbla, ilōbli ‘beim Bewässern mit dem Schöpfwerk Treiblieder singen’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 428). 653

l-w-ḥ

ꜣḫ (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘schön, herrlich, trefflich, nutzlich sein’; ‘glorious, splendid’ (Brockelmann 1932: 100; Faulkner 1962: 4); ꜣḫ.t ‘Sonnenglanz’; ꜣḫ.t (NK) ‘Auge, besonders vom Auge der Sonne’ (Wb I 13, 17) || Ar ‫ لا‬lāḥa ‘to appear, to ‫ح‬ shine (star), to flash (lightning)’ (Hava 1982: 700); ~ Daθīna lāḥ ‘paraître, briller’; lawḥa ‘apparition d’une chose’ (GD 2655) ~ Rwala lāḥ ‘to appear, to shine, gleam, glitter, flash, sparkle’; xoð min al-fellāḥ ma lāḥ ‘Take from the fellāḥ whatever ye find (or like)’; miθl al-barad min rūs mizneten yalūḥi ‘like hail-stones that glitter from the heights of a black cloud’ (Musil 1928: 150, 209, 90, 224) ~ Palest lāḥ ‘(das Firmament) glänzt, funkelt’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 68) ~ Egypt lāḥ ‘to please, be attractive’ (Spiro 1895: 532). 654

l-w-š

i҆҆wšš (MK) ‘Teig, Brei (als Speise), (ein Medikament) zu einem Brei einrühren und ähnlich’ (Wb I 58) ~ Copt ⲟⲟⲩϣ ‘knead, bruise’ [*lwš] (Crum 1939: 503a) || Aram ‫ לוׁש‬lwš ‘to knead’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 701); ~ Aleppo lāš əṭṭḥīn ‘détremper la farine avec de l’eau avant de la malaxer, de la pétrir’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 769) ~ Lebanon lawwaš ‘détremper la farine’ (Feghali 1935: 24).

302 655

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

l-w-m

i҆m (MK) ‘to moan’; ‘wehklagen, jammern’; i҆mw ‘grief’; ‘Wehklagen’ (Faulkner 1962: 17, 18; Wb I 7) || Ar ‫ لا‬lāma ‘tadeln, schelten, Vorwürfe machen’ ‫م‬ (Wahrmund II 662); ~ Aleppo lām ‘blâmer, réprimander’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 770) ~ Egypt lām ‘to blame’ (Spiro 1895: 533) ~ Tunis lawm ‘reproches’ (D. Cohen 1975: 67) ~ Douz lām ‘er tadelte’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2014: 16) ~ Ḥassāniyya lām ‘critiquer’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 76) ~ Morocco lām ‘blâmer, réprimander, désapprouver’ (Prémare XI 104) ~ Djidjelli lūma ‘blâme’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 256). 656

l-w-n

i҆҆wn (MK) ‘colour; complexion, nature’; ‘Farbe der Blumen, der Haut; Art, Wesen, Charakter’ (Faulkner 1962: 13; Barns 1956: 36; Wb I 52) ~ Copt ⲁⲩⲁⲛ ‘colour’

‫ن‬

‫أ ن‬

(Crum 1939: 20b) || Ar �‫ �لو‬lawn, pl � ‫ � �لوا‬ʾalwān ‘colour, hue, appearance’ (Hava 1982: 702); ~ Oman lōn, pl elwān ‘Art’ (Reinhardt 1894: 72) ~ Aleppo lōn, pl lwān ‘couleur, espéce, sorte, manière’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 773) ~ Rwala lown ‘condition, heart’: waš lownak = waš ḥālak ‘how are you?’; lak lōn ‘thou art right’ (Musil 1928: 212, 432) ~ Egypt lōn ‘colour, complexion’ (Spiro 1895: 549) ~ Tunis lawn ‘couleur’ (D. Cohen 1975: 67) ~ Mzāb lewn ‘couleur’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 131) ~ Djidjelli lūn ‘couleur, espèce’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 254) ~ Tangier nowl, pl nwāl ‘couleur, espèce’ (W. Marçais 1911: 483) ~ Morocco lun ‘color’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 35) ~ Malta ⟨lewn, pl lwien⟩ ‘colore’ (Vassalli 1796: 437; Aquilina 1987: 742). 657

l-w-y

rwj ‘go away, depart’; ‘fortgehen, weichen, sich bewegen für jemanden’ (Faulkner 1962: 147; Wb I 406) || Ar ‫ �لو�ى‬lawā ‘biegen, drehen, nach Rechts und Links wenden’ (Wahrmund II 663); ~ Ḥaḍramawt māwi ‘rentrer chez soi, returner dans son pays’ [< lawā] (Landberg 1901: 1599) ~ Yemen lawa, yilwi ‘to turn (intr.), to wander, stroll about’ (Piamenta 1991: 455) ~ E. Arabia lawa ‘to go round, visit in turn’; lēwa ‘type of dance, performed by former slaves’ (Holes 2001: 486, 488) ~ Najd lāwa ‘to move back and forth; twist, move around; to evade, recoil’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 443)

655. l-w-m – 660. l-y-m

303

~ Palest lawa ‘umbiegen’ (Bauer 1957: 313) ~ Egypt luwa ‘to bend, twist’ (Spiro 1895: 549) ~ Morocco lwa ‘tourner (en marchant), contourner, oblique, passer le coin d’une rue’ (Prémare XI 108) ~ Malta ⟨lewa, jilwi⟩ ‘torcere, girare, piegare, voltare’ (Vassalli 1796: 441). 658

l-y-s

n.s (negative particle) (Faulkner 1962: 3): ni҆s mi҆tw.k ‘one not thy equal’ (Gardiner 1957: §257); N wśḫ i҆s ‘it was not broad’ (Gunn 1924: 200) || Ar ‫ �ل��ي��س‬laysa ‘es war / ist nicht’ (Wahrmund II 665); ~ Oman lēs (Reinhardt 1894: 282) ~ Yemen lāys/lēs ‘there isn’t’; laysayn ‘absolutely not’ (Piamenta 1991: 456); lēs/lēs ‘nichts, es gibt nicht, nein’ (Behnstedt 1993: 191) ~ Marazig lāysa (s’emploie sans nuance pédante, comme particule de négation à valeur emphatique): ʿāhed ʿāhed lāysa gatli ‘sur ma foi, non certes, elle ne m’a point dit’ (Boris 1958: 569) ~ Morocco līs (négation): l-məktūb, līs ʿlīh/menno hṛōb ‘il n’y a pas d’echappature au destin, on ne peut échapper à ce qui est écrit’ (Prémare XI 113) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨laysa/las/lis⟩ ‘not’: ⟨las lī fīhā amal⟩ ‘I have no hope regarding her’ (Corriente 1997: 489). Regarding the uninflected reflexes of laysa in the Arabic vernaculars, see Blau 1966–7 II, 305.

659

l-y-l

nn (Gr) ‘Finsternis, Nacht; auch als Nordgrenze der Welt’ (Wb II 274) || Saf ll ‘night’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 645) ~ Ar ‫ ��لي��ل‬layl ‘night’ (Hava 1982: 704); ~ N. Yemen laylah ‘Nacht’ (Behnstedt 1987: 300) ~ Aleppo lēl ‘nuit’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 769) ~ Palest lēl ‘Nacht’ (Bauer 1957: 214) ~ Egypt lēl ‘night’ (Spiro 1895: 549) ~ Malta ⟨lejl, pl ljieli⟩ ‘night’; ⟨lejla, pl lejliet⟩ ‘evening’ (Aquilina 1987: 738–9). 660

l-y-m

‫أ‬ ꜣmj (Med) ‘mix’; ‘mischen, vermengen’ (Faulkner 1962: 3; Wb I 10) || Ar ��‫إ� ��لت‬ ‫م‬ ʾilta‌ʾama ‘sich versammeln’ (Wahrmund II 614) || Ar �‫ �م�ل��ت ئ‬multa‌ʾim ‘united, col‫م‬ lected’ (Hava 1982: 674);

304

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

~ E. Arabia layyam ‘collect, gather together’ (Holes 2000: 151) ~ Najd talāyam ‘to get toget her, assemble’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 444) ~ Al-Balqāʾ lāyam ‘to meet’ (Palva 1992: 176) ~ Rwala layyamnāhom ‘we had them all assembled’ (Musil 1928: 444) ~ Egypt layyam ‘begegnen’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1999: 398) ~ Sinai lāyam ‘to encounter s.o. by chance’ (Stewart 1990: 247) ~ Mzāb ilāymu ‘ils rassemblent’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 131) ~ Djidjelli lāyəm ‘il a rassemblé’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 63) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨atlāʾam⟩ ‘to agree’ (Corriente 1997: 474). M 661

m-ā

m (OK) (negative imperative) ‘do not’ (Faulkner 1962: 100) || Ar ‫ �م�ا‬mā (negative particle): mā adrī ‘I do not know’ (Hava 1982: 705); ~ Palest manīš ‘ich bin nicht’ (Bauer 1957: 218) ~ Egypt ma kānš hena ‘he was not here’ (Spiro 1895: 550) ~ Kəndērīb ṛāḥət u mā ṛaddət ‘sie ging weg und kehrte nicht zurück’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 135) ~ Cypriot Ar má-paxuta ‘I will not marry her!’ (own obs.) ~ Malta ⟨ma marrux⟩ ‘they did not go’ (own obs.). 662

m-ā

m (OK) (interrogative) ‘who? what?’ (Faulkner 1962: 100); n m ‘zu wem?’; r m ‘zu was? zu welchem Zweck?’ (Wb II 4) ~ N. Yemen mā tjawwid ‘was machst du?’ (Behnstedt 1987: 300) ~ Damascus šū-ma ‘so what?’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 262) ~ Palest mālak ‘was ist dir?’ (Bauer 1957: 354) ~ Egypt mālak we māloh ‘what have you got to do with him?’; ma illa rāgil ‘what a man!’ (Spiro 1895: 500) ~ Ḥassāniyya eṃṃa l-u ‘quoi, qu’a-t-il?’ (Taine-Cheikh 1991: 124). 663

m-x-x

jmꜣḫ (MK) ‘Stück ّ Wirbelsäule mit hervorquellenden Rückenmark’ (M. Jastrow ‫ م‬mixāx ‘marrow, brain’ (Hava 1982: 710); � 1886: 740) || Ar ‫ مخ‬muxx, pl ‫�خ�ا خ‬

�

�

~ Yemen muxx, pl muxūx ‘Hirn, Gehirn’ (Behnstedt 2006: 1147) ~ Daθīna muxx ‘moelle, cerveau’ (GD 2678) ~ Iraq muxx ‘medulla, marrow’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 434) ~ Damascus məxx, pl mxāx ‘brain’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 27) ~ Kfarʿabīda məxx, pl mxāx ‘cervelle’ (Feghali 1919: 95) ~ Palest muxx ‘Mark der Knochen; Gehirn’ (Bauer 1957: 200, 127) ~ Egypt muxx, pl amxāx ‘brain, marrow’ (Spiro 1895: 557) ~ Marazig maxxax el-ʿaḍam ‘enlever la moelle d’un

661. m-ā – 667. m-r-ḥ ²

305

os’ (Boris 1958: 575) ~ Djidjelli moxx ‘moelle, cervelle’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 250) ~ Morocco moxx, pl mxāx ‘cerveau, moelle’ (Prémare XI: 149–150) ~ Malta ⟨moħħ, pl mħuħ⟩ ‘midollo, cervello’ (Vassalli 1796: 514). 664

m-d-d

mdd (NK) ‘Mass für Wein’ (Wb II 183) ~ Akkad middatu ‘measure of capacity’ ّ (CAD XI 46) ~ Heb ‫ ִמ ָּדה‬middāh ‘measure’ (BDB 551) || Ar ‫ �م�د‬mudd ‘measure of several standards’ (Hava 1982: 712); ~ Palmyra mēdde ‘mesure que l’on fixe sur les bords d’un tissu pour le rendre plus rigide et droit’ (Cantineau 1934 II 31) ~ Tangier mudd ‘une mesure de capacité en usage pour les légumes secs et pour les céréales’ (W. Marçais 1911: 464). 665

m-d-š

bdš (Pyr) ‘to become faint, weak, exhausted’; ‘ermatten, schlaff werden (Arme, Füsse, Herz, Auge); schwach sein’; bdšt ‘weakness’ (Faulkner 1962: 86; Calice 1936: 30; Wb I 487) || Ar ���‫ �م�د ش‬madiša ‘become dim, sunken, through hunger or heat (eye)’; ‘sich verdunkeln, trüben (Auge)’ (Hava 1982: 712; Wahrmund II 751). 666

m-r-ḥ¹

mrḥ.t ‘Salbe; Öl, Fett (von Tieren und Pflanzen, als Salbmittel, ..)’; ‘oil’; mrḥ ‘salben’ (Wb II 111; Hannig 1995: 349; van der Plas & Borghouts 1998: 129; DLE I 194) ~ Dem mrḥ ‘Salbe, Salböl’ (DG 162, 169) ~ Heb ‫ ָמ ַרח‬māraḥ ‘rub, spread by rubbing’ (Clines V 484) || Ar ‫ �مر‬maraḥa/ ‫ �مر خ‬maraxa/ ‫ �م ّر‬marraḥa ‘anoint’ (Hava ‫ح‬ � ‫ح‬ 1982: 715); ~ Lebanon maraḥ ‘enduire (une maison) de terre glaise délayée, recrépir’; marraḥ ‘couvrir d’un enduit’ (Denizeau 1960: 491) ~ Daθīna maraḥ ‘enduire, oindre, dû probablement à une variation phonétique de mrx’ (GD 2685–87). 667

m-r-ḥ²

‫أ‬

mꜣḥ (MK) ‘als Ortsbezeichnung’; mꜣḥ ‘pasture’ (Wb II 31; Faulkner 1962: 103) || Ar ‫ � �مر‬ʾamraḥa ‘lâcher et faire aller au pâturage’ (DAF 1087); ‫ح‬

306

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

~ Oman mrāḥ ‘freier Platz’ (Reinhardt 1894: 50) ~ Najd mrāḥ ‘the place near the tent where where the camels rest at night’ (Sowayan 1992: 296); miriḥ ‘die Lagerplätze des Viehs in der Nähe der Zelte’ (Hess 1938: 62) ~ Palest yimraḥ ‘Umherlaufen der Schafe’; mrāḥ ‘Umherlaufen’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 69) ~ Sinai mrāḥ ‘place where the night is spent’ (Stewart 1990: 249) ~ Egypt yitmarraḥ ‘für die Nacht lagern’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1999: 398) ~ Rwala marḥ al-ʿarab ‘an old camping place’; amraḥ ‘to spend the night’ (Musil 1928: 78, 366) ~ Najd marraḥ ‘to let the animals rest at night’; mrāḥ, pl mirḥ ‘place near the tent where the camels rest at night’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 459) ~ Al-Balqāʾ imraḥ ‘to spend the night’ (Palva 1992: 176) ~ Khābūra marāḥ ‘a dry place for the camels to rest’; marraḥ ‘make camels lie down’ (Brockett 1985: 195) ~ Algeria mrāḥ ‘enceinte, cour entourée’ (Lentin 1959: 276). 668

m-r-x

mꜣẖ (MK) [< *mrḫ] ‘verbrennen durch Feuer’ (Wb II 31) ~ Copt ⲙⲟⲩϩ ‘to burn’ (Crum 1939: 210a,b) || Ar ‫ �مر خ‬marx ‘Baum, dessen Holz leicht Feuer fängt (Salix

�

campestris)’ (Wahrmund II 765). 669

m-r-r¹

mrt/mrrt (MK) ‘street, avenue of statues’; ‘Strasse einer Ortschaft, Häuserviertel’ (Faulkner 1962: 112; Wb II 110) || Saf mr ‘to pass’ (Al-Jallad 2015: 328) ~ Ar ‫�م ّر‬ marra ‘an Einem vorbeigehen, vorübergehen’ (Wahrmund II 757); ~ Yemen mamarr ‘sentiero’ (Rossi 1939: 237) ~ Damascus mamarr ‘aisle, hall, passage’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 6, 110, 169) ~ Bišmizzīn mmarr ‘Passage’ (Jiha 1964: 154) ~ Khawētna maṛṛ ‘er zog vorbei’ (Talay 1999: 49) ~ Negev iða maṛṛ ʿalēk ‘if he passes you by’ (Henkin 2010: 304) ~ Egypt mamarr ‘place of passage’ (Spiro 1895: 560) ~ Marazig mərīr/murūr, pl meṛṛāwa ‘sentier’ (Boris 1958: 577) ~ Morocco mrīra ‘sentier’ (Prémare XI 169) ~ Oman mrūr ‘vorbeigehen’ (Reinhardt 1894: 45) ~ Aleppo marr, ymə́rr ‘passer par chez qqn’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 783) ~ Takrūna maṛṛ, ymuṛṛ ‘passer son chemin’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 3787) ~ Ḥassāniyya maṛṛ, ymuṛṛ ‘il s’est égaré’; mrīra ‘alley, path’ (D. Cohen 1963: 96; Heath 2004: 143) ~ Malta ⟨marru⟩ ‘they went’ (own obs.).

668. m-r-x – 672. m-r-z

670

307

m-r-r²

mr (Med) ‘bind, bundle, bunch’; ‘binden, etwas zusammenbinden, fesseln’; mrw ‘strip of cloth’; ‘Binde, Zeugstreifen’ (Ember 1930: 72; Faulkner 1962: 111; DLE I 192; Breasted 1930: 536; Tait 1977; 114; Wb II 105; Hannig 1995: 347) ~ Dem mr/ml ‘binden; sich gürten; Verlockung’ (DG 166, 170, 169) ~ Copt ⲙⲟⲩⲣ ‘bind, gird, tie’ (Crum 1939: 180a) ~ Ḥar merriyye ‘a kind of necklace’ (Johnstone

‫أ‬

1977: 89) || Ar ‫ � �م ّر‬ʾamarra to twist a rope (strongly)’ (Hava 1982: 713); marīrah, pl marāyir ‘ficelle ou corde longue, mince et solide’; marār ‘Strick’ (DAF 1084; Wahrmund II 759); ~ Yemen marīr, pl marāyir ‘Seil’ (Behnstedt 2006: 1152) ~ Najd mirīrah, pl marāyir ‘long ropes of twisted fibre’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 460) ~ Sinai marīrih/ mirīrih, pl marāyir ‘headrope’ (C. Bailey 1991: 453; Stewart 1990: 250) ~ Marazig mirēra, pl maṛāyer ‘cordelette du métier à tisser’ (Boris 1958: 577) ~ Morocco mrār ‘corde pour attacher les bovins; corde pour attacher les charges sur un chameau’ (Prémare XI 169) ~ Khābūra mārriya ‘a necklace’ (Brockett 1985: 195) ~ Oman murriyya ‘Halsschmuck’ (Reinhardt 1894: 388). 671

m-r-r³

mr (LE) ‘die hölzerne Hacke (als Schriftzeichen)’ (Wb II 98; Calice 1936: 33); mrt ‘Brett’ (Hannig & Vomberg 1999: 576) ~ Akkad marru ‘spade, shovel’ (CAD 287; AHW 612) || Ar ‫ �م ّر‬marr ‘spade’ (Hava 1982: 713); The triangular shape of the hieroglyph for this Ancient Egyptian lexeme is echoed in the gloss of the Arabic cognate.

~ Palmyra maṛṛ, pl mṛūṛ ‘bêche dont le fer est triangulaire et le manche pourvu d’un batonnet transversal’ (Denizeau 1960: 490; Cantineau 1934 II 55) ~ Kəndērīb maṛṛ ‘Spaten, Grabscheit’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 139). 672

m-r-z

mꜣz (Pyr) ‘Messer; verwunden, schlachten’ (Wb II 31, 32) ~ Akkad masdaru ‘a ‫�ز‬ knife’ (CAD X 323) || Ar ‫ �مر‬maraza ‘couper un morceau p. ex., de pâte; frapper quelqu’un avec la main’ (DAF 1089).

308 673

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

m-r-ʿ

mr ‘Viehweide’ (Wb II 97) [< *mrʿ] || Ar ‫ �مر‬marʿ ‘abondance de pâturages’; ‫ع‬ maraʿa ‘abonder en pâturages’ (DAF 1093); ~ Baghdad marʿa, pl marāʿi ‘meadow, grazing land, pasture’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 190) ~ Palest marʿa, pl marāʿi ‘Viehweide’ (Bauer 1957: 357) ~ Egypt marʿa ‘meadow, pasture’ (Spiro 1895: 229) ~ Ḥassāniyya mertaʿ, pl mrāteʿ ‘pâturage’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 111) ~ Malta ⟨mergħa⟩ ‘pasture’ (Aquilina 1990: 810). 674

m-r-h

mr (Ebers) ‘sick, ill, diseased’; ‘das Kranksein, die Krankheit; Schlimmes’ (Faulkner 1962: 110; Wb II 96) || Ar ‫ �مره‬mariha ‘krank sein (Auge)’ (Wahrmund II 774). 675

m-z-n

śnm [*znm] (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘Regenflut, Regenströme’ (Wb IV 165; Calice 1936: 79); snmw ‘squalls of rain’; wꜣwt snm ‘rain-swept roads’ (Faulkner 1962: 232) ~ Sab ðnm ‘rain’; ‘pluie’ (Jamme 1962: 431; Avanzini 1980: 223) ~ Ge zanma ‘to rain’; zanām ‘rain (n)’ (Leslau 1987: 728) ~ Amh zännäbä ‘to rain’; zənab/ ‫ن‬ zənam ‘rain’ (Kane 1991: 1650, 1651) || Ar � ‫ �م�ز‬muzn ‘rain cloud’ (Hava 1982: 718); ~ Iraq mizna, pl mizan ‘rain, shower’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 438) ~ Rwala mizne ‘a small cloud, originally white, which is joined by many other similar clouds (yitafāzeʿen) and eventually produces heavy rain’ (Musil 1928: 5, 345) ~ Najd mizin ‘Wolke’; mizin, n.u. miznah, pl mzūn ‘rain clouds’ (Socin 1901 III 115; Kurpershoek 1999: 460) ~ Awlād ʿAli (Libya) el-mizn (= elmaṭar) (Hartmann 1899: 95) ~ Yemen mizn ‘Regen’; muzn ‘Regenwolke, Regen’ (Behnstedt 2006: 1157); muzn, pl amzān ‘rain cloud’ (Piamenta 1991: 465) ~ Marazig mazzan ‘paraître s’élever sur l’horizon; brume qui s’élève un peu au-dessus de l’horizon, surtout le matin après la pluie’ (Boris 1958: 581) ~ Morocco muzn, pl mzān/mzūn; məzna ‘nuage de pluie, pluie bienfaisante’ (Prémare XI 190) ~ Ḥassāniyya məzne, pl mzūn ‘nuage’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 103) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨muznah, pl muzan⟩ ‘rain-cloud’ (Corriente 1997: 501).

309

673. m-r- ʿ – 678. m-s-y

676

m-s-ḥ

mśḥ ‘gehen’ (Wb II 147; Quack 2012: 379–386) || Ar ��‫ �م��س‬masaḥa fī l-ʾarḍi ‘he

‫ح‬

set forth journeying through the land, or earth’; ‘mesurer (la terre, les champs, pour en connaître la superficie), … de là, traverser, parcourir, et, pour ainsi dire, ْ arpenter la terre; marcher toute la journée (se dit des chameaux)’; ��‫ �م��س‬misḥ,

‫ح‬

pl ‫ �م��سو‬musūḥ ‘the main part, and middle, of a road’ (Lane 1713; DAF II 1103); ‫ح‬ ~ Al-Andalus ⟨atamassaḥ⟩ ‘praetereo’ (Dozy II 597) ~ Cypriot Ar tmassex, pkyitmassex ‘to go away’ [< msḥ] (Borg 2004: 428) ~ Palest masaḥ ‘Land vermessen’ (Bauer 1957: 336) ~ Egypt masaḥ el-arḍ ‘he measured the land’; misāḥa ‘land measurement, surface area, survey’ (Spiro 1895: 565) ~ Ḥaḍramawt masaḥ ‘raser = passer tout près, passer sur’ (Landberg 1901: 715). 677

m-s-k

msq (Pyr) ‘leather’; cf. mskꜣ ‘skin, leather’; ‘Haut, Fett eines Tieres; Leder als Stoff fur Riemen, Schuhe’ (Faulkner 1962: 118; Wb II 150) ~ Akkad mašku ‘leather’ (M.

‫ة‬ ْ II 798); ‫ �م��س�ك‬mask, pl ‫ �م��سوك‬musūk ‘freshly flayed skin’ (Hava 1982: 720).

Cohen 2011: 122) || Ar ��� ‫ �م��س �ك‬masakah ‘Kopfhaut des Neugeborenen’ (Wahrmund

678

m-s-y

msw.t (Pyr) ‘supper, meal’; ‘Abendbrot, Mahlzeit, Speise’ (Faulkner 1962: 117; Wb II 136, 142; Erman 1904: 55; Calice 1936: 100); msyt ‘repas du soir’ (Herbin 1994: 532) ~ Akkad mūšu(m)/mušītu(m) ‘Nacht’; mūšiš ‘bei Nacht’ (AHW 687, 683)

‫أ‬

~ Ge masya ‘to become evening’ (Leslau 1987: 365) || Ar ‫ � �م��س�ا ء‬ʾamsāʾa ‘entrer dans l’heure du soir’ (DAF II 1107); Ambros (2004: 28) considers Ar ams an “irregular derivate” of msy ‘to be in the evening’.

~ Najd msayyān ‘gegen Abend’ (Socin 1901 III 311) ~ Oman mse ‘Abend, spät’ (Reinhardt 1894: 41, 115) ~ S. Arabia ⟨mamsā⟩ ‘passer la nuit’ (Landberg 1901: 716) ~ Aleppo masa ‘soir’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 788) ~ S.E. Anatolia massa ‘Abend werden’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 407) ~ Lebanon māsa ‘aller voir les gens le soir’; tmassa ‘arriver tard le soir’ (Feghali 1938: 357, 830) ~ Palest masa/msiyye ‘Abend’ (Bauer 1957: 1; Kampffmeyer 1936: 69) ~ Egypt misa ‘evening’ (Spiro 1895: 567) ~ Marazig məsē ‘soir’ (Boris 1958: 583) ~ Djidjelli msa ‘id.’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 258) ~ Sudan amsa ‘to be in the evening’ (LDA 36).

310 679

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

m-š-ṭ

mšdd [*mšṭṭ] ‘comb’ (Takács 2008: 642; Hoch 1994: 164) ~ Copt ⲙϣⲧⲱⲧⲉ ‘peigne (cheveux), peigne (du tisserand)’ (Vycichl 1983: 129) ~ Akkad mušṭu, pl mušṭātu ‫ � ش‬mušṭ ‘comb’ (Hava 1982: 721); ‘comb’ (CAD X 290) || Ar ‫م�����ط‬ ~ Yemen mšoṭṭ ‘pettine’ (Rossi 1939: 227) ~ Damascus məšəṭ, pl mšāṭ ‘comb’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 46) ~ Kəndērīb məšṭ, pl amšāṭ ‘Kamm’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 407) ~ Oman mšoṭṭ ‘Kamm’ (Reinhardt 1894: 50) ~ Yemen mšoṭṭ ‘pettine’ (Rossi 1939: 227) ~ Palmyra mušṭ, pl mšūṭ ‘peigne’ (Cantineau 1934 I 204) ~ Palest mušṭ, pl mšāṭ ‘Kamm’ (Bauer 1957: 169) ~ Tripoli (Libya) mšaṭ ‘pettinare’ (Cesàro 1939: 202) ~ Djidjelli mešta ‘peigne à cheveux’; mšeṭ ‘peigne à carder’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 332, 247). 680

m-š-y

šm (Pyr) ‘go, walk, set out’; ‘gehen’; šmt ‘walking, gait, movements, march (v)’ (Calice 1936: 82; Faulkner 1962: 266; Wb IV 462; DLE II 121) ~ Dem mšʿ ‘gehen’ (DG 181) ~ Copt ⲙⲟⲟϣⲉ ‘to walk, go on land or water’ (Crum 1939: 203b) || Ar ‫ �م ش���ى‬mašā ‘to walk’ (Hava 1982: 722); ~ Najd miša ‘to walk, to go’ (Sowayan 1992: 297) ~ Aleppo məši ‘marcher’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 789) ~ Palest miši ‘gehen, marschieren’ (Bauer 1957: 126) ~ Egypt miši ‘to go, walk, march’ (Spiro 1895: 569) ~ Tunis nḥabb nemši ‘je veux aller’ (D. Cohen 1975: 43) ~ Morocco mši ‘departure’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 49) ~ Malta ⟨mixja⟩ ‘a walk; walking gait’ (own obs.). 681

m-ṭ-r

mtr (Amarna) ‘Flut, Wasser, Überschwemmungswasser’ (Wb II 174); mtrw ‘flood’ (Faulkner 1962: 121; DLE 215) ~ Dem mtr ‘Flut, Wasser’ (DG 192) ~ Heb ‫ ָמ ָטר‬māṭār ‘rain’ (BDB 564) ~ Syr mṭar ‘to rain’ (CSD 268) ~ Akkad miṭirtu/miṭru ‘Wasserlauf’; muttāru ‘ein Kanal’ (AHW 663, 1576) ~ Sab mṭrn ‘field watered by rain’ (Biella 1982: 273) || Ar ‫ �م��طر‬maṭara ‘regnen, beregnen (Himmel)’ (Wahrmund II 828); ~ Palest amṭarat as-sama ‘es hat geregnet’ (Bauer 1957: 241) ~ Egypt maṭar/ maṭṭar/naṭṭar ‘to rain’ (Spiro 1895: 572) ~ Damascus maṭar ‘rain’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 186) ~ Nabk maṭōr ‘Regen’ (Gralla 2006: 16) ~ Kəndērīb maṭar ‘id.’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 137) ~ Marazig mṭūrāt ‘sehr viel Regen’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2005: 241).

679. m-š-ṭ – 685. m-l-ǧ

682

311

m-ġ-l

mnʿ.t (Pyr) ‘die Milchkühe’; mnʿ (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘säugen’; ‘nurse’; mnʿy ‘male nurse’ (Wb II 78; Faulkner 1962: 108) ~ Copt ⲙⲟⲟⲛⲉ ‘nurse’ (Crum 1939: 174a) || Ar ‫ � �غم��ل‬maġala ‘als schwangere ein Kind säugen’ (Wahrmund II 856); ‫� �غم��ل‬ maġl/maġal ‘milk of a pregnant woman’ (Hava 1982: 728); ~ Lebanon maġal ‘donner à manger à un animal jusqu’à ce qu’il en ait une indigestion’; nmaġal ‘manger au point d’en avoir une indigestion’ (Denizeau 1960: 500) ~ N. Yemen ʾamtaġal ‘überdrüssig sein’ (Behnstedt 1987: 303) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨yamġul maġl⟩ ‘to press’ (Corriente 1997: 506). 683

m-k-r¹

mkrr ‘zwischen “schwarz” und “weiss” als Farbbezeichnung’ (Wb II 163) || Ar �‫ �م ك‬makara ‘to dye s.th. red’; cf. ‫ � �غم�ر�ة‬maġrah ‘terre rouge, sorte de boue rougeâtre’ ‫�ر‬ (Hava 1982: 730; DAF II 1132); ~ Najd muġir (pl) ‘reddish, russet’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 461) ~ Aleppo məġra ‘ocre rouge’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 794) ~ Palmyra bmaġġrou b-būb ‘ils teignent les portes en rouge’ (Cantineau 1934 II 24) ~ Egypt muġra ‘red ochre, red chalk’ (Spiro 1895: 575). 684

m-k-r²

mkꜣ ‘to be brave, to be determined’; ‘tapfer, kühn (vom Herzen)’ (Englund 1995; �‫ �م ك‬makara ‘agir avec ruse à l’égard de quelqu’un’ (DAF II 1138); Wb II 50) || Ar ‫�ر‬ ~ Aleppo makkār ‘fourbe, trompeur’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 196) ~ Damascus makər ‘shrewdness’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 49) ~ Lebanon mekkāṛ ‘trompeur’ (Feghali 1938: 831) ~  Palest makkār ‘durchtrieben, verschmitzt’; makr ‘Schlauheit’ (Bauer 1957: 81, 339, 259) ~ Egypt makar ‘deceive, practice artifice’; makkār, pl makkārīn ‘deceitful, cunning’ (Spiro 1895: 577) ~ Algeria makra ‘l’astuce’ (Lentin 1959: 281) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨makr⟩ ‘shrewdness, malice’ (Corriente 1997: 507). 685

m-l-ǧ

mnḏ (LE) ‘breast’; ‘die weibliche Brust; die Brust … besonders mit Bezug auf Säugen (die Milch ist in den Brüsten; die Mutter reicht dem Kinde die Brust

312

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

und ähnlich)’; ḥr mnḏ ‘an der Brust (vom Säugling)’ (Wb II 92, 93; Ember 1911: 90); Nfr-mnḏ.wt ‘gut sind die Brüste’ (anthroponym; Scheele-Schweitzer 2014: 92; Ranke 1935: 196) ~ Copt ⲙⲛⲟⲧ ‘breast’ (Crum 1939: 176b) || Ar ‫ �م��ل��ج‬malaǧa � ‘saisir avec le bout des lèvres le sein de la mère’ (DAF II 1143); ~ Aleppo malaš [< *mlž < mlǧ] ‘to chew something soft’ (Al-Asadī VII 195) ~ Lebanon malaš, yemloš ‘manger avec gloutonnerie; manger vite’ (Denizeau 1960: 502–3) ~ N. Yemen xubiz malūj ‘Fladenbrot aus Weizen und Đurah’ (Behnstedt 1987: 303) ~ Cypriot Ar lammeš, pilammeš ‘suck the breast; eat avidly, gulp down, devour; grab’ (own obs.) ~ Ḥassāniyya meylej ‘têter goulûment’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 143). 686

m-l-ḥ¹

ḥmꜣ.t/mariḥa ‘salt’; ‘Salz’ (Faulkner 1962: 170; Edel 1966: 22–23) || Ar ��‫ �م��ل‬milḥ ‫ح‬ ‘salt’ (Hava 1982: 732); ~ Aleppo məlḥ ‘sel’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 196) ~ Palest malḥ ‘Salz’ (Bauer 1957: 251) ~ Egypt malḥ ‘salt’ (Spiro 1895: 579) ~ Tunis məlḥ ‘sel’ (D. Cohen 1975: 141) ~ Malta ⟨melħ⟩ ‘common salt’ (Aquilina 1990: 805). 687

m-l-ḥ²

mnḫ (LE) ‘efficacious, well-disposed, splendid, excellent’; ḥr-mnḫ/r-mnḫ ‘in vortrefflicher Weise’ (Faulkner 1962: 109; Brockelmann 1932: 106; Caminos 1954: 553; Wb II 85; DLE I 189; Jansen-Winkeln 1996: 158); Ḥqꜣt-mnḫt-nt-snt.s šst ‘Die treffliche Herrscherin ihrer Schwester Isis’ (Leitz 2002: 544) ~ Dem mnḫ ‘trefflich sein, wohltätig’ (DG 163) || Ar ��‫ �م�ل��ي‬malīḥ ‘beau (de visage)’ (DAF 11 45);

‫ح‬

Wenn aber dem Mädchen nfrt als Altersstufe beim Manne mnḥ enstspricht (Wb. II 258), so gehört ersteres zu nfr ‘schön’ und entspricht letzteres dem arab. malīḥ ‘schön’, mit dem Ember (1911: 49, 50) mnḫ “richtig, trefflich’ usw. zusammengestellt hatte. (Brockelmann 1932: 106).

~ Aleppo mlīḥ/mnīḥ ‘bon, qui est bon’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 797) ~ Damascus mnīḥ ‘nicely’; ktīr mnīḥ ‘very well’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 158, 261) ~ S.E. Anatolia malēḥ ‘bon’ (Grigore 2007: 77) ~ Lebanon mlīḥ elli ‘il est heureux que’ (Denizeau 1960: 502) ~ Palest mlīḥ/mnīḥ ‘gut’ (Bauer 1957: 144) ~ Tunis mnīḥ ‘bon, bien’ (D. Cohen 1975: 158, 159) ~ Algiers mlēḥ, pl mlāḥ ‘gentil’ (Tapiéro 1971: 159) ~ Morocco mliḥ ‘nice’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 129).

686. m-l-ḥ ¹ – 691. m-n

688

313

m-l-s

ّ

nms ‘to wipe’ (Quack 2012: 379–386) ~ Ge lamaṣa ‘be smooth’ (Leslau 1987: 316) || Ar ‫ �م��ل��س‬mallasa ‘polir, lisser, satiner, rendre uni’ (DAF II 1147);

Cf. Gk μᾰλάσσω ‘make soft’ (GEL 1077) > Mod Gk μαλάσσω/μαλάζω ‘knead, massage’ (Pring 2000: 111).

~ Najd limas ‘to feel, touch, handle’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 442) ~ Yemen lamas ‘toccare’ (Rossi 1939: 242) ~ Palmyra tlammas ‘toucher, tâter’ (Cantineau 1934 II 4) ~ Aleppo mallas, imalles ‘rendre doux au toucher, lisser’ (Barthélemy 1935– 69: 797) ~ Suxne lamas, yilmis ‘berühren’ (Behnstedt 1994: 368) ~ S.E. Anatolia mēləs/məllūs ‘glatt’; mallas ‘glätten (Stein)’ (Vocke & Waldner 412) ~ Lebanon malles ‘caresser, cajoler, flatter’ (Feghali 1933: 93) ~ Iraq ʾamlas, f malsa, pl milis/malsīn ‘smooth, sleek’; limas ‘feel, handle’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 443, 441) ~ Palest malas ‘glatt’ (Bauer 1957: 70); tlammas ‘tasten’ (Schmidt & Kahle 1918: 297) ~ Marazig lmes ‘toucher, tâter’ (Boris 1958: 563) ~ Morocco mles/ males ‘to smooth’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 183) ~ Ḥassāniyya melles ‘aplanir’; emles ‘lisse’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 24, 95, 91) ~ Malta ⟨melles imelles⟩ ‘to caress’ (Aquilina 1990: 806). 689

m-l-ʿ

mꜣʿ ‘to swallow’ (Takács 2008: 62); ʿm ‘verschlucken’ (Wb I 183) || Ar ‫ �م��ل‬malaʿa ‫ع‬ ‘têter sa mère (se dit d’un petit chameau)’ (DAF II 1149); ~ Daθīna malaʿ ‘avaler’ (GD 2717). 690

m-l-l

mnj (MK) ‘Art Krug fur Wein, Bier, Öl, Früchte, Weihrauch u. a., auch wie ein Maß’ (Wb II 66) ~ Ḥar malleh/melāl ‘bowl, basin’ (Johnstone 1977: 88); ~ Oman melle, pl mlāl ‘Schüssel’ (Reinhardt 1894: 71) ~ Daθīna melle, pl mlāl ‘Schale, Schüssel’ (GD 2712) ~ Khābūra melle ‘a china bowl used for keeping coffee-cups under water’ (Brockett 1985: 198). 691

m-n

mn ‘so-and-so, someone’; ‘(Herr) Sowieso, ein gewisser Mann (als Ersatz des Namens)’ (Faulkner 1962: 107; Hannig 1995: 334) ~ Dem mn ‘irgend einer’ (DG

314

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

158) ~ Copt ⲙⲁⲛ ‘certain thing, person’ (Crum 1939: 169b) || Ar �‫ �م� ن‬man ‘who, whom, whoever’ (Hava 1982: 75); ~ Kəndērīb mən/məne ‘wer’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 138) ~ Aleppo men/mən/mīn ‘qui?’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 800, 810) ~ Damascus mīn ‘who?’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 263) ~ Palest mīn ‘Wer?’ (Bauer 1957: 360) ~ Egypt mīn ‘who? whom?’ (Spiro 1895: 587). 692

m-n-n

693

m-n-w

mn (OK) ‘Krank sein, leiden; der Leidende, der Elende’ (Wb I 67) || Ar �ّ‫ �م� ن‬manna ‘to weary’; ‘das Kamel abmüden und schwächen’ (Hava 1982: 736; Wahrmund II 912).

Mnw (Menu [> Gk Мιν]): ancient Egyptian god of fertility and male sexual potency (from the predynastic period; 4th mill. BC) ‘Name des Gottes Min’ (Faulkner 1962: 108; 1969: 321; Wb II 72; Calice 1936: 64); Ḥry-i҆b-ḏw-n-Mnw ‘Der im Hügel des Min ist’ (Leitz 2002: 355) ~ Akkad menû ‘to love, become fond of ّ someone’ (CAD X/2 19) || Ar �‫ � نم‬maniyy; ‫ �م��ن ي���ه‬manyah, pl �‫ �م‬muny ‘Samenfluss’ ‫�ي‬ ‫ن�ي‬ (Wahrmund II 934); Phallically represented, the fertility god Min (or Amun-Min) was the dominant deity of the southern part of the Eastern Desert (cf. Kessler 2001: 418).

~ Iraq mani ‘sperm’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 446) ~ Najd mi/anwah ‘Wunsch’ (Socin 1901 III 311) ~ Egypt mani/many ‘semen’ (Spiro 1895: 583; Badawi & Hinds 1986: 837) ~ Takrūna mənī ‘sperme’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 592) ~ Marazig mənī ‘id.’ (Boris 1958: 592) ~ Morocco māni ‘id.’ (Prémare XI 265) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨maniyy⟩ ‘semen’ (Corriente 1997: 514). 694

m-n-y

mni҆ (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘death’; (intr. vb) ‘to die, dead one’; ‘sterben, begraben werden; der Tod’ (Faulkner 1962: 108, 107; DLE I 185; Hannig 1995: 336, 337) ~ Heb ‫ ְמנִ י‬Mənī ‘god of fate’ (BDB 584) || Saf mny ‘to be decreed; Fate’ (Winnett ‫ّة‬ & Lankester 1978: 647; Al-Jallad 2015: 328) ~ Ar ����‫ �م��ن ي‬maniyyah, pl ‫ �م ن���اي�ا‬manāyā ‘death, fate’ (Hava 1982: 737);

692. m-n-n – 697. m-w- ʾ

315

~ Rwala miniyyah, pl manāya ‘destiny, death’ (Musil 1928: 183, 224) ~ Damascus l-manāya ‘die Schicksal’ (Wetzstein 1906: 24) ~ Lebanon mniyye ‘trépas’ (Denizeau 1960: 505) ~ Yemen maniyyah ‘Tod’ (Behnstedt 2006: 1179) ~ Marazig məniyya ‘mort, trépas’ (Boris 1958: 592) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨maniyyah, pl manāyā⟩ ‘death’ (Corriente 1997: 514). 695

m-h-l

i҆hm (MK) ‘linger, lag; restrain’; ‘langsam gehen’; i҆hm.t ‘detention’ (Faulkner 1962: 28; Wb I 118; Calice 1936: 24) || Ar ‫ ��م�ه�ل‬mahala ‘to act at leisure, without haste’ (Hava 1982: 738); ~ Kəndērīb ʿa mīt mahli ‘in aller Ruhe (1. sg.)’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 139) ~ Damas­ cus sūq ʿala mahlak ‘drive slow!’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 214) ~ Lebanon tmahhal ‘attendre, temporiser, accorder un délai’ (Feghali 1928: 506) ~ Palest tmahhal ‘langsam gehen’; mahl ‘Langsamkeit’ (Bauer 1957: 188) ~ Egypt mahal ‘to give time, grant delay’; mahl ‘slowness’; muhla ‘delay interval’ (Spiro 1895: 584); mahhal ‘mach langsam’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 460) ~ Marazig mhal ‘accorder un delai’ (Boris 1958: 592) ~ Morocco mehhel ‘to slow down’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 182) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨amhal⟩ ‘to grant respite or delay’; ⟨mahlā ʿalīk⟩ ‘take it easy!’ (Corriente 1997: 514). 696

m-h-y

mḥi҆.t (Pyr) ‘cow, milch-cow’; ‘Milchkuh’ (Ember 1914: 110, fn 5; 1930: 76; Faulkner ‫ة‬ 1962: 113; Hannig 2003: 548) || Ar � ‫ ��م�ه�ا‬mahāt, pl ‫ ��م�ه�ا‬mahā ‘wild cow, antelope’ (Hava 1982: 738); ~ Najd mahāh ‘wild cow’ (Sowayan 1992: 298; Kurpershoek 1994: 339); él-mahā (pl) ‘ebenfalls eine Bezeichnung für Gazellen im allgemeinen (nur poetisch)’ (Hess 1938: 85) ~ Rwala baqar al-maha ‘Beatrix antelope’ (Musil 1928: 26) ~ Palest baqar el-wahā/mahā ‘Antilope (Oryx bubalis)’ (Dalman VI 77) ~ N. Yemen mahā ‘Tier mit einem Horn und großen schwarzen Augen’ (Behnstedt 2006: 1181). 697

m-w-ʾ

mi҆w (MK) ‘cat’; ‘der Kater’; mj.t ‘die Katze als heiliges Tier’ (Faulkner 1962: 104; van der Plas & Borghouts 1998: 124; Wb II 42; Te Velde 1967); my (LE) ‘cat’ (DLE

316

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

I 179) ~ Dem mj ‘Kater’; i҆mj ‘Katze’ (DG 30, 151) ~ Copt ⲉⲙⲟⲟⲩⲉ ‘cat’ (Crum 1939: ‫ّة‬ ‫ئة‬ 55b) ~ Akkad nīau ‘mew’ (Parpola 2007: 222) || Ar ���‫ �م�ا ��ئي‬māʾiyyah/���‫ �م�ا ��ئ‬māʾiʾah

‫أ‬

‘chat’; ‫ �م�ا ء‬māʾa ‘miauler (se dit du chat)’; ‫ � �موء‬ʾamwa‌ʾa ‘imiter le miaulement du chat’ (DAF II 1146); ~ Yemen mawwē/mawwa, ymawwi ‘miagolare’; ‘miauen’ (Rossi 1939: 219; Werbeck 2001: 629) ~ Palest mawwa ‘miauen’ (Bauer 1957: 205); īnawwī ‘(die Katze) miaut’ [‘die Katze macht nau’] (Kampffmeyer 1936: 75) ~ Suxne nawwa, ynawwi ‘miauen’ (Behnstedt 1994: 386) ~ Egypt nawwa ‘to mew (cat)’ (Spiro 1895: 617) ~ Kəndērīb nawwa ‘(Katze) miauen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 146) ~ Tunis maġwa ‘miauen’ (Stumme 1896: 180) ~ Kfarʿabida nawwa ‘il a miaulé’ (Feghali 1919: 81) ~ Malta ⟨nawwan, jnawwan⟩ ‘miagolare’ (Vassalli 1796: 535). 698

m-w-h

mw/my [allgemein] ‘water’; ‘Wasser’; mwyt ‘Urin, Harn, das Harnen; Flüssigkeit’; my ‘watery’; mwy ‘be watery’; ‘feucht’ (Ember 1930: 56; Faulkner 1962: 105; Breasted 1930: 534; Hannig 1995: 329–330); myw/mw ‘seed of man’ (Wb I 36; Faulkner 1962: 104, 105); mw ‘tears’ (DLE I 388) ~ Dem mn ‘das Wasser’ (DG 154) ~ Copt ⲙⲟⲟⲩ ‘water’ (Crum 1939: 197b) ~ Akkad mû ‘water, fluid’ (CAD X/2 149) ~ Sab mw ‘water’ (Jamme 1962: 439) || Saf my ‘water, watering place’ (Winnett

‫أ‬

& Lankester Harding 1978: 647) ~ Ar ‫ �م�ا ء‬māʾ, pl ‫ � �موا ه‬ʾamwāh/‫ �مي���ا ه‬miyāh ‘water, juice, sap of plants’ (Hava 1982: 740); ~ Kəndērīb ṃayy ‘Wasser, Saft, Brühe’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 140) ~ Daragözü ṃṃōy ‘Wasser’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 417) ~ Hasköy mōy (Talay 2002: 77) ~ Sinai ṃāy ‘water, water source (well, cistern, pool in rocky ground)’ (Stewart 1990: 250) ~ Najd moyyāt ‘Wasser’ (Socin 1901 III 311) ~ Iraq ṃayy/ṃāy ‘water’ (Blanc 1964: 18). 699

m-w-t

mt ‘die, perish, dead man’; ‘sterben; der Tote’ (Faulkner 1962: 104; Wb II 165– ‫ �م�ا ت‬māt ‘to 167) || Saf mt ‘died’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 645) ~ Ar � ّ ‫ت‬ ‫ت‬ die’; �‫ �مو‬mawt ‘death’; ��‫ �م��ي‬mayyit ‘dead, dying’ (Hava 1982: 739); ~ Aleppo māt ‘mourir’; mōt/mowt ‘mort’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 805) ~ Egypt māt ‘die’; mōt ‘death’; mayyit ‘dead’ (Spiro 1895: 550) ~ Malta ⟨miet, imut⟩ ‘die’; ⟨mejjet⟩ ‘dead’ (Aquilina 1990: 826).

317

698. m-w-h – 703. m-y-ḥ

700

m-w-s

mꜣs (Pyr) ‘Messer’; (Gr) verwunden, schlachten’ (Wb II 31, 32) || Ar ‫ �م�ا ��س‬māsa ‫ �م ����س���ا ت‬mawsiyāt ‘razor’ ‘to shave (the head)’; ‫ �مو��سى‬mūsā, pl ‫ �موا ��س‬mawāsin/� ‫و ي‬ (Hava 1982: 740); ~ Najd mūs, pl mwuseh ‘Rasiermesser’ (Hess 1938: 132) ~  Yemen mūs, pl amwās ‘rasoio’ (Rossi 1939: 232) ~ Aleppo mūs, pl amwās ‘rasoir’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 807) ~ Damascus mūs, pl mwās ‘knife (with movable blade)’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 132) ~ Palest mūs, pl muwās ‘Messer’ (Bauer 1957: 204) ~ Egypt mūs, pl amwās ‘razor’ (Spiro 1895: 585) ~ Cherchell mūs ‘couteau’ (Grand’Henry 1972: 79) ~ Marazig mūs ‘Taschenmesser’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2005: 233) ~ Morocco mūs ‘folding knife, razor, kitchen knife’ (Heath 2002: 443) ~ Ḥassāniyya mūs, pl aṃṃwās ‘knife’ (Mali; Heath 2004: 149) ~ Malta ⟨mus, pl mwies⟩ ‘coltello’ (Vassalli 1796: 526). 701

m-w-l

‫أ‬

mnmn.t (MK) ‘cattle’; ‘die Herde, das Herdenvieh (Rinder, Ziegen)’ (Faulkner

1962: 109; Wb II 81) || Ar ‫ �م�ا ل‬māl, pl ‫ � �موا ل‬ʾamwāl ‘flocks, wealth, personal prop-

erty’ (Hava 1982: 740); ~ Daθīna māl ‘les troupeaux (chez les nomades)’ (GD 2725) ~ Chad māl/ amwāl ‘bêtes du troupeau’ (Pommerol 1999: 813) ~ Aleppo māl, pl mwāl ‘bien, avoir, fortune’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 807) ~ Egypt māl ‘property, fortune, wealth’ (Spiro 1895: 552) ~ Ūlād Brāhīm mowwöl ‘élever les troupeaux’ (W. Marçais 1908: 89). 702

m-y-n

‫ن‬

mnj.tj (LE) ‘Erdhacker’ (Calice 1936: 64) || Ar � ‫ �م�ا‬māna ‘die Erde zur Aussaat pflügen’ (Wahrmund II 964). 703

m-y-ḥ

mḥwt ‘to give’ (Faulkner 1962: 170) || Ar ‫ �م�ا‬māḥa ‘to make a gift’ (Hava 1982: ‫ح‬ 741).

318

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

N 704

n-ʾ-n-ʾ

‫أأ‬

nn ‘to be weary, inert; drag (of foot)’; nnw ‘weariness, inertness’ (Faulkner 1962:

136) || Ar ��‫ ن�� ن‬na‌ʾna‌ʾa ‘von schwachem Verstande und unberaten sein, langsam handeln’ (Wahrmund II 972); 705

n-b-ʾ¹

‫أ‬ II 265; Faulkner 1962: 133) || Ar ‫ �ن�ب�� �م� ن� … إ� لى‬naba‌ʾa min … ʾilā ‘to pass from (a place) to (another)’ (Hava 1982: 743).

nmj (Pyr) ‘fahren, gehen’; durchfahren’; ‘to travel, traverse’ (Calice 1936: 163; Wb

706

n-b-ʾ²

nb (LE) ‘lord, master, owner’; ‘der Herr’ (Faulkner 1962: 128; Wb II 229) ~ Copt ⲛⲏⲃ ‘lord’ (Crum 1939: 221a, b) ~ Mah nōb/nəyōb ‘big’ (Johnstone 1987: 306) ||

‫أ‬

Ar ��‫ �ن�ب‬naba‌ʾa ‘to be high, lofty’; ‫ ن�ا ب��ئ‬nābiʾ ‘prominent, high, lofty’; ‫ �ن�ب��ا ء‬nabāʾ ‘emi‫ة‬ nent’; �‫ �ن�ب��ا و‬nabāwah ‘height’ (Hava 1982: 743, 744); ~ Sinai nābiy ‘prominent’ (Stewart 1990: 251) ~ Najd niba ‘to rise up, be elevated, protrude from’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 447) ~ Rwala nābi ‘peak’ (Musil 1928: 318, 365). 707

n-b-b

‫أ‬

‫أ‬

nbj.t (Med) ‘die Rohrpflanze’ (Wb II 243; Calice 1936: 65); nbit ‘reed’ (Faulkner

1962: 130) ~ Akkad ebbūbu ‘flute’ (Parpola 2007: 191) || Ar �‫ � �ن��بو ب‬ʾunbūb, pl �‫� ن�ا ب���ي� ب‬ ʾanābīb ‘tube, pipe’ (Hava 1982: 743); ~ Damascus ʾambūbe ‘Röhre’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 63); ʾunbūb, pl ʾanābīb ‘small pipe’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 173) ~ Palest ʾunbūb/yanbūb, pl ʾanābīb ‘Röhre’ (Bauer 1957: 246) ~ Iraq ʾunbūb, pl ʾanābīb ‘tube, pipe’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 18) ~ Aleppo ʾambūbe, pl -āt ‘tuyau’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 811) ~ Egypt ʾambūba ‘Gasflasche’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1999: 359) ~ Tripoli (Libya) mbūba, pl mbāyib ‘becco (di recipiente)’ (Griffini 1913: 29) ~ Malta ⟨lenbuba⟩ ‘cannello, cannoncino’ (Vassalli 1796: 436).

319

704. n- ʾ -n- ʾ – 711. n-t-r

708

n-b-ḥ

bḥn [< *nbḥ] ‘to bark, growl, bellow, revile’; ‘bellen’ (Caminos 1954: 543; DLE I 138; Wb I 469) ~ Akkad nabāḫu ‘to bark’ (M. Cohen 2011: 16) ~ Heb ‫ נָ ַבח‬nābaḥ ‘to bark’ (BDB 613) || Ar �‫ �ن� ب‬nabaḥa ‘bark’ (Hava 1982: 744);

‫ ح‬

~ Najd nbūḥ, pl nuwābīḥ ‘barking (of dogs guarding a camp)’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 447) ~ Palmyra nabaḥ ‘aboyer’ (Cantineau 1934 II 73) ~ Aleppo nabaḥ, yəmbaḥ ‘id.’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 812) ~ Egypt nabaḥ, yinbaḥ ‘to bark’ (Spiro 1895: 590) ~ Cherchell nbaḥ ‘aboyer’ (Grand’Henry 1972: 71) ~ Algiers nbaḥ ‘id.’ (Tapiéro 1971: 150) ~ Morocco nbeḥ ‘bark’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 18) ~ Malta ⟨nbīħ⟩ ‘abbagliamento’ (Vassalli 1796: 537). 709

n-b-l

nbꜣ.t (19th Dyn.) ‘Tragstange für den Kornsack’; nbꜣ ‘carrying-pole’ (Wb II 243; Faulkner 1962: 130) || Ar ‫ �ن�ب��ل‬nabl, pl ‫ �ن�ب��ا ل‬nibāl ‘arrow’ (Hava 1982: 747); ~ Morocco nbəl, pl nbāl/nbūla ‘flèche (d’arc)’ (Prémare XI 306) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nablah, pl nibāl⟩ ‘arrow’ (Corriente 1997: 520). 710

n-b-h

nhp (LE) ‘früh auf sein’; ‘rise early in the morning’ (Wb II 284; Faulkner 1962: 135); nhpw ‘früher Morgen; am Morgen etwas tun’ (Erman 1904: 64) || Ar ‫�ن�ب��ه‬ nabaha ‘aus dem Schlafe erwachen’ (Wahrmund II 978); ~ Palest nabbah, ynabbeh ‘wecken, aufmerksam machen’ (Bauer 1957: 355) ~ Egypt intibāh ‘wakefulness’ (Spiro 1895: 591) ~ Malta ⟨stenbaħ, jistenbaħ⟩ ‘svegliarsi’ (Vassalli 1796: 598). 711

n-t-r

ntj (LE) ‘gefangen sein’; ‘in Bedrängnis sein’; ‘to be choked, stifled’ (Wb II 351; ‫ت‬ DLE II 38; Takács 2011b: 77) || Ar ‫ ن���ر‬natara ‘enlever, emporter, ravir’/‫ �ن�ت��ل‬natala ‘tirer à soi, entraîner’ (DAF II 1194, 1192); ~ Mosul natal ‘to tug at s.th. with force and snatch it’ (Al-Bakrī 1972: 479) ~ S.E. Anatolia natar ‘schütteln, ausschütteln’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 420) ~ Yemen natal ‘to draw water from a well or cistern with a rope and pail

320

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

without the help of a pulley or spool’ (Piamenta 1991: 478) ~ Takrūna nṭar ‘enlever, arracher qq.ch. brusquement, par une saccade’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 3989) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨natar⟩ ‘to pull off’ (Corriente 1997: 521). 712

n-t-š¹

ntš ‘besprinkle’; ‘etwas besprengen, eine Flüßigkeit sprengen’; nḏš ‘Wasser sprengen’ (Ember 1930: 112; Faulkner 1962: 142; Wb II 356, 386; Takács 2011b: 79)

‫أ �ت‬

|| Ar ���‫ � ن�� ش‬ʾantaša ‘se gonfler après avoir été imprégné d’humidité et crever (se dit de la graine, de la semence qui germe)’ (DAF II 1193); ~ Yemen nātaš ‘beschmutzen (schmutziges Wasser die Kleider)’ (Behnstedt 2006: 1192) ~ Daθīna nutša-dám ‘Blutstropfen’ (GD 2740). 713

n-t-š²

714

n-t-f

‫�ت‬

ntš (Gr) ‘to hit’ (Takács 2011b: 79) || Ar ���‫ ن�� ش‬nataša ‘schlagen’ (Wahrmund II 981); ~ Egypt natašo ʿalqa ‘he gave him a ‘licking’’ (Spiro 1895: 592) ~ Kəndērīb nataš ‘(ab)reissen, (heraus)zerren’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 141) ~ Lebanon natwaš ‘arracher’ (Denizeau 1960: 511).

ntf (LE) ‘unbind, loosen, let loose, release’; ‘(den Gefesselten) losbinden’ (DLE II 253; Wb II 356; Takács 2011b: 78) ~ Copt ⲛⲟⲩⲧϥ ‘loosen, dissolve’ (Crum 1939: 232a) || Akkad naṭ/tāpu ‘to tear out, be plucked, torn out’; ‘herausreißen’ (CAD XI/2: 128; von Soden 767) ~ Aram ntp ‘extraction, drawing’ (Tal 2000: 521) ‫ف‬ ~ Ge natafa/nattafa ‘tear to pieces, tear apart’ (Leslau 1987: 406) || Ar ��‫�ن�ت‬ natafa ‘arracher, tirer (le poil, les plumes, la laine)’ (DAF II 1193); ~ Sinai natáf ‘to pluck out s.th.’ (Stewart 1990: 254) ~ Aleppo nataf ‘epiler’; nadaf ‘plumer’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 814) ~ Iraq nittaf ‘pluck, pull out, tear out; strike, hit’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 452) ~ E. Arabia nitaf ‘to pluck’ (Holes 2001: 512) ~ Lebanon natef ‘arracher’ (Feghali 1938: 834; Jiha 1964: 173) ~ Palest nattaf ‘Federn rupfen’ (Bauer 1957: 248) ~ Egypt nattif ‘pluck out one hair or feather after another’ (Spiro 1895: 592) ~ Marazig nətaf ‘arracher (avec les doigts et non la main entière)’ (Boris 1958: 598) ~ Malta ⟨nittef, inittef⟩ ‘to pluck’ (Aquilina 1990: 917).

712. n-t-š ¹ – 717. n-ǧ-r ²

715

321

n-t-l

ntꜣ (Pyr) ‘laufen (von der Bewegung schneller Boten)’; ‘se hâter’ (Wb II 351; Takács 2011b: 80) ~ Heb ‫ נָ ַתר‬nātar ‘spring or start up’ (BDB 684) || Ar ‫ �ن�ت��ل‬natala ‘to rush forth from the lines (soldier)’ (Hava 1982: 749); ~ Yemen natal ‘to rush out of the lines’ (Piamenta 1991: 478) ~ Daθīna ⟨ntr⟩ ‘s’en aller fâché’ (GD 2740). 716

n-ǧ-r¹

nḏr (Pyr) ‘Holz bearbeiten, zimmern, Zimmermann’; nḏꜣw ‘chips of stone’ (Wb II 382; Faulkner 1962: 144) ~ Akkad naggāru ‘carpenter’ ّ(M. ‫ ن‬Cohen 2011: 32) � � ~ Heb ‫ נַ ּגָ ר‬naggār ‘carpenter’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 876) || Ar ‫ �ج �ا ر‬naǧǧār ‘carpenter’ (Hava 1982: 751); ~ Ḥaḍramawt naǧǧār ‘master woodworker’ (Radionov 2007: 93) ~ Oman neggār, pl negāgīr ‘Tischler’ (Reinhardt 1894: 75) ~ E. Arabia niǧar ‘cut, hew’ (Holes 2001: 513) ~ Yemen naǧar ‘scalpellare pietra tenera o legno’ (Rossi 1939: 235) ~ Aleppo naǧar ‘fermer une porte avec une barre de bois’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 815) ~ Damascus naǧǧār ‘carpenter’ (Bauer 1957: 35) ~ Bišmizzīn tinžīr ‘Tischlern’ (Jiha 1964: 161) ~ Rwala nijr xašab ‘wooden mortar’ (Musil 1928: 645) ~ Najd nijir, pl njūr/njār (Kurpershoek 1999: 463) ~ Yemen naggār ‘Zimmermann’ (Behnstedt 1999: 400) ~ Kəndērīb naǧǧaṛ ‘zuschneiden, zurechtschneiden’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 141) ~ Lebanon tnaǧǧar ‘être travaillé, menuisé (bois)’ (M. Feghali 1928: 123) ~ Palest naǧǧār ‘Zimmermann’ (Bauer 1957: 376) ~ Egypt naggar ‘trim (branch, wood); work (wood)’; naggār ‘carpenter’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 849) ~ Tripoli (Libya) nežžār ‘falegname’ (Cesàro 1939: 101) ~ Morocco nžər ‘effectuer un travail de menuiserie; tailler (des mosaïques, des pierres)’ (Prémare XI 316) ~ Ḥassāniyya nejjāṛ ‘rabot’ (TaineCheikh 1990: 124) ~ Malta ⟨naġar, jonġor⟩ ‘asciare le pietre apparecchiandole per la fabbrica’ (Vassalli 1796: 530). 717

n-ǧ-r²

nḏꜣ (MK) ‘parch with thirst’; ‘ersticken, verdursten, das Dürsten, der Durst’ (Faulkner 1962: 144; Ember 1926: 310; 1930: 3; DLE II 256; Wb II 377) || Saf nǧr‫ن‬ ‘to be parched with thirst’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 647) ~ Ar. ‫�ج�ر‬ naǧara ‘von heftigem Durst ergriffen werden’ (Wahrmund II 986).

322 718

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

n-ǧ-y

nḏ/nḏy (Pyr) ‘to save, rescue, protect, guard against (magic), make good (harm); show concern for’; ‘schützen vor … (Feinden, dem Stärkeren)’; nḏty ‘protector’ (Ember 1930: 66; Faulkner 1962: 143, 144; Hodge 1981: 407; Wb II 374) ~ Dem nḏ ‘schützen’ (DG 235) ~ Soq ngy ‘délivrer’ (Leslau ّ ‫ ن‬1938: 256) || Saf nǧy ‘escape’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 647) ~ Ar. ��‫ ج‬naǧǧā ‘to rescue’ (Hava 1982: ‫�ي‬ 753); ~ Aleppo naǧǧa ‘sauver, préserver qqn’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 817) ~ Lebanon nažža ‘sauver’ (Feghali 1938: 834) ~ Najd naǧǧa ‘rescue, deliver, save s.o. from perdition’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 448) ~ Yemen naǧǧēʾ ‘salvare’ (Rossi 1939: 234); najī/nijī ‘to escape, be saved’; naǧnaǧ ‘to succeed, get away or escape’ (Piamenta 1991: 479) ~ Tripoli (Lebanon) naǧa ‘se sauver’ (El-Hajjé 1954: 67) ~ Palest naǧǧa ‘retten’ (Bauer 1957: 244) ~ Egypt nagga ‘save, rescue’; niǧi ‘sich retten, gerettet werden’ (Spiro 1895: 594; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 465) ~ Takrūna nžē ‘se tirer d’une situation périlleuse, pénible’; nažža ‘faire échapper qq à un danger’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 3025). 719

n-ḥ-ḍ

nḥḏ.t (OK) ‘tooth’; ‘Zahn’ (Faulkner 1962: 137; Wb I 99; Calice 1936: 169) ~ Copt ⲛⲁϫϩⲓ ‘tooth’ (Crum 1939: 249b) ~ Heb ‫ ָל ַחץ‬lāḥaṣ ‘to squeeze, force, press’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 704) [< nāḥaṣ] ‘das Drängen, Unterdrucken’ (Levy III 371) || ‫ن‬ ‫ض‬ � � Ar. ����‫ ح‬naḥaḍa ‘to sharpen’ (Hava 1982: 755); ~ N. Yemen naḥaz ‘pieksen, bohren, stoßen’ (Behnstedt 2006: 1197) ~ Daθīna ⟨naḥaz⟩ ‘piler, broyer’; ⟨minḥās⟩ < ⟨minḥāz⟩ ‘mortier à piler’ (GD 2751; cf. Brockett 1985: 201). 720

n-ḥ-w

i҆nḥ (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘surround, enclose’; ‘umgeben; einen ‫ن‬Ort mit Mauern � naḥā ‘to direct � umgeben’ (Faulkner‫ ن‬1962: 14; Wb I 99; Calice 1936: 119) || Ar. ‫ح�ا‬ ‫� �ة‬ � naḥāt- ‘side، limit’ (Hava 1982: 756); oneself towards’; ‫ح�ا‬ ~ Najd naḥa ‘to push in a certain direction’; nāḥa ‘to attack, charge, chase s.o.’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 463) ~ Damascus nāḥ ‘towards’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 246) ~ Aleppo tnaḥḥa ‘s’écarter’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 818) ~ Palest naḥu ‘vers, en direction de’ (Denizeau 1960: 513); nāḥye, pl nawāḥi ‘Richtung’ (Bauer 1957: 245) ~ Egypt nāḥya ‘direction’ (Spiro 1895: 588) ~ Ḥassāniyya naḥiyye ‘côté,

323

718. n-ǧ-y – 723. n-x-y

direction’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 45) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨naḥa⟩ ‘to head for’ (Corriente 1997: 523) ~ Malta ⟨naħa⟩ ‘vicino, presso, accanto; contrada, regione’ (Vassalli 1795: 530); ⟨inħawi⟩ ‘surroundings, neighbourhood’ (own obs.). 721

n-x-b

ّ ‫ت�ن‬

nḫb (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘bestimmen’; nḫbt ‘titulary’ (Wb II 307; Faulkner 1962:

‫ن�ت‬

�� tanaxxaba/�‫�خ� ب‬ �� �‫ إ‬ʾintaxaba ‘choisir, faire une choix dans quelque 138) || Ar �‫�خ� ب‬

chose’ (DAF II 1219); ~ Iraq ntixab ‘to select, pick, choose’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 454) ~ Damascus intaxab ‘to elect’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 77) ~ Palest intaxabūh rayyis ‘jemanden zu Vorsteher auswählen’ (Bauer 1957: 351) ~ Marazig nəxab ‘choisir, préoccuper, attirer l’attention de qqn.’ (Boris 1958: 603) ~ Morocco ntaxeb to elect’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 62). 722

n-x-l

nqr(w) (Pyr) [< *nxl] ‘sift, sieve’; ‘durchsieben (Getreide, Zerstoßenes)’ (Faulk­ ner 1962: 141; Breasted 1930: 543; Wb II 344); ‫ ن‬nqrw ‘strainer’ (DLE I 251) ~ Akkad � naxala ‘sift’ (Hava 1982: 755); � naḫālu ‘sift’ (Parpola 2007: 259) || Ar ‫�خ�ل‬

For the phonetic commutation of [*q] and [*x] in the history of this lexeme, cf. Sudan Arabic xarya ‘Dorf’ < *qarya, naxra ‘ich lese’ < *naqra (Behnstedt 2006: 22) and the analogous articulatory shift of Ar *ġarbal > Mzāb qarbal ‘il a tamisé’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 125).

~ Aleppo naxal ‘bluter (la farine)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 819) ~ Kəndērīb naxal ‘sieben’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 141) ~ Egypt naxal, yunxul ‘sift; sieben’ (Spiro 1895: 595; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 466) ~ Oman mōxal ‘Sieb’; noxxāle ‘Siebzeug’ (Reinhardt 1894: 50, 48) ~ Tunis noxxāla ‘son’ (D. Cohen 1975: 164) ~ Djidjelli noxxāla ‘son, balle d’avoine’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 277). 723

n-x-y

nḫwj (19th Dyn.) ‘die Klage, das Klagen’ (Wb II 305); nḫwt ‫‘ ن‬complaint, lamenta‫� ة‬ � naxwah ‘point of hontion’; nḫ ‘succour, protect’ (Faulkner 1962: 137) || Ar �‫�خو‬ our, courage’ (Hava 1982: 758); ~ Euphrates Bed naxwa ‘call for help’ (Ingham 1982: 38) ~ Sinai naxā/ astanxā ‘to call for aid’ (C. Bailey 1991: 454) ~ Najd naxa ‘to call for help; to invoke someone’s honour in an appeal for his assistance; to shout battle cries

324

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

to one another’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 449) ~ Ṭayy naxwah ‘cri de ralliement’ (Bettini 2013: 26) ~ Palest naxa ‘solliciter quelque chose (ʿala); appeler’: naxat jōzha ‘elle appela son mari’ (Denizeau 1960: 514). 724

n-d-d

‫أ‬

ّ

nwd (MK) ‘sich bewegen, gelangen zu jemandem’ (Wb II 225; Calice 1936: 33)

|| Ar ‫ ن��د د‬naddada/‫ � ن��د د‬ʾandada ‘to disperse in a pasturage (sheep)’ (Hava 1982: 759); ~ Rwala yenadden ‘he (herdsman) drives the camels away from the water after they have drunk their fill’ (Musil 1928: 340). 725

n-z-z

nss (MK) ‘do damage to (n)’; ‘beschädigen (Statuen, Inschrift)’ (Faulkner 1962: 140; Wb II 336) ~ Copt ⲗⲱⲱⲥ ‘be bruised, crushed’ (Crum 1939: 145a) ~ Ge ‫ن�زا�ز‬ naznaza ‘to vex, torment, cause pain’ (Leslau 1987: 353) || Ar � nizāz ‘zum Bösen

‫أ‬

bereit’ (Wahrmund II 1003); cf. � ‫ �ن�ز‬naza‌ʾa ‘he excited discord between them’ (Lane 2783); ~ Aleppo nazz ‘faire bisquer (qqn)’; naznaz ‘narguer qqn’ (Barthélemy 1935– 69: 822, 824) ~ Egypt nazz ‘to grumble’ (Spiro 1895: 597). 726

n-z-f

nspw ‘wounds’; ‘die Wunden’; nsp ‘Messer’ (Faulkner 1962: 139; Wb II 319) || ‫ف‬ Ar �� ‫ �ن�ز‬nazafa ‘sehr viel Blut verlieren’ (Wahrmund II 1005); ~ Damascus nazaf ‘to bleed’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 24) ~ Aleppo nazīf ‘perte de sang, hémorragie utérine’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 822) ~ Palest nazf eddamm ‘Blutsturz’ (Bauer 1957: 63) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nanzaf nazaf⟩ ‘to draw blood’ (Corriente 1997: 526). 727

n-s-r

Dem nšr ‘Geier, Falke’ (DG 229) ~ Copt ⲛⲟϣⲣ ‘vulture, falcon’ (Crum 1939: 237a) ~ Akkad našru ‘eagle’ (CAD X 79) ~ Heb ‫ נֶ ֶׁשר‬nešer ‘griffon-vulture, eagle’ (BDB

‫ن‬

‫أن‬

‫ن‬

676) || Ar ‫ ���سر‬nasr, pl ‫ � ���سر‬ʾansur/‫ ���سور‬nusūr ‘vulture, eagle’ (Hava 1982: 766);

724. n-d-d – 729. n-š-d

325

~ Aleppo nəsər, pl nsūra ‘aigle, vautour’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 825) ~ Palest nisr, pl nsūr(a) ‘Adler, Geier’ (Bauer 1957: 10, 127); stansar ‘devenir comme un aigle’ (Denizeau 1960: 517) ~ Egypt nisr, pl nusūr/nusūra ‘eagle’ (Spiro 1895: 599). 728

n-s-n-s

nsns ‘Art Vögel (im Geflügelhof)’ (Hannig 1995: 432) ~ Akkad naṣnaṣu ‘a bird’ ‫ن �ن‬ (CAD N/2 49) || Ar ‫ ���س���س‬nasnasa ‘schnell fliegen’ (Wahrmund II 1014); ~ Sinai nisnās, pl nasānīs ‘a legendary, elongated animal, or fleet bird’ (C. Bailey 1991: 454) ~ Egypt nisnās, pl nasānis ‘an ape’ (Spiro 1895: 599) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nisnās/nisnīs, pl nasānis⟩ ‘fabulous one-legged one-armed apelike creature’ (Corriente 1997: 528). 729

n-š-d

wšd (MK) ‘to address, question someone; recognize’; ‘jemanden anreden, eine Ansprache halten’ (Faulkner 1962: 71; DLE I 115; Wb I 375; Hannig 1995: 222) || ّ ‫�ن‬ Ar ‫ ت�� ش����د‬tanaššada ‘s’informer, interroger sur une nouvelle, sur un fait’ (DAF II 1258); ~ Negev nišád ‘to ask’ (Blanc 1970: 148) ~ Sinai naššad ‘to ask for (information about)’; nāšad ‘to greet someone vociferously’ (C. Bailey 1991: 454) ~ ʿAnazeh našad ‘demander, interroger’; manšada ‘demande’ (Landberg 1940: 81; 1942: 2771) ~ Ḥaḍramawt ⟨našad⟩ ‘demander’ (Landberg 1901: 722) ~ Najd našad/naššad ‘fragen’; ‘to ask, inquire, question’; tinaššad ‘to interrogate’ (Socin 1901 III 314; Kurpershoek 1999: 465; Ingham 1994: 185) ~ E. Arabia nišad ‘ask, ask after’ (Holes 2001: 519) ~ Khābūra nešed ‘to question’; nešed ʿan ‘to ask after s.o.’s health’ (Brockett 1985: 204) ~ Yemen našīd ‘canzone’ (Rossi 1939: 198) ~ Mosul našad ‘he asked’ (Al-Bakrī 1972: 484) ~ Harran-Urfa nišad ‘to ask’ (Procházka 2014: 344) ~ Aleppo našad ‘s’informer de (qqn)’ (Barthélemy 1935– 69: 827) ~ Palmyra naššad ‘interroger’ (Cantineau 1934 II 8) ~ Tripoli (Libya) nšed ‘domandare, interrogare’ (Griffini 1913: 92, 153) ~ Tunis nəšda ‘question’; nšād ‘action d’interroger’ (D. Cohen 1975: 147, 154) ~ Takrūna nišad ‘interroger, questionner qq.’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 3967) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nanšud, našadt⟩ ‘to adjure s.o. to do something’ (Corriente 1997: 528) ~ Ḥassāniyya nəšde ‘adjuration’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 20).

326 730

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

n-š-r¹

nśr (Pyr) ‘flame’; ‘brennen; Feuer, Flamme’; nsr.t (BD) ‘flame’; nsry ‘be inflamed (of wounds)’ (Faulkner 1962: 140; Wb II 335; Takács 2011c: 152); ~ Daθīna ⟨rišin⟩ ‘être allumé’; ⟨rišnat en-nār⟩ ‘le feu a pris, est allumé’ (GD 1281). 731

n-š-r²

nš (Gr) ‘gehen nach (mit r), jemanden hinführen nach (mit r)’ (Wb II 321) || ‫ن‬ Ar ‫ � �ش�� ر‬našira ‘to disperse by night in a pasture (cattle)’ (Hava 1982: 769); ~ N. Yemen našar ‘nachmittags gehen’ (Behnstedt 1987: 306) ~ Rwala enšār ‘long journeys’ (Musil 1928: 286) ~ Najd nišar ‘to set out with the intention of spending the entire day on the pasture ground’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 451) ~ Marazig ennašar ‘les jeunes chamelons au pâturage dispersés à l’écart de leurs mères’ (Boris 1958: 610). 732

n-š-š

nš (Med) ‘vom einsinken des Fusses in (m) den Ackerboden’ (Wb II 320) || ّ ‫ن‬ Ar ���‫ � ش‬našša ‘to sink into the earth (water)’; ‘das Wasser einschlucken, absorbieren (Boden)’ (Hava 1982: 768; Wahrmund II 1016); ~ Lebanon našnāše ‘source qui coule goutte à goutte’ (Denizeau 1960: 519) ~ Egypt našniš ‘to revive, refresh’ (Spiro 1895: 655). 733

n-š-ṭ

nḫt (Pyr) ‘be strong, firm’; ‘körperlich stark sein’ (Albright 1918: 96; Ember 1930: 65; Wb II 314; Vycichl 1983: X) ~ Copt ⲛϣⲟⲧ ‘hardness, boldness’ (Crum 1939: ‫ن‬ 238a) || Ar ‫ � ش�����ط‬našiṭa ‘to be sprightly, lively, nimble’ (Hava 1982: 770); ~ Najd nišīṭ, pl nšāṭ ‘active, energetic, fresh and strong’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 451) ~ Yemen našūṭ ‘furbo’ (Rossi 1939: 240) ~ Aleppo nəšeṭ ‘vif, actif’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 828) ~ Damascus našāṭ ‘activity’; našīṭ, pl nəšaṭa ‘lively’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 3, 140) ~ Palest našāṭ ‘Energie’ (Bauer 1957: 92) ~ Egypt našāṭ ‘energy, alertness’ (Spiro 1895: 601) ~ Morocco našeṭ ‘active’; našaṭ ‘activity’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 4).

327

730. n-š-r ¹ – 737. n-ṣ-t

734

n-š-m¹

nšm.t (BD) ‘weissblauer Feldspat’; ‘green felspar’ (Wb II 339; Calice 1936: 67; ‫ن‬ Faulkner 1962: 140) || Ar ���‫ � ش‬našima ‘mit schwarzen und weißen Flecken oder

‫م‬

Punkten bedeckt sein’ (Warmund II 1021); ~ Yemen nišam ‘Grewia velutina (Forsk.) Vahl.’ (Piamenta 1991: 486); našam ‘Grewia bicolor’ (Behnstedt 2006: 1213) ~ Morocco nšəm ‘peuplier, orme ou frène’ (Prémare XI). 735

n-š-m²

nšm.t (Med) ‘Ausfluß’ (Hannig 1995: 435; Takács 2011c: 159) || Ar. naššama ‘laisser sortir à sa surface et pour ainsi dire, suer l’eau (se dit de la terre)’ (DAF II 1265); ~ Lebanon naššam ‘pleurnicher’ (Denizeau 1960: 519). 736

n-š-y

šw/šwj (Pyr) ‘ascend’; ‘sich erheben ‫( ن أ‬auch zum Himmel)’ (Faulkner 1962: 263; Wb III 431; Calice 1936: 205) || Ar ����‫ � ش‬naša‌ʾa ‘to rise (cloud)’ (Hava 1982: 768); ~ Najd niša ‘(the cloud) rises and appears on the horizon’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 466). 737

n-ṣ-t

śmt (Pyr & LE) ‘etwas hören, jemanden verhören; erlauschen (auch neben śḏm gebraucht)’; śmtmt ‘Lauschen’ (Wb IV 387, 388, 389, 144–145) ~ smtmt ‘eavesdrop’ (Faulkner 1962: 229) ~ Dem stm (r) ‘hören’ (DG 478) ~ Copt ⲥⲱⲧⲙ̅ ‫ن‬ [*sōtem] ‘to hear’ (Crum 1939: 363b, 364a) || Ar ‫ � ش�����ط‬naṣata ‘schweigen und hören’ (Wahrmund II 1025); ~ Ḥama ṣṣannat ‘belauschen’ (Lewin 1966: 215) ~ Āzəx ššannaṭ ‘zuhören, lauschen’ (O. Jastrow 1978: 184) ~ Kəndērīb šṭanaṭ, yəšṭə́nəṭ ‘id.’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 82) ~ Aleppo ṭnaššat ‘écouter, à la personne de (qqn)’ (Barthélemy 1935– 69: 831) ~ Al-Balqāʾ ṣanat ‘to eavesdrop’ (Palva 1992: 172) ~ Negev ð̣ all miṣnit ‘he was listening’ (Henkin 2010: 320) ~ Egypt iṣṣanaṭ ‘jemanden belauschen’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 269) ~ Morocco tṣenneṭ ‘to listen’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 116) ~ Ḥassāniyya ṣṣannet ‘écouter’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 57).

328 738

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

n-ṣ-ṣ

nḏ/nḏnḏ (MK) [*nṣṣ/nṣnṣ] ‘to confer, take counsel, ask advice, consult s.o.; enquire about’; ‘fragen, beraten, befragen, um Rat fragen; jemanden verhören’ ّ ‫ن‬ (Faulkner 1962: 143, 144; Wb II 371; DLE II 257; Caminos 1954: 562) || Ar ‫����ص‬ naṣṣa ‘déférer une chose à quelqu’un et la soumettre à son jugement; interroger quelqu’un minutieusement, le presser de questions’; ‘he made the thing apparent, manifest, plain, or evident’ (DAF II 1266; Lane 2797); ~ Iraq naṣṣ ʿala ‘to stipulate, specify, provide for’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 460) ~ Damascus naṣṣ, pl nṣūṣ ‘text’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 237) ~ Aleppo naṣṣ ‘dicter une lettre à quelqu’un’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 831) ~ Egypt naṣṣ ‘to make a stipulation’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 866) ~ Marazig naṣṣ ‘dire, annoncer d’avance’ (Boris 1958: 611) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nunuṣṣ, naṣaṣt⟩ ‘to state or specify’ (Corriente 1997: 430). 739

n-ṭ-f

ndfdf/ntf (Pyr) ‘besprinkle’; ‘tränen (vom Auge), begießen, bewässern’ (Faulkner 1962: 142; Wb II 368; Hannig 1995: 446; Brockelmann 1932: 108) ~ Heb ‫ נָ ַטף‬nāṭap ‘to drip, overflow’ ~ Aram nṭap̄ ‘to drip’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 901) ~ Ḥar enṭef ‘drop’ ‫ن ف‬ (Johnstone 1977: 98) ~ Soq inṭef ‘gouttes’ (Leslau 1938: 467) || Ar ���‫ ���ط‬naṭafa ‘tröpfen, träufeln’ (Wahrmund II 1032); cf. 430. ṭ-f-ṭ-f; ~ Aleppo naṭaf ‘couler (: miel dans la ruche par l’effet de la chaleur, chandelle)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 833) ~ Lebanon netfe w-netfe ‘peu à peu, lentement’; naytfe ‘un peu de’ (Denizeau 1960: 511) ~ Palest nitif ‘kleinlich’ (Bauer 1957: 175); nitfe/nattūfe ‘ein wenig’ (Schmidt & Kahle 1918: 299) ~ Egypt nitfa, pl nitaf ‘piece, slice’ (Spiro 1895: 592) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nuṭfah, pl nuṭaf⟩ ‘a drop of sperm’ (Corriente 1997: 531) ~ Malta ⟨nitfa⟩ ‘small quantity’ (Aquilina 1990: 917). 740

n-ʿ-s

nḏs ‘little, small, dull’; ‘klein, gering’ (Ember 1930: 66; Faulkner 1962: 144; Wb II ‫ن‬ 384); nḏst ‘Kleinheit’ (Hannig 1995: 451) || Ar ‫ ��ع��س‬naʿasa ‘être faible, infirme, débile (se dit du corps ou de l’esprit); être somnolent, avoir envie de dormir’ (DAF II 1294);

738. n-ṣ-ṣ – 742. n- ʿ -m

329

~ Najd naʿas ‘take a nap, slumber, doze’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 452) ~ Aleppo nəʿes ‘avoir sommeil’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 835) ~ Palest niʿis ‘schläfrig werden’ (Bauer 1957: 258) ~ Egypt niʿis ‘to be drowsy, sleepy’ (Spiro 1895: 606) ~ Algiers nʿas ‘dormir’ (Tapiéro 1971: 156). 741

n-ʿ-š

(i) ʿnḫ (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘to live; make provision for someone’; ‘leben; leben nach dem Tode (= wiederaufleben)’; ʿnḫw ‘the living’ (Faulkner 1962: 43, 44; Wb I 193; Ember 1930: 83); Ḥry-ʿnḫ ‘Der über den Lebenden ist’ (Leitz 2002: ‫ ن�� ش‬nuʿiša ‘to be comforted, recalled to life’; ��‫ع‬ ‫�ن ت ش‬ 360) || Ar ���‫ع‬ � ��� �‫ إ‬ʾintaʿaša ‘to be quickened, reinvigorated’ (Hava 1982: 782); ‘Dauer, Leben’ (Wahrmund II 1038); ‫ن ش‬ ���‫ ��ع‬naʿš ‘endurance, permanence’ (Lane 2816); ~ Aleppo naʿaš ‘ranimer, ravigoter, raviver’; ntaʿaš ‘être ranimé’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 835) ~ Egypt naʿaš/niʿnaš ‘to refresh, to revive’ (Spiro 1895: 606) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nanʿaš⟩ ‘I shall give life back’ (Corriente 1997: 533). ‫ ن�� ش‬naʿš (ii) ʿnḫ ‘euphemistic for sarcophagus’ (Faulkner 1962: 44) || Ar ���‫ع‬ ‘Totenbahre, Sarg, Katafalk, Leichenzug; Dauer, Leben’ (Wahrmund II 1038); ~ Ḥaḍramawt naʿš ‘wooden litter’ (Radionov 2007: 150) ~ Yemen naʿš, pl nuʿūš ‘Totenbahre’ (Behnstedt 2006: 1220) ~ Sinai naggālit naʿáš ‘pall-bearers’ (Stewart 1990: 251) ~ Aleppo naʿš ‘brancard dans laquelle reposait le mort enve­ loppé dans un linceul’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 835) ~ Kəndērīb naʿš ‘Totenbahre (aus Holz)’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 143) ~ Palest naʿš, pl nʿūše ‘Totenbahre’ (Bauer 1957: 303) ~ Egypt naḥš ‘id.’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 465) ~ Marazig naʿaš, pl nʿūš ‘civière en corde avec un cadre fait de bâtons’ (Boris 1958: 616) ~ Tunis naʿš ‘cercueil’ (D. Cohen 1975: 141) ~ Djidjelli noʿš ‘brancard mortuaire’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 246) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨naʿš⟩ ‘bier’ (Corriente 1997: 533). Late Egyptian nʿš ‘stark, laut’ (Wb II 209) evokes Ar anʿaša ‘rendre les forces’ (Dozy II 698) citing Bocthor (1864).

742

n-ʿ-m

nḏm [*nʿm] (OK) ‘sweet (of flavour or odour); pleasant, pleasing; please, to be easy, comfortable’; ‘süß von Geschmack (von Früchten, Fett, Wein); angenehm von Geruch’: nḏm-i҆b ‘joyful, pleased’; nḏm-ʿnḫ ‘angenehm zu leben’; snḏm (caus.) ‘make happy, pleasant’ (Breasted 1930: 544; Ember 1930: 66; Faulkner 1962: 144, 235; DLE I 256, 23; Wb II 378); nḏm i҆bk ‘Froh sei dein Herz’ (Lepper

330

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

2008: 51) ~ Heb ‫ נָ ִעים‬nāʿīm ‘pleasant’ (BDB 653) ~ Ugar nʿmt ‘delight’ (DUL 615) ‫ن‬ || Ar ‫ ��ع‬naʿama ‘in Wohlstand und vergnüglich leben’ (Wahrmund II 1039);

‫م‬

~ Aleppo neʿem ‘fin, menu’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 837) ~ Kəndērīb naʿīm ‘fein, dünn’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 143) ~ Khābūra nʿīm ‘fine, powdery’ (Brockett 1985: 206) ~ Damascus naʿīme ‘Wohltat’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 169) ~ Palest nāʿim ‘fein (: Mehl)’; niʿme ‘blessing’ (Bauer 1957: 109; Piamenta 1991: 243) ~ Egypt niʿim, yinʿam ‘be smooth’; itnaʿʿam ‘enjoy life, lead a life of pleasure’ (Spiro 1895: 606) ~ Djidjelli noʿma ‘vie agréable, bonheur’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 119, fn 2). 743

n-ʿ-y

nʿ (Pyr) ‘den Tod verkünden, mitleidig, die Totenklage erheben’; nʿ n ‘mitleid haben mit jemandem’; nḫj ‘klagen’ (Wb II 206, 207, 305; Calice 1936: 65); nḫwt ‘complaint, lamentation’; ‘Klage’ (Faulkner 1962: 137; Erman 1904: 65); nġy ‘Klagen, beweinen’ (Rössler 1971: 299) ~ Dem nḫj ‘Klagen’ (DG 225) ~ Copt ⲛⲁ, ⲛⲁⲓ ‘to have pity’ (Crum 1939: 216b) || Saf nʿy ‘to lament’ (Winnett & Lankester ‫ن‬ Harding 1978: 648) ~ Ar naʿā ‫‘ ��عى‬Einem jemandes Tod ankünden; wehklagen’ (Wahrmund II 1041); ~ Najd naʿā (ʿalā) ‘einen Toten beklagen, beweinen’ (Hess 1938: 165) ~ Rwala naʿʿāy ‘a person much given to lamenting’ (Musil 1928: 198) ~ Yemen naʿā ‘piangere un morto’ (Rossi 1939: 227) ~ Aleppo naʿa ‘prononcer l’oraison funèbre de (qqn); se plaindre, se lamenter’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 825) ~ Egypt naʿyīn ilhamm ‘sich Sorgen machen’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 476) ~ Palest naʿa ‘Todesnachricht überbringen’; nawāʿi (sg. naʿweh) ‘Totenklagen’ (Bauer 1957: 301; Kampffmeyer 1936: 73) ~ Malta ⟨jingħi⟩ ‘he moans’ (own obs.). 744

n-f-r

nfrw (MK) ‘young men of army, recruits’; ‘Jünglinge (besonders die Rekruten)’ (Faulkner 1962: 132; Wb II 258; Brockelmann 1932: 106) || Saf nfrt ‘a party of warriors, kinsmen’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 649; Al-Jallad 2015: 330)

ْ

‫أ‬

~ Ar ‫ ن���ف��ر‬nafr ‘zusammengehörige Personen’; ‫ ن���ف��ر‬nafar, pl ‫ � ن���ف���ا ر‬ʾanfār ‘Personen,

Leute, Schar die Einem folgt’; ‘simple soldat, ligne, rang auquel on appartient (comme, par exemple, un rang de troupe); employé dans le sens de ṭāʾifah’ (Wahrmund II 1047; DAF II 1308; Fagnan 1923: 174); ~ Aleppo nafar ‘simple soldat, un homme (de troupe)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 839) ~ Egypt nafar ‘person, individual, labourer, private soldier’; il-ʾanfār ‘die

743. n- ʿ -y – 745. n-f-s

331

Landarbeiter’ (Spiro 1895: 608; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 477) ~ Oman nefer, pl enfār ‘Person’; arbaʿit enfār ‘vier Leute’ (Reinhardt 1894: 72) ~ Mxašniyye nafar ‘Mann (milit.)’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 428) ~ Palest nafar ‘Person, gemeiner Soldat’ (Bauer 1957: 228; 279) ~ Sudan nafar ‘individual, private soldier’ (LDA 493) ~ Darfur nafīr, pl nafāyir ‘voluntary working group’ (Roset 2018: 127). 745

n-f-s

nšp (MK) ‘pant’; ‘atmen, Luft atmen’ (Faulkner 1962: 140, 232; Wb II 339) ~ Copt ⲛⲟⲩϣⲡ ‘blow, agitate’ (Crum 1939: 236a) ~ Akkad našāpu/nušuppu ‘blow away, winnow’ (CAD XI/2: 56) ~ Heb ָ‫ףׁשנ‬ ַ nāšap ‘to blow’ (BDB 676) ~ Amh naffaš ‘chaff blown away by the wind, removed in the winnowing’ (Kane 1990: 1085) ~ Argobba nəfas ‘wind’ (Leslau 1997: 215) ~ Soq nsf ‘vanner’ (Leslau 1938: 490) || Saf ʾnsf ‘to blow away’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 630)

ّ‫�ت ن ف‬ َ‫أَ نْ َ ف‬ ‫ت‬ ~ Ar ‫ ������س‬tanaffasa ‘respirer, tirer un soupir de sa poitrine’ (DAF II 1316); ����‫� ���س‬ ُّ �‫‘ ا�لر‬the wind blew violently, and raised the dust’ (Lane 1445); the wheat he ‫ِي‬ ‫ح‬ َ‫أَ نْ َ ف‬ َ‫أَ ْ َ ف‬ has threshed’; �‫ � ���س‬ʾansafa ‘scatter (dust: wind)’; ���‫ � ����سن‬ʾasnafa ‘blow violently

(wind); pulverize and scatter s.th.’ (Hava 1982: 766, 340; Ambros 2004: 267); (i) ~ Palest bjunsuf ‘fortblasen, werfen’; itnaffas ‘atmen’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 72; Bauer 1957: 25) ~ Yemen nasaf, yinsif ‘blow up’ (Qafisheh 1999: 580); (Jew) nassaf ‘winnow’ (Piamenta 483) ~ Egypt nasaf ‘winnow’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 860) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨yansaf, nasaf⟩ ‘id.’; ⟨naffas⟩ ‘to breathe out’ (Corriente 1997: 526, 535) ~ Ḥama əddənye ʿam btənsof ‘es ist windiges Wetter’ (Lewin 1966: 227); (ii) ~ Lebanon nafas ‘breath’; tnaffas ‘he blew’ (Nasr 1966: 180) ~ Damascus nafas ‘breath’; tnaffas ‘to breathe’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 28) ~ Aleppo tnaffas ‘respirer, reprendre haleine’; nafas ‘vanner’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 838, 825) ~ Najd nifas ‘to throw, toss, to push aside’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 451) ~ Iraq tnaffas ‘to breathe, inhale, exhale’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 465) ~ Damascus tnaffas ‘breathe’; nafas ‘breath’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 28) ~ Tangier tneffes ‘respirer’ (W. Marçais 1911: 479) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nafas⟩ ‘to winnow’; ⟨naffas⟩ ‘to breathe out’ (Corriente 1997: 527, 535) ~ Marazig nefas, pl anfās ‘respiration’ (Boris 1958: 619).

332 746

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

n-f-ḍ

npḏ (Pyr) ‘to slaughter’; ‘Tiere schlachten’ (Faulkner 1962: 130; Wb II 250; Calice 1936: 66); npḏ [in anthroponym] ‘Schlächter’ (Altenmüller 1975: 278) || Akkad napāṣu ‘strike, ّ‫ ن ف‬dash down’ (CAD XI/1 285) ~ Heb ‫ נָ ַפץ‬nāpaṣ ‘to shatter’ (BDB ‫ض‬ 658) || Ar ��������� naffaḍa ‘secouer violemment, avec force’ (DAF II 1312); ~ Aleppo naffaḍ ‘secouer plusiers fois (un tapis); secouer (ses habits)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 841) ~ Kəndērīb nafaḍ ‘abschütteln, abwerfen’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 428) ~ Sinai nafaḍ ‘to shake, to shoot’ (Stewart 1990: 251) ~ Egypt nafaḍoh ʿaṣāya ‘he gave him a blow with a stick’ (Spiro 1895: 609) ~ Mzāb nfaḍ ‘il a secoué (habit, pipe)’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 133). 747

n-f-f

nf (LE) ‘Hauch des Mundes, Atem, Wind’; nfj ‘ausatmen, hauchen’; nfꜣ ‘ausniesen, ausschnauben’; nfy ‘to blow’; nft ‘breath, wind’; nfyt ‘fan’; snf (caus.) ‘make to breathe’ (Wb II 250, 252; Faulkner 1962: 131, 232; DLE I 235) ~ Dem njf ‘bla‫ف ف‬ sen, Atem’ (DG 207) ~ Copt ⲛⲓϥⲉ ‘to blow (wind)’ (Crum 1939:ّ 238b) || Ar ���‫ن����� ن‬ ‫نف نف‬ ‫ف‬ ‫ن‬ nafnaf, pl ���� ‫ ������ا‬nafānif ‘air, atmosphère’ (DAF II 1317); cf. ‫ ������ه‬naffah ‘trombe, tourbillon’ (Dozy II 702); ~ Daθīna ⟨naff⟩ ‘souffler en sifflant; eventer’ (GD 2804) ~ Najd naff ‘to blow, carry away’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 453) ~ Rwala naff ‘a torrent which carries away everything in its way’ (Musil 1928: 551) ~ Sinai naff ‘to sniff, pant, be short of breath’ (Stewart 1990: 251) ~ Egypt naff ‘to blow the nose’; nafnif ‘to sniff’; yinōff ‘schneuzen’ (Spiro 1895: 607; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 478) ~ Tunis nəffa ‘tabac à priser, prise’ (D. Cohen 1975: 148). 748

n-q-r

Dem nqr ‘ausmeisseln’ (DG 229) ~ Copt ⲛⲟⲩⲕⲉⲣ ‘to prick, incise’ (Crum 1939: 224a) || Ar ‫ ن���ق��ر‬naqara ‘to engrave, hollow out’ (Hava 1982: 791); ~ N. Yemen naggar ‘durchbohren’ (Behnstedt 1987: 306) ~ Kəndērīb naqar ‘picken, hacken’ (Jastrow 2005: 144) ~ Lebanon nəqra, pl nqūra ‘trou’ (Denizeau 1960: 526) ~ Egypt naqar ‘to pierce, peck at’ (Spiro 1895: 611) ~ Ḥassāniyya ṃəngāṛ, pl ṃnāgīr ‘bec’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 114) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨janqar⟩ ‘to peck’ (Corriente 1997: 537) ~ Malta ⟨naqar⟩ ‘beccare’ (Vassalli 1796: 532).

746. n-f-ḍ – 751. n-h-b

749

333

n-q-m

nqm.t (OK) ‘geplagt sein (verursacht durch Einfluss Übelgesinnter), traurig ‫ق‬ sein, Traurigkeit’ (Hannig 2003: 663; Wb II 344) || Ar � ‫ ن�ا‬nāqama ‘to distress, ‫م‬ harrass’ (Hava 1982: 796); ~ Palest nāqam ‘fâcher, faire enrager’ (Denizeau 1960: 528) ~ Morocco nətqām ‘se fâcher de la conduite de qqn.’ (Prémare XI 455) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨niqmah⟩ ‘disgrace’ (Corriente 1997: 539). 750

n-k-y

njk/nk (Pyr) ‘be harmed, hurt, vanquished’; ‘strafen mit dem Tode; Bösewicht’ (Ember 1930: 100; Wb II 205; Hannig 1995: 394); ni҆k ‘evil-doer’ (Faulkner 1962: 126; 1969: 329) ~ Heb ‫ נָ ָכה‬nākā ‘to smite, scourge’ (BDB 644) ~ Ugar nky ‘beaten, distressed’ (DUL 632) ~ Ge nakaya ‘injure, hurt, damage’ (Leslau 1987: 397) ~ Sab nky ‘suffering’ (Jamme 1962: 442) ~ Jibb enké ‘to hurt’ (Johnstone 1981: 189) || Ar ‫�ى‬ ‫ ن� ك‬nakā ‘verletzen, verwunden’ (Wahrmund II 1066); ~ Yemen nakī ‘il battere con fitte del male’ (Rossi 1939: 205) ~ Damascus nakāye ‘spite’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 220) ~ Kfarʿabīda mönke ‘contrariant’ (Feghali 1919: 71) ~ Lebanon anka ‘le plus ennuyeux, le pire, le plus vexant’ (Denizeau 1960: 530); nikāye ‘any act intended to cause s.o. annoyance or offence’ (Frayha 1973: 184) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ankāni, yankī(h)⟩ ‘vexer, tourmenter’ (DA 1289) ~ Malta ⟨nkejja⟩ ‘spite’ (Aquilina 1990: 900). 751

n-h-b

nḥm (Pyr) [~ *nhb] ‘take away, carry of’; ‘wegnehmen, fortnehmen, rauben’ (Faulkner 1962: 136; Wb II 295; Calice 1936: 67) ~ Dem nhm ‘rauben’ (DG 222) || Saf nhb ‘raid’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 649) ~ Jibb nɛhɛb ‘to take ‫ن‬ by force’ (Johnstone 1981: 185) || Ar �‫ ���ه� ب‬nahaba ‘enlever, emporter, ravir, piller’ (DAF II 1351); ~ Najd nahab ‘to snatch, plunder’ (Sowayan 1992: 300) ~ Arabia náhab ‘rapine’ (Doughty 1888 II 488) ~ Iraq nihab ‘steal, plunder, take by force’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 472) ~ Oman nehub ‘berauben’ (Reinhardt 1894: 43) ~ Daθīna ⟨nuhbah⟩ ‘butin’ (GD 2825) ~ Yemen nihib ‘subdue, cause damage’ (Piamenta 1991: 498) ~ ʿAnazeh ⟨nahb⟩ ‘rapt’ (Landberg 1940: 85) ~ náhab ‘rapine’ (Doughty 1888 II 488) ~ Negev yanhabaw baʿð̣ hum ‘they plunder each

334

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

other’ (Henkin 2010: 230) ~ Rwala tenhab qlūb ‘steals hearts’ (Musil 1928: 364) ~ Damascus nahab ‘rob’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 194) ~ Lebanon nahhāb ‘déprédateur’; tnāhab ‘piller, dépouiller’ (Denizeau 1960: 531) ~ Palest tnāhabūh ‘haben ihn ausgeplündert’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 74) ~ Egypt nahab ‘rob, plunder’ (Spiro 1895: 615) ~ Marazig naháb ‘prendre indélicatement (presque voler) le bien d’autrui en abusant de sa confiance; emprunter et ne pas rendre’ (Boris 1958: 627) ~ Morocco nhəb ‘piller, voler, saccager, spéc., soustraire au pillage, enlever le bétail; voler, marauder’; nahhāb ‘brigand’ (Prémare XI 480) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nanhab, nahabt⟩ ‘pilier, ravir’ (DA 1292) ~ Ḥassāniyya nheb ‘tomber sur’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 114). 752

n-h-r¹

nhr (LE) ‘stream (n); run, flow, flee, sail; river’; ‘laufen’ (DLE I 241; Wb II 286) ~ Akkad nāru ‘river, canal’ (CAD XI 368) ~ Heb ‫ נָ ָהר‬nāhār ‘flow, stream’ (BDB ‫ن‬ 625) ~ Soq nóhor ‘passer, traverser’ (Leslau 1938: 261) || Ar ‫ ���هر‬nahara ‘to flow

ْ‫ن‬

‫أ ْن‬

abundantly (blood, river)’; ‫ ���هر‬nahr, pl ‫ � ���هر‬ʾanhur ‘river’ (Hava 1982: 803); ~ Aleppo nahr/nahar, pl ʾəṇhor/nhūr ‘rivière’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 852) ~ Damascus ṇahəṛ, pl ṇhūṛa/ʾəṇhoṛ ‘river’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 194) ~ S.E. Anatolia ṇahəṛ ‘rivière’ (Grigore 2007: 93) ~ Palest nahaṛ ‘river’; ‘treiben’ (Palva 1965: 30; Bauer 1957: 114, 305). 753

n-h-r²

‫ن‬ ْ‫أ ن‬ nahār, pl ‫ � ���هر‬ʾanhur ‘der helle Tag von Morgen bis Abend’ (Wahrmund II 1070); hrw (LE) ‘day’; ‘Tag (allgemein)’ (Faulkner 1962: 159; Hannig 1995: 496) || Ar ‫���ه�ا ر‬

~ Palest nhār ‘Tag’ (Bauer 1957: 296) ~ Egypt nahār, pl -āt ‘day, daytime’ (Spiro 1895: 615) ~ Takrūna nhāṛ ‘jour, portion des vingt-quatre heures éclairées par le soleil’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 4068). 754

n-h-m

nhm (Pyr) ‘shout, thunder (of sky)’; ‘jauchzen, jubeln’; nhmhm (Pyr) ‘roar, rejoice, dance for joy’; ‘Kriegsruf’ (Ember 1930: 65; Faulkner 1962: 135; DLE I 241; Wb II 285, 491) ~ Dem nhm ‘jauchzen’ (DG 221) ~ Copt ⲗϩⲏⲙ ‘roar’ (Crum 1039: ‫ن‬ 150a) ~ Heb ‫ נְ ָה ָמה‬nəhāmāh ‘growl, groan’ (BDB 625) || Ar �‫ ���ه‬nahama ‘to chide ‫م‬ camels; to roar (lion); to sigh’ (Hava 1982: 804);

752. n-h-r ¹ – 757. * n-w-y ¹

335

~ Najd naham ‘to urge on a camel with shouts, to chide’; nahīm ‘chiding of camels’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 455) ~ Sinai naham ‘to yell at, scold’ (C. Bailey 1991: 454) ~ Yemen naham ‘to cry out’; nahīm ‘roar (of lion)’ (Piamenta 1991: 499) ~ E. Arabia naham ‘sing a sea song’ (Holes 2001: 532) ~ Oman nehem ‘rufen’ (Reinhardt 1894: 146) ~ Sudan naham ‘call’ (LDA 501) ~ Negev nihīm ‘neighing (of horse)’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi) ~ Sinai naham ‘to yell at, scold’ (C. Bailey 1991: 454) ~ Khābūra naham ‘to call, shout’ (Brockett 1985: 209). 755

n-h-n-h

nh/nhnh ‘schützen, beschirmen (eine Person)’ (Wb II 281, 286); nht ‘magical ‫ن‬ protection’; nhw ‘protection of king’s arm’ (Faulkner 1962: 135) || Ar ‫ ���ه ن���ه‬nahnaha ‘abwehren’ (Brockelmann 1932: 107); ~ Yemen anha ‘protect against, to warn’ (Piamenta 1991: 499) ~ Sinai nahá ‘to restrain, warn s.o.’ (Stewart 1990: 252) ~ Egypt anha ‘to petition’ (Spiro 1895: 616). 756

n-w-m

mnm.t (Pyr) ‘Bett’ (Wb II 80); nmnmw (19th Dyn.) ‘Schlafzustand’ (Wb II 268) ~ Heb ‫ נִ ְמנֵ ם‬nimnēm ‘to be drowsy, to doze’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 887) || Saf nm ‘fall asleep’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 649) ~ Ar ‫ ن�ا‬nāma ‘to sleep’; ‫�م ن���ا‬ ‫م‬ ‫م‬ manām ‘dormitory’ (Hava 1982: 809, 810); ~ N. Yemen manāmah ‘Bett’ (Behnstedt 1987: 308) ~ Negev manām ‘bed’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi) ~ Palest manām ‘Schlafstelle’ (Bauer 1957: 258) ~ Egypt manām ‘Schlafplatz’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1999: 402) ~ Aleppo ʿōḍet əlmanāme ‘la chambre à coucher, le dortoir, la chambrée’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 857) ~ Marazig mənām ‘sommeil’ (Boris 1958: 631) ~ Iraq manām ‘bedroom’ (van Ess 1918: 126) ~ Najd manām ‘sleep’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 455) ~ Palmyra manēm ‘rêve’ (Cantineau 1934 II 3) ~ Morocco mnām ‘état de rêve’ (Prémare XI 502) ~ Lebanon mnām/bnām ‘rêve, sommeil’ (Feghali 1938: 839). 757

*n-w-y¹

ni҆ (Pyr) ‘rebuff; throw down (an enemy)’; ‘abweisen, zurückweisen’ (Faulkner 1962: 125; Calice 1936: 65); njj ‘niederwerfen’ (Wb II 201) || Ar ‫ ن�ا ء‬nāʾa ‘to rise against, to crush s.o.’ (Hava 1982: 805).

336 758

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

n-w-y²

n.t/nwyt (MK) ‘Wasser, Wasserflut’; ‘waters of canal, pool, wave’; ni҆w/nnw ‘primeval waters’; nyw ‘water, flood’ (Wb II 198; Faulkner 1962: 127, 134) ~ Ḥar menewōt ‘rain cloud’ ~ Mah nēwət ‘rain’; mənwōt ‘dark raincloud’ (Johnstone

‫ن‬

‫أن‬

1977: 89, 1987: 579) || Ar ‫ �وء‬nawʾ, pl ‫ � �وا ء‬ʾanwāʾ ‘star foreboding rain, rain, storm’ (Hava 1982: 805); ~ Sinai naww ‘the winter-rain season introduced by the appearance of the Pleiades in the evening sky in November’ (C. Bailey 1991: 454) ~ Negev nayy ‘water channel or conduit leading to a well’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi) ~ Najd naww ‘the rains that come with the appearance of certain stars’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 470); anwā ‘Winde und Regen bringen’ (Hess 1938: 65) ~ Aleppo nawwe ‘tempête’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 853) ~ Lebanon naw ‘id.’ (Feghali 1938: 838) ~ Egypt naww ‘Sturm, Südwind’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 485) ~ Sudan naw ‘South wind’ (LDA 501) ~ Djidjelli now ‘pluie’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 57, 364) ~ Ūlād Brāhīm now ‘pluie’ (W. Marçais 1908: 36) ~ Mzāb nu/naw ‘pluie’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 133) ~ Ḥassāniyya now(w) ‘ciel nuageux’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 103). 759

n-w-y³

nwy ‘to return to (r) a place’ (Faulkner 1962: 127); nw (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘zurück‫ن‬ kehren an einem Ort; (NK) kommen zu jemandem’ (WB II 222) || Ar ‫ �و�ى‬nawā ‘to emigrate from a place to another’ (Hava 1982: 810); ~ Sinai nāwā ‘to return to one’s home (camel)’ (C. Bailey 1991: 454). 760

n-w-y⁴

nwi҆ (MK) ‘care for; take care of’; ‘für etwas sorgen’ (Faulkner 1962: 127; Wb II ‫ن‬ 220; Calice 1936: 65) || Ar ‫ �و�ى‬nawā ‘to intend’; ‫ إ� �ن�ت�و�ى‬ʾintawā ‘to carry out a design’ (Hava 1982: 810); ~ Palest nawa ‘beabsichtigen’ (Bauer 1957: 42) ~ Damascus niyye ‘intention’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 126) ~ ʿAnazeh nawa ‘se proposer’ (Landberg 1940: 85). 761

n-y-s

nšꜣ (Pyr) ‘grains of sand’ (Faulkner 1962: 140); ~ Ḥaḍramawt ⟨naysah⟩, ⟨nāsah⟩ ‘sable’ (Landberg 1901: 719; GD 2837).

758. n-w-y ² – 764. h-b-ǧ

762

337

n-y-k

nk (Pyr) ‘copulate’; ‘Beischlaf vollziehen, Beischlaf von einem Mann erleiden’; nkjkj (Pyr) ‘den Leib der Frau befruchten’; ‘copulate, sleep with; commit adultery’ (Faulkner 1962: 141; Wb II 345, 346; Sethe 1962: 144; DLE I 251); nkj ‘begatten’; nkw ‘der Beischläfer, Ehebrecher’; nkk ‘Buhlknabe’ (Wb II 345, 347) ~ nykk/ nkk [Schimpfwort] (Wb III 119; Ember 1913: 117); nknk ‘sexual partner; repeated copulation’ (DLE II 251) ~ Dem nk/q ‘den Beischlaf vollziehen’ (DG 229) ~ Copt ⲛⲟⲉⲓⲕ/ⲛⲁⲓⲕ ‘adulterer’; ⲛⲟⲕⲛⲉⲕ ‘have affection, inclination to’ (Crum 1939: 222b–223b) ~ Akkad nīku ‘coitus’ (Parpola 2007: 163) ~ Ḥar neyōk ‘to copulate’ (Johnstone 1977: 158) || Saf nk/nyk ‘to have sexual relations with’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 649) ~ Ar ‫ ن�ا ك‬nāka ‘cohabiter avec une femme’ (DAF II 1376); ~ Aleppo nāk ‘coïter avec’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 859) ~ Lebanon nayk ‘prostitution’ (Denizeau 1960: 535) ~ Egypt nāk, yinīk/laklik ‘copulate’ (Spiro 1895: 545) ~ Tripoli (Libya) nāk ‘coire’ (Griffini 1913: 54) ~ Tunis nāk ‘il a coïté’ (D. Cohen 1975: 103). H 763

h-b-b

hb (OK) ‘plough’; ‘der Pflug’ (Faulkner 1962: 158; Wb II 485; Calice 1936: 172) || (?) ّ Ar �‫ �ه� ب‬habba ‘to cut, sever’ (Hava 1982: 812). 764

h-b-ǧ

hbq [~ *hbg] (Med) ‘beat up, triturate’; ‘zerstoßen’ (Faulkner 1962: 158; Calice 1936: 70) || Ar ‫ �ه ب����ج‬habaǧa ‘to strike with a stick’ (Hava 1982: 812);

�

~ Aleppo habbaǧ ‘gratter (le corps) jusqu’au sang’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 862) ~ Lebanon habaj/habaš ‘frapper, gifler’ (Denizeau 1960: 536; Feghali 1919: 42) ~ Palest habaǧ ‘to strike with a stick’; mahbāǧ ‘coffee pestle’ (own obs.) ~ Egypt habfad ‘to knock down’ (Spiro 1895: 621) [< *hbd < *hbdž]; habag ‘mit der Faust daraufschlagen’; habbāga ‘große Sichel’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 487).

338 765

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

h-d-d

hd (MK) ‘attack, obstruct, prevail over, punish’; ‘entgegentreten (von Stieren die einander angreifen)’; hdhd ‘charge of army’ (Faulkner 1962: 160; DLE I 292;

ّ

Wb II 504) || Ar ‫ �ه�د‬hadda ‘niederreißen, zerstören’ (Wahrmund I 1101). ~ Rwala hadda ‘the noise during an attack of shooting, war cries, neighing of the horses, groans of the wounded’ (Musil 1928: 251) ~ el-Kerak ana mā ahoddo ‘ich will ihn nicht zerreißen’; hedd baθar hedd ‘Schlag auf Schlag’ (Musil 1908: 209, 443) ~ Sinai hadd ‘draw one’s dagger, reach for one’s weapon ʿala against s-o’; haddādih ‘people with weapons drawn, threatening each other’ (Stewart 1990: 227) ~ Khābūra hadd ‘(of a she-goat) noisily to want the male’ (Brockett 1985: 211) ~ Palest hadd ‘zerstören; vernichten; bespringen (von Schafen)’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 75; Bauer 1957: 43, 55) ~ S.E. Anatolia hadd ‘einreißen, abreißen’; Kəndērīb nhadd ‘einstürzen; zusammenfallen’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 438; Jastrow 2005: 147) ~ Damascus haddad ‘threaten’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 240) ~ Aleppo hadd ‘démolir, abattre avec des outils (un édifice)’; haddad ‘intimider, menacer qqn’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 864) ~ Ḥama hadd ‘herangestürzt kommen’ (Lewin 1966: 228) ~ Egypt haddid ‘threaten’; mihadhād ‘zerstört, zerfallen’ (Spiro 1895: 623; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 489) ~ Cherchell nhedd ‘se détruire’ (Grand’Henry 1972: 62) ~ Malta ⟨hedded, ihedded⟩ ‘minacciare’ (Vassalli 1796: 234). 766

h-d-m

hdm ‘zerbrechen’ (Calice 1936: 71) ~ Dem htm ‘destroy’ (DG 282) ~ Syr haddem ‘dismember, cut in pieces’ (CSD 100) || Ar ‫ �ه�د‬hadama ‘pull down (building)’ ‫م‬ (Hava 1982: 820); ~ Aleppo hadam ‘démolir’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 865) ~ Iraq hidam ‘tear down, demolish, destroy’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 478); hadam ‘digest’ (van Ess 1918: 137) ~ Palest hadam ‘zerstören (Gebäude)’ (Bauer 1957: 374) ~ Egypt hadam ‘demolish’ (Spiro 1895: 123) ~ Sinai hadám ‘to destroy s.th.; to humiliate s.o.’ (Stewart 1990: 228) ~ Rwala haddām ‘traitor’ (Musil 1928: 495) ~ Marazig hadam ‘abattre (la tente), et surtout, au figuratif, ruiner, déshonorer’ (Boris 1958: 639) ~ Ūlād Brāhīm hădém ‘faire crouler’ (W. Marçais 1908: 77). Cf. Ghomara (Berber) heddem ‘demolish’ (Mourigh 2016: 395).

765. h-d-d – 769. h-l-b

767

339

h-r-b

bhꜣ/bhn (MK) ‘flee’; ‘fliehen’; bhꜣw ‘fugitive’; ‘der Flüchtling, der Fliehende’; sbhꜣ (caus.) ‘make to flee’ (Faulkner 1962: 83; Wb I 467) || Ar �‫ �هر ب‬haraba ‘fliehen, ‫ن‬ entfliehen, entkommen’; � ‫ �هرب�ا‬harbān ‘Flüchtling’ (Hava 1982: 823); ~ Aleppo harab ‘fuir, s’enfuir’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 866) ~ Palest harab ‘fliehen’ (Bauer 1957: 113) ~ Egypt harab ‘to escape, desert’ (Spiro 1895: 624) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨harab⟩ ‘to flee or run away’ (Corriente 1997: 548). 768

h-r-r

hr (LE) ‘to milk’; ‘melken (?)’; mhr ‘milk-jar’; ‘Milchkrug’ (Ember 1930: 76; Faulkner 1962: 159, 152; Wb II 498; Hannig 2003: 548); mhr ‘Melker’ (Hannig & Vomberg 1999: 530) ~ Copt ϩⲱⲣ ‘to squeeze out milk, to milk’ (Crum 1939: ّ 697b) || Ar ‫ �هر�ه�ا ر‬harhār ‘abundance of milk, water’; ‫ �هر‬harra ‘to flow’; ‫�هر�هر‬ harhar ‘murmur of running water’; ‘avoir une violente diarrhée et en mourir’ (Hava 1982: 822–23; DAF II 1408); ~ Kəndērīb harr ‘rieseln, hinein- hinunterschutten’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 147– 8) ~ Lebanon harher ‘couler çà et là, se repandre’ (Feghali 1935: 160) ~ Palest harr ‘Fließen (Tränen); Mehliges aus einem Sack rinnen; überströmen lassen (Mund: Schmähungen)’; ihrār ‘Durchfall’ (Bauer 1957: 112, 245, 80; Kampffmeyer 1936: 76) ~ Egypt harr ‘to flow, drop, leak, relieve nature’ (Spiro 1895: 624); hurār ‘Durchfall beim Esel’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1999: 402) ~ Ḥassāniyya hṛāṛ ‘merde’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 96) ~ Khābūra harr ‘(of humans) to defecate’ (Brockett 1985: 211) ~ Aleppo harr ‘dégouliner, tomber (: poussière, etc.); avoir la diarrhée’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 867) ~ Algeria harr ‘verser du grain, des fruits, dans un sac, les répandre sur …’ (Lentin 1959: 299) ~ Ūlād Brāhīm haṛṛ/ mahṛāṛ ‘qui a la diarrhée’ (W. Marçais 1908: 121) ~ Morocco hrūr əl-ma ‘action de tomber à flot’ (Prémare X II 46). 769

h-l-b

hrp (MK) ‘sink, be immersed’; ‘untersenken im Wasser, untertauchen ertrinken’ (Faulkner 1962: 159; Wb II 500; Calice 1936: 71) ~ Copt ϩⲱⲣⲡ ‘be wet, drenched’ ّ (Crum 1939: 703b) || Ar �‫ �ه�ل� ب‬halaba ‘to drench’ (Hava 1982: 832); �‫ �ه�لا ب‬hallāb ‘regnerisch’ (Wahrmund II 1123); ~ Egypt hilb, pl ahlāb ‘hook, anchor’ (Spiro 1895: 627).

340 770

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

h-l-l

hnw ‘praise of god or king; jubilation’; hnw ‘jubeln’; ‘louange’; hnjwt ‘die Jublerin’ (Faulkner 1962: 159; Wb II 493; Lambert 1925: 107; Calice 1936: 71) ~ Akkad alālu ‘praise,ّ acclaim (v)’ (M. Cohen 2011: 161) ~ Sab hll ‘réjouir’ (Avanzini 1962: 289) || Ar ‫ �ه�ل�ل‬hallala ‘to praise God’ (Hava 1982: 832) ~ Najd halhal ‘to rejoice’ (Sowayan 1992: 301) ~ Daθīna hall ‘crier’; hallal ‘pousser des cris d’allégresse, jubiler’ (GD 2876) ~ Aleppo halhal ‘pleurer un mort (Druse)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 872) ~ Kəndērīb halhal ‘(Frauen:) Jubeltriller ausstoßen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 148) ~ Khawētna halhal ‘Freudengeschrei erheben’ (Talay 1999: 144) ~ Palest hallal ‘jauchzen’; thallal ‘jubilieren’ (Bauer 1957: 166, 306) ~ Egypt hallil ‘to hoot, vociferate’; hilihli ‘jovial, hilarious’ (Spiro 1895: 627) ~ Marazig lahlah ‘chanter avec des vocalises prolongées et sans paroles’ (Boris 1958: 564) ~ Malta ⟨tehlil⟩ ‘gioja’ (Vassalli 1796: 91; obs.). 771

h-m-s

hms ‘sich furchtsam nähern’ (Calice 1936: 71); hi҆ms (MK) ‘humbly’ (Faulkner 1962: 157) || Ar ‫ �ه�م��س ب�ا �ل��ق���د‬hamasa bil-qadam ‘to tread the ground softly’; ‫�ه�ا �م��س‬

‫م‬

ّ

hāmasa ‘to speak inaudibly’; ‫ �ه�م�ا ��س‬hammās ‘walking softly’; ‫ �ه�م��س‬hams ‘faint sound, soft tread of camels’ (Hava 1982: 836); ~ Palest hamas ‘flüstern’; hams, mhāmasa ‘Gelispel’ (Bauer 1957: 114, 129) ~ Egypt hamas ‘to touch lightly’ (Spiro 1895: 628) ~ Damascus hamas ‘to whisper’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 263) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨hams⟩ ‘mutter, mumble’ (Corriente 1997: 551). 772

h-m-h-m

hmhm (MK) ‘brüllen (von Month als Stier)’; hmhmt ‘Geschrei, Gebrüll’; ‘warshout; quacking of wild-fowl’; hmhm.tj ‘der Brüller (als Bezeichnung für den Löwen)’; nhmhm ‘roar, thunder’ (Wb II 490–91; Faulkner 1962: 158, 135; Calice 1936: 13): hmhmt ‘eine, die erstauntes Raunen auslöst’ (Assmann 1969: 249) ~ Dem hmhm/hwhw ‘brüllen’ (DG 275, 271) ~ Copt ϩⲉⲙϩⲉⲙ ‘roar, neigh’ (Crum 1939: 682b) || Ar. �‫ �ه��م�ه‬hamhama ‘grommeler, grogner (se dit de la voix sourde ‫م‬ et repétée que l’on entend produire au bœuf, à l’âne, à l’éléphant)’ (DAF II 1449) ~ Amh həmhəmm alä ‘to murmur’ (Leslau 1969: 17); ~ Palest hamhame ‘Gebrumm’ (Bauer 1957: 124) ~ Bišmizzīn habhab ‘bellen’ (Jiha 1964: 145) ~ Damascus hamham ‘to hum’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 119)

770. h-l-l – 775. h-n- ʾ

341

~ Egypt hamham/hamhim ‘to mutter, mumble’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 913) ~ Morocco hamham ‘bredouiller, bougonner, marmotter’ (Prémare XII 87) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨hamham⟩ ‘to roar’ (Corriente 1997: 552). 773

h-m-m¹

i҆m (NK) ‘there, therein, therewith, therefrom’; ‘da, dort, dortwo, dorthin’ (Faulkner 1962: 17; Wb I 72; Gardiner 1957, §205); ~ Morocco hamma ‘dort’ (W-D. Fischer 1959: 127, fn 2) ~ Malta ⟨hemm⟩ [eːmm] ‘là, colà’ (Vassalli 1796: 236). 774

h-m-m²

i҆҆hm (MK) ‘to moan’; ‘Trauern (vom Herzen)’ (Faulkner 1962: 17; Wb I 118) ~ Dem ꜣhm ‘Trauer, Betrübnis’ (DG 8) ~ Copt ⲁϩⲟⲙ ‘sigh, groan’ (Crum 1939: 24b) || Ar. ّ‫ �ه‬hamm ‘souci, peine, préoccupation, chagrin, tristesse, chose grave’ (DAF ‫م‬ II 1442); ~ Najd hamm, pl hmūm ‘concern, care, worry, distress’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 475) ~ Rwala hmūmi ‘one best by troubles’ (Musil 1928: 563) ~ N. Yemen hamm ‘Sorgen bereiten’ (Behnstedt 1987: 209); himmeh ‘zelo’ (Rossi 1939: 246) ~ Aleppo hamm (v) ‘causer du souci à, préoccuper’; hamm, pl hmūm ‘souci, préoccupation, tintouin’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 873) ~ Lebanon hamm ‘worry’ (Nasr 1966: 194) ~ Palest hamm, pl ihmūm ‘Sorge’ (Bauer 1957: 280) ~ Egypt hamm, pl humūm ‘care, anxiety’ (Spiro 1985: 628) ~ Tripoli (Libya) hamm ‘importare’; hamm, pl humūm ‘affanno, afflizione’ (Griffini 1913: 146, 5, 6) ~ Malta ⟨hemm, pl hmum⟩ ‘calamità, miserie, disavventura’ (Vassalli 1796: 236). 775

h-n-ʾ

(i) hnjꜣj (20th Dyn.) ‫‘ أ‬Art süsse Speise’ (Wb II 492) ~ Sab hnʾ ‘excellent’ (Avanzini 1962: 290) || Ar ���‫ �ه ن‬hana‌ʾa ‘souhaiter à quelqu’un une bonne digestion, souhaiter à quelqu’un que l’aliment qu’il prend lui profite’ (DAF II 1450); ~ Aleppo həni ‘goûter un plaisir; se délecter’: ‘puisses-tu boire avec plaisir’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 874) ~ Egypt bil-hana ‘may it do you good! (said to one who has eaten or drunk)’ (Spiro 1895: 630) ~ Najd htana ‘geniessen’; ‘to enjoy, savour’ (Socin 1901 III 318; Kurpershoek 1995: 459) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ašrub haniyyā (mariyya)⟩ ‘drink in happiness (and health)’ (Corriente 1997: 552).

342

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

(ii) hnjnj (Pyr) ‘jauchzen, jubeln’; hnjwt ‘die Jublerin’ (Wb II 493; Faulkner 1962: 159) || Ar. ‫ �ه�ن�ئ‬haniʾa ‘to rejoice at’ (Hava 1982: 837); ~ Rwala hanna ‘to congratulate’ (Musil 1928: 159) ~ Kəndērīb hanna ‘beglückwünschen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 149) ~ Palest hniyye ‘Wohlbefinden’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 77) ~ Lebanon hana ‘bonheur’ (Feghali 1938: 840) ~ Egypt hanna ‘to cause to be happy’ (Spiro 1895: 629) ~ Malta ⟨hennæ, ihenni⟩ ‘felicitare’ (Vassalli 1796: 236). 776

h-w-y¹

hꜣj/hjw (Pyr) ‘come down, go down, descend, fall’; ‘herabsteigen, hinabsteigen’ (Faulkner 1962: 156; Ember 1930: 23; Wb II 472) ~ Dem hwj ‘schlagen’ (DG 270) ~ Copt ϩⲉ ‘to fall’ (Crum 1939: 637a) ~ Heb ‫ ָהיָ ה‬hāyā ‘fall out, come to pass’ (BDB 224) || Ar ‫ �هو�ى‬hawā ‘to be hurled down’ (Hava 1982: 841); ~ E. Arabia hawa ‘to plunge, go down’ (Holes 2001: 549) ~ Oman hawye ‘Mal’; hewe ‘sich mit Gewalt auf Jemand stürzen’ (Reinhardt 1894: 42, 235) ~ Egypt hawa ‘to fall down’ (Spiro 1895: 630) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨hawayt⟩ ‘to fall (into a chasm)’ (Corriente 1997: 554) ~ Najd hawa ‘to plunge down, to swoop down’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 460); ‘to go down, come down’ (Sowayan 1992: 301) ~ Sinai hawā ‘to beat someone’ (C. Bailey 1991: 456) ~ Yemen hāwēʾ ‘minacciare con bastone’ (Rossi 1939: 220) ~ Palest hawa ‘tomber sur qqn, attaquer, frapper’; hwāy ‘Schlag’ (Denizeau 1960: 546; Kampffmeyer 1936: 77). 777

h-w-y²

hj (Pyr) ‘husband’; ‘Gatte’ (Faulkner 1962: 157; Calice 1936: 36) || Ar ‫ �هو��ي‬hawiya ‘to love or desire’ (Hava 1982: 842); ~ Rwala hawa ‘love, passion’; hawyān ‘an enamored one’ (Musil 1928: 158, 560) ~ Aleppo hawa ‘passion, amour’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 877) ~ Palest hawa ‘liebgewinnen, Verliebtheit’ (Bauer 1957: 194, 335). 778

h-y-f

hjp ‘run’ (Edel 1955: 45; Takács 1999: 146) ~ Syr hawfā ‘a breath, puff of air’ (CSD ‫ف‬ 102) || Ar � ّ‫ �هي�� ف‬hayf ‘heisser trockener Süd-westwind aus Jemen’ (Wahrmund II 1142); cf. ���‫ �ه‬haffa ‘to whizz, hiss (wind); to walk quickly (man)’ (Hava 1982: 830);

776. h-w-y ¹ – 781. w-t-r

343

~ Rwala al-heyf ‘the hot south wind’; cf. haff ‘run through; to go and not return; to rush, plunge down-hill and speed away’; hafāhīf ‘slender camels’ (Musil 1928: 12, 167) ~ Daθīna ahyaf, pl hīf ‘grand et élancé (: chameau)’; yihuff šidda ‘il est bon marcheur’ (Landberg 1901: 1443) ~ ʿAnazeh hafhāfa, pl hafāhif ‘rapide’ (Landberg 1940: 90) ~ Najd haff ‘to run through, to go and not return’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 474) ~ Palmyra haff ‘eventer; agiter (une étoffe)’ (Cantineau I 159, 160; II 7, 8) ~ Lebanon hāf ‘to blow (wind)’ (Frayha 1973: 190) ~ Sinai haff ‘to fan; to cause s.th. to flutter’ (Stewart 1990: 228) ~ Egypt haff ‘to blow with the breath’: haffet hawa ‘a gust of wind’ (Spiro 1895: 626) ~ Douz habhab ‘leicht werden (Wind)’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2014: 16) ~ Khābūra hēf ‘to let leaves fall (plant)’ (Brockett 1985: 214). W 779

w-b-š

wbḫ (MK) ‘be bright’ (Faulkner 1962: 59); ‘hell sein, leuchten (von Kleider die sauber sind)’ (Wb I 295) ~ Dem wbš ‘hell sein, erhellen’; wbš ‘weiß’ (DG 85) ~ Copt ⲟⲩⲃⲁϣ ‘become, be white’ (Crum 1939: 476b) || Ar ���‫ وب� ش‬wabiša ‘to be white-spotted’ (Hava 1982: 847); wabš/wabaš ‘weiße Nagelflecke’ (Wahrmund II 1150). 780

w-b-l

wbn (MK) ‘overflow’; ‘überquellen (vom Korn im Speicher), Quelle (in der ْ Oase)’ (Faulkner 1962: 68; Wb I 294; Calice 1936: 57) || Ar ‫ وب�ل‬wabl/‫ وا ب�ل‬wābil ‘heavy rain’ (Hava 1982: 8 4 7); ~ Rwala wabel ‘a downpour for several days, inundating whole plains’ (Musil 1928: 11) ~ Palest maṭar wābil ‘pluie abondante’ (Denizeau 1960: 549) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨šita an wābil⟩ ‘heavy rain’ (Corriente 1997: 556). 781

w-t-r

mtr (LE) ‘cordage’; mtr wʿb ‘spotless cordage’ (DLE I 215; Hoch 1994: 174) ~ Heb

‫أ‬ yaθrā ‘string of a bow’ (CSD 200) || Ar ‫ وت�ر‬watar, pl ‫ � وت�ا ر‬ʾawtār ‘bow-string’ (Hava 1982: 893); ‫יֶתר‬ ֶ yeter cord’; ‫יתר‬ ָ ‫ ֵמ‬mētār ‘cord (of a tent), string (of a bow)’ (BDB 452) ~ Syr

344

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

~ Iraq wattar ‘to stretch, draw tight’; watar, pl ʾawtār ‘string (of a bow or musical instrument)’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 487) ~ Yemen witr ‘brace’ (Piamenta II 516) ~ Aleppo watar, pl utār ‘corde d’arc, corde d’un instrument musical’ (corps)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 882) ~ Damascus watar, pl wtār ‘violin string’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 228) ~ Palest watar, pl utār/awtār ‘Saite’ (Bauer 1957: 250) ~ Egypt watar, pl awtār ‘chord of musical instrument’; ‘kleinere Art Teitsattel’; wattāṛa ‘Strick(e)’ (Spiro 1895: 632; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 997) ~ Marazig watar, pl awtāṛ ‘corde du tambourin, collée à la peau et fixée au cadre’ (Boris 1958: 658) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨watar, pl awtār⟩ ‘bow-string, string of musical instrument’ (Corriente 1997: 556). 782

w-θ-b

i҆sbt (Amarna) ‘throne, stool’ (Faulkner 1962: 30) ~ Akkad šubtu ‘throne’ (M. Cohen 2011: 211) ~ Heb ‫‘ יָ ַׁשב‬to sit’ (BDB 442) || Ar �‫ وث� ب‬waθaba ‘sich setzen’ (Wahrmund II 1154); ~ Yemen waθab ‘to sit’ (Piamenta 1991: 516) ~ Daθīna ⟨twaθθab⟩ ‘être assis de la manière orientale’ (GD 2901). 783

w-θ-q

784

w-ǧ-l

‫ث‬

i҆sq (NK) ‘linger’; ‘zögern, verweilen’ (Faulkner 1962: 31; Wb I 133) || Ar �‫ و� ق‬waθuqa ‘fest, solid sein’ (Wahrmund II 1555); ~ Egypt yiwtag ‘fest werden’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 497) ~ Morocco tiqa ‘trust’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 212) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨niwaθθaq⟩ ‘to confirm’ (Corriente 1997: 556) ~ Malta ⟨wettaq⟩ ‘rendere stabile, confermare’ (Vassalli 1796: 655).

wḏnw (MK) ‘flood, inundation’; ‘Flut (des Wassers), Woge’ (Faulkner 1962: 76; Wb I 409) || Ar ‫ و ج�ي���ل‬waǧīl/‫ �مو ج��ل‬mawǧil ‘a pool of water’ (Hava 1982: 853); ~ N. Yemen waŝlah/waŝīl/‘erste Regentropfen’ (Behnstedt 1987: 312).

782. w-θ-b – 787. w-ḥ-d

785

345

w-ǧ-h

wgyt ‘jaw’; ‘Unterkiefer, die Kinnlade (als menschlicher und tierischer Körperteil)’ (Faulkner 1962: 71; Wb I 376) ~ Dem wggj ‘Unterkiefer’, (DG 103) ~ Copt ⲟⲩⲟ(ⲟ)ϭⲉ ‘jaw, cheek’ (Crum 1939: 512b) ~ Ḥar wagh ‘face’ (Johnstone 1977: 161) || Ar ‫ و ج��ه‬waǧh, pl ‫ و ج�وه‬wuǧūh ‘face, front’ (Wahrmund II 1160); ~ Oman wugh ‘Gesicht’; wegh ‘Richtung’ (Reinhardt 1894: 9, 41) ~ Iraq wuǧih, pl wuǧūh ‘face, countenance’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 489) ~ Kəndērīb wəčč ‘Gesicht’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 150) ~ Damascus wəšš, pl wžūh ‘face’; wāžha ‘face of building’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 84) ~ Palest wuǧh/wiǧh/wišš, pl wuǧūh/uǧūh ‘Gesicht, Antlitz’ (Bauer 1957: 134) ~ Egypt wagh, pl awguh/ugūh ‘face’ (Spiro 1895: 634); waǧhe, pl wuǧūh ‘Stirn’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 498) ~ Malta ⟨wiċċ, pl uċūh⟩ ‘faccia, volto; superficie, facciata’ (Vassalli 1796: 659). 786

w-ǧ-ʿ

wgꜣ (MK) [< *wǧʿ] ‘Schwäche (Alters-, Herzschwäche); wehe!’; wgꜣ.t ‘Schädigung’ (Wb I 376) || Ar �� ‫ �ج‬waǧiʿa ‘Schmerz empfinden’ (Wahrmund II 1160); ‫وع‬ ~ N. Yemen waǧiʿ ‘krank werden’ (Behnstedt 1987: 311) ~ Sinai wiǧiʿ ‘to fall ill’ (Stewart 1990: 278) ~ E. Arabia wuǧaʿ/wuyaʿ ‘hurt, cause pain’ (Holes 2001: 552) ~ S.E. Anatolia wəǧəʿ ‘avoir mal’ (Grigore 2007: 115) ~ Aleppo waǧeʿ ‘faire mal à qqn (partie du corps)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 884) ~ Palmyra waǧaʿ ‘faire mal’ (Cantineau 1934: 5) ~ Palest ōǧaʿ ‘Schmerz erregen’ (Bauer 1957: 262) ~ Lebanon twažžaʿ ‘il a souffert’ (Feghali 1938: 54) ~ Egypt wagaʿ ‘to ache’ (Spiro 1895: 633) ~ Tunis užáʿ ‘il a été douloureux’; twažžaʿ ‘il a souffert’ (D. Cohen 1975: 101, 54) ~ Malta ⟨weġgħa⟩ ‘dolore’ (Vassalli 1796: 655). 787

w-ḥ-d

w-ʿ (OK) ‘Zahlwort: eins’; m-wʿ ‘in privacy’ (Wb I 273; DLE I 93); wʿt ‘das Einzige, die Einzige’ (Hannig & Vomberg 1999: 416) ~ Dem wʿ ‘Einer (substantivisch gebraucht); einzig’ (DG 8l1) ~ Copt ⲟⲩⲁ ‘one, someone’ (Crum 1939: 469a) || Ar ‫ وح�د ه‬waḥdahū, ‫ وح�د �ه�ا‬waḥdahā ‘he, she alone’ (Wehr 1961: 1236); Lability of root-final *d in this Ancient Egyptian lexeme is paralleled in certain Arabic vernaculars.

~ Egypt wēḥ ‘einer’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 176) ~ Oman wāḥi, f woḥde ‘1’; keff wāḥi ‘eine Hand allein’; wāḥi wāḥi ‘endlich’ (Reinhardt 1894: 82, 417, 355) ~ Khābūra wāḥid/wēḥi ‘one’ (Brockett 1985: 216) ~ Damascus waḥd- + pron.

346

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

suff. ‘alone’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 7) ~ Kəndērīb waḥd- + pron. suff.: waḥdu ‘er allein’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 150) ~ Palest waḥd/wiḥd/la-waḥd ‘allein’ (Bauer 1957: 11). 788

w-ḥ-r¹

wḥʿ.t (LE) ‘Skorpion’ (Calice 1936: 58; Wb I 351) ~ Copt ⲟⲩⲟⲟϩⲉ ‘scorpion’ (Crum ‫حة‬ ‫ وح‬waḥar ‘eine giftige Eidechse’ (Wahrmund 1939: 509a) || Ar �‫�ر‬ ‫ و‬waḥrah, pl ‫�ر‬ II 1164); ~ Najd wiḥir, pl wuḥāreh ‘Dornschwanzeidechse, Uromastix spinipes’ (Hess 1938: 84) ~ N. Yemen waḥarī ‘Agame (Eidechsenart)’ (Behnstedt 1987: 312). 789

w-ḥ-r²

ꜣwḥ (MK) ‘do violence’; ‘verdrängen von (mit r)’ (Faulkner 1962: 2; Wb I 5) || Ar ْ ‫ وح‬waḥira ‘von Zorn und Wut erfüllt sein’; ‫�ر‬ ‫ وح‬waḥr ‘Zorn, Groll’ (Wahrmund ‫�ر‬ II 1164). 790

w-ḥ-š

wḥś/wśḥ (ME) ‘Feinde schlachten’ (Wb I 351, 365); wḥs ‘to quell tumult’ (Faulkner 1962: 1978: ّ 67) || Saf wḥš ‘be desolate’ (Winnett & Lankesterّ Harding �‫ و‬waḥḥaša ‘to desolate, depopulate (a land)’; ���‫ح ش‬ �‫ ت�و‬tawaḥḥaša 651) ~ Ar ���‫ح ش‬ ‘become savage, wild, unsociable’ (Hava 1982: 856); ~ Damascus waḥəš, pl wḥūš ‘beast, brute’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 20, 30) ~ E. Arabia waḥiš ‘rough, rude, uncouth’ (Holes 2001: 554) ~ Oman wḥiš ‘wild’ (Reinhardt 1894: 41) ~ Hijaz wiḥiš bad’ (Omar 1975: 279) ~ Iraq waḥiš ‘wild animal’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 490) ~ Tenḥara (Yemen) waḥš ‘monstre’ (Vanhove 1995: 265) ~ S.E. Anatolia waḥš ‘wildes Tier’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 455) ~ Palest wiḥše ‘häßlich (Mädchen)’; uḥīšak ‘dein Schlechtes’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 78) ~ Egypt istawḥaš ‘be savage, wild’; wiḥiš ‘bad, evil, ugly; unpleasant, nasty’ (Spiro 1895: 635; Badawi & Hinds 1986: 927); waḥaš ‘beißen’ (Tier)’; wuḥēš ‘schlecht’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 498; 1999: 403) ~ Douz wiḥaš ‘Angst machen’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2014: 2310) ~ Malta ⟨waħx, pl wħux⟩ ‘timore grande, terrore’ (Vassalli 1796: 651).

788. w-ḥ-r ¹ – 793. w-x-y ²

791

347

w-ḥ-y

ḥww (Pyr) ‘announce, proclaim’; ‘melden’; ḥw ‘authoritative utterance, royal ordinance’; ḥwt.j ‘Bote’ (Ember 1914: 115; Faulkner 1962: 164; Wb III 44) || Ar ‫ و�حى‬waḥā ‘to despatch a messenger to s.o.’ (Hava 1982: 857); awḥā ‘to inspire or to reveal s.th. to s.o.’ (Ambros 2004: 285) ~ Heb ‫ ָחוָ ה‬ḥāwā ‘to tell, declare’ (BDB 296); ~ Aleppo waḥā ‘inspirer à qqn l’idée de (: Dieu)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 887) ~ Najd ōḥa/āḥa, yūḥi ‘to hear, listen, perceive’; tawaḥḥa ‘to listen, hear’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 478) ~ Tripoli (Lebanon) wuḥi, yūḥa ‘être inspiré’ (El-Hajjé 1954: 71) ~ Yemen waḥā ‘to listen to, hear’; waḥḥā make s.o. understand’ (Piamenta 1991: 519) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨waḥy⟩ ‘inspiration’ (Corriente 1997: 560). 792

w-x-y¹

ّ

ّ

wḫꜣ (OK) ‘to seek’; ‘suchen, wünschen, begehren’ (Faulkner 1962: 68; Wb I 353–

ً ‫خ ض‬ ‫خ‬ 4) || Ar ‫‘ و��ى‬etwas beabsichtigen; eifrig studieren’ (Wahrmund II 1168); ‫و��ى ر��ى‬ ‫ف ن‬ � ‫ ��لا‬waxxā riḍan fulān ‘he endeavoured to please s.o.’ (Hava 1982: 858);

~ Lebanon wāxa ‘to fraternize with’ (Frayha 1973: 192) ~ Maghreb wāxa ‘considérer, traiter comme un frère’ (D. Cohen 1996: 525) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨natwaxxā⟩ ‘to befriend’ (Corriente 1997: 560). 793

w-x-y²

(i) wḫꜣ (OK) ‘empty out, shake out, purge the body’; ‘ausleeren, ausschütteln’ (Faulkner 1962: 67; Wb I 353); > *ḫwꜣ > šwꜣ (Pyr) ‘poor’; šwꜣw ‘poor man’ ‫خ‬ (Faulkner 1962: 263) ~ Dem wḫꜣ ‘leeren’ (DG 99) || Ar *waxā < ‫ �و�ى‬xawā ‘to be empty’ (Hava 1982: 190); ~ Morocco xwāt ‘it was empty’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 105) ~ Najd xāwi ‘empty’ (Kurpershoek 1994: 257). (ii) wḫꜣ (MK) ‘ignorant, incompetent person, fool; be foolish, act stupidly’; ‘töricht sein, der Törichte, der Unwissende’ (Faulkner 1962: 67; Wb I 354) *xwy] ‫خ‬ || Ar ‫ �و�ى‬xawā ‘être faible’ (Dozy I 414); ‫ إ� خ�ت��و�ى‬ʾixtawā schwachsinnig, kin‫خ‬ disch werden’ (Wahrmund I 635); ‫ و�وا خ‬waxwāx ‘weak, impotent, slothful’; � ‘sot, imbécile’ (Hava 1982: 857; DAF II 1505). ~ Morocco ʿaqlo xāwi ‘son intelligence est dans un état de vide’ (Prémare IV 179).

348 794

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

w-d-r

dr (Pyr) ‘expel, drive out’; ‘Personen entfernen, vertreiben, beseitigen’ (Faulkner 1962: 314; Wb V 473; Calice 1936: 42) || Ar ‫ ود ر‬wadara ‘to discard, repel’ (Hava 1982: 859); ~ Ḥaḍramawt waddar ‘laisser, ôter, écarter, renvoyer, tourner’ (Landberg 1901: 668; GD 2911) ~ Yemen waddar ‘to waste’ (Piamenta 1991: 520); waddar ‘schicken’ (Werbeck 2001: 653) ~ Khābūra mā yweddaru n-naxīl ‘[Omanis] won’t abandon date-palms’ (Brockett 1985: 217) ~ Aleppo waddar ‘éloigner (qqn), gaspiller son avoir’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 888) ~ Cypriot Ar vadder ‘to expel’ (Borg 2004: 491) ~ Egypt waddaṛ ‘wegfliegen lassen, wegblasen’: ilhawa yiwaddaṛ iddagīg ‘der Wind läßt das Mehl wegfliegen’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 499). 795

w-d-y

wd (OK) ‘legen, setzen, geben, darbringen’; wdi҆ ‘to place, put, plant ّ ‫( أ‬trees)’ (Wb I 385; Faulkner 1962: 72) ~ Dem wtj ‘senden’ (DG 106) || Ar ‫ � د �ى‬ʾaddā ‘he made it … reach, … arrive’ (Lane 38); ~ Kəndērīb wadda ‘fortbringen, wegbringen, hinbringen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 151) ~ Egypt wadwad ‘bringen’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 499) ~ Aleppo wadda ‘faire parvenir soi-même, porter (qqe), conduire, mener (un enfant, un animal)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 884) ~ Lebanon wadda ‘envoyer’ (Feghali 1938: 841) ~ Palest waddā ‘wegschicken’ (Bauer 1957: 356) ~ Sinai āda ‘to transfer’; wadda ‘to send’ (Stewart 1990: 193, 276) ~ S.E. Anatolia wadda, ywaddi ‘emporter’ (Grigore 2007: 124) ~ Khābūra wdy ‘to take, transport’ (Brockett 1985: 218). 796

w-r-x

wꜣḫj (OK) ‘be inundated’; ‘wässerig sein; grünen’; ꜣḫ.t ‘season of inundation’; jꜣḫw ‘überschwemmt sein’ (Faulkner 1962: 54; Wb I 258; Calice 1936: 56; Albright

‫ة‬

‫ئ‬

�‫ ور ي‬warīxah, pl Ar ‫ورا �خ‬ � 1918: 216) || Ar ‫ إ� ����ست��ور خ‬ʾistawraxa ‘become moist’; ��‫�خ‬ � � warāʾix ‘moist (earth), soft (dough)’ (Hava 1982: 862); ~ Egypt raxx to shower’; raxxa ‘a shower’; raxrax ‘to loosen’ (Spiro 1895: 220, 221) ~ Rwala arxa ‘to loosen, to pour down’ (Musil 1928: 355) ~ Damascus raxu ‘soft’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 216) ~ Palest tarāxi ‘Weichlichkeit’ (Bauer 1957: 357) ~ Kəndērīb raxu, f raxwe ‘weich, locker’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 56).

794. w-d-r – 800. w-r-q

797

349

w-r-d

i҆ꜣd.t (MK) ‘Viehweiden; Tau des Himmels, Wasser’; ‘dew, pouring rain’ (Wb I 35; Faulkner 1962: 9; Calice 1936: 113) ~ Akkad arādu ‘to go or come down to lower ground’ (CAD I/2 212); rādu ‘downpour’ (M. Cohen 2011: 170) ~ Heb ‫ יָ ַרד‬yārad ‘to come or go down’ (BDB 432) || Saf wrd ‘to go down’ (Al-Jallad 2015: 353) ~ Ar ‫ ورد‬warada ‘to come to the water’ (Hava 1982: 863); ~ Aleppo warrad ʿla ‘descendre, aller à l’abreuvoir’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 890) ~ Al-Balqāʾ mīrād ‘watering place’ (Palva 1992: 178) ~ ʿAnazeh tard ‘venir à l’abreuvoir’ (Landberg 1940: 93) ~ Najd wirid ‘to come to the water’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 462) ~ Rwala al-bel wurdat ‘the camels have moved to the water’ (Musil 1928: 341). 798

w-r-š

wšꜣ (OK) ‘to feed, fatten’; ‘mästen (Rinder, Wild, Geflügel)’ (Ember 1930: 12; Faulkner 1960: 70; Wb I 369) || Ar ���‫ ور ش‬waraša ‘to take food with the hand and ْ swallow it greedily’; ‘essen, begierig sein’; ���‫ ور ش‬warš ‘milk-food’ (Hava 1982: 863; Wahrmund II 1176); 799

w-r-ʿ

wrḏ (LE) ‘be, grow weary, tire’; ‘müde werden’ (Faulkner 1962: 65; Wb I 337) || Ar ‫ ور‬waraʿa ‘to be faint-hearted, weak’ (Hava 1982: 864);

‫ع‬

~ Najd wirʿ, pl wirʿān ‘child, child of less than five years of age; child up to its seventh year’ (Hess 1938: 139; Musil 1928: 244) ~ N. Yemen wirʿin ‘Säugling’ (Behnstedt 1987: 312) ~ Daθīna ⟨twarraʿ⟩ ‘être lâche’ (GD 2919) ~ Egypt wariʿ ‘God-fearing’; itwarraʿ ‘to be reticent or reserved’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 933) ~ Morocco wārāʿ ‘piété scrupuleuse et craintive’ (Prémare XII 182) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨wariʿ, pl wurrāʿ⟩ ‘timid’ (Corriente 1997: 562). 800

w-r-q

wꜣḏ (MK) [< *wrǧ < *wrg/wrq] ‘papyrus plant; green, pale (of lips), make green, fresh, raw (of food), green stone’; m wꜣḏ ‘successfully’; wꜣḏ.t ‘green linen’; ‘grün, grün sein (von den Pflanzen, und vom Felde); allgemein von Dingen grüner Farbe; frisch, Frisch sein’ (Faulkner 1962: 55; Wb I 151) ~ Akkad urqītu ‘greenery,

350

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

‫قة‬

verdure, vegetation’ (CAD XX 238) ~ Heb ‫‘ יֶ ֶרק‬greenness’ (BDB 438) || Ar ���‫ور‬

‫ق‬

‫أ‬

warqah, pl � ‫ � ورا‬ʾawrāq ‘Blatt’ (Wahrmund II 1177); ~ N. Yemen waragah ‘Blatt’ (Behnstedt 1987: 312) ~ Kəndērīb waraq ‘Blätter’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 151) ~ Ḥassāniyya uṛag ‘feuillage’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 69) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨yatwarraq⟩ ‘to be stripped of leaves’ (Corriente 1997: 562). 801

w-r-m

wrm (ME) ‘elevation’; ‘Bezeichnung der Überschwemmung’; wꜣb.t ‘Anhöhe, hochgelegenes Ackerstück’; wꜣb.t n sʿ ‘Sanddüne’ (Ember 1930: 38; Wb I 332, 251) ~ Heb ‫ רּום‬rūm ‘height’ (BDB 927) || Ar ‫ ور‬warima ‘anschwellen, geschwol‫م‬ len sein’ (Wahrmund II 1178); ~ Aleppo wurem ‘s’enfler, enfler, se gonfler’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 892) ~ Iraq wuram ‘to swell’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 492) ~ Yemen warram ‘gonfiare’; warmeh ‘gonfiore’ (Rossi 1939: 212) ~ Damascus wərem ‘to swell’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 232) ~ Palest wirim ‘anschwellen (Geschwulst)’ (Bauer 1957: 20) ~ Negev wirím ‘it swelled’ (Blanc 1970: 127) ~ Egypt wirim ‘swell, be swollen’ (Spiro 1895: 639) ~ Djidjelli wārem ‘enflé, gonflé’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 263). 802

w-r-y

i҆ꜣ.t (OK) ‘Rücken’ (Wb I 26) ~ Sab hwry ‘derriére’ (Avanzini 1962: 298) || Ar ‫ورا ء‬ warāʾ ‘beyond, behind, in front’ (Hava 1982: 861); ~ Palest wara ‘hinten’ (Bauer 1957: 158) ~ Egypt wara ‘behind’: wara l-bēt ‘behind the house’ (Spiro 1895: 637) ~ Morocco muṛa/mūr ‘behind; derrière’ < *min-warāʾ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 20; W. Marçais 1911: 472) ~ Ḥassāniyya mūṛ ‘behind (prep.)’ (Mali; Heath 2004: 149) ~ Malta ⟨lura⟩ ‘addietro, indietro’ (Vassalli 1796: 444) [< *l-wara]. 803

w-z-z

zꜣ.t (OK) ‘goose’ (Ember 1930: 85; Wb III 422) ~ Akkad uzzu ‘swan’ (M.ّ Cohen ‫�ز‬ 2011: 21) < Sumer uz ‘domestic goose or duck’ (Halloran 2006: 306) || Ar ‫ و‬wazz ‘goose’ (Hava 1982: 866); ~ Iraq wozza ‘Wildente’ (Weißbach 1930: 335); wazz (coll.) ‘goose, geese’; wazza, pl -āt ‘goose’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 493); wazzi ‘a goose’ (Abu-Haidar

801. w-r-m – 805. w-s- ʿ

351

1991: 70) ~ Palmyra wazze ‘Oie (sauvage)’ (Cantineau 1934 II 74) ~ Damascus wazze (coll.) (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 106) ~ Palest wazz ‘Gans’ (Bauer 1957: 121) ~ Egypt wazza ‘Gans’; wizz ‘Gänse’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 500) ~ Tripoli (Libya) wazz ‘oca’ (Griffini 1913: 191) ~ Morocco wezza ‘goose’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 89) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨wazz, n.u. -ah⟩ ‘goose’ (Corriente 1997: 562) ~ Ḥassāniyya wəzze ‘canard’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 38) ~ Malta ⟨wiżż (coll.)⟩ ‘oca’ (Vassalli 1796: 662). 804

w-z-n

wdn (OK) ‘be heavy, to weigh’; ‘schwer sein, lasten, gewichtig sein (Name, Ansehen), auch schwierig werden (Zustände)’; wdnt ‘heavy block of stone’; ‫�ز ن‬ ‘schwerer Steinblock’ (Faulkner 1962: 73; Wb I 390) || Ar � ‫ و‬wazana ‘weigh’ (Hava 1982: 867); ~ Damascus wzān ‘Gewicht’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 170) ~ Lebanon wazan ‘he weighed’ (Nasr 1966: 176) ~ Āzəx wazan, yūzən ‘wiegen’: ūzən ‘wiege! (m)’ (Wittrich 2001: 60) ~ Ḥama wzān ‘abwiegen’ (Lewin 1966: 229) ~ Yemen wazan/ zān, yizīn ‘pesare’ (Rossi 1939: 227) ~ Iraq wuzan ‘to weigh’ (Clarity et al., 197) ~ Algiers uzen ‘peser, mesurer’ (Tapiéro 1971: 164, 162) ~ Djidjelli wezn ‘fait de peser’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 87) ~ Malta ⟨wiżen⟩ ‘essere grave, pesante’ (Vassalli 1796: 661). 805

w-s-ʿ

wśḫ/śḫw (LE) [< *wsʿ/swʿ] ‘weit sein (räumlich) weit; geräumig (vom Haus, Platz); Breite, Weite’; wśḫ.t n bnr ‘die Aussenhalle’ (Wb I 364, 365, 461; Ember 1912: 90) ~ swsḫ ‘widen’; ‘extend’ (Faulkner 1962: 69, 218; DLE II 22); sḫ.t ‘die Breite’ (Calice 1933: 277); N wśḫ i҆s ‘it was not broad’ (Gunn 1924: 200) ~ Dem wsḫ ‘breit sein’ (DG 101) ~ Copt ⲟⲩⲱϣⲥ ‘become, be broad; breadth’ (Crum 1939: 503b) || Ar ‫ و��س‬wasiʿa ‘be broad, ample, wide (place)’ (Hava 1982: 869);

‫ع‬

~ Sinai wisīʿ ‘broad, generous, tolerant’ (Stewart 1990: 280) ~ Baghdad wsīʿi ‘broad’ (Blanc 1964: 70) ~ Aleppo usīʿ, pl usāʿ ‘spacieux, vaste’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 894) ~ Kəndērīb wəsəʿ ‘Umfang, Weite, Breite’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 152) ~ Daragözü wsīḥ ‘breit’ (O. Jastrow 1973: 81) ~ Āzəx wasīʿ ‘weit’ (Wittrich 2001: 101) ~ Çukurova wsīʿ ‘id.’ (Procházka 2002: 32) ~ Egypt wasaʿ ‘open space’ (Spiro 1895: 641) ~ Tripoli (Libya) wassaʿ ‘allargare’ (Cesàro 1939: 225) ~ Tunis wāšaʿ ‘large, spacieux’ (D. Cohen 1975: 68) ~ Marazig wsāʿ ‘weit,

352

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

geräumig werden’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2005: 399) ~ Morocco waseʿ ‘broad’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 26) ~ Ḥassāniyya usāʿ ‘il est devenu spacieux’ (D. Cohen 1963: 127) ~ Malta ⟨wisa’⟩ ‘ampiezza, spazio’ (Vassalli 1796: 661). 806

w-š-r

wsy (OK) ‘to saw’; ‘sägen (Holz)’ (Faulkner 1962: 68, Ember 1930: 29; Wb I 358) ~ Akkad massāru/šaššāru ‘saw’ (M. Cohen 2011: 183) || Ar ‫ و� �ش� ر‬wašara ‘to saw’; našara ‘to saw wood’ (Hava 1982: 871, 769); ~ Ḍofār mašar ‘scier’ (Landberg 1901: 1511; 1942: 2696) ~ Yemen wašar to build (a boat); waššar ‘to whet strop (razor)’ (Piamenta 1991: 524); minšār, pl manāšīr ‘sega’ (Rossi 1939: 154) ~ Ḥaḍramawt minšār, pl manāšir ‘two-handed ripsaw’ (Radionov 2007: 94) ~ Damascus mənšār, pl manašīr ‘saw’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 200) ~ Palest minšār, pl manāšīr ‘Säge’ (Bauer 1957: 250) ~ Marazig munšār, pl manāšīr ‘scie’ (Boris 1958: 610) ~ Djidjelli menšāṛ ‘scie’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 300) ~ Cherchell mənšāṛ ‘scie’ (Grand’Henry 1972: 84) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨našart⟩ ‘to saw in two’ (Corriente 1997: 529) ~ Egypt wašara ‘Achslager (Holz) beim Schöpfwerk’; wāšara ‘Hackklotz’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 502); naššār ‘woodsawyer’ (Spiro 1895: 601). 807

w-ṣ-d

ḏd (Pyr) ‘stable, enduring’ (Faulkner 1962: 325); ḏdj (Pyr) ‘dauern, fest sein’ (Wb V 628) || Ar ‫ و�ص�د‬waṣada ‘fest sein’ (Dieterici 1894: 176); ~ Daθīna waṣīdah, pl waṣāyid ‘une perche avec une fourche (šuʿbah) en haut, ou l’on place les (ʿīdān) au milieu de la hutte (daymah)’ (GD 2924) ~ Morocco oṣēd ‘enclos soigneusement fermé’ (Prémare XII 212). 808

w-ṣ-y

wḏi҆ (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘command’; ‘befehlen, Befehl erteilen, jmd. an einem Dritten befehlen, anbefehlen, empfehlen’; wḏ wḏt ‘issue a command’ (Ember 1930: 37; Wb I 394; Faulkner 1962: 73); ḏwj ‘jemanden rufen’ (Wb V 550) ~ Dem wt ‘befehlen, Befehl, Erlass, Erklärung’ (DG 104) ~ Akkad (w)aṣû(m) ‘make

‫أ‬

known, publicize’ (CDA 435) || Ar ‫ � و�صى‬ʾawṣā ‘to order, command’; waṣṣā ‘bequeath’ (Hava 1982: 875);

806. w-š-r – 810. w-ḍ-y

353

The metathesis of this Egyptian lexeme (wḏ/ḏwi҆) is paralleled in both Heb ṣwh/wṣh (Exodus I 22; Ezra VIII 17) and Arabic; note also Maghribī wāsa/sāwa ‘faire’. Ph. Marçais 1956: 117

~ Aleppo waṣṣa ‘recommander’; waṣīye ‘dernières recommendations’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 898) ~ Suxne waṣṣa, ywaṣṣi ‘empfehlen, beauf-tragen’; ōṣa, yōṣi ‘vermachen’ (Behnstedt 1994: 395) ~ Damascus waṣṣa ‘will (property)’; wṣiyye, pl -āt ‘testament’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 264, 237) ~ Lebanon uṣiyye ‘commandement’ (Feghali 1938: 842) ~ Palest tūṣāye ‘etwas, das anempfohlen, anvertraut ist’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 78); waṣiyye ‘commandment’ (Piamenta 2000: 246) ~ Kəndērīb waṣṣa, ywaṣṣi ‘letzwillig bestimmen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 153) ~ E. Arabia waṣiyya ‘request, order, (last) will, testament’ (Holes 2011: 560) ~ Yemen waṣiyyah ‘testamento’ (Rossi 1939: 242) ~ Tripoli (Libya) waṣṣa ‘determinare, fissare’ (Griffini 1913: 80, 121) ~ Mzāb waṣṣa ‘il a commandé / recommandé’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 135) ~ Djidjelli tweṣya ‘fait de recommander’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 230) ~ Malta ⟨wissa, jwissi⟩ ‘ammonire’ (Vassalli 1796: 661). 809

w-ḍ-ḥ¹

(i) wḏḥ (Pyr) ‘wean’; ‘entwöhnen; das kleine entwöhnte Kind’ (Faulkner 1962: 76; Wb I 410) || Ar ��‫ و‬waḍaḥa ‘glänzend weiße Milch geben (: Kamelin)’

‫ضح‬ ‫حأ‬ ��‫ و‬waḍaḥ, pl ‫� �ا‬ ‫ � و �ض‬ʾawḍāḥ ‘milk, whiteness’ (Hava 1982: 875); ‫ح‬ ‫ضح‬

‫ �ض‬ḍawwaḥa ‘to give a.o. diluted milk’ (Hava 1982: 423); (Wahrmund II 1193); ‫� ّو‬

~ Najd waḍḍāḥ ‘Licht verbreitend’; awḍaḥ ‘weiss (von Kamelen, Pferden); weiss glänzend (Gefäß)’ (Socin 1901 III 321) ~ awð̣ aḥ ‘white (: camel)’ (Borg 1999: 136) ~ Sinai awð̣ aḥ ‘white (: camel)’ (Stewart 1990: 276). (ii) ḥḏ ‘white, bright; set forth at dawn’; ‘weiß, hell (von Milch, Sahne, Fett, Honig)’; ḥḏt ‘white of the eye’; ḥḏḏwt ‘brightness’ (Faulkner 1962: 181, 182; Wb III 206; Brockelmann 1932: 110) ~ Heb ‫ ַצח‬ṣaḥ(ḥ) ‘dazzling, glowing, clear’ (BDB ّ ‫ض‬ 850) || Ar �� ḍaḥḥ ‘light of the sun’ (Hava 1982: 414); ‫ح‬ ~ Ḥama daḥḥ ‘scheinen (Sonne)’ [< ḍaḥḥ ‘Sonnenschein’] (Lewin 1966: 206) ~ Najd ð̣ āḥ ‘to appear, to shine, be bright’; ð̣ ōḥ ‘lightning, brilliance, luminosity’; mið̣ wāḥ ‘lamp’; wað̣ ḥa, pl wið̣ ḥ ‘a pure white she-camel’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 416; 1995: 464) ~ N. Yemen ð̣ aḥð̣ aḥ ‘auftauchen (Sonne)’ (Behnstedt 1987: 274). 810

w-ḍ-y

wḏꜣ (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘heil sein, unverletzt sein, versehrt sein, wohlbehalten sein’; ‘hale, uninjured, prosperous’; wḏꜣ b ‘be glad’; ʿnḫ wḏꜣ snb ‘may he live, be

354

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

‫�ض�ؤ‬ prosperous, hale’ (Calice 1936: 141; Wb I 399; Faulkner ‫ ّ ت ّ أ‬1962: 74) || Ar �‫ و‬waḍuʾa ‘vor Reinlichkeit glänzen’ (Wahrmund II 1193); � � ‫ �و �ض‬tawaḍḍa‌ʾa ‘to wash onself’ (Hava 1982: 875); ~ Aleppo wað̣ ð̣a ‘purifier, laver’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 899) ~ Kəndērīb wað̣ ð̣a ‘jemanden rituell waschen’; lūwe ʿala wəð̣ u ‘wer im Zustand der ritualen Reinheit ist’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 153) ~ Palest itwaḍḍa ‘sich rituell waschen’ (Bauer 1957: 354) ~ Egypt itwaḍḍa ‘to perform religious ablutions’ (Spiro 1895: 644). 811

w-ṭ-n

i҆҆wtn (LE) ‘ground’; ‘Erdboden, Erde, Grund, Grundstück’ (Faulkner 1962: 14; Wb I 58) ~ Dem i҆҆tn ‘Erdboden’ (DG 47) ~ Copt ⲉⲓⲧⲛ ‘ground, earth, dust, rubbish’

‫ن‬

‫أ‬

(Crum 1939: 87b) || Ar �‫ وط� ن‬waṭan, pl � ‫ � وط�ا‬ʾawṭān ‘dwelling’; �‫ �موط� ن‬mawṭin, pl ‫ن‬ ��‫ �موا ط‬mawāṭin ‘abode, dwelling, home’ (Hava 1982: 879); ~ Ḥassāniyya waṭan, pl owṭān ‘territoire’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 143) ~ Damascus waṭan, pl ʾawṭān ‘home’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 117) ~ Oman waṭan ‘Heimat’ (Reinhardt 1894: 43) ~ Egypt waṭan ‘native land, home’ (Spiro 1895: 645). 812

w-ṭ-y

(i) tjtj (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘niedertreten, zertreten’; ‘to trample on foe’ (Wb V 244; Calice 1936: 216; Faulkner 1962: 294) || Ar. ‫ وط�ئ‬waṭiʾa ‘to tread underfoot’ (Hava 1982: 877); ~ Yemen mīṭāh ‘track, a place where the foot is set down’; wuṭā ‘to bend’; wāṭi ‘treading, trampling’ (Piamenta 1991: 526) ~ ʿAnazeh yāṭi ‘fouler aux pieds’ (Landberg 1940: 95) ~ Najd wiṭa ‘to walk on, step on, tread on’ (Musil 1928: 86; Kurpershoek 1994: 86) ~ Oman waṭa ‘niedertreten’; waṭyeh ‘Sandale’ (Reinhardt 1894: 234, 47) ~ Palest wāṭi ‘qui foule, qui marche sur quelque chose’ (Denizeau 1960: 555); wāṭīhā ‘der auf sie tritt’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 78) ~ Egypt uṭū ‘lowness’ (Spiro 1895: 645) ~ Ḥassāniyya twaṭṭa ‘piétiner’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 113). (ii) tꜣ (Urk. IV) ‘earth (opposed to sky, other world), land (opposed to water), ground’; ‘Erde, Erdboden; Flachland, Land’ (Faulkner 1962: 292; Wb V 212) ~ Copt ⲧⲟ ‘earth’ (Crum 1939: 396a) [< *ṭāʾah ‘black mud’] (Albright 1918: 252); ‫ة‬ cf. Ar � ‫ وط�ا ء‬waṭāʾah ‘plaine’ (Dozy II 827); ‫ة‬ ~ Daθīna � ‫ ط�ا ء‬ṭāʾah ‘piétinement’ (Landberg 1942 II 1083).

811. w-ṭ-n – 815. w- ʿ -r

813

355

w-ð̣ -f

wdp (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘butler, cook’; ‘Aufwärter, Diener im Hause’; wdpwyt ‘serving-maid’; ‘Dienerin (die Wein darreicht)’ (Faulkner 1962: 73; Wb I 388) || Ar

‫�ظّ ف‬ ��� ‫ و‬wað̣ ð̣afa l/ʿalā ‘die Speiserationen auf dem Tag bestimmen’ (Wahrmund ‫فة‬ II 1199); ������‫ و�ظ ي‬wað̣ īfah ‘a daily allowance, or portion, of food’ (Lane 3056);

~ Ḥassāniyya wað̣ īve, pl wað̣ āyəf ‘fonctionnement’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 70) ~ Aleppo waẓẓaf ‘pourvoir d’une fonction, d’une charge, d’un emploi’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 900) ~ Damascus waẓīfe, pl waẓāyəf ‘function’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 99) ~ Lebanon metwaẓẓef ‘fonctionnaire’ (Denizeau 1960: 555) ~ Palest mitwað̣ ð̣if ‘Beamte(r)’ (Bauer 1957: 43) ~ Egypt waẓẓaf ‘to place in a high official position’ (Spiro 1895: 645) ~ N. Yemen hāmitwað̣ ð̣af ‘angestellt’ (Behnstedt 1987: 313). 814

w-ʿ-b

i҆ʿb (OK) ‘be united, assemble, join, unite’; ‘das Getreide mit der Gabel zusammenharken; vereinigen’; ʿb ‘vereinigen’ (Ember 1930: 28; Wb I 40, 174; Faulkner 1962: 11) ~ Sab wʿb ‘finish, complete’ (Biella 1982: 133) || Ar �‫ و�ع� ب‬waʿaba ‘sich des Ganzen bemächtigen’ (Wahrmund II 1199); ~ Aleppo stawʿab ‘contenir (qqe: vase)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 900) ~ AlAndalus ⟨waʿab⟩ ‘to comprehend or embrace’ (Corriente 1997: 567) ~ Egypt ʾistawʿab ‘to hold, to have room for’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 946). 815

w-ʿ-r

wʿrt (LE) ‘desert plateau’ (Faulkner 1962: 58) || Ar ‫ و�عر‬waʿara ‘be hard, rugged, uneven (soil)’ (Hava 1982: 880); ~ Najd waʿar ‘rough ground’ (Sowayan 1992: 303) ~ el-Kerak darbak waʿar ‘dein Weg ist abschüssig’ (Musil 1908: 440) ~ Daθīna ⟨twaʿʿar⟩ ‘être renfermé dans un endroit presque impraticable dans la montagne’; ⟨wi/aʿār⟩ ‘rude’; ⟨waʿīr⟩ ‘rocailleux’; waʿrah ‘thicket’ (GD 2928; Stace 1893: 171) ~ Khābūra wʿāra ‘être méchant’ (Brockett 1985: 72) ~ Oman wʿor ‘wild, gefährlich’ (Reinhardt 1894: 63) ~ Iraq waʿir ‘rough, rocky, uneven, rugged’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 498) ~ Syria waʿir/wiʿir/wēʿir ‘krummer Weg’ (Behnstedt 1997a: 176) ~ Aleppo waʿar ‘sol rocailleux’; waʿra ‘lieu ou chemin rocailleux, raboteux’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 900) ~ Damascus wəʿer ‘bumpy’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 31) ~ Palest

356

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

waʿr ‘steiniges Gelände’; waʿr/wiʿr ‘Geröll(e)’ (Löhr 1905: 142; Bauer 1957: 132) ~ Negev waʿrih ‘rocky (f)’ (Henkin 2010: 248) ~ Egypt wuʿūra ‘ruggedness’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 947) ~ Marazig waʿaṛ, pl awʿāṛ ‘terrain où la marche est difficile, dangereuse’; ūʿār, yūʿār ‘devenir difficile pour (ʿala)’ (Boris 1958: 671) ~ Morocco wāʿar ‘difficile, pénible (travail), ardu, escarpé’ (Prémare XII 231) ~ Sinai twaʿʿar ‘to get stuck’ (Stewart 1990: 276) ~ Sudan waʿra ‘forest, scrub, low forest’ (LDA 531) ~ Douz wāʿir ‘schwer, schwierig’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2014: 268) ~ Djidjelli wāʿōr ‘difficile, sévère’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 262) ~ Cherchell wāʿaṛ ‘méchant’ (Grand’Henry 1972: 102) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨waʿrah⟩ ‘lieu scabreux’ (DA 1354) ~ Malta ⟨imwiegħer⟩ ‘difficilis, salebrosus et asper locus’ (Vassalli 1796: 525). 816

w-ʿ-l

ʿr (Med) [< *wʿl] ‘Ziege’ (Wb I 208; Calice 1936: 54) ~ Sab ʾwʿl(n) ‘ibex, mountain ْ goat’ (Biella 1982: 135) || Saf wʿl ‘ibex’ (Winnett & Lankester 1978: 451) ~ Ar ‫وع�ل‬ waʿl ‘antelope, mountain-goat’ (Hava 1982: 881); cf. 28. b-d-n; ~ Arabia waʿl, pl waʿūl ‘designation of the great wild goat in Syria and among the Qaḥtān in Arabia’ (Doughty 1888: 685) ~ Rwala waʿal ‘ibex’ (Musil 1928: 25) ~ Yemen waʿl, pl ʾawʿāl ‘Bergziege’; waʿil ‘Steinbock, großer Hirsch; ibex’ (Behnstedt 2006: 1308); waʿl, pl wiʿālah ‘ibex’ (Piamenta 1991: 527) ~ Palest waʿl ‘Steinbock, Capra nubiana’ (Dalman VI 77) ~ Palmyra waʿl, pl wuʿūl ‘mouflon’ (Cantineau 1934 II 74). 817

w-ʿ-y

‫أ‬

ʿwy.t ‘pot’ (van der Plas & Borghouts 1998: 51) ~ Dem jʿ ‘waschen’ (DG 48) ~ Copt

ⲉⲓⲱ ‘to wash’ (Crum 1939: 75a) || Ar ‫ وع�ا ء‬wiʿāʾ, pl ‫ � و�عي���ه‬ʾawʿiyah ‘vessel’ (Hava

1982: 882); ~ Aleppo waʿa ‘vase’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 901) ~ Lebanon weʿe, pl wʿāya ‘vase, récipient’ (Denizeau 1960: 556) ~ Damascus wāʿa, pl -āt ‘container’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 52) ~ Palest waʿā, pl awʿiye ‘Gefäß’ (Bauer 1957: 125) ~ Egypt waʿāya ‘vessel, receptacle’; wiʿy ‘pots and pans’ (Spiro 1895: 646) ~ Çukurova wiʿi, pl wʿāya ‘Gefäß’ (Procházka 2002: 290/2, 4) ~ Marazig ūʿē, pl ūʿāyāt ‘tout récipient (à l’exception de ceux dits, māʿūn)’ (Boris 1958: 672) ~ Yemen waʿāʾ, pl awʿiyeh/ mūʿī, pl mawāʿī ‘Geschirr’; wiʿiʾ, pl ūʿiyih ‘großer Transportsack’ (Behnstedt 2006 II 1308); uʿa ‘Behälter’ (Goitein 1934: 49).

357

816. w- ʿ -l – 821. w-f-r ²

818

w-ġ-l

wʿrt [*wġlt/wġrt] ‘leg’; wʿr ‘flee, fly, rush forth’; ‘fliehen, fliehend, flüchtig’ (Faulkner 1962: 57, 58; Wb I 337; Brockelmann 1932: 103; DLE I: 95; Caminos

‫أ �غ‬

1954: 537) || Ar ‫ � و �ل‬ʾawġala ‘rasch schreiten’ (Wahrmund II 1203); ~ Lebanon twaġġal ‘pénétrer dans (un pays)’ (Denizeau 1966: 556) ~ Egypt ʾitwaġġil ‘to make progress, advance, make (good) headway’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 948) ~ Marazig waġġar ‘aller, partir, marcher, se trouver au milieu de la journée’ (Boris 1958: 672–3) ~ Morocco woġġəl ‘enfoncer (qqch.)’; twoġġəl ‘être enfoncé’ (Prémare XII 234). 819

w-ġ-m

ْ‫�غ‬

‫�غ‬

‫أ �غ‬

wʿm.t ‘etwas schlechtes (Zustand oder Handlung)’ (Wb I 285; Calice 1936: 57) || Ar �‫ و‬waġima ‘to breed hatred against’ (Hava 1982: 883); �‫ و‬waġm, pl ‫� و �ا‬ ‫م‬ ‫م‬ ‫م‬ ʾawġām ‘Tiefer Haß, Groll, Gewalttätigkeit’ (Wahrmund II 1203). 820

w-f-r¹

pr.t ‘Frucht, fruchtbar sein’; ‘fruit, seed, offspring, posterity’ (Wb I 518, 530; ‫ف‬ Calice 1936: 30; Faulkner 1962: 91) || Ar ‫ و�ر‬wafara ‘reichlich in Hülle und Fülle vorhanden sein’ (Wahrmund II 1204); ~ Marazig wafra ‘abondance; grand, bien developpé (arbre fruitier et céréales exclusivement)’ (Boris 1958: 958) ~ Daθīna wafar/wafal, yōfar ‘être saturé d’eau’ (GD 2931) ~ Iraq wufra ‘abundance, profusion, plenty’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 499) ~ Aleppo wāfer, f wāfra ‘abondant’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 901) ~ Egypt wufra ‘abundance’ (Spiro 1895: 949) ~ Morocco wufra ‘chevelure abondante’ (Prémare XII 236). 821

w-f-r²

‫فة‬

wpr.t ‘Seitenlocke des Kindes’ (Wb I 305; Takács 2016: 60) || Ar �‫ و�ر‬wafrah ‘hair hanging down upon the ears, hair extending beyond / to the lobe of the ear or to the ears’ (Lane 2956); ‘Haarlocke (besonders hinterm Ohr)’ (Wahrmund II 1205);

358

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

~ Morocco wufra ‘chevelure abondante, chevelure d’homme longue et abondante’ (Prémare XII 236) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨wafrah⟩ ‘hair of the head’; ⟨wāfir al-janāḥayni⟩ ‘having well-feathered wings’ (Corriente 1997: 568). 822

w-f-y

i҆p (LE) ‘count, reckon up’; ‘zählen; etwas zählen; etwas für vollzählig befinden; Einkünfte (Steuern) berechnen, auferlegen; jemanden erkennen, jemanden richtig bewerten’; i҆p n ‘jemandem etwas zuzählen, es ihm zuweisen’; i҆pw.t ‘Zählung, Abrechnung’; i҆p r ‘charge against (of debts)’; i҆pw ‘payments’ (Faulkner 1962: 16; Wb I 66, 67; Gardiner 1957: 126; DLE I: 25) ~ Copt ⲱⲡ ‘count, esteem; give account; give account’ (Crum 1939: 526a) ~ Akkad apû ‘be manifest; elicit’ (Parpola 2007: 9) ~ Sab wfy ‘safety, to pay off’ (Jamme 1962: 435); hwfy ‘accomplissement d’une promesse’ (Avanzini 1962: 297) ~ Soq éfe ‘payer’ ‫ف‬ ~ Mah ufā ‘executer’ (Leslau 1938: 69) || Ar ‫ و��ا ء‬wafāʾ ‘être fidèle à sa parole; payer, acquitter (la dette)’; ~ Suxne wafa, yūfi ‘Schulden bezahlen’ (Behnstedt 1994: 396) ~ Aleppo wafa, yūfi ‘payer, acquitter (une dette)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 902) ~ Çukurova wafa, yiwfi ‘bezahlen (Schuld)’ (Procházka 2002: 79) ~ Lebanon wefe, yūfe ‘payer, s’acquitter de’; waffa ‘ganz bezahlen’ (Feghali 1938: 843; Grotzfeld 1965: 170) ~ Sinai waffa ‘to make up the remaining amount’ (Stewart 1990: 277) ~ Egypt ufā, yūfa ‘zu Ende gehen, aufhören, fertig sein’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 183) ~ Tripoli (Libya) ufē ‘finire, esaurirsi’ (Cesàro 1939: 240) ~ Tunis ufa ‘il a cessé’ (D. Cohen 1975: 105) ~ Ḥassāniyya weffe ‘achever’; uve, yowve ‘être terminé’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 20, 142). 823

w-q-b

‫أ ق‬

wḏb (Med) ‘river bank, seashore’; ‘Ufer, Uferland; Ackerland am Ufer’ (Faulkner

‫ق‬

1962: 76; Wb I 409) [< *wǧb < *wgb] || Ar �‫ و�� ب‬waqb, pl �‫ � و��ا ب‬ʾawqāb ‘Felsgrube mit stehenden Wasser, Höhlung’ (Wahrmund II 1207). 824

w-q-r

jqr (LE) ‘excellent’; ‘trefflich, vorzüglich’ (Faulkner 1962: 31; Wb I 137): jqr dḏ ‘excellent speaker’ (Lichtheim 1996: 79) ~ Dem i҆qr ‘vortrefflich’ (DG 45)

822. w-f-y – 827. w-l-d

359

~ Akkad aqru ‘rare, precious, valuable, dear’ (CAD I/2 207) ~ Heb ‫ יָ ָקר‬yāqār ‫ق‬ ‘precious, rare, splendid’ (BDB 429) || Ar ‫ و�ر‬waqira ‘respecter, vénérer’ (DAF II 1583); ~ Aleppo waqqar ‘témoigner du respect à (qqn)’; mwaqqar ‘respecté, considéré, grave, imposant’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 903) ~ Lebanon uqār ‘respect’ (Feghali 1938: 843) ~ Palest waqār ‘Respekt, Achtung’: bi waqār ‘wurdevoll’ (Bauer 1957: 244, 370) ~ Egypt tawqīr ‘half mourning’ (Spiro 1895: 648). Cf. Ghomara (Berber) weqqer ‘to respect’ (Mourigh 2016: 430).

825

w-l-ǧ¹

wnḏ.wt (MK) ‘associates’; ‘Leute, Angehörige jemandes, Bewohner eines Ortes’ (Faulkner 1962: 63; Wb I 326; Brockelmann 1932: 104); wnḏw.t [anthroponym] ‫ة‬ ‘Angehörige des Seth’ (Altenmüller 1975: 290) || Ar ���‫ و�ل��ي�� ج‬walīǧah ‘follower, partisan’ (Hava 1982: 892) ~ Daθīna ⟨wallaǧ⟩ ‘faire entrer tout à fait, bien cacher’ (GD 2937) ~ Aleppo twallaǧ ‘être chargé d’une affaire’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 951) ~ Damascus mwallaǧ ‘qui a reçu le soin de quelque chose’ (Denizeau 1960: 558) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nilaj, walajt⟩ ‘to enter’ (Corriente 1997: 571). 826

w-l-ǧ²

‫ة‬ ‫أ‬ (Hava 1982: 892); pl ‫ و ج �ل‬walaǧ, pl ‫ � ولا ج‬ʾawlāǧ ‘Höhle, Grotte in der man Schutz � �

‫ و ��جل‬walaǧah, ‘cave, cavern’ wndwt ‘hollow, depression’ (Faulkner 1962: 63) || Ar ���

vor Regen sucht’ (Wahrmund II 1218). 827

w-l-d

‫أ‬

i҆d (OK) ‘Jüngling, junger Mann’ (Wb I 151) || Ar ‫ و�ل�د‬walad/wild/wald, pl ‫� ولا د‬ ʾawlād ‘child, son, offspring, youngling’ (Hava 1982: 893); ~ Najd lād ‘sons’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 165) ~ Khābūra wed ‘a male offspring’ (Brockett 1985: 222) ~ Oman wed ‘Sohn’ (Reinhardt 1894: 10) ~ Aleppo walad, pl ulād ‘enfant’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 907) ~ Palest walad, pl ulād(e) ‘Kind’ (Bauer 1957: 173) ~ Egypt walad, pl wilād/awlād ‘boy, child’ (Spiro 1895: 651).

360 828

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

w-l-m

wnm (Med) ‘to eat, eat of, feed on, consume, devour’; ‘essen, das Essen, Esslust, Appetit, Einnehmen (Heilmittel)’; ‘manger’ (Faulkner 1962: 62; DLE I 102; Wb I 320–1; Herbin 1994: 527); wnmt ‘food, fodder’; ‘Nahrung, Unterhalt’; wnmw ‘food, sustenance’; ‘Nahrung, Fütterung (Vieh)’; wnmy ‘right-hand, right’ (Faulkner 1962: 62; Hannig & Vomberg 1999: 524) ~ Dem wnm ‘essen, das Essen; rechts, rechte Seite’; wnm.t ‘Festessen, Nahrung, Futter’ (DG 91) ~ Copt ⲟⲩⲛⲁⲙ

‫أ‬

‘right hand’ (Crum 1939: 478a, 483b) || Ar ‫ � ول‬ʾawlama ‘donner un repas pour

‫م‬

‫ة‬

fêter un événement heureux dans la famille’ (DAF II 1605); ��‫ �ول�يم‬walīmah, pl Ar

�‫ ل ئ‬walāʾim ‘feast, dinner-party’ (Hava 1982: 894); ‫وا م‬

~ Yemen walīmeh ‘banchetto’; ‘Hochzeitsfest, Hochzeitsessen’ (Rossi 1939: 195; Behnstedt 2006: 1321) ~ Oman welm ‘günstiger Wind’ (Reinhardt 1894: 41) ~ Rwala wālmah, pl -āt ‘what is handy, ready for use, consumption’; al-wālmah ‘what is ready (coffee left over from the day before)’; wallam ‘to prepare, make ready’ (Musil 1928: 320, 362, 467) ~ Khābūra wulem ‘to be ready for cutting’ (Brockett 1985: 223) ~ Daθīna ⟨wallam⟩ ‘préparer, mettre en ordre’; ⟨walīmah⟩ ‘repas, festin en général, à n’importe quelle occasion’ (GD 2938–39) ~ Najd wālim ‘ready’ (Ingham 1994: 186) ~ Iraq walīma, pl walāʾim ‘banquet’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 503) ~ Kəndērīb walīme ‘Gastmahl’; walīmət ʿərs ‘Hochzeitsmahl’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 154) ~ Aleppo wallam ‘donner un repas, un festin’; ulīme, pl ulēyem ‘festin, banquet’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 908) ~ Damascus walīme, pl walāyem ‘banquet’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 18) ~ Al-Balqāʾ twallam ‘to be prepared’ (Palva 1992: 178) ~ Palest walīme, pl walāyim ‘Bankett, Schmaus’ (Bauer 1957: 41, 261) ~ Takrūna ulīma, pl -āt ‘repas offert à l’occasion d’une fête de famille, aussi bien noce que circoncision ou première coupe de cheveux d’un enfant’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 4381) ~ Tunis twāləm ‘il s’est accomodé de’ (D. Cohen 1975: 129) ~ Ūlād Brāhīm ulīma ‘festin’ (W. Marçais 1908: 31). 829

w-l-y

wꜣj (MK) ‘kommen’; wꜣ.t ‘road, way’; ‘Weg, Seite’ (Wb I 246; Calice 1936: 56; Faulkner 1962: 52; Brockelmann 1932: 103) || Ar ‫ ولى‬walā ‘einer Person oder Sache sehr nahe sein, gleich daneben stehen oder kommen’; waly ‘Nähe, Angrenzung’; waliyy ‘nahe, benachbart’; ‘être très proche, suivre immédiatement après, détourner’ (Wahrmund II 1221; DAF II 1606); ~ Yemen walla ‘gehen’ (Behnstedt 2006: 1321) ~ Sinai wallā ‘to leave quickly, take off’ (C. Bailey 1991: 457); wála‌ʾ, yawliy ‘to come near’ (de Jong 2011: 254)

361

828. w-l-m – 831. w-n-n

~ Daθīna ⟨wallā⟩ ‘aller, se rendre’ (GD 2940) ~ Najd walla ‘to go away, turn away’; wala ‘to come next to’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 483) ~ Iraq walli ‘get lost!’ (Abu-Haidar 1991: 199) ~ Lebanon walla ‘partir’ (Feghali 1938: 844); wallet iyyāme ‘mes jours déclinent, je deviens vieux’ (Denizeau 1960: 558) ~ Palest mwalli ‘geht weg’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 79) ~ Tripoli (Libya) walla ‘andarsene indietro’ (Griffini 1913: 13) ~ Mzāb twalli l-əṣ-ṣahṛa ‘tu retournes au désert’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 135) ~ Tangier wulla ‘s’en retourner, devenir’ (W. Marçais 1911: 499) ~ Algiers walla ‘devenir’ (Tapiéro 1971: 155) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨walayt fī⟩ ‘to go in or enter’ (Corriente 1997: 571). 830

w-m-ḍ

wbd.t (OK) ‘burn (n.), burning’; ‘das Brennen, der Brand’ (Faulkner 1962: 59; Wb I 297); wbd ‘brennen, brennend sein; verbrennen, durch Feuer vernichten ‫ � ض‬wamaḍa ‘leicht schimmern’ (Feind)’ (Hannig & Vomberg 1999: 189) || Ar ����‫م‬ ‫و‬ (Wahrmund II 1223); ~ Al-Andalus ⟨yūmiḍ, awmaḍ⟩ ‘to shine’ (Corriente 1997: 573). 831

w-n-n

wnwn (OK) ‘sich hin- und herbewegen; umhergehen, sich bewegen (Kind im Mutterleib)’; ‘to sway to and fro, nod, travel about, shake’; nmnm (Pyr) [> mnmn] ‘sich bewegen, sich regen’; ‘quake, quiver, go to and fro’ (Ember 1930: 42; Wb I 318, II 267; Calice 1936: 57; Faulkner 1962: 61, 133) ~ Dem mnmn ‘sich

ّ‫ن‬

ّ‫أ ن‬

bewegen, zittern’ (DG 162) || Ar �‫ و‬wanna ‘to hum, buzz’ (Hava 1982: 896) < � � ʾanna ‘gémir, verser, répandre (l’eau, etc.)’; ʾannān ‘gémissement, qui gémit sans cesse’ (DAF I 59); cf. 473. ʿ-n-n; ~ Aleppo wann ‘gémir en fendant l’air, siffler (: balle tirée, pierre lancée par une fronde); wanwan ‘bourdonner, ronfler’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 910) ~ S.E. Anatolia yānīn ‘stöhnen’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 18) ~ Lebanon wann ‘jeter, pousser’ (Feghali 1919: 158) ~ Iraq wann ‘to moan’; wanwan ‘to moan repeatedly and continually’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 504) ~ Khābūra winn ‘to groan’ (Brockett 1985: 223) ~ Rwala wanneyt ya daḥḥām tisʿīn wenne (poet.) ‘I mourn, O Daḥḥām, with ninety laments’ (Musil 1928: 219) ~ ʿAnazeh nīne ‘gémissement’ (Landberg 1940: 3) ~ Al-Balqāʾ wanwan ‘to hum (sadly)’ (Palva 1978: 103) ~ Najd wannīn ‘wehklagend’; wann ‘stöhnen’; ‘to moan, lament, groan’ (Socin 1901 III 322; Kurpershoek 1995: 467) ~ E. Arabia wann ‘moan, groan’ (Holes

362

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

2001: 22) ~ Ḥama wann ‘pfeifen, schwirren’ (Lewin 1966: 230) ~ Palest anne ‘Seufzen’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 2) ~ Egypt wann ‘buzz, hum’ (Spiro 1895: 652) ~ Marazig wann ‘mugir (chameleon), bourdonner (mouche), vagir (enfant)’ (Boris 1958: 681) ~ Malta ⟨venven⟩ ‘to vibrate, blow loudly (wind); hurl’ [< Ar wanwan] (Aquilina 1990: 1503). 832

w-h-ǧ

ʿwg (BD) ‘rösten, dörren’ (Calice 1936: 127); ʿḏ ‘verbrennen, braten’ (Brockelmann 1932: 102) || Ar ‫ و ج�ه‬wahaǧa ‘sich entzünden und brennen’ (Wahrmund II 1225);

�

~ Najd wāhiǧ ‘glowing, burning, blazing’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 484) ~ Aleppo wahǧ ‘chaleur (du feu), ardeur (du soleil) réfléchie’; wahhāǧ ‘qui dégage une très forte chaleur’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 911) ~ Egypt wahag ‘to cause to be nervous’ (Spiro 1895: 652) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨wahaǧ⟩ ‘ardour’ (Corriente 1997: 573). 833

w-h-r

wr (MK) < [*whr] ‘large, great, greatly, very great, important, Great One (epithet of the Uraeus), magnate’; ‘groß, groß sein, Fürst’ (Faulkner 1962: 63, 64; Wb I 326, 327; Schipper 2005: 45); pꜣ wr ‘the chief’ (Breasted 1930: 525); wrt ‘demon’ (Caminos 1954: 538); ‘greatness of rank’ (Faulkner 1962: 63, 64); whꜣhꜣ ‘arrogance (?)’ (op. cit., 65) ~ Dem wr ‘groß, der Große’ (DG 42) ~ Heb ‫ יָ ִהיר‬yāhīr �� ‘proud, haughty’ (BDB 397) ~ Sab yhr ‘exaltation’ (Jamme 1962: 438) || Ar ‫ي�هر‬ yahr ‘locus amplus’ (Freytag 1837: 694)/yahar ‘endroit vaste’; wahara ‘commencer à s’amincir; devenir moins grand’ (DAF II 1614, 1637); ‫ و�هر‬wahar ‘blaze of the sun’ (Rabin 1951: 28); ‫ ��تي���هور‬tayhūr, pl ‫ ��تي��ا �هي��ر‬tayāhīr ‘vain, having a fond ‫�ذ‬ ‫ة‬ opinion of himself, proud’ (Lane 319); �‫ و و�هر‬ðū wahrah ‘imposant’ (Dozy II 845); ~ Oman wohr, f wohra ‘groß’ (Reinhardt 1894: 63) ~ Marazig uhér, fem. sing. wéhrat, inacc. yāhar ‘grossir beaucoup, engraisser exagérément et s’alourdir au point d’être incapable de se mouvoir (homme, animal)’ (Boris 1958: 682) ~ Palest wahret il-malāyče ‘die Erhabenheit der Engel’ (Schmidt & Kahle 1918: 12) ~ Egypt iywahhir ḥadd ‘jemanden erschrecken’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 509).

832. w-h-ǧ – 837. y-r-q

834

363

w-h-n

whn (MK) ‘escape, miss, fail, be undone of heart, be lacking’; ‘zerfallen (vom Bauwerk und vom Menschen)’ (Faulkner 1962: 65; Wb I 345) || Ar �‫ و�ه� ن‬wahana/ wahina ‘to be weak’ (Hava 1982: 898); ~ Aleppo wəhne ‘faible, débile’; awhan ‘plus fragile’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 911) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨wahan⟩ ‘weakness’ (Corriente 1997: 573) ~ Ḥassāniyya mhīn ‘lent’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 90). 835

w-y-ḥ

wḥꜣt (LE) ‘oasis, oasis-region’; ‘Oase’; wḥꜣtyw ‘oasis-dwellers’ (Faulkner 1962: 66; Wb I 347) ~ Dem wḥj ‘Oase’ (DG 97) ~ Copt ⲟⲩⲁϩⲉ ‘oasis’ (Crum 1939: 508b) ||

‫ اح�ا ت‬wāḥāt ‘oasis’ (Hava 1982: 846); Ar ‫ و‬wāḥ, pl � ‫و‬ ‫اح‬ ~ Hijaz wāḥa ‘oasis’ (Omar 1975: 278) ~ Iraq wāḥa ‘id.’ (van Ess 1918: 187) ~ Damascus wāḥa, pl -āt ‘id.’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 160) ~ Palest wāḥa, pl -āt ‘Oase’ (Bauer 1957: 222) ~ Egypt wāḥ, pl -āt ‘oasis’ (Spiro 1895: 632).

Y

836

y-ā

i҆ꜣ (interj.) (OK) ‘o’: i҆ꜣ i҆ḫ ‘was soll …’ (Wb I 25) || Ar ‫ ي�ا‬yā ‘O!’ [vocative particle] (Hava 1982: 900); ~ Palest yā ṣabi ‘o Knabe’ (Bauer 1957: 222) ~ Egypt ya ‘o’ (Spiro 1895: 653) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ya⟩ (vocative marker) (Corriente 1997: 575). 837

y-r-q

jꜣq.t (MK) ‘leeks, vegetables (in general)’; ‘Lauch, auch allgemein, Grünzeug, Gemüse’ (Faulkner 1962: 9; Wb I 34) ~ Akkad urqītu ‘vegetation’ (M. Cohen 2011: 225) ~ Heb ‫ יָ ר ֹק‬yārōq ‘green thing’ (BDB 438); cf. 800. w-r-q.

364 838

Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )

y-s-r

wsr (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘strong, powerful; a wealthy man’; ‘mächtig, stark sein, der Mächtige, reich; einflußreich, ranghoch’; wsrw ‘strength, power; oar’ (Faulkner 1962: 68, 69; Calice 1936: 138; Hannig 2003: 381; Hannig & Vomberg 1999: 415); wśr ‘die Starken’ [in anthroponym] (Altenmüller 1975: 291) || Ar ‫ي���سر‬ yasar/yusur ‘Reichtum’ (Wahrmund II 1234); cf. 2. ʾ-θ-r; ~ Palest yusra ‘Reichtum’ (Bauer 1957: 242) ~ Cairo yusr ‘prosperity, success, ease, comfort’ (Spiro 1895: 654) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨maysūr⟩ ‘wealthy, rich’ (Corriente 1997: 577). 839

y-m-n

i҆mn/wnmj (Pyr) ‘right(-hand); (noun) right(-side); the West’; wmnj ‘rechts, rechte Seite; die rechte Hand’ (Faulkner 1962: 21; DLE I 30; Wb I 85, 322): ḏw jm(tj) ‘westlicher Berg’ (Assmann 1969: 93) ~ Dem i҆mntj.w ‘die Westlichen’ (DG 31) ~ Copt ⲉⲙⲛⲧ ‘the west’ (Crum 1939: 56a) ~ Heb ‫ ִיָמין‬yāmīn ‘the right hand’

‫أ‬

(BDB 410) || Ar �‫ ي�مي�� ن‬yamīn, pl �‫ �ي�م� ن‬ʾaymun ‘the right hand, the right side’ (Hava 1982: 905); ~ Damascus yamīn ‘right hand’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 193) ~ Marazig ēmīn ‘côté droit, la droite’ (Boris 1958: 686) ~ Egypt yamīn/yimīn ‘right hand, right hand side’ (Spiro 1895: 605) ~ Djidjelli imīn ‘droit (à droit)’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 268).

Index Akkadian agannu 4 ʾaḫātu 5 aḫu 215 ada(m)mu 238 armannu 276 akburu 461 apāru 490 arādu 797 apû 822 aqru 824 būru 22 batāqu 23 burru 29 barāqu 30 buʾû 45 balālu 53 bunnu 56 bābu 58 bāru 62 būnu 65 dabû 219 dibīru 220 daraggu 228 dappu 230 duqququ 235 dannu 239 ešēru(m) 455 ebbūbu 707 garunnu 94 gašru 96 gišru/gušūru 98, 355 gaṣṣ 100 gamālu 106 gubāru 268 gaḫḫa 530 garāšu 584 ḫarīmtu 129 ḫanāpu 141

ḫabālu 174 ḫarābu 178, 179 ḫarāru 180 ḫarpu 183 ḫaṭû 189 ḫaṭṭu(m) 190 ḫuršānu 126 ḫuṭimmu 192 ḫummētu 210 ḫuzīru 211 ḫamqu 468 išdu 9 ibru 173 ilqu 463 karābu 32 karāṣu 539 karpu 542 kaṣāṣu 550 kitinnû 553 kāsu 573 kabāru 575 kibrītu 576 kabû 578 karšu 583 kusītu 594 kappu(m) 598 kalbu 601 libbu 618 lubbuku 620, 621 labāšu 624 libittu 627 labbu 628 lêku 647 mūšu(m) 14 marru 671 masdaru 672 mašku 677 mušṭu 679 miṭirtu 681 menû 693 mû 698

366

Index

neṣbettu 405 nīau 697 nabāḫu 708 naṭ/tāpu 714 naggāru 716 naḫālu 722 našru 727 naṣnaṣu 728 našāpu/nušuppu 745 napāṣu 746 nāru 752 nīku 762

šalāmu 329 šaman-šamni 335 šammu 338 šamnu 340 šebû 352 šarāṭa 365 šurrû 366 šaptu 381 šamṭu/samṭu 390 šūtu 398 šuātu 402 šapāḫu 515

pitiltu 504 parāḫu 510 parāsu 513 palāku 521 palāqu 522

ṣarāpu 314 ṣarru 411 ṣamādu 423 ṣamû 441

qebēru 529 qadurtu 532 quddušu 533 qatāpu 552 qēmu 564 qaštu 569 qarāšu 584 rabāku 626 reʾītu 260 sekēru/sakāru 322 simmiltu 331 samīdu 333 samû 341 susabinnu 353 samṭu 390 sapāḫu 515 šâlu 300 šagāmu 306 šuḫnu 310 šabbiṭu 312 šaṭāru(m) 316 šapāru 319 šappāru/sappāru 320 šakāku 323 šeršerru 325

tilu(m) 73 tinūru 76 turāḫu 420 ṭabāḫu 426 ullupu 491 unninu 474 uqnâtu 566 urqītu 800, 837 uzzu 803 (w)aṣû(m) 808 zarû 242 zapāru 243 zakāru 244 zību 245 zammāru 293

Amharic abbärä 173 afənčʾa 524 angät 477 däbäläl 222 dämməma 238 dəbəll 437

367

Index həmhəmm alä 772 kulalit 603 naffaš 745 qäṭṭäfä 552 qədd 531 qwärräsä 539 räfärräfä 266 raʾəy 247 sawr 81 zämära 293 zännäbä 675 zäyyära 295 žäbbäbä 84

Ancient Egyptian ꜣjs 246 ꜣʿʿ 643 ꜣwḥ 789 ꜣbj, ꜣbw 628 ꜣby.t 628, 629 ꜣbḫ 620 ꜣbd 27 ꜣfr(y) 12 ꜣmj 660 ꜣmm 648 ꜣh 17 ꜣḫ 653 ꜣgb 83 ꜣṯ.t 272 ꜣṯp 13 i҆ꜣ 836 i҆ꜣ.t 802 jꜣrrt 494 j3q 269 jꜣq.t 837 i҆ꜣkb 572 i҆ꜣd.t 797 jʿf 259 i҆ʿnw 475 i҆ʿr 466 jwj 282 i҆wf 113 i҆wtn 811

i҆wšš 654 i҆b 618 i҆bi҆ 652 i҆bꜣ 642 i҆ʿb 814 i҆p 822 i҆fd 11 i҆m 655, 773 jmꜣḫ 663 i҆mn 839 i҆mnḥ 54 i҆ni҆ 16 i҆nb 627 i҆nhmn 276 i҆nq 472 i҆ri҆ 7 i҆rw 247 i҆hj 18 i҆hm 695, 774 i҆ḫ 20 i҆sw 347 i҆zy 296 jzn.w 298 i҆sr 3 i҆sq 783 jqr 824 i҆kn 4 i҆trw 77 i҆d 827 i҆dmj.t 238 jdr 451 ʿꜣ 480 ʿꜣb 261, 487 ʿꜣbt 488 ʿꜣm 452 ʿꜣḏ 453 ʿi҆rt 466 ʿ(y)n 482 ʿwꜣ 476 ʿwꜣj 501 ʿwn 478 ʿwn.t 479 ʿbꜣ 443 ʿbʿ 444 ʿpy 477 ʿpšꜣy 213

368 ʿfj 259 ʿfn 490 ʿm 442, 464, 484 ʿmʿm 497 ʿmq 468 ʿmt 495 ʿn 473, 483 ʿnb 469 ʿnʿn 474 ʿnḫ 741 ʿnq 493 ʿnḏ 462 ʿrf 491 ʿršn 448 ʿrq/ʿqr 459, 463, 492 ʿḥꜣ 250 ʿh̠ m 252 ʿšꜣ 455 ʿkbr 461 ʿkk 596 ʿgꜣ 489 ʿgrt 447 ʿdt 449 ʿḏꜣ 456 ʿḏꜣw 450 ʿḏʿḏ 446 wꜣj 829 wꜣḫj 796 wꜣḏ 800 w-ʿ 787 wʿm.t 819 wbn 65, 780 wbḫ 779 wbg 59 wbd.t 830 wnwn 831 wnwt 19 wnm 828 wnḏ.wt 825 wndwt 826 wr 833 wrm 801 wrḏ 799 whn 834 wḥꜣ.t 148, 149, 835 wḥy.t 168

Index wḥʿ.t 788 wḥś 790 wḫꜣ 792, 793 wsy 806 wsr 2, 838 wšꜣ 798 wšd 729 wgꜣ 786 wgyt 785 wt/wjt 436 wd 795 wdi҆ 6 wdp 813 wdf 231 wḏꜣ 810 wḏi҆ 808 wḏb 422, 823 wḏnw 784 wḏḥ 809 bꜣ 62 bꜣj 53 bꜣbꜣ 58 bꜣḥ 60 bꜣq 30 bꜣk 34 bjꜣw 22 bʿj 45 bʿbʿ 41, 42 bʿr 25 bʿḥ 63 pśg 35 bnn 55, 56, 57 bnr 29, 56 bnd 51 brbr 53 brk 31, 32 brk.t 33 brg 50 bḥn 708 bḥs 24 bḥz 26 bh̠ bh̠  172 bš 36 bkꜣ 48, 49 bt 64 btꜣ 40

369

Index btk 23 bddw-kꜣ 39 pꜣ 511 py 523 pr 528 pr.t 820 prḫ 510, 513 pḥꜣ 508 pḥḏ 507, 517 psg 35 pzḫ 516 pšš 505 ptt 502 ptr 504 pḏś 518 fꜣj 264 fꜣw 265 fn 526 fnḏ 524, 525 fgn 506 fd 232 fdq 503 m- 21 m 661, 662 mꜣʿ 52, 689 mꜣw 247 mꜣfd.t 527 mꜣḥ 667 mꜣs 700 mꜣz 672 mi҆w 697 mi҆ḫ 21 mw 698 mn 691 mnj 690 mnʿ 682 Mnw 693 mnm.t 756 mnmn.t 701 mnḫ 687 mnqbj.t 268 mnḏ 685 mr 669, 670, 671, 673 mrt 669

mrḥ 153, 251, 273, 666 mḥyt 61 mḥn 165 mḥḏrt 486 mḫr 206 msw.t 14, 678 mśj.t 14 msnḥ 342 msḥ/mzḥ 74 mśḥ 676 msq 677 msḏi҆ 332 mšrw 274 mkꜣ 684 mkḥꜣ 604 mkrr 683 mkdr 91 mgrt 500 mt 699 mtr 681, 781 mdd 664 mḏḥ 132, 136 ni҆ 757 nwyt 758 nwy 759 nʿ/nʿy 743 nʿš 257 nwd 724 nb 706 nbꜣ.t 709 nbj.t 707 nbḏ 619 nbd.t 622 nbḏbḏ 37 npḏ 746 nf 470, 747 nfj 15 nfnf 266 nfnfn 644 nfrw 744 nmj 705 nmt 625 nn 704 nhp 650, 651, 710 nḥm 751 nhm 754

370 nhr 752 nḥb 632 nḫb 721 nsb 635 nspw 726 nss 725 nsns 728 nḫwj 723 nḫt 733 nśr 730 nš 638, 639, 731, 732 nšꜣ 761 nšp 745 nšm.t 734, 735 nqr(w) 722 nk 762 njk 750 ntꜣ 715 ntj 711 ntf 714 ntš 712, 713 nṯṯ 582, 646 ndb 641 ndfdf 739 nḏ 718, 738 nḏm 742 nḏr 716 nḏs 740 ri҆ḫ 20 rʿ 258 rw/rwj 657 rwḏ 256 rbk 626 rbš 624 rmi҆ 275 rnpi҆ 248 rnn 277 rhb 649 rhn 278 rḫj.t 260 rqw 645 rk 270 rkḥ 128 rd 254, 255 rdmt 249 rḏi҆ 253 rḏw 439

Index hjw 776 hb 763 hbq 764 hmhm 772 hms 771 hnjnj 775 hr 768 hrp 769 hd 765 hdm 766 ḥꜣ 165 ḥꜣj 454 ḥꜣm 129 ḥꜣḥꜣ 146 ḥꜣś.t 126 ḥꜣg 121 ḥꜣti҆ 149 ḥyt 171 ḥw 166 ḥww 791 ḥwrw 163 ḥb 162 ḥbś 117 ḥfn 140 ḥmḏ 155 ḥmr 152 ḥmṯ 154 ḥn 160 ḥn.t 170 ḥnb 118 ḥnn 161 ḥnsk 131 ḥnk 159 ḥnkk/ḥngg 158 ḥr 124, 125, 147, 164, 466 ḥri҆ḫ 466 ḥri҆t 177 ḥrj.t-š 169 ḥśb 134 ḥsq 592 ḥzꜣ 130 ḥzi҆ 123 ḥqꜣ 143 ḥqr 144 ḥkꜣw 145 ḥtp(w) 120 ḥtm 137

371

Index ḥtr 119 ḥdb 226 ḥdj 127, 134 ḥḏ 135, 138, 809 ḥḏn 133 ḫꜣj 204 ḫꜣʿ 199 ḫꜣwt 214 ḫꜣb 197 ḫꜣm 185 ḫꜣḫꜣ/ḫjḫj 198 ḫw 215 ḫbr 173 ḫbn 174 ḫbd 44 ḫpr 201 ḫfʿ 195 ḫfꜣꜣ.t 139 ḫm 208 ḫmm 156 ḫmw 210 ḫmṯ 154 ḫny 500 ḫnp 141 ḫnm 209 ḫnms 203 ḫnm.t.t 150 ḫnr 129 ḫnz 212 ḫnš 188 ḫnt 192 ḫr/ḫrḫr 180 ḫrp 184, 194, 200 ḫśr 187 ḫt 190, 401 ḫtj 189 ḫti҆ 191 ḫtj.w 193 ḫtm/ḫtmt 175 ḫḏb 426 ḫḏr 211 h̠ ꜣp.t 183 h̠ ꜣk 202 H̠ nmw 499 h̠ rdt 182

h̠ s(y) 186 h̠ db 176 s-(caus.) 299 s.t 10 sꜣ 348 śꜣ.t 345 sꜣr.w 8 sꜣb 311 sꜣḥ 313 sꜣr 230 sꜣq 328 sjw 402 sjm 341 śʿj 288 sʿr 374 sw.t 343 śwt 398 sb.t 404 sb3 350, 407 sbi҆ 303 sbḥ 301 sbq 346 śp.t 381 spr 319 spꜣ 380 spd 318 sf 326 sft 349 śfj 320 sfṯ 321 smw 338 smj 340 śmn 339 smnw 331 śmr 334 śmkt 337 sn/snw 80 śnb 329 snbb 330 snṯ 324 snḏ 417 srf 267 śrf 314 śrḫ 386 śrwḫ 279 śrqj 369

372 sḥwy 167 śḫꜣ 214 sḫ.t 344 sḫn 310 sh̠ b 307 śšr 364 śšd 375 śg 383 sg 384 sqr 356 sk 385 śkꜣ 323 s.t 10 śtf 371 śtr 316 sd 9 śd.t 305 sḏ 370 sḏm 336 zꜣ 241, 295 zꜣb 245, 285 zꜣr.w 8 zbꜣ 293 zp 290 zmꜣ 294 znb.t 286 zḫ 283 zh̠ m 284 zkr 415 šꜣ 395 šꜣʿ 366, 367, 368 šꜣb 362 šꜣm 156, 157 šꜣšꜣ.t 325 šʿ 376 šʿr 372 šʿrt 373 šʿd 365 šw 400 šwꜣ 216 šwty 396 šbi҆ 394 šbb 351 šb.w 352 šbn 353 šbd 312

Index špy 196 šm 157, 680 šmm 156 šmʿw 387 šmś 389 šmšm.t 335 šn 378 šnʿ 391 šnʿ.w 379 šnṯ 392 šnḏ 390 šr.t 181, 372 šrr 363 šḥq 308 šzp 361 šgr 322 štꜣ 304 štm 354 šd 359 šdi҆ 79, 358 šdj 360 šdyt 397 šdḥ 357 šḏ 371 šḏ.t 399 qʿḥ 616 qb(y) 579 qmḥ 564 qmꜣ 529, 565 qmd 605 qnj.t 566 qrj 111 qrmt 105 qrr.t 568 qḏ 99 kꜣbt 595 kꜣp 578, 597 kꜣmw 586 kꜣmn 609 kbrt 576 kp 598 kfꜣ 600 kfj 599 km 608 knm 601 kns.t 583

373

Index krś 584 khꜣ 567 khb 612 ks 593 ktw.t 581 ktt 580 kṯ 573 kṯm 548 kṯt 594 gꜣb 92, 535 gwꜣ 571 gwn 114 gwš 569 gwg 570 gbj 84, 485 gbb 82 gmw 496 gmwt 498 gmḥt 87 gmḥ 90 gmgm 116 gr 95 grn 94 grg 543 gḥś 89 gś 98 gśm 306 tꜣ, tjtj 812 tb.t 66 tbn 429 tf 71 tfn 432 tm 75 tnm 68 twr 433 tr 430 tryꜣ 69 trr 76 thj 78 tḥs 229 tš 434 tkk/tktk 72 ṯꜣj 617 ṯꜣb 614

ṯꜣm 585, 606, 607 ṯꜣmś 547 ṯbṯb 577 ṯpḥ.t 613 ṯmꜣ 575 ṯnf 291 ṯnf.t 610 ṯnn 73 ṯrt 315 ṯḥn 602 ṯḥr 309 ṯs 587, 588, 589 ṯsm 590 ṯkr 244 dꜣ/dꜣdꜣ 237 dꜣj.t 438 dꜣf 243 dwꜣ.w 424 dwn 435 dbꜣ 220 db(y) 219 dbn 86, 222, 437 dbn.t 221 dbḥ.w 240 dbdb 427 dp.w 230 dmḏ 416 dni҆t 239 drp 263 dšr 355, 382 dq.w 235 dqrw 233 dqr 234 dgꜣ 228 dgj 225 dgyt 224 ḏꜣj 112, 418 ḏꜣyt 104 ḏꜣf 440 ḏꜣb 421 ḏꜣm(w) 292 ḏꜣd 115, 287 ḏꜣḏꜣ 101 ḏꜣḏꜣt 102 ḏʿ 425, 445

374 ḏʿq 289 ḏw 86 ḏb 109 ḏbꜣ 85, 106, 419 ḏbʿ 405 ḏbʿ.t 428 ḏbn 28 ḏbg 406 ḏfꜣ 414 ḏfḏf 431 ḏpḥ 70, 413 ḏft 100 ḏmʿ 441 ḏmd 423 ḏnw 242 ḏnb 107 ḏnḥ 108 ḏnḏn 109 ḏnd 103 ḏr 411 ḏrʿ 412 ḏrt 410 ḏḥr 420 ḏs 88 ḏsr.w 96 ḏsr 97 ḏšr 355 ḏ.t 297 ḏd 409 ḏdb 457 ḏdf.t 408

Aramaic ʿaðrā 451 ʾaggānā 4 baʿl 43 dappā 230 dīqlā 233 dlʿ 236 gamgēm 116 gram 546 ḥnkh 159 ḥuṭrā 190 karmā 671 kūbā 614

Index lwš 654 mgmr 104 nṭaf 739 ntp 714 ʾnh 474 parper 511 pryh 514 pṣaḥ 517 qāmōr/qamrā 607 qarqēr 537 salmā 292 šarbīṭā 312 ṣəpīrā 320 smk 337 ṣrp/srp 314 šṭf 370 šṭr 316 saypā ššbyn 353 tannūrā 76 ʾukkāpā 13 zarbūbīt 285

Coptic ⲁⲗⲉ 466 ⲁⲗⲕⲉ 492 ⲁⲗⲟⲩ 481 ⲁⲡⲁ/ⲁⲃⲃⲁ 1 ⲁⲙⲉ 452 ⲁⲙⲣⲏϩⲉ 153 ⲁⲥⲟⲩ 347 ⲁϣⲏ 455 ⲁϩⲟⲙ 774 ⲁϩⲱⲙ 252 ⲁⲩⲁⲛ 656 ⲃⲁⲁⲃⲉ 42 ⲃⲁϩ/ⲡⲁϩ 60 ⲃⲉⲣϭⲟⲟⲩⲧ 33 ⲃⲉⲉⲃⲉ 41 ⲃⲏⲃ 58 ⲃⲟⲕⲓ 48 ⲃⲟⲗ 29 ⲃⲣⲃⲣ 53 ϫ(ⲉ)ⲙⲡⲉϩ 70 ϫⲏⲣⲉ 242 ϫⲛⲟϥ 610

375

Index ϫⲛⲁϩ 108 ϫⲟⲉⲓⲧ 297 ⲉⲓⲃⲉ 652 ⲉⲕⲓⲃⲉ 595 ⲉⲗⲙⲓ/ϩⲁⲗⲱⲙ 150 ⲉⲗⲟⲟⲗⲉ 494 ⲉⲙⲟⲟⲩⲉ 697 ⲉⲥⲟⲟⲩ 402 ⲉϩⲉ/(ⲉ)ϩⲉ/ⲁϩⲉ/ⲁϩⲁ 18 ⲉⲡϣⲉ 213 ⲑⲟϥⲧⲉϥ 431 ⲕⲁⲕⲉ 596 ⲕⲁⲗⲱⲡⲟⲩ/ⲕⲗⲃⲁⲩⲗⲉ 601 ⲕⲁϣ 549 ⲕⲏⲃⲓ 579 ⲕⲟⲣⲕⲁⲥⲓ 560 ⲕⲣⲱⲙ, ⲕⲱⲣⲙ 105 ⲕⲣⲟⲩⲣ 537 ⲕⲱⲃ 555 ⲕⲱⲣϫ 539 ⲕⲱⲧⲉ 532 ⲕⲱⲧϥ 552 ⲗⲁⲥ 637 ⲗⲱϫϩ 647 ⲙⲉⲣⲉϩ 273 ⲙϫⲱⲗ/ⲉⲙϫⲱⲗ 38 ⲙⲟⲥⲧⲉ, ⲙⲉⲥⲧⲉ, ϥ. ⲙⲉⲥⲧⲏ 332 ⲙⲟⲩⲣ 670 ⲙϣⲧⲱⲧⲉ 679 ⲛⲁ/ⲛⲁⲓ 743 ⲛⲁⲓⲕ; ⲛⲟⲕⲛⲉⲕ 762 ⲛⲉϩⲡⲉ 651 ⲛⲏⲃⲧⲉ 622 ⲛⲟⲩⲧϥ 714 ⲛⲟϣⲣ 727 ⲛⲟⲩϣⲡ 745 ⲛⲟⲩϩⲃ 632 ⲟⲟⲩϣ 654 ⲟⲥⲙ/ϫⲟⲥⲉⲙ 306 ⲟⲩⲃⲁϣ 779 ⲟⲩⲱϣⲥ 805 ⲟⲩⲛⲁⲙ 828 ⲟⲩⲁϩⲉ 835 ⲡⲁϣ 508 ⲡⲟⲗⲕ 522 ⲡⲏⲓ 523 ⲡⲱⲣϣ 513

ⲡⲱⲧⲥ 518 ⲡⲱϣ 505 ⲣⲁⲧ 254 ⲣⲓⲙⲉ 275 ⲣⲱⲕϩ 128 ⲥⲁⲙⲓⲧ 333 ⲥⲁⲧ 9 ⲥⲓⲃ 404 ⲥⲓⲃⲟⲩⲓ 407 ⲥⲕⲁⲓ 323 ⲥⲗϥ/ⲥⲛⲟⲩϥ 326 ⲥⲙⲟⲩⲛⲉ 339 ⲥⲏϥⲉ 349 ⲥⲟⲣⲧ/ⲥⲁⲣⲉⲧ 373 ⲥⲡⲟⲧⲟⲩ/ⲥⲫⲟⲧⲟⲩ 381 ⲥⲣⲁϥ/ⲥⲓⲣⲉϥⲉ 314 ⲥⲱⲟⲩⲃⲉⲛ 67 ⲥⲱⲧⲙ̅ 737 ⲥⲱⲧϥ 370 ⲧⲁⲗ 73 ⲧⲁϥ 71 ⲧⲣⲣⲉ 69 ⲧⲱⲗⲉⲃ/ⲧⲁⲗⲉϥ/ⲧⲱⲗⲙ 68 ⲫⲉⲗ 528 ⲱⲡ 822 ⲱⲣ(ⲉ)ⲃ 491 ϣⲁⲁⲣ 317 ϣⲁⲙⲁⲣ 388 ϣⲃⲱⲧ 312 ϣⲉⲙⲏⲣ 205 ϣⲏⲛ 378 ϣⲙϣⲉ 389 ϣⲛⲟϣ 188 ϣⲟⲉⲓⲧ, ⲉϣⲟⲉⲓⲧ 214 ϣⲟⲙ 157 ϣⲟⲛⲧⲉ 390 ϣⲱϣ 198 ϣⲱϩⲃ 393 ϣⲱⲧ 396 ϥⲟⲣϥⲉⲣ 511 ϩⲉ 776 ϩⲉⲙϩⲉⲙ 772 ϩ(ⲉ)ⲣⲙⲁⲛ/ⲗⲉϩⲙⲉⲛ/ⲉⲣⲙⲁⲛ 276 ϩⲓⲕ 145 ϩⲕⲟⲉⲧ 142 ϩⲙϫ/ϩⲙⲟϫ/ϩⲟⲙϫ 155 ϩⲙⲙⲉ 156

376 ϩⲟ(ⲉ)ⲓⲣⲉ/ϩⲟⲏⲣⲉ 177 ϩⲟϥ 519 ϩⲱⲃⲥ 117 ϩⲱⲣ 768 ϩⲱⲣⲡ 769 ϭⲟⲟⲩⲛⲉ 114 ϭϩⲟⲥ 89

Demotic ꜣbj 652 ꜣrbj 452 ꜣllj 494 ꜣhm 774 i҆sw 347 i҆ʿr 466 i҆mntj.w 839 i҆ḫj 401 i҆sw 347 i҆qr 824 i҆tn 811 ʿꜣ 480 ʿwj 501 ʿm 464 ʿn 473 ʿnḫt 471 ʿh̠ m 252 ʿrf 491 ʿl 465 ʿlw 481 ʿlq 492 ʿqm 460 ʿḏ 456 wḫꜣ 793 wʿ 787 wbn 65 wbš 779 wnw.t 19 wnm 828 wr 833 wḥj 835 wsr 2

Index wsḫ 805 wggj 785 wt 808 wtj 795 wty 6 bn 56 bnn 57 bl/bnr 29 brkt 33 bḥs 24 bḥz 26 bk 34, 48 bš 36 plg 521 pḫ 508 pk 520 fnt 524 mj 697 mn 691, 698 mnmn 831 mnḫ 687 mr/ml 670 mlh̠ /mrh̠  633 mrḥ 666 msḥ 74 mšʿ 680 mtr 681 mḏ(w)l 38 mḏh̠  132 njf 747 nhp 651 nhm 751, 754 nḫj 743 nšr 727 nk/q 762 nqr 748 nḏ 718 rkḥ 128 lkḥ 647 rs 637 rt 254

377

Index lꜣbj 628 lbš 624 ls 637 lkḥ 647 hwj 776 htm 766 hmhm 772 ḥjq 145 ḥwy 171 ḥꜣs.t 126 ḥnk 159 ḥr.t 177 ḥsb.t 134 ḥr.t 177 ḥlm 151 ḥtr 119 ḫj 218 ḫꜣʿ 199 ḫꜣs.t 126 ḫwj 215 ḫbr 173 ḫm 208 ḫnm 209 ḫnš 188 ḫrb 179 h̠ mm 156 h̠ nm 203 sjb 404 sjf 349 sʿrt 373 sp 381 smn 339 smr 334 sms 388 smt 737 sbt 312 snf 326 stf 369 stm (r) 737 skꜣ 323 šʿr 317 šʿrt 372

šʿl 377 šw 216 šbn 353 šbt 312 šnb 353 šnb.t 351 šm 157 šmr 388 šms 389 šnʿ 391 šnn 378 šnt.t 390 šnʿ 390 štm 354 štf 370 qrj 544 qrp 541 qrft 542 qrr/qll 537 qrš 538 qlh̠  556 qdy 531 kꜣm 586 kʿkʿ 596 kp 598 krb 105 gbj 84 gḥs.t 89 gsm 306 gš 549 gtn 553 twn 435 tb.t 66 tbʿ 405 tbn 437 tpḥ 613 tm 75 tmt 423 tryꜣ 69 ḏꜣḏꜣ 191 ḏp 230 ḏmpḥ 70 ḏnf 291, 610

378 ḏnḥ 108 ḏrj.t 242 ḏd 409

Geʿez ʾadāmāwi/ʾadim 238 ʿanaqa 472 dafdafa 230 gānen 109 gərāb 535 ḥanaka 159 lakafa 626 lāʿləʿa 643 lamaṣa 688 madab 623 masya 14, 678 nakaya 750 natafa/nattafa 714 ʿof 477 ʾoho/ʾəho 18 qāḥqəḥa 530 qarafa 541 qaṭafa 552 rəḫba 261 sansala 325 tazāwwara 295 zäfän 291 zammara 293 zanma/zanām 675 zarawa 242 zəʾb 245

Hebrew ʾābā 1 ʾēšel 3 ʾāzar 8 bittēq 23 baʿal 43 bāʿā 45 migdāl 91 gōren 94

Index gāšaš 98 gepet 100 gargeret 115 gešem 306 gerem 546 deber 220 dōmen 223 dāḥā 227 dārag 228 dap(p) 230 deqel 233 dāqar 234 hāyā 776 mizbēaḥ 240 zəwāʿāh 288 zāmar 293 ʾāzal 296 ḥābaš 117 ḥebel 118 ḥāgag 121 ḥōreš 126 ḥātam, ḥōtam 127 ḥērem 129 ḥāṣēr 135 ḥāṣab 136 ḥōp 139 ḥāqar 142 ḥōq 143 ḥāmōr 152 ḥāmas 154 ḥām 156, 157 ḥānak, ḥānīk 159 ḥānān 160 ḥawā 168 ḥābēr 173 ḥēbel 174 ḥātam, ḥōtam 175 ḥārēy 177 ḥarēb 179 ḥōrep 183 ḥāṭā 189 ḥōṭer 190 ḥōṭem 192 ḥămīr 205

379

Index ḥăzīr 211 ḥippūšīt 213 ḥāwā 791 ṭebaḥ 426 ṭipṭēp 431 yeter 781 ḥāwā 791 yārad 797 yāʿēh 817 yāqār 824 yāhīr 833 yārōq 837 yāmīn 839 kətōnet 553 kōs 573 kabbīr 575 kārēš 583 kerem 586 kəsūt 594 kippēr 597 kap(p) 598 kilyāh 603 lēbāb 618 ləbēnāh 627 lāḥam 633 leḥī 634 lāšōn 637 lāḥak 647 lahab 649 lāḥaṣ 719 mōaḥ 663 middāh 664 māraḥ 666 māṭār 681 Mənī 694 mētār 781 nābaḥ 708 nātar 715 naggār 716 nešer 727 nāṭāp 739 nāʿīm 742

nāšap 745 nappāṣ 746 nākā 750 nāhār 752 nəhāmāh 754 nimnēm 756 sāṭar 304 sullām 331 ʿagālāh 447 ʿadāšāh 448 ʿādāʾ 449 ʿeder 451 ʿărab 452 ʿăqal 458 ʿăkbār 461 ʿăliyōtăw 466 ʿēmeq 468 ʿănāq 472 ʿānīn 476 ʿāyir 480 ʿawīl 481 ʿayin 482 ʿārēb 487 ʿālap 491 ʿālal 494 pātat 502 patīl 504 pōl 528 paḥ(ḥ) 508 pāraḥ 510 pāraš 513 pereʾ 514 paṭṭīš 518 pālag 521 pāṣaḥ 512 pāraḥ 510 ṣārar 411 ṣemed 423 ṣaḥ(ḥ) 809 ṣāmēʾ 441 ṣāʿaq 289 ṣāpīr 320 ṣārar 410, 411, 438

380 qābar 529 qādōš 533 qidmāh 534 qāraṣ 539 qālap 541 qesem 548 qaš(š) 549 qāṣaṣ 550 qāṭap 552 qāpaṣ 554 qāṭal 555 qelaʿ 559 qālal 562 qemaḥ 564 qešet 569 rōš 246 rabad, rōbed 246, 623 rōtem 249 rāʿaš 257 rāʿēb 261 rāpap 266 rōmaḥ 273 rānan 277 reyq 281 rāwāh 282 rūm 801 śābaʿ 352 śāraṭ 365 śārap 440 šāwā 347 šōr 81 šeḥīn 310 šaḥaq 308 šəḥīn 310 šappūd 318 šāpak 321 miškān 324 šemen 340 šāmayim 341 šōʾāh 343 šūr 345 šōq 346 šāwā 347 šāḥaṭ 357 šādad 358 šāṭap 370

Index śēʿīr 374 šammāš 389 šiṭṭāh 390 šāṭ 396 šālōm 330 šeleg 79 śārap 314 sātar 304 tannūr 76

Modern South Arabian Mahrī farʾ 514 kŏb/koub/kalb 601 nēwət/mənwōt 759 nōb/nəyōb 706 qərūṣ 539 śeqqāt 384 šēt 9 ufā 822 zəfōn 291 Ḥarsūsī ʾafōd 11 ʾahā 18 b-ayámb ḏ 106 berr 29 deyāyeh 224 enṭef 739 fek 520 fer 511 gawf 113 genni/yann 109 gerō 95 ḥayr 480 ḥeḍīreh 135 ḥerōm 129 leġwe 643 malleh/melāl 690 meleḥáw 634 menewōt 759 merriyye 670 mesér 348 nehēm 252 nekōḥ 530

381

Index neyōk 762 senselét 325 sēw 347 šīt 9 ṭawl 435 wagh 785 Jibbālī elḥéf 630 enké 750 flg 521 gəbhét 87 gəbhέt 87 ġerq 489 gέnaḥ 108 ḥazē 123 ḥell 147 nəhmít 252 nɛhɛb 751 rinn 277 Soqoṭri bēkir 48 defeh 230 éfe 822 gamgamah 496 ganḥ 108 ḥrm 129 ʾílbib 618 inṭef 739 kalb 601 ngy 718 nohór 752 nsf 745 šendér 299 śéqah 384 zaʿáq/saʿáq 289 žaðér 532

North Arabian Taymanic khf 613 rʿy 260 ʿyr 480

Thamudic ḥbr 173 strt 304 ʾx 215

Sabaean bḥr 25 bḥt 60 bkr 48 bqrm 46 bʾr 22 brk.t 33 brk 32 brq 30 brr 29 bṣl 38 ðbḥ 240 ðkr 244 ð̣ mʾw 441 ðnm 675 dqqm 235 ðr 241 gml 106 ġmm 496 gnb 107 grm 92 grnh 94 ġwr 501 gyl 112 hḫfr 194 ḫlf 200 ḫlt 204 hnʾ 775 hnjnj 775 ḫrf 183 ḥrm 129 hšbʿ 352 hstr 304 hwry 802 ḥyrt 169 krf 542 kśwy 594 mṭrn 681 mw 698 ʿnb 469

382 nky 750 qṣm 99 qwr 568 rfd 263 rʾs 246 rʿt 260 š bn 402 šnʿ 391 šʿrm 372 ʿšrt 455 šrʿw 367 sṭr(m, n)  316 šwbn 394 ṭhr(m)  433 wʿb 814 wfy 822 ʾwʿl(n)  816 yfʿ 264 yhr 833 yhrwy(n)  282

Safaitic bġ 45 bḥrt 25 bkrt 48 bn 65 ðʾb 245 ðfr 243, 440 ġmt 496 ǧθ 88 ḫbl 174 ḫmr 206 ḥwb/ḥyb 162 kmd 605 kmn 609 krm 585 ll 659 ʿly 466 mny 694 mr 669 mt 699 my 698 nfrt 744 ngn 109

Index nǧr 717 nǧy 718 nhb 751 nm 756 ʿnn 474 ʾnsf 745 nʿy 743 nyk 762 ʿr 480 ʿrḍ 453 s¹rn 348 s¹tr 304 s²ʿr 374 s²tky 385 sḫr 309 smʿ 336 smw 341 ṭhr 433 twḫy 215 wḥš 790 wʿl 816 ʿwr 476 wrd 797 zmrt 293 zt 297 θr 81

Syriac būrā 62 ḥənā 161 ḥabrā 173 ḥuṭrā 190 ḥalḥal 198 dappā 230 rmeš 274 ṣlem/ṣalmā 292 šūmārā 388 ʿəṣā 456 paḥḥā 508 plag 521 mṭar 681 haddem 766 hawfā 778 yaθrā 781

383

Index Ugaritic uzr 8 brq 30 brk 31 brkt/y 33 grn 94 grgr 115 ḥbl 118 ḥðy 123 ḥfn 141 ḥbr 173 db 230

dqq 235 dn 239 lrmn 276 gšm 306 šrp 314 drḫ 420 ġlp 491 qr 537 kst 594 lḥk 647 nʿmt 742 nky 750